Skip to main content

Full text of "01 The New Testament in Indonesian INdonesie Asia India Perjanjian Baru - Alkitab"

See other formats 


Le  Nouveau  Testament 


Les  quatre  Evangiles  -  (la  vie  de  Jesus  de 

Evangile  seion  Matthieu 

Evangile  seion  Marc 

Evangile  seion  Luc 

Evangile  seion  Jean 

les  Actes  des  Apotres, 

Epitre  aux  R  o  m  a  i 
Premiere  epitre  aux  Corinthiens 
Deuxieme  epitre  aux  Corinthiens 
Epitre 
Epitre  ai_..  _ 
Epitre  aux  Philippiens 
Epitre  aux  Coli 
Premiere  epitre  aux  Tl 
Deuxieme  epitre  a 

Premiere  epitre  a  Timothee 

Deuxieme  epitre  a  Timothee 

Epitre  a  Tite 

Epitre  a  Phile"""- 

L' Epitre  ai 


iere  epitre  de  Pierre 
Deuxieme  epitre  de  Pierre 

liere  epitre  de  Jean 
Deuxieme  epitre  de  Jean 
Troisieme  epitre  de  Jean 

Epitre  de  Jude 


the  :ncew 


THENEWTestament 


03-  Gospel  of  Luke 
04  -  Gospei  of  John 
n5  -  Acls  of  Apostles, 

06  -  Epistle  to  the  Ro 

07  -  First  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians 

08  -  Second  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians 
"  1-  Galatians 

10-  Ephesians 


14  -  II  Thessalonian 
15-1  Timothy 

16-  II  Timothy 

17-  Titus 


THE  BIBLE 


INJIL  I  MUQADDAS, 

ya'se, 

HAMiKE  KHUDAWAND  AUB  KAJAT-DEKEWALE 

YISU'  MASIH 

KA    NAYA    'AHD-NAMA: 

13    KA   TABJVMA    YtSASi    ZOHaN  SE   ZUbAs   I  CRtiU   MEN 
BAKaBAS  TBAJ.-6I.ATT0S  COWKITTfiJE  8K  EIT^  <3AyA, 

jibb  tas,h1h  kakkk  ab  riscirwis 

BAH   CE'IIAPWA'rE   HAIN. 


THE  BRITISH  A^D  FORE1GN  BIBLE  SOCIETY. 
1878. 


INJIL  I  MUQADDAS 

MATI  KP  INJIL. 
MARQUS  KI  INJIL. 
LU'QA  KI  INJIL. 
YU'HANNA  KI'  INJIL. 


RASULON  KE  A'AMA'L. 

PULUS  RASUL  KA'  KHATT 
RU'MION  KO. 


PU'LUS  EASU'L  KA'  PAHLA' 
KHATT  gUKINTI'ON  KO. 

PU'LUS  EASU'L  KA'  DUSEA' 
KHATT  QUEINTION  KO. 

PU'LUS  EASU'L  KA  KHATT 
GALATION  KO. 


PU'LUS  EASU'L  KA  KHATT 
AFSlON  KO. 


PU'LUS  EASU'L  KA  KHATT 
FILIPPION  KO. 


PULUS  EASUL  KA'  KHATT 
CJULUSSION  KO. 


PU'LUS   EASU'L   KA'  DU'SEA 
KHATT  TASSALUNIOJ'ON  KO. 

PU'LUS   EASU'L  KA  DU'SEA 
KHATT  TASSALUNIOJ'ON  KO. 

PU'LUS  EASU'L  KA*  PAHLA 
KHATT  TIMTAUS  KO. 

PU'LUS  EASU'L  KA'  DU'SEA 
KHATT  TIMTAUS  KO. 

PU'LUS  EASU'L  KA  KHATT 

TITUS  KO. 

PU'LUS  EASU'L  KA  KHATT 

FILEMU'N  KO. 

TBEANI'ON  KO  KHATT. 
YA'QU'B  KA  KHATT  I  'A'MM. 


PATRUS 
KA  PAHLA'  KHATT  I  'AMM. 

PATEUS 
KA'  DU'SRA'  KHATT  I  'AMM. 


YU'HANNA 
KA  PAHLA'  KHATT  I  'AMM. 

Y'UHANNA 
KA'  DU'SRA'  KHATT. 

YU'HANNA  KA  TI'SRA  KHATT. 


YAHU'DA'H 
KA'    KHATT  I  'AMM. 

YU'HANNA'  FAQIH  KE 
MUKASHAFAT  KI  KITAB. 


INJIL  I  MUQADDAS, 

TA'.VTB, 

HAMARE  KHUDAWAND  AUB  NAJA'T-DENEWA'LE 

YISU'  MASIH 

K  A    NA  YA    'AHD-NiMA: 


1S    KA   TABJUMA.   TlSsist    ZCBAN   6E   ZCTAK   I  UR&t   KEN 
BASiEAS  THANST.ATIOK  CCIMM1TTEE  BK  KITA*  GATA, 

j  isis  tas,hIh  kahke  ab  FAScnwfs 

BAR   CHHAPWiTE   HAIK, 


THE  BHITISH  A^D  FORE1GN  BIBLE  SOC7ETY. 

1878. 


MATI   KI'  INJI'L. 


T  BA'B. 

\TiSI'"   Masih, 


DAta 


X     Abirahim  ki  nasabnama. 

2  Abiraham  «e  Iz,hiq  midi  hoa ; 
aur  Iz,hiq  se  Ya'qub  paida  hiti ;  aur 
Ya'qub  se  Yahiidih  aur  uh  ko  bhiii 
pai  di  h  u  e  ; 

3  Aur  Yahridih  so  Phiras  aur  Zi- 
rah Tamar  ke  pet  kg  paida  hiie ;  aur 
Phiras  8e  Hasrom  paidi  hiia,  aur  Has- 
rim  i  si*  A'rim  paida  hi'ia  ; 

4  Aur  A'rira  se  'Aininadib  paidi 
hiti ;  aur  'Aminadab  se  Nahsiin  paidi 
hiia;  aur  Nahsiin  so  Salmon  paidi 
U* ; 

5  Aur  Salmon  so  BoV.  IlAhah  ku 

S!t  «j  paidi  Mi ;  aur  Bo'az  ao  'Obed, 
ut  ke  pet  so  paidi  Inti;  aur  'Ubed 
86  Yassi  paida  IhU  ; 

O'  Aur  Yassi  se  T)AAd  baduhih  pai- 
di hiii ;  aur  Daud  badshah  se  Sulai- 
man, uh  so  jo  U'riyih  ki  jorii  thi, 
paida  hiid  ; 

7  Aur  Sulaiman  se  Rahabi'Am  pai- 
di  hiii;    aur  Rahabi'im  se   Abiyib 

E  ahli  htii ;  aur  Abiylh  se  Asi  paidi 
fii; 

8  Aur  Asi  se  Yfthta&t  paidi  hiii; 
aur  Yaluisafat  ao  YurAm  paidi  hiii ; 
aur  Ydrim  se  'Uzziyih  paidi  hui; 

0  Aur  'Uzziyih  se  Yutirn  paidi 
Inti  ;  aur  Yiitim  se  A'khaz  paidi  hdi; 
aur  A'khaz  se  Ili/.uiyah  paidi  hui; 

LO  Aur  Hiwpyih  ko  Munassi  paidi 
hui;  aur  Munassi  se  Aoiiin  paidi 
aur   Arrniii   se   Ydsiyih   paidi 


jua  ke  bhai,  jis  waqt  Bibul  ko   uth 

ibu  i  ,jaun  para,  paidi  hde ; 


Aur  Bibul  ko  uth  jine  ke  ba'd, 

Yakiiniyih  se  Salatiel  paidi  hci ;  aur 
Salatiel  so  Zanibibul  paidi  htii; 

13  Aur  Zarubibul  ao  Abiud  paidi 
,ui;   aur  Abiud  se  RliyAalm    paidi 

hiii;    aur  EliyAnim  ee  'Aziir  paidi 
hdi; 

14  Aur 'A'ziir  so  Saduq  paidi  Inti; 
aur  Badiio,  so  Akhim  paidi  hai ;  aur 
Akhim  se  Eliuil  paidi  hui  ; 

15  Aur  Eliud  bc  Ele'izar  paida  hiia; 
aur  Ele'azar  so  Matthin  paidi  hui; 
aur  Matthin  se  Ya'qiib  paidi  hiti ; 

1G  Aur  Ya'qitbse  Yiisuf  paidi  htii, 
jo  shauhar  thi  Mariyarn  ki,  jis  M 
Tisu',   jo   Masih   kahliti   hai,   paida 


btfa 
Mi 


hui. 

17  Paa,  sab  pushten  Abiraham  se 
Diiid  tak  chaudah  pushten  hairi ;  aur 
DAud  se  Bibul  ko  uth  jine  tak  chau- 
dah pushten ;  aur  Bibul  ko  uth  jino 
so  Masih  tak  chaudah  puhtag  hain. 

18  f  Ab  Yisii'  Masi'h  ki  paidii»h 
yiin  hit;  ki  Jab  ub  ki  mi  M^riyam 
ki  wMinjnl  Yiisuf  ke  ftitfa  hiti,  to  un 
ke  ikatthe  ine  ae  pahle,  w  uh  Ruh  ul 
Quds  su'himila  pii  gayi. 

18  Tab  u»  ke  shauhar  Yusuf  ne, 
jo  risthaz  thi,  aur  na  chihi  ki  use 
tash,hir  kare,  irida  kiyi  ki  use  chnp- 
ke  eo  chhor  da 

20  Wuh  ia  biton  ke  soch  hi  mcn 
thi,   ki    deklio,    Khudsiwaud    ko    ek 


firishte  ne  us  par  khwib  roen  Kohir 
jhoke  kahi,  Ai  Yusuf,  Ibn  i  Diud,  aj>- 
11  Aur  Yusiyib.  se  Yakiiniyih  aur'nf  jorti  Mariyam  koapne  yahin  lo  ine 
3  •*  2 


Jl/o/iisi'oji  bi  Masih  pan  tina.  MAT 
so  mac  dar;  kytinki  jo  ue  ke  rihm 
lucu  hai,  bo  Rdli  ul  Quds  bg  hai. 

21  Aur  wuh  beti  jauegi,  aur  tii 
kd  ndm  YIMU"  rakhe#i;  "kyunlri  wuh 
liput!    IogUQ    ko   un    ke    gunrtlion    ft 

22  Yih  sab  kuchli  tnid,  ki  jo  Kliu- 
ddwand  eo  nabi  ki  ma'rifat  kahd  Lkd 
pi'ird  ho ;  ki 

2:1  Dekho,  ek  kiinwari  hiimila  hogi. 
aur  beti  janegi,  aur  ub  kd  nam  'Iui- 
tuaauei  rakhonge,  jis  kd  tarjuma  yih 
ii=ii,  Kiiuda  Jiiuudre  aith. 

24 'Tab  Yusuf  ne,  aoto  se  uthkar, 
jaisS  K'lunliiwaud  ke  tirishte  oe  uso 
iarmdya  thd,  kiyd,  aur  apni  jord  ko 
apne  yahdn  lc  dyd: 

25  Tar  uh  ko  na  jdnd,  jali  tak  ki 
wuh  apnd  palauthd  betd  na  jani ;  aur 
us  kd  ndm  Y1SU"  raklid, 
II  BA'ft. 

AUR  jab  Yisu',  HcTodls  bddshdh  ke 
waqt,  Yahudi  ya  ko  Baillabam 
iiieij  paidd  lui  a,  tn  dekho,  kai  maju- 
fiuu  ne,  piirab  se  Yanisalam  merj  dko, 

2  Kati;  ki  Yahiidion  kd  bddshdh 
jo  pftidi  hiid  80  kalian  hai?  ki  ham 
ne  pdtafc  mej  "B  kd  sitara  dcklid,  aur 

.  kanta  ko  do  hain. 

3  Jab  H'Tmlis  hiiishab  ue  yih  su- 
nd,  tab  widi  aur  ub  ko  sdth  tamdm 
Y  arti  salam  ghabrdyd. 

4  Tab  us  ne,  sah  Rarddr  kalunoii 
aur  q aum  fce  faiplion  ku  Jam'a  Eatka, 
un  se  puchhd,  ki  Masih  kahdn  paidA 
boga  ? ' 

D  I/nlion  ne  us  se  kahd,  Yalnidiya 
ke  BaUlahtm  mag  ;  kyi'mki  nabi  ki 
ma'rifut  yi'm  iikhd  hai;  ki 

6  Ai  liaitlaliam,  Yahrldah  ki  sar- 
7,amin,  tu  Yahuddh  ke  anrddron  rum 
knrgiz  kamtarin  uahin  hal;  kylinki 
nijh  iiii'i_  se  ek  Sardar  uiklogd,  jo  meri 
(lanm  Isrdel  ki  ri'dyat  karegd. 

7  Tab  Herodis  ne  majusion  ko 
chupke  se  buldkar  un  se  tahqiq  ki,  ki 
wuli  sitdra  kab  dikhldi  diya. 

8  Aur  unhcn  yih  kabke  Baitlaham 


I',  II,  AifnJ  ha,  gatl  hor,6. 

men  bbeja,  ki  Jdknr  u.i  larke  ki  bdbat 
kluib  darydft  karo;  aur  jab  uso  pSo, 
mujho  khabar  do,  ki  main  bhl  jdko 
use  sijda  karun, 

y  Wc  bddshdh  se  yih  sunke  rawii- 
na  hiie,  aur,  dekho,  wuh  sitdra,  jo 
unlmn  ne  piirab  nun  dekhd  thd,  uu 
ke  dge  dgo  chal  rahd,  aur  us  jagah  ke 
upar.jaban  wuli  larka  thii.jSke  thahra. 

10  Wc  ub  sitdro  ko  dekhko  bahul 
hl  khuali  hiie. 

11  1T  Aur  us  ghar  muu  pahnnch- 
kar  ub  larke  ko  ua  ki  raa  Mariyam  ke 
salh  payd,  aur  us  ko  dge  girku  DM 
sijda  kiyd;  aur  apni  jliolidn  kholke 
aoud,  aur  lubdn,  aur  muTr,  uao  nazi* 
guarana, 

12  Aur  khwab  men  agdht  pdkar  ki 
Herodis  ke  pds  pbir  na  jdweii,  we  ihis- 
ri  rah  hb  apne  uiulk  ko  phire. 

13  Jab  we  rawana  iide,  Co  dekho, 
Kr.i-lawaiid  ke  ek  tirwhta  ue,  Yusuf 
ko  khwab  men  diklidi  deke,  kahd, 
Dth.'ua  larke  aur  us  ki  md  ko  sdth  le- 
kar  Misr  ko  bhdg  ja,  aur  wahdu  rah, 
jab  tak  ki  main  tujhe  khabar  ua  ddn ; 
kyiiiiki  Herotli»  is  lafka  ko  dliuudlie- 
gd,  ki  mar  dale. 

14  Tab  wuh  uthko,  rdt  hi  ko,  larko 
aur  ub  ki  md  ko  sdth  lekar  iiisr  ko 
rawdna  hdd : 

10  Aur  Herodifi  ke  ruame  tak  wa- 
hdn  rahd,  ki  jo  Khuddwand  ne  nabi 
ki  ma'rifat  kahd  tlii  pura  ho,  ki  Main 
ue  apne  bete  ko  Misr  se  buldyd. 

10  T  J»b  Herodia  ne  dekha,  ki  us 
ne  majusion  se  fareb  khayri  thd,  to 
nihdvat  guswo  hud,"aur  Iflgon  ko  bhej- 
kar  tiaillaham  aur  us  ki  sdri  tatbaa- 
don  ke  sab  larkon  ko,  jo  do  bara -s  ke 
aur  ub  se  chtaote  tlie,  ua  w»qt  ke  niu- 
wdnq  ki  us  ne  majusion  se  tahu.iq  ki 
tii,  qatl  karwdyil. 

1T  Tab  wuh,  jo  Yaramiydh  nabi  no 
kahd  thd,  piird  hiid;  ki 

IH  Hdmah  meo  ek  dwdz  sunne  men 
di  hai,  ndla,  aur  rone,  aur  bftf   i 
ki,  ki  Rdkhil  apne  larkon  par  roti,"nur 


Yuhannd  kd 

tasalli  nuLin  chAhti,  is  liye  ki  we 

nahin  hiiin. 

19  K  Jab  HerodiB  mar  gayA,  to 
dokho,  Khudiwaud  ke  nrlsnto  DB, 
Min  men  Yusuf  ko  khwdb  incii  dikh- 
M  dekc," 

20  KahA,  Uth,  aur  uh  larke  aur  ub 
Jti  mi  ko  stlth  lekar  Israel  ke  inulk 
men  ja ;  kyuiiki  jo  uh  larke  ki  jan  ke 
khwAhAn  t'10  mar  g^y- 

^1  Tab  wah  ulba,  aur  us  larke  aur 
HB  ki  ma  ko  sdth  leke  IsrAol  ko  inulk 
men  a  ya. 

22  Magar  jab  suna,  ki  Aikliilius, 
apue  bAp  Hcrodis  ki  jagah,  Vuliusliya 
HB  baashihat  karta  hai,  to  wahan 
jAno  80  dara;  aur  khwdb  men  agahi 
pakar  Jalil  ki  atraf  men  rawdna  bui. 

23  Aur  ek  shahr  meg.jis  k;i  u;iiii 
Nasarat  thd,  jAke  rahd,  ki  wuh  jo 
riabfon  ne  kahd  thA  pura  ho,  ki  Wuh 
Nasar!  k;ihlaegA. 

UT  BA'B. 

X  dinon  men  Yuhaand  baptisma 


MATI',  III,  IV. 


t&hir  hotid. 


D 


_  denewdld,  Yainidiy.i  ke  biyab.ii) 
men  zdhir  boko,  manAdi  karne, 

2  Aur  yih  k  a  bn  c  laga,  ki  Tanba 
karu;  kyunki  AsruAn  ki  bAdKhAhat 
nazdikhai. 

3  Ki  yih  wuhi  hai,  jis  ka  zikr  Yas'- 
aiydh  nabi  nc  yih  kahkc  kiyA,  ki 
Jangal  meo  ek  pukayjuwale  ki  AwAz 
bal,  ki  Khuddwand  ki  rAb  ko  durust 
karo,  aur  ub  ke  rastnn  ko  sidhA  bando. 

4  Is  Yuhannd  ki  poshak  uut  ke 
liab.iij  ki  tlii,  aur  chauire  ka  kamar- 
baud  us  ki  kamar  men  tha;  nur  tiddi 
aur  jangli  shahd  us  ki  khiirak  thi. 

5  Tab  Yarusalam,  aur  saru  Yahd- 
diya,  aur  Yardan  ke  s:ili  jspAs  ke 
ralmowile,  us  pAs  chale  Ae. 

G  Aur  uuhon  ne  apne  gunAhon  kA 
icjrar  karkc  Yardan  men  us  se  baptisma 
pAyd. 

7  1  Par  jab  us  ne  dekha,  ki  bahut 
se  Farisi  aurSttdiitji  baptisma  pAne  ku 
us  piU  Ae  bain,  to  utihen  kaha,  ki  Ai 


sAmpon  ke  barbel  io,  tuinhi-ij   AuewAlc 
gazab  bo  bhdgnA  kis  ne  sikhlAyd  ? 
S'  Pas  tauba  ke  lAiq  pbal  lAo : 

9  Aur  apne  dil  ineii  aisA  knbne  ka 
kliiyiil  niat  karo,  ki  AbirahAm  ha- 
mdra  bAp  hai ;  kyunki  main  turo  t>e 
kalitA  hun,  ki  KhudA  inhin  pattharon 
se  Abiraharn  ke  liyo  aulAd  paidA  kar 
sak  t  A  hai. 

10  Aur  darakhton  ki  jar  ]wr  ab 
kulhArA  rakhA  liai ;  ]su>  bar  ek  dar- 
aku"! jo  acbchhA  phal  nahin  lata,  kAtd 
aur  Ag  men  daja  jAtA  hai. 

11  Main  to  tumhon  tauba  ke  liye 
pani  so  baptisma  duta  h  i';  n ;  lekin 
wuh  jo  mere  ba'd  AtA  hai,  inujh  se 
zorAwnr  hai,  ki  roain  us  ki  jutidri 
ut.hane  ke  lAiq  nahin;  wuh  tumben 
Rlih  i  Quds  aur  Ag  so  baptisma  degd : 

12  Us  kA  siip  ub  ke  hAth  men  hai, 
aur  wuh  apno  khulihaa  ko  khub  sAf 
karegA,  aur  apne "  gehun  ko  kh^tte 
num  jam'a  karega;  par  bbiise  ko  us  Ag 
men,  jo  hargi»  naliin  biijhti,  jatAwegA. 

13  f  Tab  Yisu'  Jalil  se  Yardan  ke 
kanAre  Yuhanna  ke  pas  AyA,  IA  ki  us 
H  ki]-itii>ma  iiAwo. 

14  Par  YvibannA  Deuseman'a  itiya, 
aur  kaha,  ki  Main  tujh  bc  baptisma 
pAue  kA  muhtAj  bun,  aur  tii  taat  pas 
AyA  hai  ? 

15  Yisu'  ne  j:nv;ib  men  us  se  kabA, 
Abhouede;  kyurjki  hainen  mundaib 
liai.ki  yuubin  sal>  rdstbdzi  piiri  karen. 
Tab  us  ne  hone  diyA. 

16  Aur  YisA'  baptisma  pike  wun- 
bin  paui  se  nikalke  upar  dya,  aur, 
dekbo,  ki  us  ke  liye  dwindn  kbul  gayA, 
aur  us  ne  KIiudA  ki  Kuli  ko  kabdtar 
ki  mAnmd  utarte,  aur  apne  upar  ate 
duk  ha. 

17  Aur  dekbo,  ki  Asniau  seek  Swia 
yib  kahti  di,  ki  Yih  merd  piyaia  Bctd 
hai,  jis  se  main.  khush  hiig. 

IV  BA'B. 

TAB  Yisu'  Ruh  ke  waaile  ImyAbAn 
men   ldyd  gayA,  ^a  ki  Sbaitan 


Madi  H  MATI',  IV. 

2  Ain  jali  cMlfl  ilin  aur  ehAlfs  rAt 
rota  rakh  chuki,  Akhir  ko  bhukha 
huA. 

a  Tab  AKiimish-karm'wAle  ueuKpAi 
i'.kfi  kahA,  Asar  tu  Khudd  kA  botA 
hai,  to  kuli,   ki  yc  paltliar   inti  lxm 

4  TJs  ne  jawAb  mi-»  kalui,  LikliA 
i.ai,  ki  InnAn  sirt'  roti  se  nahiri,  baiki 
liar  ck  bafBe,  jo  Khuda  ke  munh  se 
nikahi,  jitA  hai. 

5  'lab  Shai t.;)Ti  nw  iiRiqariilas  whahr 
meB  Spne  ^iilli  k  gaya,  aur  haikal  ke 
kangiire  DM  khara  karke  us  M  kali», 
ki   • 

6  Agar  tu  KhudA  ki  tetf  hai,  to 
«pneta.irt  niche  j»ira  da;  kyi'iiiki  likba 
hai,  ki  VVuli  tera  liye  apne  firiahtog  lio 
tivmaegi,  aur  we  tujhe  hatimu  per 
uLlid  Icijgo,  aisA  na  lio  ki  tue  pa%w 
ko  patthar  se  thes  lage. 

T  Yi.Mi'neusTe  kahA,  Yih  Mu  likha 
hai,  ki  Tu  KhudAwand  apne  KhudA 
ke  niat  i?.m&. 

8  i'liir  Shail&n  usc  ab  bare  unche 
■i  1«  ^ti'.i,  aur  duuyA  ki  uari 
bAdshAhateg,  aur  uii  kr  fbau  o  ahaukat, 
uan  dikhAin ; 

a  Aur  uh  «;  kahA,  Agar  Ul  girko 
mujhe  sijda  kaie,  to  yih  nal)  kuchh 
■Lujhf.  diiyua, 

10  Tab  Yisii'  nc  iise  kahA,  Ai  Shai- 
tan,  dtir  lii>;  kyunki  likliii  liai,  ki  Tu 
Khudawand  apne  K^huda  ku  njda  kar, '  khabar!  ki 
aur  US  akele  ki  baiHiayi  kar. 

11  Tab  Sliaitau  use  cliiior  gaya,  aur, 
dekho,  firisbton  ue  ako  u*  k  1  i  I .  i  '  ■  ■ 


12  t  Jab  Yi*ii'  no  Bund  ki  Yu- 
owoi  uirifiar  hii;i,  tab  Jalil  ko  chalA 

L8  Aur  Niiwirat  ko  cbhorkar  Ka- 
faniahum  men,  jo  daryA  ko  katiAre 
"'  lIh'iIi'hi  aur  Nafuli  ki  sai'liaudon  nion 
hai,  14  raba:  ki 

14  Jo  Yaa'&iy&h  nabi  ki  ma'rifat. 
kahA  gaya  IhA,  pura  boj 

15  Zabulun   ki  sarzamin  aur  Xaf- 


azTKaya.  ja>i" . 
tali  ki  snrzamin,  ya'ne,  gair-qaumon 
kA  Jalil,  jo  darya  ki  rAh  Yardan  ke 
par  hai ; 

~16  Un  Iojwjij  m,  jo  andhero  meu 
bait.ho  thc,  bari  rosbsl  dekhi,  aur  un 
par,  jo  maut  ke  mulk  aur  saya  men 
liaitbv  t.lie,  nur  cbamka. 

17  V  L'KiVaift  se  Yisu'  ne  imihaiii 
l.aiiM.  aur  yih  knhna  shurii'  kivri,  ki 
Timba  karo  ;  kyfinki  asiuan  ki  bad- 
shaliat  nazdik  Af. 

18  5  Aur  jab  Yisti'  Jalil  ke  daryA 
ke  kanAre  cliala  juta  th»,  to  u«  ne  do 
hbAi,  ya'ne,  Sttama'ua  ko,  jo  Patrus 
kablAtA  hai,  aur  u  s  ku  bhAi  AndrvA» 
ku,  daryA  men  jAl  diilto  dekhA,  ki  we 

.icbliiie  the. 

19  Aur  unh-;n  k  ah  A,  ki  Mere  efebhe 
chale  Ao,  ki  main  t.iunlitn  Admiori  ko 
macldiwe  batuiunga. 

20  We  usi  waqt  jAlon  ko  cbhorkar 
ua  ke  pichhc  ho  liye, 

21  Aur  wahin.  ne  barhke  us  ne  aur 
do  bhai,  ya'ne,  Sabadi  ke"beto  Ya'qdb, 
aur  ub  ke  bhai  Yiihauua  ko,  npne  bAp 
Zaliadi  ke  sAtb  nAw  pur  apne  jiilojj  ki 
marammat  karto*"dekli<i,  aur  antan 
bulAyA. 

22  Wunhin  ndw  anr  apne 
chhorkar  we  us  ku  pichhe  lio  liye. 

38  T  Aur  Yirtii',  tamim  Jalil  weo 

phirtA  huA,  un  ke  'ibadatkhAnon  mey 

ta'lim  detA,  aur  bA^lwhaViat  ki  kluif,!i- 

■Adi  kartA,  aur  kigor 

ke  sAre  dukh  aiu-  bimAri  dafa  karta 


24  Aur  us  ki  khahii'  tamani  Ruriyn 
men  phaili,  aur  sab  biniaron,  ko,  jo 
tarah  tarah  ki  bimAri  aur  "a^Ab  men 
giriftar  the,  aur  unben  jin  par  defl 
oharhe  the,  aur  mireihos,  %m 

mAre  hiion  k",  us  pu  Em,  aur  um  ne 
urlicn  cn"anga  kivA. 

25  Aur  bari  liari  bhir  Jalil,  aur 
WkApulia,  aur  Y'arusiilam,  aur  Ya- 
bfidiya,  aur  Yardaii  ke  par  se  uk  ke 
pichhe  ho  li. 


i'ahdr  par  MATI',  V.  Masih  kd  wa'z. 

V  BA'B.  16  Isi  tn.mli  tumhari  mahm  Admion 

ke  saniune  chamke,  til  ki  we  tiiinhAre 
nuk  kAmon  ko  dekhen,  iur  tumhare 
bap  El,  jo  AaniAii  par  hai,  sitdish 
harem 

17  T  Yih  khiyiil  unit  k:.ro,  ki  main 
taurel  ya  iiabum  ki  kitab  mansukh 
korne  ko  Aya;  main  maosukb.  karnc 
ko  nahin,  baiki  puri  kamu  ko  aya- 
li iin. 

m  Kyiinki  main  tum  n  aach  kali- 
tA  hun,  ki  Jab  tak  Asruiii  aur  /amin 
fal  n;i  jaen,  ek  Lyqta  ya  ek  ahosha 
fauret  ki  hargiz  na  m  i  tega,  jab  tak 
nb  kuelili  purii  ua  ho. 

19  Pas  jo  koi  iu  hukinou  uien  Re, 
sah  se  chhotc  ko  tal  dewe,  aur  wai(j 
hi  admion  ko  Bikhiwe,  aaman  ki  bAd- 
shahat  men  sal)  se  chhota  kahliiegii; 
|iar  jo  ki  'amal  kare,  aur  siklilawe, 
wuhi  AsmAn  ki  badshdhat  mefl  Uua 
kahlAegA. 

20  Kyiinki  main.  tumherj  kalita 
liiin,  ki  Agar  tumhari  rastliAzi  Faqi- 
hun  aur  Fa  ria  ion  ki  m  ziyAda  na  lio, 
tum  auman  ki~badshakat  men  kiai 
tarah  dAkhil  na  liogo. 

21  f  Tum  suri  ehuk«  bo,  U  ag3os 
M  k  ah  a  gaya,  Tii  kluin.  mat  kar;  aur 
jo  koi  khun  karc,  'adAlat  men  sazA  ke 
laiq  kuga: 

22  Par  main  tumhen  katili  hun,  ki 
Jo  koi  apno  bhai  par  be-sabab  guaea 


"tTTUTI  bhty  ko  dekhkar  ek   paluir 

W  par  chnrh  gaya;  aur  jabbait.lia, 
UI  ke  shagird  tu  l»As  Ac : 

2  Tab'wuh  apni  zubAn  kh"lke  un- 
hon  sikhlane  lagi,  aur  kahii,  ki 

5  Mubarak  we  jo  dil  ke  garib  hairj ; 
kvunki  asman  ki 'badshahat  unhiii  ki 
hai 

4  Muliirak  we  jo  gamgin  hain ; 
kyiinki  we  taaalli  pAwenze. 

5  Mubarak  we  jo  halim  hain  : 
kyiinki  we  zaniin  ke  waris  bOBgB. 

'  6  Mubarak  we  jo  rastbAzi  ke  bhti- 
tim  aur  piyase  hain  ;  kyiinki  weasuda 
honge. 

7  Mubarak  we  jo  rahm-dil  hain 
kyiinki  un  jmiv  rahra  kiya  jaegA. 

a  Mubdrak  we  jo  pak-dii  hain 
kyiinki  Wfl  Khinld  ke  dekhense. 

i)  Mubarak  we  jo  silih  kamewAle 
hain;  kyiinki  wo  Khuda  ke  fajjiand 
kahlienge. 

10  MubArak  we  jo  rast.bairt  ke  sa- 
liab  sajie  jAte  hain  ;  kyiinki  asniAii%i 
had  s  h  «liat  unhin,  ki  hai. 

1 1  Mubarak  ho  tum,  jab  mere  wistc 
tumben  la'n  ta'n  karen,  nur  salilweg, 
aur  liar  tarah  ki  buri  bateij  jiuitli  se 
tumhare  haqq  men  kaben. 

12  Khusb  ho  aur  kliuslii  k»KI ; 
kyfigki  Asmin  par  tumhare  liyc  bani 
lunllu  hai  ;  is  liye  ki  uuhon  UO  un 
n:il>ioii  ko,  jo  tum  ac  Age  the,  isi  tarah 
aatayi  hai. 

13  *§  Tum  stamin  ke  camak  ho : 
par  agar  namak  kA  maza  bigar  jAe,  to 
wuli  k  ia  chia  «e  mazadAr  kiya  jie? 
wuh  phir  kisi  kam  kii  n;ihin,  siwa  u,« 
ke  ki  bahar  phenkA  jae,  aur  adiuiun 
ke  ]iiii_nvuij  tale  raunda  jae. 

14  Tum  (lunya  k"o  inir  lio;  jo  ahahr, 
ki  pahir  par  IhirA  hai,  chhip  nahin. 
Bakti. 

16  Aur  cliirfi^   bAlke   [MiimAiia  ke 
tals  nahin,  baiki  chirigdAn  par  rakhtc 
Iniij  :  nb  un  uab  ko  jo  gbar  men  )i 
rosbai  detA. 


lio,  'adalat  mon  BazA  ke  aAbil  hoca  | 
aur  jo  koi  apne  bhai  ko  BAplA  kaho, 
Sadr-majliB  men  sazA  ke  lAiq  hoga  ; 
aur  jo  us  ko  Ahuiaij  kalie,  jahaiinait; 
ki  u  ka  BaaAwir  hogi, 

23  Pas  agar  tii  qurbiingah  mrn  ajui: 
nasir  le  jdwe,  aur  wahan  tujlii'  ya>: 
Aw«,  ki  t*ra  iibAi  tujh  se  kuchh  ii_w- 
khAlafat  rakhta  hai ; 

"24  To  wahan  apni  nazr  ciurbAngiih 
ke  sAmhne  chhorke  chalA  jA;  pahle 
apne  bhai  m  mcl  kar,  tab  Ake  apni 
nazr  guzran. 

25  Jab  tak  tu  apne  miKkla'i  ke  lith 
rAh  mejj  hai,  jald  us  se  m^ja;  na  ho, 


PaUrjwr  MATI' 

ki  niiidda'i  tujlie  qd/,i  ke  haw.-Ua  kare, 
nur  qizi  tujbe  piydda  ke  aupurd  karo, 
aur  tii  qaid  nicn  pare. 

26  Main  tujh  ee  saoh  kahtS  Mn. 
ki  Jali  tak  kauri  kauri  add  na  kare,  tu 
wahdn  se  kisi  tarah  na  chbutega. 

27  "T  Tum  suri  chuke  lio',  ki  aglon 
ho  kahd  gaya,  Tu  zina  na  kor  ; 

28  Par  main  tumlien  kabtd  Inln,  ki 
■To  koi  shahwat  se  kisi  'aurat  par  nigdh 
karo,  wuh  apne  dil  men  u»  ke  aath 
zina  kar  chukd. 

29  So  agar  teri  dahini  ankk  tere 
thekar  khaiio  kd  bius  ho,  BM  nikal, 
aur  apne  pas  bo  phenk  de ;  kyiinki 
tera  angon  men  se  «k  Isa  Di  ralniii 
tero  liye  ue  Be  blhtar  hai,  ki  terd  sdrd 
badan  jahannam  men  ddld  jawe, 

30  Yd  agar  terd  dahina  hdth  tero 
liye  thokar  khdne  kd  bd'is  lio,  us  lu 
kiit  dai,  aur  apne  pas  bb  phenk  de ;  ky- 
imki  tore  angon  mcn  se  i?k  kd  na  rnhiia 
tero  liye  ns  bo  bihtnr  hai,  ki  terd  sdrd 
badan  jahannam  men  dftla  jde. 

:;i  Y  ih  bhi  likhd  gayd,  ki  Jo  koi 
nperj  torf  ko  chhor  de,  usc  talaeuiania 
likh  de : 

82   Ph  main  tumben  kabtd  lu 
Jo  kol  apni  jord  ko,  zina  ke  siwd,  kisi 
aur  sabab  bo  chhor  dewe,  ub  so  zini 
Itarwata  hai ;  aur  io  koi  ub  chhori  hui 
se  bydh  kare  zind  kartd  hai. 

33  1T  Phir  tum  «un  chuke  ho,  ki 
aglun  se  kah4  gaya,  ki  Tii  jhi'ithi 
«asam  na  khd;  baiki  apni  qosanicrj 
Khudawand  Ise  liye  puri  kar  : 

84  Par  main  tunihon  kabtd  lilin, 
Hargis  aaaam  na  khdna;  na  to  isman 
ki,  kyiinki  wuh  Khuda  kd  takht  b*l ; 

35  Na  zamin  ki,  kyiujki  wuh  ub  ke 
pati  w  ki  ekiuiki  hai ;  aur  m  Yarujalam 
ki,  kyiiiiki  wuh  buzurg  badakah  kd 
ehahr  hai ; 

3(>  Aur  na  apne  air  ki  qasam  kha, 
kyiinki  tu  ek  bdl  ko  Bufed  yd  kdld 
nahin  kar  sakti. 

37  Par  tumhdri  guftogu  mori,  han 
ki  bdn,  aur  nahin  ki  nahin  ho ;  ky- 


VI. 


L   JO   IB 


Masih  Icd  iva'z. 
-,  ziyada  hai  so  burdi  so 


hotd  hai. 

38  ^  Tum  Bun  chuke  ho,  ki  kahd 
gaya,  A'nkh  ke  badle  duk  h,  aur  ddnt 
ko  badlo  tldnt: 

30  Pir  main  tumben  kabtd  hiin,  ki 
Zalim  kd  nuiqab.tla  na  kanta;  baiki 
jo  tere  dahine  gdl  par  tamdncha  mdre, 
dusrd  bhi  ub  ki  taraf  pher  de. 

40  Aur  agar  koi  oSahe,  k!  tujli  pai 
ndlish  karke  teri  qabi  h,  kurte  ko  bhi 
usoleue  d  e. 

41  Aur  jo  koi  tujlie  ok  kos  begdr  le 
j  A  wc,  us  ke  siitli  do  kos  chala  j;i. 

42  Jo  koi  tujh  se  kuchh  inarjge,  use 
de;  aur  jo  tujh  so  qarz  chihe,  us  sc 
inunh  ua  mor. 

43  t  Tum'  sun  ebuke  ho,  ki  kaha 
gaya,  Apne  porosi  se  dosti  ralih,  aur 
apne  (luslimaii  mi  'addwat : 

ii  Par  main  tuiulien  kabtd  hiin,  ki 
Apne  duahmanon  ko  piydr  karo;  aur 
jo  tum  ]>ar  laknat  karen,  un  ke  liye 
l>ar;ik:it  cbiibo;  jo  tum  so  kina  roklien, 
urf  kd  bbali  karo ;  nur  "Jo  tumben 
dukh  den,  aur  satdwcn,  un  ke  bye 
du'd  mdngo ; 

45  Ta  ki  tum  apne  Bdp  ke,  jo  ds- 
man  par  hai,  iarzand  lio;  kyiinki 
wuh  apno  suraj  ko  hadon  aur  nekon 
par  ugiiti.  hai,  aur  rdston  aur  nd-rdstoii 
[iar  mcTili  barsdtd  hai. 

40  Kyiinki  a.yar  tum  unhiij  ku 
piyir  karo,  jo  tumben  piydrkarte  hain, 
to  tumhdrc  liye  kyd  »jr  hai?  kyd 
majiaiil-lenewdle  bhi  aisd  nahin  karte? 

47  Aur  agar  tum  faqat  apno  bhdion 
ko  saldm  kam,to  kyd  ziyada  kiyd'i'  kyd 
mahsnl-lenewalc  bhi  aisii  nahirj  karte  V 

48  Pas  tum  kamil  ho,  jaisd  tum- 
hdra  Ilip.jo  iisindn'par  hai,  kiimil  liai. 

VI  BA'B. 

KHABARDA'K  roho,  ki  tum  apne 
nok  kimo-a  kologon  ke  sdrahnc 
dikhldne  ke  liye  na  karo,  nahin  to 
tuuiliarr  l'.iiji  W,  Jo  dsniau  par  hai,  ajr 
ua  inileira. 


Pahdr  par  MAT 

2  ls.liye  lab ki  tii  khairdt  kare,  apne 
s&mhnc  turbi  niat  baji,  jaise  riydkdr 
'ibadat  k  hifiioij  aur  CMfOO  men  karte 
hain,  td  ki  log  un  ki  ta'rif  kareij.  Main 
tum  ee  statsli  kahti  hiiii,  ki  W  o  apiid 
ajr  pa  chuke. 

3  Par  jab  tu  khairdt  kare,  to  cha- 
hiye  ki  teri  bayan  hith  na  jdne,  jo 
teri  dobiua  hath  kartd  bai ; 

4  Ta  ki  teri  khairdt  poskida  rahc, 
aur  tera  Bdp  jo  poehidag)  meii  dekbta 
hai,  khud  zahir  meo  tujhe  badid  dewe. 

5  1T  Aur  jab  tii  du'd  minge,  riyd- 
karofl  ki  minimi  rnat  ho  ;  kyiinki  we 
'ibadatkhdnon  men  aur  raaton  ko  kon- 
on par  khare  hoke  du'a  mingne  ko 
dost  rakhte  hain,  ta  ki  log  unhen  de- 
khon.  Main  tara  «e  sach  kahtft  lilin, 
ki  We  apna  badla  pd  chuke. 

6  Lokio  jab  tii  du'a  mdnge,  apni 
kothri  men  ja,  aur  apna  darwaza  baud 
karke  apne  Bap  ea  jo  poshidagi  men 
hai  du'a  mdng  ;  aur  teri  Bdp  jo  poshi- 
dagi men  dekhtd  bai,  zikir  aun  tujlif 
bodli  degd. 

7  Aur  jab  du'd  miugtc  lio,  gair- 
qaunioii  ki  inaniud  be-faida  bak  'bak 
rnat  karo;  kyurjki  we  samajhto  hain 
ki  un  ki  ziyiaagoi  se  un  ki  suni  jdegi, 

8  Par  unTtT  mdnind  niat  ho,  kyuii- 
ki  t  umbari  Bdp,  tumhdre  manguo  ke 
jiahlo,  jdnta  hai,  ki  tumben  km  kin 
chizon  ki  zariirat  hai. 

9  Pas  tum  iai  tarah  du'a  mdngo,  ki 
Ai  baindre  Bdp,  jo  dsnidn  par  hai, 
Tera  ndm  ki  taqdia  lio. 

10  Teri  badsnahat  dwe.  Teri  mar- 
zi,  jaisi  dsmdn  par  hai,  zamin  par  bin 
bar  dwe. 

11  1  lamari  rozina  ki  roti  dj  ham  ko 
bakhsh. 

12  Aur  jis  tarah  ham  apne  qarz- 
ddrorj  ko  bakbslite  hain,  tii  apne  dain 
ham  ko  bakhsh  do. 

13  Aur  harneii  dzmdish  men  na  dai, 
baiki  burdi  se  bacha  :  kyiinki  badshd- 
bat  aur  qudrat  aur  jahil  hamesha  tere 
hi  hain.     A'iuin, 

"9 


',  VI,  Masih  kd  wVs. 

14  la  liyc  ki  agar  tum  admion  ke 
gunati  hajdishogo,  to  tumhdrd  Bdp 
hhi,  jo  asmdn  par  hai,  tunihun  bakh- 
sh egd. 

15  Par  agar  tum  ddmion  ko  un  ko 
gimih  na  bakhnhogc,  to  tumhdrd  Bdp 
bin  lumhdre.gundh  na  bakhsbcgd. 

16  ^  Phir  jab  tum  roza  rakho,  riyd- 
kiron  ki  mdnind  apni  cliihra  udds  na 
bando :  kyiinki  wo  apna  munh  bigdrte 
hairj,  ki  logorj  ke  nazdik  rozadifzdhir 
hon.  Main.  tum  sg  sach  kalita  hiin, 
ki  Wo  apnd  badla  pd  clmko, 

17  Par  jab  tu  roza  rakbe,  apne  air 
par  ciiikna  lagi,  aur  munh  dhn; 

18  T4  ki  tii  admi  par  nahiii*  baiki 
tere  Bdp  par,  jo  poshida  hai,  rozaddr 
zdhir  lio ;  aur  terd  Bdp,  jo  poshidagi 
men  dekhtd  hai,  iahkiri  tujbo  badli 
de. 

19  Tf  Mil  apne  wdste  zamin  par 
jam 'a  na  karo,  janin  Xiri,  aur  mo,rcha 
Ithardb  karto  hain,  aur  jahdn  chor 
sendh  dete,  aur  churdte  hain  : 

20  Baiki  mil  apne  liye  isman  par 
jam'a  karo,  jabdn  na  kiri  na  moreba 
khardb  karto,  aur  na  wahdn  chor  sc.ndli 
dete,  na  chnrate  hain : 

21  Kyiinki  jahdii  tumhdrd  MuKana 
hai,  wahin  tunihara  dil  blii  lagi  ra- 
hegd. 

2i  Badan  kd  chirdg  dnkh  hai ;  pas 
agar  teri  dnkh  adf  ho,  to  terd  siri 
badan  roshan  hogi. 

23  Par  agar  teri  dnkh  slf  nahin,  to 
terd  sdra  badan  andbera  boga.  1^  liyo 
agar  wuh  m'ir,  jo  lujh  men  bai,  tiriki 
ho,  to  kaiti  ariki  th&hregl  I 

24  Koi  ddirudoklidwiiidonki  khid- 
mat nahin  kar  Haktd:  ia  liye  ki  yd  ek 
se  dushinani  rakhegd,  aur  diisre  se 
dosti;  yd  ek  ko  ininega,  aur  du3ro 
ko  na-chiz  jdnegd.  Tuin  Kbudiaur 
daulat  douon  ki  khidmat  naLin  kar 
nkte. 

26  lw  liye  main  tum  se  kahtd  in'ui, 
ki  Apni  zindagi  ke  liye  fikr  na  karo, 
ki  ham  kya  khdenge,  aur  kyd  piengc, 


MATI' 
na  ai)ii*;  badan  ko  liye,  ki  kyA  pahin- 
enge.  KyA  jAn  khurik  se  bihtar  na- 
bi», aur  badan  posbak  se? 

26  Hawa  ke  paraudog  ko  dekho; 
we  na  botc,  na  laute,  na  kothiou  rocn. 
jam'a  karte  hain,  tm  bbJ  tumbai-a 
iisiniiiii  lliip  im  ko  pika  hai  Kya 
tum  un  se  bahut  bihtar  naMrj  lu»? 

27  Tum  raen  se  kaun  hai  jo  fikr 
karke  apni  'umr  nierj  ok  ghari  barha 
saku  tua? 

28  Aur  pnshak  ki  kyi'in  fikr  karte 
ho?  Jangli  bowuwo  ko  dekho,  ki  we 
kia  tarah  m  barhti  hain  ;  we  na  mi  h- 
nat  kiirii,  na  katti  hain  : 

29  Pur  main  Tumben  kahtA  htirj,  ki 
Sulaiman  bM  apni  «iri  aliAn  o  shaukat 
men,  un  mcn  se  ek  ki  mariiiul  ]  riliinr- 
ufl  thA. 

30  Pas,  jab  Khudamaidan  ki  ghAs 
ko,  jo  aj  hai,  aiir  kal  Lani'ir  □  ■ 

jati.  yiin  paltinAtd  hai,  fb  kyA  tum  ko, 
■ii  kam-i'atiqiido,  ziyAda  na  pahina- 
p.g&'t 

31  Is  live  vib  kabke  fikr  mat  karo, 
ki  Ham  kya  khAengc  ?  ya  Kya  pierjge  f 
ya  Kya  pahinerjge  ? 

32  Kyiinki  iu  sab  chfzon  ki  talash 
men  gair-qauini>n  rahli  hain,  aur  tum- 
i.ara  a*m6i-i  Mp  jantd  h::i,  ki  tuni  un 
cnb  chi'/.on  ke  nmhtaj  ho. 

33  Par  "tum  pahle  Kliudri.  ki  bfid- 
shabat  aur  08  UrfistbM  kodliiindbo, 
to  yib  sah  chizen  bhi  tnmbeii  milegai 

34  Pas  knl  ki  fikr  na  karo  ;  kyiirjki 
kal  apni  cliizon  ki  ap  lu  fikr  kar  lega. 
A'i  ka  dukh  aj  hl  ke  liye  bas  hai. 

VII  BA'B. 
f   A  IB  na  lagao,  ki  tum  par  bhi  'aib 
A     Dii  lagayii  jAwc. 

•i  Kyiiijki  jiy  tamli  tum  'aib  Iftg&te 
h  o,  usl  tarah  tum  pir  bhi  Wb  lagays 
jAoga;  aur  jispaimAne  se  tuiu  nAptoho, 
lisi  se  tumhare  wdate  n  Apa  jaega. 

3  Aur  kvun  ua  tinjiti  ku,  Jo  tOM 
lihai  ki  auk'li  mcn  hai,  dekhtAhai.par 
us  kaiiri  par,  jo  teri  Aukh  meg  bui, 
nazar  nahm  karta? 


VTT. 


Manh  kd  « 


4  Ya  kyiinkar  tii  apne  bliai  ko  kan- 
ta, ki  Us  tinke  ko,  jo  teri  dukh  merj 
hai,  Ui  nikiil  ebin ;  aur,  dek  h,  khud  teri 
aukh  men  kanri  hai  ? 

5  Ai  riyakar,  mhta  kanri  ko  apnf 
dnkh  se  nikiil.  tob  iu  tlaks  k"  apne 
bhdi  ki  Aukh  so  achchhi  tarah  dekhke 
nikdl  sakegd. 

(i  ^f  Wuh  chiz  jo  pak  hai  kntton 
ko  mat  do,  aur  apne  moti  suaron  ke 
Ago  na  phenko  ;  aisA  na  lio  ki  we  un- 
horj  pamdl  karen,  aur  phirke  tumben 
phAren."~ 

1  1  Mingo,  ki  tumben  diy;i  jii^L'i  j 
dhiindho,  ki  tum  iwioge  ;  kh:iikli:it;i", 
to  tumbare  wdstc  kbola  jiegA  i 

8  Kyiinki  jo  koi  mangla  hal,  nse 
milt* ;  aur  jo  koi  dhundhta,  bo  pita 
hai ;  aur  jo  koi  kbatkhatata,  uh  ke 
wastc  kholA  jaega, 

H  Ya,  tum  men  se  kaun  UkwA  im, 
ki  agar  us  ka  l*ta  ns  »e  roti  mange, 
ivuh  use  patthar  deweV 

10  YAttgaruiachhli  mauge,  uae  samp 
do? 

11  Pas  jab  ki  tum  jo  bure  ho  apne 
larkon  ko  acbchhi  ebizen  dene  jdnte 
ho,  to  kitnft  ziyada  tumhara  BAp,  jo 
asmin  par  hai,  unhen  jo  ub  se  mangte 
hain,  achcbhi  chizen  degA  ? 

12  Pas  jo  kuchli  luni  chAhte  ho,  ki 
log  tumhArc  sAth  karen,  waisA  tum  bhi 
un  ke  sdth  karo  ;  kyiinki  tauret  aur 
nabion  kA  kbuldsa  yibi  bai. 

13  "l  Tan^darwAze  se  dAkliil  ho  ; 
kyiinki  chaurA  hai  wuh  darwAso,  aur 
kiinhada  hai  wuh  rasta,  jo  haJAkat  ko 
paBunoMtt  hai,  aur  bahut  hain  j"  na 
sedAkhil  hoto: 

14  'KyA  hi  tang  hai  wuh  fitrwaza, 
aur  sakri  hai  wuh  r;ili,  jo  zindagi  ko 
ItthuncTidti,  aur  thore  halrt  jo  use 
pate  1 

15  f  Pur  jhntlic  nabion  nc  kbab- 
ardar  raho,  jo  tumhArc  pAs  bhflfon  ke 

:  jo,  par  ha(jtc|at  merj   pkar- 
uowAle  bheriyr  hain. 

W  Tum'unhaD   un   ke  piiaknj    nc 


M'ifih  ira  v 


pahcbdnoge.  KyA  kdnfcon  se  angur, 
yA  lintkatAron  se  anjir  tortc  hnin  f 

17  0«  taruh  har  ek  achchhA  dft- 
rakkt  achchhe  phal  lata,  aur  burA 
darakht  bure  ]>lial  latA  hai. 

18*  AchchhA  ikrakhl.  hiire  phal  nn- 
hirj  la  snkrA,  na  bura'  darakht  achchhe 
phal  ia  sak  t  A. 

19  Hat-  ek  darakht.  jo  achelihephal 
mihiri  hilA,  kata  aur  Ag  inen  dali  jfltA 
hai. 

20  Pas,  un  ke  phalon  se  tuni  unhcn 
pahchAnoge. 

21  Tf  Na  har  ek  jo  mujlie  KhudA- 
wand,  Kbudawand,  kiilita  hai,  d.sniau 
ki  bAdsliAhat  men  ehamil  hogA,  magnr 
wuhi  jo  mere  asniiini  Bdp  ki  marzi 
par  chalti  hai. 

22  TJb  din  bahutcrc  mujhe  kaherjgc, 
Ai  Khudawand,  ai  Khudawand,  kya 
hairi  oe  tcre  nara  se  nubiiwat  nahin  ki. 
aur  tere  naiu  se  dton  ko  nahin  nikah», 
aur  tere  uain  se  bahut  si  kardniAt 
zAhir  nuliirj  kin  V 

23  Aur  ua  waqt  main  un  se  sAf 
kahiiris'a,  ki  Main  kal.ln  tum  se  wAqif 
un  ihA;  ai  badk.iro,  mere  pAa  ao  dur 
ho. 

24  ^f  Pas,  jo  koi  meri  ye  bAten 
suntA,  aur  unhen  'amal  meij  l;il.:i  hai, 
main  086  us  'rit^Mjiiiitl  ki  niAimid 
thuhrata  hun,  jis  ne  chutAn  par  upiiA 
ghar 'Tianayi: 

25  Aur  menhbarsA,aiirbdrhcn  ain, 
aur  andhian  chalin,  aur  us  gliar  mr 
zor  mara  ;  par  wuh  na  gini,  kyiiuki  us 
ki  new  chatan  par  dali  gayi  1 1  ■  i. 

26  Par  jo  koi  meri  yc  hatcn  suntA, 
aur  Ufl  par  'amal  naliiij  karta,  wuh  us 
bewuqtif  adim  ki  rniinitid  tkahrega,  jis 
ne  apoA  ghar  rcti  |iar  banayA  : 

27  Aur  menh  barsa,  aur  barhen  Air, 
aur  Andhirin  chaMn,  nur  us  ghar  par 
zor  mArA,  aur  wuh  gir  para,  aur  us  ka 
ginia  hauinak  wAai'a  hiui. 

28  AiiraisA  l.uA,  ki  jab  Tisu'  yih 
biteg  kah  duikA,  to  wuh  bhir  ub  ki 
ta'lim  se  daughui: 

11  - 


MATI',  VIII.         Ek  korlii  ko  changa  hama. 
20  Kyfinki  wuh  faqihon  ki  iiianiiil 


nahin,  baiki  ikhtiyarwalu  ke  taur  par 
sikhfatd  thA. 

VIII  BAT*. 

JAB  wuh  un  pahar  se  utra,  bahut  s: 
bbfr  us  ke  piehhe  ho  li. 

2  Aur',  dekho,  ek  korhi  ne  Ake  use 
sijda  kiyA,  aur  kahi,""Ai  Kbudawaml, 
agar  td  chAhe,  to  mujlie  pak  adf  kar 
sakta  hai. 

3  Tab  Yisu'  ne  liftth  harhdke  use 
chhiifi,  aur  kaha,  Main  ehtttiMn, tii 
pffi  sAf  ho.  Aur  wunhin  us  kA  korh 
jAU  raha.  "      . 

4  Phir  YisiV  ne  use  kahi,  Dekh, 
kisi  sr  nakahiyo;  par  jAke  «prii-  talQ 
TiAliiii  ko  dikhA,  aur  jo  na/.r  MiisA  ne 
miTqnrrar  ki,  guzTAn,  tA  ki  un  ke  liyc 
gawAhi  h  o, 

TJ  T  Aurjab  Yisii'  KaftmAhum  nicvi 
dAkhil  hiid,  ek  sdhadar  us  pAa  AyA, 
aur  us  se  ininjjat  karke  kalia,  ki 

(l  Ai  KliiidAwaud,  merfi  ehhokra 
jhole  kA  mArA  ghar  inen  para,  nur 
niliayat  duk  h  men  hai. 

7  Tah  Yisil'  ne  us  se  kalni,  Main 
Ake  use  changA  karAngA. 

8  Stibadar  ue  kwib  rnen  kaki,  Ai 
KhudAwand,  main  ifl  lAiq  nahin  ki  tii 
meri  chhat  tale  Awe ;  baiki  sirf  ek 
bAt  kah,  to  merA  chhokiA  changA  ho 

9  Kyunki  main  bhi  Admi  hi'in  jo 
diisre  ke  ikhtiyAr  inen  nun,  aur  sipAhi 
mne  bttkm  men  bain  i  atirjabekko 
kahtd  hun,  JA,  wuh  jdtA  hai ;  aur  dtisre 
ko,  ki  A',  «uh  AtA  hai ;  aur  apne 
guldm  ko,  ki  Yih  kar,  wuh  kartA  hai. 

10  YisA/  ce  yih  sunkar  ta'ajjub 
kiya,  aur  un  ko  jo  piehhe  Ate  the 
kahA,  Main  tum  se  sach  kahtA  hun,  ki 
main  m  aisA  imAu  IsrAel  men  bhi 
nahin  pAyA. 

i  L  Aur  main  tum  se  kahtA  hun,  ki 
Bahutere  purah  aur  pftebch&im  M 
Awonco,  aur  AbirahAui  D  I/.,hAq  aur 
Ya'q"db  ke  sAth  AaniAn  ki  hdiishdhat 
men  iwiithenge. 


A'ndhi  ko  thamd  «fcnd.  MATI' 

12  Par  hadahdhat  ke  farzand  biliar 
ke  andhere  men  dale  jaenge;  wah  a  n 
rona  aur  ddnt  pisnd  hogd. 

13  Tab  Yisti'ne  uHsubaddrkokaha, 
Ja,  aurjaiad  tii  fiudn  Jaya,  tera  liye 
waisd  hi  ho :  aur  usi  ghari  us  kd 
chhokri  changd  ho,gaya. 

14  K  Aur  Yisii'  ne  Patrus  ke  ghar 
merj  ake  dekhd,  ki  us  ki  aas  pari,  aur 
ns  par  tap  charhi  hai, 

15  Aur  ub  ka  hath  chhud  ;  aur  tap 
us  par  se  atar  g&yf,  aur  wuli  uthi,  aur 
uu  ki  khidmat  kame  lagi. 

16  T  Jab    sham  hui    ua   ko    pai 


baliutoii  ko,  jiu  MI  diK)  charhti  the,  Ide ; 
aur  us  uo  mi  ruhon  ku  kalam  hi  ne  dur 
kiyd,  aur  sab  k*o  jo  bimar  the  uhangA 
kiyd : 

17  TA  ki  jo  Yfw'aiyAh  nabi  ne  kahd 
thd  pura  howe,  ki  Us  ue  dp  hauidvi 
niaiidagidiik'  lin.aur  haiudri  bimdridrj 
utlid  lin. 

'18  "f  Jab  Timi'  ne  bahut  si  bhir 
apne  ds  pds  dekhi,  us  ne  hukm  kiyd, 
ki  p4LJftivoD. 

19  Aur  ek  faqih  ne  dke  us  se  kaha, 
Ai  UatAd,  jahAn  kabin  tii  jde,  ntairi 
tera  pichhe  ehaldngd. 

20  Aur  Yisu'uc  ussckahd,  ki  Lom- 
riou  ke  liye  uiduderj,  aur  liawd  ke 
jiarandon  ke  wAsto  baserc  hain,  pai 
Ibu  i  A'daro  ke  liye  jagah  nahin  jalian 
apitd  air  dharc. 

21  Uake  shagirdon  men  sedusrene 
us  sc  kabd,  Ai  Khudawimd,  mujhe 
rukhsat  de,  ki  pablo  jdkur  apne  bdp  ko 
gdnin. 

22  Par  Yisti'ne  us  ae  kahd,  Tti  mere 
pichhe  d,  aur  murdon  ko  apno  murde 
gdrne  de. 

23  1  Aur  jab  wub  naw  par  charha, 
us  ke  ahagird  us  ke  pichho  dc. 

24  Aur,  dekho,  daryA  raeQ  aiai  bari 
andhi  tii,  ki  ndw  lakron  men.  chhip 
jali  tbi ;  par  wuli  aola  thd. 

25  Tab  us  ke  ahdgirdon  ne  pds  dke 
me  jagdyA,  aur  kalid,  Ai  Kbuddwaml, 
bKDHg  bacii,  ki  bftm  balak  hote  hain. 

12 


IX.        Ek  majltij  ho  changd  k  triui. 

2fi  Us  ne  unheii  kaha,  Ai  kain- 
'iatkpido,  kyuii  dane  ho?  Tab  us  ne 
uthke  bawd  aur  daryd  ko  diilita,  to 
bard  niwd  ho  gtivd.  * 

27  Aur  log  Ci'ajjub  l;arkc  kalmo  h- 
ge,  ki  Yih  kis  tarah  ka  admi  hai,  lu 
hawd  aur  darya  bhi  us  ki  mdnte  hain  ! 

28  f  Jab  us  pdr  Gargasimm  ke 
mulk  men  pahuncEa,  do  shakhs,  jin 
par  deo  cbarhc  the,  qabron  soiiikalkur 
use  mile;  we  aiso  tutid  the,  ki  koi  us 
rAste  se  chal  na  sakfll  thd. 

29  Aur,  dekho,  unlioii  ne  eh  il  la  k  e 
kahd,  Ai  liati.',  KhudA  ke  Bete,  liamen 
tujh  se  kyd  kdm  ?  td  yahdn  Ayd,  ki 
waqt  se  pahle  hamen  dukh  do  ? 

30  Aur  un  se  kuclih  dur  bahut  sii- 
UOQ  kii  gol  chai'ti  tha, 

31  So  deVm  ne  us  ki  minuat  karko 
kahd,  Agar  tu  bani  ko  uikaltd  hai,  to 
bameg  un  wdaron  ke  gol  men  janc  do. 

32  Tab  us  nc  unlion  kahd,  Jao. 
Aur  we  nikalke  un  siiarua  ke  gol  men 
gaye ;  aur,  dekho,  suaron  kd  sdrd  gol 
kardro  parsa  darya  iuce  kudd,  aur  pdni 
nii'TJ'dub  mari. 

Tab  cliardnewale  bbige,  aur 
ihabl  men  jakar  sah^inajard,  aur  un 
kd  ahwaljin  pardeoculirhe  tin1,  bftyio 
kiyi. 

34  Aur,  dckbo,  adri  sbahr  Yisti'  ki 
mulaiidt  ko  nikla,  aur  use  dekbke  us 
ki  iuiuuat  ki,  ki  un  ki  aarhaddon  .se 
bdhar  jdwe. 

IX  BAU 

P  HIU  ndw  pir  charhkc  pdr  utra,  aur 
apno  abahr  men  dyd. 

2  Aur,  dekho,  ek  jhole  ke  mare  ko, 
jo  chdrpdi  ]>ar  pard  thd,  us  pds  lae. 
Yisii'  ne  unk:L  iuniii  di'lih  ke  us  jhole 
ke  mare  se  kaha,  Ai  bete,  khatir  jam'a 
rakh  ;  tere  guiidh  mu'di"  bue. 

3  Aur,  dekku,  ba'zc  hafhog  ue  apnc 
■lil  men  kalid,  ki  Yih  kutt  1'akj.d  hai. 

4  Yisu'  ne   uu  ke  khi\;: 

karke  kahd,  Tum  kyr.n  apne  dilon 
men  bml-gmiidni  karto  ho? 


ShdgirJon  ha  roza  MATI 

5  KyA  kahmi  asan  hai,  yih.kiTere 
gutiah  mu'Af  hue,  yA  yih,  ki  Uth,  at 
ehal  ? 

C  Lokin  ta  ki  tum  jdno,  ki  Ibn 
A 'dam   ko    zamiii    par  gunAh   inu'At' 
kanie  kA  ikhtiyar  hai,  ua  no  us  jhola 
ke  maro  se  kahA,  Uth,  apnl  charpai 
utlid  le,  aur  apne  ghar  chalA  ji. 

7  Wuh  uthkar  apne  ghar  chala 
gaya. 

H  Tab  logon  ne  yih  dukhkar  ta'ajjub 
kiya,  aur  KhudA  ki  ta'rif  kanie 
ki  a;ni  uudrat  insan,  ko  bakhahi. 

t(  \  Phir  jab  Yimi1  wakAn  se  Ago 
barbi,  to  Mati  name  ek  shakhs  ko 
Dtttbtdl  ki  chauki  par  baithu  dekha, 
aur  usb  kahA,  More  pichhe'  a.  Wuh 
uthko  us  ku  picbhe  chalA. 

10  *$  Aur  yiin  huA,  ki  jab  YimV 
ghar  men  khane  baithA,  dekho,  babut 
su  niabsul  lenowdly  aur  guiiabgar  akc 
us  ko  nur  us  ke  shagirdon  ko  aath 
kbane  baithe. 

11  JabFarision  ne  yih  dekhA,  uske 
■htebdon  ae  kaha,  Turohara  ustAd 
mahsnl-lonowalon  aur  gunahganm  ke 
satb  kyiin  kbata~haiy 

L2  Yisu'  ne  yih  sunkar  unhen  kahA, 
Bhale  diangon  ku  hakim  darkiir  naiiiij, 
baiki  bimAron  ko. 

13  Par  tum  jake  ua  ko  ma'ne  dar- 
yai't  karo,  ki  Main  qurbanl  ko  nahin, 
baiki  rahm  ko  chahti  hiin;  kytinki 
niaiii  lirtbfaofl.  konahiri,  baiki  gunah- 
akm&  ko  tauba  ke  liye'bulAne  ko  aya 
I  mu. 

14  %  Ua  wAqt  YtihannA  ke  sha- 
girdon  ne  ua  pas  aku  kaha,  ki  Ham 
aur  Paria!  kyrin  aksar  roea  rakhtu 
hain:  par  tera  shagird  roza  nahin 
rakhtc  ? 

15  Yisu'  ue unhen  kahA,  Kyaharati, 
jab  tak  dullul  tm  ko  satb  hai",  udis  ho 
aakte  hain?  lokin  we  din  Awenge,  ki 
dulki  un  so  juda  kiya  jiegA;  "tab  we 
roza  rakbcnge. 

16  Koi  purAni  qabi  par  Xore  kapre 
ki  paiwand  nahin  la'gata,  kyunki  wuh 


IX.  na  rakhna. 

paiwand  qabi  se  kuchh  khainch  luta 
hai,  aur  us  ka  cbir  barli  jitA, 

17  Aur  nayi  mai  purani  masbkon 
men  nahin  bharte  :  nahin  to  mashkeu 
pliut  jatin,  aur  mai  bah  jiti,  aur  mash- 
keg  khar&b  ho  jitin  ;  baiki  nayi  mai 
nayi  maskkou  mon  bharte  hain,  to 
donon  bachi  rahtl  hain.    . 

IH  \  Jab  wuh  yih  bAten  un  ne  kab 
mha  tha,  dekbo,ek  sardar  ne  akar  use 
sijda  kiya,  aur  kalia,  Mori  bcti  ab 
tamani  bui,  par  tu  ehal,  aur  apnd  hath 
uh  par  rakh,  ki  wuh  ji  Hfliegi 

10  Tab  Yisu'  utbke  apuo  shilgirdun 
ke  sath  us  ke  picbho  chala. 

20  \  Aur,  dekho,  ek  'aurat  nc,  lla 
k;i  barah  baras  se  lahii  jari  thA,  us  ke 
piohhe  ake  us  ko  kurte  kA  daniati 
eh  hua. 

21  Wuh  apne  ji  men  kahtl  thl,  Agar 
main  sirf  us  kA  kurtA  cUtnuingi,  bhali 
changi  ho  jaiin^i, 

22  Tab  Yisu'  ne  picbhe  pbirke  use 
dekhA,  aur  kaha,  Ai  beti,  kbdtir  jam'a 
rakh,  ki  tere  imiln  no  tujlie  «lianga 
kiya.  Pas,  wuh  'aurat  nsi  ghari  h 
changi  ho  gayi. 

23  Aur  jab  Yisii'  ua  sardir  ko  ghu 
pahuneha,  aur  us  ne  bAnsli  bajdue- 
walon  aur  jami'at  ko  gul  macbAte 
duk  ha, 

24  To  unhen  kahA,  Kan&ro  ho.  ki 
larki  mari  nahin,  baiki  got!  I 

us  par  hanae. 

25  Jab  we  log  bAhar  nikAlit  gaye,  us 
ne  andar  jAke  us  kA  hath  pukra,  aur 
wuh  larki  uthi. 

26  Tab  uh  ki  shidjrat  us  tamAm 
niulk  mcn  phailt. 

27  D  Aur^ab  Yiad'  wahan  so  ra- 
wAna  huA,  do  andhe  ufl  ke  pichhc 
pukarte  Ae,  ki  Ai  Ibn  i  Ddiid,  ham  par 
rahm  kar. 

2U  Aur  jab  wuh  ghar  men  pahun- 
chA,  we  audhe  us  pas  Ae:  Yisu'  no 
unhen  kahA,  KyA  tumben  i'atinad  hai, 
ki  roargyib  karsaktAhiinV  "Webole. 
HAn,  ai  KhudAwand. 


Do  andhon  ko  dnkk  den  A. 


MATI',  S.  Samifon  ko  kain  par  bfajna. 


2u  Tab  us  ne  un  ki  inkhon  ko 
chhuki>  ktthA,  ki  Jaisi  tumhiri  j  atiqid 
hai,*waisA  tumbire  liye  ho. 

30  Aur  uu  ki  Aukbun  khul  inviii ; 
MH  Itetf  ne  unhen  tikkl  karke  kuini, 
Khnbardar,  koi  na  jam1. 

31  Par  unhog   no  jakc 
mulk  tnog  uh  ki  shuirat  kf. 

32  •(  Jis  waqt  wo  biliar  nikle,  dc- 
Mw^legdcg^aa  ko  jU  pardeo  charhi 
thd,  us  pis  lioT 

33  Aur  jtib  dco  nikala  gayA,  wub 
giinga  bola.  Aur  logon  ue  ta'ajjub 
karke  kahi,  Aisi  kabhi  U>a«l  nu-n  a» 
dekhi  tbi 

34  Par  Farision  no  kahi,  ki  Wul 
dcoi)  ke  siiriliir  ki  mailad  se  dt'ori  ko 
nibalta  hai. 

30"  Aur  Yisd'  un  sah  shahron.  aur 
bastioy  men  jiko  un  ke  'ibadatkhiaon 
men  ta'lfm  deta,  aur  badhhabat  ki 
khushkhahari  ki  mariadi,  aur  tafog  ki 
hai  ok  bluiArf  aur  dukh  dani  «iur  karta 
UiA. 

36  %  Aur  jab  us  ne  jami'aton  ko 
dekili,  us  ko  un  par  rahm  ayi ; 
kyunki  to,  un  bheron  ki  miliiud,  jin 
ki  charwAhA  na  do,  'ajis  aur  paresiiAu 
tiiin. 

37  Tnb  us  ne  apno  shiginkm  se 
kalut,  ki  Pakko  khut  tu  bahut  bain, 
par  nuuulnr  thote ; 

38  Is  liye  tum  khet  ke  milik  ki 
minnat  karo,  ki  wuh  apne  khet  kitne 
ke  liye  mazduron  ko  bhej  dewa. 

X  BATJ. 

PHI1I  us  ne  apno  birah  shigirdon 
ko  pda  bulike  unheo  qudrat 
bakhshi,  ki  ndpik  niliori  ko  nikilen, 
aur  Uar  tarah  ki  biiuiri  aurdukh  dard. 
ko  dur  karet). 

2  Aur  birah  rasulon  ke  yo  nim 
hain  ;  Pahla,  BbauiiTuD,  jo  Patrus  kah- 
lilA,  aur  us  ki  bhAS  AndryAB ;  Zabadi 
ki  beta  Ya'qdbi  aiir  m  ^A  bnii 
YuhanuA ; 

3  Fail  Ini*  aur  IWthulftiiia ;  Thuma, 

J4 


aur  mahMl-lenewila  Mati  ;  Haiti  ka 
btita  Ya'qiib,aur  Labbi,  jo  Thaddi  bhi 
kaiilitA ; 

4  Sbamn'un  Kaniiri,  aur  YabudAli 
Is^anyiki,  jia  «e  use  pakajwi  bhi 
diya. 
tamani  I  5  Un  birahori  ko  Yisu*  no  farniake 
bbef»,  ki  GattipHimoij  ki  t;iraf  «ajaiii, 
aiu-  Simarion  ke  kini  sliahr  inen  dakhil 
n  a  boni : 

G  Baiki    pahle   Ieriol   ke    ghar   ki 
kboi  hiii  bheron  ke  pas  jio. 
"^7  A"ur  cbaite  hiio  manili  karo,  aur 
kabo,  ki  A'smau  ki  hAdahihat  aa»dik 


8  Bimiron  ko  chau^i  karo,  korbion 
ko  pdk  sif  biro,  murdou  ko  jilio,  deog 
ko  nikilo  •  tOBB  no  nu4't  ])iyi,"rnuft  dn. 

9  Na  soni,  na  rilpi,  DA  tiuibi  apni 
kajiiar  men  rnkho. 

10  Rasto  ke  liye  na  jholi,  na  do 
kurto,  na  jiitian,  na  lithi  lo;  kyiinki 
kburik  mawUir  ki  baM  hai. 

U  Aur  jia  shalir  yi  baati  men  di- 
kliil  ho,  diiryalt  klM  ki  liiiq  waban 
liaiin  hai,  aur  jab  tak  walii'm  m  m 
niklo,  wahin  raho. 

12  Auriab  tutu  kiai  gbar  men  jio, 
uae  aalim  karo. 

13  Agar  wuh  ghar  Jiiq  hai,  to  tum- 
biri  salim  use  pahunebega ;  aur  aj^ar 
Iiiq  nahiii,  tu  turohiri  salim  tutu  par 
pbir  iwegi. 

14  Aur  jo  koi  tumben  qabril  na 
kare,  aur  tumbari  batoii  oa  «une,  us 
ghar  ya  ua  ahahr  se  nikalke  apno 
pinwon  kf  gard  jbir  do. 

16  Main  tifTh  ee  sach  kahia  hritj,  ki 
Adihit  ka  din  tSadfim  aur  'Amurah 
ki  zamin  ke  liye  us  sha'nr  ki  nistat 
ziyada  asini  bogi. 

16  K  Dtkho,  main  tumhcg  bberon 
ki  minind  bbcriyou  ke  hich  men 
bbejti  bun  ;  [«3  tum  «Anirioti  ki  Urnh 
hoahyir,  aur  kabutarou  ki  miniud 
be-bad  ho. 

17  Magaridmtonsckliabnr'l.'ir  PallO, 
ki   we   tumben   apni   kauhahriuu  inun 


Un,  Aojtt'dnu,  ki  tum  MATI' 

bawal»  luHmuB.  aur  apne  'ibddatkhin- 
uQ  men  koro  mirotige; 

18  Aififi tum  mere  wiste  hikimon 

aur  bidahihon  ke  simbne  hd/.ir  kiyc 
jioge,  ki  un  par  aur  guir-qau.niuo  par 
gftw&hi  ho. 

19  Lekin  jab  wo  tumben  hawiln 
liurpij,  tikr  na  karo,  ki  haru  kis  tarah, 
yd  kyi  kahenge;  kyunki  jo  kuchh 
tumhen  kabne  boga,  so  uai  gkari  tum- 
ben uh  ki  igihi  hogi. 

20  KyuijkfTiahiiewAle  tum  nahin, 
baiki  tumbire  Bip  ki  Ruh  jo  tum  men 
bolti  hai. 

21  Bhii  bbii  ko,  aur  Mp  bete  ko, 
qatl  ke  liye  bawAla  karegd,  aur  larke 
apne  mi  bip  ki  mtikbahlat  men  uth- 
eijge,  aur  unhen  luarwaaiUenga. 

22  Aur  mere  nim  ko  bi'is  sah  tum 
so  dushmani  karenge ;  par  wuh  jo 
akhir  tak  bardisht  karogd,  so  hi  najit 
piwegi, 

23  Jab  we  tumben  ck  shahr  men 
Hfitaweu,  to  ddsre  m  e  n  bhag  jao : 
tum  se  sach  kahtd  hfijj,  ki  Tum  Israel 
ke  Bab  shabrurt  saja  na.  phir  chukoge, 
jab  tak  ki  Ibn  i  A'dam  na  a  h. 

24  SihAgird  apne  ustad  se  bari  na- 
hin, na  naukar  apne  khiwind  ae. 

25  Has  hai  ki  shagird  a.pnc  ustad 
ki>  aur  naukur  apne  khdwiud  ki  ini- 
nind  bo.  Jab  unhoy  ne  ghar  ke 
milik  ko  B»'al-xabul  kahd  hai,  tc 
kitni  r.iyida  us  ko  logorj  ko  na  ka> 
henge  ? 

2G  Pas  un  so  na  daro ;  kyiinki  kol 
rim  dhnmpi  nahin,  jo  khul  na  jas,  aur 
na  chbipi,  jo  jAni  na  jdo. 

27  Jo  kuchh  main  tumben  andhere 
nien  kabtd  hdn,  ujalc  men  kah< 
j"  Jiui'iiii   tumhare  "kdnon  men   kahd 
i;i<\  kothon  par  n  ia  nadi  karo. 

28  Aur  un  ne,  jo  badan  ko  qatl 
karte,  par  jin  ko  qatl  nahin  kar  saktc, 
mal  daro;  baiki  usise  daro,  jo  jin  aur 
badan,  donon  ko,  jahannara  men  haldk 
kar  sakti  hai. 

29  Kyi  ek  p&iee  ko  do  gaurc  nahin 

15 


X.  Injil  ke  ba'is  xat&cj'doge. 

ia?  aur  un  men  se,  ck  bbi,  tum- 
bdre  BAp  ki  be  marzi,  zainin  par  na- 
hin girti. 

30  Baiki  tumlutnj  air.  ke  hal  bUi  Utfc 
ginc  hue  hain. 

31  Pas  matdaro,  tum  bahut  gaurorj 
bihtar  ho. 

32  Ia  liye  jo  koi  ddminrj  ke  Age 
mord  icjrdr  karegi,  main  bhi  apne  Bap 
ke  dge,  jo  dsman  par  hai,  us  ki  iqrdr 
kaninga. 

33  Parjokoiddmion  keigcmeriiu- 
kir  kaiegi,  main  bW  apni;  Bip  ke 
ige,  jo  damiu  par  hai,  us  ki  inkir 
kiin'med. 

34  Yih  mat  samjhn,  ki  main  zamiu 
par  silih  karwine  dyi ;  sulh  karwdno 
nabin,'  baiki  tatwdr  clialine  ko'dyd 
Ulin. 

35  Kyunki  main  ayd  hfin,  ki  mord 
ko  us  ke  bip,  aur  beti  ko  ua  ki  mi, 
nur  babu  ko  us  ki  ais  so  judi  karun. 

36  Aur  idmi  ke  dushman  us  ko 
ghar  hi  ko  log  honge. 

37  Jo  kol  bip  yi  mi  ko  mtijh  H 
Eiyida  chilitd  hai,  mrrc  laiq  nabin 
hai ;  aur  jo  kol  boti  yi  beti  ko  nuijli 
se  Kiyida  piydr  kartd,  mero  h'uq  naliiu 
hai. 

38  Aur  jo  koi  apni  salib  uthiko 
mere  pichhe  nahfn  dti,  mere  ldiq  na- 
hin hai. 

39  Jo  koi  apni  jin  bjichiti  hai,  use 
khocgi  j  par  jo  koi  mere  wdste  apni 
jin  khoegi,  ubo  piegi. 

40  t  Jo  tumten"  qabdl  karti,  nm- 
jhe  qabul  karti  hai ;  aur  jo  mujlie  qa- 
bi'il  karti  hai,  use,  jis  no  mujlie  bhejd, 
(jahili  karti  hai. 

41  Jo  koi  nabi  ke  nam  se  nabi  ko 
«jabiil  karti  hai,  nabi  kiajtpiegi-,  aur 
jo  rastbiz  ke  nim  se  idstbdz  ko  qabul 
karti,  raatbdz  ki  ajr  pdcgi, 

42  Aur  jo  koi  ic  chhoton  raon  se  ek 
ko,  ahigirdke  tidm  se,  Impit  ek  piynki 
t  ha  tuli  pini  pilacgi,  main  tum  so  B*ch 
tahta1  hiin,  ki  wuh  apni  badld  ba  piu 
na  rahegi, 


Tab  Yfihanna  ne  qaidkbine  men 
Masih  ke  kimon  ka  hal  aunkar  apne 


MATI',  XI.  gtidr  otir  darja. 

XI  BA'B.  I     13  Kyiinki  sab  nabi  mtt  tmiretue 

l  UR   aisa  hiia,  ki  jab  Tisu'  apne  lYiihanna  ke  waqt  tak  agc  ki  khabar 
'     di. 

14  Aur  Jliyas  jo  itnewtUa  tha,  yihi 
hai ;  chaho,  to  qabiil  karo. 

15  Jia  kisi  ke  kau  sunne  ke  hon, 

BtlOO. 

1G  ^  Lekin  i»  zaman«  ke  logon  kn 
main  kia  «e  tamsil  drin?  Wfl  uiflar- 
kon  ki  manind  hain,  j»  ba/aron  meg 
baithke  apne  yaron  k»  pukarke  kahte 
hain,  ki 

17  Hara  ne  tuniharo  waste  bdnsli 
bajai,  pnr  tum  na  nache ;  ham  no 
tumhare  liye  malam,  kiya,  p«y  ftl»  i.v 
chhati  na  piti. 

18  Kyunki  Yiihanna  kbatapita  na- 
bin  aya,  aur  we  kahfcj  bain,  ki  TJs  par 
t'k  deo  liai. 

19  Ibn  i  A'dam  kh&ta  pita  aya,  aur 
we  kahte  hain,  ki  Dekho,  ek  khaii,  aur 
shar&bi,  aur  uialisiil  lenewalnn  aur 
gunah<;riron  ka  yar.  Par  hikmat  apiie 
far/andog  kY  age  ras  t  thahri, 

20  f  Tab  un  Bhahron  ko,  jin  men 
uh  ke  bahut  se  mu'ajiza  zahir  huo, 
malamat  karne  hai,  kyunki  unhon  ne 
(aura  na  ki  tbi :  ki 

21  Ai  Kurawa,  tujh  jmr  afsoa!  ai 
Bait-Saida,  tujh  par  afsos  I  kyunki 
yih  mnajize  Jo  tum  uicn  dikhae  gaye, 
agar  Siir  o  Saidd  dmq  dikbiie  jiitr?,  lo 
we  tiit  orhkc,  aur  k  hak  men  buithkc, 
kali  Ee  tanba  kar  diukir. 

22  Pas  main  tum  se  kahta  hi'in,  ki 
Siir  o  Saida  ka  liye  'adalat  ko  di  u  tum 

ziyada  asini  hogi. 

23  Aur,  ai  Knfarnahnra,  jo  asman 
tak  palvunciiaya  gaya,  tii  dozakh  itioij 
giraya  jacga  :  kyiinki  yih  mu'ajize  jo 
tujh  ucn  dikhae  gaye,  agar  Sadiim 
men  dikhae  jate,  to  aj  tak  qdjm  rnhta. 

*i4  Par  main  tum  3c  kalita  bun,  ki 
'Adalat  ke  din  Sadrim  ke  umlk  par 
tujh  h  sdyada  a«ani  hogi. 

25  T  Usi  waqt  Tisu*  phir  kahuo 
laga,  ki,  Ai  bap,  asniiin  aur  /amin  ku 
Kliuiiawaud,  main,    teri    ta'rif  karta 


bara.ii  sbagirdon  ko  bukm  de 
(j)iuka,  to  wahai)  so  rawana  htia,  ki  uo 
ko  Ehahrou  men  ta'lirn  aur  roaua&i 
kare.  _ 

na  ne  qr 
j  ka  hal 
pliagirdon  inci]  se  do  ko  bheja,  aur 
se  puchhwaya,  k  i 

'A  Kya,  jo  artewala  tha,  tii  hi  hai, 
ya  bani  dusre  ki  rdli  takeu  ? 

4  YisiV  ne  jawas  meh  unhen  kahi, 
ki  Jo  kucbh  tum  sunteaurdcklitc  lio, 
jake  Yiihanna  so  baydn  karo;  ki 

5  Andhe  dekbte,  nur  langre  cbnlte, 
korlii  pak  aaf  hote,  ftur  bahre  uunte, 
aur  murde  ji  utbte  hain,  aur  garibon 
ko  kbush-khabari  sunai  jati  bai. 

0  Aur  mubarak  wub  hai,  jo  mere 
sabab  thokar.ua  khde. 

7  1T  Jib  we  rawana  buc,  Yiad"  Yii- 
bauna  ki  bibat  janja'atoD  ho  kahne 
lagi,  ki  Tum  jangal  nien  kya  dekbne 
ko  gaye  ?  Kya,  ek  sark;inda,  jo  bawa 
se  bilta  hai  ? 

S  Phir  tum  kya  dckhne  ko  gaye  ? 
Kya,  ek  mard  ko,  jo  ruihin  knpj-a  i>a- 
hine  hai  V  dekho,  jo  mih'm  jwsliak 
pabinte  badshihoQ  ke  muhallon  nu'n 

9  Phir  tum  kyd  dekbne  ko  gaye? 
Kya,  ek  nabi?  han,  main  tum  se 
kahta  hdn,  baiki  nabi  se  bara. 

10  Kyiinki  yih  wuh  hai,  ji*  ki  ba- 
bat likha  hai,  ki,  Dekbo,  main  upna. 

■  :igo  bliujta  hiin,  jo  tere  ige 
teri  rah  durust  karegi. 

11  Main  tum  Be  sach  kahta  hiin,  ki 
Un  men  se  jo  "auraton  so  jiaida  hie, 
Yuhanna  bapMama-deoeww*  »o  koi 
bani  zahir  naluri  bui ;  k-kin  jo  asman 
ki  bailshahat  men  ebbotd  hai,  so  us  se 
bara  hai. 

12  Y(ihauna  baptisma-denewile  ko 
waqt  Ne  ab  tak  asman  ki  b&dsbahat 
par  /.abardasti  hoti  hai,  aur  zabardaet 
lug  use  (.'l i liin  lete  hain. 

m 


A'rdm.jo  W  Musik  m  kata.        MATI',  XII.  Farisian  Jei  zid-l  H  babat. 


In'ui,  ki  tii  ne  in  cbi/.on  ko  ddiiAon  aur 
'anjuianduii  so  ehhipaya,  aur  b 
par  khol  diva. 

2<i  IIAn,  ai  Bap,  ki  yunhin  tujhc 
pasam.i  a  ya. 

27  Hero  Bap  «o  Bab  kuchh  mujko 

Zpa  gaya,  aur  koi  Bete  ko  nabin 
a,  niagar  Uap;  aur  koi  Bap  ku 
n&hlrj  janta,  magai  Beta,  aur  wuh,  jis 
par  lletd  tiso  z&hir  kiya  chdhta. 

28  ^f  Ai  tum  los",  j"  thake  aur  bara 
bojh  Be  dabe  ho,  sab  mere  pas  do  ;  ki 
main  tutimetj  ariim  diinga. 

29  Mera  jv.a  apoe  lipar  le  lo,  aur 
mujh  ao  aikho ;  kyiinki  main  halim, 
aur  ilil  sc  khaksdr  lifin;  to  timi  apue 
jion  men  araiTT paoge. 

80  Kyiinki  men  jua  inulaim,  aur 
merd  bojh  halkd  hai. 

XII  BA'B. 

U  S  waqt  Yisii"  nbt  ke  din  khetnn 
nun  ee  jala  iba,  aur  ns  ke 
abigird  bhiikhe  tlie,  aur  we  balen  tor 
tor  kliane  lage. 

2  Tab  Fariaion  ne  dekhke  us  se 
kahd,  Dckli,  u.Tu  sbdgird  wuh  k  Ain 
karte  bain,  jo  sabt  ke  din  kami  rawi 
nabin. 

3  l'ar  ua  ne  uiibcn  kahA,  Kyi  tum 
ne  nabin  pftTbjf  fo  Daml  ne  kiyii,  jali 
wuh  aur  us  ke  sathi  bhuklic  thc? 

4  Wub  kyiinkar  Khuda  ku  ghar 
men.  gaya,  aur  nazr  ki  rotian  khaiu,  jo 
us  ko  aur  us  ko  sdthion  ko  khdnd  rawa 
na  tba,  magar  fsujat  kuhinon  ko  rawa 
tba? 

5  Aur  kyd  rum  ne  tauret  men  na- 
':in  parha,  ki  kahin  sabt  ke  din  baikal 

-  ki  hurmat  nabin  karWj  tau 
l:u  «B-gunah  haTn? 

6  Aur  main  tumben  kahtA  hfin,  ki 
Yulian  ek  shakhs  hal,  jo  baikal  se  bM 
boznrg  bai. 

7  l'ar  agar  twn  us  ki  ma'ni  jante, 
ki  Main  <]iirbani  ko  n:ihin,  baiki  rahm 
ko  chahtd  hiin,  to  tum  bo-gunihuu  ko 
gunahgdr  na  thahrAte. 

17 


8  Kyiinki  Ibu  i  A'dam  sabt  ka  bbi 
Khudawand  hai. 

!!  l'bir  walnln  .se  niwatia  boke  un 
ke  'ilj:iil:itkhaua  men  gaya: 

10  ^  Aur,dokho,  wahan  ek  ahakhs 
thd,  jis  ka  InUh  ciikh  gayd  thd.  Tab 
union  uv,  is  irade se  ki  ua  par  n  aliah 
karen,  us  se  piichha,  ki  Kyi  sabTke 
din  enangi  karud  rawa  hai? 

11  Us  ne  unben  kahA,  ki  Tum  men. 
se  aisd  kaun  hai,  ki  jis  ke  pas  ek  bher 
ho,  agar  wuh  sabt  ke  din  garhc  mej 
gire,  wuh  use  pakar ke  na  nikale  ? 

12  Tas  adui!  btier  se  kitnd  bibtar 
hai?  Ia  liye  sabt  ke  diu  nekf  karnl 
rawA  bai. 

13  Tab  ua  ne  ua  uhakhs  ko  kahd,  ki 
Apiia  hath  lambi  kar.  Aur  us  ne  use 
liunba  kiya,  aur  wuh  duere  ki  mdnind 
"dbanga  ho  gaya. 

14  *[  Tab  Farision  ne  bdhar  jdkc 
ua  ki  zidd  par  saldh  ki,  ki  use  kyiin- 
kar riiiir  dalen. 

15  Yisii'  yib  jdnke  wabdn  se  chala  ; 
aur  babat  si  jamd'aten  ua  ke  pichhe 
ho  lin,auruanc  un  aabkodiangakiyd; 

IB  Aur  unben  Ukld  ki,  ki  raujho 
/ahir  na  karna: 

17  TS  ki  wuh,  jo  Yas'aiydh  nabi  ne 
kabd  thd,  piird  ho,  ki 

18  Deklio  meni  khadim,  jise  main 
ne  cluina,  aur  mera  piyarii,  jia  so  merd 
dil  kbusb  bai,  main  apni  nih  us  par 
daliiuga,aur  wub  gair-qaumon  ae  ahai'a 
liayan  karegd.  * 

l'J  Wub  jliagrd  aur  ahur  na  karegd, 
aur  baziirofl  meg  koi  us  ki  Awdz  na 
BunegA, 

20  Wub  masle  biie  aarkando  kt>  na 
toregri,  aur  dhduwdn  uthtc  hue  aan  ko 
na  bujlidwoga,  jab  tak  insaf  ko  gdlib 
n  a  kardwe. 

21  Aur  us  ke  ndm  par  gair-qaumcn 
asri  mkhengi. 

22  t  Tab  us  pda  ek  nndho  gungo 
ko,jia  pai  deo  cbai-hd  thd,  !Ae,  aur  ru 
m  uw  ohangA  kly'd;  chutianobi  wuh 
andhii  giiugi  duklmu  boiue  laga» 

B 


Ek  andha  gunge  ko  MATI' 

23  Aur  sAri  Vihir  dftBg  lio  gayi,  aur 

kahne   lagi,   Kyi  y  ih  Diud  ki  beti 

•J-l  I'nr  Pnrision  ne  aunke  kahi,  ki 
Yih  deog  ku  naluri  nikahi,  inagar 
dtsin  ku  sarilar  lia'al-y.abiil  ki  raadud 

25  Yisti'  no  un  ke  khtyalon  ko 
darvift  karke  onheg  kahi,  Jo  jo  bad- 
ahahat  ipas  men  lurkbilaf  ho,  wiran 
hojiili;  aurjia  Jis  ahahr  ya  gliar  lucu 
inukhalafat  ho,  ;iMd  na  i : ■- 1 ■ 

26  Aur  agar  Shnitin  Hhaitan  ko 
nikalo,  Lu  wuh  atmi  hi  mukliiilif  hila ; 
jiliir  lis  ki  badshahat  kvi'mkar  aiim 
rahegi? 

27  Aur  agar  main  Ba'al-zabul  ki 
madad  ne  d«>n  ko  nikalti  lilin,  lo  tuni- 
hire  befi  uulieii  kis  ki  madad  m  rnkiltt: 
linin?  is  liye  m  bi  tumhdri  'adalat 
karegge. 

28  PM  ftgftr  main  Khudiki  Riih  se 
dpon  ko  nikalti  hiin,  to  a  1  hatta  Khudi 
ki  had,-h:ihat  timi  pi»  a  pahuncM. 

29  Mahin  to,  kyimkur  ho  sakti  lifti, 
ki  kof  kiai  -iorawar  ke  ghar  men  jakar 
u»  ke  asbab  hit  lo,  inagar  yili,  ki  pahle 
ns  aorfwai  kubainllie?  tabus  k&ghar 
ldte. 

30  Jo  more  sith  nahin,  meTa  mu- 
klnilil'  Jiai ;  aur  jo  men  sith  jaui'a 
nabiij  kana,  l>itbrari  hai. 

81  T  Ia  liyo  main  tum  so  kahti 
lilin,  ki  Logon  ki  liur  tarah  ka  gumih 
aur  ku IV  inn';if  kiya  jicgi;  magar  wuh 
ku&,  jo  Hiih  ke  hau^  men  ho»  legen 
ko  uiu'af  na  hogi. 

32  Jo  ko!  Ibu  i  A'dam  ko  haqq  men 
buri  kahe,  use  mu'if  ho  eakuga ;  par 
jo  ttuh  i  Quds  ke  haoo  men  buni  kaho, 
use  hargiz  u  m' A  i'  na  hogi,  na  ia  j  a  hiu 
muTj,  na  us  jahdn  men. 

33  Ya  to  diirakht  ko  achchhi  kalm, 
aur  us  ke  phal  ko  achchhi,  ya  darakht 
ko  bura  kaho,  aur  us  ka  phal  buri ; 
kyuiiki  darakht  phal  hi  so  pabchaiii 
jati  hai. 

34  Ai  sampon  ke  bachcho,  tum  bure 

13 


SIT.  chaiiyd  ftanuS, 

jhoie  kyiinkar  achchhi  bit  kali  sak  t  e 
ho?  kytinkijo  dil  men  bhara  hai;  M 
bi  mirah  par  iti  hai. 

35  Achchhi  fidiui  dil  ke  acliclihe 
khazane  «n  achchhi  chizeg  nikalti  hai, 
aur  buri  idmi  huro  khazane  Rfl  buri 
ohkes  bahu  liti. 

S  Par  main  tum  ae  kali ti  hiin,  ki 
Uar  ■:];  l»*]n'k'.a  lnit,  jo  ki  Ji.^  kulifij, 
'ailalat  ko  din  uh  kii  hiwil.t  den-.'. 

37  Kytinki  ttt  apnloiton  hi  so  riet- 
kir  elui  jaoga,  aur  npui  baton  hi  so 
f;iuia]i;;!ir  tlialnoga. 

1f  1'ab  ba'ze  faq(hon  aur  I'au- 
stog  oekwib  mq  kahi,  ki  Ai  i  i  d, 
ham  tujh  su  ek  niehiu  dekha  chibta 
hain. 

3'J  TJa  no  unhea  jawib  diyi,  ki  Ia 
zaniano  ke  bad  aur  harAmkar  log  nislian 
dhunijjitc  hain;  pu  Yrtuaa  nabi  ko 
nishiu  ke  niwi,  koi  nishin  nuhen  dikh- 
iyi  ua  jaogi. 

•tO  Kyunki  jaisa  Yijnas  tin  rit  diu 
machlili  ko  pet  men  raba,  waisa  hi  Ibu 
i  A 'dam  tio  rat  diu  zjutiiu  ke  andar 
rahegi. 

41  Ninawah  ke  log  ia  zamane  ke 
logoii  ke  sath  'adalat  ko  diu  afhenge, 
aur  unhDn  gunahgar  thahraengu;  ky- 
iiuki  unhon  ueYunas  ki  raauadi  par 
tauba  ki,  aur,  dekho,  yauiii  ek  hai  jo 
Yunaa  se  bu/urg  hai. 

42  Dnkhin  ki  begam  is  itamine  ko 
logon  ke  satli  'adalat  ko  din  uthagi, 
aur  unhen  gunahgir  thahriegi :  kyim- 
ki  wuh  zamki  ko  kariare  sc  Sulaiman 
ki  hikmat  sunno  ko  ai;  aur,  dok  ho, 
yahan  ek  Sulaiman  so  buzurg  hai. 

43  Jab  nii(i:ik  riih  adud  se  bahar 
nikalti,  to  siikhi  jagahofi  inen  i  ram 
dhundhti  phirti,  aur  jab  nahin  pati,  to 
ktilili.'ki 

4 1  Main  apne  ghar  men,  jis  w  nikli 
hurj,  phir  jiungi;  aur  ako  use  khali 
aur  jhaii  aur  lais  pati  hai. 

46  «b  wuh  jakc  aur  ait  rthon,  jo 

t«I  hain,  apne  a&th  lAi i ;  aut 

wedakhil  hoke  waiiin  baslihain;  so 


Bonewdlc  aur  U}  MATI' 

us  Admi  ka  piehhlA  lidi  n?le  se  buni 
hota  hai.  [i  zamana  ke  logofl  U  hai 
blii  aisa  bt  hogA. 

46  f  Jab  wuli  jnmfi'aton  se  vih  kah 
viiha  lini,  dekho,  us  ki  roJ  aur  ua  ki 
lihai  bahar  khare  ua  se  bit  ki  ya  ehAhte 
llic. 

47  Tab  kiwi  no  us  se  knhi,  ki  lVkh, 
teri  ma  aur  tere  l)hai  bahar  klmre  bujb 
s(r  hat  k  iya.  chahte  hain. 

4ri  Par  us  iie  jawab  men  khabar- 
deuewilou  .se  kaba,  Kaus  hai  meri 
mi  ?  aur  kaun  hain  mere  bhat  ? 

40  Aur  KpnA  bal  h  apne  ahagiruorj 
ki  taraf  barbake  kuha,  ki  Dokh  meri 
ma  aur  mere  bhiU 

50  Kyuiiki  jo  kd  mera  Mp  ki,  jo 
bunian  par  hai,  raarzi  par  eh:i!ia  b:ii. 
mcrf  bbai,  aur  baliin,  aur  mi,  woilii 
hai. 

XIII  TiA'It. 

U  SI'    roz     Yisii'    ghar    s<>    nikalke 
ikirvri  ke  kanaru  jii,  baithi. 

2  Aur  aisi  bari  bhir  us  pas  jam'a 
bui,  ki  wuh  ek  nuw  par  charh  baithi, 
aur  sari  bhir  kanAro  par  kuari  rabi. 

3  Aur  wub  unhas  babat  ai  laten 
tamsilon  men  kahne  laga,  ki  Uokho, 
ek  kisau  bij  bom*  gaya; 

4  Aur  bote  waqt  kuobh  rah  ke  ka- 
il Aro  giri,  aur  chiriyon  ne  akar  use 
ehug  UyA : 

5  Aur  kucbh  patthrili  Kamin  par 
girajahan  bahut  mitti  na  mili :  aur  is 
eabab  ki  bahut  mitti  na  pai,  jald  uga : 

li  Par  jab  dhupiuii,  jalgaya;  aur  i  s 
liy<'  ki  jar  ua  pakri  thi,  stikh  gaya. 

7  Aur  kucbh  kaiitou  men  giri; 
kantin  ne  barhke  use  daba  liya. 

8  Aur  kuchh  achchbi  zamin  men 
giri,  aur  pbal  lava,  kuchb  sau  guna, 
kuchh  Bit.li  guuA,  kuchh  tis  gunA. 

0  Jia  ke  kati  surme  ke  liyo  hon,  to 

10  Tab  shaginlon  na  pas  Ake  ua 
kahA,  Tii  uu  se  tamsilon  men   kyi'm 
kalam  harta1  hai  f 

11  Us  no  jawAb  men  unben  kahA, 

19 


XIII.  UtamtH 

ki  Tumben  'iuAyat  bni,  ki  asmin  ki 
badshahat  ke  bhed  jAnu,  par  uuhen 
'iniyat  nahin  lnii. 

12  Kyiiuki  jia  pAa  kuchb  hai,  use 
diva  jiega,  tui  tu  ki  bahut  bariui 
bogf ;  pai  jis  pas  kuobh  nahin,  us  se, 
jo  kuchb  ki  ua  pAs  hai,  80  blii  le  liya 
jaegA. 

13  Ib  liye  main  un  se  tamsilon  men 
bit  karta  hun:  ki  wu  dfikbta  h  m-  na- 
hin (iekhte,  aur  ;;uiue  hiie  nahin  sunte, 
aur  nabiij  samjylit.c  hain, 

14  Aur  un  k*  haqq  men  Taa'aiyAb 

kS  nubuwat  puri  hui:  ki  Tum  kAuon 
ae  to  sunoge,  masar  Bamjbogc  rtaliin, 
aur  Ankbon  so  dekhoge,  par  daCTift  na 
karogH :     "  z* 

15  Kyunki  is  qaurn  kA  dil  mota 
hua,  aur  we  apua  kiimin  U  linciiA  sunte 
bain.aur  unhun  ne  aani  ankhcy  mu&d 
lin,  t-A  aisA  na  bo,  ki  we  Ankhog  se 
dL'klu'ii,  aur  kAuon  so  aunen,  aur  dil  so 
samjhen,  aur  ruju'  laweti,  aur  main 
iiii]m-;j  Changi  karun. 

lfj  Par  mubarak  tumliAri  AukliPn, 
kyiinki  we  dekbtin,  aur  mubarak  tum* 
hiro  kan,  ki  we  suute  hain, 

17  Kyiinki  main  tum  se  saoh  kabta 
hun,  ki  Bahut  «i  nabi  aur  riatbAzon 
no  Arzii  ki,  ki  Jo  tum  dflkbte  bo 
dekhen,  pai  na  dekhA,  aur  jo  tum 
sunte  ho  sunen,  par  na  aund. 

Iti  *i  Abtuni  lusin  ki  tamafl  rona. 

19  Jab  koi  us  bAdshibat  ki  bit 
suni:l-,  aur  nahin  Rauiajhta,  to  wub 
sharir  Ata,  aur  jo  kuchh  u»  ke  dil 
men  boyA  gayA  le  jdti  hai;  yih  wuli 
hai,  jo  rah  ke  kanAro  l«>yA  gayA. 

20  Jo  patthrili  Kamin  men  boy4 
gaya,  wub  hai,  jo  kulim  suutA,  aur 
jald  khushi  B0  inAn  kita  hai ; 

21*  Lekin  is  sakab  ki  jar  nahin 
pakri,    Cba&&-f0ca    hai  :    ki   jab  wuli 

kalam  ke  Babab  musibat  mag  partai, 

ya  satayi  jati  hai,  to  jald  tlmkar 
kbitA  hai, 

^2  Jo  kantan  men  boyA  gayA,  wub 
hai,  jo  kalam  ko  suutA,  par  is  dunyi 


Jtij  lonewalc  ki  ««r  MATI',  XIII.  talkh  ddnon  H  tamsilev. 

'M  Yih  sab  Iidten  Yisii'  ne  un  ja- 
md'aton  ko  tamstlon  nien  kabin :  bot 


ki  (ikr,  aur  daulat  kd  farcb,  kaldm  ko 
dahd  diatfl,  aur  wuh  bc-plia!  hoti  bal 

23  Pfte  jo  ocliclihi  /.amin  men  boyd 
gaya,  wuh  hai,  Jo  kalam  ko  mati,  aur 
Sftmajota,  aur  phal  laba,  aur  taiydr  bhi 
botd,  ba'ze  men  Bau  guna,  baf 
s;ifli  gund,  liaV.i.!  men  i.is  guna. 

24  1[  Phir  ua  iic.  i-k  aur  lamsU  lako 
unhen  kahd,  ki  A'smdn  ki  badshdhat 
ua  admi  ki  mdnitnl  hai,  jis  Ba  ackchhd 
bij  apne  khet  men  boyd. 

35  Var  jab  log  ho  gaye,  us  kd  duah- 
nm»  ayd,  aur  ua  ke  gfth&S  k»  dai- 
miydn  karwa  dana  boke  chald  guyd. 

26  Jiswaq)  aukurd  nikla,  aur  hdlon 
lagin,  tab  kans-a  dana  blii  {tabir  hiia. 

27  Tab  us  gharwdle  ke  naukaron 
ne  dke  ua  ae  kahd,  Ai  adhib,  kyii  tii  ae 
khet  men  achchhe  bij  na  Ixio  the? 
phir  karwe  ddna  kalian  ae  Ae  ? 

28  lfs  ne  unheii  kahd,  Kisil  dush- 
man  ne  yiii  kiya.  Tab  naukftKfl  ne 
kahd,  Agar  marzi  bt>,  to  bara  jako  un- 
hen jaru'a  karon. 

2i>  Us  iit!  kahd,  Nabin  ;  aiad  na  ho, 
ki  J(ib  tum  karwe  dantm  ko  jaui'a 
karo,  w  u»  ku  adili  gelmu  bhi  ukbdr 
lo. 

30  Kdrne  ke  din  tak  donoii  ko 
ikatthe  barhne  do;  ki  main  katne 
k.;  WKjt  kar.newdlnn  ko  kuhi'njgd,  ki 
Pahlekarwedanejanvn  karo,  aur  jaJAne 
ke  mSate  un  ke  gatthe  bfedfao;  par 
geiiiin  mere  khatte  mea  ja.m'a  karo. 

SI  1  W  uh  un  ke  wanLo  ek  aur 
tamsil  htjTJ,  ki  A'smdn  ki  badskdbat 
khanial  ke  dana  ki  mdniud  hai,Jlse 
ek  abakhs  nalekeaute  khet  moa  boyi. 

32  Wuh  sab  bljfifj  mrri  cnnofA; 
BU  Jab  uga,  1«  *ab  tarkdrion  st:  baya 

■■r  niwi  per  hobi,  ki  cblliyierj 
:  iialion  par  bascra  kartiri. 

33  ^  Us  ne  un  k«  ek  aur  tamsil 
kahi,  ki  A'smdii  ki  ba.lshahat  khamir 
Iri  minind  hai,  jise  "'k  'aurat  ne  le-kar 
ate  ke  tin  jiaimanon  mcn  niildyi, 
yahda  tak  ki  wuh  sab  kaamlra  lio 

g«yd- 


Lie  tamsil  un  se  na  boltd  tbd: 

35  Td  ki  jo  nabi  ne  kah.4  tbti,  pura 
ho,  ki  Maiii  tainsili'Tj  lakar  kulim 
kan'ing.i;  main  un  bdton  ko,  jo  dunyd 
ke  ehurii'  se  ]K>nhida  hain,  zabir  kar- 
v.ij.  i'i. 

36  Tab  l'iau'  un  jama'aton  ko 
rukhsat  karkc  ghar  ko  gaya  ;  aur  ua 
ke  ibagirdog  Dfl  m  pu  tik  kalia, 
Kbi't  ke  karwe  ddna  ki  tamail  bameg 
Uita. 

37  Us  ne  unhen  jawdb  men  kahd, 
Achchlie  hij  kd  bunewdla  lbn  i  A'dara 
hai ; 

38  Khct,  dunvd  bnd;  aclnihlic  liij, 
is  badsbaliat  ke  larke  hain  ;  aur  karwo 
dana,  sharir  ke  larzand  ; 

39  W  u  h  diiMhuiau,  jis  nc  unberj 
boyd,  Bhaitaii  hai ;  kdtno  kd  wagt, 
is  dunyd  ka  dkliir ;  aur  katuuwdle, 
tirisbte  hain. 

40  l'aa  jis  tarah  karwe  dana  jam'a 
kiye  jdte,  aur  ag  raeij  jaldo  jate  kain, 
is  jahdn  ke  dkbir  raefl  ai.~;i,  lu  hogd, 

41  Ibu  i  A'dam  a|>ne  firialitori  ko 
bbejegd,  aur  we  sab  thuUar-khilaiK- 
wdli  cbJzon,  aur  badkdrojj  ko,  us  kl 
bad*hahat  moti  so  chunkar, 

42  Unheti  ja)U'  lauiirnicuddldengoj 
aur  wahan  rond  aur  diiitt  jtisni  lu  iga. 

43  Tab"  riWbaz  ajjiie  Uap  ki  b.id- 
shahat  men  dftdh  ki  niiinind  mirani 
bogge.    Ji;o  kau  Btuvuo  ke  liye  ton, 

-14  %  Phir,  asnidrj  ki  bddsbdhnt  us 
khazdne  ki  mdnind  hai,  jo  khet  niea 
gord  hai,  jiae  ok  shakha  pdke  chbipi 
deii  hai,  aur  khush\  ke  min  Jdko 
apnd  aab  kuchh  becbtd,  aur  ua  khei 
ko  mul  letd  hai. 

45  1  Phir,  taman  kf  bddshAhftt  us 
sauddgar  ki  mduind  hai,  jo  qimali 
moticn  ki  taldah  men  hai. 

4G  Jab  us  u  ek  beBh-tjiattt  moti 
pAyi,  to  jdkejo  kucfab  »s  kd  thd  sab 
bech  ddldj  aur  uso  mol  liya. 


MaehJdt  kej'dl  ki  tamsil. 


MATI',  XIV.  Y>A'-inii<>.  ke  gir  kii  h'ita  ja-na. 


47  t  Phir,  aamaii  ki  badahdliat  as 
jal  ki  maiiiiid  hai,  30  daryd  meg  dahi 
gaya,  aur  har  tarah  ki  macbhli  samet 
lava. 

18  Jab  wuh  bhar  gayd,  OM  kanare 
khaiiioh  Ide,  aur  baithko  achchbi 
lnaehhlian  bu  n  anuti  men  jani'a  kin,  par 
buri  pheuk  «13. 

49  lu  jakdn  ke  dkhir  men  aiaa  hf 
hogd ;  firisliu;  awerjge,  aur  rastbazorj 
meu  su  shariron  ku  alag  karegge, 

50  Aur  utiheii  jalte  tauiir  uuen  dai 
dcnge;  walidu  roua  aur  daut  piara 
bogd. 

51  Yisii*  no  unhen  kahd,  Tum  yih 
eab  BauijheV  Unboii  ne  kaha,  Han, 
Klimiawand. 

L>li  Tab  us  ne  unhen  kaha,  Itar  ek 
fiicjili  jo  asinan  ki  badtduUiat  ki  ta'liiu 
pa  cbuka,  us  gharwale  ki  nuiiiiud  hai, 
jo  apuo  kliazanc  se  uayi  aur  purani 
chfsei]  (likiilta  bal 

53  T  Aur  aisa  hud,  ki  jab  Yisft' 
yili  tamsitOB  kali  chuka,  to  wahin  se 
rawana  h  i'. a. 

54  Aur  apue  watan  men  ake  us  ne 
un  ke  'ibadatkhana  men  unhen  ai.-u 
la'lin;  di  ki  ive  kairan  hue,  aur kahue 
laga,  ki  Aisi  hikmat,  aur  nm'ajize,  U3 
m:  kalian  so  \&e'( 

00  Kya  yiii  barhai  ka  beta  nahirj  ? 
aur  us  ki  uni.  Manyam  nuhin  kaulari? 
aur  u»  ke  bluii  Ya'ipib,  aur  Yosea,  aur 
Shama'tin,  aur  Yahud&h  ? 

5G  Aur  ua  ki  aab  bahinon  hamare 
sdth  nahin  hain.?  Pas  ua  ue  yih  Bab 
kuelui  kalian,  se  paya? 

67   Unhon  ne  us  so   thokar   khdi ; 
par  Siali'  ue  unhen   kaha,   ki   Nnbi 
apuo   watan  aur  g  liar   ke   siwd, 
kabin  be-'izzat  nahin  hal 

06  Aur  us  ne  un  ki  be-ia'thpidi  ke 
sabab  wahan  bahut  uiu'ajize  nalu'11 
dik  liat'. 

XIV  BA'B. 

U  B  waqt    milik    ki    chauthai    ke 
lidkiin    Herodis    ne    Yiad'    ki 
sbuhrat  suni, 
21 


-  Aur  apoe  naukarou  se  kaha,  ki 
Yih  Yuhaniia  bnntisina-donewdla  hai , 
wuhi  ruui-don  men.  »0  ji  utiiahai;  ia 
liye  ua  ae  iiiu'aji/.<:  zahir  hote  hain. 

■'i  %  Ki  Herudis  ue  Ytibaiiua  ko 
Herodiyds  ko  aabab,  jj  us  ke  bliai 
Faillhiis  ki  jorii  tlii,  giriftar  kiyii,  aur 
baodhke  qaidkbirie  meu  dai  diya  iba. 

4  Js  liye  ki  Yuhanua  n*.-  us  «e  kaltii 

a,  ki  Tujbe  ua  ko  lakbna  rawa 
nabja. 

H  Aur  Herodia  De  chaha,  ki  use 
iiuir  dale,  par  'awaimu  »0  dara  ;  kyun- 
ki  we  use  nabi  jiiucc  the, 

li  Par  jab  Berodia  ki  salgirih  lagi, 
Hcrtidiyaa  ki  Udl  uu  ko  darmiyda 
udclii,  aur  Ilerodia  ko  khutfa  Ifiyt 

7  Chunanchi  us  no  qatam  khdke 
wa'da  kiyii,  ki  Jo  kuchh  iii  tnangOgi, 
niaiii  lujlic  dunga, 

W  Tab  wuh,  jidsa  U3  ki  ind  ne  uso 
aikhd  rakhd  tha,  lx)li,  ki  Y'f.hamii 
bnptisma-denewdla  ki  sir  thali  men 
yahin  inujiic  ruaugwa  dy. 

y  Bddshah  dilgirhiid:  parusqa«im 
ke,  aur  un  ke  «abah  jo  us  ku  .-aih 
khdne  baitlie  the,  us  ue  hukin  kiya, 
ki  UM  ld  «lewen. 

10  Tab  ua  ne  logtm  ko  bhejkar 
ipiidkhdne  men  us  ka  air  katwdyd ; 

1 L  Aur  us  ka  bir  tliali  men  Idke  us 
larki  ko  diya:  wuh  apui  uia  ke  pas 
leai 

12  Tab  us  ke  shdgirdoij  ne  ake  laafa 
uthdi,  aur  use  gara,  aur  jakc  Y'isii'  ko 
khabar  di. 

13  ^  Jab  Tiau'  ne  auna,  to  wahdn. 
we  kiabti  par  liaithko  alag  ek  wiriao 
meu  Wkjii  lug  yih  suriko  shahron 
se  nikie,  aur  khushki  ki  rali  se  us  k« 
pichhe  ho  liyo, 

14  Aur  Y'isu'  ne  nikalkar  ek  hari 
libir  dekbi  ;  un  par  use  ratun  dya,  aur 
jo  un  men  bimar  the,  utiluaj  ohaiigd 
kiyd. 

iii  %  Aur  jab  shdm  MI,  ua  ke 
shagirdon  ne  us  pa»  ako  kaha,  ki 
Jagah  wirdua  hai,  aur  ahaui  ho  gayi, 


Mbutft  tctmtmdar  por  eSe&4.      MATI' 

logou  ko  rukiisat  kar,  ki  we  b&atfonl 
nienjdko  apae  ffitte  k  bau  o  ku  mol 
k-u. 

['i  Yisi'i'  ne  un  sc  kabd,  U"  kd 
jdi\d  fewihb  zaito  mhin  ■,  tum  yub«$ 
klidue  ko  do. 

17  Unliim  ne  HB  »  kabd,  ki  Yahdri 
liiiiiumipits  ji;itj(  b  rofi..niuirdomachh- 
linu  ke  mv.ii,  kw/lili  iialiUi  Uni. 

18  Wnh  bola,  ki  Uuhen  yahdn 
mara  pita  Idu. 

19  Phir  iirf  ne  bukro  kiyd,  ki  log 
gfafa  parbaifhe&;  tabun  pandi  roH'Hj 
nur  do  machhliorj  ko  liyd,  aur  aainan 
ki  taraf  dflkhkat  harakat  <li,-,uir  ro$Us 
torki;  «hrigirckm  ko,  nur  lUgirdon  Jll; 
logoo  ko  din. 

20  Aur  wo  tmli  khdbe  asi'irk  hifo; 
«nr  unhon  nn  t.nkrnn  ki,  Jo  bach  rnbe 

■    n  inkrisin  l'liiiii  uthdfn. 

21  Aur  we,  jiulion  Bfl  khdyd  tha, 
siwa  'nuratoii  aur  larkurj  ke,  qarib 
piinch  bazar  ke  inard  thc. 

22  %  Aur  us  dam  Yi~ii'  B$  VpBt 
Shigiraog  ko  takid  sc  farmdya,  ki 
kitbti  j!!ir  dnirliko  niere  6gt  pir  jio, 
i;ll.  tuk  in:Uh  fogog  ko  mkEsat  kanin 

23  Pkir  dp,  logon  korukhsat  kurku, 
'  thi'd  ke  lij'f    pakar   par  akola  charb 

:  u'jal)  slLam  hi'ii,  wahin  akcla 
rahii. 

24  Par  w  uh  fciubtf,  M  waqt,  daryd 
ke  bich  pahunelikar  lalifon  so  ilag- 
DWgitJ  t'tii:  kyiiuki  hawa  ruukhalif 
Uii. 

2Ji  Aur  rat  ko  piobhle  pahnr  Yisii' 
:    ■  ili.ilci  bu  nn  |.<is  dyd. 

26  Jnb  shdgirdoQ  ne  ubo  daryd  par 
chalte  dekha,  wo  gnabrSke  i  ■ 

Vili  l'lnii  hai ;  aur  dnrk*!  r.hilld\ 

27  W'r'iijiiin  Yisi'i'  ae  uiuicii  LiH,  ki 
Kli&tu  jain'iC  rakho;  «jam  hi  buai' 
mat  daro. 

2H'Tah  Patrna  nc  us  sejawab  men 
■  KliuiUittiiiii],  agar  u'ihibai.to 
mujfce  fanoa,  ki  main.  pdm  par  cbftlke 
U're  pas  Aiin. 

29  Uh  ne  kabd,  A'.  TabPatr'ifikisb 


XV.  Furision  ha  mnlamat  pand. 
ti  ]iar  se  utnrke  fAni  i>ar  chalne  lagi, 
ki  Yisii*  ke  pdsjie. 

30  Par  jab  oekhd  ki  bawd  toz  hai, 
todjura;  aur  jab  dtibne  laga,  chillake 
kaba,  Ai  Kbnviawand,  mujbe  bachs. 

g]  SVi'inhiij  Yir.ii'  ne  liitb  barbake 
Dge  pakar  liyii,  aur  ua  st;  knha,  Ai  kam- 
i'ati<idd,  ti  kyiip.  fihakk  liya? 

32  Aur  Jab  we  kwbLi  i»r  de,  Siawd 
tbam  gayi. 

33  Aur  unbon  ne,  jo  kiwliti  par  tim, 
dke  uae  aijda  karke  kabd,  Tu  aacb 
tnucb  Kbudd  kd  lfetd  bai, 

3-1  11  Phir  par  utarke  Gannt-sarat 
ko  inulk  nieij  paliuitche. 

3.r)  Aur  wahAii  ko  logOfl  nu  use 
pabohejoke  us  Uat&ta  girdnawdh  men 
sbnbrat  di,  aur  wib  binuiioTi  ko  m  pda 
Ide; 

30  Aur  us  k(  minnat  ki,  ki  bqftt  ub 
ki  pushak  kd  ddman  cblnlen  :  nur  jit- 
iioii  ne  cbbiia,  bilkull  cbarigeho  gayo. 

XV  BA'B. 
TpAB   Yartisalain    ko    farphon    aur 
|        Fariaitm  w.  YUd'  piis  dke  kabd, 

2  Tore  shagird  kyibj  buziir^orj  ki 
riwdyatorj  kr»  tdl  deta  hain''  si  ro^ 
khaim  ke  warjt  npm*  Uath  iviliiij  dlifto. 

3  Us  ne  unheu  jawab  men  kabd,  ki 
Tuiii  kiri  wtUte  apui  riwayaiug  ko 
.Siilnib  Kliuda  kd  hukm  tal  detfl  flO  F 

I  Kyunki  K'hndd  ne'  fannayft  hai, 
lu  Apne  itid  bdp  k( 'kzat  kar;  aur  jo 
nid  yd  bdp  par  Wnat  kara,  jan  ko  mara 
jde. 

6  Par  tum  kalite  ho,  ki  Jo  koi  apne 
bdp  yd  md  ko  kalut,  ki  Jo  kuohh 
mttjhs  liijii  ko  licini  wajib  thd,  so 
Keliki  ki  nttjtr  Jiuii; 

u'  Aur  apne  bdp  ya  md  ki  'izzat  ria 
kari:,  tu  km  lili  iiiu/ayarjanaliin.  I'au 
WKi  ne  apni  ri-nay?,t  &e  KbuAi  ko 
hukm  ko  batil  kiyd. 

7  Ai  riydkiiro,  Yas'aiydh  rio  kyd 
khub  tunihdre  Jiaf[(]  inen  nubdwat  ki, 
jali  kabd,  ki 

8  YiU  log  apne  niunli  8e  meri  mz- 
diki  dhilndtitc,  aur   honthtm  ae  meri 


Ek  fcrki  ko  MATI 

'izzat  karto  hain,  par  un  ke  dil  mujh 
bc  dur  hai  n  t 

9  Lekin  iro  'abai  tupt'i  paraslisb 
karte  hain  ;  kyunki  foi'lim  karun  men 
insan  bi  ke  luikra  aunitc  hain. 

10  1T  I'liir  n>  M  jamd'at  k<i  balakar 
un  sc  kahd,  Simo  aur  Bamjho  : 

11  Jochiz  munh  men  jati  hai,  Aditif 
b)  Tiripik  nahin  karti,  bulki  wah  Jo 
uumh  sc  Dikaiti  hai,  wuhi  wlrnl  ko 
uapak  karti  hai. 

12  Tab  lis  ko  shdgirdon  no  us  pd« 
&ke  iis  s?  kuini,  Kya  ni  jdntd  hai,  ki 
larisi  yib  bfit  Kinkat  nira/.  Ml  V 

18  &■  ne  nn  sc  jawab  men  kah&j  Jo 
paudhd  mcre  asmdni  IMp  ne  tiuhiri 
lagaya,  jar  ae  ukhiird  jdegd. 

14  Unhen  jdne  do:  «o  andhe  an- 
dhon  ke  rdh-dikhlant'wdle  hain.  Phir 
agar  andhd  andhc  ko  rah  dikhdwe,  to 
donon  garhe  nlt'U  g"'''!.1-"-- 

15  Patrua  nc  unhcn  jawab  men 
kuini,  W  u  h  tamsil  hamen  sunjhd, 

10  Yisu'  ne  kaha,  KyA  tiua  bhi  ab 
tak  be-samajh  bu? 

17  Abtak  tum  nahin  aamajhtfi,  kJ 
jo  kuchb  tnunh  nion  jati,  pct  men 
partd  hai,  aur  garhe  nion  jihenka  lata  r 

18  Par  wuh  baten  jo  munh  sc 
nikaltfn,  dil  se  ati  hain ;  wc  adim  ko 
napak  karti  hain.. 

19  Kyunki  ban  khiyul,  klinn,  zina, 
hardrnkAri,  cbori,  jh.iif.iii  gawahi,  kufr, 
dil  bi  se  nikaltc  hain. 

20  Vilii  lvatena.lfiiikinapakkarnp- 
w:ili  hain:  BU  UU  Shot  h&th  khami 
khdna  ddmi  ko  napAk  nahin  karti.. 

21  %  Tab  Yisii'  wahiiij  se  rawan  a 
boke  Stir  aur  Su'ula  ki  atraf  men 
gayfc 

22  Aur,  dckho.ck  Kati'aui  'aurat 
wahan  ki  sarzamta  sc  uikalke  use 
pukartl  lnii,  chaU  di,  ki  Al  Khuda- 
ii-anii,  Daud  ke  bete,  mujh  pnr  rahm 
kar,  kl  merl  beti  ek  deo  ke  galbe  se 
behal  bal 

23  Us  ne  ktichh  jawab  na  diya, 
Tab  us  ke  shdgirdon,    ne  pas  akar 

23 


f  XV.  changi  fcomti, 

uh  kl  minnat  ki,  ki  Use  rukhaat  kur, 
kyuiiki  wuh  ham&rc  pichha  eh  i  liati 
hai. 

24  Us  ne  jawab  men  kahd,  Main 
Israel  ke  gliar  U  khoi  bui  bheron  ke 
BiwA,  aur  kisi  pin  imbin  biiejil  gaya. 

25  Par  wuh  ai,  MU  use  sijda  karkc 
kahd,  Ai  Khmliiwaml,  mati  matlad 
kar. 

20  Us  no  jawAb  diya,  Mundsib 
nahin  ki  lafkon  ki  roti  lekar  kutton 
ko  pHenk  dewen. 

■21  Us  nc  kalui,  Sacli,  ai  KhinU- 
wand,  magar  kutio  bhi,  jo  tukre  un 
ke  khudiiwand  ki  mcK  se  girto,  khate 
iiain. 

2H  TabYisii'nc  jawab  men  use  kaha, 
Ai  'aurat,  terd  i'atiiuid  liari  liai :  jo 
chdhti  hai,  tere  liyc  ho.  Aur  uai  ghari 
ua  ki  beti  changi  ho  gayt 

29  Phir  Yisu'  wahin  se  rawana 
hoke  Jaiil  ke  daryd  ko  nazdik  ava ; 
aur  sk  pahar  par  clnulikar  waluiu 
balthi. 

80  Aur  bnhut  jama'ati'n,  langrtm, 
ainllion,  gi'nigou,  nm  tiindun,  aur  un 
ke  wwi  baluiLrroij  ko  siitb  lekar  ua 
pds  Ain,  aur  unheri  Yisn'  ke  pdnwon 
par  dald;  aur  ua  ne  unlien  changd 
kiyd:" 

31  Aisd  ki  jab  un  jamd'aton  no  de- 
klnl,  ki  guuge  bolte,  tunilc  tajidurust 
hote,  langrc  chalte,  aur  andho  dekhte 
hain,  to  ta'ajjub  kiyi,  aur  Israel  ko 
Klui'i.iivand  ki  sitiLth  ki. 
"  32  t  Tab  YUu'  na  apne  sbigirdon 
ko  apno  pas  bulike  kaki,  ki  Mujhe  ia 
jamd'at  par  rahra  ata  hai,  ki  tin  dln 
merc  pAth  rahi,  aur  un  ke  pas  kuchh 
khdne  ko  nahiij ;  aur  main  nahin  chdh- 
tA  ki  unhtn  faqa  «e  mfbaU  karun, 
aisa  nn  ho  ki  rah  men  kaiiiu  na-tiqat 
ho  jden. 

33  Us  ke  Bhagird'irj  ne  us  so  kahd, 
ki  Iswirano  men  ham  itni  ro^lin  ka- 
!,;\'j  u  piwaa,  ki  iiisi  jama'at  ko  asiida 
kares  ? 

31  Tab  Yiaii'   ne   uuhen  kahd,  ki 


Fartai  ek  nhhdn  nu'tngte. 

Tiujilidrr  pas  kiini  rutidij  haiii?     Wu 

bole,  S&t,  aur  kai  ek  chlmti  machhli. 

SS  T»  UI  uu  jtiuuPaturi  ko  liukm 
kiyd,  ki  zamiu  par  baith  j&we_ 

.%  Phir  mi  M:'tt  rotioii  aur  niaelihllon 
ke  lckar  shukr  kiya,  aur  torkar  apne 
Kliigirdan  ku  diyd,  aur  shagirdon 
bgoii  ko. 

37  Aur  Rah  khike  asudahne:  aur 
tukron  ae,  j"  bach  rana  the,  unhon  ne 
B&t  l'ikviiin  bh  sukar  uthdin. 

38  Aur  klianewdlc,  siwd  'auraton 
aur  larkon  ke,  chdr  hazdr  lnard  the, 

39  Aur  jamaaton  ku  rukhnafc  karke 
klafiti  par  charbJ,  aur  Mandau!  ki  atra f 
meri  liya. 

XVI  BAU 

FARI'.SI'ON  aur  Saduqfon  ne  dko 
azinaish  ke  liye  ub  se  ekahd,  ki 
Ek  dtmiani  tuakan  haincn  dikhd. 

2  Us  ne  jawab  men  uu  kc  kabd,  ki 

.i  lioti,  tum  kahte  h«,  ki  Kal 
pharahha  boga,  kyi'mki  dsmdn  lal  hai. 

3  Aur  eulili  ko  kahte,  ki  A'j  dndhi 
chalagi,  kyugkiasnian  lalaurdhiuidh- 
ld  hai.  Ai  riyakdro,  tum  a-sman  ki 
surat  ko  imtiydz  kar  sakti)  lio,  par 
wai|t(jn  ki  iiishAiiian  naluri  daryaft 
kar  Mktsr 

4  Is  zaindne  ko  had  aur  haramkar 
tog  tii.dian  dliiiudhie  haiti  ;  par  Yiinas 
nabi  ke  nisbdii  ke  siwd"  kui  undian 
uuhen  dikh&yd  na  jiegd.  Aur  wuh 
imbau  ohhorke  clia'd  gftyd. 

5  Aur  us  ku  shagird  pdr  piilmiiche. 
aur  roti  witb  leue  Vihiil  gnye  the. 

ti  T  Yisii'  ne  nnhen.  kaha,  Farisfog 
aur  Baddolon  ke  khaniir  se  khabarddr 
aur  chaukas  rabo. 


■ 
i>  hai,  kiliai 


lage,  Us  ki  yih.  sabab  hai,  ki  liam  roti 
na  Ide. 

y  Lekfal  Yi-'i'  M  yih  daryaft  karke 
kaha,  ki  Ai  kaza-?atiqado,  Win  apne 
dil  men  kyt'm  soehte  ht>,  ki  yih  roti  na 
line  ke  sabab  n  hai  ? 

&  Ab  tftk  nahirj  samajhtc  ho?  un 
pduch  hazar  ki  pduch  toff&n  uahin  yad 
24 


i  XVI.  .Vti.nA  fri  babat 

takhta,   aur    ki   kitni    tokrian   bhari 
uthdin  ? 

10  Aur  na  un  ckdr  bazar  ki  sat 
rotidn,  aur  ki  tum  ne  kitui  tokrian 
bharkar  uthdin  ? 

11  Yih  luiit  kyiin  tiahiii  .samajbte 
ko,  ki  main  ue  tum  se  Mti  ki  babat 
nakiu  kabd,  ki  tum  Farision  aur 
S:iduL]iou  ke  kharm'r  sechaukiw  raho? 

12  Tab  unhoii  ne  ma'liiin  kiyd,  ki 
ub  no  roti  ke  kliamir  su  nahin,  baiki 
Fariaon  aur  Haduiporj  ki  ta"liiu  se 
chaukas  ralmo  ko  kaha  thd. 

13  T[  Aur  Yisu'nc  Qaisarij'd  Filip- 
pl  ki  ati'df  men  akar  apne  uiagirdon 
se  piichhd,  ki  Loa  kyd  kahte  hain,  ki 
maiii,  jo  Ibu  i  A'dam  hiig,  kami  hiin? 

14  Unhon  uo  kahd,  ki  Ba'ze  kfthte 
liain,  ki  Tu  Yiihannd  baptisma-dene- 
wald  hai ;  ba'se,  lliyds ;  aur  ba'/.e, 
Yaramiyiib,  y.-i  nabion  men  se  kol. 

15  Ua  ne  uiihw  kahd,  Par  tum  kya 
liahte  Ini,  ki  main  kami  hriij  't 

16  Shama'un  Patrus  ne  jawab  majj 
kaiia,  Tfl  Masih  ziuda  Khuda  ka  Bata 
hai. 

17  Yisti'  ne  jawdb  men  use  kalut, 
iVi  Shaiuii'ilu  Bar-Yiinas,  uiubdrak  tu; 
kyonki  jisui  aur  klu'm  ue  nahin,  baiki 
more  Bdp  »e,  jo  dauidu  par  hai,  tuju. 
pai  yili  tabir  kiyd. 

\H  Malg  yih  bhi  tujh  sc  kahia  liiin, 
ki  T6  Patrus  hai,  aur  main  is  pattbar 
par  apui  ka'.iniyi  kuiduiigd :  aur  do- 
/,akh  kd  ikhriyar  us  ]tir  na  chahwft. 

19  Aur  nmiii  asrudn  ki  bdd^bahat 
ki  kunjidn  tujhe  dunga:  jo  kuchh  tu 
zamiu  par  hand  karegd,  dsiudu  par 
baud  kiyd  jdegd  ;  aur  jo  kuchh  t  d 
samin  par  khulega,  dsmau  par  khold 
' '  -.i. 

MO  Tab  us  ne  apne  slidgirdon  ko 
hukni  kiya.ki  ki.*ii  se  na  kalnui,  ki 
mais  Swl'  Uaaib  liiin- 

21  i  Us  waqt  ae  YiNiVaprie  shigir- 
don  ku  khabar  dene  lagi,  ki  zariirliai 
ki  main  Yaruaabu.ii  k^  jatui,  aur  bu- 
zurgon,  aur  sardar  kahinonj  aurl'aqih- 


Patrus  hl  iqrar. 


MATI',  XVIL  J/k  si/i  Iri  surat  k&  l<adal  .}&»&. 


o»  se.  bnhut  dnkh  uthii'm,  aur  niari 
jaili,  aur  tim  iliu  ji  utlnirj. 

22  Tab  Patrus  uao  khiiro  le  gaya, 
aur  jlnuijhlikar  kahne  lagi,  ki  Ai 
Klni'Uuaml,  teri  wilamati  ho:  yih 
tuju  jar  kabhi  n»  hoga. 

23  Par  usne  phirke  Patru9se  kabi, 
Ai  Sriuitii.il,  mere  B&mhne  se  dor  ho ; 
tii  mere  liyo  thokar  ka  ba'is  hai ; 
kyt'mki  Iri  Khmli  ki  biton  ka  naluri, 
baiki  insan  ki  baton  ki  khiyalraklui 
hai 

24  Tf  Tab  Tisi'i'neapnt'  shigirdon 
bq  kalii,  Agar  kui  chahe  ki  mere 
pichhe  awe,  to  apni  inkir  kare,  aur 
upui  salib  uthako  mori  pair&ui  kare. 

25  Kyurjki  jo  kui  apni  jin  bachayi 
cliiiie,  uso  khue^i;  par  jo  kof  merfl 
liyc  jan  khocgi,  um?  paiigA. 

20  Kyunki  admi  ko  kyi  iaida  hai, 
agar  tamani  jahin  ko  hasil  kue,  aur 
apni  jin  khowo?  phir  admi  apni  jnu 
ke  badle  kyi  de  sakti  hai? 

27  Kyunki  Ibu  i  A'dam  apne  Bipkc 
jalai  mcri  apne  firisliton  ka  sath  iwe- 
gi ;  tab  har  ek  ko  us  ko  a  amal  ko 
muw&flg  badla  iiegi. 

28  Main  tuni  se  sach  tahta  lilin,  ki 
Un  rnon  se  Jo  yab.au  khare  hain,  baV 
hain,  ki  jnb  tak  Ibu  i  Adam  k<>  apni 
bidshahat  ineri  dekh  ua  len,  maut  ka 
triiw.i  ua  chakherige. 

XVII  BA'B. 

A  CR  cliba  dia  bft'd  Yisu'  Patrus, 
aur  YVquh,  aur  us  ke  bhai  Vi'i- 
hanui  ko,  alag  ek  unclie  puhur  par  ic 
gaya, 

2  Aur  un  ke  samhne  un  ki  surat 
badai  gayi :  aur  us  ki  chibra  iftab  ka 
si  cliamki,  aur  U3  ki  iwsh&k  nur  ki 
maumu  sufed  ho  gayi. 

■'i  Aur,  dekno,  Mu»  aur  Iliyaa  us  se 
biterj  kartu  imheij  dikhai  di\e. 

i  Tab  Patrus  no  Yiefi'  se  jawib  merj 
kalii,  Ai  KJmdiw.ui.l,  huniare  liye  ya- 
han  rahna  aehslihi  hai:  agar  marzi 
ho,  to  ham  yahin  tiu  dere  bariawen,  ck 


tero,  aur  ek  Miisa,  aur  ek  Iliyis  ku 
live. 

'u  W  uh  yih  kahta  1  ■  i  tlnl,  ki  dekbo, 
ttk  nurani  budlf  ne  un  par  siya  kiyi  ; 
aur,  dekho,  ua  badai  «c  ek  iwi/.  \m 
roazmtia  ki  ii,  ki  Yih  mori  piyari 
Beta  hai,  jis  ae  maiti  khush  hun  ;  tum 
us  ki  su  n  o, 

6  Shagird  yih  aunke  niunh  ke  bal 
giro,  aur  uibiyat  dar  gaye. 

7  Tab  YisdJ  ue  ike  uiiLen  chliu^, 
aur  kahi,  ki  Utho,  aur  mat  daro. 

8  Aur  unhon  ne  apni  ink'h  utliike 
Yiad'  ke  Biwa  aur  kisi  ko  ua  dekLa. 

9  Jab  we  pahir  se  utarte  the,  Yisti' 
uu  unin'ti  tikid  ku  farmayi,  ki  Jab 
tab  Ibn  i  A'dam  murdun  coejj  se  ji  na 
ujhe,  is  roya  ki  zil;r  kisii  m  na  karo. 

10  Aur  ua  ke  shigirdon  ne  us  se 
pik'bha,  Pliir  faqili  kyi'iii  kahte  baiii, 
ki  |iahle  iliyis  ka  ini  zarur  hai? 

11  Yisd1  ne  uiihen  jawib  diya,  ki 
Tliyaa  albatta  jiahle  awt'^a,  aur  sab 
cbimm  ki  baudobast  kan^i. 

12  Par  main  tuiu  se  kahtA  hda,  ki 
lliyas  to  d  chuki,  ltjkiu  uulion  ne  ua 
ko  iiahin  palichani,  baiki  jo  cTnihi  us 
ki>  s;Ll1i  kiyi.  Isi  tjvrab.  Ibu  i  A'daiu 
bhi  un  «o  duk  h  uthawegi. 

13  Tab  BhigirdoB  no  samjha,  ki  us 
ne  un  u  Yiihanni  baptisina-denewale 
ki  babet  kahi. 

14  ^f  Jab  we  jarni'at  ko  pis  pa- 
himche,  ek  sbakhs  ua  pas  iya,  aur  us 
ke  ago  ghuttie  tekke  kalii, 

15  Ai  Kbudawand,  niero  bejfl  par 
ralnii  kar;  kyuii(<i  wuh  siri  hai,  aur 
bahut  dukh  utbati  hai ;  ki  aksar  ig 
nn  girri,  aur  aksar  pani  merj, 

lti  Aur  main  us  ko  tore  ahigiidorj 
,ke  jjis  Uyi  thi,  par  we  use  changd  na 
jkar  sakeo. 

17  YisiV  ne  jawib  inen  kahij  Ai 
Iw-i'atiipUl  aur  terhi  qtma,  maic  kab 
tak  tuiuliare  sith'  rahiirigi?  kab  tak 
tumlftri  li;iruj.siit  kaflJBgi?  u.suyabin 
mere  pis  ii. 

ld  Tab  Yigff  ne  deo  ko  diiamkayi; 


Ek  -tiri  Admi  ko  ditingakarna.  MATI', 
wuh  n»  Be  nikal  gayii;  aur  wuh 
ohhokri  usi  gkari  changa  ho  gaya. 

19  Tab-  sMgirdon  vio  alaa  YisiV  pas 
iike  kalii,  llam  kytiri  us  ku  mkul  M 
sukun  'i 

20~Yi*u'  M  umVij  kalta,  Apni  be- 
Imani  ku  aabab ;  kyunki  main  tum  si: 
padi  kahta"  hi'in.ki  Agar  tambat]  rai 
ke  dano  ko  harabar  iman  botft,  to  agar 
tuui  ia  puhar  m  kahte,  ki  Y'uhiin  M 
wabaii  chala  jft ;  to  wuh  chala  jata ; 
aur  kol  bat  tuinhari  na-mumk'm  ua 
hati. 

'Jl  Wagar  is  tarah  ke  ileo,  bagair 
du'a  o  roza  ke,  nahin  nikitte  jdto. 

22  "f  Jali  w«  Jali!  meij  pniri  kasta 
the,  Yisii'  ne  unhen  kalia,  ki  Ibn  i 
A'da.m  logog  ko  hath  men  hawala 
kiyft  jaega ; 

23  Aur  we  usc  qatl  karcngc ;  phir 
wuh  tian  din  ji  iith-.'-iii.  Tab  wo  ni- 
hiyal  gamgfii  inic. 

24  f'  Jab  wo  Kafaniahum  men  ae, 
nim- mitrai  ke  lenewakm  no  ]ia«  ako 
Patrus  bo  kaha,  ki  Kya  ttimhara  ustad 
Mijii-in(s.|jiJ  ualiin  duta  ?  Us  no  kaha, 
Han,  dori  hai. 

25  Jab  wuh  ghnr  men  aya,  tab 
Yisii'  no  ua  ke  bomo  ko  pesbtar,  ua  ae 
kahd,  ki  Ai  Shama'an,  Mi  kya  ea- 
m&jhta  hai?  duayake,  hadshih  khiraj 
yii  j  j /ya  ]ria  86  latfl  kain  '(  apofl  larkoii 
su,  ya  galltm  88? 

!'■  l'.im.is  ne  ua  N  kalia,  Grairtra  bo. 
YW  ne  lis  so  kuna.  Pas  to  larke  us  ho 
fotid  hak 

2"  l.eTdn  ta  ki  ham  unlien  thokar 
im  khilawen,  tu  jake  darya  men  hausi 
dai,  aur  jo  niaclihii  ki  pahlo  nikk,  asa 
lVkc  uh  ka  munh  khoi,  to  ek  sikka 
]iawega :  wm  Toko  mere  aur  apne 
waatu  unhon  d». 

XVIII  BA'D. 

U  S  mujt  ihAgvrdO]]  uc  Yisft'  pas  akv 
us  sg   m'ichhd,  ki    A'sman   ki 
badshahat  men.  sab  so  bara  kann  hai? 
2  liati'  ne  ek  clihota  larka  bulake 
use  un  ki?  bScli  min  khani  kira, 

m 


XVIII.  Ta'lim  dm&kifarot><.',      I 

3  Aur  kaha.  Main  tum  se  sach 
kahta  hun,  Agar  tum  log  tauba  na 
kari),  aur  chhote  Wkon  ki  maulud  na 
bano,  'o  Asma»  ki  baduhahat  men  har- 
gii  diltbil  na  hogo. 

I  ™,}o  koi  ap  ko  is  hachche  ki 
iiianiud  cldidfa  ]&w,  wuhi  asraan  ki 
bddwhahat  fiien  sab  se  bani  hai. 

5  Aur  ji.)  kui  mere  ruim  par  niso 
Iwchcho  ki  khalirdari  karc,  mori  kka- 
tirdiri  kart4  hai. 

b'  Par  jo  koi  in  chhoton  men  ne,  jo 
mujh  par  iman  l.iii:  haiy,  ek  ko  tho- 
kar  khilawc,  to  u*  ke  Uyu  yih  bihtar 
hal,  ki  chakki  kd  pat  us  ko  gale  meii 
iatkaya  jawe,  aur  samundarko  gahrao 
tuen  dubdya  Jas. 

7  f  Thokar  khililitewall  ckizon  ke 
sahab  diiuya  par  afsos  hai !  ki  fhokar 
kbildnewali  diizon  kii.  ani  aaritt;  pac 
afsos  us  shakha  par  jis  ko  aabah  tho- 
kar  lago ! 

h  Agar  UTii,  haili,  ji  tori  pimw, 

(njho  [dokar  khilawc,  US6  kat.  dai,  aur 

apne  Nuae  pbmk  ae:  I» i  iatigri  ya 

tundihokar/iml.'iui  w.  -i  .■lini  .■..!.. 
tore  liye  us  m  bihtar  hai,  ki  do  hitfa 
y4  do  pd ii w  hoto  httmosfaa  ki  ag  men 
d;ila  j4we. 

0  tar  agar  ted  ankh  tujhethokar 
khiliwe,  use  nikil  dai,  aur  phonk  do: 
l.yunki  k4na  hokar  «indahi  nien  ilii- 
kliil  hon.a  toro  liyo  ua  su  lahtar  hai,  ki 
teri  do  ankh  hon,  aur  tu  jahannam  ki 
ag  mes  'ktU  jawe. 

10  Khabardar,  in  clihoton  men  sc 
kisi  ko  naotiiz  ua  janu:  kyilnki  main 
tum  so  kahta  hun,  ki  A 'aman  par  ua 
ke  firiahte  taen  l'.a|>kaninnh  joasmaD 
]«r  hai  hameslia  dokhto  Lain. 

II  Kyiiijki  llm  i  A'dam  iya  hai,  ki 
khoo  luiurj  ko  dhundhke  bachawe. 

12  Tum  kya  samajhte  ho?  Agar 
ki3\  shakhs  ke  pis  aau  bbet  bon,  aur 

■  i;  kho  jae,  kyii  wuh  ninna- 
nave  ko  ua  chkoregd,  aur  pahipon  pai 
jako  uk  khoi  hrti  ku  na  dbi'mdhega? 

13  Aur  agar  aiaa  ho,  ki  use  jijiwe, 


Bhaion  ko  mu'dfkarne  kafarz.  MATI',  XIX.        B»-rahm  naukar  ki  tamsil. 


main  tara.se  snch  kahti  ban,  ki  w  uli 
ias  ko  nbab  nn  ninnAuavc  ee,  jokho 
na  gayi  thin,  ziyada  khush  boga. 

14  Isi  tarah  tumhAro  Uap  ki,  jo 
AsmAn  par  b;ii,  marzi  nahin,  ki  iti 
clilioton  men  «e  koi  balak  liowo. 

15"  ^  Phir  agar  tera  lihai  tera  gtmah 
kiire,  ja,  aur  uso  akele  u  ion  sarajr.A; 
agar  wuh  teri  suno,  td  ne  apno  bhai 
ku  paya. 

16  Agar  wuh  na  sune,  to  ek  ya  do 
Bhakha  upno  eath  la,  ta  ki  Iur  ek  liat 
do  ya  un  gawahon  ku  lminh  se  sAbit 
ho. 

17  Agar  wuh  un  ki  na  m.ino,  to  ja- 
roa'at  ee  k;ih;  par  agar  wuh  jama'at 
ko  bfai  na  raane,  to  ua  ko  Bjair-qt,ttm- 
walo  ki  manisi  be-diri,  aur  niahsiil- 
leuewile  ko  bar» bar  jin. 

18  Main  timi  se  Moh  kahtA  hvin,  Jo 
kric-Jih  tum  znm'm  par  baudhoge,  Asnian 
par  bandhA  jAcgd  :  aur  jo  kuchh  tam 
zaniin  par  khologe,  asuian  par  khola 
jaega. 

19  Phir  main  tuui  se  kahti  nun, 
A^iir  tum  nieii  sc  do  shaklis  amin 
p»r  kiat  bat  ke  liye  mel  knrkc  du'A 
mAngen,  wuh  mere  Eap  ki  taraf  se,  jo 
asman  par  hai,  un  ke  Iiyo  hogi. 

20  Kyiinki  jalian  do  y&  tin  mere 
nam  par  ikatthe  bon,  wahan  main  un 
ko  bich  lilin. 

21  %  Tab  Patrus  ne  us  pAs  Ake 
kaha,  Ai  KhudAwand,  agar  meri  bhai 
rnera  gunAh  kara,  to  main  uso  kitni 
marfaiiii  mu'af  kariin  '{  sat  martaba 
tak? 

11  Yist't'  no  usb  kaha,  Main  tujhe 
Saf  martaba,  tak  nahin  kabti,  baiki 
Saitar  ke  sAt  martaln  tak. 

28  ^  Is  liye  ki  AsmAn  ki  badshSimt 
ek  badshali  ki  nntmnd  hai,  jia  ue  apno 
logoB  se  hisab  lene  chAhA. 

24  Jah  hisab  loue  laga,  ek  ko 
pas  lae,  jia  se  ua  lio  das  bazar  tore 
panu  t  h  e. 

25  Par  ia  wAste  ki  us  pAs  kuchh  adi 
karne  ku  na  thii,  us  ko  kkudawiind  ne 

27 


hukm  kiyA,  ki  wuh  aur  us  ki  jorl,  aur 
oa  k«  MU  bachehe,  aur  jo  kuchh  ua 

kA  ho,  bechA  jawe,  aur  qarz  b  ha  r  HyA 

jr'nvc. 

20  Tab  us  naukar  ne  girko  ujn  si  jda 
kiyA,  aur  kaha,  Ai  KhmlAwand,  gabff 
kar,  ki  main  tera  sara  o&rz  ada  kar- 
ung A. 

27  lis  naukar  ko  sAhib  ko  rahm 
AyA,  aur  uao  chhorkar  qara  usu  bakhsli 
diya, 

28  TJ si  naukar  nonikalkcapnesArhi 
naukaroij  men  ae  ek  ki>  piyA,  jis  |iar 
uh  ko  sau  dinar  £te  ihe ;  us  ne  us  ko 
pakarkar  us  ka  gala  (tbontfi,  aur  kaha, 
Jo  iTn.'i':i  iil.ii  hai,  mujho  de, 

29  Tab  us  kA  sithi  naukar  us  ko 
dbowob  WC  girA,  aur  us  ki  minnat 
karko  kaha,  Sabr  kar,  ki  main  sab  ada 
kariingi. 

HO  Par  as  no  na  mana,  baiki  jike 
usc  qaidkhAne  men  dalA,  ki  jab  tak 
(jarz  adi  na  karc,  qaid"  rahe. 

31  Ua  ko  sAthi  naukar  yih  makara 
rlekbko  nihayat  gamgin  hrtc.aur  jakar 
apne  khawind  ee  tamim  iilcval  hayiia 
kiya,' 

32  Tab  ua  ke  khawind  no  use  bulA- 
kar  ua  se  kahA,  ki  Ai  aharir  chakar, 
main  ne  wuh  sah  qarz  tujhe  bakhsh 
diya,  kydnki  td  ne  meri  minnat  ki : 

33  To  kyA  lazim  na  thA,  ki  jaisA 
ain  nc  tujh  par  rahm  kiyd,  tii  bhi 

apne  ham-khidmat  par  rahm  kartA? 

34  So  ua  ke  khAwiud  nc  gussa  hoks 
n-i  ko  ii;ir"^a  ke  hawai*  kiya,  ki  jab 
tak  tamAm  qara  adi  ua  karc,  qaid  rahe. 

35  Isi  tarah  mera  asinani  Bap  bhi 
tum  se  karpija,  agar  bar  ek  tum  men 
se  apno  bhAion  ke  qusdr  ko  dil  se 
mu'Al'na  karega. 

XIX  BA'B. 

AUK  yiin  hAA,  ki  Tisii'  jab  us  ka- 
lam ko  tamAm  kar  chukA,  Jalil 
»e  rawdna  hnA,  aur  Yardsn  ke  par 
Yahudiya  ki  sarbadd  men  AyA; 

2  Aur  bari  hbir  us  ke  picliho  ho  li; 
aur  us  ne  uuhen  waban  chaugi  kiya. 


Tifl'm  ko  Masih  pas  Idnd.         MATI', 

3  %  Aur  Varisi  ub  ki  azmdiah  ke 
liye  uh  pis  do,  aur  us  se  kahd,  Kya 
rawd  hai,  ki  mard  har  ck  sabab  ae  upni 
jorfi  ko  chhor  dewe? 

4  Us  no  jawab  mcn  u  n  se  kaha, 
Kyd  tum  no  nahiri  parha,  ki  Khi1i<| 
n«  shunV  ku*»  unhen  ek  hi  mani  aur 
ek  ki  'nurat  banai, 

5  Aur  farmdyii,  ki  Is  liye  mani  apne 
nia  bdp  ko  ehhorega,  iu:r  apiii  j"v\i  w 
niild  nihega:  aur  W8  donon.  ok  lan 
boogfl ? 

6  Is  liye  ab  we  do  urViiii,  baiki  ck 
tau  hain.  Pas,  jise  KUuui  no  jord, 
use  insan  tia  tore. 

7  Uuhon  no  us  so  kahd,  l'lur  Musd 
m'  k yi'm  Imkm  diya,  ki  taUojMtau  use 
deke  use  chhor  do  ? 

8  Uh  ne  un  se  kuini,  MiifiA  ne  tuin- 
hari  sabkt-dili  ke  sabab  mm  ko  npni 
jordon  W chhor dcue ki  ijdzatdij  par 
shurii'  ae  aisd  na  tba. 

9  Aur  maig  tum  se  kalita  hi'm,  ki 
Jo  koi  apni  jorfi  ku,  siwa  zina  ke,  aur 
sabab  se  chhor  de,  aur  diiuri  bb  byah 
kue,  zina  kartd  hai:  aur  jo  koi  ua 
clili-iri  bui  'aurat  ko  bydhe,  ziiid  kartd 
hai. 

10  %  Us  ke  shaeirdog  no  ub  bo 
kahd,  Agar  mard  kd  lidi  joru  ke 
sath  yih  hai,  to  joru  karnd  acnchlid 
ualiin. 

11~  Us  ne  un  se  kaha,  ki  Sab  ia  bdt 
ko  qabul  nahin  karto  kain,  magar  we 
jiuheii  di  y  d  gaya. 

12  Kyiinki  ba'zo  kbnjo  hain,  jo  mi 
ke  pct  lii  se  aise  paid'd  hue ;  aur  ba'ze 
khoje'hain,  jinhen  logon  ne  bandyd ; 
aur  ba'ae  klioju  bait»,  jinhon  ne  dsnsdu 
ki  bddslidhat'ke  liyedp  ko  khoja  ban- 
dyd  hogi.  Jo  us  ko  qabul  kar  saktd 
hai,  io  ksire. 

13  t  Tab  log  chhote  larkon  ko  us 
pas  Ide,  k  i  wuh  un  par  hiith  rakhe.aur 
du'a  kare:  par  ahdgirdon  ne  unhen 
dai  Ltd. 

14  Yisii'  no  un  bb  kahi,  ki  Larkon 
ko  chbor  do,  aur  unhen  inero  pds  dne 

28 


XIX.  jtfiMift  kipoiraui  ke  anfim. 
so  nian'a  na  kuro;  kyiiijki  asmdn  ki 
Ibddshahat  aiaon  hi  ki  bui, 

15  Aur  us  no  apiia  hdth  un  par  ra- 
kbe,  aur  wahfin  se  rawdna  In'id. 

lu  Tf  Aur,  dekho,  ek  ne  ako  ua  bq 
kahd,  Ai  nek  Uatdd,  niaiij  kami  sa  Dflfc 
kdiii  karun,  ki  baiiiesjlm  ki  2mdagi 
pdun  ? 

17  Ua  ne  uso  kabd,  T&  kyuri  paojhe 
aek  kahti  bvuV  Dek  bo  koi  nabiij, 
magar  ek,  ya'ne,  Kimda;  par  agar  tu 
zindagl  mcn  dikhil  hiid  chahe,  to 
huimon  pu  'amal  ku. 

18  Us  ne  uao  kahd,  Katui  su  hukm  ? 
Yisd'  ne  uao  kala,  Yih,  ki  T.i  khdn  na 
kar,  Zind  na  kar,  Chori  ua  kur,  ,1  ln'ubi 
gawahi  na  de, 

19  Apne  bdp  aur  npni  md  ki  'izzat 
kar:aur,Apno  pawai  koaisipiydr.kar, 
jaisd  dp  ko. 

liO  Ub  jaw;in  ne  us  ae  kalid,  Yih  Bab 
main  larakpan  M  kg  iiiauta  iya:  ab 
iiiujlui  kya  baiji  hai? 

L'L  Yiad'  ne  kahd,  Agar  tii  kdmii 
hiid  ohihfl,  to  jiike  sab  kuchli  jo  tera 
hai  bech  ddl,  nur  muhtdjon  ko  de,  ki 
tujhe  asmau  pu  khuzaua  niilegd:  tab 
dke  mere  piclihe  ko  lo. 

22  Wuh  jawdn  yih  aunkar  gamgiu 
clinld  gaya:  kyiiijki  liard  tndldar  tha. 

23  1  Tab  Yisii'  no  apne  ahdgirdon 
so  kulid,  Main  tum  so  sach  kahtd  lnin, 
ki  DaulatniMud  ka  asindn  ki  liddahdhat 
inc-ii  daklii!  bona  muihkil  hai, 

U4  l!u]ki  maiiL  tum  se  kalild  lnin, 
ki  Cut  kd  siii  ko  ndke  se  guzsr  jauu, 
us  ae  asan  hai,ki  ck  daulatniand  Klui- 
da  ki  Mdsliahat  inen  ddkliil  hu. 

25  Jab  uske  shiigiidi>ii  Be  yih  «umt, 
lu  alhayat  h*4rdn  lioke  bolo,  Phir  kaun 
Hajat  ]  'd  tiakta  hai '.' 

26  Yisii'  no  uu  jmr  nazar  karke  un- 
lifii  kahd,  Yih  insdu  sennhin  hosakta; 
par  Khiiila  se  sjib  kuuhh  ho  siktd  bai. 

21  f  Tab  Patrua  ne  jawib  loeO  uae 
kalut,  Dekli,  ham  ucsab  kutbhchhord, 
aur  ten  picnlic  ho  liye;  pas  bani  ko, 

kya  milegi? 


Tdkidiln  ke  mazd&ron  MATI' 

28  VisiV  ne  unhcti  kahA,  Main  tum 
se  sach.  kahtA  httn,  ki  Timi  jo  itktc 
pichhe  ho  Uye,  jab  nnyl  khilqat  men 
Ibu  i  A'dam  apno  jalai  ke  takbt  par 
hanlw^A,  tam  bhf  bdrah  takliton  p»r 

■    ■■.  nur  [sriel  ki  bArah  guruhon 
ki  'nddlat  karoge, 

29  Aur  jis  04  ghar,  ya  bhAi,  ya  ba> 
hln,  yA  nii'i  bii.p,  yA  jorii,  yA  bal  bacb- 
dmn,  ya  -/amin  ku,  nun  n£m  W» 
rlilii'i'iL,  san  fftuiip4wcgA,aur  hauieaha 
ki  zindagi  ki  wira  hogA. 

30  l'ar  bahut  ne    jo    pahle    hnin, 

Eichhle  ho  jderige;  aur  jo  pichiile 
ain,  pahle  bojjga 

XX  BA'B. 

KrU'^KI  aamail  ki  badsbafcat  us 
sAhib  i  khAua  ki  maubd  hai,  jo 
tarke  babar  niklA,  i;i  ki  apuc  angiiris- 
tdn  men  masdar  lagAwe. 

2  Aur  us  lio  niazduron  kd  ek  ek 
dinar  rozfna  mmjarrar  kurku  unben 
u] aii'Ti'iristiin  meii  bhejA. 

3  Aur  u»  ne  pbir,  dia  charhe,  bahar 
jake  auron  ko  bazAr  men  bo-kdr  khare 
dok  h  A, 

4  Aur  on  fio  kaha,  Tum  bhi  angu- 
ristan  inen  jdo,  aur  jo  kuclib  wajibi 
hai,  tumben  diiijga.     So  we  gaya. 

5  Pbir  ua  ho,  do  pahar,  aur  tisre 
pahar  ko,  bahar  jako  waisa  hi  kiya. 

b'  Ek  ghant.A  diri  rahto,  pbir  bahar 
jake  lumu  ko  be-kdr  kharo  pAyA,  aur 
uu  se  kaha,  Turu  ky&n  yahAn  tamani 
di»  bc-kar  kharc  rahte  ho  ? 

7  Unbori  ne  us  bu  kaha,  Ia  Hyc  ki 
kisi  ue  liam  ko  mazduri  juir  nahiii  ra- 
kha.  Ob  ho  uubeij  kaha,  Tur»  bhi  ua- 
giiristdn  Biefi  jao,  aur  jo  kuchh  wajibi 
hai,  fio  p.iuge. 

8  Jab  ihim  hui  anguristdn  ke  malik 
lic  apne  kAniule  .-■■  kaha,  Mazduroy  ko 
buJil,  aur  pichhlon  bu  leke  pflMon  tak 
uu  ki  mazdiiri  de. 

9  Jab  wo,  jitihon  ne  gliante  bhar 
Hiu  kiya  thd,  ae,  fco  ok  ek  dinar  pdyd. 

10  Jab  agle  4e,  uubou  yib  gumau 


',  XX.  M  to.mstf. 

thd,  ki  ham  ziyada  piweiigo  ;  par  un- 
boB  ne  bhi  ok  ek  uinAr  jviyd. 

11  Jab  unhon  rie  yib  pAyd,  to  gliar 
ko  mdlik  par  kurkurde, 

12  Aur  kahd,'  pichhlon  ne  ek  U 
ghante  ka  kain  kiya,  aur  tu  HB  unherj 
ousan  butCbat  Ini  diyi,  jintan  M 
tamdm  diu  ki  mihnat  auriibup  sahi 

13  Ua  ne  nn  mon  se  ek  ko  jawib 
mag  kalia,  Ai  ruiyan,  main  teri  be- 
InSMi  uiihin  karia ;  kya  tCi  ne  ok  diuar 
par  mujh  se  iqrAr  ualdn  kiyAV 

14  Tu  apna  le,  aur  cliilla  |A:  par 
main  jitnA  tujhe  detA  btiri,  piohhle  ko 
bhi  dungA. 

15  KyA  nmjhe  rawa  naliin.  ki  tpoa 
mAl  se  jo  cbAbiin  ho  kan'nj'?  Kyd  W  la 
liyc  bnn  nazar  sc  dekhtA  liai,  ki  main 
nek  bini 

l<i  Isi  MnkptoBhle  pahle  horjge,  aur 
pahle  piehlilc :  kyiinki  bahut  sa  bulae 
;aye,  par  barguzida  tliore  hain. 

17  ^  Aur  jab  Yisi'i*  Varusalam  ko 
jAtA  ihA,  rAh  nierj  bArah  ahagirdon  ko 
ahvg  le  jako  un  se  kahA, 

16  Dckho,  hain  yardaalarn  ko  jAte 
hairj ;  aur  Ibu  i  A'dam  sardar  kdhiuog 
iiiir  taijilioTi  ke  hawila  kiya  jat'^A,  aiu' 
wc  us  par  qatl  kA  hukra  denge, 

19  Aur  use  gair  qaumoti  ko  kawAla 
karenge,  ki  fhat.thon  mes  urAwco,  aur 
kore  ludren,  aur  eaTib  jiar  "khigehen : 
par  wuh  tiare  din  phir  ji  uthegA. 

20  t  Tab  Zabadi  ko  beton  ki  nid 
apue  beton  ko  leke  us  pas  A),  aur  use 
sijda  karke  cbabd,  ki  us  &e  kuchh  'avz 
kare. 

■II  Vb  ne  ua  se  kahA,  Tu  kyd  chdhli 
hai  ?  Wuh  bui),  Farma  ki  mere  donon 
bete,  teri  badshAhac  men,  ek  turf  dahni, 
aur  diisrA  teri  bAirj  taraf  bairheu. 

22  YiHii'  ne  jawdb  mes  kahA,  Tum 
nabin  jante,  ki  kyd  mAn'gte  ho,  Kya 
wuhpiyAla,jo  main  piue  par  hilii,  pi 
aakte  ho?  aur  wuh  baptisma,  jo  main 
pala  lu'in,  tum  pi  nakte?  \V"e  ua  ae 
Iwle,  lima  sakte  hairj. 

-j  Ua  do  uu  se  kaha,  Tum  albatta 


Farotani  karut  kafan.  MATI',  XXI.         Masih  Yarusalam  ko  pita. 

mera  piyAla  piogc,  nur  wuh  baptisma,  I  2  SAmhne  ki  basli  uien  jAo,  aur 
jn  ruam  pai  A  mm,  pau;i>' ;  WtHi  Tjit-i'i  wahan  efc  gadhi  bandhi,  nur  uske  sath 
dahni  mir  n  iuri  b&in  taraf  buitlma,  |ek  bauhcha  pAoge :  khulke  mcre  pAs 
racre  ikhtiyar  men  nahin  ki  kisi  ko  lio. 


rifiji,  magar  n»  ko,  jin  ke  liye  mcrc 
Bap  nc  rmiqarnir  kiya. 

24  Aur  jahundason  ne  yih  guna,  un 
do  bhAioij  pnr  guwao  hi'ie. 

25  Tab  Yisu  ne  unheii  bulak  c  Italia, 
ki  Tura  jAnte  lio  ki  g»ir-qBmnon  ke 
hakim  uu    per   hukiiuiat  jatah, 
ikbtiyarwale    uu    pai    apuu    ikhtiyar 
dikhate  hain ; 

26  Par  tum  logon  men  aisA  na  ho- 
ga :  baiki  Jo  tum  ui«n  bara  hiiA  chAho, 
tuiiihaia  kli:iilhu  ko  ; 

27  Aur  jo  tuiu  men  sard&r  bana 
chAhe,  tumharA  banda  lio 

28  ChunAnchi  Ibn  i  A'daru  bhi  is 
liy-  BBbin  liya,  ki  khidmat  le,  baiki 
khidmat  kare,  aur  apui  jan  bakutoron 
ke  liyo  lidiya  men  de. 

£9  .Ini'  m  Yarihu  so  rawan»  hone 
lago,  bari  hiu  r  uk  ko  pioHhfl  bo  H. 

30  f  Aur,  dekho,  do  andhc  jo  rAh 
ke  kinAre  baithe  the.jab  suni  ki  Yini'i" 
chalA  jAtA  liai,  pukArno  lage,  ki  Ai 
Khudawand,  Iba.  i  Daud,  bani  pur 
t.ilun  kw. 

31  Par  jama'at  no  unken  d&utd,  ki 
chup  ralien  :  lukin  we  aur  KU  cliilnif. 
aur  bole,  ki  Ai  Khudawand,  lbn  i 
Daud,  baca  par  mani  kar. 

32  Tab  Yisii' khnrilraha,  aur  unhen 
bulakc  kahA,  Ttira  kyt't  chdhto  ho  ki 
main  tuinhAre  liye  karun? 

3iJ  "UDhon  ne  uue  kalut,  ki  Ai  Khu- 
dAwand,  hamAri  ankhen  khul  jden. 

34  Yisii'  ko  rahm  AyA,  aur  un  ki 
Ani; lu  m  ko  tblniA:  aur  us»i  dam  uu  ki 
Ankhen  bina  hi'iiri,  aur  we  us  ke  pichhe 
ho  liye. 

XXI   KA.1t. 

AUR  iab  we  Yarusalam  ke  nazdik 
pahunchkcBaitfitgA  men  Zaitun 
ke  pahAr  pAn  Ae,  tab  Yisii'  ne  do  BhA- 
girdon  ko  yih  kabke  bhejd,  ki 
"  30 


3  Aur  agar  koi  tum  ko  kucbh  kahe, 
to  kahiyo,  ki  KhndAwand  ko  yih 
darkAr  hain;  ki  wuii.  usi  dam  imlien 
bhej  degA. 

4  Yih  sab  kuchh  hi\A,  tA  ki  jo  nabi 
ne  kahA  tbdpiira  ho,  ki 

6  Saibiin  ki  beti  ne  kaho,  Dekh,  terS 
BAdshAh  farotani  so,  gadhi  par,  baiki 
-lilin  ku  bucheho  par  sawit  hoke  tuju 
pas  Ata  hai. 

6  So  shAgirdnn  ne  jAkn,  jalai  Yisii' 
ne  unln'Ti  faniiaya  tha,  baja  lac, 

7  Aur  lu  gadhi  ko  bachche  sametlo 
Ae,  aur  apne  kapre  un  pv  dAle,  aur  uso 
unpar  bithlAya. 

8  Aur  «k  bari  jama'at  ria  aptie  kapre 
rAste  men  bichliao;  aur  kitnon  no 
liaiuUiluri  ki  dAliaii  kalko  nih  men 
chhitrdin. 

!>  Aur  bbir  jo  uHkeAgn  pielibe  cbali 
jati  pukArke  kahti  tlii,  lbn  i  Daud  ko 
ilusii'iMina;  Mubarak  wuh  jo  Khuda- 
wand ke  nAm  par  AtA  hai :  Use  AamAn 
par  IIosh'atuiA. 

10  Aur  jab  wuli  Yariinn]imi  m"ii 
dakhil  huA,  sAre  shahr  men  gul  macliA, 
BUI  kalitiolatit,  ki  Yib  kaun  bal? 

11^  Tab  bhir  ne  kahA,  ki  Yih  JaliL 
ke  NA.sarat  ka  Yisii'  nabi  hai. 

12  f  Aur  Yisu'  KlmdA  ki  haikal 
men  gayA,  aur  un  sab  ko  jo  haikal 

_  kliurui  ferokht  kar  rahe.  ihc,  nikil 
diyA,aur  sairAfon  ke  takhte.aur  kabii- 
tar-faroslion  ki  uliaukiaii  ulat  din, 

13  Aur  un  ae  kaha,  Yih  likhA  hai, 
Meri  gh»l   'ibAdat   kd  ghar  kah- 

latigA  ;  par  tum  ne  u.-*e  chorou  ka  kLoli 
bau  iya. 

14  Aur  aneho  aur  langre  haikal 
men  us  pas  ae;  tis  ne  uahen  changA 
k  i  y7i. 

10  Jab  sardarkahinon,  aur  faoihon 
neun  karamatorj  ko,  jous  DC  dikliAiij, 
aai  Lirkon  ko  haikal  men  pukarle,  aur 


Anjir  ht  dnrdkU par  la'nat.     MATI',  XXI.  Bagbanon  U  famaO. 

Ibn  i  Ddild  ko  Howh'anna  kahto  de-  se,  to  Wmm  sg  darte  hain ;  kyuyki 
h  M,  to  bahu  t  gusse  hue, 


1<>  Aur  us  se  kahd,  Tu  suntd  hai, 
ki  ye  kyi  kahte  haiiiV  Yisd'  ne  un- 
hen  kaha,  Han ;  kya  tam  nc  kahhi 
nahin  parhd,  ki  Bachchog  aur  shir- 
khwArofl  ko  iriunh  so  tu  no  kdrail  ta'rii' 
karwai  ? 

17  \  Fhir  wuh  unkcn  chhurko 
ahahr  ko  bahar  Bait'aniyd  men  gaya ; 
aur  wahan  rat  bitdi. 

18  Aurjab  subh  ko  shahr  inen  jant 
laga,  OM  bhiikh  lagi. 

11)  Tab  anjir  kd  ok  darakht  rali  ke 
kindrc  dekhkar  ns  pas  gayd,  aur  jali 
patton  ke  siwd  us  men  kuclih  na  pdya, 
to  kahd,  Ah  m  tujh  rnen  kablui  phfU 
na  lage.  Wunhiij  anjir  ka  darakht 
Biikh  gaya. 

MO  Aur  shdgirdon  ne  yih  dokbkar 
ta'ajjub  kiyd,  aur  kahd,  ki  Yih  anjir  kii 
darakht  kya  M  jahlmikh  gaya  I 

21  Tisu'  ric  jawab  men  unheii  kahd, 
Main  tum  se  aacb  kahtd  hi'in,  ki  Agar 
tum  yaqin  karo,  aur  shakk  na  lao,  to 
na  fiirf  yilii  kar  sakugo,  jo  anjir  ke 
darakht  par  hi'id,  "baiki  agar  ia  paharse 
kahoge,  Tii  tatkar  uaryd  men  ji  gir,  to 
waisd  lii  hogd. 

22  Aur  jo  kuchh  du'a  mes 
raiiigssA  .-r  ■  paoge. 

23  ^  Jab  wuh  haikal  men  dyd,aur 
ta'lim  detd  thd,  tab  sardar  kdkinon  aur 
n  aum  ke  buzurgon  ne  us  pas  ake  tahi, 
Tu  kis  ikhtiyar  ao  yih  kartd  hai  ?  aur 
kis  ne  tujlie  yih  ikhtiyar  diya  ? 

24  ']'ab  Yisu1  ne  jawab  men  unhen 
kahd,  Main  bhi  tum  se  ek  bat  piicbli- 
liti;  agar  baiao,  to  main  bhi  tumben 
kiiaiin,  ki  yih  kis  ikhuyar  ee  kartd 
hdn. 

25  Yuharma  kii  bapUama  kahdn  se 
thd?  dsniaii  se.ydinsan  Bc'r  Woapne 
dil  men  aochuc  lage,  ki  agar  bani 
kation,  A'snian  se,  to  wuh  hnm  sc 
kahegd,  l'hir  tum  ne  use  kyun,  na 
m  dua  ? 

2b'  Aur  agar  bani  kab.cn,  ki  Insdn 
31 


tab  Yubauna  ka  nabi  jauh'  hain. 

Tab  unhon  ne  jawab  men,  Yiad' 
se  kaha,   Iluni   ualrin  jdntc.     Us  ne 

kahd,  Main  bhi  tumben  nahin. 
batata,  ki  kis  ikhtiyar  se  yih  kartd 
hum 

28  U  TCyun,  tumkyasamajhteho? 
Ek  ddmi  ka  uo  beto  the ;  us  ne  bare 
pds  jdke  kalid,  Ai  beto,  jd,  dj  mere 
Ujgaristin  nieakam  kar. 

29  Us  ne  jawab  men  kahd,  Main 
nahin  jaungd ;  ciagar  pichhc  pachh- 
take  gaya. 

30  Pliir  chliote  p:ls  jikarwuhi  kahi. 
Us  ne  jawdb  mog  kaha,  Achchhd,  ai 
khuddwand ;  par  na  gaya. 

31  Un  donon  nn?n  &■  kaun  npnobap 
ki  nwzi  par  chala?  We  bole,  Hara. 
Yisn'  no  un  se  kahd,  Main  tum  ee  sach 
kabid  hiin,  ki  Malisiil-lonewdle  aur 
kasbidn  tum  so  pahle  Khuild  ki  hdd- 
ihdliat  men  tilik  h  il  hote  hain. 

32  Kyiinki  'Yiihannd  rasti  kl  rdh 
se  tum  pds  ay&,  aur  tum  ne  us  ki  na 
mani,  jpar  lualisiil-lonewdlon  aur  kas- 
bion  no  ua  kl  mani ;  tum  yih  dekh- 
kar picliho  hai  na  pauhhtae  ki  us  ki 
nidno. 

33  1  Ek  aur  tamsil  auno  :  Ek 
ghar  kd  mdlik  thd,  jis  ne  angi'iristdu 
lagdya,aur  us  ki  ebaron  taraf  riindhd; 
aur  us  ko   bich   men   khodke  kolha 

tara,  aur  hurj  bandyd,  nur  bdgbdnon 
u  Bompkfl  dp  paidai  g»yi; 

34  Aurjab  mewa  kd  mausim  qarib 
dyd,  us  ne  apne  mmkaroB  ko  bagban- 

m  cia  bhejd,  ki  us  kd  phal  Idwen. 

35  Tar  un  bdgbanon  ne  us  ke  nau- 
karon  ko  jiakarke  ok  ko  pitd,  aur  ek 
ko  mdr  dald,  aur  ek  ko  pattlirao  kiya. 

3b'  Ph'ir  us  ne  aur  naukaron  kojo 
pahlon  se  liarhkar  tlie,  bheja;  unhon 
ne  un  kc  sdth"  bhi  waisa  hi  kiya. 

37  A*kbir,  us  no  apne  bete  ko  un 
pds  yih  kahkar  bhejd,  ki  We  mero 
bete  so  dabenge. 

38  Lekiu  jab  bdgbdnon  ne  beto  ko 


Shah30.de  ke  bydh  MATI', 

rif'Uljii,  ipu  men  knhne  Igge,  Waris 
yihi  hai ;  do,  iso  inar  ddlcn,  ki  is  ki 
miras  uarn&ri  ho  jAo. 

39  Aur   om  pakarku    aur 
tin  ke  bdh&r  !<•  jdkar  qatl  kiy 

40  Jab  angiirisfdn  kd  nialik  aire- 
gd,  to  in  bagbdnon  ke  sdth  kyd  ko- 
regi! 

41  We  ubo  bole,  In  badon  ku  buri 
tarah  mar  dAlega,  nur  angiiristAn  ko 
aur  Mgbanuii  ku  somjn-^a,  jo 
mausim  par  im-wa  jcihunchaweii. 

42  YiaiV  ne  unlicn  kuini,  Kyd  tum 
ne  nawishtou  mtri  kablii  nahin  parhd. 
ki  Jis  patthar  ko  rfjgftoj]  ae  iia-paKand 
kiyd,  w  uh  i  konc  Ua  sini  hu'd;  yih 
Kiiiidawaiid  ki  taraf  se  hai,  aur  hamd- 
ri  naxarorj  men  'ajib? 

43  Is  liye  main  tum  se  kahtii  Jiiitt, 
ki  Khudd  ki  badshdhat  tum  sc  le  1i 
jdegi,  aur  «k  qaum  ku,  jo  us  ke  mcwa 
Jdwe,  rll  jdegf. 

44  Jo  is  patthar  par  girega,  chii: 
ho  jiegd ;  par  jis  par  wiih  gire,  use  pis 
rldlega. 

45  Jab  sardar  kdliinon  aur  Fari- 
Bion  ne  W  ki  yik  tamaUsn  siinijj,  tO 
uinsjfa  gaye  ki  liamare  hi  haqq  inen 
kahta  hai. 

46  Aur  unlion  ne  chdha,  ki  tue 
pakar  luij,  par  'awamm  su  dare,  kyiiij- 
ki  we  aba  nah?  jante  tho. 

XXII  BA'B. 

Y  ISU"   unhen   phir  tnmsilorj   men 
kahne  la'id,  ki 

2  Almari  ki  badshdhat  ua  bddshah 
ki  minimi  hai,  jis  ne  apnc  bcte  kii 
byah  kiyd ; 

3  Aur  u  w  ne  apne  naukaron  ku  bbe- 
}&,  ki  roihmaTmri  ko  bydh  nien  buld- 
wi'ij ;  par  unhou  ne  na  chdkd  ki 
awun. 

4  rbir  us  ne  aur  naukaron  ko  yih 
Jtahke  bhejd,  ki  Mihm&nun  sc  kabu, 
ki  Pokho,  main  ne  khdni  taiyar  kiyd: 
mere  Kail,  aur  mofe  mnte  jinmu  sabh 
hue,  aur  sab  kucbji  taiyar  hai:  bydh 
mon  ao. 

32 


XXII.  H  tamsil. 

5  Par  wc  kuchh  khiydl  men  na 
lakttt  cbalf  goye,  A  apne  kbet,  aur 
dumi  apni  sauddg;ari  ko ; 

(J  Aur  bitjiuij  nc  us  ke  naukanm 
ko  pakarke  unhen  be-lflUt  kiyii,  aur 
mar  ihlla, 

7  Tab  badsridh  sunknr  gnssa  hiid; 
aur  apui  fauj  bhejkc  uu  klitiuion  ko 
njar  ilala,  aur  un  ka  shahr  piuiuk 
diya. 

S  Phir  us  ne  apnn  chdkarou  rc  ka- 
hd,  Uydli  ki  laiydri  to  hiii,  par  we,  jin 
ku  liuUyd,  ualdi<j  the. 

9  Pas  tum  farakon  par  jau,  aur  jit- 
ne  tumben  inileij,  bydh  men  buldo. 

10  So  un  naukarorj  no  raston  p&r 
jdke  bhalo  liuro  jo  unhen  iniU-,  sab 
ko  jam'a  kiyd  ;  aur  byah  kd  ghar 
iniiirn:iri(.iij  m-,  hhar  gaya. 

11  t  Jab  badshah  inilimdnon  ko 
dekbne  andar  dyi,  us  ne  wahdg  ek 
admi  dckhd,  jo  sliddi  kd  libds  pabine 

m  tl.:t: 

12  Aur  us  se  kaha,  Af  miydD,  tii 
ihadi  ke  kapro  pnhine  bagair  yalidrj 

kydn   dyd?    'Us  kt  zuban   baud   ho 

g^yi- 

13  Tab  bddehdh  ne  naukarun  ko 
k:iii:L,  Ub  ki?  liat  h  pair  banuhko  use 
1^  jao,  aur  Iidhar  andhere  meQ  ddl  do ; 
wahan  rund  aur  d.int  pisud  h  tiga, 

14  Kyfinki  wojo  bul&e  gayo  babut 
hain,  par  barguzitio  thore. 

16  f  IM»  Farfdou  'ne  jdke  saldh 
k(,  ki  use  kydnkar  us  ki  bdtun  men 
[ihansiwen. 

16  So  unlion  ne  apne  shdginlon  ko 
SerodJoQke  satH  un  pds  bhejd,  ki  ua 
se  kanon,  Ai  Usiad,  ham  jdntc  hain, 
ki  tii  sacbcha  liai,  aur  sacbdi  se  Khu- 
dd  ki  nih  batiti'i,  aur  kisi  ki  kucfah 
parwa  nahin  rakhld;  kyiinki  tii  dd- 
mion  ke  zdhir  lidi  par  nazar  nahin 
kartd  hai. 

17  l'as,  ham  so  kah,  Tu  kyi  khi- 
ydl kartd  hai?    Qaisar  ho  jizya  di;nd 

i  :i  nahin? 
lo  Par  Yisii'  ne  uu  ki  sbardrat  s;i- 


(■'",-ixh)2  nur  S<i'lu(,U,n  .'n  MATI 
majhko  kahA.  Ai  riyakAro,  mujhtt 
kyun  Azmdtc  ho? 

19  Jlzya  k;'i  Bikks  mujho  dikhlao. 
Wfl  ok  dinar  us  pAs  Ue. 

20  Tab  us  ne  un  se  kahA,  Yih  sit- 
rat nur  sikka  kis  kA  hai? 

21  Unhon  ne  kahA,  Qai*ar  kA. 
Phir  us  ne  kuhd,  Pan,  jo  clmen  Qai- 
sar  ki  hain,  Qaisar  ko ;  aur  jo  Kliudi 
ki  li:iin,  Khuda  fco  do. 

22  ('iilmii  ne  yih  sunkar  ta'ajjub 
kiyA,  aur  uae  chhorkar  chale  gayo. 

23  ^  Usi  diii  Sadi'iqi,  jo  qiyamat 
ke  raunkir  hain,  us  pas  de,  aur  us  se 
rawi)  kivA,  ki 

84  Ai  TTstdd,  Hitisf  nu  kaha  hai,  Jab 
koi  be-aulad  mar  jde,  to  us  ka  hhdi 
us  ki  juru  ko  bvii  )e,  U  ki  fcptu  blidi 
ko  liyo  nnsi  jdri  kare. 

25  8o  hamAre.  darmiydn  sAt  bhaf 
the  ;  pahld  byAh  karke  mu  piya, 
ftUl  ia  BBihftb  ki  ua  ki  aulad  na  tld, 
apni  jorii  apue  bhai  ke  wAslc  chlior 
gaya. 

2fi  Yunhin  di'iarA,  aur  Uari  lihi, 
sAtwen  lak. 

27  Sab  ke  ba'd  wuli  'aurat  bbi  m  a  r 
gayi. 

28  Pas  wuh,  tjiyaniat  merj,  un  aAt- 
on  raen  se  kis  ki  jorii  hotpr  kyurjki 
sabiiog  no  ns  «u  byali  kiyi  thd. 

"SI  Yisu'  ne  jawab  inen  un  sc  kaha, 
Tam  nawishton  aur  KluidA  ki  qtidrat 
ko  na  jankar  guatl  karle  liu, 

■'i'1  Kyiinki  cuyamat  mon  log  na 
byah  kurte,  na  hydlie  jd'e  hain,  baiki 
auman  par  Khuda  ke  firishton  ki  nia- 
lliiul  Ikiim. 

31  Aur  niurdon  ke  ji  uthne  ki  babat 
Khuda  ne,  jo  tumben  farmdyd,  wuh 
tum  ne  nahin  pafhi,  ki 

32  Main  Abiraham  kA  KhudA,  aur 
Iss,h4q  kA  KhudA,  aur  Ya'qiib  kA1 
KbudA  hurj?  KhudA  murdon  kA  na- 
liiii,  baiki  ziurion  ka  KhudA  hai. 

33  .TaiiiA'aten  yih  sunkar  us  ki  ta'- 
lim  se  daog  iiuin. 

34  1  Jab  Fariaion  nc  sunA,  ki  us  ne 


XXIII.  -munh  haott  hoj&nd. 

KadiMjion  ka  miirjh  batui  kiyA  hai,  w- 
jaiu'a  biie. 

35  Aur  un  men  so  eh  ari 'a  t  ke  ek 
sikhiAnewAle  ue  us  se,  a/.mane  ke  liyc, 
yih  pi'iehlui,  ki 

3(i  Ai  Ustdd,  sliara  men  bara  hukm 
kaun  had? 

37  Yisu'  ne  us  se  kabd,  Klmdawand 
ko,  jo  lerA  KhudA  hai,  apue  sd  c  dil, 
aur  apni  sAri  jan,  aur  apni  sari  samiijii 
so  piyar  kar. 

38  Palli  aur  bara  hukm  yihi  hai. 

39  Aur  diisrd  us  ki  niAniiul  hai,  ki 
Tu  apue  porosi  ku  aisA  piydr  kar,  jaina 
Apko. 

40  Inhin  do  ahkdm  ]>ar  «Ara  nhar'a 
aur  sab  nahion  ki  baten  mauqui'  hain. 

41  1  Jab  Parisi  jaiu'a  the,  Yisu'  m 
un  so  puchhd,  ki 

42  Masih  ko  hoqq  nieri  tumliard 
kyi  mirurtn  hai?  Wah  ki^  kA  beiil 
hai?     Wo  belo,  Daud  kA. 

■13  Us  ne  un  ee  kahA,  Phir  Ditid, 
riih  ke  Ijatanc  bc,  kyuukar  uso  Kiiu- 
d>iw;uiil  kahtA  hai,  ki 

44  KhudAwaud  ne  mere  Khuda- 
wand  ko  kahd,  ki  Jab  tak  main  toro 
dushmanou  ko  tero  pAnwiin  k!  chauki 
na  karun,  td  nipre  dahine  baith  'f 

45  Pas,  jab  Daud  us  ko  Klmda- 
wand kalitA  hai,  to  wuh  us  kA  beta 
kyiinkar  thahrA? 

46  Par  koi  us  ke  jawab  mm  ok  bit 
na  b"l  saka,  aur  us  diu  so  kisi  U 
hiwdo  na  parA,  ki  us  se  phir  kuelui 
suwal  kare. 

XXIII  HA'IS. 

TAB  Yiaii'  logon  aur  ajino  sliapin!- 
on  se  kalino  laga,  ki 
2  Fiujili  nur  Farisi  MiisA  ki  gaddi 
par  baitbe  hain  j 

'A  Js  liyo  jo  kuchh  we  tunilien  mata' 
ne  ko  kahen,  uidno,  aur  'amal  men 
ldo ;  U'kin  un  ke  so  ki'uu  na  karo  :  ky- 
tirjki  we  kahte  hain,  pnr  karto  ualiii:. 
4  Ki  wo  bhSri  bojhen,  jin  kA  utha- 
nA  mnafakil  hai,  bdndhte,  nur  logon 
C 


Musih  kdfaqV>OQ  aur  HATI', 

ke  kandhori  par  rakhte  hairj ;  par  ap 
unheB  nt!  ek  uigii  ae  saikauc  pai' 
rizi  nahin  hairj. 

5  We  apne  sab  kfi.ni  logorj  ko  di- 
khanc  ke  wasit:  kurir  hai  m  ;  apne  fca'- 
wi/.  el.aure,aurai>ne  Jubborj  kedamau 
Iftmbo  baiiilo  hain, 

B  Aur  mihmauiorj  taeg  ndrjagah 

BUI  'iliiiilrLiUlnimm  nu'ij  miwal  kursi, 

7  Aur  buang  men  salam,  aur  yih 
ki  log  unhcn  Jtiibbi,  Itablji,  knlu'ij, 
ohibte  liiiin. 

8  Par  tum  Kabbl  nn.  kahlao:  ky- 
uijki  tiiiuliarii  Hadi  ek  hai,  ya"m\ 
Masih,  aur  tam  ttfa  bhdi  ho. 

9  Aur  umbi  pnr  kimi  ko  apnfi,  bap 
mat  kahu:  kyirnki  tuinbdra  ek  hi 
Ban  hal,  jo  asman  par  hai. 

10  Aur  ria  timi  liatii  kahlao:  kyi'm- 
ki  tum  hara  Hadi  ek  hai,  ya'ii",  Misili. 

11  I'alki  jo  tum  irirn  bara  hai, 
timi  hara-  khadim  hoga" ; 

12  Aur  joapko  bara  jani'^a,  ohhotA 
kiya  jaega  ;  aur  jo  ap  ko  chhota  sam- 
jhegi,  wo  barf  kiya  jaega. 

13  ^f  Ai  riyakar  faqiho,  aur  Farisio, 
linu  pai  alknl  U  liye  ki  auman  ki 
badshiihat  ko  logon  ke  age  band  karte 
ho:  na  luni  ap  us  meti  jtUe,  aur  uh 
jimewftlon  ko  uh  turi;  juta  dete. 

i  i  Ai  riyakar  lacpbo,  aur  Farisio, 
rum  par  ai&js!  ki  bewaoj  I.  Ii  .■ 
uiwiil  jdu-,  mu'  makr  se  lambi  chauri 
mumi/  [arliteho;  ia  sabab  tum  ziyi- 
datai  saza'  paogc. 

15  Ai  riyakar  faqiho,  aur  Farisio, 
tum  par  afros  1  ki  tum  tari  aur  khush- 
ki  ka  daum  ia  liye  karte  ho,  ki  ek  ku 
:i|iii"    iiin    mon    Jiio,    aur  jab    wuh 
chnka,  to  apne  kg  dumi  use  julianiic 
ka"  farzand  bimrtte  ho. 

Hi  Ai  andhe  rah-dikhanewalo,  tum 
parafeos,  ki  kahr.o  ho,  Apar  koi  hai- 
kal  ki  qasam  khdvrc,  (o  kuchh  im;- 
/ilyaoa  nahin;  pn  agar  ba-ibal  ke 
oook  ki  qat<am  khiwe,  to  us  ko  pura 
karun  zarur  hai! 

17  Ai  nad&iio,  aur  ai  andhc.  kano 
34 


XX IH.  F'.vihf-iii  J.o  mah'iiwtt  harna, 
bara  hai,  sona,  ya  haikal,  jo  aoao  ko 
pak  karti  ¥ 

18  Phir  tum  kalite  ho,  Agar  kol 
qurbing&h  ki  quam  khdwo,  to  kuchh 
muaayaqa  nahin ;  jjar  agar  mur  ki, 
jo  um  par  disirhti,  qa*a.m  khawe,  tO 
us  ko  m'ira  kami  fain  hai. 

10  Ai  nidioo,  aiir  ai  audio,  bara 
kaun  hai,  atar,  ya  iiurbanga"h,  jo  uazr 
ko  pak  karti  ? 

i!0  Paa  jo  qurbiin.::ili  k  i  qa8am 
khaiii  haf,  us  ki  aui  un  sib  chi/.nu  ki, 
jo  us  par  eharhirj,  qasa)ii  khaiii. 

L'l  Aur  jo  hiiikal  ki  qaaam  kluita 
liaj,  nn  ki  aur  jo  ua  uieu  lahnewdld 
liai,  us  ki  bhi  qasam  khita  hai. 

22  Aur  jo  umfto  ki  qaEaia  khati 

hal,  Khudii  ke  takht  aur  us  par  jo 
balthaewall  hai,  uu  ki  bhi  qasaru 
klidta  hai. 

-."I  Ai  riyakar  faqiho,  aur  Fftrfsio, 
tum  pai  fifeosl  kyiiiiki  pocuna,  aur 
aniriun,  aur  y.ira  ki  liuliyaki  lagat6  ho, 
pai  .-li ni'at  ki  bhari  biion,  ya'ne,  in- 
saf, aur  raluo,  aur  iman  ko  obilO{ 
diya;  lazim  thd  ki  tum  unhen  ikhti- 
yar  karte,  aur  inlien  bhi  na  chhortc. 

2i  Ai  aiidhe  rAh-dikhanewalo,  ki 
maoholihar  chhaotte,  aur  i'mt  ko  Lignl 
jale  lio. 

26  Ai  riyakar  fturlho,  aur  Fariclo, 
tum  par  aiV.os!  ki  tum  piyila  aur 
rikabi  ko  lipar  se  saf  karte,  par  we 
andar  UU  aur  liur;ii  m*  liiiare  hain. 

£0  Ai  andhe  Farisi,  rn  pahle  myala 
aur  rikabi  andar  se  saf  kar,  ki  we 
bahar  ho  bhi  tif  hojj. 

^T  Ai  riyakar  l'aqiho,  aur  Farisio, 
tum  par  al'sus  I  ki  tum  MiiVdi  phlri 
hiii  nabron  ki  mauind  ho,  jo  bahar  m 
bahut  jwliclilii  iiia'li'mi  licti  h.iin,  par 
bbitur  murdou  ki  haddiim  aur  liar 
tarah  ki  uapikrta  bbart  hairj. 

28  Isi   tarah   tum   bhi   ziliir  mag 

logoii  ko  raktba>.dikbai  dute,  j.ar  i  atiu 

■    ir,;uvr  (hararat  wj  bhare  ho. 

L'y  Ai  riyiikar  l'uqiho,  aur  Farfrfo, 
tam   par    afeoe !    kyiinki    Dabtog   ki 


Slahr  u  haikal  H  garat  ki  HATI', 
qabtvri  Laniito,  aur  r&ttMwg  ki  goren 
snmvarte  ho, 

30  Aur  kahte,  Agar  hnm  «pot  Wp- 
ihuli'LJ  k*  dirjon  m  e  n  hotc,  to  nabion 
ke  khrin  innj  un  kfi  sbarik  na  bute. 

31  Isi  tarah  tum  RpM  par  gawalii 
dete  ho,  ki  timi  nabion  ku  qalilun  k  o 
farzand  ho. 

<M  Pas  apne  bapliidou  ka  painiana 
bharo. 

38  Ai  sampo,  aur  ai  samp  ku  Imuh- 
ch",  tum  jahuimaiiL  ke  'azab  se  ky- 
unkar  bhagoge? 

34  lf  Is  liye,  dekho,  main  nabion, 

gen,  aur  laqiium  ko  tumharu 
pas  bhejt*  hi'm ;  tum  Ufi  iiii'ii  h 
hvznn  ko  qatl  karoge,  aur  salib  par 
khinctiuge,  aur  ba'zon  koapiie'ibadat- 
khauon  meg  kore  niiiroge,  aur  shahr 

ba  shafai  sataoae: 

35  Td  ki  sab  rastbazon  ka  khun  jo 
zaiuin  par  bahaya  gaya  tum  pai  aw, 
Habil  rasiba/,  ke  klii'm  se  barakhiyah 
ko  bete  Kakariyaii  ke  khun  lak,  jise 
tum  ne  haikal  aur  ijurbaugah  ke  dar- 
luiyan  ij:ni  k  iya. 

S8  Main  timi  mo  sach  kalilii  iuin,  ki 
Yih  sab  kuchli  is  zamauu  ke  logoti 
.  u-  im  j:''.. 

37  Ai  Yarusalrim,  ai  Yanisalain,  jo 
n;iliioh  ko  mar  dalti,  aur  unhtn,  jo 
lujh  pas  bheje  gaye,  pathrao  karti 
hai,  main  ne  kitni  bir  chaha  ki  tera 
larkun  ku,  jis  tarah  inurgi  apne  baeh- 
ch'jn  ko  paroy  tale  ikatthc  kani  hai, 
jam'a  kanin,  par  tum  hu  ua  chaha  I 

38  Dekho,  tuinhara  ghar  tuinliat'i: 
liyo  virau.  clahora  jala  hai. 

31)  Kyi'inki  uuiitj  tum  se  kahta  hnn, 

ki  Ab  M  tum  rnujiiu  phir  na  dekhogo, 

jab  tak  ki  kahoge,  Mubarak  hai  wuh 

jo  KUudawand  ke  ndm  par  ata  hai. 

XXIV  BAB. 

AUR  Yiau.'  haikal  se  nikalkc  cliahi 
gayi;  aur  us  ko  BLagird  ns  pas 
ie,  ki  usa  haikal  ki  'imaraleii  dikhd- 
wen. 

2  Y'mi'i'  no  uu  se  kahii,  Tum  yih  sab 


XXIV.  Hator,jia  Jfiwfl  "e  Sf/a  h  H. 
chizen,  dekhte  lio?  main  tum  sc  nacii 
kaht4  ln'iM,  ki  Yah.in  ck  p^itthar  pat- 
thar   par   na  chliutega,  jo  giraya  ua 

3  ^  Aur  jab  wuh  Zaitun  ke  pahar 
par  baithi  tha,  ns  ke  thagirdoti  uo 
klialwat  lucu  us  pax  aku  kaha,  Ilaui 
>:o  kah,  ki  yih  kab  boga?  aur  tfi«  aua 
k,i  aur  zainana  ke  akldr  lione  ka  ni- 
hIij'ui  kyii  hai  ''. 

i  Tah  Yisd'  ne  jawab  mrn  un  se 
kahii,  KliaLpardiir,  koi  uunheii  giinuiili 

i  kare. 

b  Kyiiijki  bohutera  mtsra  nAin  par 
;i.wcrige,  aur  kalungi),  ki  Main  MauiJi 
luin;  aurbahuton  kuguinrah  kftrejjge. 
Anr  tiun  laraion  anr  laraiuii  ki 
afwiilion  ki  khabar  Bimoge  ;  khahai- 
dar,  mat  gliabraiyo:  kyiinki  un  sab 
biton  ka  hona  zardr  hai,  par  ab  tak 
akhir  mihiii  hai. 

'l  Ki  <|aum  tiuum  par,  ruir  badshii- 
hat  Liidyliahat  par  charh  awegi,  KUI 
kal  aur  mari  paregi,  aur  jagah  jagah 
bhunelial  awengo. 

«  Yih  nah  Stuohh  nmsibaton  ka 
shuftV  hai. 

!J  Tob  we  tumlion  luiyat  nien  d,il 
dengo,  aur  tumheB  mar  Halengo ;  aur 
mere  uam  ke  sabab  sab  qaum  tum  su 
kina  rakhengi. 

10  Us  wai|t  bahutere  thokar  kliaim- 
•10,  aur  ek  dusre  ko  pakarwacg»,  aur 
ek  di'isro  so  kina  rakhega. 

11  Aur  bahnt  jhiltho  nabi  uthenge, 
jo  bah  u  ton  ko  guuirali  karetige, 

1^  Aur  bc-dini  ke  barh  jam  H  ba- 
hutou  ki  niahabbat  tiumdi  ho  jaegi. 

13  Par  jo  akhir  lak  taliuga,  wuhl 
najitt  pawega. 

14  Anr  badshdhat  ki  is  kluislikha- 
bari  ki  luaaadi  taniam  duuya  nicij 
hogi,  ta  ki  sab  qaumon  par  jawabi 
ho;  bab  akhir  hoga. 

15  Pas,  jab  tum  u»  winln  karnewali 
makruh  chia  ko,  jis  ki  khabar  Daniol 
nabi  ne-  di,  pak  jagah  merj  ktttft 
deklioge,  (jo  parhe,  bu  sainajli  U  :) 


'A'l'ihd  karne  ke  liye  MATI', 

lfi  Tab  jo  Yrthndiya  mnj  bon.,   pa- 

hSmn  par  bhdg  jA*n  : 

'l7-Aurjii  kothe  par  lio,  na  utre  ki 

tijHic  ghar  s«  kuclih  nik&ln.: 

18  Aurjnkhet  men  ho,  pichbe  na 
phirc,  ki  apne  kapre  le. 

19  Par  un  par  nisos,  jo  un  dinon 
pehvAliAn.wurdudh-pilAnewAHAri  bon  ! 

80  Bo  tam  du'A  mangu,  ki  t  umbara 
bMgns,  jdre  men.,  vi  eabt  ke  din  na 
lio: 

23  Kyiinki  ua  waqt  aini  bari  mu- 
wbat  hogi,  ki  dunyA  ke  shuru'  ra  ab 
tak  na  hal,  baiki  oa  kabhi  hogi. 

JJ2  Aur  agar  we  din  ghatAe  na  jAte, 
to  ek  tan  najAt  na  pAtA ;  par  b&rgusl 
il<.in  ki  khatir  yn  din  ghatAe  jAenge. 

23  Tnb  acar  koi  tura  k  kahe,  ki 
Dekho,  Masih  yahdn,  ya  wahan  bai; 
lu  uh  na  mdnnA. 

24  Kyunki  Un'il-lie Ma.nili  aur  jlu'ithe 
i :  i  otneggej  iur  fcifle  baw  nishAn  aur 
kardmaten  dikhdwenge  ki,  agar  bo 
sakld,  to  wc  barguaidon  ko  bhi  guuirdh 
karte. 

25  Dekli n,  main  tumben  Age  hiokah 
il  '-■ 

20  Pa«,  agar  we  tumben  knhen,  ki 
Dekho,  wuh  bayaban  men  bai,  to 
bahar  na  j%<>;'  ya  ki,  dekho,  waU. 
kothri  men  bai,  to  na/nAuiyo. 

27  Kyiinki  jaisi  biili  piirab  se 
kfundbke  ifii'lit'libiui  tak  chamaktt, 
walsa  h)  Ibn  i  A'dam  ka  anAbMhogd. 

28  Kyiinki  jnliAn  murddr  ho,  wahAn 
giddh  bhi  jam 'a  bonge. 

29  T  Undiiion  ki  musibat  ke  ba'd, 
turi.  stiraj  aiwlherA  ho  JA?kA,  aur  chdnd 
apni  roslini  na  degd,  aur  sitere  AsmAn 
M  gir  jacngc,  aur  AsiriAn  ki  qi'nvat.en 
hi!  jAeggi  r 

30  Tftb  Ibn  i  A'dam  kd  nislian  As- 
nidn  par  7-Abir  hogA;  aur  un  wnqt 
/.amin  ke  Btiro  gbnr&tio  chhnt.i  pitenge, 
aur  Ibn  i  A'dam  ko  ban  qudrnt  aur 
jalai  ke  sAth  AsmAn  ki  badliorj  par  Ati 
uekhcnge. 

31  Aur  wu.li  narsiii^c  ke  bare  slior 

30 


XX  f  V. 


M'ts  i  h  fa 


fa  -a.t)i  apne  firishum  ko  bhejegA,  aur 
we  us  ke  bargu/.idon  ko,  chAron  tarat 
se,  AsmAn  ki  i»  hadd  se  us  hadd  tak, 
jam 'a  karengo. 

,12  Ali  anjir  ku  dnrakbt  seok  tamsil 
bikini,  ki  Jab  us  ki  dali  narni  hoti,  aur 
pmtto  nlkalte,  bom  jinte  ho  ki  (jaml 
nazdik  bai : 

33,  Ini  larah  jab  yib  sab  deklin,  to 
jdno  ki  wuh  nazdik,  biilki  darwdze  bi 
par  bai. 

34  Main  tum  B6  sm.'li  kubtd  htin,  ki 
Jab  tak  yili  sal)  kucbh  ho  na  le,  is 
zainAnc  ke  log  gui-,ar  na  jaenge. 

35  A'stnAn  aur  Kainin  lal  jAeijR'', 
pai  incl'i  baten  bftrgbS  M  t:il''lJ.L'i. 

30  %  Lokin  un  din  aur  un  gbari  ko. 
men  BA|t  ke  siwii,  AHmdn  ker  Brifthtoj) 
tak  koi  naliin  jantA, 

37  JaisA  Kiib  ko  dinon  men  h6i, 
waigf  lii  Iba  i  A'dam  kA  AnA  bhl  hega. 

33  Kvi'mki  jis  tarali  un  dinon  meij 
tufan  ke  .ign,  kbAtc,  pilu,  by:ih  fcarte, 
liyalic  |ate  tlu\  us  din  tak  ki  Kuli 
kisliti  jwir  cbarhA, 

39  Aur  na  jAnte  llie,  jab  tak  ki  tu- 
lari iya,  wr  tui  mA  ko  Ia  &.fi",  fa! 
tarah  Ibn  i  A'dam  kAAnA  bn  I  Dgi, 

40  Do  Admi  kbet  mm  bongc;  ek 
pakrft,  $&wi  chhora  jAt-ga. 

41  Do  'aitraton  chakki  plstian 
hoggl ;  ck  pakt-i.  ihisvi  ohhofi  jicgt 

42  'f  Ts  liye  jagtc  rahoi  liynil-  ■ 
tuiiiliuij  ma'iiim  nnliiij  ki  kie  glinri 
tumliarA  Khudawand  dwegA. 

43  Par'yib  tum  jantc  bo,  ki  agRt 
phar  ke  itiAlik  ko  iiia'lum  liota  ki 
c.hnr  kin  ghari  AwegA,  to  wuh  jagtA 
rabtA,  aur  apne  pliar  moa  «sndli  mArni' 
n  a  dot  A. 

44  Ts  liye  tum  bhi  taiydr  ralio: 
kyiinki  jis  gbari  tumben  gnm.ln  na 
ho,  Ibn  i  A'dam  AwegA. 

4t>  Pas  kann  hai,  wuh  diyAnatdar 
anr  hosbyar  khadim,  jine  ua  ke  kbA- 
wind  ne  apne  naukar  cbakarnu  par 
mnqarrar  kiyd,  ki  waqt  par  unhei.i 
kbdna  de  ? 


kl  iiishiiiiiun. 


MATI, 


4t>  Mubarak  hai  wuh  khddim,  jiwo 
us  k;i  khawind  Akar  aiad  iii  karte 
pawe. 

47  Main  timi  sc  aach  balita  hi'm,  ki 
Wuh  use  apnu  sab  mal  par  mukhtar 
karegd. 

48  Par  agar  wuli  had  khddim  kpM 
<!il  men  kahc,  ki  M  era  khawind  due 
imsn  iler  barta  hai  ; 

4it  Aur  apne  haiu-khidmaton  ko 
m&rnc,  aur  rnatwdbm   ke  aath  khane 

phw  lage; 

50  Uh  naukar  ki  khawind  ini  din 
dwegd,  ki  wuh  us  ki  rah  na  take,  aur 
m  gharl,  ki  wuh  uh.  j:ino, 

BI  Aur  om  do  tukre  karke  us  kd 
hiaaa  riydkdron  ke  sath  mutjarrar 
karegd:  waluiu  rona  aur  ddnt  piand 
bogd. 

XXV  BA'H. 

U  S  waqt  dsmdn  ki  bdtlshdhat  dus 
kimwarion  ki  maniiid  hogi,  jo 
apne  mash'ak-ii  lebar  dulhd  ke  isli<|bsU 
ke  wdsto  niklin. 

9  Uti  men  pauch  hosnyir,  aur  panah 
u.'ulan  iliin. 

3  Jo  ndddn  thifl,  unhon  no  apne 
itiash'ale  liye,  magar  tel  sath  na  liyd ; 

4  Par  boHhydmn  06  &prjfl  mash'alon 
ke  nilh  liartanon  men  tel  liya. 

o  Jab  dulba  no  der  ki,  nah  i'inghue 
UtgfO,  aur  H  gayiii. 

'i  A'dlii  rat  ko  dbum  machi,  lii 
Dflfcho,  dulba  ala  hai  ;  ua  ke  istiqbdl 
ko  wiste  niklo. 

7  Tab  un  sab  kimwdriim  iic  uthkar 
ajnii  iiiash'alen  durust  kin. 

5  Aur  luidanun  ne  boahyirog  H 
■;aiid,  Apne  tol  mori  m  bunsg  bbi 
do,  ki  luiuiai'i  mash'alen  bujbi  jdti 
liain, 

0  Par  hoshyaron  ne  jawab  men 
kahd,  Aisa  na  ho,  ki  hamdrc  aur  tuni- 
liare  waate  kilayat  na  kare:  bihtar 
hai  ki  beelmewakm  ke  pas  jdo,  aur 
apne  w&tte  mol  lo. 

10  Jab  we  kburidiif!  gayfj),  dulhd  a 
■  il.iii'']i;i,  auf  vn  jo  taiydr  tbin  na  ko 

37 


XXV.  Ti'ron  H  tamsil. 

siitb  shadi  ke  ghar  iui-ii  f;ayirj  :    aur 
darwa/a  bumi  luia. 

11  Picbhe  <re  dilari  kuuwdridn  bbi 
liiij,  aur  kahne  lairin,  Ai  khudawand, 
ai  khuddwaml,  luimaic  liye  darwdza 
khol 

12  Tab  U3  iic  jawab  uicn  kalut, 
Uairj  tam  u  meh  ubta  l-r.ij,  ki  tum- 
ben uhin  uahrjhanta. 

19  la  liye  jagte  ralio,  kynnki  timi 
uabiu  jauto  ki  kami  H  iliu,  ya  kauri 
si  glutrL  lini  i  A'dam  dwega. 

14  f'  Ki  wuh  us  admi  ki  mduiud 
iiaijjis  uo  dt'ir  mulk  men  anfar  kfirte 
waqt  apne  iiaukaron  ko  bulakar  uiiben 
apnd  m  di  supurd  kiyai 

16  Bk  ko  pdncb  tore,  du.-trc  ke  do, 
tiftro  ko  ek  ;  bar  ek  ko  us  ki  liydiiat 
ke  itiuwaliij  d  i  ya ;  aur  turt  «Uar 
kiv:i. 

16  't'ab  jis  sb  jiaucb  tore  pdc  tbe, 
jdkar  aur  ku  den  tarku  panen,  tore 
aur  jiaiiia  kiye, 

17  Yiiuhm  us  ne  bbi,  jis«  do  iniie 
tlic,  do  aur  kanide. 

18  Par  jis  no  ek  pavd,  gaya,  aur 
Bjuafn  khodkar  apne  kiudawand  ki; 
rupiya  ^ar  diye. 

10  Muddat  ba'd,  un  uiuikaron  kd 
klidwiuil  dyd,  aur  un  se  bisdb  loiie 
laga. 

20  So  jis  no  pdnch  toro  pac  the, 
pdnch  tore  aur  bhi  lekar  dyd,  aur  kfr> 
hd,  Ai  khuddwand,  tu  ne  nnijhe  paueh 
tore  BOfflpe;  dekb,  main  ne  un  ko 
siwa  pdnch  tore  aur  bbi  kamair. 

21  Us  ku  kliawind  us  us  so  kabd, 
Ai  achcbhe  aur  diydnatddr  naukar, 
shdbdsb  1  tu  tb'irc,  men  diydnatddr 
nikla,  main  tujho  babut  cliizon  pat 
ikhtiyar  duriga:  tu  apne  kbdwiud  ki 
bliusiii  men  sbamil  ho. 

22  Aur  jis  ne  do  tore  pdc  the,  wuh 
bbi  dkar  kahno  bi^d,  Ai  khudawaml, 
di  ae  mujba  do  tore  sompe :  dekh, 
un  ke  siwd  mairj  ue  do  toro  aur  bbi 
kiyc. 

23  Us  ke  khdwind  ne  us  se  kalisi. 


A'khiri  'addlal  MA1T, 

Al  Bohehbe  aur  diyiutitdar  nauknr, 
■hibiahl  lu  thops  mag  dlySnatdiF 
iiiklA,  main  tujhe  bahut  chtaen  par 
ti.i.klii Ar  kanlngfii  atpM  khnwind  ki 
khushi  ihcl  idiiinil  ha, 

1M  Tab  wuh  bhi,  jis  nc  ek  tora 
pAvA  tbi,  aku  kuhuc  Iag6>  Al  klui-lu- 
w  siuri,  «min  tujlte  «k  sakbt  aiisaj 
admi  jautd  thA,  ki  jaluin  Bawa  bayi, 
wahifl  t.t'i  kdttS,  aur  jahaij  nahin 
chlntrayA,  wnba-j  jamta  kaiti  haj ; 

■  ,.iih  ila  ii,  aur  .jakt-  U.Tii  turS, 
«amin  mon  rlihipAya;  dekh,  teri  jo 
hai  maujlSd  hai 

2tl  I7s  ke  milik  ne  jaw&b  mcn  (B  88 
kahi,  Ai  had  nur  mM  IHMlkar,  lii  (M 
jAni,  ki  main  waliin  kaiti  hiirj,  janin 
nabfg  IkivCl,  nur  wididn  jaui'n  kartd, 
jalniii  naluri  clihiupi: 

27  Pn  tujhe  muniaib  iha,  ki  mcre 
rdf&ya  wirraf"i_i  ko  deti,  ki  main  Ike 
apni  mil  sod  tomat  piii. 

2d  Bo  Ib  m  jdh  tera  ehhi&kar,  jis 
] .As  <i;i-  ("V''  h  ain  iific  do. 

29  Kyuijki  jis  pin  hadbh  hai,  mM 
diyft  jAegA,  aur  D8  ki  barhti  liogi  ;  nur 
j:.-  pai  kuchb  nahin,  us  se,  wuh  blii  jo 
liil.l.ti'L  ho,  la  liyi  jiogA. 

30  Aur  ih  iiikamuii'  aaukar  ko  bi- 
liar audhare  mag  dai  do:  waiig  ronA 
aur  ildnt  pUni  hogi. 

31  *j  Jab  Ibn  i  A'dam  npne  jalai 

i,  .iur  sah  p4b  firiahte  u  k. 
eatb,  tab  wuh  apa»  jalai  ke  takht  p*r 
baithega* : 

32  Aur  sali  KUD    Ut   b    .,        I 
ki  jaengl:  nur  j»  taf 

rorj  ko  bakrion  se  Jadi  kai 
ok  ko  dusro  ,«<■  juoA  knn'jiii. 

33  Aur  bhertni  ko  dahi;.". 
rfon  i;"  basg  kuari  k.iregA. 

84  Tab  badshah  u»h.erj  jo  us  ke  da- 
hjM  baiQ,  kahega,  Ai  maro  Bip  ke 
mubarak  logo,  ua  bidahihat  ke,  jo 
dunya  ki  bunyad  d&lte  lii  tumhnre 
liye  taJv*'  ki  gaji,  mfraa  nu-ij  lo: 

85  K;  -nki  main  bhukhi  Min,  timi 
m:  liiuilir  khAiia  kliilava  :  main  piyasi 


XXV.  HoAtpi/, 

tliA,  tum  nc  ituijho  ]inni  ]>iltiyA:  ma% 
paroesi  tlia,  tum  no  mojha  apuc  gbar 
nicn  utArA: 

86  Nanga  tbi,  tum  ncinujhe  kajini 
imbindyA:  bimAr  tbi,  tim  M  BWrl 
i'yibl:it  ki :  qaid  nieii  tliA,  (um  merc 
pie  fa. 

-'7  Ua  Mwl  rastbaa  aae  jivv.ib  mcn 
kabegee,  Ai  ^budiwantL  kafe  bam  nc 
tujhe  bhdkhAdekhi.Bttt  tcUtol  kbili- 
j'A?  yA  piydsa,  aur  pial  |iilAya  P 

38  Kah  liam  ne  tujhe pardcddekba, 
(HUT  avine  ghar  mcij  utArAV  yi 

aur  kajira  pahiniyi? 

39  Ilmu  kab  lujlie  Mrair  \:1  oiaci 
mcn  dekhkar  Uijb  j4s  &eV 

40  Tali  Hidshali  uu  M  jawab  mvij 
kabegi,  Uabj  tum  se  «ach  kabtA  biln, 
ki  Jab  tum  ai  men  un  aab  m  obboic 
bbitog  men  kg  ok  ke  sAth  kiya,  to 
mere  sAtli  kiyri. 

'l"!  Tab  ivuli  liAin  tarafwAlnu  nc  bhl 
kabega,  Ai  mal'iiiio,  nnare  sfenbne  se 
us  hanwaba  ki  ag  man  jAo,  Jo  Bhaitto 
nur  us  ko  firishton  ke  liyc  taiyir  k:, 
gay!  baii 

12  Ky6nl;i  mabj  bkiikliA  tbA,  pat 
tum  ae  unobe  kbioa  ko  iu  diyA  :  pi- 
yaaa*  tbi,  tera  m  nmjM  pftnl  ua  pi- 
JAya: 

^3  l'aniobi  tliA,  tum  ne  mujlie  apno 
giiar  ulen  aa  utara:  nangA  lini,  tara 
ne  mujliu  kapri  oa  [linbayt:  bimir 
aur  qaid  men  tbi,  tum  ne  mari  khabar 
na  li. 

44  Tab  we  bbj  }«w4b  imn  ua  b 
kabegge,  Ai  Kbudiwand,  knb  liam  nc 
tujhe  bbukbd,  y*  inyasji,  jnl  pardesi, 
yA  n:iut;ii,  ya  biniAr,  yi  qaidi  ciekha, 
aur  torl  khidmat  ua  ki  'i 

i»  Tab  wuli  uiiherj  jawib  men  ka- 
hegA,  Maiis  tum  H  wicl  kabti  hun,ki 
Jab  tum  ne  mpro  in  eab  bo  cbfiefe 
bhAiou  meg  se  ok  ke  Bit  h  na  kiya,  u> 
mere  Hit  h  bhl  na  kiyA. 

46  Aur  we  bamesha  ke  'azAb  men 
jiengo :  par  rfctbiz  bamesha  kl  zin- 
ilr.'i  DMQ> 


Manlh  par  'U?  fltiltid. 

XXVI  J1AT5. 

AOB  yi'in  hiia,  kijab  YisA'  yili  sah 
baten.  kar  cinika,  fc.t  us  ne  apne 
ab&gtrdOB  H  kabii, 


MATI',  XXVI.  'J./»  i  •:  «i  *•;.»>■<"  U  aitwtf. 

jahle  dui,  shigirdoii  ne  Y  isu'  pas  ikar 
aim  Ke  kaha,  To  kahin  cMhti  hai  ki 
haiii  tero  liye  &cah  taiyarkiire»,  ki  ti't 
uae  khae'.' 


2  1  uh"   |&nte  ho  ki  do  rrwbaM  'M  i       18  Us  ne  kaha,  Shahr  Enen  fulanc 


{asah  iioyi.nur  lbiiiA'dsm  Imwiikk 
i:  ■   i,  l  i  salib  jiar  Brffichaj4we. 

8  Tab  sardar  kahiu,  aur  faqih,  nur 
qaum  ke  huzurg,  Qayafa  nama  .sardiir 
kabin  ke  ^har  meij  ikalthe  liiie, 

4  Aur  sahih  ki,"ki  Ylwu'  ko  ftttofe 
pakarke  mtfr  $tteg. 

5  Tak  uuho'n  ne kaha,  Td  ko  tubin. 
ua  lio  ki  lo#m  mi'ij  l'nsv.l  machn. 

<i  ^  Jis  w«f(t  Yisu' liail'amyi  mvn 
S 'i'iiH:-."i',,n  knrlii  ke  gbar  nu'u  iba, 

7  l'"k  'aurat  sang  i  manuar  ke  'ilr- 
ilan  nien  oltaatl  'itr  ua  [)is  Jai,  aur 
jnb'wuh  khine  baithi,  us  ko  sir  par 
dbati. 

8  TJs  ke  sbigird  yili  dekhkar  kbaTa 
li'.kf  kabut  laga,  K*he  ko  yth  baftada 
klmrch  hiii? 

B  Kvi'inki  yih  'itrbarcdam  par  bik 
la,  aur  wuli  muhlajou  ko  diya  jati. 

10  Visi'i*  ne  yih  jtittkar  unaeo  kaki, 
Kyon.  is  'aurat  ko  taklif  dek  hal  ni 
(M  t',  initg  iatb  nok  kam  kiya. 

11  Kytfulsi  mulitaj  hninesha  tem- 
1 1 A  r»1  B&tb  baiii;  par  main  bameski 
luinharcsith  na  rahunga. 

(L'  Ki  us  ne  jo  meru  badan  ]iar  'i! 
rihala,  to  yili  mere  kafan  ke  liyc  kiya 
bal. 

/:>  Main  timi  se  «aeli  knlita  biitj.ki 
Tamani  dunyi  men,  jabati  kabin  is 
Injil  ki  manadi  hogi,  yih  bhi,io  us 
ae  kiya,  is  ki  yadgari  ke  Eya  kaba 
bte«L 

1 1  *i  Tab  mi  barnh  mag  bb,  ek  ne, 
jla  ki  nim  Yahidib  Iaqariyotf  tha, 
turdarkihimm  ks  pas  jakar  kahi, 

16  Jn  maiQ  usa  tttmbm  pakarwi 
dufl,  tojnujbe  kya  doge?  Tab  unuon 
ne  us  »e  tlsrupiya  ki  iu/ar  kiya. 

16  Aur  wuli  ub  waqt  seuikepakaf- 
uiiiji  ki:  liyc  (pilui  dhuudbta  tba. 

17  ^  So,  be-kbamiri  rotion  ki'idke 


skakbs  fwlfi  jakar  us  se  kaho,  ki  D«t4d 

farmiia  hai,  Mcra  waot  nazdik  pa- 
huneba ;  main  apuc  siu'igii.lou  smnet 
tere  yahan  'id  i  fosali  karOEgi, 

1!)  So  jaisi  Yinu'  ne  aiiaginhiii  ku 
luikiii  kiya  tha,  wc  bajd  lac,  aur  foaaii 
laijir  kiyi, 

20  Jab  iba»  biit,  wuh  mi  batabon 
ke  >&fa  khane  liaitha. 

21  Jab  we  kba  faho  the,  us  M  kaha, 
Maig  tuni  se  sauh  kali  ia  hiitj,  ki  Tum 
meij  soek  raujhe  i^karvva  dega, 

22  Tab  we  nihayat  dilgir  hiie,  aur 
liar  ek  uu  mci]  fio  us  ku  kaline  la^A, 
Ai  Khuiiawaiid,  kya  main  htin  ? 

23  Us  ne  jawab  mon  kaha,.ln  mera 
s:iih  tab4q  tuetj  htitli  daliii  liiii,  wobi 

ujIm>  ia;,.irwA  dfgft. 

'24  Ibu  i  A'dam,  jis  tarah  us  ]:•■ 
haqq  meg  liklia  hai,  jdla  hai:  l'.kiu 
ub  shaklis  par  afejs,  .jis  .so  I  bn  i  A'dam 
giril'tdr  l;anvnya  j&ta;  agar  wiih 
shakhs  paida  na  liota,  ua  kfl  liy 
hi},i':ir  thi. 

26  Tab  Yalniilah  ne,  Jo  UB  ki  )>a- 
karwiiutwiilii  tha,  jawib  nifii  kabft, 
Ai  IJnbbi,  kya  mai^huii  J  Usneknha, 
Til  ne  Ap  hi  kaha. 

26  T  Un  ke  kltSte  waqt  Yisii'  do 
roti  li,  aur  harakat  maagk»  tori,  phir 
sluigirdon  ko  dekar  kahi,  Lo,  kbao; 
yih  mera  Iwdau  hai. 

27  J'bir  piyali  lekar  ehukr  kiya, 
aur  uiiheti  deiiar  kaha,  Tum  sah  i.«  iwv 
ne  piu  ; 

28  Kyauki  j-ib  mori  labfi  liai ; 
a'ne,  oaye'abo  kii  laini,  jo  bahutoti 
.e  gimihon  ki  mu'al1!  ke  hye  bahaya 

jati. 

2fl  Main   tum    se   kabti  kiin,    ki 
Anulir  ke  pliiii  l;a  ras  phir  it;i  (»iurj^, 
us  ilin  tak  ki  tumhire  silh  ap 
ki  b&cUb&h&t  men  nayi  na  piiin, 


A!fi  mag  Kutik  UjfabwL    MATI', 

30  Phir  wegitgak e  Zaitun  kepahdr 
ko  gaye. 

31  Tnb  YisiV  ne  un  se  katai,  Tum 
sab  isi  rit  mara  sabab  thokar  khAogo . 
kvi'mki  hkhd  hai,  ki  Main  garariyeko 
imirunga,  aur  galle  ki  bheren  littur 
hit.ta.i-  ho  jAengi. 

32  Lalim  iiniiij  apue  ji  ut.hne  ke 
ba'd  tum  kg  iga  JaKl  ki>  jruingA. 

83  Patrua  nc  jawab  merjUBse  kahA, 
Agarchi  sab  teri  babat  l-hokar  khacii, 
pflT  main  kabin  Jaokar  mv  khafiijga. 

34  Yiad'  nc  ussekahd,  Main  tujli  a 
sudi  kfthtfi  ln'ih,  ki  Ti'i  isi  rat,  murgki 
bAn  j  di  ne  ke  pahle^tfo  bar  mori  iaiir 
karega. 

36  l'atnis  iip  as  sn  katai,  Agar  tere 
s.ifh  inujhe  marnd  bhi  zarlir  ho,  tau 
lilii  tera  itikaf  na  kart'mga.  Aur  sab 
shagirdon  iie  bhi  yih  kafan. 

36  K  Phir  Yisu'  un  ku  sath  Gat- 
semani  n  ani  ek  rm-upim  meij  AyA, 
aur  shagirdon  bc  kahA,  Yahdij  bnilho, 
jab  tak  main  wahan  jakar  dn'a 
niiingiin. 

87  Tabun  ne  Putra»  aur  Zabadi  ke 
do  b'.'i.i-  cith  liyc,  aur  ganigin  aur  Hi- 
kayat, dilgirhotie  laga. 

3b*  Tab  us  ne  un  sc  k  a  ha,  ki  MerA 
dil  nihayat  gaingin  hai,  baiki  meri 
iiiiiiit  ki  m  baiat  liai :  tum  yahdn  thah- 
ro,  aur  merc  sath  jAgtc  raho, 

:i:i  Aur  kuchh  ago  barhko  ituirili  ku 
bal  giri,  aur  diVa  mdngte  huokahA,ki 
Ai  mete  BAp,  agar  ho  sake,  to  yih  ni- 
yala  mujh  «e  srussar  jAe:  tau  bhi  mori 
khwahisb  nahin,  baiki  teri  khwahish 
ko  mutablq  ho, 

40  Tab  shagirdon  ke  pis  AyA,  aur 
imhen.  ao£e  pakui'  Patrua  #e  kalid,  Kya 
tum  mere  sAih  ek  glumta  naluri  jig 
eakte  ? 

11  J&gO,  aur  du'i  maiigo,  la  ki  ini- 
titain  uwii  ua  (lajo  :  n'.h  to  iiiiista'idd, 
par  jism  suat  hai. 

■J'J  Phir  us  nc  do  bara  jAkar  duit 
mangf,  aur  kabA,  ki  Ai  inure  Uap, 
agar  nici-p  pine  ke  bagair  yih  pivala 
40 


XXVI.  Masih  H 

jinujh  H  nabi 3  guzar   sakti,   to   teri 

|  matai  ho. 

48  Us  ne  Ake  phir  unhon  sotc  jm'ivA  : 
kyiinki  un  ki  ankhen  niud  «e  bliari 
tldn. 

44  Aur  unhen  chhorkar  pliir  gavA, 
aur  wuhi  bat  kahkar  tiari  bAr  du'A 
mangi. 

45  Tab  apne  shAgirdori  ke  pifl  Akar 
un  se  kabi,  Ab  sote  raho,  aur  Aram 
kam  ;  dek  bu,  wuh  ghari  a  pahunchi,  ki 
I  bn  i  A'dam  gunaligiron  ke  hath 
hawdla  klyijiti  hai. 

46  Utbo,  cbalen  :  dckho,  jo  vnujhe 
pakarwdui  hai,  u:i/.dik  hai. 

47"  \  Wuh  yih  kah  hi  rahd  thA,  ki 
dekho,  Yahi'idab.jo  un  birahon  men 
so  ek  tliA,  AyA,  aur  us  ke  wit.h  ek  bap 
hliir  talwAren  aur  IdthiAn  liye,  sardar 
kaiiinnn  aur  qauin  ke  buaurgon  ki 
taraf  se  A  pahuiK'.hi. 

48  Us  ke  pakar wiaewik  w  unherj 
yih  kalike  pati  diyi  thd,  ki  Jise  main 
chiirorin,  wubi  hai;  u  w  pakar  lemi,. 

49  Us  ne  wuijhin  Yi.sti'  pas  Akar 
kaha,  Ai  Habbi,  salam  ;  aur  UH  eluiiu 
liya, 

50  Yiaii"  ne  asa  kahd,  Ai  miyAn,  tu 
kahc  ko  AyA  ?  Tab  uuhun  ne  pas  Akar 
ViMiV  par  bati.  dnlc,  aur  UBS  pakar 
liya. 

51  Aur,  dckho,  Yiuu?  ke  eitbioj] 
men  *u  8^  ne  hith  barbAkar  apni  tal- 
war  khincai,   aur    eardir  kAhin    ka 

nikar  [iar  ebaldkar  ua  kA  kan  ari 
diyS. 

52  Tab  Visn'ne  us  se  katili,  ApnJ 
talwAr  miyAn mon  k-ir;  kyiinki  sab  jo 
tahvdr  khiachte  hain,  ttlwii  hl  le 
oiire  (ienaa. 

58  Kya  n';  ualiia  jduld,  ki  main  afabj 
apne  BAp  se  ming  sakta  hun,  aur  wuh 
lirisbluu    ko  liArah   turnau    se    «iyAda 

irc  liyc  hazir  kar  degi  V 

54  Par  n&wlabton  ki  Wt,  ki  yun- 
hin  houA  zariir  hai,  tab  kvunkar  pari 

55  Uhi  ghai'i  Yisil'  logog  fe  kahne 


pukarivdi/d  jdni.  MATI', 

lagi,  ki  Tum,  jaise  chor  ke  Bye,  tal- 
ivaren  nur  hiihian.  lekar  mere  pakarao 
ko  nifelo-  lio  ?  main  liar  roa  haikal  men 
tiiinlniri:  s'lili  batyhka  ta'liin  detA  tk£, 
pur  tum  ne  mujhe  na  pakrd. 

56  Lckin  yih  aab  is  liye  liua,  ta  ki 
nahiorj  ku  uawishte  piirc  bon.  Tab  aab 
shAgird  use  eli)»>rke  bhitg  gaye. 

57  T  fto  jiuhon  ne  Yisu'  ko  pakrA, 
wo-uso  QayafA  dAhi  sarddr  kAhin  pas 
1«  gaye,  jahAn  faqih  aur  bu/ 

the. 

58  Patrus  dfir  ddr  us  ke  rjfehltti  MT* 
lilr  kAhin  ke  (rji*1'  tak  chalA  Bayi,  aur 
andar  jAke  naukanm  ke  sdth  bakhil, 
ki  dekhe,  ki  Akhir  kya  liota  hai. 

59  Tab  sardAr  kAhin  aur  btworg  nur 
sari  majlis  Yiati'  par  jhnthi  gawAbi 
dlniiidhne  lag«,  ta  ki  oh  uulr  daleu  ; 

00  Par  na  pil;  aur  aflaronl  hahut 
jhtithe  gawah  ae,  par  kni  hat  na 
thahri.  A'khir,  do  jhtitlie  gawAhon  nc 
akar, 

'i  L  Kali  A,  ki  Is  nokaha  hai,  M  Main 
Khud&ki  haikal  kodlii  sakti,  aurphir 
tiri  din  men  nse  banA  saktA  lilin, 

62  Tab  sardar  kAhin  ne  uthkar  us 
m;  kahi,  T  u  kuchh  jawab  nahin  detd  ? 
ve  tujh  par  kya  gawahi  detc  hain  ? 

63  Par  Tisu'  cbup  raba,  Tab  sar- 
dar  kAhin  ne  us  se  kaha,  Main  tujlm 
zinda  KhudA  ki  qasam  detd  liuri,  ki 
agar  ui  Masih,  Kbuda  ka  Beta  hai,  tfl 
hain  se  kali. 

64  Yimi'  tifi  us  se  kahA,  HAn,  wuh 
JO  i'i  kahta  hai :  baiki  main  tum  se 
kahLa  iiiin,  ki  Is  ke  ha'd  tum  lbn  i 
A'diun  ko  Qadir  i  madu  ki  ilahini 
taraf  baithu,  aur  AsmAn  ke  badnlan  par 
Atc  dokhoga, 

lio  Tab  sardAr  kAhin  ne  apnc  kapri' 
phArkar  kahA,  ki  Yih  kufr  kali  chukd 
lial ;  ah  baincrj  aur  g&wil)  kyA  zartir' 
tum  ne  Ap  us  ka  kufr  suna. 

66  Ali  UiinhAri  kya  salAh?  Unhoi_ 
11«  jawab  men  kaha,  Wuh  <]atl  ke  lAiu. 
hai. 

67  Tab  uuhog  ne  us  ke  munh  par 


XXVII.  Patrus  H  intcdr  karnA. 

thuka,  aur  UM  ghunsd  mArA,  aur  diu;- 
ron  ne  use  tamAiaha  rnArki;  kaha,  ki 

68  Ai  Masih,  hamen  nubdwat  so 
batA,  ki  kis  ne  tujhe  mArA? 

69  t  Jab  Patrus  bahar  dalan  men 
baithA  thA,  ok  laut)  d  i  ne  us  pan  Aso 
kahA,  Tu  bhi  Tisu'  .ialil!  ke  sath  tha. 

70  Par  us  no  mil:  ke  samhne  inkAr 
karko  kahA,  Main  nahin  jantA  ki  ti'i 
kya  kahti  hai. 

71  l'hir  Jab  wuh  usare  ki  taraf 
bAhar  chala,  ek  diisri  uc  uso  dokokar 
un  se  jo  wahAn  tbe  kaha,  ki  Yih  bhi 
Yisti'  Simti  l.i1  sath  tha. 

72  Tab  us  nc  qasaiu  khAko  phir  in- 
kAr kiya,  ki  Main  us  ahakht  ko  nabirj 
jAntA. 

"'i  Thori  der  ba'd  unhon  ne  jo  wi« 
hAn  khare  tlie  Patrua  pA&  Akc  kaha, 
Boshakk  tii  hhi  un  nun  so  hai,  ki  turi 
buli  tujhe  aahir  k  arti  hai. 

74  Tab  us  no  la'nat  bhejkar  aur  qa- 
sam  khAkar  kahA,  Main  is  shaklis  KO 
iiahiii  jantA.     Wunhin  inurg  ne  bang 

75  Tab  Patrus  ko  Yisu'  ki  bdl.  yAd 
Si,  jo  us  no  us  se  kahj  thi,  ki  Murg  ke 
liAng  dene  se  pable  u'i  tiu  bar  merA 
inkAr  karegA.  Wuh  baliar  jake  air 
zar  royi, 

XXVII  BA'B. 

JAB  subb.  h  d  i',  sab  sardAr  kaliinon 
anr  rraum  ke  buntrgon  ne  Yisd' 
ki  bAliat  salAh  ki,  ki  uso  kyiinkar  cjatl 
kart'ij : 

'l  Phir  SM  handhkar  hAhar  lo  gayc, 
aur  Puntius  Pilatim  liAkim  ke  hawala 
k  iya. 

3  ^1  Tab  Yahv.dAh,  jis  ne  use  pa- 
kanvA  diyA  tha,  dekhkar  ki  us  ka  q*tl 
ki  iiukm  huA,  pachhtiyA,  aur  wuh  tia 
riipiyc  sardir  kihinon  aur  btusorgog 
pAs  pher  laya, 

i  Aur  kahA,  Main  tic  gunAii  kiyA, 
ki  hc-gunah  ko  uatl  ko  liye  pakanvA- 
ya.     We  bulu,  Hamen  kyA?  tu  jan. 

5  Tad    wuii    nipiyo     baikal    ineu 


Masih  hi  PUatm  ketiyc  dni.  MATI', 
phenkkar  chala  gayd,  aur  jdke  dp  ko 
jihdnsi'di. 

6  Par  sarddr  kdliinon  ne  ru futr» 
lekar  kabd,  luhep  klu17fi.no  moa  ddlnd 
rawd  nahin.ki  yih  kbiin  kii  dam  hai. 

7  Tab  uuhoij  H  «atth  karke  un  ru- 
■  ■■     i  iimuLdr  kd  khet,  pardorierj  ke 

yrirne  ke  liye,  kharfda. 

8  Is  sabab  d'j  tak  wuh  khet.  Khun 
M  khet  kahlatf  hai 

O  Tab  wuh  jfi  Yaramiyih  rabi  ki 
marital  kabi  gayA  thi,  ptirA  hiia,  U 
Unbori  ne  wuh  tis  rupae  liye,  ua  ki 
thahntf  bui  ofroat,  ji.-s  ki  sirnal  ban) 
iurdel  lucii  H  ba'zon  06  t  hahrdi ; 

10  Aur  uuboii  ne  wuh  rfLpae  knm- 
lidr  ke  khet  ke  wdstc  diyc,  jnisa  Klm- 
dawand  ne  mujhe  formdyd. 

1 1  Tliir  Yisii'  hakim  Ke  nibnrti  klia- 
nl  Ihd:  aur  lidkim  uc  oa  Be  pii.'Lha, 
K  ya  U'i  Yalmdioii  kd  Badshdh  lini? 
Ywtf  ne  un  sc  kabd,  Hifl,  W  thik 
kaliiil  lini. 

12  Aur  us  wan, t  saruar  kdliin  aur 
buang  B*  pr  faryad  kar  rahe  the,  par 
wuh  kucbli  Jawab  na  detd  tlid. 

1^  Tab  Plldtus  ne  uso  kaha.  Kyd 
tfi  ualiiri  .«unta,  ki  y  e  iujli  par  kitnl 
l^awdhidn  dftte  Lilin  ? 

14  Par  us  ne  us  ki  ok  bat  ka  bhi  ja- 
wab na  iliyd;  chundiiehi  hakim  ne 
i.iln:!  ta'ajlub  kiyd. 

lj)  Hakim  ka diatur thi,  ki  bir  'W 
kl  khdtir  ck  bandhui.jiBe  we 
elidluc,  ehtior  deta  thi. 

](!  Ua  wai|t  uu  kd  Harnhluis  ndme 
ek  nmahbrtr  bandln: 

17  So  jab  wo  ikali  lu.-  t»  ■ 
ne  un-se- katul,  Tum  kias  chahte  bo,H 
maijituinlidre  liye  ohhardu£  ?  Parah- 
bds,  yd  Yisii'  ko,  jo  Masih  kabldtd  hai  ? 

18  Kyiinki  wuh  samajh  gayd,  ki 
unhon  ne  use  ddh  sp  lunvala  kiyd. 

19  %  Aur  jab  wuh  masmu!  par  bai- 
tlid,  us  ki  joru  nc  use  kaili  bheji,  ki 
i'ii  is  caatbac  bc  kuchh  kain  na  rakh; 
kyiinki  main  nc  Aj  kliw.'iL  meii  us  ke 
«aba b  lahut  lasdi'a  pai. 

42 


XXVII  Mattk  par /«('■•«  hottd, 

20  Lekin  Bax4&T  kdliinnrj  nur  lm- 
zurRorj  ne  logon  ko  uhhdrd,  ki  Parab- 
bas  ko  mdng  Ten,  aur  YinV  ko  qatl 
kini-n. 

j  21  Hdkim  ne  jibirim  n  kabd, Tum 
in  doiimi  men  fif  kise  clidiita  lio,  ki 
main  tumlidre  liye  chhor  diin  V  Wfl 
IkiIp,  BarabbdH  ko. 

22  Pildtus  ne  un  se  kabd,  Phir  Yi- 
Kii'  ko,  jo  Maeih  kabldtd  hai,  main 
kyd  karuQ  ?  Uli  sabbon  ne  us  se  ka- 
ha,  Use  salib  de. 

23  Hdkim  na  kabd,  Kyiin  't  us  ne 
kyihadf  ki?  l'ar  imh<m  ne  aur  bhi 
.'liilliil^.'  kaha,  ki  !*«•?  wilili  da. 

24  f  Jali  l'iidlus  ne  deklid,  ki 
kuehh  bau  naliiu  nafta,  Laiki  aur  bhi 
bullar  liold  hai,  to  ji'ani  leke  Ltiir  I ■■■ 
ii^o  apnt  hdlh  dhoe,  aur  kabd,  Main  is 
rdstbdKkektji'mpeiidk  lilin  ;  tum  jdim. 

25  'l'ab  aab  logosj  ne  jtmtb  d»b 
knhd,  Us  kd  kMn  ham  j»r,  aur  ham- 
dri  aulad  nar  bo. 

2(i  T  Tab  ua  nc  Baiabbaa  ko  un  ke 
liye  chhor  <liyd,  aur  Yi^i'  ko  kor.- 
uiarkai-  l.'awdla  kiyd,  ki  salib  pir 
khim'mi  jawe. 

27  Tab  hakim  ke  wipdbioT.  ne  Yi^ii' 
ko  diwaQ-khaii«  m«g  (e  jiiW  apnl 
latodm  gumb  us  ke  giri  jam'a  ki. 

2H  Aur  us  ke  kapre  utdrkar  use 
qirmii!i  jiairdlian  pabindyd. 

29  U  AurkdnUm  kd  tdj  ban  i 
ke  a  i  n  nikha,  aur  ek  sarkandd  us 
ke  dahine  hdth  inen  diyd,  aur  us  k.' 
age  ghatne  tekkar  us  pai  thatthd 
mdrke  kabd,  AJ  Yahudion  ke  Hddftbdli, 
Saldm! 

80  Aur  us  par  tluika,  aur  wuli  uar- 
k.'iii'ia  lekar  us  ke  sir  pai  nidrA. 

31  Aur  jab  wc  ua  w  |hiitj»jbi  kar 
cbuke,  t»  Oli  )nirdli!in  ko  llfi  par  BC 
afairkar  phir  tim  ka  kapre  use  pahi&ae, 
aur  aalih  parkhrnohfie  ko  use  to  ohale. 
Jab  bdbar  jite  tlie,  unhon  nc  ek 
Qurf  n!  ddmi  Shania'nn  uame  ko  pliyS  : 
uw  begar  jiakii,  ki  us  ki  salib  u$hd  le 
cbalo. 


U*  io  ia'na  dm&.  MATI', 

•13  Aur  pk  iunqdm  (idlgatA  n  Ani  c 

ya'no,  kliopri  ki  jabali  par,  pahanehka, 

34  \  Titt  niilA  Hud  sirka  w  pinc 
ko  diyd :  us  ae  chakhkc  na  chAka  ki 
jiif. 

35  Aur  unlmi)  ne  usc  salib  jrar 
kbiiichd,  aur  ub  ke  kaprun  par  chitthi 
daMke  unhen  bdnt  Hya,  ta  ki  to  nabi 
iip  kahA  t  h  A,  pfirft  DO,  ki  Uuhon  nc 
roere  knpre  Apas  incn  hnnt  liyi1,  aur 
ii ii T,>  lilu'is  ]i;it  uliittiii  ddli. 

30  Phir  wahAn  tiaithkous  U  iiigah- 
bdni  ksmo  lage; 

87  Aurus  ke  tjatl  kd  tabah  likhkar 
us  ku  sir  se  i'uicfid  iAng  divA,  ki  Y1H 
Visi"  YAllU'Dl'O^  KA'  liA'D- 
SHA'H  HAL 

38  Anrus  ke  sdth  do  chor  bbJ  salib 

Rar  fchbjcha  gaya,  ek  dahJJae,  diisrd 
(en, 

30  •  Aur  Jo  idhar  udhar  ae  f&te, 
sir  biiakar  une  makin  ia  t  kari"  tln\ 

40  Aur  kahte  the,  Wali!  Tri  jo 
baikal  ka  dliAiiewnhl,  aur  tiu  din  iuri; 
I  m;  i  .\uiiii  hai,  Ap  ko  baciid.  Agar 
n';  Klmdd  kA  Betd  hai,  salib  par  uc 
utiir  il. 

-U  Yiinhirj  sarddr  kdhinorj  nc  bbi 
(aqiboa  nur  buzurgun  ke  sdth  thatlkd 
niiii'kn  kaha, 

42  la  cc  auron  ko  bachdyA,  par  Ap 
ko  nahin  bachA  sakti;  agar  Isrdcl  kd 
B&dahdli  hai,  to  ah  wi  pai  se  utar 
iwa,  to  haru  oi  jiar  SmAn  ttwagge, 

43  TJa  no  KhudA  par  bharosA  rak- 
lia  ;  a^ar  wuli  us  ko  chdhtA  hai,  to 
wuh  CO  us  ko  rhhurdwe  :  kyfmki  wah 
kahrd  tha,  ki  Main  KhudA  kd  ltcta 
lui  U. 

44  Isi  (arali  n-e  ehor  bhi,  jo  uh  kp 
t&th  salib  pat  kkirjchc  gayo  the,  usc 
ta'na  mdrte  thc. 

45  Tab  chhathweij  ghantc  m  lekc 
tmraj  ghaute  tak,  edri  tarfftflrfr  par 
ondhart  chiia  gayi. 

48  Nawen  gnanteka  riarib,  Yisu'ns 
hare  ehor  Be  chilldkar  kahA,  EH,  Kli, 
lama  Babaqtanf  ?  ya'ne,  Ai  merc  Khn- 
43 


XXVII.  N'ttiit.  hi.  d'ifi'  kiy&jano. 
dd,  ai  mete  TThuda,  lu  w.  kyim  mujln' 
dibor  diyt ? 

47  "Un  nien  &e  ba'zon  M  Jo  w;didii 
khafc  the  sutikar  kalid,  ki  wuli  liiyaw 
ko  pukdrtd  hai. 

i&  U'ujiliiu  un  mejj  aeek  ue  daur- 
kar  badai  liyd,  aiir  airka  moa  bbi- 
goyd,aur  narknt  par  rakhkur  use  cini- 
sdyi. 

40  Bdrtior,  no  kahd,  nah  jd,  ham 
dckbcn,  Iliyds  utw  cbhurauo  AtA  hai, 
ki  nabin. 

50  Tf  Aur  Yitu'  nc  ph'ir  bare  shot 
ae  cldlldkar  jdn  di, 

51  Aur,    deklio,   haikal    ]fi     r 
i'i|*T  se  iiichc  tak  phat  jiuyA ;  aur  za- 
miu  kdmpi,  aur  jiatthar  taruk  gaya; 

52  Aur  qabreu  khul  gayin ;  aur 
bahui  Idahen  jidk  Jogon  ki,  jo  drdra 
uion  thc,  uthin : 

53  A  or  lis  ko  uthne  ke  ba'd,  qabrorj 
sp  nikalkar,  aur  nmqaddas  Bhahr  merj 
jikar,  haluitno  ko  Daur  ain. 

54  Jab  aiihaddr  ne  aur  jo  ns  ke 
Hdth  Vist'i'  ki  iiigahbdni  karte  tho, 
liliiiiirl^al  aur  wira  majard  deklid,  k> 
iiihaya*  dar  gaye,  aur  kahiio  lage,  Yili 
iio^hakk'Kliudd  kA  lVt.A  tliA. 

55  Aur  wahdfl  bahu  t  si  'auraleij, 
jo  Jalil  BoYisiVkc  pichho  pichhc  uski 
idiiiituai  kaiti  di  Uiin,  diir  bc  diikii 
r'ahiri: 

56  Un  nico  Mariyaui  KagdaHnt, 
aur  Ya'qrib  aurYiiaee  kimd  Miriyam, 
aur  Zabadi  kp  beton  ki  lud  tlilu. 

57  Jab  Bhfiro  hfii,  Yusuf  liAme  Ara- 
matlyd  kA  ok  daulatmnud,  jo  YisiV  k;i 
bhi  sbAgird  tlid,  Avd. 

58  Vs  ne  l'ildtUH  pda  jAke  Yist'i'  ki 
IAbIi  mAnpi.  Tab  FilAttis  ue  hnkiu 
diyd,  ki  law'n  OBB  den. 

59  Yasuf  M  Idsh  lokar  ariti  aAf 
chadar  men  lapeti, 

60  .\kc  apu]  uayi  ijabr  taen,jo  cha- 
tin  merj  khodf  tbi,  rakbi :  aur  ok 
hhiiri  ]iatthar  qabr  ke  muuh  ]>ar  dhal- 
kdke  chala  ttyi, 

til  Aur    Mariyani     Magdaliui    aur 


Ushejii'U.n-  MATI', 

di'isri  Mariyatn  wahin  qabr  ke  mfanhmi 
baithi  thin. 

62  T  Di'usrc  roz,  jo  taiyiri  ko  din 
ke  Iwi'd  hai,  simlar  k.ilimun  aur  r'ari- 
uion  nr  milkar  1'iliUun  ku  pas  jam 'a 
hoke  kaha,  ki 

93  Ai  lihmiiiwiind,  hamen  yad  hai, 
ki  wuh  dagabaz  apnc  jito  ji  kaliti  tha, 
ki  Main  tin  din  beM  ji  uilnin^a. 

64  Is  liyo  huktu  kar,  ki  tisre  din 
tak  qabr  ki  mgahbdni  karen,  na  ho 
ki  iis  ki-sliagird  rit  ko  akar  ubc  churi 
lo  jien,  aur  logon  se  kahen,  ki  Wuh 
murdon  nn-n  sejiuthi;  to  yih  pichkli 
fa  reli  |ialilc  so  had  tar  hngA. 

65  PilAtus  ne  un  se  kaha,  Turuhire 
pas  pahrewale  hain;  jiikc  magdPJ 
bhur  us  ki  niyahbani  kara 

C6  Unhon  nc  jikar  iis  patther  pai 
iimlir  kar  di,  aur  pahre  bithakar  qabr 
ki  nigahbani  ki. 

XXVm  RA'B. 

SAUT  ke  ba'd,  jab  hatta  ke  pahlc 
din  pau  phatue  lasi,  Mariyam 
Mngda-Kni  aur  diisri  Mariyam  qahr  ko 
delcsoe  ain. 

2  Aur,  dekho,  ek  bati  blnmckal  aya 
thi:  kyriijki  Khudawand  ki  firishta 
atasan  H  utarke  aya,  aur  patthar  ko 
qabr  se  dhatkike  us  par  baitli  gaya, 

Ji  lis  ka  chihra  bijli  k.i  si,  aur  us 
ki  BORB&  sufwl  bar  f  ki  si  thi ; 

4  Aur  ub  ko  <lar  H  n  igali  ban  kamp 
uthe,  aur  murde  se  h  n  gaye. 

6  Par  firishte  ne  mukhitib  hokar 
un 'aurjitiin  M  kaha,  Tum  mat  daro: 
main  jinti  hiin  ki  iinn  Yisii'  ko,  JQ 
silih  yur  kbiiiclia  gaya,  dhundhti  ho. 

ti  Wuh  yahari  naiiiu  hai;  kyiinki 
jaisi  us  ne  kaha  tha,  wuli  uthi  hai. 
A'o,  yih  {agah,  jahit)  Khudiwaml 
pari  thi,  dekho. 

7  Aur  jald  jiikc  lu  ke  ubajprdon  so 
kaJio,  ki  Wuh  murdon  men  so  ji  u  Iba 
li.ii:  aur,  dekho,  wuh  tumharo  Ago 
Jali!  ku  jati.  hai;  wahAn  tum  usu  de- 
khoge:  dekho,  main  ne  tumben  jati 
u  iya. 

44 


8  We  jald  qabr  par  ae  hara  khaiif 
aur  hari  khushi  ke  sith  rawina  hukar 
us  ke  shagirdon  ko  khabar  deno  dati- 
rin. 

0  T  Jab  we  us  ke  ahigtrdarj  ko 
khabar  dene  jati  thi  D,  dok  lio,  Y  bui' 
nnhcn  mila,  aur  kaha,  Salam.  Unhon 
ne  pak  ikar  us  ko  qndnm  pafcre,  aur 
use  sijda  kiya. 

10  Tal>  Viisu'  ne  unbon  kahii,  3Iat 
daro;  par  jiiku  iniiro  bhaion  Re  kaho, 
ki  dalil  ko  jiwen ;  wahan  mujlie  de- 
kheuge. 

1 1  ■[  Jab  wc  chali  jiti  thin,  dekho, 
jwilirowilon  men  s«  kitnon  no  shahr 
men  ikar  eab  kuchh  io  huii  tha,  BM- 
ddr  kdhiuon  so  bayan  liya. 

12  Tab  uiilum  ne  lni/uigon  ke  sdth 
ikatthe  hokar  salali  ki,  aur  un  pahl*- 
w&lon  ko  bahut  nipae  diye, 

18  Aur  kaha,  Tum  kaha  ki  Hit  ko 
jab  ham  soto  tlie,  un  ke  nhigird  ake 
ubo  ohuri  le  gaye. 

14  Aur  agar  yih  hakim  ke  kan  tak 
pnhunclie,  batu  use  sauijiiiikiii  ui:hI.-h 
khatre  so  baehii  leii^e. 

15  Chuninolu  unhon  nc  rupafl  Ifl" 
kar  sikhlane  ko  muwi)i(|  kiya:  aur 
yih  bitaj  tak  Yalnidicn  ineu  mauhMr 
hai. 

16  f  Phir  wc  gyiirali  sliisird  Jalil 
ke  us  jialiar  ko,  jahan  Yisii'  ne  unlieij 
farmiyi  thd,  gaye. 

17  Aur  use  dekhkar    unhon      e 
ko  sijda  kiyi;  par  btt'zo  dufcdhc  meji 
r:dii', 

IS  Aur  YisiV   ne   pas  ikar  uu  uo 
kaha,  ki  A'sman  aur  /ninin 
khtiyir  lmijiie  diy:i  nyi  ; 

10  l'  Is  liye  tnui  jiikur  sab  qaumon 
ko  Bhigird  karo,  aur  imlirn  Bip  6W 
l'ete  aur  Kiih  i  Quds  ke  nain  se  bap- 
biama  do, 

20  Aur  unhon  sikhl&o,  ki  un  sab 
batas  !,;Lr'  i'11  k&  niairj  ne  rum  ko 
hukm  diyi  hai,  'amal  karen  j  aur,  de- 
kho, main  zamane  ke  taiuiiu  titmu  (ak 
bar  roz  tumhiro  silb  liari.     A'min. 


MAEQUS  KI'  INJIL. 


I  BA  n. 

TTHUDA'  ke  Betc  STtatf  Masih   ki 
XV    iojii  k&  riiuru'; 

2  JaUA  nabioit  ki  kitdhon  men.  lilthd 
hni,  ki  Dokii,  main  apne  rasul  ko  tere 
Age  biiejti  hrtii ;  wuh  teri  rah  ko  tere 
Mimlini'  uiyar  karegA. 

3  Bayahiiii  men  ek  pukdrnewdle  ki 
ti.wdz  hai,  ki  Klmddwand  ki  rAh  ko 

'■s:  uh  ke  raston  ko  sidha  karo. 

4  Ydhanud  baydban  hi  men  bap- 
ti-i,i:i  detA  iba,  aur  -imabofl  ki  mu'dfi 
I-  Hye  taubit  ke  baptisma  lu  manadi 
kartd  iba. 

5  Aur  aari  sarzamin  i  Yahi'idiya  kr- 
am- Yarusalarn  ke  rahnewale  ua  pAi 
niknl  ir,  aur  wibhon  ne  apne  gtuiAhon 
kd  iqrdr  karke  Yardan  ke  daryd  men 
01  B6  baptismu  pav;t. 

6  Aur  YfirmiiiiA  ttnt  ke  lidlon  ki 
pofihak  pahino,  aur  chamre  kd  katnar- 
TwiTid  npni  kamar  men  handhe  tba,  aur 
tiddi  aur  jangli  shahd  khara  tba ; 

7  Aur  maiiadi  karld  t  ha,  ki  Mew 
pichhe  ck  mujli  se  zorawnr  dtd  hai,  aur 
main  i3  ]iii<i  nahin  ki  jhukke  us  ki 
jiition  kii  iasma  kbolun. 

H  Main  no  to  tumben  paul  sc  bap- 
tisma  diyd;  par  wuh  tumben  B&h  i 
Q?ids  ;»■  baptitma  degd. 

9  Aur  uabin  dinoii  men  aisa  hua, 
ki  Yinu'  ne  NAmmt  i  .Talil  nc  Akar 
Yardan  mcij  Vuiiaiina  ke  liat  h  u  bap- 
tisma  paya. 

10  Aur  jyiLiiliiTi  wuh  ]*ani  so  bahar 
ay;i,  us  ne  asindn  ko  kimia,  aur  Mh 
ko  kabutarkl  manind  apne  d  par  utarte 
dekhA; 

11  Aur  dsmdn  ee  ek  Awdz  di,  ki  Tu 

45 


merd  'aziz  BotA  hai,  jis  ro  main  rdzt 
hiin. 

I-  Aur  Ruh  uw)  filfaur  bayahin 
meii  lc  gayi. 

13  Aur  wuh  waiidn  baydbdn  men 
ckAIis  din  tak  rabke  Shait&n  eu  &■/.- 
mAyd  gayd;  aur  jangal  ke  janwamij 
ko  sdth  tahtd  tlia ;  aur  firishte  us  kl 
khidmat  karto  the. 

14  Pliir  Ytihannd  ki  giriftdri  ke 
Wd  YisiV  ne,  .Jalil  mm  fte,  Kkudd 
ki  badshdhat  kl  khush-klialNm  ki 
manddi  ki, 

15  Aur  kabd,  ki  Warjt  pi'irA  hild, 
aur  KliutU  ki  baduhdiiat  nnzdik  &f; 
tauba  karo,  aur  Tnjil  par  imdn  lAo. 

lfi  Aur  Jalil  ke  dsrvA  ke  kiiidnf 
phirte  hi've  uane  Shama'dn,  aur  us  ko 
bhii  Andryds  ko,  darya  morj  jii!  dai  tv 
dekbd:  ki  wc  machhw(>  the. 

17  Yisti'  ne  nnhen  kahd,  Tum  men 
pfchhe  chalo  Ao,  aur  raain  tumlicn 
ailinictn  ke  macliiiwe  bauduijgd. 

18  Aur  we  wunhin  apne  jdlon  ko 
chhorkar  uh  ku  pielilie  lio  liyo. 

19  Aur  walidii  ao  thori  durbarhke 
us  ne  Zabadi  ke  bete  Yu'ipih,  aur  us 
ke  bhii  Yi'ibanna  ko  bhi,  klakti  par 
apne  jdkirj  ki  maranunai  karle  dakhA. 

20  Aur  dlfaur  unhen  biddyd,  aur 
we  apno  bap  ^alwdi  ko  kidJiti  men 
inazdiiron  ko  sdth  ohborke  us  ke 
piclibe  lio  liye. 

21  Tabwe  KaiUrnrflium  men  ddkbit 
h(ie;  aur  wuh  fllfaur  saht  ko  din  k  o 
'Lbadat-kluine  men  jdke  ta'lim  dene 
lagd. 

22  Aurweuski  ta'iimaehairAnlu'ie, 
ki  wuli  mi  ko,  iklitiyrirwale  kl  tarah, 
na.  faqihon  ki  mAnind,  ta'lim  detd  thA. 


Masih  ki  baAutere  MA1IQUS,  N. 

23  Waluin  un  ke  "ibadatkhdne  men 
c  k  sliakhs  tkd,  jis  men  ek  ndpak  nih 
thl;  wah  y lin  kaliku  eTiillayd,  U, 

24  Ai  ilrt*  .Ndsari,  clihor  dej  ha- 
mcn  tuju  ec  bya  kini  ?  tii  haluan, 
balak  kamu  aya  hai  V  main  tujhe 
jdnta  hilD.  ti  ti\  kaun  hai,  Khuda  ka 
(juddna. 

25  Yisii'  no  nn  danl/i,  aur  kaba,  k 
Chup,  aur  us  iupi.i  *e  nik;i]  ja, 

26  Tab    napak   ruh    use   marorku, 
RUT  bari  awa/,  ^u  ihillaku,  iu 
niknl  njrii 

27  Aur  wo  Bab  hair&n  noka  Apu 
ii'rn  yih  kali  lu  hi'ie  bah»  karte  tbe,  ki 
Yih  kya  hai  ?  yih  ka.isi  nayi  tftlim 
hai?  ki  wuh  a£p&k  riilmu  ko  hhi  iijl.i 
tlar  se  bukni  karta  hai,  anr  we  us  ko 
juatiti  hain. 

28  Wunhin  us  ki  shuhrat  dalil  k: 
chdron  taraf  pbail  gayi. 

29  Aur  we  lill'aur  'ibadatkhdne  w 
nikalke  Ya'qiib  aur  Yiihaiina  ko  s:illi 
Shamit'un  aur  Andryas  ko  ghar  men 

gam 

80  Aur  Shaina't'in  ki  sis  tap  se  pari 
ihi ;  tab  unhon  dc  filfatir  us  ki  khabar 
UM  di. 

31  Ua  nn  dke  aur  us  ka  hath  pa- 
kaike  use  uthaya;  aur  fill'aur  ue  ki  tap 
j:L'.'  ia!  i,  aur  ua  DB  uu  ki  khidmat  ki. 

32  Sliam  ko,  jab  siiraj   ili.b  gaya, 
saru  bir;iarrm  aur  uu  tab  ku  jii: 
deo  ■  ■liarhi:  lho  us  pas  Ide. 

33  Aur  sdrd  shahr  darwdze  par 
jam 'a  hiid  tha. 

84  Us  ne  balutan  ko,  jo  tarah 
taiab  ki  bimariun  w.<-i\  giril'tar  the, 
abtigi  kiyd,  aur  bahu  t  se  deon  ko 
nikahi ;  aur  deon  ko  bolu  e  ua  diya, 
kyiinki  unhon  ne  use  pahelidna  lli;i. 

itu  Aur  baru  tarku  ku.chb.rat  rahte, 
wuh  uthko  nikld,  aur  ok  wirdn  jagali 
men  jdko  wahan  du'd  niiingi. 

'Mi  Aur  SbatnaMn  aur  ua  ko  sdthi  ub 
ke  pfchhe  enak'. 

37  Jab  unhon  ne  uae  paya,  to  ua  sejus  mafliij  ku  kaba,  A  i  L»  t  o,  tere  gunah 
kahd,  ki  Tujhe  sab  dhiindhtc  hain,        j  mu'al'hiie. 


marizon  ko changii  harnA. 

38  Ua  no  unheij  kahd,  A'o,  aspds  ko 
shahron  men  jawen,  la  ki  maiti  wahan 
hhi  nian  adi  karun;  kyiinki  main  bn 
liye  nikla  biiij. 

39  Aur  wuh  sdri  Jalil  ke  'ibadat- 
khduoy  men  mauddi  karta,  aur  daon 
ko  d  u  r  karia  tlia. 

40  Tab  ek  kurhi  no  aku  us  ki  uiiu- 
nat  ki,  aur  us  ko  Mfeoh&a  Rliutiu;  (ek- 
knr  us  so  lxi]a,  ki  A^ar  tii  chahe,  to 
mujhe  pdk  kar  sakta  hiii. 

41  Yisii'  no  itu  par  rahm  karke  hath 
barhaya,  aur  use  chiiiia,  aur  us  sc  ka- 
hii,  ki  Main  chahhi  lum  ;  tii  piik  lio. 

42  Yih  bat  kabto  hi  uu  kd  kurh  ja;a 
rahd,  aur  wuh  pak  hl\a. 

43  Aurusne  usc  takid  karke  jaM 
ruklisat  kiyd, 

44  Aur  ushc yih ktilui, H  Pukh.kisi 
kc  kuokh  mat  kah,  baiki  ja,  aur  apno 
ta,in  kdhin  ko  dikhd,  aur  tpne  pak 
hono  ki  babat  un  chfaag  ko,  jin  ka 
lmkiii  MunI  ce  diyft,  guzran,  td  ki  wo 
un  pai  ^.iH'iihi  bon. 

45  Par  us  no  bahar  jako  bahut 
bdt<'n  kabin,  aur  khdss  karke  is  tdt 
ko  aisd  niashhnr  kiyd,  ki  Yisii'  zdhird 
sh;vhr  men  ddkliil  na  bu  wikd,  par 
bdhar  wiran  jagahon  men  raha :  aur 

chdron  taraf  so  us  |>iis  avit  kive. 
II  BA'If. 

AUR  kai  diu  ba'dwnh  Kafarnihum 
men  pbir  ayd,  aur  sund  gaji  ki 
wuh  ghar  men  hai. 

2  Tab  hJiaurwalidn  itne  Admi  jaiu'a 
hiio,  ki  darwdzo  ki  dahli/.  tak  l/ni  uti 
ki  samai  na  hi'ii ;  aur  us  ne  unhcn 
kalam  kah  suiidyd. 

3  Aur  ok  maflfij  ko  char  ailmiun  sa 
ut hwake  us  pds  le  de. 

4  Jab  wc  bhir  ke  aabah  us  ko  naz- 
dik  ua  d  sakeij,  to  unhon  ne  us  chhat 
ku,  jali  an  wuh  ibd,  k  bui  diyd  ;  aur  jali 
khodke  utird  thd,  to  us  kbatolo  ko, 
jisi  par  mafiiij  lutd  tha,  latkadiyl 

5  YUu'  ne  nn  kd  i'iitinad  dfkhkar 


Som  m  rakhie  MAKQl'S. 

(i  Par  ba'ze  la<ph,  jo  wahan  baithe 
the,apiig  dilon  ulcm  khiyal  karne  lage, 


7  Yih  kyiin  aiai  ktifr  bukti  hai 
Klnidiike  siwa  kaua  ganih.  mu'&f  km 

sakti  hai  ? 

8  Aur  ulfaur  Yiku'  no  apni  ruh 
malam    k.irke  ki  m  KpBS  diloii  me» 
aiae  kliiy:il  kftrta  hahj,  uahm  kalni,  ki 
Tuin  kyi'm  npne  diion  nien  aisu  khiyal 
karte  ho  'i 

9  Us  mnfluj  ko  kyi  kabna  lUantar 
hai,  yih,  ki  Tere  gunih  muai'  bude, 
yjt  yih,  ki  [fth,  aur  ui>ua  khatola  ie 
«hal? 

10  Lckin  ti  ki  tum  jino,  ki  Ibu  i 
A'dam  /amin  par  guuabon  ke  mu'af 
karne  ka  ikhti ydr  takhta  hai,  us  no  us 
luafluj  ko  RUM, 

11  Main  tujhe  kahti  hiiii,  Yih,  aur 
apna  khatola  uthiike  apue  ghar  ko  jil. 

12  Aur  wah  fill'aur  utha,  aur  apna 
khatokl  utliakar  UB  sah  ke  sainbne 
nikal  s;aya;  aur  sab  ilang  ho  gaye, 
BUI  K'iU-ia  ki  tarif  karka  bole,  ki 
II am  ne  ia  (arah  ki  kabid  ria  dekha 
t  h  a. 

M)  Aur  wah  phfe  bahar  daryi  ki 
kinare  Raya;  aur  siri  bhir  ua  pas  ai 
aur  us  ne  unhen  ta'liiii  di. 

14  Aur  jatti  ht'ia  Halia  ke  bete 
Ijewl  ko  malu>ul  ki  ehauki  par  baithe 
(ioklisi,  aurus  Ke  kaba,  Mere  pichhe  ho 
k\      VV'uh  uthke  km  n  pichhe  ha  l'iyd. 

15  Aur  jab  wuh  us  ke  ghar  uien 
kli;un'  lu\itha,  tlia,  yun  hud,  ki  bahut 
«e  luahaiU-k'NewiUe  aur  gunthgitr  Yisu' 
aur  ua  ke  shagirdon  ke  H&tll  baithe; 
kyi;nki  we  bahut  t  lio,  aur  us  kcpichhe 
ho  liye. 

16  Aur  jab  !aqihon  aur  Farision  ne 
:■  iii»:-i-lt'in-wali>n  aur gunahgaron 

ko  situ  kbite  dok  ha,  tab  us  ke  sha- 
girdon  so  kaha,  Yih  kya  bai,  ki  wuh 
mnrwnl  kmirffilnn  aur  gunahgaron  ko 
Nilh  khita  pilii  hai? 

17  Yisu'  ue  suukur  unhen  kaba,  Un 
ke  liye  ji>  iaiidurustJiaiii,  hakim  kuchb 

47 


fo  sah  b. 
zarur  nahin,  baiki  un  ke  liye  jo  biimir 
hairi  :  main  listba/.on  ko  nahin,  baiki 
gunahairoa  ko  bulane  iya,  him,  ki  m 
tauba  karen. 

18  Aur  Yiibanna  aur  Farision  ke 
3hagirdro.zarukht.othe:  unkon  neake 
us  se  kaha,  ki  Yuhanna  aur  FarWon 
ke  sbagird  kyiin  roaa  i'akliK!  baiij,  aur 
tere  Bbijprd  KH»  uahiu  rakbtoV  " 

19  YibiV  ue  unhen"kaha,  ki  KyA 
barati,  jab  tek  ki  diilba  un  ke  ■-.  I. 
hai,  rum  rakh  sakto  haiu  i'  wo  jab 
tak  ki  dulha  un  ke  i-ath  hai,  roza  rakh 
naliiii  aakte, 

20  ia'kiu  we  din  &weQga,  jab  duliui 
un  se  judi  kiya  jaega,  tab  unhin  diiwu 
nien  TT6  roza  riibliciigo, 

21  Kore  than  ke  tukrc  sc  purdui 
ptthik  uien  koi  paiwand  nabiu  kartA  ; 
nahin  u>,  wuh  naya  tukra  jo  ua  uien 
li.giiyil  guya  bai  porine  ko  khinehia 
hai,  aur  wuh  cliir  tmrh  jati  hai. 

22  Aur  nayi  mai  ko  puraid  moshk- 
on  nien  koi  nuhirj.  bharti  hai ;  nahiu 
to,  iua«hkoTi  nayi  mai  se  phat  j;ifi  liain, 
aur  uiai  bah  jati  hai,  aur"iuashkc"_i 
barhdd  hoti  hai» ;  baiki  nayi  mai  ko 
nayj  Duistikoii  uien  raklina  chaliiye. 

23  Aur  yun  hiid,  ki  wuh  sabt  ke 
diu  kheton  meti  hokfl  jara  thii,  aur  us 
ke  sbdgba  rak  inen  chalte  htie  balcn 
ton  j  e  lage. 

L'  1  Aur  Farision  ne  us  se  kaha,Dekh, 
ki,s  liye  .  we  sabt  ko  diu  wuh  kita. 
karte,  jo  rawa  nahin  hai  ? 

25  Us  ne  unhen  kaba,  Kva  Uun  no 
kabhi  nahin  parhit,  .ki  Kami  ne,  jab 
wuh  aur  us  ke  sathi  muhiaj  aur  bliilk- 
ho  the,  kya  kiyd  ? 

2(i  WuIl  kyiiukar  Hj.nlar  kdhiu 
Abiyatur  ke  waqt  men  Klmdakeghar 
men  gaya,  aur  nazar  ki  roti  a  n,  jin  kii 
khini  kiibinon  ke  siwd  kisi  "k o  rawa 
ua  tha,  khiin,  auratme  lAthioii  ko  bhi 
din  ? 

27  Ub  ne  unhen  kaha,  Sabt  ki  din 
insdu  ke  wiiste  hud,  na,  mada  sabt  ko 
din  k'.'  wiate. 


\&th  ehanga  kami.     MARQUS,  III.    Bdrah  rasMon  ka  cltuiia  jd»d. 
28  Pas  Ibn  i  A 'dam  sabt  ke  din  ka'      13  Phir  pk  pahar  par  Raya,  aur  jin 
bhi  K huda wand  hai.  ko  ap  chahta  tha,  unhen  pas  bulaya  ; 

III  BA'B.  aur  we  uh  pas  ae. 

W  UH  'ibadnikhann  mei_i   phir  dii-       U  Aur  BJ  U  Mutah  ko  muqan,ir 
khil   h  ria  ;    wahan   rk    shaklis  kiyft,  ki  we  uh  ke  sath  raherj,  aur  ki 


tha, jis  kn.  ek  hath  srikh  gaya  tha. 

2  Aur  we  ua  ki  ghat  men  lage,  ki 
ii^iir  wuh  u»  sah  t  ke  diu  changa  knrc, 
to  DI  par  ualish  karen. 

5  Ua  ne  ua  shakha  ko,  jis  ka  hath 
mikli  gaya  tha,  kuda,  ki  Itieh  meri 
khara  lio. 

4  Aur  us  ne unhen  kalut,  ki  Sul.l  ke 
din  neki  karni  rawa  hai,  yaba<li  kami? 
jiin  baehana  ya  jan  ae  mama  ?  We 
chup  lio  rahe. 

6  Tali  us  Be  mi  ki  sakht-dili  ke 
aabab  gamgiu  huke  gufiseae  un  sab  ki 
taraf  dekbii,  aur  us  suialj}n  kokaha,  ki 
Apna  hath  barha.  Us  ne  barhava; 
aur  us  ka  hath,  jaisa  diisra  tha,  misa 
chaosj  lio  caya. 

6  Tab  Farision  ne  filfaar  bahar 
jakc  Herodiorj  ke  sath  us  ki  Kidd  meii 
niaHliwurat  ki,  ki  UM  kyurjkar  qatl 
karoii. 

7  Aur  Yisu'  apne  sha.airdraj  ke  sath 
darri  ki  talai  jdiira»  aur  ek  bari  bhir 
Jalil,  aur  Yahiidiya, 

B  Aur  Yart'iHalam,  aur  Adum,  aur 
Yardan  ke  par  se,  us  ke  pichhe  ho  li  ; 
aur  Hiir  aur  Saidii  ke  a.-pris  se  bhi  ek 
bari  bhir  yih  khabar  sunkc  ki  kais* 
ban  kaui  us  ne  kiye,  itu  pas  ai, 

9  Uh  ho  «pun  shagird*  >!}  ko  kaha,  ki 
Rhir  ke  tabab  ek  cliliut  i  si  ki-hti  m 
ke  liye  t&iyar  kar  rakhen,  ki  we  uae 
daMnadalee. 

10  Kyunki  mne  bahutunkochangd 
kiya  tha,  yahau  lak  ki  m  jo  tahui 
i>  :  i  i|  men  giril'tiir  the,  us  par  giro 
parte  the,  ki  use  clibi'i  Icn. 

11  Aur  najnik  ruhej),  jab  OM  dtikb- 
tiri,  ua  ke  azG  siir  parti  ibiri,  aur  pu- 
karfco  kalitin,  k:  Vf  K\ui\\i  ka  I-llil 
hai. 

12  Tab  us  no  unhen  bari  takid  ki 
ki  uae  mashliur  na  karen. 

48 


un  ko  luanadi  karne  ko  bhcje, 

15  Aur  ki  we  sab  bimarfon  ko 
cliaitg»  karne,  aur  deorj  ko  nikalne  ki 
qudnit  rakhen : 

16  Ya'ne,  Shama'un  ko,  jis  ka  nara 
Patrus  rakha  ; 

17  Aur  Zabadi  ke  lieto  Ya'qnb  ko, 
aiir  Ya'qi'ib  ke  bhai  Yrihanua  ko,  jin- 
hen  lloannrjea  nam  rakha,  ya'ne,  Dani 
Ba'ad : 

18  Aur  Andryas,  aur  Failbda,  aur 
IS:\i  tiinlaiii;!,  ani  MaLi  ko,  aur  Thr:in;i, 
aur  Halia  ke  bete  YaViiib  ko,  aur 
Thartdi,  aur  Shaina'fin  Kau'ani  ko, 

19  Aur  Yalnidah  iMkariyiiti  fco,jc 
us  ka  pakai-waucwala  bhi  thd :  aur  we 
ghar  men  ae. 

20  Aur  itno  log  phir  jani'n  bde,  ki 
we  roti  bhi  na  kha  saki'u- 

21  Jab  us  ke  nAteHaron  ne  yih  au- 
Jii.,  to  we  usc  pakarnekonikk';  kyrij- 
ki  unhon  ne  kalia,  W  uh  be-khud  hai. 

22  U  Tab  faqihon  ne,jo  Yarftaalam 
se  ae  the,  kahd,  ki  Ba'al-ssabul  us  ke 
sath  hai,  aur  wuh  dflag  ke  sardat  ki 
ruadad  ae  deon  ko  nikalta  hai, 

23  Tab  us  ue  unhen  pas  bulakar 
niiiisiliiii  hk'tj  linlid,  Kyi'tnkar  ho  sakti 
hai  ki  Sliaitan  Shaitau  ko  nikale  ? 

2+  Aur  agar  kisi  biiiUhahat  men 
phut  pare,  to  wuli  b'ni^hiibat  qaim  rah 
nahin  sakti. 

2:">  Aur  agar  kiflf  ghanbM  men  phut 
]>nn'.  t"  wuli  gliarana  qattn  rab  iialiin 
viki;i. 

L'i;  Aur  acar  Sliniian  npna  Li  mn- 
khalif  hoke  ap  se  ])hvit  kara,  i"  wii'i 
qaim  rah  mihin  sakld,  baiki  us  ka 
akhir  ho  iawegi, 

'27  Kisi  Boriwnrko  ehtx  men  ghiia- 
ke  us  ke  asbfib  kn  koi  Irit  nahin  sakti, 
iabtak  ki  wuh  pahle  us  wrtwai  ko 
na  bandhe,  tab  us  ke  ghar  ko  lu  tega. 


JiiJ  honewale  MARQ1 

28  Main  tum  se  sach  kahtd  him,  ki 

dam  ke  sab  gunah  aur  kul'r  ju 
wo  bakte  Kain,  niu'df  kiyo  jdenge: 

29  Lekin  wuh  jo  Kuh  i  Quds  ke 
haqq  men  kufr  bako,  iis  ki  miuifi 
hai-^iz  nahin  hoti,  baiki  wuh  hameaha 
ke  'azab  kd  sazdwdr  lio  chuki: 

30  Kyi'mki  unhoti  M  kahd  thd,  ki 
Us  ke  a&th  ek  napak  ruh  hai. 

31  *f  U  b  wocjtus  ke  bhdi  aur  m  ki 
md  di,  aur  biliar  kbare  ruhku  use 
bulwd  hlu'il 

82  Aur  jamd'at  us  ke  ds  pas  haithi 
thi,  aur  uuhoii  m  u*  m  kahiuki  Dek  h, 
teri  mii  aurteru  bhdi  bdhar  tujhe  talab 
kurte  hairj. 

33  Us  no  unhon  jawab  diya,  Kaun 
hai  meri  mil,  yd  rucre  lihai  'i 

84  Aur  un  par  jo  ub  ke  as  pfc  bni- 
$ho  tho,  nigdh  karko  kahd,  Dekfao 
meri  md  aur  mere  bhdi ! 

35  Is  liye-  ki  Jo  kui  Khudd  ki  mant 
par  ctialta  hai,  meri  Midi,  aur  meri 
bahin,  aur  md,  wuhi  hai. 
IV  BA'B. 
"lTT"Un  phir  darya  ke  kindrn  par 
V' V  lalim  karne  lagd  :  aur  ek  ban 
bhir  US  paw  jinii'a  hiii,  aisi  ki  wuh 
daryd  men  ek  kihhti  ]iar  onari  baithii  -. 
aur  sd;i  bhir  khushki  men  daryd  ke 
kindre  pnr  rabi. 

2  Tab  us  ne  unken  tamsilon  men 
bahut kucbh  sikhldyd^aur  apni  ta'iim 
men.  un  su  kaha, 

3  Suuo;  Dekhiyc,  ek  Hafal  bone 
ko  gaya 


8  Alir  kuehh  aehchhi  samin  ineo 
gira;  wub  ugd,airrbarhkephald,ba'zc 
tis  guna,  ba'ze  sdth,  aur  ba'zc  sau 
gun£ 

!l  Pbir  ih  ne  unherj  kahd,  ki  Jis  ko 
sunneke  kdn  bon,  sutie. 

10  Aur  jab  wuh  akela  liria,  unimu 
ne,  Jo  us  ke  «Uh  tbc,  uu  bara  h  se  mil- 
ke  as  ne  us  tamsil  ke  ina'ue  pfiohhe. 

11  Us  ne  uuhen  kahd,  ki  Khudd  U 
bdil-hiliat.  ke  bhod  ko  janud  tumben 
diya  gayd  hai,  par  un  ko  liye  jo  bahar 
hairj,   eab  bdten   tamsilon   men   hoti 

12  Td  ki  wo  dekhne  men  dpkhen, 
magar  Mjhen  nahin ;  aur  kau  sc 
sunen,  par  samjhcn  nahin;  na  howe 
ki  we  kabhi  phirerj,  aur  un  ke  guudh 
bakhshe  jden. 

13  I'hir  us  no  unhen  kahd,  Kyd 
tum  yili  tamsil  nahin  BUtajhW  J  ti> 
Bab  tamsilon  ko  kyiinkar  samjhoge  ? 

II  S  Kisdn  kaidui  botd  hai. 

15  Aur  wiih  jo  us  rdh  ke  kindre 
pard,  jabdn  kaldm  boyd  jdtd  iiai,  we 
luiirj,  ki  jab  uuhon  ne  sund.to  Sbaitin 
fitfanr  dke  ua  kaldm  ko,  ji  un  kudilog 
men  boyd  gayd  thd,  lc  jdtd  hai. 

16  Aur  usl  tarah  jo  sangin  zamin 
men  boyd  gayd,  we  hfdn,  jo" kalam  ko 
sunke  filfaur  khushi  so  qabdl  kar 
lele  Iriin; 

17  Aur  dp  men  jar  nabirj  rnkhte, 
baiki  tbori  muddat  ke  liaiij:  akhir, 
Jftb  U  kaldm  ke  wistfl  taklii  oAtfl 
ya  .satdc  jdte,  to  jald   thokar  kiidle 


4  Aur  botp  wa.|t  yun  Inia,  ki  kuohli  liain. 
rah    ke    kin.lre    pra,    aur    bawd    kc|      18  Aur  jo  kdnton  kedarmiyan  boyd 


paittndfl  dke  use  chug  gaye. 
5  Aur  kucbh  sangin  /.amin  par  cird. 


gayd,  we  iiain,  jo  kaldm  Mimte  bai_, 
IH  Aur  diinyi  ki  fikrerj,  aur  daulat 


jahan^use   hahut.  mini   na  r.iili ;  rarjki  dagabd/.i,  arir  aur  chizoQ  kililaen, 


ub  jald  ueji,  kytinki  us  ne  daldar 
.'.amin  na  pdi : 

6  Aur  jab  Bdiaj  nikla,  wub  jal  gayd. 
aur  jnr  ua  rakhne  ke  salmii  siikh  gayd. 

7  Aur  kucbh  kdnturj  men  gird,  aur 
kdntnn  ne  bnrhke  use  daba  divd,  aur 
wuh  phal  na  Idya. 

4J 


ddkhil  b(.ike  kaldm  ko  dabd  deto  hain, 
aur  wub  Iw-phal  hotd  hai. 

20  Atnr  jo  aehchhi  /.amin  men  "boyd 
gaya,  we  hain,  jo  kaldm  ko  sunte  ham, 
aur  qabdl  kar  ke  pbal  lita  bain,  b»'» 
da  gani,  ba'zo  with,  aur  ba'ze  sau 
goni, 

D 


Khardal  ke  rl, 

21  5  Aur  lis  nc  unben  kahji,  Ky» 
chira<*  ih  liye.  ht4,  ki  psimaaa  ya  pa- 
lang ke  tua  rafchen,  aur  clurigdan 
P&r  na  rakhrn? 

22  Koi  cliiz  poshida  nahin,  jo  zfibi: 
»;i  ki  jiw«;  aur  ca  chhipi  lioi,  magar  i 
liye  ki  zuhur  rooij  awo. 

23  Jis  ko  uunne  lu  kau  hnn,  sune. 
21  I'lik  us  nfl  unhan  InbaVld  GJam 

karo  ki  tuin  kyii  smitoTio ;  jispahiiaiio 
60  tura  nfote  iiu,  tisi  se  tumharu  liye 
napi  jacgA ;  aur  tumben  jo  auute  ho, 
ziyada  diya  jaupii 

26  Is  liye  fei'jis  ke  pas  kuchh  liai, 
usediyi  jacgA;  aur  jia  ke  pas  kafiWi 
nahin,  us  ue  wuh  bin  jo  m  ke  pas  hai 
te  liya  jaegd. 

36  li  Aur  m  ae  kal.fi,  KhudA  ki 
biid.thahaf.  aisi  hai,  jalai  ck  Bhakha  jo 
zamiu  men  bij  bowe; 

27  Aur  rit  o  din  wub  sowe,  uthe, 
aur  wub  b! j  ia  tarab  uge  aur  barbe',  ki 
wub  na  jttne, 

28  Ih  liye  ki  samin  Ap  sg  &p  phal 
lati  hai,  pahle  sahsf,  pbir  bal,  ba'd 
ke  bal  men  taiyar  dana 

23  Aur  jab  dina  pak  cbuka,  te  wuh 
filfaur  hansiia  hhijwari  bai,  kyiinki 
kfttne  kti  waqt.  pahuncha  bai. 

30  t  Pbir  us  ne  kaba%  ki  Hain 
Kirabi  ki  bidabihat  kt.  kis  ne  akibat 
karcn,  aur  us  ke  Liye  kaun  si  misal 
liwen  ? 

31  Wuh  khardal  kedineki  manisi 
liai,  kt  jab  zamin  men  buya  jati  hai, 
zamiu  ke  sah  bijorj  se  chhtila'bai  : 

82  Par  jab  boyi  gaya,  to  ugtii  hai, 
nur  aab  iaik;irii>n  bo  barh  jati,  aur 
hari  diliari  nikalta,  yaliari  tak  ki  hawi 
ka  para&de  (u  ke  Raya  KtOfi  baseri  kar 
sakit"  hain. 

33  Aur  wuh  un  se  aisi  bahuteri 
tamsikm  mon,  ua  ki  saninjh  kt  luu- 
waficj,  kalam  tahta  thi. 

34  Aur  be-lamsil  un   se  biten  na 


MATIQUS,  T.  kitamwl. 

35  Usi  din,  jab  shim  hrij,  us  j»o 
unben  kaba,  ki  A 'o,  bam  p&r  jawen, 

3fi  Aur  *ra  us  jarua'at  h»  rukhsat 
karke  use,  jis  tarah  se  ki  kishti  par 
thi,  le  clmle.  Aur  ua  ke  sath  aur  bhi 
tbbofi  kishtian  tftfg. 

37  Tab  bari  indhi  chali.  aur  lshren 
kishti  par  yaluiti  lak  lagin  ki  wuh 
jiani  se  libur  chali  thi. 

38  Aur  wub  pst.wii.rki  taraf  sirtale 
lakyarakhko  so  raba  tba;  tab  unhori 
ne  use  jagake  kaba,  AJ  UMad,  tujfae 
flkr  nahin  ki  bam  sah  halak  biota 
hain? 

39  Tab  ua  no  nthkB  hawa  ko 
dauti,  aur  darya  ko  kaba,  Tbalicir  ja; 
tbania  rab.  To  bawa  thabar  gayi, 
aur  liari  nfwA  ho  gaya, 

40  Phir  urihuii  kaba,  Timi  kyi'in 
aise  khaufnak  biii\  aur  kdbu  ku  i'ntKpid 
nabin  rakhte? 

41  We  nibayat  dare,  aur  apas  men 
kahne  lagi*,  Yih  kis  tarali  ka  bai,  kl 
bawa  aur  darya  bhi  us  ke  farmanbar- 
ddr  hain  ? 

V  BA'B. 

AUR  we  darya  ke  pdr  fiadarimou 
ko  mulk  mt'ri  pahunche. 

2  Aur  jyi'm  wub  kisliti  se  utra, 
wunhin  ek  ddmf,  jis  nen  ek  a&ptk 
ruh  Ibi,  iiabron  so  nikaTte  hue  use 
mili: 

3  Wuh  qabron  ke  dartniyan  ralui 
kartd  tha,  aur  koi  use  zaujiron  8o  bbi 
jakar  na  sakta  tbi: 

4  Ki  wuh  bir  bar  berion  aur  zanjir- 
j  se  jakra  gayi  tba,  aur  us  ne  zanjir- 

on  ko  tora,  aur  U-Hoii  ka  jfokre  tufepe 

kiyo;  aur  koi  uso  fab'i men  na  lawikii. 
6  Wuh  haniesha  rat  diu  i^haron 
ir  qabron  ke  bieh  chilliyi  karti,  aur 

ftpM  (a,]'i_i  jiattharuri  se  katta  tba. 
6  Par  jyiin  us  ne  Tin'  ko  diir  as 

deklia,  dauri,  aur  use  aijda  kiya, 
Aur  Imri  awiz  s 


.  .-.    cbillike  kaba, 
karti;  lekm  khalwat  mag  apnfl  sha-  Al  Khuda  'l'a'iitd  ke Bo(e  YW, majhe 

girdon  ko  sab  bilon  ke  nm'iio  batlataltujli   se   kyi   kira  V  tujbe    Khudi"  ki 
,lltt-  |<iasam  doti  brjn,  mujba  na  sati. 


Murii,  ■  k  i><hni  to  chiiiird/ii,       MAltQUS, 

H  Kydnki  us  no  om  kaha  thd,  ki  Ai 
ndpak  ruh,  us  aumi  mag  bo  nika!  A. 

9  Pliir  ua  ne  us  se~pdchhi,  Tera 
kya  n  ini  hal  ?  Tab  us  ne  jawab  diyi, 
ki  Jlerd  nam  Tuuian  h:ii,  is  Uy»  ki 
bom  bahut  liniij. 

10  Phir  us  ne  us  ki  bahut  iiiinn.it-  ki, 
ki  haiiiey  is  uarzamin  se  niat  nikil. 

11  Aur  wahan  naliuion  ko  nazdik 
BttafOB  ki  ek  bara  gol  ciiarti  tbi, 

12  So  Bab  deon  ne  ne  ki  minnat 
karke  kaha,  ki  Ilam  ko  un  sdaron  ke 
■ianniyan  bhej,  ta  ki  ham  un  men 
paithen. 

13  Yisd*  ne  filfanr  unhen  ijissat  di ; 
aur  m  uapak  nihon  nikalke  sdaron 
men  pai  Ih  gayin ;  aur  wuh  gol  karirc 
[iar  se  darya  men,  kuda ;  aur  we  oarib 
do  bait  ko  tho,  jo  darya  men  ddbko 
lcar  gaye. 

H  Aur  wn  jo  rfum  ko  chardte  tho 
bhige,  aursbahr  aurdihat  men  khabar 
pahunchii.  Tad  we  ua  mijare  ko 
tk'khne  ko  iiiklt', 

15  Aur  Yisd'  pia  ae,  nur  ua  dtwdno 
ko,  jis  men  deon  k  a  tuinan  thi,  baithe, 
aur  kapre  pahiue,  aur  husbyir  dekhi: 
aur  dar  gaye. 

16  Aur  jinhon  ne  yih  dekhi  thi,  us 
diwane  ki  Riri  ahwil,  aur  sdaron  ki 
tamani  majard,  un  se  bayan  kiyi. 

17  Tab  we  ua  bi  minnat  karat  lago, 
ki  un  ki  «arhad<l  se  nikal  jiio. 

16  Jydn  wuh  ki.shti  par  ayi,  nsne, 
jis  men  deo  thi,  us  se  minnat  ki,  ki  us 
ku  sii.Ui  rahe. 

19  Lekin  Yisd'  ne  uso  ijiznt  na  di, 
baiki  uw  kaha,  ki  Apao  Koar  ja.  apae 
logog  pas,  aur  unhen  khabar  de  ki 
Khudawand  ne  lujh  jiar  rahm  karke 
t'ujh  sg  kya  kara  kiyi. 

"0  Tab  wuh  traya,  aur  Dikdpulis  ke 
mulk  men,  un  kamon  ki,  jitno  Yisd' 
no  us  ke  liye  kiye  the,  manadi  kame 
lagi;  aur  sabhon  ric  ta'ajjub  kiyi. 

21  Aur  jah  Yfsd'  kishtt  par  phir  pir 
iya,  lari  bhir  us  jiAw  jam'a  hui;  aur 
WOh  darya  ke  nazdik  t  ha. 


fU  men  bahttt  deo  Aft 

22  Aur,  dekho,  ki  'ibddatkhdne  ke 
sa.rdaron  inen  se  ek  shakhs,  jis  ka  naiii 
Jiiirus  thi,  ityd,  aur  uso  dekhkar  Ud 
ke  (jadamoij  uar  giri; 

23  Aur  yih  kahke  ki  Meri  chhoti 
betf  marno  par  hai,  us  ki  bahut  min- 
nat ki,  ki  wuh  awe,  aur  apne  bitli  us 
pir  rakhe,  ki  wub  changi  boj  to  vuh 

24  Tab  wuh  Us  ke  yathgayd;  aur 
bari  bhir  us  ke  picbhe  chali,  aur  ttse 
daba  I  iya. 

26  Aur  pk  'aurat  jis  kd  birali  baras 
se  lalui  jari  thd, 

2f>  Jis  no  bahut  se  hakfmon  ki 
dawaen  khai  tliin,  aur  apni  sab  mil 
kharch  karkc  kui-hh  faida  na  piya 
thi,  baiki  us  ki  bimiri  aur  bhi  barh 
gayi  ihi, 

27  Yisu'  ki  kbaliar  sunke  nn  bhir 
niffli  us  ku  pii'hhe  se  ii,  aur  us  ke 
kapro  ko  eblui  liyi. 

2&  Kyunki  us  ne  kahi,  ki  Agar 
main  airf  us  ke  kapre  ko  clihii  lun,  to 
changi  ho  jaVingi. 

29  Aur  tillanr  tis  ke  labu  kd  sotd 
band  ln'ul;  nur  us  M  apne  badan  ke 
ahwil  si;  jaiin,  ki  main  us  alat  so 
cbftogf  liui. 

30  Tab  Yisd'  no  filfaur  apne  men 
ni,  ki  Mujh  men  se  <piwat  nikli,  un 

bhir  ki  taraf  mutawajjil»  hoknr  kaha, 
ki  Mara  tapfC  ko  kia  no  chhiii? 

31  Us  ke  shigirdon  ne  us  st!  kahd, 
Tu  dekhli  bai   ki   log  lujh  |uir  gire 

iarte  hain,  pbir  td  kaliti  hai,  Mujhe 
tis  ne  chhiii  ? 

32  Tab  us  no  cbaron  taraf  nisrdb  bi, 
t  a  ki  use,  jis  ne  yih  katu  kiyi  thii, 
dek  b  e. 

33  Aur  wuh  'aurat  sab  kucbh  jin- 
kar  jo  us  par  wiqi'  bdi  thd,  dnrti  aur 
kampti  ii,  aur  us  ke  ige  gir  pari,  aur 
sab  sach  sach  us  se  kahi. 

34  Tab  us  no  ubo  kahi,  Ai  beti, 
torn  iiniri  no  tujhe  baohayi ;  saldmat 

r  apni  ifat  se  bacin  rah. 

Jab  wuh  yibi  kabti  thi,  'ibi- 


Jairtis  M  be/j.  koj'ihind. .  MARQUS,  VI.      Masih  H  hilal  logon  H  rde. 

datkhanc  ke  sardfir  ke  yahan  se  logop  1 
ne  ako  kaba,  ki  Turi  Ticti  mur  guyi,  ab  j 
kyun  Ustad  ku  ziyiWa  taklif  detil  hai?  i 

3f>  Yltiu?  ne  ii»  bit  ku,  jo  wo  knh 
rahe   the,  aiintc   hi,  'ibadat  k  hane  ke  > 
lardai  ko  kaha,  Mati  Iur,  tfcqa£i'atto>4d  1 
rakh. 


'  Aur  ua  ne,  siu-ii  l'ntnw,  aur 
Ya'aAb,  aur  Ya\|i'ih  ku  bbai  Yuhanna 
«i',  ki.fi  k/j  apnu  Mith  jam'  na  diri, 

3H  Alir  'ibadat-khane  ku  f&rofr  ke 
ghar  nieii  dke  sbot  aur  gul,  nur  logon 
ko  bahut  tote  pitte  dekha. 

■'W  Aur  bbitM  jaku  uuhen  kaha, 
Tum  kahe  ko  gul  karte,  aur  lOta  bor 
larki  innr  nahfn  gayi,  baiki  unti  hal 

40  We  us  par  hanso;  lekin  w  uli  sab 
ko  bahar  karke  larki  ke  ma  bap  ku, 
aurapno  siithioii  ko  toke,  jahan  wub 
larki  pari  thi,  andar  aya. 

41  Aur  us  larki  ka  inif.h  pakarkar 
nafi  kaha,  Talirha  qnuii ;  jin  ka  tarju 
ma  jrib  hai,  ki  Ai  larki,  main  tujh 
kain  a.  hi'uj,  tith. 

42  W'dijliirj  wnh  irtrki  nthkechalae 
lagi;  kyuiiki  vvuii  harah  bara*  ki  tbi. 
Tdb  wf  kihufc  bi  iiairan  iiiie. 

43  Fhir  us  rit!  uuhen  bubut  takid  hc 
huktn  kiyji,  ki  Yib  ko:  ua  jaiie;  aur 
r.iriiulva,  ki  Uw  kuciili  kkaue  ko  den.. 

VI  liA'B. 

PU  I II   wabiin  so  rawan»  htH, 
apBfl  walau  map  iyaVj  aur  us  ke 
shigrrd  us  ke  pfchhe  ha  liye, 

2  Jab  sabi.  ka  iiiu  hr.a,  wub  'ihri- 
dfttkhone  ic i«rj  i:i']iin  dana  lagi:  aur 
bahutog  ne  miakB  hairin  bakai  kaha, 
ki  Yih  bsiten  uh  ne  kalian  se  p&in? 
:iiir  yih  ky:i  hikmat  hai,  Jo  usedi  Bayi 
bal,  ki  uisi  keramat  us  ko  hith  n 
zahir  bott  haiQ? 


be-'izzat  nahin  hai,  magar  apne  walau 
aur  apne  kunbe,  aur  apuu  ghar 
inen,. 

6  Aurwuli  koi  rmi'ajiwi  waintn  na 
■likhlii  saka,  siwi  in  ko,  ki  thnre  ro 
t  ■  i  u  i  ri  i«.  ■  r  i  p;u  hathrakhkuutinencJiangiL 
kiya. 

0  Aur  us  no  ua  ki  bo-fmani  pe  ta- 
'njjub  kiya.  Aur  fiupaa  ko  g&QW0Q 
lu'-ii  tii'lim  datA  (ibira. 

T  Aur  un  l»arah  ko  buiaya,  aur 
un  ki>  do  do  karke  bhejna  slnirii'  kiya, 
uuhejj  na^ak  ruhon  par  ikhtiyar 
diya; 

S  Aur  unhen  mikni  kiya,  ki  eafar  ko 
liye,  aiwa  lathi  ke,  kiloah  na  lo,  na 
jholi,  na  roti,  na  tfue  kanuubuud  inen 
paise : 

li  UaflU  ji'itian  pahino ;  par  do 
kurto  ruat  paltiuu. 

10  Aur  unlitit  kaha,  JahSij  tum  ki- 
si ghai  uu'ii  ilukhil  lio,  to  jab  talt  tum 
ua  jagai  sc  jao,  wahin  raho. 

11  Aur  jittio  tuiuheij  0*M1  na  ka- 
2,  aur  tumhari  tu  kuiU'ji,  to  jab  tum 

wabau  se  niklo,  apue  pariwun  ki  ^urd 
jbar  (lena,  ta  ki  un  par  gawahi  ho. 
Main  tuiu  n  eaeh  kahta  hiin,  ki  'm Irilat 
ko  din,  Saib'un  aur  'Amiirah  ko  liye, 
us  shaiir  ki  banUbat,  barda«ht  karni 
iahaj  hogi. 

12  Aur  unhun  nojako  mand4.li  ki, 
ki  Tauba  karo. 

13  Aur  bahot  ao  daoQ  ke  di';r  klj  i, 
aur  haliLiuin  ko,  jo  bimar  the,  un  i>ar 
tel  dlialko  changa  kiya. 

14  Aur  jab  OOKtffl  bdd^hdh  ne  sn- 
na,  (kyiinki  us  ka  nain  mashhiSr  hua 
Iba;)  tab  us  ne  kaha,  ki  Ydlmniia 
ba|Hisina-dent)wii!ii  murdon  inen  saji 
ufhi,  isi  liye  ua  ho  bari  ulsir-bakhsh 


a  Kya  yih  Mariyam  ka  Hcli  liarhai  karamaten  hoti  hain. 
nabin?   aur   Ya'qiib,  aur   Yv.ecs,   aur       lo  Auron  ne  kabil,  ki  Wuh   EOyii 
V.iiii.-;.'i!,.  n  ShftBja'u»  ka  bbrii  cahin  l'  hai.     J-'hir  aurwi  ne  kaha,  Yih  ok  na- 
aur  kya  us   ki   bfthineg    baiuaK  pfojbi  hai,  ya  nabkm  mon  su  k;4  ki  mi- 
yaban  nabtr  bah}?    Aur  ttnhojj  na  us  nlad  bai. 
ih  thokar  khrti.  |     10  l'aT  Hcrodis  ne  mrikar  kahfi,  ki 

4  Tab  Yhui'  ne  unhen  kahil,  Nabi  Yih  to  Yahauni  bai,  jis  kd  sir  main 
52 


Yiihnna  kd  sir  KAEQCS,  VI.  M/djnmK 

iic  katwiyi  hai ;  w  uh  mtirdon  men  &e  aur  m  lnrki  ko  diyd ;  aur  us  larki  ne 
ji  utha  hai.  apni  md  ko  diyi. 

17  Kyiujki  Hen>di.-<  nedpHerodiyds'  2El  Tali  us  ku  ehdgird  sunkar  de, 
ke  wdate,  jo  uakc  lihai  FailhriNki  jorii  aur  us  ki  liitili  ko  utbdke  oabr  men 
tbi,  log  bhejkar  Ynhannd  ko  pakar-rakha. 

wdke    qaidkhdno    men    band    klya';|     KO  Aur   «ipiU  Yisu'  ke   pil  jam'a 
kyiiiiki  us  lio  us  Ke  bydh  kiyd  tha.       [htie,  aur  jo  k  nol  ih  unhon  ne  kiyd,  aur 

IH  Aur    Yuhanna    u    Bero'iis    ko;jo  kuchh  sikhlaya  tha,  jsuLj  us  Beb&ylm 


kahd  tha,  ki  Apne  bhdi'  ki  jorti  rakh 
na  tuju  par  rawa  nalnn. 

19  I»  liye  Herndiyits  us  kd  kina 
rnklui,  aur  chdhti  tlii  ki  us<;  jin  se 
nidro ;  jwir  wuh  na  kar  sak  t : 

20  Is  wdste  ki  Herodis,  Yuhannd  ko 
mani  i  rdstbaz  nur  muuaddaa  jankar 
us  sc  dartd,  aur  us  ki  piadirl  kartd, 
aur  us  ki  sunkar  bubut  si  baton  par 
'amal  kartd,  aur  uh  ki  bdten  kliushi  sc 
Buutd  thd. 

21  Alihir,  qdbu  kd  din  dyd  ki  He- 
rodis ne  apni  sdlgirih  men  apne  bu- 
zurgon,  aur  risdladaron,  aur  Jalil  ke 
amiron  ki  zivdfat  ki ; 

22  Tab  Hen-liyds  ki  beti  andar  di, 
aur  uachke  Herodis  aur  us  ku  mih- 
iiidnoa  ko  khush  kiyd :  tab  bddshdh 
ne  us  larki  ko  kahd,  Jo  tii  elidhe,  so 
tii  mang,  ki  main  tujhe  dtiflga. 

2.3  Aur  us  hc  Msam  khai,  ki  Mcri 
aillii  bUsbihat  tas,  j"  km-hh  td  mujh 
se  ma-jge.main  tujhe  diirgd. 

24  Aur  wuh  ehali  gayi,  aur  apni  md 

i.'i,  ki  Main  kyii  mdngun? 
Wuh  boli,  ki  Yuhannd  baprisiua-de- 
nowdlo  kd  Hr. 

25  Tab  wuh  fitfaur  bddshdh  ke  pds 
ehdldki  so  di,  aur  us  «<■■  'a  r  z  kaike  ka- 
hd. Main  chdhti  ain,  ki  tii  Ynhannd 
baptisiiia-denewdle  kd  air  ek  thaii  men 
ablii  imyhe  de. 

26  Itadsliali  bahu  t  garngin  hi'id,  par 
apiti  (pisaui,  aur  sdth  bailltnewalon  ke 
ubah  na  ehdhd  ki  us  se  inkar  kara. 

27  Tab  bddshdh  ne  fil&Uf  jallad  ko 
hukm  karke  bhejd,  ki  us  kd  sir  lawe. 
"Us  no  jdkc  us  kd  sir  (jaidkhdue  mcti 
kdtd, 

2B  Aur  ek  thali  men  rakiike  lavd, 
53 


kiyd. 

31  TaJi  Dsne  unhen  kahd,  Alagwf- 
rdna  men  chalo,  aur  zarra  SNBtio,  is 
iiye  ki  wahdn  bahu!-  log;  dte  jdtc  ilie, 
anr  unhen  khdnd  khdite  ki  bhi  fnrsat 

tlii. 

32  Tab  we  aku:  kishti  par  charhke 
ek  wirdne  men  gftj«. 

Par  logon  ne  unheii  jdte  dek  h  d, 
aur  bahuton  ne  use  pulichdnd,  aur  ndre 
viiiiliiun  m  klinshki  khushkl  udhar 
daure,  aur  un  H  d^e  jd  jiahunche,  aur 
ikatthe  lioko  us  pas  du. 

34  Aur  Yisu'  ne  niknlke  hari  bliir 
ko  dekhd  ;  OM  un  par  ralun  livi.  kv- 
linki  w«  un  blienm  ki  mdnind  the,  ki 
jin  kagararlyi  nahin  ;  aur  wuh  unhen 
balint  si  Ivdten  sikhldno  Ingd. 

35  Jab  din  baliut  •)\\-A\i,  us  ke  sha- 
girdon  ne  us  pds  dke  "kahd,  Yili  Jagal 
wirdn  hai,  aur  bahut  der  hui  : 

36  Unhen  rukhsat  kar,  td  ki  we  chd- 
ron  taraf  ke  pdnwon,  aur  hastion  men 
jdke  apne  liye  n.iti  mol  leii ;  ki  khdne' 
ko  im  pds  kuchh  nahin. 

37  Us  ne  unhen  jawdb  men  kalta, 
T  u  m  unhen  khdne  ko  do.  1»D  W* 
bole,  Kyd  huni  jri.hr  do  sau  ilinar  ki 
rotidn  mol  leij,  aur  uuiun  kliilaucij  V 

38  Us  ne  uuhenkalni,  Tumlidre  pan 
kitni  rotidn  liain  V  jake  dekho.  Un- 
hon ne  'darvdl't  karko  kahd,  Piach 
rotidn,  aur  do  machhlidn. 

30  Tab  uw  M  unhen  hukm  kiya,  ki 
Un  sah  ko  hari  gbas  par  paut  pint 
karki  hithlio. 

40  W  o  sau  sau,  aur  pachds  pachas, 
pint  men  baithe. 

41  Tab  usne  wuh  pdncli  rotirin  nur 
do   maehhlidu   lekc    dsiudn   ki   tar;if 


PA'n-h  htwAr  ko  khihi/td.  MAKQl'S,  VII.  Ftirisitm  H  riivatj'ilr», 

doklike  harakat  ch&hi,  aur  rotian  to-jshahr,  yi  gin  w  men  gaya,  iltlIh.ii  ae 
riij,  aur  asoe  akagisdi  ri  ItO  diij,  ki  uii[  biuifLion  ko  biiiron  men  rak  hi,  aur  us 
koigcrakheii ;  «urus  ae  wedomuuhu-  ki  minmu  ki  kis;rfuski  ponhik  ke 
liin  un  sab  inefl  bantin.  datiuin  ko  dihii  i«n  ;  nur  jituoii  ne  use 

42  We  eab  khike  ser  hue,  chbiia,  aehcbhfl  ha  gwe, 

43  Aur  \iti!i-.ij  ae   t ■  il; i- 'U   W  birali :  VII    BATtV 
fokriiirj  bharin,  aur  kttCci  maoiihikirj  fTIAH  Fatfei  atar  ba'w  &qfe  Yariisft- 

X     lain  mi'  akc  us  paa  jam'a  hue, 

'i  Jub  unimu  nc  us  ke  ba'ae  ahigird- 
on  ko  napak,  yu'ne,  bin  dhoe  Lithori 
w)  mti  khite  dekili,  to  'aib  higiyi. 

8  U  liye  ki  l-'ami,  baiki  .sah  Yahudi, 
buzurgon  ki  riwayat  par  'amal  karke, 
j;ib  tak  ki  apne  hath  kabul  tak  uadko 
ii'ii.  u  k:.. ■u.', 

4  Aur  bazar  se  ike  jab  tak  gas!  tia 
kar  Icij,  uahir,  khute.  Aur  bah  u  t  ei 
aur  biten  baiti,  jin  ko  we  riwij  ke 
Babafa  mute  Imiri,  jaise  piyilon  aur 
Lojofl  aur  timbe  ke  bartanon  aur  char- 
pafog  ki  dboni, 

5  Tab  KarUion  aur  feajhog  ne  us  se 
pdefabi,  ki  Tew  sbagiid  btuargeg,  ki 
riwayat  par  kyun  naliiii  diulir,  pat- 
roli i.in  diW  hitfaaa  kh;ite  hain  ? 

6  Ub  ue  urilich  jawab  owgj  kabi,  ki 
Yas'aiyih  nn  tum  rijAktroT)  ke  hauq 
tua]]  kyi  khiih  Dubowat  ki  hai,  jai^a 
ki  likhi  bui,  ki  Ye  log  Yionthcm  so 
oifti  bu/.urji  karte  hain,  par  mi  ku  .lil 
(UUjh  se  dftf  haiii. 

1  Aur  we  be-i'iida  mori  paras  twh 
kartir  lini»,  kyiiuki  ju  ta'lim  we  sikh- 
lite  kain,  iriNau  ku  aiikiiiu  iiain. 

H  Ia  liye  tum  Khudi  ke  liuk  m  ko 
tark  karke  insan  ki  riwayat,  jaise 
loton  aur  piyilon  kii  dhotii,  maute  ho; 
aur  aise  bahutere  kim  hain,  jo  tum 
karto  ho. 

9  Aur  «s  ne  unht'n  kafaa,  'J'nm 
Khudi  ke  hukra  ko  bakhubi  batil 
karte  ho,  ta  ki  apui  riwayat  ko  <j;iiiu 
r:ik  hn. 

10  KyiSnki  JSAei  ne  kahA,  ki  Apno 
bip  aiir  apiii  rn;i  ki  tiiV.iiu  kar  ;  aur, 
Jo  koi  l>a[>  ya  nia  ko  koge,  wuh  jiin  se 
mini  U& 

11  Pai1  tum  kahte  hcij  Agar  koi  ap- 


i  bhi  uthiiin, 

44  Aur  wo  jinhon  ne  rotiin  khiiii, 
paiich  bazar  mani  ko  qarib  the. 

45  Aur  filfiuir  us  ueapuo  Bbiffirdog 
ko  takiii  n  iiukiii  kiya,  ki  Jab  tak 
i  l  i  r  l  i  [_i  logog  ku  rukhsiit  karun.,  tum 
kit-liti  par  charho.aur  us  pir  liaiUuuda 
ko  age  jao. 

4ti  Aur  dp  unricii  rukhnat  karko 
pahar  par  du  i  untuiuie  ko  paya. 

■17  Aur  jab  ahaiu  Inii,  ki.dui  bich 
daryi  men  thi,  aur  wuh  akela  khush- 
ki  pai  tha. 

48  U»  no  dekili,  ki  we  kbswnfl  Bi 
bakui  Umg  haiii,  kyiitiki  lmwi  un  kt 
mukhalif  thi;  tab  pkliiile  pakar  rii 
k'>  wuh  «arya  par  chalti  h  tia  uu  ku 
j-iis  liya,  aur  curiiid  ki  uji  he  tiga  bafkfi. 

49  Jab  uuhon  no  uso  daryi  par 
clialte  dekhA,  khiyal  kiyi,  ki  bhiit 
luii,  aur  chilli  uthe  : 

50  Kyiijiki  »b  no  iiho  dekia,  aur 
ababnie,  nt  wah  OJfiuu  un  se  kalain 
kuke  unhen  kahae  k«i,  KhAtir-ja- 

.'.i .  imMio;  niiiin  iiiin  ;  niat  daru. 

51  l'hir  wuh  kishli  par  uu  piaehap- 
!iii,  aur  bftwjf  Uiam  ptyi ;  tab  iiulujti 
uo  apne  ililoii  BtsQ  niliiyai  hairan  hokt? 
ta'ajjab  kiya. 

62  Ia  liye  ki  uulion  ae  rotinn  ke 
jiiuajiaa  ko  r.ji  saujjlii  tha;  kyi'iuki 
uu  ke  dil  Nakhc  the. 

53  Aur  wo  |iir  gasuike  Quum  mnl 
!,:    mulk  Hi'-Tj  :ie,  «UT  duit   iiir  lajriiy.L. 

54  Jlib  we  kihhti  pat  ae  utre,  ihlaur 
l)Qg  use  pahdianki!, 

55  Uh  mulk  ki  bar  taraf  se  daure, 
aur  bimiroii  ku  ohirpiioo  par  rakhke, 
jahin  nnhog  no  niaa  thi  ki  wuh  hai, 
!<•  jaiio  lage. 

5ij  Aur  wuh  jahin  knkin  bawti,  yi 
&4 


Paki  aur  nApdki  ki  bdhat.      MARQUS,  VII. 
ne  bip  ya  md  ko  kahu,  ki  Jo  fdida 
niujhe  tuju   ko   pahuuchdnd   thd,   30 
Qurban,  ya'ne,  hadya  hiid  ; 

12  So  turi  om  us  ke  bdp  ya  uh  ki 
md  ki  kuchh  minimi  karuo  nahin 
deto ; 

13  Yun  tum  Kbudd  ke  kaUm  ko 
apni  riwayat  se,  jo  tum  ne  jari  ki  hai, 
batil  kartu  lio  ;  aur  aisd  bahut  kuchh 
kart«  bo. 

14  ^j  Phir  ub  ne  sab  logon  ko  pas 
bulake  kaha,  ki  Tum  nb  ke  aab  mori 
Buno,  aur  samjho :  ■ 

15  Aisr  koi  chiz  ad/ni  ke  bahar  na- 
bi» hai,  jo  us  nu-n  dakhil  buku  itts 
odpdk  kar  sake;  uar  wub  clii/'-ij  jo  IU 
meg  se  nikahi  hain,  we  M  adiui  kn 
□apak  karti  baiti. 

16  Agar  kUi  ke  kdn  sunnc  ke  hon, 
toBuue. 

17  Jabwuh  bbirkepassegbar  men 
gaya,  ub  ke  sha;rjr<lun  ne  us  «e  us  tam- 
sil ki  babat  puchbd. 

1S  Tab  ua  ne  unhon  kaha,  Kya  tum 
bhi  aise  nd-samajh  lio  i  Kya  tum  na- 
hin jfotc  bo,  ki  jo  chiz  bahar  n  lidmi 
ke  bhitar  jati  hai,  usc  ndpdk  nahin 
kar  sakti ; 

19  Ia  liye  ki  wub  us  ke  dil  men  na- 
hin, baiki  pet  men  jati  hai,  aur  pae- 
khane  men  mkalli  hai,  yuij  sab  khaue 
ki  najasat  eb  ha  t  jati  hai  V 

20  Phir  ua  ne  kaha,  Jo  drlmi  men 
se  tiikalta  hai,  wulii  aumi  ko  ndpdk 
karta  hai. 

21  Kyunki  andar,  ya'ne,  ddmi  ke 
dil  hi  ne,  bure  andeaba,  zinakarian, 
hardinkdrian,  qatl, 

22  ChorFag,  Idlach,  badi,  makr, 
ma>ii.  l«id-uaziiri,kulr,iihckhi,  nddani, 
rtikalti  bain  : 


J£k  bakire  ko  chniKjn  fatnu'<,. 

25  Kyunki  ek  'aurat,  jia  ki  chhot.i 
ln'ii  mag  oiaik  ruh  thi,  us  ki  klia- 
oar  sunke  di,  aur  us  ke  panwon  par 
Siri : 

26  Yib  'aurat  Yunani  aur  nauin  ki 
Surufiniki  thi;  us  ne  minnat  ki,  k  i 
wuh  us  deo  ko  ua  ki  liet!  par  ac 
utdre. 

27  Par  Y!b4'  ne  uso  kahd,  ki  Pahle 
farzandon  ko  »er  boae  de:  kyrinki 
i'ar/aiuloii  ki  roti  leke  kutton  ke  dg« 
ddlna  laiq  uahin. 

lir!  Us  ne  jawab  mm  kaha,  Han, 
nj  Khudawand,  lekin  kutfce  niez  k» 
tale  farzandon  ki  roti  ke  tukrun  meii 
.so  kha-te  hain. 

29  Tab  ue  ne  «so  kahd,  Ia  bat  ko 
sibalj  m  ehalf  jd;  wub  deo  teri  beti 
par  se  utar  gaya. 

30  Jab  wuh  ghar  men  pabunchi, 
to  kyd  dekhA,  ki  deo  dfir  ho  gaya, 
aur  i  h  -t  i  i)ii'iihaun''  par  j  «iri  hai. 

31  t  Aur  pbir  wuh  Sfir  aur  Hai.la 
ki  sarhaddon  ae  rawdnahud,  mu  Di  ka- 
pal]* ki  sarliadd'iti  men  hokar  Jtttl  ke 
darya  ke  pas  Ayd. 

32  Aur  Union,  ne  uk  balibe  ko  jis 
ki  zubdn  men  luknat  thi  w  iias  Idke 
us  ki  minnat  ki,  ki  ajma  biith  ua  par 
rakhe. 

33  %  Wuh  ua  ko  bhirrneri  se  kina- 
re  le  gayd,  aur  apni  ungiian  us  ke  kdu- 
OD  men  dalin,  aur  apiid  thdk  leke  us 
ki  /uban  par  lagdya ; 

'M  Aur  asi  1  liii  ki  tam  f  nazar  karke 
ek  ah  ki,  aur  use  kaha,  Htbitah,  ya'ne, 
Kliul  i  do. 

35  wunhin  ua  ke  kdn  khul  gaye, 
v&  us  ki  zulian  ki  girah  hbikhul  {yiyi, 
aur  wuli  kluih  bolne  higd. 

36  Aur  ua  ae  unhim  hukm  diyi,  ki 


23  Yib  aab  buri  eiiizen  andar  s*'  ni-  kiai  ne  na  kabeti ;  lekin  jitnd  ua  ne 
kaiti  hain,  aur  admi  ko  ndpdk  karti  mnu'a  kiyd  t.iiii,,  we  utuaziyada  iiiash- 
hain.  liur  karLe  the  : 

24  T  Phir  wabdn  se  titbke  Stir  auri  37  Aur  uuhon  ne  nihayat  bat&B 
Raidi  ki  wfttddDB  mcn  givHt,  aur  ek  Imko  kaha,  Us  ne  sah  kuchli  achohhii 
gbar  men  dakbil  hoke  obdhd  ki  koiikiya:  ki  bahiron  kn  sunne  ki,  aur 
U  ji'-n.'  j   b  kin  p^sliida  na  rah  saka.      'gungoij  ko  hulno  ki  tdqat  deta  hai. 

55 


Ekandheko  MAI'.QU 

VIII  BA'B. 

U  N  dinon,  men  jab  bari  bhir  jam'a 
thi,  aur  uu  pas  km-l.li  kbaun  fco 
Uli  Tiiii,  Visu"  m-  apne  ^lisi^ii  Jun  kupas 
buliikc  unlien  kahd, 

'2  Mujhe  ia  bhir  par  rahm  dti.  hai, 
ki  ab  tin  diu  puzrekiye  Ing  merona  t  h 
haiii,  aur  un  ke  pas  kuohh  kiidue  ku 
nahin. : 

3  Agar  main   unhcij  bliukho 
jdne  ko  ruklisat  karun,  to  we  rah  uien. 
mdnde  paivn^e :  kyrinki  ba'ze  uu.  men, 
liain,  jo  dor  m  ati  bain. 

4  U*  ko  «bagirdun  ne  uBe  jawab 
diya,  ki  Ih  winine  inci;  kabin  se  kot 
admi  roti  pdwe,  ki  iriben  ser  kare  r 

5  Tab  ttt  m-  un.se  piichha,  ki  Tum- 
baru  iws  ki  mi  rotian  hain  V  W  e  bule. 
Bit. 

G  l'hir  ub  nc  leburi  ko  hukm  k  iya. 
ki  2Ai»in  par  bnith  jaen;  aur  uh  ne 
wulii  t4t  rotian  lir,  aur  fibukr  karke 
tivrin,  aur  apne  sbagirdon  ko  din,  ki 
un  ke  age  rnkhen ;  aur  urihon  nc  logon 
ko  ■:'_::  rakh  din. 

7  Aur  un  ke  l>an  kat  ek  ehhoti 
maehhlidn  thin ;  bo  us  n«  harakat 
mdnekc  bukm  kiyd  ki  unkcn  bhi  uu 
ke  age  dhaivti. 

B  Chimanchi  unhon  ne  k  baya,  aur 
eer  hiio:  aur  uu  tukron  ki,  ju  bacb 
rahe  the,  sat  tokrian  utliain. 

9  Aur  khdnewale  chdr  ha^dr  ke 
naiih  ilio.  Tbir  ub  ne  uiihen  rukhsat 
k  iya. 

10  T  Aur  wuh  apne  &Iidpirdon  ke 
Balb  fauran  kislitl  parcharhku  DaFma- 
unta  ki  atrdf  men  iya. 

11  Tab  Fa  risi  uikle,  aur  us  se  htij- 
jut  karke  ub  ke  imtihdn  ke  liye  denidn 
ho  kol  undian  chaha. 

1*2  Ub  lio  apne  dil  se  ah  kbfnchkc 
Italia,  1b  mndnu  ko  log  kyrtn  nisha» 
cliiibto  hain/  main  tum  t,e  sacb  kahtd 
bilii,  ki  lu  zam&ne  ko  logon  ko  koi 
nbd  iin  diya  ua  jaega. 

13  Aur  wub  un  ne  judo*  hoke  phir 
kislili  par  cbarhke  par  gaya. 


S,  VIII.  dnkh  dtnA, 

14  %  Aur  w© roti  lene  kobhnlgaye 
the,  aur  kishti  jiar,  siwa  ck  roti  ke,  ini 
pAa  kurhli  na  tlia. 

15  Aur  us  ne  unhen  yi'in  farmdya, 
Khalardar,  Farisiun  ke  khainir,  aur 
Herodis  ke  khamir  we  parhea  karo. 

Iti  Tab  we  apaa  men  giiftngt'i  kai'kc 
k:iiiiic  [a^e,  Viii  is  Hy«  iiiii,  ki  iiaiiuiru 
MUh  !"■  -r i  liabin. 

17  litd'ne  yilidaryai't  karkcunben 
fiinnayn,  Tum  kyiijj  kiiiyal  karte  ho, 
ki  yili  i-  liye  bai,  ki  Jimiiare  «itli  roti 
uidiin?  kyii  tuni  ab  tak  nabiij  jatite, 
aur  iialitn  sjuiiajhte  'i  kya  timUnira  dil 
ab  tak  saklit  bai  't 

IH  A'nklien  bote  hiic,  tnm  nabin 
dekbte?  nur  kau  hote  hue,  nahT^ 
sunte?  aur  kya  tumben  yad  nabii,  f 

H*  Jis  watjt  main  ne  wuh  pancli 
rotian  panen  bazar  ke  liye  torin,  timi 
ne  tiikroij  ag  kifui  t<fkria(i  bbari 
iii.l,;-;  n_.  'i     UnhoH  ne  ua  se  kabd,  IldraL. 

20  Aur  jib  woqt  aat  char  ha/Ut  ko 
liye  torin,  tum  ne  tukron  sc  kitni 
tokrian  bhari  utliain  V  dnLffl  tte  ka- 
Li,  BH, 

21  Tab  us  nounben  kahA,  Pliirtum 
kyiln  uabiri  nauiftjhMa? 

22  T|  Pfiir  wuh  Baitsnida  men  Sya ; 
aur  m  vk  tituUit:  k»  us  pd.s  liie,  aur  t»s 
ki  minnat  ki,  ki  wuh  DW  chhi'nw. 

23  Wnk  luandheM  bith  pekarke 
use  liasti  ke  babar  le  paya,  aur  Ua  ki 
ankbon  meu  tlnikke  ajinc  hiit.li  us  pai" 
rnkbe,  aur  us  se  iniehlia,  Kyatu  kuchh 
dekbtahai? 

24  Ub  ne  nazar  i'ipnr  uthakc  kabd, 
Main  durakliton  se  idmiuji  ko  cbalte 
dekii ta  hiiii. 

25  Tab  ub  ne  phir  ua  ki  ankbon  par 
apne  liat  h  rakbo,  aur  pbir  ipar  dekli- 
ne  ko  farmayd ;  aur  wub  ehanird  bua, 
aur  sftb  ko  acbchlii  tarah  deklul. 

S6  Aur  uh  ne  use  yih  kaliku  ghar 
bheJ4  ki  Battf  men  na  ji,  aur  Buni 
— Qfl  kisi  bo  mat  k;di. 

27  t  Tab  Tiri*  aur  ub  ke  ehd  ird 
Qaiaa*fyB  Filippi  ki  bastion  men  «ayo, 


Patrus  ho  maUmat  barnd.     MAKQUS,  IX. 
aur  nili   in.-n   n.-  ur    ,i     ■ 
piichbA,  aur  niibrtj  kaha,  ki  Log  kyA 
kalnc  haiTj  ki  main  krnin  bmi? 

2»  Unbon  Dfl  jawab  diya,  ki  Yfi- 
Jiainii  l'uptisma-deuewa'Ift,  aur  ba'ze 
Iliy:v,  pai  ImV.i'  nabiog  men  se  ek. 

2'j  Pbir  us  ne   unhen   kali  A,  Tum 
kya   kahte   lio   ki   maiii  kami  h*D 
Patrua  ne  jawab  men  us  se  kaha,  Tu 
!■:  .Mii.-ih  boL 

30  Tab  us  ne  unhen  tAkid  ki,  ki 
nieri  babat  kisi  «e  yih  ruat  kat 

31  Fbir  wuh  unlien  sikhlAi 
ki  Znnir  bai  ki  Ibu  i  A'dm  bahut"sA 
dukb  uthawe,  aur  wuh  bnzurg<_ 
samar   kAbinon  aur  faqihon  se  ra<ld 
kiyA  jAr,  nur  inani  jAe,  aur  tin  roa  ke 
ptchhe  ji  uthe. 

3"  Aur  u>  iifl  yih  bat  Riif  babi.  Tab 
FateUi  UM  alag  lo  jAke  us  par  jhunjh- 
lAno  laga. 

33  i'inis  ne  phirke,  aur  apne  rIiA- 
giriioij  par  nigAh  karke,  Patrus  par 
jininjhiAyA,aur  kahA,  Ai  ShailAn,merc 
Bambu*:  se  dir  ho  :  kyi';i_iki  r.u  KbudA 
ki  ebfsog  ki  niibiij,  baiki  insAn  ki 
cbin?B  ki  fikr  kurtahai. 

84  5  Tab  ue  ne  mi  iogon  ko  apne 
sbnjiniou  ke  sdih  bulak  e  un  hc  kaha, 
Jo  kol  men  plchhe  Aya  obuta,  chAbi- 
yo  ki  wuh  apno  sc  iukAr  kare,  aur  apiii 
salib  kn  uthAke  mcri  pairaui  kare. 

35  /s  liye  ki  jo  koi  eliabtn  ki  asnl 
jAn  bachawe,  asa  i^anwAtgA  ;  par  jo  koi 
nier?  aur  Injil  ke  liyc  npui  jiin  ko 
gimwai^a,  wuhi  use  bachawe^A. 

3G  Kyunki  agar  koi  ddmi  Pari 
dunya  ko  hasil  kare,  aur  aimi  jau  ka 
iui-i^Ali  uthAwe,  to  uae  kya.  fAida 
hmai '' 


37  Aur  Admi  apni  jAn  ko  badlemen 
kya  ■■„■_■,..  I 

3£  Kyunki  jo  koi  is  /makar  aur 
khatAkar  zamAna  merj  mujh  se  aur 
meri  Mtog  se  shanmi.  ei,  Ibn  i  AMaca 


bhi,  jab  apne  Bap  ki  bashmat  se  j^klki  pakta  IliyAs  ka  ana  zariir 
Briahtag    ke   sAth  iwj»,  us  se  sbar-       12  U»  ne  jawab  moa  uni 


mauga. 


Masih  M  surat  ka  badai  jiind. 
IX  BA'B. 

U 9  no  unheii  kahA,  Main.  tum  rc. 
sacb  kublA  bi'jn,  ki  Tu  muj  t^e 
jo  yahaii  khare  hain,  bu'ze  bain  ki 
jab  tak  Kluidaki  baiisbilbat  qudrat  st* 
ati  iir  dekben,  maut  ka  maza  na  cba- 
kherjge. 

li  'j  Aur  eliha  din  ba'd  Tiad'  ne 
Patrus,  aur  Ya'o/ib,  aur  Yubauiia  ko 
satb  liya,  nur  nnben  ek  tinche  pabir 
par  alag  ie  gaf« :  aur  un  ke  Age  us  k'i 
slirat  bada)  ffktL 

3  Aur  us  ki  posbAk  cbamakti.  aur 
babut  sufeii,  bart'  ki  tarah  ho  gayf,  ki 
waisi  duuyd  nien  koi  dbobi  mAcl  im 
kar  sake. 

4  Tab  IliyAs  Musa  ke  «Atb  unbpri 
ilikhAi  diya;  aur  we  Visii'  se  gufUigd 
karte  tim. 

o  Patrus  no  nuikluitib  beku  VinV 

kabA,  ki   Ai   Kabbi,  hainiin    !iv. 

bibtar  liai   ki  yabau  ta&tea,  aur   tin 

dere  banAweii,  ck  tcre,  aurek  Musa  ke, 

aur  ek  IliyAs  ke  live. 

b'  Kyiiilki  wub  im  jAnt.4  tbA.ki  kyA 
kabtd;  ia  Jiyc  ki  we  babut  dar  gaju 
the. 

7  Tab  ck  bAdai  ne  un  par  saya 
kiyA ;  aur  us  badai  intiij  so  ok  Awas;  Ai, 
aur  yib  kabti  tbi,  ki  Ylh  nierA  piyara 
lieta  hai :  us  ki  suno. 

b  Aur  ekAok  uubon  ne  idbar  udhar 
naear  karke  Visu1  ko  wiwA  ki.^j  ko  apne 
'Al.li  na  di'klia. 

i)  Jab  we  pabAr  se  utarte  tlie  us  ne 
uuhen  hukiti  kiyA,  ki  Jo  kuchb  tum 
ne  dokbA  bai,  jab  tak  ki  Ibu  i  AMam 
murdon  men  so  ji  na  ut.be,  Ub>i  to  ua 
kabnA. 

Aur  wo  ua  kabSm  ko  Apaa  hi 

_  nikhke  cbaroliA  karte  tb<>,  ki 
nmiiioii  nn'ii  se  ji  utbmt  ke  kyA  nia'no 
hain. 

11  T  Pbir  unbon  ne  us  so  kaliA, 
aur  puohliA,  k  i  Fauib  kyiin  kabtc  hain, 
t1!"Ab  kA  AuA  zarur  lini  V 

jawAb  nifii  unlien  kabA, 
ki    Iliyas  to  i»alile  AtA  liai,  aur  sab 


Sk  'jii-mji  ruh  ko 

kuchh   bahal  karta  hai; 


1U|I|  i 

ii:ii,  ki  Wuh  tahui  sa  ranj  uthawega, 
aur  hatjir  kiya  jaega  ? 

ia  Lckin  main  tum  se  kalita  Ini  n, 
ki  Iliyas  a  ehuka  hai,  nur  jaisa  M  ke 
haqq  men  likha  gaya  tha,  unhoT)  nojo 
kuohli  ki  chiiliA,  iu  ko  with  kiya. 

14  T  Aur  jab  wuh  apne  shdgirdon, 
ke  pas  aya,  Un  ki  diaron  tat&f  kiri 
Lini-,  aur  BMjitoB  ko,  uu  so  bahs  karte 
dek  k  a. 

15  Aur  filfaur  sari  bhfj  use  dekhk: 
nihayat  hairan  lnii,  aur  un  \As,  daurke 
use  giiUiri  kiya. 

H)  Tali  uh  ne  faqihim  se  piichha, 
Tum  un  se  kya  bahs  karte  ho  ? 

17  Ek  no  uh  bhir  meti  si;  jawab  diya 
aur  kaha,  Ai  Ustad,  main  apne  bete 
ko,  jis  men  guugt  ruh  hai,  tere  pas 
laya  hiin. 

18  Wuh  jiihan  kabin  use  pakarti. 
pitak  doti  hai ;  n,ur  wuk  kaf  hhar  lata 
Ini,  aui  kpu«  dant  pinta  liai,  aur  wuh 
siikli  jdti  liai :  main  no  tere  shagirdurj 
M  kaha  thii,  ki  we  use  bahar  kar  den, 
pir  wo  na  kar  saken. 

19  Ufl  na  ub  ku  jawAb  men  kaha, 
Al  be-fenan  naum,  main  kab  tak  tum- 
hire  sat.fi  rahim?  maifl  kafe  Lak  tum- 
hiiri  barddsht  kurun  ?  use  mere  pii»  lao. 

20  W  c  useuspAs  la.e  ;  aur  jalin*  ne 
oae  dekba,  fdl'nur  ruh  ne  OM  ainthaya  : 
aur  wah  mula  pw  ^h;!,  aur  bu  BOW 
Jake  lotne  lagi. 

'Jl  Tah  lis  ni!  us  k'-  'i  ;i)i  -"  pii<  liliii, 
Kitflf  niuddat  se  j  ih  is  ko  hiU?  Wuh 
bvla,  llachpan  se. 

22  Aut  lalim  bdr  use  dg  DOW  aur 
pjini  nien  daiti  thi,  ta  ki  use  jin  ko 
indre:  par  "agar  Ui  kuchh  kar  saktd 
hai,  tt>  bani  par  rahm  karke  human 
madad  kar, 

23  YisiV  no  use  kalia,  Agftl  r.u  iman 
Ia  sake,  to  i  mandar  ke  liye  sab  kudik 
brj  saktd  hai 

24  Tab  illfaur  us  larko  kd  brip 
ckiilaya.  aur   ant-ii  buhake   kalia,  Ai 

58 


MAI1Q1JS,  IX.  mkdlnn. 

Ibu  i  Khudawnnd,  main  iman  iatdhan;  tfi 
meri  be-tmaui  ka  chaia  kar. 

25  JabYisd'nedekba  ki  lt>g  daurko 
jaaVa  hote  babi.  tu  (U)  uapak  riih  ko 
malamat  karke  na  bo  kaba,  Ai  gdngi 
bahrl  riih,  main  tujhe  hukin  karS 
hiiii,  ia  se  babar  nikal,  aur  is  men  pliir 
kabhi  mat  ddkhil  ho. 

liii  Wuh  ckillaknr,  aur  use  bahut 
aini.liakar,  OB  M  nikal  g^yi :  aur  Wtlb 
murda  ni  lio  gayd,  aM  ki  bthstog  M 
kahi,  ki  Wnii  mar  gaya. 

27  Tab  Yiaii'  no  u«  ka  bath  pakar- 
ke  use  utliaya,  aur  wuli  u  t  b  kar  k  hara 
bua. 

28  Aur  jab  wuh  ghar  nieij  iyi,  ih 
ke  .•■ii-'(.]ii'i"ii  m  khahvat  mag  ta  m 
piR'Idia,  ki  "kam  uso  kyiin  na.  nikal 
haken  'i 

'i\i  TJsne  unhen  kaba,  ki  Vih  jit^, 
siwa  du'a  aur  rosa  ke,,  kisi  aur  tarah 
ac  nikal  nalun  sakti. 

30  %  Phir  we  wafcan  bc  rawio*  1ii';c( 
ani-  Jalil  mag  hoke  fpuai  gaye,  aur  us 
ne  cbaha  ki  koi  na  jane. 

::i  [  ■  ,'-.-.■  ki  i,-;... 
ko  rikhlAyS,  aur  unbuy  kaha,  ki  Ibu 
i  A'datn  logon  ke  luiili  men  giril'tar 
karwdya  jatd  hai,  aur  V6  we  Hll 
(cari'ri^r:  aur  wuli  niard  jake  tJ«r*>  <lin 
pbir  v  iitnegA. 

S2  Lekin  uriboii  ue  yih  bat  na 
samjhi,  aur  us  «o  piiuhlmc  iin-ij  daro. 

Sii  V  Phir  wuh  Kafarnalium  men 
aya,  aur  ghar  mori  pahunuiike  OB  H 
pLiuliha,  ki  Tum  raste  men  bahaui  kya 
blba  karte  the? 

34  Par  we  chup  raho,  is  liye  ki  we 
rdb  men  ek  di'isre  ae  bahs  karte  the 
ki  hai  n  men  se  bara  kann  hai  ? 

35  Phir  us  ne  baitliki'  un  bir&fa  ko 
bulaya,  aur  unhen  kulih.,  Agar  koi 
chaiic  ki  pahle  darja  ka  ho,  wuh  sah 
tnefl  plobbw,  aur  wali  ka  khidim  bogi. 

3(i  Anr  ek  elibote  larke  ko  kk«  un 
ke  bich  men  kliara  kiya,  aur  jab  use 
godj  iiicri  liy.i  tha,  un  se  kaha, 

37  Jo  kol  niere  aim  ke  liye  ai^ie 


SJtdyirdo/i  ko  nasihat  Jttirnu.     MAI!Q.US,   X.  Tnlaq  dene  ki  Idhitl. 

larkon  tiivii  N«k  keMpibiil  fcn.ro,  mujhejrakhte  hi'io  jahannam  ki  ag  men  dahi 
qabtil   kartA   hai;   aur  jo  kot  mujhejjAwo: 
q:ibiil  karta  hai,  na  mujhe,  baiki  Usa,       43  Jabati  im  ka  kira  uakin  mari  d, 


i  niujlie    bheja  liai,  cpihiil  karta 

38  K  Tab  Yuhanni  M  uso  jawab 
deke  kaha,  Ai  Ustad,  bam  nu  f  k  k  o 
tere  ndm  se  deon,  ku  uikaUe  dckhii, 
aur  wuh  hamira  pairati  uaiiiij  :  aur 
ham  IH  tUfl  mari 'a  kiya,  kyiiiiki  wuh 
haniari  pairaiti  nahin  karld. 

3!)  Tab  YiuiV  no  kahA,  Use  man'a 
na  kam;  kyilnki  :us:t  kol  nabin  jo 
:  :i  lckc  koi  kaniimU  kari.-,  nur 
mujiie  lilfaur  burd  kali  saka. 

40  Wuhfo  liainttrdinukbilif  nahin 
haiuari  tam  t'  hai. 

41  Im  Bya  ki  jo  koi  mert>  nani  par 
e  k  piyaia  pan  i  mmheii.  is  waste.ki  tuin 
ktaau  Ice  00,  pim>  ku  da,  main  tam  bb 
Mefa  kajati  biin,  ki  wuh  apuii  ajr  kabhi 
na  kiiuega. 

42  Aur  jo  koi  in  chbolojj  men,  se. 
jo  tnujh  pur  iman  late  hain,  ek  ku 
thokar  kiiiidwe,  ua  ke  liye  yiii  biluar 
Uni,  ki  chakkl  ka  pAt  us  ke  gaLe  lu  t;  n 
bandhA  jAwe,  aur  wuii  sanutudar  weij 
dalA  jawe, 

43  Aur  agar  teni  hAth  tujhe  t.ho- 
kiir  khilawu,  t->  uae  kit  dai ;  ki  ziu- 
dagi  men  tunda  dakliil  Imna  tvru  Uji* 
us  K  bihtar  hai  ki  do  liALb  rnkhw 
h&e  jaliiinnaiu  ke  bkb,  us  ag  mag  jo 
kabhi  D»hifl  bujhti  hai,  daia  jAa: 

44  Jahan  uu  ka  kira  iiahin  ruarta, 
aur  ag  nahin  bujhti. 

^5  iur  agar  teri  panw  tujhe  thokar 
khihiwe,  u.*o  kat  'UI:  kyiinki  zindagi 
men  laugra  dAkhil  houA  tera  livo  ua 
ae  liJiiur  hai  ki  do  pan  w  rakhte  iuir 
iabannaui  ku  liicb,  us  Ag  nieii  ju  kabhi 
miliin  bujbti,  dala  jdwe : 

•IH  Juiiah  im  kii  kiri  tiahin  marta, 
aur  ag  nahin  bujhti. 

47  Aur  agar  teri  aukh  tujhe  rhnkar 
khiiawe,  use  nikdl  dai :  ki  KhudA  ki 
badsbdbjit  men  kdiia  dakhil  boBa  taru 
liye  iu   so  bibtar   hai  ki  do  aukliun 


nahin  bujhii. 

49  Kyuaki  bar  tik  shakba  Ag  se 
namkin  kiya  jacga,  auv  bar  «k  iiui'hdai 
liarnak  se  nainkiii  ki  jaegi. 

50  Naraak  auhuhiii  ebiz  hai :  lekin 
agar  naniak  be-mnza  lio  Jiwa,  lo  kis 
•B  use  UBMtdJS  fcaroge?  Pas  Ap  men 
muuak  rakbo,  aur  Ajiaa  men  irulan 
kam. 

X  i:  A 'i:. 

Pil  I R  wah  wjiliau  te  uthkar  Yardan 
ke  | >iir  Yalnidiya  lu  uarbaiidun 
men  ij'dj  aur  Ing  us  pas  phir  jan:'a 
bui) ;  aur  wuh  apne  daatiir  ke  miiwAili; 
pbir  linhen  ta'liin  karne  laga. 

2  %  Aur  Pftrtflfofl  nc  ua  pas  aku 
iintihitii  ki  rfth  so  us  se  pochha,  Kyd 
iiiwd  hai  ki  mard  Juni  ku  talAq  iie 'i 

3  Us  no  miheg  jawab  men  kahA,  ki 
Miisa  db  tumben  kya  hukm  diya? 

4  We  Vxile,  Miisa  no  to  ijazat  di  hai 
ki  talaq-narna  liklike  talaq  deg. 

5  Tab  Yisii'  no  jawab  diya,  aur 
unhen  kaha,  Us  ue  tuinliari  sakbulili 
ke  sabab  se  tuutliare  liye  yih  hukm 
likhd. 

B  Lokin  kliilijut  ki  ibtida  ee  to 
KhudA  H  unhen  ek  uar  aur  ek  mAiia 
lia.na.ya. 

7  Is  sabab  se  mard  apne  nia  bap  ko 
.  mrapaijorf  h  mlUl  raJiega: 

B  Aur  we  doaog  ck  tau  huiige:  m 
we  ab  do  tau  nuluii,  baiki  h  tau 
Iiain. 

U  Pas  jiae  Klmda  ne  juri  hai,  Admi 
juda  na  karo. 

10  Aur  gliar  men  hoke  ua  ke  s!.,i.- 
ginbnj  nt'  uu  we  is  bat  ki  b&bat  puchba. 

11  Uh  nc  unhen  kali  A,  Jo  koi  jorti 
ko  chhore,  aur  duk  «e  byah  karu,  to 
us  ki  alabal  zinA  kartd  hai. 

12  Aur  agar  jorii  apne  ahauhar  ko 
:hhor  de,  aur  dt'iKre  se  byahi  jfa,  M 

wah  bbi  Kina  kard  hai. 

13  t  I'hir  we  chhcite  larkon  ko  us 


Lnrtcn  ko  MARQ 

pa-  I;ir,  t.i  ki  wuh  unhen  ehhrie ;  pat 
elid^irdon  ne  un  linewalun  ku  daiihl. 

14  Yitu'i'  yih  dekhke  ua-khindi  biid, 
aur   uiihejj  kahd,   Cbbcte    larkorj    ko 
morc  paa  dne  do,  aur  uiihen  nian'a 
kar.i:    kviinki    Khudd   ki   badsbdhat 
alaog  hi  ki  bal 

15  Main  tam  ia  meb  kahta  hi'm, 
Jo  koi  Khudd  ki  bddahahat  ko  chho- 
te lnrkc  ki  tarah  qabiil  na  karc,  wuh 
us  men  ddkhil  na  hoga, 

16  Ph  i  r  us  no  unhen  apui  god  men 
liya,  aur  un  par  hath  rakhko  uukeii 
harakat  di. 

17  T  Aur  jnh  wuh  nih  men  chala 
jata  tlia,  tk  mhakhs  ns  pil*  daurti  dyn, 
aur  u*  ke  Agc  ghutiio  tokke  us  sc 
piichha,  Ai  nek  Ltrtad,  main  kya 
kariAii  td  ki  hatnesha  ki  nindagi  ka 
waris  hun  'i 

18  Yisu'  no  us  sc  kahd,  Tu  mujhe 
nok  kyiin  kahta  hai?  ki  nek  koi  ua- 
hig,  mag»  ok,  ya'no,  Khudn. 

19  Tu  hukinoy  ko  j:iiitd  hai,  ZltlR 
na  kar,  Kbiin  na  kar,"  Ohori  na  kar, 
Jlii'itlii  ^iwdhi  na  do,  Farcb  na  do, 
Apne  ma  bap  ki  'izzat  kar. 

'M  T"s  no  jawab  mori  use  kahd,  Ai 
Ustad,  main  ne  jawani  bq  in  sab  ko 
uaiid  hai. 

21  Tali  YifUi'  ne  ub  par  nigdh  karke 
use  piyar  kiya,  aur  ub  h  kahd,  Ek  chi?: 
tujh  men  baui  hai;  j  A,  aur  ya  kuchh 
teri  lio,  beuh  diil,  aur  gaiibon  ko  dc,  to 
tu  Asiudn  par  khazdna  pdwegd;  aur 
iiihur  a,  aur  salib  uthake  mere  pichhe 
ho  le. 

22  Wuh  u«  hat  se  ud&s  hdd,  aur 
gam  kli:'ii:L  iiv.a  chala  gayd,  kyiinki 
bara  uialdar  tha, 

23  1  Tab  Yiwu'  ne  eh  Aron  taraf 
nazar  karke  ftpne  shagirdon  bo  knha, 
Kliuda  ki  bidahahat  tnerj  dnulatiuaud 
ka  ddkhil  honA  kyahi  mushkil  hai] 

24  fehdgird  us  ki  balon  bo  hair&n 
ln'iL',     Tah  Timi'  tta   phir  jawAb  men 

linimu    katili,    Ai    Iftffco,   .j"    log    'hllht 

par  bhnrosa  rakhte  hain,  un  ko  liye 
o'O 


U8|  X.  harakat  >te»n. 

Khuda  ki  badabakat  men  diikhii  lumu 
kyA  hi  mushkil  hai! 

25  Ki  siii  ke  ndko  so  tint  ka  jdnd, 
Khuda  ki  biidahdhat  naii  daulatmand 
ke  ddkhil  hone  se,  dsan  hai. 

UB  VVe  babat  hi  hairdn  hokc  apas 
tnen  kahuc  bg«,  Phir  kaun  najat  j.a 
sakta  hai? 

27  Yisu'no  unki  taraf  ntjrih  karko 
kahd,  ki  Insan  ke  nazdik  nd-niuinkin 
hai,  ]iar  Khudd  ke  nnzdik  naiiirj ; 
kyiinki  Khuda  ko  nazdik  aab  kuchh 
ho  saktA  liai. 

28  f  Tab  Patrua  m  ne  k«hne  Inu'd, 
Dttkh,  hsffi  ne  nah  kuclih  ofahofi,  ;inr 
terc  pichiie  lio  liye. 

"'J  Yi-ii'  B6  bw&b  men  knha.  Main 
tam  H  Heb  kahta  h\\n,  Aisa  ki7i 
naliin,  jis  ne  ghar,  ya  bhaion,  ya 
bahinon,  yd  bdp,  yd  md,  yd  jora,  yd 
larke  balon,  yd  kiu't<>n  ki;  mere  a'ur 
Injil  ko  liye  clihor  diya  hai, 

30  Jo  bilfi'iil  is  jahati  men  sau 
guna  na  ptlwo,  ghar,  aur  blidi,  nur 
Uihin,  nur  md,  aur  larke,  aur  khet, 
taadi'flg  ke  sdth ;  aur  dnewdle  jahdn 
nun  haniesha  ki  zindagi  pdwoga", 

31  Lckin  bahuturtt,  jo  ag!e  hairj, 
pichhlo;  aur  jo  piohhle,  a^Ie  feonse. 

32  ^  Aur  jab  wc  r:Ui  men  hoke 
Yarfcalam  ko  J4te  the,  Visti'  un  se 
age  l-iiriii'i;  tab  wo  hairan  hdo,  aur 
pichhe  chalto  chnlto  baluit  dur  gaye. 
Aur  phir  Mrahofj  ko  luke  jo  kuchh 
u»  par  honcwdld  thi  un  ae  kahne 
lagd :  ki 

33  Dekho,  hain  Ynnisahni  ko  y'dr 
hain,  aur  Ilm  i  A'dam  Wrdir  kahinojj 
aur  J'iiijiliHij  ke  hawalekiya  j.iogd  ;  aur 

.is  ke  qntl  kd  hukin  derjge.aur  use 

^lir-'j.iurnon  ko  hawalo  karciiL"'  : 

31  Aur  we  us  H  hansi  kan.ijL'e,  aur 

e  kore  martjijae,  aur  us  par  tlu'ikongo, 

aur  use  nail  karenge;  aur  wuh  tisro 

diu  ji  ntlu-^d, 

35  1  Tab  Znbadi  ko  lieton  YaVjiib 
itur  Yuhniuid  ne  us  rjrfs  ako  kiiliii, 
Ai   Ut-tdd,   ham   chaltCc    baig    ki  ju 


Bhogirdon  Jco  maria  Isamd,      MARQUS,  XI.  ki  apni  bardi  na  chahen. 

kue  h  h  ham  mdngen,  tu  haindro  liye  I     47  Aur  yih  sunkar  ki  wuh  Yisii' 

Ndsari  hai,   chilbiuo  mir  kabue  lagd, 

""i  Ua  ne  un   m  kahd,  Tum  kydlAi   Daud   ko   boto,  Yisu',  mujii  par 


chdhto  bu,  ki  main  tumhdro  liyc 
k  ani  n  ? 

37  Unhon  ne  oa  ne  kahd,  Bam  ko 
bakhsh,  ki  tera  jala!  men,  ham,  ek 
teru  dahine  hdih,  aur  dusra  tere  bden 
hdth,  biitlivn. 

38  Tab  Yisii'  ne  iinhen  kahd,  Tum 
uahiu  j:littc  ki  kyd  mdngte  ho :  kyd 

wuh  ]ii\iU:t,  ji ilti   pfaut   pH  lii'.ti. 

tum  pl  sakte  ho?  aur  wuh  baptismu., 
b  main  jiiiuo  par  him,  tum  pd  saklc 
ho? 

39  Unhon  ne  us  se  kahd,  ki  ITatii 
■akta  hiliri.  Yisii'  dg  unhi-n  kaiid, 
Tum  towuh  piydla,  jo  main  pita  h  titi, 
>,./.  .  iur  wuh  buptwuia,  jomain  jiane 
pai'  lilin,  ]':h'L:.'  : 

•10  Lekiu  mero  dahine  aur  bden 
hdth  kisi  ko  baithne  dena,  merd  kain 
naliitj,  magar  uu  ko,  jiu  ke  liye  yih 
tiiiydr  kiyi  gaya  liai. 

•11  Jab  un  dason  ue  sund,  to  wu 
Ya'qub  aur  Yuluumi  par  khafa  koue 
lage. 

42  Tab  Yinii'  ne  unhen  apne  pati 
buldyd,  aur  unlien  kahd,  Tum  jdnte 
ho  ki  we  jo  gair-i|aumon  ke  sarddr 
kahlate  hain,  un  par  kliawiudi  kartu 
haiu,  aur  un  ke  buzurg  un  par  huku- 
inat  kartu  li..ij. 

43  Pte  tam  men  aisa  na  DGjia : 
baiki  jo  tum  men  hara  hud  chdhe, 
tmiihdm  khddim  hugd: 

44  Aur  tum  mon  sa  jo  koi  sarrtar 
hiid  ohahe,  wuh  Bab  ka  bauda  boga. 

45  Kyiinki  Ibu  i  A'dani  bhi  nahtn 
aya  ki  us  ki  khidmat  ki  jdwe,  l>alki 
tip  khidmat  kare,  aur  apni  jan  bahut- 
(jii  ke  liye  kai'ave  mag  aewe. 

4U  ^  l'hir  wu  Yarihuniende ;  aur 
jab  wuh,  aur  uh  ke  sliagird,  aur  ck 
BRfj  hliir,  Yarilui  M  nikahi  tht,  Timai 
ka  beta  Bartimai,  jo  nmlha  tba,  r  Ah 
ku  kintire  baithd  hua  bbikh  mingtd 
tim : 

01 


mluii  kar. 

48  Aur  harchnnd  lmhuton  no  usc 
ddntd,  ki  chup  rahe,  par  wah  aur  bhi 
ziyada  chilldya,  ki  Al  D  Atid  ko  beto, 
luujli  naf  mliiii  kar. 

49  Tab  Yisu'  ne  khare  hoke  hukm 
kiyd,  ki  Uae  buldo.  Unhon  ne  na 
andhe  ko  yih  kabko  bulayti,  ki  Eh  .i- 
tir-jam'a  rakh,  uth;  wuh  tujlie  bu- 
ldtd  hai. 

50  Wuh  apnd  kapj-d  phoukkcuthti, 
aur  YisiV  pas  Ayd. 

51  Yisu'  ne  mukhatib  hoke  us  se 
kaba,  Tu  kyd  uliahtd  hai  ki  main  tera 
liye  kariin  ?  Us  andhe  ue  us  se  kahd, 
Ai  lialil'i,  yih,  ki  main  apni  aiikhen 
{Kiiin. 

52  Yisu'  ne  us  se  kabd,  Ji,  tere 
Enutn  ne  tujhe  bachaya.  W'unhirj  u$ 
ne  aiikhen  piiin,  aur  rah  mc-ii  Yisii'  ku 
phihhe  chald. 

XI  BATI. 

JAB  we  Yanisalam  kn  nazd!k.  Zait- 
un ke  paliar  ke  pas,  Hailtagdaur 
Iiiiit'aiiiyd  men  ae,  us  ne  apuu  s>hi- 
girdon  men  bg  do  ko  blicja, 

Aur  uu  bp  kahd,  ki  U*  Iwisti  men, 
jo  tumhdre  samhne  hai,  jdo,  aur  jab 
tum  us  men  dAkhil  ho^e,  ek  gadhi  ke 
bandho  hiie  bachche  ku  pd'igi',  ji,-  |iar 
kablii  kui  Mwil  nahin  hua;  use  khoi- 
ko  le  do. 

.'!  Aur  agar  kol  shakhs  tuiuhon 
kahe,  ki  Tum  yih  kyuii  karte  ho? 
tum  kabiyo,  Kbudiwaiid  ko  u»  ki 
zarurat  hai ;  to  wuh  iihaur  use  yahaii 
bhej  dt-gd. 

i  Wo  gaye,  aur  us  bachche  ko  dar- 
wdza  ke  na/,dik  liihar  bandba  hiid,  ja- 
b&B  do-rahd  ihd,  i>dyd,  aur  u*  khola. 

5  Ba'fcou  ne,  uu    iin'n    K  jo  wahan 
khare  the,  unherj  kahd,  Yih  kyd  karte 
ho,  ki  gadhi   ke  bachche  ko   kholta 
tu  '.' 
I     ij   Unhon  ne,  jaisa  Ylsd'  ne  l'inuaji 


Madh  shiihana  tuurpar  MAT1QT"S,  XI.     Tarusalam  men  /iakhi!  kota. 

,  kabA;  tab  unhon  no  ua  ko  jauelyih  suni,  aur  flkr  men   thc   ki   use 


lUya. 

7  We  iis  gadhi  kebachche  ko  YisiV 
paslae,  aur  apne  kapre  ns  jiar  dai  diye: 
aur  wuh  ue.  par  rawAt  hua. 

y  Aur  bahu  ton  ne  apni  pophak  ko 
nih  men  bkhhava;  aur  auron.  ne 
darakhton  kl  dalian  kaike  rah  men 
bithrain. 

1»  Aur  we  ]o  &es  pirhhe  jatc  thi», 

Kakfeke    kiilitf    the,   ki    Boahfaanf  i 
lubarak  wuh  jo  Khudawand  ke  nam 
I«r  ata  hai : 

10  Itamare  Mp  Daud  ki  badabahat 
jo  Khudawand  ke  nam  «ssti  hai,  Mu- 
barak! 'Alam  i  bala  men  UnsVanna 
]  )  Yixu'  Yaruflalam  mag  dakhil 
hfii,  aur  bnikal  men  Aji;  aur  jali 
obArOfl  taraf  sab  Datang  par  raulahana 
kiri,  wub  uji  barahon  ke  «aib  Bait'- 
miivi  ko  gav»,  kyiinki  shain  ka  waqt 
thi 

12  1  Dfim  din  ko,  jab  wc  Tbi.it'nn 
iya  ko  biliar  ae,  ua  ko  bluikh  lagi : 

13  Aur  d  u  r  ««  anjir  ki  ek  darakhi 
pattaE  se  lada  hua  dekhke  wuh  gaya, 
ki  ftfityad  tu  men  feucrih  piwo;  jab 
wnii  ob  pfia  iya,  to  pattori  ko  »iwa 
kuchh  napaya;  kyiinki  anjir  ka  mau- 
»im  ria  iba. 

14  Tab  YisiV  ne  UI  M  khilab  karke 
kiii,;i,  J\<;i  tujh  se  pbal  kablii  na 
khawn;  aur  uu  ku  »hagirdon,  n«  yili 
suni. 

15  T  We  Yanianlnm  men  ao;  aur 
YisiV  baikal  men  «hikhil  hoke  unhen, 
Jo  l.aikal  men  bttthfea  IDI  mol  lele  tho. 
baliar  uikalne  lagi,  aur  sarrafoii  ke 
takhta,  nur  kabutar-bechiiewAlon  ki 
chaukian,  ulat  din ; 

16  Aur  kisi  ko  baikal  men  lioku 
bartan  le  jine  na  diyi. 

17  Aur  unhen  yili  kahke  saTnjliiyA, 
Kyi  yib  nahin  likhi  lini,  ki  M  era 
ghareab  aaurnon  ke  Uye  'ibadatkhaua 
kahliegi  f  le.kin  lura  tie  iisu  oWon 
kii  gar  banaya  bai. 

18  PaofllOjj  aur  saruir  kobioon  ne 

62 


I  kisi  tarah  jari  w  mirrm  ;  kyi'mki  us  se 
darte  ihe,is  liye  ki  sab  log  uski  tn'lim 
h  dana  bo  g»je  the. 

li)  Aur  jabsliim  bui >  wub  shahr  ko 

kiictr  BtJ*. 

20  ^  Aur  sulih  ko,  jab  we  udhar 
se  jtuzre,  to  dekhi  ki  wuh  anjir  ka 
damkbl  i:ir  se  siikh  gaya. 

21  Tab  Putrns  ne  vid  karke  ita  se 
kahii,  Ai  Kabbi,  dekii,  anjir  ka  yih 
ilariiklit,  ji«  par  tu  ne  la'nat  ki  ihi, 
sukh  gaya  hai. 

22  Yiaii'ne  jawab  men  unhen  kah4, 
KbudA  jiar  i'aHqad  rakho;  ki 

2t  Main  !,um  se  saeli  kabti  hun,  Jo 
koi  ia  jaliar  ko  kalie,  Utli,  aur  daryd 
men  gir  par,  aur  apne  dil  men  shakk 
OB  la wo,  baiki  yaqin  knre  ki  yib 
baten,  jo  wuh  kahta  bai,  hojicngi,  to 
jo  kucbb  wuh  kahegi,  so  hog&. 

'^4  Is  liye  main  tum  ne  kalila  ln';n, 
ki  Du'a  Dien  jo  kucbb  turn  m&ngtc  bo, 
yaqin  lao  ki  milega,  to  tum  pii'-gc. 

25  Aur  jab  ki  tum  du'a  ke  liyc 
kharo  hetfl  bo,  agar  tumhen  kisi  par 
kuchb  shikayat  bo,  to  use  uju'af  karo, 
la  ki  tumblra  Biip  bhi,  Jo  asunan  par 
liai,  tumhiire  ipimiron  ko  mu'af  kare. 

26  Aur  agar  tmn  mu'af  na  karoge, 
b>  tiiinliara  Bap,  jo  tanin  pai  bal, 
tumhiire  oumir  bbi  mu'af  na  karega. 

21  «i  Wo  pbit  Yaruaalam  men  ac. 
.liili  wuh  lniikal  men  jiliirta  tbi,  aar- 
ddr  kdhin  aur  faipb  aur  buzui-g  us  ko 
p&a  ac, 

28  Aur  u9  ee  kabi,  ki  Tii  kis  ikhti- 
yar  m  yih  kitu  karti  hai  ?  aur  kit>  no 
tujbe  ikbtiyar  diya  ki  yih  kam  karc? 

29  Tab  YisuV  n«  jawab  men  unhen 
kaba,  ki  Main  bhi  tum  ne  ■■!■.  bal 
puchhta  lilin  ;  tum  jawab  do,  to  main 
tinulu'ij  baliliiii^a  ki  main  kis  ikhti- 
ar se  yih  kam  karta  bon. 

30  Yuhanna  ka  bapti.sma  asman  so 
thii,  yi  insan  se  ?  mujhe  jawab  do. 

iil  Tuli  «*e  apaa  men  aochke  kahno 
tage,  ki  Agar  batu  kahen,  Asinan  se, 


Tdkistdn  ki  tati  $U,  MARQUS,  XII. 

to  wuh  kahega,  Phir  tum  kyiin  us  par 
uu&n.  naiiin  \m-  '.' 

3:i  Aur  agar  haru  kahen,  Insdn  se, 
to  logo  n.  se  oarte;  ia  liye  ki  sah  Yu- 
Lanui  ko  nai>i  barhao/]  jdnttj  tbe. 

33  Tab  unhon  ne  Visu'  se  jawdb 
men  kaha,  Ham  nahm  Unta.  Yisi'f 
nc  jawab  men  unhen  kaha,  Main  bhi 
tum  .-t!  naiiin  kahfd  ki  main  kis 
ikhtivar  M  vih  kain  kartd  hun. 
XII   BAU 

PHIR  Maih  unhen  tiimsikm  men 
kahno  lagd.  ki  Ek  ahakhs  Dfl 
aiigtir  kd  bag  Jagdyd,  aur  ua  ki  chdr- 
m  taraf  ghera,  aur  kolhii  ki  jagah 
khodi,  aur  ek  burj  liandya,  aur  us.' 
WjbanOB ko SUpnw  karke  pardes  gaya, 
'l  l'Iiir  mausim  mag  us  ne  ek  nau- 
k;i:  ko  b£gb£aon  [■as  bhcjd,  td  ki  wuh 
bdgbdnon  M  angiir  ke  bag  ke  phal 
im-u  si-  kiii.lili  le. 

3  Unhon  nc  use  nnkarke  mara,  aur 
khdli  hdth  bheja. 

4  Us  ne  dobdra  ek  aur  naukar  ko 
un  p&a  bliL-ja;  unhon  nc*  us  par  pat* 
thar  phenkke  ua  ka  sir  phora,  aur  be- 
hunnat  karke  pher  biieja. 

5  l'hir  us  ne  ek  aur  ko  Lhcjd: 
unhon  ne  use  (jati  kiya;  phir  aur 
bahuteron  ko;  un  taen  se  ba'zoti  ko 
pita,  aur  ba'zon  ko  mdr  ddld. 

6  Ah  us  k;L  ek  hi  beta'  thd  jo  us  kd 
ptyard  tha.  akhir  ko  us  no  usti  hhi  un 
pas  ylh  kahke  hheja,  ki  Wu  meru  bete 
tse  dabenge. 

7  Lekin  un  Ldglwinon  ne  apas  men 
kahd,  Yih  waria  hai;  do,  bam  uae  mdr 
il;ileu,  to  miris  hamdri  lio  jdejji. 

a  Aur  unhon  na  use  pnkarks  qatl 
kiyi,  aur  angiir  ko  bag  ke  bdhar  pheuk 
diyd. 

8  Pas  bag  M  mdlik  kyd  karega? 
wuh  dwegd,  aur  un  bagbatuog  ku  bar 
Idk  karke  angiir  ka  bdg  aimin  ko  dega. 


lizyn  c 


e  ki  b£bai. 


i  1  Vih  Khuddwaod  ki  taraf  sc  bud, 
aur  hamari  na/,aron  men  'ajib  hai  ? 

12  Tab  unhon  no  ehdhri-  ki  use  pa- 
kar len,  par  logon  ae  darte  the ;  kyunki 
wc  samajh  gptyv  the,  ki  us  ne  yih 
liuusil  un  par  kalii;  aur  we  uae 
chhorke  chah:  gaya. 

13  1f  Phir  unhon  ne  bn'ze  Fariaion 
aur  ]  1 1  ■  1 1 1 1 3  i  ■_.  ti  ko  us  |ida  bhejft,  ki  uae 
us  ki  h.-iton  se  pbande  men  dalen. 

14  Aur  jab  we  de,  to  ue  bv  kalid, 
Ai  T'stad,  ham  jaufi>  luiin,  ki  tfi 
wachcha  hai,  nur  tujh  ko  kisi  ki  parwa 
nahiu,  kyunki  tii  logon  ki  twafddri 
Dflhfrj  kara,  baiki  Khuda  ki  rah  rasti 
se  batdtd  hai;  Qaisar  ko  jizya  dcnd 
tewi  hai,  yd  nahin? 

15  Ham  dewen,  ya  na  dcwrn  ?  Us 
ne  un  k  d  makr  Kamajhke  unlien  ka- 
hd,  Tum  mujlie  kyi'm  dzmdte  ho?  ek 
dinar  mujh  pds  lai>,  ki  main  dekhiin. 

16  We  ldo;  tab  us  ne  u&te  puebra, 
ki  Yib  kia  kf  surat,  aur  kia  kd  aikka 
hai  ?    Unhon  ne  kahd,  Qaisar  ka. 

17  Yiaii'  ne  jawdb  nien  unhen  kahd, 
Jn  ch'm-.t}  Qaisar  ki  hctin,  Qaisar  ko, 
aur  jo  cliiwn  Khudi  ki  hairi,  Khudd 
ko  do.     Tab  wo  ua  w  hairdn  hue. 

18  1  l'hir  Kaduq[,  ju  .|iydmat  kd 
inkdr  karte  hain,  us  pds  de ;  aur  un- 
hon ne  us  sc  suwal  karke  kahd,  ki 

l'.*  Ai  Uetdd,  hamdre  liye  Musa  no 
likhd  hai,  ki  Agar  kisi  ka  bhdi  mar 
jde,  aur  us  ki  jorti  rahe,  aur  rkrea&d 
ua  ho,  to  us  kd  bhdi  un  ki  jonl  ko 
lewa,  td  ki  apno  bhai  ke  iiyo  aulad 
paldi  k  a  re. 

20  Ab  sdt  bhdi  the;  pahio  ne  jord 
ki,  aur  he-aul-id  mar  gayd. 

21  Tab  ddare  ne  uh  liyd,  aur  mur 
gayd,  us  kd  bhi  kol  farzand  na  rahd ; 
aur  nsi  tarah  .se  tinro  ne. 

t'2  Yunbin  sdton  ne  use  liyd,  aur 
auldd  naiiin  elihor  gaye;  aab  ke  pi- 


10  Kyd  tum  ne  yib  naviahta  nahiu  i:)ilic  wuh  'aurat  bin  mar  gayi. 
parhd,  ki  Wuh  patthar,  jiBe  mPamironj      TA  Qiydmat  men  jab  we  uthengc. 


I  ud-iiasand  kiyd,  wuhl  kooe  kd  aird  wuh 


biid : 


|  kyunk 


nien    se    kis    ki   joni   hugi? 
wuh  saton  ki  jorii  hiii  thi. 


Ekfayh  ke  mwal  kj.  jawab.  MAUQU8,  XIII.     Ganh  hcwa  ke  do  ■■hha-b'<m. 
24  Tu&'va  jawab  men  unhon  ka-jAur  ba'd  ua  ko  kisi  ne  jur,at  na  ki, 


ha,  ki  Kya  tmii  la  sabah'ao  bhtifnien  ki  a 


iiahin  pare  ho,  ki  tam  ua  unvishton' 
ke,  na  Khuda  ki  qudrat  k  o  jamu  ho? 


35  lf  Phir  YisiV  haikal  men  wa'z 
karte  Iii'wj  kohne  lagi,  ki  Fai]ih~kyTm- 


26  Kyi-jjki  jab  mnrde  utheiige.,  tolku   kahte  hain,  ki   Masih  Daud  ki 


wc  ua  liy:lii  kimti^c,  mi  livak:  jaen«e, 
baiki  jelse  firiahtejo  asman  par  hain, 
WHtM  hortgo. 

'2(i  Aurtnurdon  keji  utlmc  ki  1  li- 
bat kya  turn  iio  Miisa  ki' kitab  men 
nahin  parha,  ki  Khuda  no  jhari  meri 
se  us  ae  kytinkar  kaha,  ki  Main  Abi- 
rahamka  Klnuhi,,  aur  l/.liiuikd, Khuda, 
mi  r  Ya'i|iiii  ka  Khuda.  In'nj? 

27  Wuh  murdog  k&  Khuda-  nah  iri, 
baiki  zindon  ka  Kbuda  hai;  pa»  tuui 
bari  pila.r.i  karte  ho. 

28  t  Tab  fa-nlmt;  men  sc  ek  jis 
un  ka  suujil  o  uwifa  mnka  samjha  ki 
us  ne   unhen  khiib  jawab  diya,  pas 
.iya,  aur  ua  ko  puchha,  ki  Sab  hukinorj 
mag  auwal  kaun  bai? 

29  Yisu'  ne  ua  se  jawab  men  kaha, 
ki  Sab  hukiuon  morj  amval  yih  bai,  ki 
Ai  Israel,  sun  ;  "Wuh  Khudawand,  jo 
iiamara  Khuda  bai,  ek  hi  Khudawand 
hai: 

30  Aur  tu  Khudawand  ko,  jo  torsi, 
Khnda  hai,  apne  sare  dil  sg,  aur  apni 
sarijan  se,  aur  njmi  siri  'aql  m,  aur 
spna  sirire  aur  ee,  piyar  kar;  auwal 
lnikii:  yilii  hai. 

31  Aur  .irisra  jo  ua  ki  manind  hai, 
yih  bai,  ki  Tri  apm>  papotij  ko  apne 
barabar  piyar  kar.  Ia  se  bara"  uur  koi 
hukm  nahir.  bai. 

32  Tab  uh  faqih  no  us  se  kaha,  Kya 
khtih!  Ai  Ustad,  tu  ne  sach  kaha, 
kyiiiiki  Kbuda  ek  hai;  us  ke  siwAaur 
koi  nahiii: 

33  Aur  n«  ko  sare  dil  se,  aur  uari 


beta  hai  ? 

86  Kyunki  Paiid  ap  hi  Rilh  i  Quds 
ke  hatane  se  kanta  hai,  ki  ^imWwftnd 
nc  mere  Khudawand  ko'  kaha,  Tii 
inere  dahiriw  harh  baitb,  jab  tak  main 
teredushmanonkotere  j-fttiwimrakbuo 
ki  chauki  karun. 

37  Daud  to  ap  h!  ukc  Khudawand 
kahta  bai ;  phir  wuh  ua  ka  beta 
];viirik;ir  hai  'i  Aur  "awamui  khushi  ae 
uh  ki  sunte  the. 

38  ^  Us  ne  apni  talfm  mon  imhen 
kaha,  Faqibon  so  lioshyar  raho,  jo 
tambo  j;i;iu'  pahinke  nb  kurmi,  aur 
bazar  un  mvQ  Kalamon  k  o, 

S0  Aur  'ili.iriatkhanon  men  sadr 
kursiim  ko,  aur  ziyafaton  raen  uochj 
Ja«bojj  ko,  chahto  hain  : 

40  W  e  bt'-won  ke  gharon  ko  nigalte 
haiii,  aur  makr'se  nainiiz"ko  tiil  dete 
hain;  uulien  /.j  y  ada  aaza  hogi. 

41  K  l'liir  'Vi-ii'  l.:ut-u)-T[iiil  ke 
TOinhtic  baitbkar  dekb  raha  tha  ki  log 
bait-ul-mdl  iiu'ij   palsu  kis  tarah  oaltt 

liain;   aur  labur  daulatmandofl  ne 

bahut  kncdih  dala. 

42  Aur  ek  girib  bewa  no  dkc  do 

chhadira,  ya'ue  ek   adheia,   us   men 
dala. 

48  Tab   us  re  apne  ahairirdori  ko 

bulake  unhen  kaha,  Main  nun  ee  each 

kahta  biin,  ki  Is  kangal  bewa  ne  un 

ib  se,  jo  bnit-ul-mil  mea  dalte  hain, 

iyriiia  d.ili  bai. 

U  Kyiiiiki  sobhotj  ne  apne  bahu  t 

mal  meg  MU  kucbh  dalii,  par  uh  ae 

\v[\  *e,  aur  sari  jaa  ne,  aur  sara  zor  tu,  Bfarf  ^aribi  se,  jo  kuch'h  ki  u.s  ka  thi, 

piyar  karua,  aur  B^me  partai  ho  npna  npni  sari  punji  dali. 


l'uriilMrmuhabbatraklma.hahsrjkbtoni 
ipirbanion  aur  zablhon  se  hihtar  hai. 

34  Jati  Yisu'  no  dekha  ki   tu  ne 
danai  h  few£b  diyi,  to  us  «e  kabd,  Td 
Khudi  ki  badsbab.it  w  &6i  naW 
64 


.XIII  lU'R. 

JAR  wub  haikal  se  babar  jAta  tha, 
us  ke  itMfghdog  men  se  *k  ne  ua 
ne  kab.A,  Ai  Ustad,  dekh,  ye  kitne  bare 
pattiar,  aur  kilnl  bari  Wsmtcg  hain! 


Dukfijo  shiiyird  pawrnge.  MAT»QUS, 

2  Yistl'  ne  jawab  mcn  us  se  kahd, 
ki  Tii  in  bari  'hnaraUin  ]wr  nig&h 
kartU  hai?  yahdn  patthar  par  patthar 
na  chhutegd,  Jo  girdyd  na  jdegd. 

3  Jab  wnh  Zaitun  ke  pahir  pai 
haikal  ke  sdmhne  baithd  thd,  Patrus, 
aur  Ya'qub,  aur  Yiihannd,  aur  Andryds 
ne  uinile  men  us  ae  pnchha, 

4  Ram  ne  kah,  k  i  yih  kafe  hogd, 
aur  uh  waqt  kd,  jab  yih  sab  kuthh 
pfird  hogd,  kyd  uishfin  hai  'i' 

5  Yisu'  ne  jawab  mcn  unhcti  kahna 
ihurd'  kiyfi,  Hoshyar  ratto,  ki  tumben 
koi  gumrdh  na  kare : 

6  Kydijki  bnhuterc  mcrd  nam  lcke 
dwenge,  aur  "kahenge,  ki  Main  wuhi 
hiin,  aur  bahuton  ko  gumrdh  karenge. 

T  Aur  jab  tuiu  laraian  aur  lardioti 
ki  afwahen  suno,  mat  ghabrdiyo; 
kyunki  un  chizon  kd  waql  hona  Bft- 
nfr  hai ;  lokin  dkbir  abhi  nahin  hogd. 

8  Kyiinki  oauni  qauiu  par,  aur 
bdtUhdhat  bddshdhat  par  charhegi, 
aur  kitni  jagahon  men  E&lzale  Kongo, 
aur  kdl  parongi1,  aur  fasdd  uthenge; 
y>h  musibaton  ka  shttru'  hai. 

9  1  Par  tum  &\>  so  khabarddr  rabo; 
kyiinki  we  tumben  niajlison  ke  ha- 
wdle  karenge,  aur  ibadatkhamm  meg 
tum  nidr  khi'mgc,  aur  hakinion  aur 
badsbahon  ke  dge  inere  wdste  hdzir 
kiye  j&ofl»,  la  ki  un  par  gawdhi  ho. 

10  Lckin  «arni  bai,  ki  pahlc  Bab 
qaumon  ke  dge  Injil  ki  manddi  ho. 

11  Tar  jab  tuuihen  le  jdke  hawale 
karen,  age  se  fikr  na  karo,  ki  ham  kyd 
kahenye,  aur  na  soclio :  baiki  jo  kuchh 
us  ghari  umihen  batayd  jdwe,  wuhi 
kahiyo;  kyiinki  kabnewdle  tum  na- 
hin ho,  baiki  Iliin  i  Quds  bai. 

12  Bhdt  bhdi  ko,  aur  bdp  bete  ko 
<qn.t  l  ke  wdsto  pakarwdegd;  aur  Wke 
ma  bin  kd  samuni  karke  unhcn  inar- 
wd  ddlenge. 

13  Aur  luiTd  ii.'Lin  ke  sabab  se  sah 
tumbare  dushrnan  honge;  i*ir  jo  koi 
akhir  tak  sabr  karegd,  wuhi  inijat 
piwegt. 


XIII.  A'fatenjo  YahMioiipar 6,wengc- 

14  ^  Jiswaqt  tuin  us  kliardb-karne- 
wdH  makruh  chiz  ko,  jis  kd  Ddniid 
nabi  ne  /ikr  liiyd,  08  janah  inerj,  jahan 
uh  kd  khard  hona  rawi  nahin,  dekrit), 
(jo  parhtA  hai,  so  samajli  le,)  tab  we 
jo  Yahudi  ya  mon  hon,  paltaron  pir 
bhdgen : 

15  Aur  wuh  jo  kothe  par  ho,  ghar 
men  na  utre,  aur  apiie  ghar  se  koi 
obu  nikalue  ke  !iyo  nn  jde: 

1C  Aur  jokbet  men  bai,  apni  poshdk 
ulliauu  ke  iiye  pichhe  na  phire. 

17  Aur  un  par  jo  un  dinon  men 
hamiU  bon.  aur  un  par  jo  dudh  pild- 
tidn  bon,  al'so,-  hai  ! 

18  Aur  du'd  mdngo,  ki  tuiuhdrd 
bniena  jtn  men  na  ho. 

18  Kyunki  un  dinorj  met]  aisi  taklif 
hogi,  ki  ibtidd  e  khilqat  w,  jise  Khu- 
dd  ue  khalq  kiya,  ab  tak,  na  lidi,  aur 
na  hogi. 

20  Aur  agar  Khudawand  un  dinon 
ko  na  gbat.dtd,  to  ek  ddini  na  hicKta  ; 
par  un  barguzidon  ke  waate,  jin  ko  us 
□e  chund  hai,  un  dinon  ko  ghatdya. 

21  Us  waqt  agar  koi  tumhcn  kahe, 
Dekho,  Masih  yahdn,  yd  dokho,  wahdn 
hai,  io  yaqiu  na  ldiyo : 

22  Kyunki  jlnitbe  Masih  aur  jhu- 
the  nabi  uthen-ic,  aur  nishdnidn  aur 
kardmdt  diklildenge,  ki  agar  ho  maktd, 
to  barguzidon  ko  bhi  gumrdh  karb;. 

2'i  Par  tum  khabarddr  raho ;  dekhn, 
main  ne  tinnhen  sah  kuchh  pahle  hi 
kali  diyd  hai. 

24  Tf  Aur  un  dinon  men,  us  taklif 
ke  ba'd,  niiraj  andhc-ra  boga,  aur  ch&pd 
apni  roshni  nu  degi ; 

25  Aur  Asiudn  se  nitdre  girenge,  aur 
asuidn  ki  quwaten  Mlai  jdengi. 

26  Aur  us  waql  Ibn  i  A'dam  ko 
bddalon  j)ar  bari  qudrat  aur  Jalai  k< 
sdth  atedekhcnge. 

27  Aur  us  waqt  wuh  apne  finshton 
ko  bhejcgd,  aur  apne  barguzidon  ko, 
zainin  ki  hadd  se  demdn  ki  liadd  tak, 
chirofl  taraf  s"  il;:Llfliu  karega. 

28  Ab  anjir  ke  darakht  so  tamsil 

E 


Jftntt  far  '#r  m-Jaa,  MARQU8,  XIV .  Masih  id  dHiri  fawh  Mana. 

eiklio;  Jab  us  ki  iiiiroi  tlalf  hotf,  aur 

INilto  nikalto  ham,  tiib  tum  jduti:  ln>  1 
.:  ^ijniii  ruizdik  hai: 


L?y  U  si  tarah  tum  bhi,  jab  dekho  ki 
yih  abn-d!  hone  lage,  to  jduo,  ki  wuh 
nazdik,  baiki  dazwwe  par  hai. 

30  Main  tum  se  snch  kanta  In'm.k 
h  /amane  ke  log  guzar  na  jaongc,  jab 
tak  yiti  sah  kjBcEh  wa^'i  na  howe. 

31  A'sman  aur  «amin  tal  jdcngo, 
par  mori  bdteri  na  talengi. 

32  T  Magar  us  din,  aur  us  ghari  ki 
babat,  siwd  l(ap  ke,  na  to  firishte  jo 
dsmdn  par  hain,  aur  na  Beta,  koi 
nahin  jiutd  hai. 

JH  Tum  khaharddr  ho,  jagte  raho 
aur  du'd  nia'ngo :  kyfinki  tum  nahin 
jdiite  ki  waijt  kab  hai, 

M  Yih  ai&d  hai,  jait;d  ek  shaklisjo 
nptii  ghar  chhorko  pardes  gaji,  aur 
apae  naukaron  ko  ik  htiyar  dekar  bar 
ck  ko  us  ka  kara  diyd,  aur  darban  ku 
hukm  kiytl  ki  ja<;td  rsbe. 

35  Ie  liye  tum  jd^to  rnlio,  kyunki 
tum  mUiin  janto  ki  ghar  kamalik  kab 
awuga,  shdm  ko,  yd  ddhi  rit  ko,  ya 
inurg  ke  bang  dete  waqt,  ya  aubh  ko ; 

33  Ta  aisi  na  ho,  ki  achdnak  ake 
wuh  tum  ko  mte  paive. 

37  Aur  jo  kuchli  main  tum  se  kan- 
ta hi'ui,  eab  se  kabta  hun,  Jdgto  raho. 

XIV  BA-a 

DO  din  ke  ba'd  f»«ah  aur  fatiri  roti 
ki  'id  thi ;  aur  saniar  kdhin  aur 
t'uqih  tadbfr  kar  rahe  tho  ki  use  kyun- 
kar  makr  se  pakarkc  jau  se  niaren. 

2  l'nr  unhon  ne  kaha,  ki  'I'd  ke  din 
nahm,  aLad  na  lio,  ki  logon  men  balwa. 

3  T  Aur  jab  wuh  Bait'aniyd  men 

Slniiiia'iin  kurbi  ko  gharkbdiie  baithd* 
ck  'aurat  jataindsi  ka  bosh-qimat  kbd- 
lis  'itr  marmar  ke  'itrdan  men  UU,  aur 
rlibiyd  torke  'itr  ko  us  ke  air  par 
4hala. 

4  Tab  ba'ze  apno  dil  men  dzurda 
hoke  kahne  lage,  'Itr  ki  yiir^barabi 
kislivehfit? 


5  Kydnki  yih  'itr  tiii  sau  d(mtr  ko 
bik  sakti,  aur  garibon  ko  diyd  jdta. 
Aur  we  inw  nmlamat  karnc  lage. 

fi  Tab  Yi*ii'  nekaha,  Use  chhordo; 
kyun  nm  aatate  bo'i*  u»  ne  mere  sdth 
aoliulihi  BoJfik  kiya  hai. 

7  Is  wdste  ki  garib  gurbi  hamesha 
tumhare  sdth  hain,  aur  jab  tum  chalio 
un  sekeki  kar  sakte  ho;  iiar  main 
hatnewha  tumharu  sath  na  rabunga. 

8  Jo  kuchh  wuh  knr  aaki,  ao  kar 
obukf ,  us  ne  sabqaikarke  meru  badan 
ko  kafan  ke  liye  mu'atiar  kiya, 

9  Alaiii  t'irii  eo  sach  kahta  haQ,  kt 
Tam&m  elunya  men,  jah.in  kabin  yih 
Injii  manadi  ki  jat'gi,  yih  bhi  jois  ue 
kiya  hai,  U  ki  yadgdri  ko  liye  bayau 
kiya  jaega. 

10  1  Tab  Yahi'idah  Iaqariyiiti,  jo 
un  barahon  men  se  thA,  sardar  kalun- 
on  ]i;ih  gaya,  ta  ki  uae  un  ke  hath 
pakar  w  a  dewo. 

11  We  yih  sunke  khush  hde,  aur 
us  ko  riipiyo  dcue  kd  iqrdr  kiyd;  tab 
WUh  (ikr  men  laga,  ki  kis  tarah  qabu 
pdkc  use  pakarwd  de. 

1U  t  Aur  'id  i  fatfr  ke  pable  din, 
jab  wc  fa.tah  ko  zabh  kartu  the,  us  ke 
fcbacirdon  ne  use  kaJia,  Tii  kahdy 
chalitd  hai  ki  luun  jaerj  aur  taiyaii 
karen,  ki  tu  fiisah  ko  khfcwe? 

13  Ub  ne  apue  Bhigirdog  men  se  do 
ko  bheja,  aur  uuhetj  kaha,  Sliahr  men 
jdn ;  wahdn  ek  sbnkhs  pdni  kd  gliaia 
uthae  hiio  tumlion.  milegd;  ua  ke 
pichhc  chale  jdo, 

14  Aur  wuh  jia  ghar  men  dakhil 
howe,  tum  uh  gbar  ke  nni/ik  ae  kaho, 
Usidd  kahtd  hai,  ki  Wuh  utame  ki 
jagab,  jahdn  main  apne  shdprdon  ke 
sath  fasah  khiiiin,  kahdrj  hai  ? 

L5  Wul,  ,-k  Twra  baldkhana  farsh 
bScbbi  aur  drdsla  tumben  dikbawegd ; 
«■alian  liamdre  liye  taiyrtri  karo. 

16  Tab  us  ke  ahdgird  chale  gaye, 
aur  shahr  men  dke,  jaiai  us  ne  uiiben 
k.'ilui  ihd,  waisd  hi  pdyd,  aur  lasad 
taiydr  kiyd. 


17  Jab  tshdm  hiU,  wuh  U 
ItB  MUI  :iv;i. 


18  Jab  wc  baitlike  khdne  lagc,  YisiV 
ne  kahd,  Main  fcoin  se  sach  kahtd  liiin, 
ki  Ek  tum  men  .se,  jo  m  t' re  sdth  khitd 
hal,  mtljhe  pakarwdegd. 

10  Tab  we  garngro.  hone  lage,  aur 
un  men  so  ek  ek  ksrke  us  se  kain»' 
lage,  Kyd  main  min?  aur  dusrd,  Kyd 
main  has  ? 

20  Ua  ne  jawab  merj  un  se  kali  A,  ki 
Rambun  men  se  ek  hai,  jo  incrc  sdth 
basan  men  hdth  ddltd  hai. 

21  Ibu  i  A'dam  to,  jaisd  uh  ke  haqq 
men  likhd  hai,  jdtd  hai ;  lekin  afac*  us 
s,  hak  L  s  nur,  jis  ke  wasile  Ibn  i  A'dam 
pukiirwdyd  jdtA  hai !  M  ddmi  ke  liye 
Dibiar  thd,  ki  wuh  paidi  na  hotd. 

22  1  Jab  we  khdte  the,  Yisu'  ne 
roti  uthai,  aur  shukr  karke  ton,  aur 
unhen  dekar  kahd,  I/>,  kbdo;  yih 
nierd  hadan  hai. 

23  Phir  U8  no  piyala  lekar  ahukr 
kiyd,  aur  unhen  diya;  aur  un  sabhon 
ne  u»  se  piyi. 

24  Aur  us  no  unhen  kahd,  ki  Yili 
raera  naye  'ahd  kd  laliu  hai,  jo  bahu  ton 
ke  liye  bahaya  jati  hai. 

26  Main  tum  ac  sach  kahta  hiin,  ki 
Main  anulir  ka  ras,  jis  din  tak  Khudd 
ki  kulsdidhat  meg  use  naya  na  pilin, 
phir  na  pitirjgd. 

2(i  ^  Tab  we  ek  zabtir  gdko  bahar 
nikle,  aur  Zaitun  ke  pahdr  pft*  IKK. 

27  Aur  YisiT  ne  un  se  kaha,  Tum 
sah  dj  ki  rdt  mi're  haqi[  men  thokar 
khdogc,  ia  liye  ki  yih  likhd  hai,  Main 
garatiyo  ko  mininga, aur bheren  pard- 
gaiida  ho  jdengi. 

28  Par  main  apne  nthno  ke  ba'd 
tum  M  dgo  Jalil  ko  jdunjjd. 

29  Tab  Patrus  ne  us  ne  kaha,  Agar- 
ebi  sab  thokar  khawen,  par  main  na 
kJjaiiij^A. 

30  Visu'  ne  ua  se  kahd.  Main  tujh 
BS  sach  knhtd  huu,  ki  A 'j  'm  hi  rat  ko, 
murg  ke  do  bdr  bdng  dene  ke  dge,  tu 
tin  bdr  mord  inkdrkaregd. 


MAHQUS,  XIV.  fcrf  UI 

bdrahon'     31  Tab  na  ne  bir  bdr  kahd.  Agar 
tera  aat-h  mori  marnd  sar&r  \m.   t»u 


bhi  hargiz  terd  inkdrnakariingd.  Aur 
un  sabhon  nc  blil  waiad  hi  kahd, 

Phir   we  ek  jagah  men,  jis  kd 

ndm  Gatsomane    Uid,  de;  aur    ua  ne 

■ne  shdgirdcin  ko  kaha,  .lab  tak  ki 

main  du'd  mdngun,,  tum  yabdrj  baitlie 

Aur  Patrus  aur  Ya'uiib  aur  Ytl- 
bannd  ko  apne  sdth  liyd,  aur  wuh 
ghabrdne  aur  bahut  udds  hone  laga  ; 

34  Aur  un  so  kahd,  Mori  jdn  k»  j>am 
maut  kd  sd  hai ;  tum  yahdrj  thahro, 
aur  jdgte  raho. 

36  Aur  wuh  thord  dgc  jakar  zaniin 
par  gira,  aur  du'd  tilangi,  ki  a^ar  lio 
sake,  to  yih  ghari  mujh  ae  tal  jac. 

86  Aur  kahd,  Ai  Abbd,  a'i  Bip,  sah 
kuchh  tujh  so  ho  sakti  hai ;  is  piydlu 
ko  mujh  se  til  de ;  lekin  na  wuh  jo 
main  chdhtdhi'm,  baiki  jo  tii  chdhtdliai. 

37  Phir  wuh  dyd,  aur  unhen  tuta 
pdyd,  aur  Patrus  ko  kahd,  Ai  Bh*- 
raa'iinTtii  soti  hai?  kyd  td  ek  ghari 
jdg  na  nak  A  ? 

38  Jayt*  raho,  aur  du'd  mdngo,  td 
aisd  na  ho,  ki  tum  Imtihan  men  paro : 
nih  to  musta'idd,  par  jis  m  sust  hai. 

39  Wuh  phir  gaya,  aur  wuhi  bat 
du'd  men  nidngi. 

40  Aur  phir  dke  unhen  sote  paya, 
kyunki  un  ki  dnkhen  biidri  thiii,  aur 
we  nahin  jdiite  the  ki  use  kyd  jawdb 
dewen. 

4l"Phir  tisri  bdr  dke  unlien  kahd, 
ki  Ab  sote  raho,  aur  drdui  karo ;  lui.s, 
waqt  d  pahunehd ;  dekho,  Ibu  i  A'dam 
poTidh^amri  ke  hdthon  mi.n  hawdla 
kiyd  jdtd  hai. 

42  Utho,  ham  chalon;  dekho,  wuh 
|o  mujhe  pakaprAttl  hai,  nazdlk  hai. 

43  1  Wuh  "yih  kahtd  hi  thd.ki  fil- 
laur  un  bdrnh  men  st:  ek  Yaln'id.'ih 
ndme,  aur  us  ke  s&lh  BardAr  kihinoj 
aur  f:i(|ihoii  aur  buzurgon  ki  taraf  se 
ek  haribhir,  talwircn  aur  latliiln  lokc 
d  pahunehi. 


Malt  ih  par 

44  Aur  paksrwAnewdle  ne  unhen 
y  ih  palA  diyA  tbA,  ki  Jis  kA  main  I  Mina 
Un,  wulti  hai;  uso  tum  pakarku  bila- 
zat  90  1g  jAo. 

45  W  uh  Ake  filfaur  ub  pAs  gaya. 
aur  kaha,  Ai  Kabbi,  ai  Kabhi,  aur  u«e 
dihina, 

46  ^  Aur  unhon  ne  us  par  hdtli 
dAlke  usc  pakar  liyA. 

47  Ek  nc,  uo  men  se  Jo  wahAy  hA- 
f.ir  thc,tahvAr  khincLkar  sardir  kabin 
ke  ttakv  ko  lagai,  aur  ub  ka  kAn 
uiyA. 

48  Tab  YisiV  nn  se  niukhAtib  hoko 
kahnp  laga,  KyA  tum  talwAren  aur 
lAthiAn  teh»  mujhe  chur  ki  manind 
pakanie  ko  Ae  ho? 

49 'Main  to  har  roz  tumhAre  pAs 
liaikal  mctj  taliin  detA  tbA,  aur  tuin 
no  nnijhe  naliin  pakni;  lekiu  yili  hua 
ki  navinhte  pi'irc  howeii, 

50  Tab  we  Bftb  use  chhorke  bhag 
gaya. 

51  Magar  ek  jawan,  Jo  sriti  chAdar 
apne  badan  par  oftto  tha,  ns  ke  piclihe 
ho  liyA,  aur  jawAuon  no  use  pokra : 

52  Tar  wuh  suti  ehAdar  un  ke  hAtli- 
un  n>«n  chliorkar  rianya  bhagA, 

'b'A  ^  Tab  -m  Yis&  ko  aardAr  kA- 
hin  pin  le  gaye  ;  us  ke  yaLAg  Bab 
^ardAr  kAliin  aur  buzurg  aur  ia.ph 
ikatthe  Ae. 

54  Aur  PatriiB  dur  se  ua  ke  pichhe 
sariAr  kahiu  ke  dALAu  ko  Bndu  tak  ho 
livA,  aur  naukaron  ke  sAth  baithkar 
:ir'  tapne  taga, 

56  Tab  Barito  kibinwj  aur  sAri  sadr 
laajlis  De  Yisu'  par  gawahl  dhundhi, 
ki  use  jAn  ko  Diaron  ;  par  ne,  pAi. 

5ii  A^ardii  bariton  p«us  par  jliutbi 
gawA-hi  di,  par  uu  ki  gawahiAn  nmwA- 
ti.j  u  Ihiij- 

57  Tab  ba'/.on  ne  uthke  us  par  yih 
jhuthi  jawabi  di,  aur  kahA,  ki 

6iH  Ham  ne  use  kaht«  aunA  hai,  ki 
Main  b  haikal  ko,  JO  bath  sc  baui  bai, 
ijhA  dflnea,  aur  tin  dia  mvn  ck  diisri 
ko,  jc-i  hAlh  se  na  baBfl,  baiiAutjgA. 
68 


MABQU9,  XIV.  jhvijiiwih^h  k<r><.L 

59  Tia  par  bbi  uu  ki  gawahi  mu- 
wAfifj  ua  thi. 

60  Tab  sardar  kAhiu  nc  bich  rneii 
khare  ho  Yisu'  se  puchha,  KyA  tu 
kuchh  jawftb  naliin  detA?  ye  tujh  jiar 
kya  jawabi  di-t,e  bainV 

CL  l'ar  wuh  chup  nihi,  aur  kuchh 
jawAb  ua  diy.l  Pliir  aanlAr  kAhiu  ne 
us  se  piichhA,  aur  us  se  kaliA,  KyA  ti'i 
Misili,  as  Muliarak  kA  l*tA  bot? 

(Ili  Yi.sii'  M  us  N  kaha,  Main  wubi 
luin  ;  aur  tum  Ibn  i  A'dam  ko  Alq_adir 
kedahiue  bath  baithe,  aur  Asinin  ke 
bAdalon  par  Ate  dekhoge, 

«3  Tab  sardar  kAbiu  ne  apne  kapre 
pbArke  kahA,  Ah  hanien  aur  jiaivali 
kyi'darkAr  liain? 

(34  Tum  no  yih  kufr  miua;  tum  ko 
kyA  ma'lom  hotA  hai?  Un  BHhhon  ne 
fatwA  uiyA,  ki  wuh  qatl  ke  laiu  luii. 

(J5  Tab  kitne  ua  par  thiiknc,  aur  us 
ka  inuiib  dln'unpne,  aur  use  plninse 
mArne,  aur  uae  kahno  lage,  Nubiiwat 
se  khabar  de:  aur  uaukaroii  ne  liAth 

U80  thapere  mAre. 

66  1  .fab'  l'atrus  niclie  ddlaii  tneri 
thA,  aardAr  kAhiu  ki  laundiem  men  u 

.  w ah;i 'j  A! ; 

07  Aur  PatruB  ko  Ag  ta>te  d*kb,- 

;r,  ua  ki  taraf  iiaaar  karke,  kabne 
lagi,  Td  bhi  Yisfi'  Nasari  ke  uAth  tha. 

68  Us  ne  yih  kabie  inkAr  kiyA,  ki 
Main  uue  nahiu  jant.a,  aur  nahin  wa- 
niajhtA  ki  tu  kyA  kaliti  hai.  Aur 
biliar  salin  ineii  gayA;  aur  murg  ne 
bang  di. 

69  Phir   wuh   laundi   uae  dekhkar 
i  se  jo  wahAn  khare  tlie  kahne  lagi, 

Yih  unhin  mon  se  ek  hai. 

'0  Us'ud   phir   inkAr   kiyA.     Aur 

iri   der    pichhe   phir  onhog   nc  ,)o 

wahia    k'nare   the,   Patms   ko   kahA, 

Saob  n'i  imb'in  nien  ee  hai,  kyiinki  ui 

Jalili,  aur  teri  holi  waisi  hl  hai. 

"1  Par  wuli  U'uat  karne,  aur  qnsam 
khAne  lagA,  aur  kahA,  ki  Main  ub 
shakhs  ko,  jis  kA  tum  alk*  karte  ho, 
[nahiti  jAnti. 


MmH  ba  Piidtits 

72  litiari  liar  murgno  bang  di.  Tab 
l'atrus  ko  wuhi  bat,  jo  Ytsii  no  tut  no 
k&hl  tiii,  yad  Ai,  ki  Peshtar  ns  «e  ki 
mnrg  do  bar  ban.K  ilu,  til  lio  bar  mori 
uikar  karega,  Tab  is  ka  gaur  karte 
kartu  wuh  roM  lagi. 

XV  BAT». 

J  OH  subh  hiii  aardar  kahinon  DO 
b'izurgon  aur  faoihon  aur  i4H 
saur  majJis  ko  aAtb.  mashwarat  karke 
Yisii'   ko   bfedb*. 


MARQUS,  XV.  V  %  ihard  hond. 

main  us  ko,  Sw  tum  Yahtidion  k  A  Kud- 
Hhah  kahto  ho,  kyA  kari'iu  ? 

1 3   VW  )ihir  chill&e,  ki  Uso  salib  de. 

1 1  Piliitua  tie  phir  UH  se  kaha,  Kyiin, 
ia  no  kyA  burai  ki  hai'''  Tab  we  aur 
bhi  ziyadu  chilli'u',  ki  U  mi  salib  de-. 

15  1  Tab  Pilot  us  ue,  loguri  ki  raza- 
maudi  chabkar,  uii  ko  liye  Bu-abbas 
ko  dibor  diyii,  aur  Yimi'  ku  kate  mar- 
ka liawile  kiya,  ki  salib  pi»r  khinoh» 


uh:   lc  jakar  jae. 


PilAtus  ke  hawAk-  kiya. 

2  PilAtus  no  us  uu  prii-hha,  Kva  Ui 
Yahu.ili.iu  ki  btdabifa  hai?  Ua  ne 
jawab  mcn  us  se  kaha,  Tii  sauh  kanta 
hai. 

y  Aur  sarddr  kahinon  no  us  par 
biihut  ni  faryaden  kin:  par  us  ue 
kucjhh  jawab  na  diyd. 

4  Tab  PUittw  m  us  rc  yih  kahke 
phir  mii.'lihil,  Kya  tii  kuchh  jawab  na- 
bin  tlctd?  dekil,  we  tujh  jar  kinu 
gawahian  dete  hain. 

5  Tau"  bhi  Yisii"'  ne  kuchh  aur  ja- 
wab na  diya,  yahan  tak  ki  PilAtus  nt- 
ta'ajjub  kiya. 

6  Aur  'id  mun  wuh  ok  qaidi  ko,  jisc 
we  chahte  the,  mi  ki  khatir  chhor  detil 
thsi. 

T  Aur  ek  abakus  BarabbAs  nauie  uu 
logon  ke  sat.ii  (j/M  ihl,  ju  iVsdd  meii 
us  ke  aharik  hiie  the,  aur  ki  (biliun  ne 
fcMulhimenklmnkiyA  thA. 

8  Tab  bblrcfcilUke  «■  n  'w  tawne 
lagi,  ki  Jaisa  tera  dastiir  hai,  waisA  hi 
haniare  waste  k ;< r. 

y  PilAtus  ne  unhon  jawab  diyd,  aur 
kaha,  Kya  tinn  uhAhto  lio,  ki  main 
rum  haru  liye  Yahudioii  ko  ItaushAh  ku 
ehhor  diin  'i 

10  Kyonki  wuh  jdntd  thA,  ki  sar- 
dar  kiUiiru itj  ue  ha.su i  se  us  ku  hawale 
kiyA  tba. 

Ll  Par  sardar  kahinon  ne  kwog  ku 
ubhard,  ki  wuh  bar'aks  un  ke  liye 
IlarabbAs  ko  chhor  de. 

L2  Tab  PilAtus  no  jawab  deke  phir 
uu  ac  kaha,  Ab  tum  kya  chahte  ho? 
69 


lfi  Aur  wipalii  ua  ku  Ufl  djtttt)  meii, 
jahan  hakim  kamabkaiua  ti isi,  lugayn:  ; 
aur  aairs  rtsita  ko  Ocatjjha  kiy.-i. 

17  Uuhuu  ne  uh  argawlni  fcttp» 

pahintic,  aur  kiiuton  ka  tdj  sajko  us  ko 
Bir  par  rakha. 

18  Aur  use  salam  karnc  \.\>z<\  ki  Ai 
Yalu'ulidij  ko  BiidshAh,  Salam! 

19  Aur  we  us  ke  sir  per  narfcaf  so 
mArte  the,  aur  ns  per  thiikte  the,  aur 
ghutue  tokko  use  sijdo  kai'lo  lho. 

20  Aur  jab  us  se  liausi  kar  chuke, 
to  us  par  so  aryawani  kapro  utire,  aur 
usi  ka  kaprd  uso  pahiiuike  salib  dene 
ku  1«  chalo." 

21  AurukshakhsQ.uriiii  ShamaVni 
uaine,  jo  Sikandar  aur  Riifus  kii  biip 
thii,  dihiit  se  lito  hiie  udhar  sc  gilsrf ; 
tmbon  ue  use  begar  pakri,  ki  us  ki 
talib  uthii  lo  chalo. 

22  Aur  wre  use  maqam  i  Guli:ut:i 
i,  jis  kA  tarjuma  Khoprl  ki  jagah 


!:»,■- 


'±'<1  Aur  mai  men  murr  milake  uso 
pfrw  ku  diya  :  juir  us  no  ua  liya. 

24  Aur    unhon    no    use   salib    par 
khSnchko  us  ko  kaprc  bante,  aur  un 

t mr  uiir'a  dtila,  ki  liar  ek  «liaklis  kya 
ya  le. 

25  Aur  tiara"  ghautA  thA,  ki  unhon 


s  ko  s 


i.  -H. 


26  Aur  nalishndma,  jo  us  par  likhii 
thi,  s.,  yih  iba,  ki  Y1II  YAIIU'DI'ON 
KA'  BA'DSIIA'II  HAI. 

27  Aur  unhon  ne  us  ke  sAth  do 
Cihoron  ko,  ek  ko  dahine  bath,  aui 
ddsre  ko  batin,  salib  per  khinchi. 


Matih  kd  salib par  jan  dena.  MAF.QUS,  XVI. 


Ut  kd  d'/n  kiiji  JinA. 


28  Tab  wiih  nariahta, 
kd,  ki  Wuhbadkdrori  mori  gind  gaji, 
pura  lidi. 

2S*  Aur  we  jo  udhar  sc  jdto  the,  air 
hiliilt;  tim,  aur  Tifa  kaliku  om  mala- 
rnat  karte  tlie,  ki  Wah,  td  p  haikal 
ko  dbdtA,  aur  tin  diu  mori  liaudtd  thd, 

30  Apne  ta,in  bacha,  aur  salib  par 
si!  n  tar  a. 

31  Isi  tirah  sarddr  kahinon  ne  bhi 
:ii  u  merj  faoihorj  ke  wiili  tbftflbe 
kart-B  hiio  kaba,  Us  ne  auron  ko  ba- 
cbaya  ;  apne  ta,in  bachd  nahin  sakti. 

32  Boni  WdU  lfcidshdh,~  Masih, 
ab  salib  par  se  ular  awe,  td  ki  iirun 
dokhen,  aur  iman  hiwrn.  Aur  inhon 
nu  bhi,  jo  ua  kesath  salib  par  khinche 
gaya,  uue  tnaldmat  ki. 

33  Aur  jab  clihatha  ghanta  hiid,  us 
sari  Bttiiarniii  jiar  andhord  obhd  gnyd, 
aur  nawen  ghante  tak  rahd. 

34  Aur  nawen  ghanto  Yisii'  bari 
awilz  eo  chilldke  bold,  Eli,  BH,  kuna 
sabarjtdiii,  jis  ki  tarjiinsa  yih  hai ;  Ai 
mere  Khudd,  ruere  Khudd,  tu  ne 
niujhe  kydn  clihora? 

35  Baze  un  merj,  jo  wahdrj  kharo 
the,  yih  sunke  bolu,  Dikho,  wuli  lli- 
yas  ko  balita  hai. 

36  Aur  «k  ne  daurko  isfanj  ko  sirke 
meij  bhiguko,  aur  ek  narknt  par  rakli- 
ko,  uso  chusdyd,  aur  kahd,  liat  tto, 
bani  dokluen  t«,  ki  Iliyds  uso  utdrue 
iwo. 

37  Tab  Yisu'  no  bari  iwiz  se  chil 
Uk*r  dam  chhor  diyd. 

38  Aur  imikal  kd  jmrda  dpar  se 
niche  tak  phat  gayd. 

3«  T  Aur  us  sdbaddr  no,  jo  ua  ke 
sainhrio  kirnya  thd,  usu  yi'm  uhilldti 
aur  dam  enhorte  dekLlCO  kulia,  ki 
Yih  Bhftkbl  saeb  ruuoh  Khudd  kd 
Beta  thd.' 

40  Wahan  kai  'aura  t  r  n  dni  sc  daki 
rabi  thm:  un  rneii  Mariyaui  Hfogda- 
lini,  aur  Mariyain  uhlioto  Ya'qfib  aur 
Yuses  ki  nid,  aur  Sahmu  thiri. 

41  Uithon  uo  jab  wuh  Jalil  merj 


tbd,  us  ki  pniraui  ki,  aur  us  ki  khid- 
mat bhi  ki  tlii ;  phir  aur  bhi  babat 
si  'mualim  thin,  jo  us  ko  sdth  Yard- 
salam  mun  ai  fliin. 

4L'  %  Aur  jab  ki  shdm  hrti,  is  liyo 
ki  taiydri  kd  diu  thd,  jo  sabt  se  pahit; 

43  Yusuf  Arimatiyd,  jo  ndmwar 
rnusbir,  aur  wuh  kliud  Khudd  ki  bad- 
■shdliat  ka  inuntasur  thd,  ayi,  aur 
dilari  se  l'ildtus  pds  jdke  Yoaii'  ki 
Idah  mingL 

44  Aur  Pildtus  ne  muta'ajjib  hokai' 
shubha  kiyd,  ki  wuh  aisd  jald  m. u 
gaya,  aur  sdbaddr  ko  bulakc  us  ->■ 
piichhd,  kyd  der  Mi  ki  wuh  mar 
gayd  ? 

45  Aur  jab  suhaddr  se  aisa  ma'lum 
kiyd  tbd,  to  lasli  Yusuf  ko  ditd  di. 

41  Aur  us  ne  mihin  siiti  kapra  mol 
liya  thd,  aur  uso  utdrku  us  ka[>re  mi 
kafndyd,  aur  ek  qabr  men,  jo  chatan 
ke  hicli  kbodi  gayl  tbi,  uso  rakhi,  aur 
us  >[abr  ko  darwdzu  par  ck  jiaith.ir 
dhalkd  diyd. 

47  Mariyam  Magdalini,  aur  Yiises 
ki  uid  Mariyam,  us  ja^ah  ko,  jahdn 
wuh  raklid  gayd,  dekh  mbi  thin. 

XVI  BA'B. 

JAB  sabt  ki  din  Kiusr  gaya.  Ma- 
riyatu  Magdiilini,  aur  Ya'.pih  ki 
ma  Mariyam  aur  Kalomo  ua  khushbu 
cbizen  mol  liu,  ia  ki  dukar  us  pir 
uiakfu. 

'J  Aur  hafte  ke  pabla  din  bahnt 
sawure  sdraj  uikalto  hiio  qabr  |iar  ain. 

3  Aur  apa»  nian  kabut*  lagin,  ki 
Hamdru  liya  patthar  ko,  qabr  ku  dar- 
wdzo  uar  so,  kauu  dhaikdegd? 

4  Jabunlioti  no  nii;dh  k  i,  to  us  rat- 
Lliar  ko  dhftftiji  hda  dekha ;  kyujiki 
wuh  bahut  bhari  tbd. 

5  Aur  qabr  mcn  jdkar  unhon  no 
ok  jairtta  ko  Siifl  'l  jima  p.ihine  dahim 
taraf  luit.ho  hiio    dokhd,  aur  gbabrd 

C  Us  ne  urihon  kahd,  Mat  ghabrdo; 


Masih  keji  uthw,  LU'QA',  I.     aur  asman  parjiine  kd  ahiual. 

Tum  Yi«u'  Ndsari  ko,  jo  salib  parjab  we  khaniOwiithe  the,  dikhdi  diyd, 
khincha  gaya,  dhundhtian  bot  wuh,  aur  vm  ki  lm-imarii  aur  sakht-'lili  pw 
ji  uthd  lini;  wuh  yahdn  nnhin;  dc-  mulamat  ki,  kyunki  we  un  ki  bdtuii 
kho  yih  jagah,  jis  men  unhon  ue  use  par,  jitihoii  M  ua  ko  ji  nthno  ke  ba'd 
rakha  thd.  luse  ilekha  t  h  d,  yaqin  na  lae  the. 

7  Ah  tum  jdo,  aur  ub  ke  shdgirdonl      16  Aur  uh  ue  unli.'ij  kahd,  ki  Tum 
ku  aur  1'iit.rus  ko  kaho,  ki  Wah  tum  J  taindm  dunyd  mim  tfke  tuli  ek  makl.- 


j  dge  Jalil  ko  jatd  hai ;  aur  jaind  ua 
m'  tumben  kahd  thd,  tum  uae  wahdn 

>l<-l;tn  !:: 

8  Aur  we  jald  nikalke  qabr  se  bhd- 
gin  ;  aur  larzish  aur  haibat  ue  unhen 
liyd;  aur  we  kisi  se  kuchh  ua  boliii, 
kydnki  darti  thin. 

9  1T  llaflo  ke  pahle  roz  wuh  sa- 
were  uthkar  pahle  Mariyain  Mug'ht- 
liui  ko,  ji.s  men  se  ua  ne  sdt  deo  ni kdle 
the,  ilikhdi  diyd. 

10  Ub  ne  jake  ua  ko  aatliion  ko, 
jo  uh  ke  liyu  gamgin  aur  rute  the, 
khabar  di. 

1 1  We  yih  sunke  ki  wuh  jitd  hai, 
aur  use  dikhai  diyd,  yaqin  na  lae. 

12  f  Ub  ke  ba'd  wuh.  dtiwri  B6rat. 
men,  uii  meri  s-e  do  ko,  jis  waqt  ki  we 
paidal  chalto  the,  aur  dihdt  ki  taml' 
jdte  the,  dikhdi  diyd. 

IA  Unhon  ni'  bhi  j;Vku  bdqi  logon 
ko  khabar  di;  magar  un  [>ar  bhi  we 
ynqiu  n  a  Ide. 

14  1T  A'khir,  wuh  uu  gydrahon  ko, 


luq  ke  sdmhue  Injil  ki  manddi  karo. 

16  Jo  ki  iiiiiin  l&td,  aur  baptisma 
pdtd  hai,  najat  pacgd:  aur  Jo  iman 
nnhin  ldtd,  ua  par  nazi  kd  hnkiii  kiya 
jdegd. 

17  Aur  we  jo  Imdn  ldenge,  uii  kn 
s.'itli  fe  'alaman-n  hongt;  ki  we  mere 
ndm  ee  deon  ko  uikdletigc;  aur  nayi 
zubdnra  bolenge  j 

18  Sampon  ko  n  t  ha  lenge  ;  aur 
agar  koi  hnlak-karnewdlf  uhiz  pN^ge, 
unhen  kuchh  nuqein  ua  boptj  W 
binidron  par  hath  rakbenge,  to  chiiup' 
ha  \toaae, 

19  *j[  Q*ru,  Khuddwaud  unhen 
aisd  farmdue  ke  ba'd  aaimln  par  utli- 
dyd  gaya,  aur  Khudd  ke  dahine  hath 
baitha/ 

20  Phir  nnhoii  ne  hdhar  jakar  bar 
jagah  manddi  ki,n.ur  Klmildwaii'i  Hath 
hoke  krim  anjdm  detd  thd,  aur  kalam 
ko,  un  rnu'aji/.orj  ke  wasile  U  fe)  9i  ke 
suiidne  ke  h-.\'<\  liote  thu,  sdbit  kiin.'i 
rabd.     A'iniu. 


LU'QA'  KI'  INJIL. 


1  BA'B.  I     3  Main   ao   bhi    mnnasih  jdnd,  ki 

CHU'liKl  bahuton  ue  kamar  bdn-isab  ko  sire  se  sahih  taur  par  daryaf't 
dhi  ki  un  kdmon  kd  jo  nlwaqi'  |  karkc  tere  liye,  ai  buzurg  Thecfllus, 

L    jC_~     .1  .-•-., ',-^A  ,*      hiiUa>      Iii'hj        li-n-'in      Ih'i    turlili    liL'luni 


hamdre  darmiyda  anjdm  hiie,  bayan 
karcn, 

2  Jis  tarah  se  unhon  ne,  jo  shurii' 
se  khud  dekhnewdle,  aur  kalam  ki 
khi(imat-karuewale  the,  liam  se  riwa- 
yat ki ; 

71 


ba  tertib  liknog, 

4  Td  ki  tii  vm  bdton  ki  haq(qat  ko, 
jin  ki  tu  ne  ta'liin  pai,  jdne. 

5  ^.TTAHUTIIYA    ke    hddshih 

j      Besodis   ke   dinon  men, 
Abij';Lli  ke   l'ariq  men    ife   Zakariydh 


EkfirMUi  U  LU'QA'P  I-  Zakariyah  ko, 

nimoclckAhinthA:  u»  Itf  joni  H4ruti:iinV    kytinki   main  bikha    hiin,    nur 
H  ln-ii.iri   raag  t*  tlii,  aur  us  kA  nam.  meri  jnni  ki  ban  'umr  Ihii. 
llisabat  tha.   "  lfl  Firishle   ne   jawab  men    U   «c 

6  We  donon  KhudA  ke  huziir  rAst-l  kahA,  Main  Jabrik  hiin.  ju  KhudA  ke 


baz,  aur  KhudAwand  ke  sar«  linki  _ 
aur  cjanunon  par  W-'aib  chalnewale 
tlie. 

7  Aur  uu  ke  larkA  na  thA,  kyi'inki 
IlisabAt  banjh  tliij  aur  doOOfl  bahu  t 
din  ke  tho. 

8  Aur  aisa  huA,  ki  jab  wuh  KhudA 
ko  busur,  apno  fario_  ki  hari  par,  kabin 
ka  karubar  kartA  tha, 

9  KAhini  ke  dastiir  par  us  ki  chit- 
thi  nikli,  ki  KhudAwand  ki  haikal 
men  jAke  khushbui  jalawe. 

]"0  Aurlogon  kl  «ari  jama'at, khush- 
biii jalate  waut,  bahar  dua  mang  rahi 
thi. 

11  Tab  us  ko  KhudAwand  ka  firiah- 
ta,  Umshhui  3fl.lo.1u?  ke.  mutah  ki 
dahini  taraf  kharA  hmt,  dikhiii  diyA. 

12  Zakariyah'  dekhkar  ghabrAyA, 
aur  babat  dara. 

13  Par  firishte  ne  us  se  kahA,  ki 
Al  Zakariyah,  mat  dar,  ki  teri  du'A 
suni  gayi,  aur  teri  joni  Uisabilt  tero 
liye  ek  beta  janegi;  tii  us  ka  nam 
Y('ili:ii]ii:i  rak  lini. 

14  Aur  tujbt!  khushi  o  khiirmmi 
bogf :  aur  bahutere  ua  ki  paidaiah  se 
kiiush  horjge. 

lfl  Kyiinki  wuh  KhudAwand  ke 
huziir  bu/,urg  boga,  aur  na  inai,  aur 
na  koi  nasha  piegA ;  aur  apni  ina  ke 
pet  hi  se  Ruh  i  Quds  se  bhar  jAegA. 

16  Aur  bani  UEMJ  men  ae  bahuton 
ko  un  ke  KhudAwand  KhudA  ki  taraf 
pherega. 

17  Aur  wuh  ua  ko  age  IliyAs  ki 
tabi'at  aur  qiiwat  ke  »Ath  chutega,  ki 
biijidadon  k*  di  Ion  ko  larkon  ki  taraf, 
aur  na-farmanbardaron  ko  raatbfeOB 
ki  dAnai  ki  taraf  phcrke,  KhudAwand 
ke  liye  ek  muata'idd  qauin  taiyar 
kara. 


huzur  kharA  rahta  hlirj  i  ««r  bhuja 
^  iya  ki  tuj'he  kaln'm,  aur  yih  khush- 
kh'abari  tujhe  dtin. 

20  Aur,dekh,tugungahojaega,nuT 
jin  din  tak  kiyili  cbizi-n  wtoi'na  bon, 
bol  na  sakegA,  la  liye  ki  tii  U  owrf 
balon  ko,jo  apcewaqt  par  puri  hoiv^i, 
yaqin  nn  kiya. 

81  Aur  ]i>g  Zakariyah  ki  rahdekhte 
the.aur  haikal  mori  ua  ke  derkarnese 
ta'ajjub  karte  tbe. 

22  Jab  wuh  bahar  dko  un  se  bol  na 
saka,  urtbon  ne  uaryAft  kiya,  ki  us  ne 
haikal  incjj  kof  roya  dekhi  thi :  aur 
wuh  un  aelahara  karta  thi,  aur  gunga 

tali  mfi, 

23  AmaWhui.kijabaiki  khidmat 
ke  din  piire  biie,  wuh  apne  ghar  gaya. 

24  Aur  un  dinorj  ke  ba'd  us  ki  juru 
IlisabAt  harnila  hui,  aur  ub  ne  panci» 
mahine  tak  apne  ta,m  yih  kahke  cbhi- 
paya,  ki, 

25  Jin  dinon  men  Khndawand  ne 
mujh  par  nazar  ki,  meru  sdth  aisd  kiya, 
ta  ki  logon  men  se  meri  sbarmindagi 
ili'ir  kare. 

26  Aur  chhathe  mahine  Jabriel 
firishta  Khuda  ki  taraf  se  Jalil  ke  ''k 
shahr  r/i'en,  ji»  ka  uAui  Nasarat  tha, 
bhejii  gaya, 

27  Ek  kunwari  ke  pas,  jis  ki  Yiisul 
namo  ek  maril  -se,  ]o  Daud  ke  ghar&ne 
se  iha,  mangni  hiii  thi;  aur  us  kurj- 
wari  kA  uAm  Mariyam  tha. 

28  Us  Grishte  ne  u»  pas*  kodal  aka 
kabA,  ki  Al  pasaudida,  salam  I  Kliu- 
dAwand  tere  sAth  :  tu  'auraton  men 
mubarak  hai. 

20  Par  wuh  uso  dekhkar  us  ki  bat 
ae  ghabrAi,  aur  soehne  lagi  ki  yih 
kaisa  saiiini  hai. 

30  Tab  tirisbto  ne  us  se  kahA,  ki  Ai 


IH  Tab   ZakariyAb   ne   firUhte  kol  Mariyam,  mat  dar;  ki  14  ne  Khudi 
kabA,  Main  is  ko  kyunkar  aach  JAa-Jke  huafir  fazl  (AyA. 


r  phir  Mariyam  ko, 


LU'QA',  I. 


31  Aur,  <iekh,  t6  hamil»  buH,  aurildi,  ki  yih  bdtog,,  jo   Kliudawaud  ki 
beta  jatiegf,  aur   ua  ki   nam   ?BU"  |  taraf  so  kahi  giijin,  puri  hongi. 


■Lkl.i-";. 

32  Wuh  bnsurg  hogd,  aur  Khudd 
Ta'dld  ki  Beta  kahldega  !  aur  Khudd- 
wand  Khudd  "us  ke  bap  Daud  ka  tak  h  t 
uuo  dega ; 

33  Aur  wuh  nada  Ya'ufib  ko  ghrtr- 
duc  ki  bddshahat  karegi;  aur  us  ki 
liadsliahat  lik Lir  as  bOB. 

34  Tab  Mariyam  ne  ririshte  bb  kahi, 
Yili  kyuukiir  boga,  jii  hal  lneii  main 
tnard  ko  nabin  jinti?  " 

35  Firishto  ne  jawdb  men  us  se 
kaliii,  ki  Ruh  i  Quds  tujb  par  utrogi, 
aur  Khudd  Ta'ili  ki  qudrat  ka  <;i.ia 
t-ujli  par  ln'iia  :  is  safaab  se  wuli  oed- 
dufl  bhi  jo  paidi  boga.  Khudd  ka  Beta 
kaliiiii-.'.'a. 

36  Aur,  dekh,  teri  rishtaddr  Bisabdt 
ko  bhi  burhape  mon  beta  honewdla 
liai ;  aur  yih  us  ka,  jo  biiijh  kaulari 
Lai.  chlialba  tiiahini  hai. 

37  Kyiinki  Khuda,  ke  ago  koi  bat 
ahlimu  nahiu. 

38  Aur  Mariyam  no  kaha,  Dikii 
Khuda wand  ki  batidi  ;  mujb  }«ir  tere 
kahne  ke  niuwatiq  howe.  Tab  fimhta 
us  ko  pas  se  chali  gaya. 

39  Aur  unhiij  diuon  men  Mariyam 
uthkar  jaldi  ae  pahamu  par  Yahiidah 
ke  ek  shahr  ko  gayi ; 

10  Aur  Zakariyah  ka  gbar  men 
ddkhil  hokcilisabit  ko  aaldin  kiyd. 

41  Aur  aisi  hiia,  ki  jonhin  Ilisabit 
no  Mariyam  ki  saldin  suni,  larka  us 
ke  pet  men  uclihal  pard;  aur  Ilisabit 
ltub  i  Quds  se  bhar  gayi : 

42  Aur  zor  se  pukarke  kahi,  ki  Tu 
'auratog  mori  mubarak  hai,  aur  teru 
pet  kd  pria!  mubarak  hai. 

43  Mere  liye  yih  kyunkar  hui,  ki 
mere  Khudawaud  ki  mi  muih  pas  di? 
ki, 

44  Dekh,  tere  salam  ki  dwiz  jonhin 
mere  kari  tak  pahunchi,  larka   mere 

-■  mej  kim-tii  so  uchlial  para. 

45  Aur  mubamk  hai  wuh  jo  [mdu 

73 


4G  Aur  Mariyam  nc  kaha,  ki  Mori 
jau  Khudawaud'  ki  barai  karti  hai, 

47  Aur  mori  nih  mere  najdt  deue- 
waio  Khudd  se  khush  hiii. 

48  Ki  ui>  ne  apni  bandi  ki  pas  t  ha!  i 
par  nazar  ki :  is  liyc,  dekh,  ab  se  liar 
zamine  ke  log  mnjh  ku  mubarak 
k&henoe. 

49  Kyunkiuane,joqudraLwaIihai, 
mere  liye  bare  katn  kiye  liniu  ;  aur  uh 
ki  nim  pak  liai. 

50  Aur  us  ki  ralim  iiu  par,  jo  ub  86 
$arte  faasj,  pu&Ut  dar  puaht  liai. 

51  U»  ne  nptie  hazii  ki  zor  dikha- 
yd;  aur  un  ko,  jo  apu  u  dil  ko  khiy.il 
men  aptie  ta,iii  hari  Baiuajhte  haiij, 
jiaroshan  k  iya. 

52  Qu.dratwair>n  ko  tak  rit  se  giri 
diyd,aur  past-lidlorj  kobuhnd  kiyi. 

53  Ub  ne  hbuklion  koathchhichiz- 
on  se  dauda  kiya;  aur  dauIatniaimY.ti 
ko  khili  hdth  bh«ja. 

54  Us  neapnc  baude  Isrdel  ko  sam- 
bhdl  liyi,  us  rahmat  ko  y  M  karke, 

55  Jo  Abirahini  aur  us  ki  aulad  par 
sadd  ko  tbin,  jaihd  us  ne  liamaro  bap- 
dddon  bo  farrciyi  tbi. 

51  j  Aur  Mariyam  tin  ruahine  ke 
qarib  us  ke  sath  rahke  npna  gbar  ko 
pli  iri. 

57  Ab  Ilisabdt  ko  janne  kd  waqt 
pabuncha ;  aur  beti  jani. 

5H  Aur  us  ke  paronion  aur  riwhta- 
ddron  ne  sund,  ki  Kbudiwaud  ne  us 
par  Iuri  rahmat  ki;  aur  unimu  ne  us 
kesdth  khusbS  ki. 

5W  Aur  yiin  h  n  d,  ki  wc  ithwcn  din 
larke  ki  khaiua  kaiue  de;  aur  M  kii 
uim  Zakariyah,  jo  OH  ke  bip  ki  th;i, 
rakhnc  lage. 

60  Par  us  ki  md  ne  jawab  men 
kahd,  ki  Nahin  ;  baiki  us  kd  nam 
Vuhannd  rakbi  jdwe. 

GL  Unhoii  u  us  so  tahi,  ki  Tere 
gharane  men  kisii  kd  yih  uaui  uahiji. 

(ki  Tab  unhon  no  us  ke  bip  ki  taraf 


Mariyam  ke  thitkfAnt  ha  ylt.       LU'QA',  II. 
ishira  kiyd,  ki  wuh  n»  kd  kyd  udm 
rakhi  chdlita  hai. 

63  Db  ne  takhtf  mangdko  likhd,  ki 
Yuhaund  uh  kd  ndin  hai.  Aur  sabhon 
ne  ta'ajjub  kiyd. 

64  Aur  usi  dam  us  ki  rnimh  aur 
zuban  khul  gayi,  nur  wuh  bolnu  laga. 
aur  Khudi  ki  ta'rif  ki. 

65  Tab  rire  Ah  pas  ku  rahuewdle 
dar  gaye:  BUI  Yaliuiiiva  ke  taTiidru 
kohistan  men  'm  sab  baum  kd  chavebd 

138  Aur  sabbon  ne,  jn  sunte  the,  apnc 
dil  men  socbkar  knhi,  ki  Yib  kuat 
larka  hogd !  Aur  Khuddwand  ki  hath 
us  piir  tua. 

67  Aur  uh  kd  bap  Zakariyah  Ruh  i 
Quds  se  bhar  gaya,  aur  nubuwat  ki 
rfib  n  kahne  laga,  ki 

68  Hamd  Khuddwand  kf,  Jo  Intel 
ki  Khudi  hai;  kyuiiki  us  ne  apne 
logon  par  nazar  ki,  »01  unlicu  uhlmt- 
ka.ro.  diyd, 

69  Aur  hjunAlB  liye  najftt  ka  sing 
Mnt  bude  I.Viiid  ke  gliar  men  se 
□ikilke  khara  kiyd ; 

70  JaisA  ns  no  apue  pak  nabiorj  ki 
luari  fat,  jo  dunyd  ke  sauri'  sc  hote 
ae,  ka  lia : 

71  Ham  ko  hainare  duskmanoD  ee, 
aur  uu  ko  hitli  se  jo  ham  se  kiua 
raklite  hain,  riliai  bakhshi ; 

72  Ta  ki  wuh  rtihiu,  jis  kd  hamdre 
bri.iwiadon  ke  ftaih  oardr  kiyd,  ki 
ftj>no  pak  *ahd  ko  ydd  nkhfl ; 

73  Usi  tjasam  ko,  jo  us  no  hamare 
bap  Abirahdm  se  ki,  ki 

74  Wuli  liatuen  yjh  degd,  ki  apne 
duahniaium    ku    hdth    ee    chhutkdrd 

ntora, 

75  'Umr  bhar  us  ko  age,  iidkizagi 
aur  sachdi  Ke,  be-khauf  ub  ki  b&odftj ' 
karen. 

76  Aur,ai  Iurku,  tt'i  Khudi  Ta'alit  kd 
nabi  kabhlcgd  :  kyuijki  tu  Khuddwand 
ke  dge  us  ki  rdhon  ko  durost  karta 
jdegdj  ki 

f  7  "H*  ke  logou  ko  najit  ki  khaba: 


Zakariy6&  M  jmMngtn. 

dewe,  jin  ao  un  ke  gunahuu  ki  inu'dfi 
howe, 

8  Jo  hamdre  Khudi  ki  khdss  rah- 
mat, se  hai ;  jis  ko  sabab  subh  ki  roshni 
upar  se  ham  tak  pahunchi, 

79  Td  ki  uu  ko  joaudheroaiirmaut 
ke  saya  murt  baithu  hain,  ror-liiii  liakli- 
she,  aur  hainari  hidayat  kara  ki  sald- 
nmti  ki  nih  par  oadam  inaron. 

80  Aur  wuh  larka  barbtd,  aur  ruh. 
en  qnwat  pdti  gaji,  aur  apnt'  ta,m 

Isrdel   par   Bihlr   katne   ke   din   taJt 
bayibdn  men  rahti. 

II  UA'B. 

AI.H;  un  dinoD  men  ydn  htid,  ki 
Qstisar  Augustus  ki  taraf  m 
liukm  uikiii,  ki  hiu-  basti  ke  logon  ke 
udui  likhe  jden. 

2  (Auryili  pnhli  istu-nawisf  t.hi,  jo 
Suriya  ke  hakiui  Qureniu»  ko  wtn|t 
iiii-ij  h<H.) 

3  Tab  har  ek  apue  apiifl  ahahr  ku 
uim  likliain.'  cbald. 

4  Aur  Yusuf  bui  Jalil  ke  sbahr 
NisaMt  st,  Yiiln'uliya  mi'n  Difid  ko 
sbdtt  ko,  jo  Buitlaham  kahldtd  hai, 
gaya ;  ia  liye  ki  wuh  Ddiid  ke  gharane 
aur  aidad  ko  thd ;  ki 

5  Apni  ruaugetarMariyam  ke  sdth, 
jo  hdmila  thi,  udiu  likkdwe. 

6  Anraisa  hr.ii.ki  j;il>  wewahdn  tLe, 
ua  ke  janne  ke  din  pure  hiio. 

7  Ani-  i|-i.-  ;  i.l  n'  ii  l  ii.  r?,  i.nii.  ;n  i 
us  ko  kajiru  men  lapetke  charui  men 
rakhd;  kyiinki  uu  ko  sard  men  jagah 
na  mili. 

8  Uh  miilk  men  garariye  the,  jo 
i  r  i  r  i  i  ■  I :  L  l  i  awfl  ralite,  aur  rdt  ko  liari  ban 
apue  jhund  ki  chauki  karie  ihe. 

9  Aiu,  deklio,  ki  Khudawand  kd  ek 
flriabte  un  par  sibir  hai,  aur  Khudd- 
waucl  kd  ntb"  un  ke  chacgird  chainka  ; 
aur  wo  nihdyat  dar  gaye. 

10  Tab  Srisht'e  uu  unben  kabd,  Mat 
dii.ro:  kvuijki,  dek  bu,  main  tumhep 
bati  kbushi  ki  khabar  detd  liun,  jo  MD 
Io;t(>ij  ke  waslc  liogl,  ki 

11  Daud  ku  abahr  men  dj  tumhdre 


Mrfih  ka  taim'htd. 


H;'Q,A',  II. 


Masih  kd  kfattna  ho; 


liye  ek  Najdt-dcnewdlapaida  htid ;  wuh  jera,  ya  kabiitar  ko  do  bacl:,chequrbaiii 


Masih  Khuddwaud  hai, 

12  Aur  tumhdre  liye  yihi  pati  hai ; 

ki  tam  ok  larke  ko  kapre  men  lapeta 

.i  iiiL-ii  rakha  ln'ia  |. . 

YA  Aur  ek  bargi  us  firishte  fee  Bdth 
asmdni  lashkar  ki  ek  jami'at  Khuda 
ki  ta'rif  karti,  aur  yih  kahti  zahir  bui, 
ki 

1+  Khuda  ko  dHmdu  par  ta'rif,  aur 
zaiuin  par  saldmati,  aur  adtnion  se 
razauiaudi  howe. 

15  Aur  aisa  iiiia,  ki  jab  firishtc  un 
ko  pas  ao  asinku  |Hir  guye,  garariyon 
Ki'  apu  owg  kaha,  ki  Ao,  bara  liuii- 
lahaui  tak  jaen,  aur  is  bit  ko  jo  bui 
hai,  jis  ki  Khudawaud  uu  haiucij 
khabar  di  hai.  deklien. 

Itj  Tab  unhorj  nu  jaltlt  Jtke  Mari- 
yam,  aur  Yusuf  ku,  aur  us  larke  ko 
charui  men  rakin'i  bud  paya. 

17  Aur  dekhke  us  bdt  ko,  jo  is 
larke  ke  hiiqq  nieii  un  se  kalii  gayi  thi, 
nbaUdyi. 

ld  Aur  Bab  yunnewilon  no  in  baton 
se,  jo  garariyon  ne  unhen  kahin,  ta'aj- 
jub  kiyd. 

l'.)  I  'ar  Mariyam  ne  in  sah  bdton  ki 
apne  dil  men  gaur  karke  ydd  rakhd. 

20  Alir  garariyo  in  sab  baton  k' 
sabab,  jo  unhon  ne  sunirj,  aur  jaisi  m 
n  kahi  gayi  thin,  dekhin,  Khuda  ki 
ta'rif  aur  barai  karte  htie  ph 

21  Aur  jab  dth  din  pure  hiie,  ki 
larke  ka  khat.na  ho,  us  ka  ndmYISU'" 
rakhd  gaya,  jo  us  ke  pet.  ruerj  panie  ke 
dgc  lirisihtu  ne  rakha  thd, 

22  Aur  jab  Musa  ki  s  ha  r  i 'a  t  ki 
rauwa6q  us  ko  pak  honc  ke  dia  pure 
hue,"  wc  im  krko  ko  Yarusakm  rnen 
hie,  ti  ki  Khudawaud  ke  age  hassir 
kareg  ; 

2o  (Jaiaa  ki  Khndawanrl  ki  slsari'at 
men  likhd  hai,  ki  liar  ek  palauthd 
brka  Khudawaud  ko  liye  u  tak  ha  u  s 
kahlaegd ;) 

-l  Aur  ki  Khudawand  ki  shari'at 
ki-  hnkm  ke  muwdttq,  Qumrion  kd  ek 


karerj. 

2y  Aur,  dekho,  ki  Yarusalaio  men 
SharuaYni  nim  ek  shtikhs  tlid,  jo 
rdstbdz,  aur  diiiddr,  aur  Israel  ki 
tasalli  ki  rdh  dekhti  tlid,  aur  Riil  t  i 
Quds  us  par  tlii. 

26  Us  ko  Mh  i  Quds  uo  khabar  di 
thf,  ki  jab  tak  Khudawaud  ko  Masih 
ko  ua  <iekh  le,  maut  ko  na  dektugii. 

27  Aur  wuh  Huh  ki  hiddyat  se 
baikal  men  iya:  aur  jis  waqt  mii  bap 
us  larke  YisiV  ko  andar  Idte  tlie,  ta  ki 

ke  bye  shar'a  ke  daatiir  par  'amal 

28  Us  ne  use  apue  hdthon  par  uthd 
liyd,  aur  Khudd  ki  ta'rif  karke  kaki, 

29  Ai  Khuddwand,  ab  td  apue  bando 
ko,  apne  kalam  ke  muwah^,  saldmati 

rukhsat  detd  hai : 

30  Kyuuki  mori  dnkhon  no  teri 
iiajat  dekhi, 

8]  Jo  tu  no  sab  logon  ke  age  taivdr 
klhai; 

12  Qaumon  koroshan  karne  ke  liyo 
ek  mir.aur  apne  log  Israel  ke  liye  jalai. 

38  Tab  Yusuf  aur  Yisu'  ki  mi  uu  un 
bdton  so,  jo  us  ku  haq<i  meij  kahi  gayiu, 
ta'ajjub  kiyd. 

34  Aur  Shama'iin  ne  unhetj  du'd  di, 
ir  us  ki  ma  Mariyam  ko  kahd,  Dekh, 

yih  Israel  men  bahuton  ke  glrne  aur 
uthue  ke  liye,  aur  khilaf  kabno  ke 
uishdn  ke  Waste,  rakha  liud  hai ; 

35  (Aur  talwdr  teri  jdn  ke  andar 
bhi  guzar  jdegi,)  ta  ki  baliuLon  ko  dilon 
ke  khiyal  khul  jaeu. 

36  Aur  AVer  lio  {fhardnc  sc  Annd 
nam  Fdniiel  ki  beti  ek  uabiya  tbi,  jo 
bubut  burhi  titi :  aur  as  ne  apue  kuri- 
waripau  se  sdt  baras  ek  khasam  ke 
sath  iiibdh  kiyd  thd ; 

37  Aur  wuh  bcwa  qarib  chaurasi 
baras  ki  thi,  ki  haikal  m  Judft  na  bui, 
pai  rOU  rakhne,  aur  du'a  mangue  se 
rat  din  bandagi  karti  rahi. 

3tt  Usneuai  ghari  akar  Khudawaud 


Yuhanna  H  LU'QA',  ITT.  wa'iz  ke  fatn 

ka  shukr  kiyii,  aur  un  sab  ko,  jo  Yarv'i-  aur  Khuda  ke  aur  insan   ko  uazdik 


salam   men  ulihutkare  ki  rah  dekhte 
the,  us  ki  babat  k'aha. 

39  Aur  jab  we  KhudAwand  ki 
shari'at  ke  nmwAfiq  sab  kuchh  kar 
chukc,  to  Jalil  men  apue  shahr  Nasarat 
ko  phir  gaye. 

40  Aur  Uirka  barhtA,  aur  hikmat 
bharkarub  menquwat  pAtarahA:  aur 
KhudAwand  ki  fad  uh  par  tha. 

'  41  Vs  ke  ma  bAp  har  baras  'id  i 
fasali  iiuti  Yanisalam  ki'  jate  the. 

42  Alir  lab  wah  Urah  LuiraskAhuA, 
aur  we  'id  ke  cku-tur  par  Yarusalain  ko 
gaye  the, 

43  Aur  uu  dinon  ko  pur.i  kiya  tha, 
jiid  phirne  lage.wuh  larkA  Yisu'  Yaru- 
salain men  rali  gaya;  par  Yusuf  aur 
us  ki  ma  ue  na  jAnA. 

44  Baiki  yih  samajhke  ki  wuh 
qiitile  meii  hai,  ek  man/.il  gaye ;  aur 
IUH  ritduadAron  aur  jAn-palLclaui>ii 
men  sah  kahin  dlnlndhA. 

45  Aur  ua  pakar  us  ki  talash  har 
kahin  kartu  hue  Yanisakm  ko  phire. 

4(1  Aur  aisA  hria.  ki  unhou  uo  Un 
roa  piehho  nse  haikal  men  ustadon  ke 
Web.  baithe  hile,  un  ki  aunte,  aur  un  a» 
tsuwal  karte  payA. 

47  Aur  sab  jo  us  ki  sunte  the,  u 
ki  samajh  aur  uh  ke  jawaborj  se  diiuj 
the. 

43  Tab  w<3  use  dokhkar  hairAn  hfio 
aur  us  ki  ma  ne  us  se  kaha,  Ai  Bute, 
kis  liye  tu  ne  ham  se  aisa  kiya  V  dekh, 
tari  !>Ap  aur  main  kurhte  hiie  tujhe 
dhundhte  the. 

4!f  "Us  ne  unhen  kari  A,  Kyiin  tum 
nmjhe  dhiindbte  the?  kya  tum  ne  ua 
jiiua,  ki  nmjhe  apne  bdp  ke  yahan 
ruhna  zanir  hai? 

50  Par  we  is  bat  ko,  jo  us  ne  nnlien 
kahi,  na  samjho. 

51  Aur  wuh  un  ke  sath  rawina 
hokar  Nasarat  men  ayA,  aur  un  ku 


maui  liliyal  tuwj,  laraqqi  karia  gaya. 

ih  u  a' k 

A  B  Tibcrius  Qaisar  ki  badshahat  ko 
ptttidrahweti  baraa,  jab  1'undus 
PiLAtus  Yalui'liya  ka  hakim,  aur 
Herodis  Jalil  ki  cbauthai  ka,  aur  01 
ka  bhiii  Fail  bus  Itiiriya  ki  cbauthai 
aur  Trakonitis  ke  umlk  ka,  aur 
LisAniyas  Abileno  ki  cbauthai  k  a 
hakim  tha, 

'S  Ji»  mqt  AnnAs  aur  Qayafas  sar- 
dar  kahin  the,  Khuda  ka  kalam  ha- 
yaban  men  Zakariyili  ke  bete  Yu- 
hanna ko  pahuneba. 

'A  Aur  wuh  Yardan  ke  eire  aspas 
ke  mulk  men  ake  gunahon  ki  muafi 
ke  iiye  tauba  ko  baplisma  ki  inaiiadi 
kari  a  raha ; 

4  Ghunanchi  Yas'aiyah  nabi  ki 
balon  ke  daftar  men  yih  liat  likhi  bal, 
ki  llayiibiiu  men  uk  pukarnewale  ki 
awaz  hai,  ki  Tum  Khudawand  ki  rah 
ko  durust  karo,  aur  us  ke  rdstun  ko 
sidha  karo. 

5  Har  ek  garha  bhara  jae^a,  aur  wab 
jwiharaur  tile  niche  kiyaJHEBgfr)  WB 
{«riil  jagahori  ttdhi,  aur  bihar  rahen 
baribar  banen^i ; 

6  Aur  liar  uk  inaan  Khuda,  ki  najat 
dskbegi, 

7  Tab  ua  ne  un  gurohog  ko,  jo  uh 
se  baptisma  pane  ko  nikli  thin,  kulia, 
Ai  sampon  ki  nasi,  tumben  kis  ue 
butayil  ki  anewate  ga»ib  se  bhago  ? 

8  Tas  tauba  ku  laiq  mewe  lao,  anr 
apne  dilon  rnon  khiyal  na  karo  ki 
Abirabam  hamara'  bap  hai;  kyinjki 
main  tumhen  kahti  hun,  ki  Khuda 
Abirahaiu  keliye  iri  pattharon  se  larke 
paida  kar  sakta  hai. 

9  Aurdarakhton  ki  jar  pnr  kulhdri 
taklii  hai :  ao  jo  darakht  aehcbhe  phal 
nahin  lata,  kata  aur  'ag  merj  dala  jali 
hai. 


liibi'  raha.     Aur  us  kima  ne  yih  sabi     10  Tab  un  gurohon ne  us  se piichha, 
baten  apne  dil  mon  iskbirj.  Iki  Phir  ham  kyi  karen? 

52  Aur   Yistf,   hikmat,   aur  qadd,  f     11  Ua  no  un  ee  JftwM  mou  kahA,  ki 


ihuru'  kanui. 
Jis  ke  c. 


LCQA\  III. 


Masih  k'i  nate&tl&ma. 


kurto  bon,  uh  ko,  jia  ke  pds  I     23  Aur  Yisti'  ap  baras  tis  ek  kd  hiia 

i      W„+     J...     „...    ;;..    i.„    „i     '  :_v     .1 ji  li_/  ,..,,. 


nahin   hai,  bant  di? ;   aur  jis  ke  pds 
khdne  ko  ho,  wub  bhi  aiea  hi  karc. 

12  Tab  mnhsul-lciipwdlo  bhi  bap- 
tisma  pane  ko  de,  aur  us  se  kahd,  ki  Ai 
ustad,  bani  kya  karet)  ? 

13  Us  ae  un  «c  kahd,  ki  Tumhare 
liye  jo  muqarrarliai,us  seziydda  nalo. 

14  Sipdhion  ne  bhi  us  se  puchha, 
ki  Hani  kya  karen?  Us  ne  unhcn 
kahd,  ki  Na  kisi  par  zulm  karo,  na 
iRtunat  l&g&o  ;  aur  apne  rozine  par 
rdzi  raho. 

15  Aur  jab  log  mun?nxir  the,  aur 
Bab  aptie  dil  mcii  Yiihannd  ki  babat 
Bochte  tho,  ki  kya  wub  Masih  hai  ki 
nal  iiii ; 

Hi  Yiihannd  ne  un  sab  ke  jawdh 
raen  kahd,  ki  Main  lo  tumben  pani  sc 
haptisnia  deta  kurj  ;  ]iar  111 1 1  j  1 1  m  t' k 
qawitar  dtd  hai,  jis  ki  juti  ko  band 
kholne  ko  main  ldiq  nahig  hiiii  :  wub 
tumben  l!uh  i  Quds  aur  dg  ae  baptisma 
degd. 

17  Us  ke  hiith  men  sup  hai,  aur 
wuh  apno  khalihdn  ku  khubwir  kar- 
ena, aur  gehtin  ko  apni  kothi  mag 
jam'a  karogd  ;  par  bhfisi  ko  us  dg  men, 
jo  nahin  bujhti,  jal&wttga. 

18  Aur  wuh  logon  ko  nasihat  kf 
bahut  aur  hdwn  karta,  aur  khushkba- 
bari  dctd  raba. 

19  Par  Htrodli  chauthdi  Uo  hrtUim 
ne,  apne  bhdi  Fail  bus  ki  joni  Hero- 
iliyas  ke  sabab,  aur  un  sab  badion  ke 
liye  jo  Herodis  ne  kin,  Ytihanua  se 
ruaiamat  uihdke, 

20  Sab  par  yih  ziydda  kiyd,  ki  Yii- 
hannd ko  qaid  rakhd. 

21  Aur   aisa    hiid,  ki  jab  sab   log 


jab  shurti'  kiyd,  aur  (jaisd  ki  guman 
tha)  wuh  Yusuf  kd  bon  thd ;  aur  wuli 
Heli  kd, 

24  Aur  wuh  Matthdl  kd,  aur  wuh 
Lcwi  kd,  aur  wuh  Mnlkhi  kd,  aur  wuh 
Yannd  kd,  aur  wuh  Yusuf  kd, 

25  Aur  wuh  Mattdthiyds  kd,  aur 
wuh  Amus  kd,  aur  wuh  Kadin  kd,  aur 
wuh  Asli  kd,  aur  wuh  Naggai  ki, 

26  Aur  wuh  Mdliata  kd,  aur  wuh 
Mattdthiyds  kd,  aur  wuh  Sima'i  kd, 
aur  wuh  Yusuf  kd,  aur  wuii  Yiidd  kd, 

27  Aur  wuh  Yuhmind  ka,  aur  wuh 
Resd  ka,  nur  wuh  /arubdbal  kd,  aur 
wuh  Saldtiel  kd,  aur  wuh  Nol  k.i, 

28  Aur  wuh  Malki  kd,  aur  wuh 
Addi  kd,  aur  wuh  Wusdm  kd,  aur  wuh 
Almn.liitn  kd,  aur  wuh  'Er  kd, 

29  Aur  wuh  Ynses  kd,  aur  wuh 
Ili'azar  kd,  aur  wuh  Yorim  kd,  aur 
wuh  Matthdt  k  d,  aur  wuh  Lcwi  kd, 

30  Aur  wuh  Shama'un  kd,  aur  wub 
Yahuddh  kd,  aur  wuh  Yusuf  ka,  aur 
wuh  Yiindn   kd,   aur  wuh    lliydijim 

31  Aur  wuh  Malaya  kd,  aur  wuh 
Mainan  kd,  aur  wub  Mattathd  kd,  aur 
wuh  Ndtan  kd,  aur  wah  DAud  ka. 

32  Aur  wuh  Yassf  kd,  aur  wuh 
'Obed  kd,  aur  wub  Bo'az  kd,  aur  wuh 
Salmon  kd,  aur  wuh  Nahsun  kd, 

33  AuTwuh'Aminaddbkd,  aur  wuh 
Ardm  kd,  aur  wuh  Hasroni  kd,  aur 
wuh  Pharas  kd,  aur  wuh  Yahuddh  ka, 

34  Aur  wuh  Ya'tjiib  ka,  aur  wuh 
Iz,hdq  ka,  aur  wuh  A  hi  rahim  kd,  aur 
wub  Tarah  kd,  aur  wuh  i'ahur  kd, 

35  Aur  wuh  Sdrnkh  kd,  aur  wuh 
Ra'ri  kd,  aur  wuh  Fdlik  kd,  aur  wuh 


haptisnia  pd  chuke  the,  aur  YisuV  bhi  'i'br  kd,  aur  wuh  Silah  kd, 


baptisma  pakar  du'a  mang  rahd  tha, 
dsmdn  khul  gaya, 

22  Aur  Ruh  i  Quds  jism  ki  aurat 
men,  kahutar  ki  tarah,  ua  par  utri,  aur 
asuidn  ae  ek  dwaz  di,  jo  yih  kahti  thi, 
ki  Tu  merd  piydrd  Beta  hai;  tujh  se 
i;;ain  rd/i  lu'.n. 


3(5  Aur  wuh  Qiudn  kd,  aur  wuh 
Arfaksad  kd,  aur  wuh  Sim  kd,  aur 
wuh  Niih  kd,  aur  wnh  I-amak  kd, 

37  Aur  wuh  Mathiiaildkd,  aur  wuh 
Uanuk  kd,  aur  wuh  Ydrid  ka,  aur  wuh 
MaliLilaliui  kd,  aur  wuh  Qindn  kd, 

38  Aur  wuh  Anua  kd,  aur  wuh  Set 


Musik  Shfiitdn  w  dzmfiya j\itd.  LU'OA',  IV, 


Musih  ku  mi'k  }■■ 


ka,  aur  wuh  A'dam  ka,  aur  wuh  Khu- 
.1.1  kd  tim. 

IV  BA'B. 

AUR  Visi*  Ruh   i  Quda  bc  bharA 
MA  Yardan  se  phirA,  aur  Jtiili 
ki  rahnuruAi  «o  bayAbAn  raets  gaya, 

2  Aur  cbAlis  din  tak  ShaitAn  se 
limiayi  gaya.  Aur  un  dinop,  men. 
kitchh  na  kliAyA :  jali  wuh  dia  purc 
Inic,  akhir  fa>bUkfii  Mi. 

3  Tab  Shait4,ii  ne  ua  se  kaiti,  ki 
A(H  t.ri  Khuila  ka  Befi  hai,  to  is 
) miliar  ku  kali,  ki  l'.iti  bau  jAe. 

4  Yisu'  uc  jawab  uicjj  us  se  kahA, 
LikhA  hai,  ki  IntAn  siif  roti  se  tiah'ta, 
baiki  KhudA  ki  har  ek  bAt'se  jitA  hai. 

5  Aur  Bhaitan  no  usc  ek  i'mche 
]>ahAr  par  le  jAke  dunyA  ki  siri  bid- 
siiahaten  ok  dam  mert  dikhAin. 

6  Aur  ShaiiAn  ne  US  so  kaha,  ki 
Main  yib  sArA  ikhtiyAr,  aur  un  ki 
shAn  oshaukat,  tuihe  diirjga:  kyfVnki 
yili  Timili  ko  souipA  gaya  hai ;  aur  jia 
ko  chAhtA  hi'ia,  dotA  hun. 

7  Pan  agar  tii  mrijlie  flijda  kare,  sah 
lori  hogA. 

8  Yisu'  ne  use  jawAb  men  kahA,  ki 
Ai  ShaitAn,  more  sAmbne  se  jA:  ky- 
iiyki  likbA  hai,  ki  Tu  KhudAwand 
apue  KhudA  ko  eijda  kar,  aur  sirf  usi 
ki  handali  kar, 

9  Wuh  use  Yarusalam  inen  lAyi, 
aur    haikal    ke   kangurc    uar    k  h:  . 
karke  us  «c  kahA,  Agar  tu  KhudA  ka 
Beta  bai,  to  fcjpae  ta,in  J'abAn  se  girA 

10  Kyunki  UkhA  hai,  ki  Wuh  tere 
liye  apue  nrisiiton  ko  1'armAwegA,  ki 
turi  khnlwdAri  karen  : 

11  Aur  tujlio  hatbon  par  utba  Jcn, 
kahin  aifA  na  ho  ki  tere  p&nw  ko  jtat- 
thar  se  tlics  laga. 

1  'J  Yi'-itL'  m;  jawab  nicn  use  farmAyA, 
ki  kahA  gayA  hai,  Tii  KhudAwand 
apne  KhudA  ko,  mat  AzmA. 

IH  Aur  Shaitftti  jali  tamAm  AzmA- 
ifili  kar  chukA,  muddat  tak  ub  ne  dur 
nhi- 


14  ^  Aur  Yieii'  Mh  ki  uiiwat  se 
.Talil  ko  filiira;  aur  sAreaspAa  kemulk 
men  u  ki  abahrat  Ml 

15  Aur  wuh  un  ko  'ihAdat.khanon 
men  ta'Jfm  detA  raba,  aur  sah  us  ki 
tii'rirkarte  the. 

1G  f  Phir  wuh  NAsarat  ko,  jahAn 
parwarifth  j:Ai  thi,  AyA,  aur  apue  dastur 
DAI  Ifcbt  kfldlfl  'ikidalkliaueniengaya, 
aur  parhne  ko  fcbnrA  had, 

17  Anr  Vas'aivah  DtM  ki  kltibu 
ko  di  gayi.  Aur  kitAb  kholkar  wuh 
maqAm  j>AyA,  jabAn  yib  likhA  tha,  ki 

18  Kliudawaiid  ki  HCih  mnjli  par 
hai ;  us  n«  is  liye  mu.jht>  Masih  kiyA, 
ki  garibon  ko  khusliklialiaii  dan ; 
mujh  ko  bhejA,  ki  tflte  dilon  ko  du- 
niht  kariin,  qaidii>u  ko  chhiUne,  aur 
andhou  ko  dekhue  ki  kliabar  sunAiin, 
aur  jii  bep.Fii  ae  gbAyal  hnin  unhfln 
cbhurAr.u, 

19  Aur  KhudAwanu  ko  sal  i  mailbiil 
ki  manAdi  kaniii. 

20  Aur  kitAb  hnnd  karke,  aur  kiid- 
rmtt-kan]e\v.i]fi  ko  dekfl,  wuh  baith 
gaya.  Aur  aalihon  ki  Aiikhen,  j  n  'iba- 
datkhAne  men  tbe,  us  par  lagi  tbJo. 

2i  Tab  wuh  uniirn  kjluU  iftgi,  ki 
A'j  yih  navishta,  jo  turo  ne  sunA,  piira 
hi:L 

22  Aur  sab  ne  us  par  gawAbi  di,  aur 
uu  fa^l  ki  bAton  se,  jo  ua  ke  mitOD  se 
tiifcaili  lin'n,  ta'ajjnh  karke  kahA,  K  ya 
yih  Yusuf  kA  l>eLa  nahiu? 

23  Ua  ne  unb'eri  kali  A,  ki  Tuni  be- 
sbakk  yih  masai  mujh  par  kahoge,  ki 
Ai  hakim,  apue  ta,in  changA  kar;  jo 
jo  ham  ne  sunA,  ki  tujb  se  Kafaraa- 
bunt  men  hdA,  yahAn  apne  watan  men 
bhi  kar. 

24  Par  us  ne  kahA,  Main  tam  H 
nab  kahti  bos,  ki  Koi  nabi  apne.  wa- 

meji  miwjbnl  unhhj  hobi. 

">  [..-km  nuiin  l.uin  m  sach  kahta 
Ma,  ki  HiyAs  kedlnon  men,  jab  sarhe 
tin  baras  AsniAn  band  rahA,  yahAn  tak 
ki  siri  sarzamin  nien  imrA  kAl  parA, 
bahut  si  bewAen  IsrAel  moij  thin; 


Ptofrtu  /.i  t&t  /.'f  changA  hima.  LU'Q 
26"  Par  IliyAa  im  men  eg  kisf  ke  pds 

na  bheji  paya,  magar  Saidike  Saraptd 

meij  ek  I-"/  6  ke  j i  Aa. 
27  Aur  i1-:  :    nabi  ke  waqt  Israel 

men  bah  u  t  sc  korhf  tho ;  par  un  men 

n    koi,  Na'aajin    Suriyani    ke  siwa, 

cliaiiRti  na  hud. 

2B  Tab  wo  jo  'ibadat  khdne  men  t.he, 

ua  balon  ku  a uu  1.0  lii  gussa  se  bhar 

29  Aur  Uthc,  aur  usc  shahr  ke  bi- 
lur nilkdlke  ua  pahdri  ki  choti  uar, 
jis  [Kir  :iti  kA  shahr  baua  tha,  lu  chale, 
ici  use  «ir  ke  bbal  giri  iiua. 

30  Lekin  wuli  uu  ke  bich  se  nikalke 
r:i  w  Ali  a  h  u  d, 

31  AurKafamahummeg.jo  Jafil  kti 
ek  shahr  hai,  iya,  aur  sabt  ko  dinon 
men  unhen  ta'lim  diyd  kiyi. 

32  Aurwe  uu  kl  ta'lim  sc  dang  biie: 
kvunki  us  kA  kalam  oudrat  ke  sath 
tha. 

33  T  Aur  'ihAdatkhAna  men  ek 
shakhs  iba,  jis  men  sbaitan  ki  uApdk 
n'iii  thi;  wuh  bari  awdzsc  yih  kabkar 
chillaya,  k  i 

34  Ai  l'isu'  JfAsarf,  chbnr  de;  ham- 

S  kya  kain?  tii  hamon  balik 
karne  iya  hai;  main  jAntA  hiiti  ki  tii 
kauu  hai ;  Khuda  ki  QuuUua.  " 

35  Tisu'  ne  uwe  dhamkdke  kahd, 
Chup  rah,  aur  ua  men  se  nikal  jA.  Aur 
wuh  shaitdrj  uao  bich  men  patuk  k  e  us 
■e  nikal  gaya,  aur  u»  ko  nuu^iu  na 
jnlnincb&yi. 

3ti  Aur  Eab  nihdyat  bairan  hue,  aur 
a  pas  mon  kahuo  lape.  ki  Yib  kaisd 
kalAtn  hai  f  ki  wuh  ikhtiyar  aur  qud- 
rat  se  ndpdk  ruhon  par  hukm  kan.d 
hai,  aur  we  nikal  jati  bsin. 

37  Aur  dspds  ke  mulk  ki  har  jagah 
mon  us  ki  ahuhrat  phaill. 

38  %  Pliirwuh  'ibadatkbAnoscuth- 
kar  Shama'un  ko  g  h  a  r  gayA.  Niiama- 
'un  ki  bAs  ko  bari  tap  charhi  thi ;  aur 
uiihon  na  us  ko  liye  ua  se  'arz  ki, 

39 "Tab   khard   hoke    us    ki    taraf 
ibukd,  aur  tap  ko  dhamkayd,  to  utar 
79 


A',  V.     MacUUon  kd  gol  ha/h  !.,,,..,',. 

fayi;  aur  us  ne  jhat  nthkc  un  k  i 
_hidmat  ki. 

40  H  Aur  jab  fciiraj  diilttd  thi,  m 
sah,  jin  ke  yahiiu  marfa  tbe,  jo  tarah 
tarah  ki  bitnariuii  men  gitiftdr  the,  uu 
ko  us  nas  Ide;  ub  db  un  men  se  har 
ek  liar  hdth  rikljkar  unhen  cbjuigd 
kiya. 

41  Aur  bahuton  men.  so  shaydein 
chilldkar  yili  kahke  nikal  gaya,  ki  Ta 
Masih  Khuda  k:i  Be(,A  hai.  l'ar  uh  ir> 
i.lhaj|]kak:u-  un  ko  bulno  ua  diyd:  ki 
utibori  uc  ua  palicliand,  kiwuli  Masih 
hai. 

42  Aur  jab  din  hiiA,  wuh  nikalkar 
ek  wirdne  men  gayd :  aur  log  use 
dhundlitc  hue  ub  pia  do,  aur  u»e  rokd, 
ki  un  ke  piw  ae  na  jde. 

43  Par  us  ne  unbon  kahd,  Mujhc 
i-.avur  hai  ki  aur  sliahron  men  bhi 
Kbudd  ki  bddshihat  ki  khusb-klia- 
bari  dtin;  kyimki  main  ia  hi  Jiye 
bheji  gayd. 

44  Aur  wuh  JnJil  ke  'ihidatkhdtion 
mes  nianddi  kartd  raba. 

V  BA'B. 

A  ISA'  hild,  ki  jab  Khudd  ke  kaldm 
auune  ko  log  us  par  giro  parto 
the,  wuh  Ganncsarat  ki  jhiJ  ke  kinare 
kbuni  tbd, 

2  Aur  ub  ne  jhil  ke  kiuare  do  kSsh> 
ti  lagi  dekhi:  par  machlwe  un  par 
se  utarke apne  jal  dbo  taha  the. 

3  Ue  dc  un  kishtion  meri  se  ok  par, 
jo  Shama'un  ki  thi,  eharhko  us  uc 
ilarkhwdst  ki,  ki  kamire  sg  tbori  bata 
le  cLalo.  Aur  wuh  baithkn  logon  ko 
kishti  par  ae  ta'lim  deno  lagd. 

4  Aur  jab  kalam  kar  chukd,  to 
Shama'un  se  kahd,  ki  Gahre  men  le 

bal,  aur  tum  alukiir  ke  liye  apne  jal 
dalt>. 

5  Sharua'Gn  ne  jawab  men  ub  ae 
kahd,  ki  Ai  SAbib,  ham  ne  adri  rit 
miliiiiit  ki,  par  kuchh  na  jiakru:  ma- 
gar  tera  karue  se  jdl  ddltd  biin. 

6  Aur  jab  unhon  nc  yih  kiya,  tu 


Eh  mvjlfy  M  I.U'Q 

RUbchhlkg  k;i  bara  gol  gber  iyi:  aisa 
ki  uu  ka  jal  plmtiu;  laga. 

7  Tab  uuhon  n*;  apne  sathfon  ko, 
ja  diisri  kiahti  par  the.  ishara  kiyd  ki 
Ake  un  kl  madad  karun.  We  ie,  aur 
donoj  kisktuuj  uisi  bhardin,ki  diibne 
labili. 

8  Shama'on  Patrus  ne  yib  dekhkar 
Yifii'  ke  pdnwon  par  girku  kali  d,  Ai 
Kliuddwand,  meru  \>6&  se  ja;  ki  main 
gunakgdr  hi'm. 

i)  Kyiinki  un  rn&chhlion  ko  shikdr 
se,  jo  unhon  ne  pakri  thin,  wuh,  aur 
wc  aab  jo  uh  ke  sdth  the,  hairdn  the  : 

10  Aur  Kahfldt  ke  beto  Ya'qub  aur 
Yuharma  bhi,  jo  Shama'un  ke  eharik 
tli«,  hairdn  tho.  Tab  YimV  ne  Kha- 
ma'riu  ko  knhd,  Mat  dar;  is  dam  se 
iti  admtog  ka  Khikdr-karnewaJd  bogd, 

]  1  Wc  kishtion  ko  kanaro  par 
kliineh  l!te,  aur  wab  kuchh  ehhorfee 
uh  ke  pichbe  chale. 

12  4  Aur  aifia  liud,ki  wuh  ek  shahr 
rnen  t  h  d,  aur,  dekko,  ki  ok  mani  ne, 
jo  knrli  w;  bhara,  thd,  Yiuu'  kodekha, 
aur  mim  h  ke  biiul  girke  us  ki  minnat 
karke  kaha,  ki  Ai  Khuddwand,  agar 
tu  cMlic,  mujhe  changa  kar  sakti  hai. 

18  Uh  uo  bdth  barhdyd,  aur  yih 
kabkar  uae  chlu'ni.  Main  chdhtd  hun 
ki  tii  pak  naf  kiyd  jde.  Aur  wunliiu 
us  kdWh  jatdrahd. 

K  Aur  us  ne  un  MkM  ki,  ki  KWi 
*p  mal  kali  :  baiki  JifcW  apne  ta,in 
kabin  ko  dikbld,  aur  jniaa  Musa  ne 
faukm  kiya  hai,  apne  pak  sdf  houe  kl 
■piriiiirii  kar,  ta  ki  un  par  gawdhi  ho. 

15  Lekin  us  kd  ziyada  cbarchd 
phaild:  aur  bahut  se  log  jam'a  Inii-, 
ki  us  k(  aunen,  aur  us  ke  hath  m  apui 
bimariutj  n  onange  kiye  jdwerj. 

lb  f  i'ar  wuh  liaydban  uicrj  alag 
jake  raba,  aur  du'a  mai.gtA  tbd. 

17  Ek  din  ai.ia  hiia,  ki  jah  wuh 
ialLm  do  raba  thd,  kai  Farisl  aur 
i.liari'at.  ke  sikhlanewalo  Jalil  ki  bar 
ek  bftStt,  aur  Ynhiidiya,  aur  Yaniea- 
Um  ae  iike  pd»  Uilhi:  ihe:  aur  Khu- 


A',  V.  nhhat  fidna. 

ddwand  ki  ip'iwat  unhen  clnmga  kanu1 
ku  maujud  thi. 

18  U  Aur,  dekho,  ki  kai  mard  ek 
shakbs  ko,  jiso  jhole  ne  mara  thi, 
eharpai  par  lae :   aur   ohahte  the   ki 

o  andar  idke  us  ke  dge  rukhen  ; 

19  Par  blnr  ko  sabab  ae  andar  le 
jdne  ki  rah  na  pai ;  tab  kothe  par 
ubarh  gaye,  anr  khaprail  k;itl;n  un 
cbdrpii  samet  bich  men  Yiaii'  ke  &ge 
latkd  diya 

'ZO  TJb  ne  nn  ka  imdn  dekhkar  iue 
kahd,  ki  Ai  mard,  lere  gunah  mu'al 
hde. 

21  Tab  faqih  aur  Fanai  soehne 
lage,  ki  yih  kaun  hai,  jo  kufr  bakta 
hai  ?  Khudi  ke  siwd  kaun  gundhon 
ko  mu'df  kar  aak  la  hai '/ 

22  Tab  Yisn'  ne  uu  ke  kliiydl  dar- 
ydft  karke  jawih  men  un  se  kaha,  ki 
Tuni  apue  dilon  meij  kytt  soobte  ho? 

23  Kaun  ziyada  dsan  hai,  yih  kah- 
nd,  ki  Tere  guuah  mu'df  biie ;  ya  ytli 
kahni,  ki  Utli,  aur  chal? 

24  I^kin  'td  ki  tum  jano,  ki  lbn  i 
A'dam  ko  zamin  |iar  gundhon  ke  mu- 
'df karno  ka  iklitiyar  hai,  (u s  ne  us 
jhole  ke  mdre  hiie  ko  kahd,)  ruam 
tujhe  kahta  hiin,  Utb,  aur  apni  t:li,it- 
pai  lekar  apne  ghar  ja. 

"5  Aur  wuh  jbat  un  ke  dge  utha, 
jis  par  para  tba,  uso  lekar    K  hudsi 
ki  ta'rif  kart'd  hud  apne  ghar  chal» 
gayi- 

26  Tab  un  sab  he  hosh  jdte  rahe, 
aur  Khuda  ki  ta'rif  karne  la.ge,  aur 
bahut  ilarko  bole,  A'j  ham  ne  bare 
acbambhe  dekhe. 

27  ^  Aur  in  bdtorj  ke  ba'd  wuli 
bdhar  gayd,  aur  Lewi  ndin  ek  mali- 
Miil-lciiewdle  ko  chanki  par  baithe  de- 
kha  :  aur  uso  kaha,  Rfure  piciihe  d. 

28  Wuh  sab  kuchh  chhorke  utha, 
aur  U«  ke  plchhe  chald. 

29  Aur  Lewi  ne  apna  ghar  men  us 
ki  bar!  ziyatat  ki  :  aur  walidn  maii- 
Bvll-lenewdlon  aur  auron  ki,  jo  ub  ke 
,*dth  kliaiie  baithe  tbe,  hari  bbir  thi. 


Jiot.a  niTakhve  h'i  m 


LU'QA',  VI.       Farition  ko  matdmal  terna. 


KO  Tab  wahAij  ke  fiiqihon  aur  Fa- 
risknj  ne  us  ke  shagirdon  ae  takrir 
fe&rke  kahi,  ki  Tum  kyi'in  niahsiil- 
Viirwiikrtj  mir  guaabgfiroB  ke  sith 
khaie  pite  ho? 

31  Visti' ne  jawab  Tnon  unben  kahi, 
Hhrtlu-chftugon  ko  hakim  darfcto  na- 
luri, baiki  bimaron  ko. 

32  Main  ristbiw>2  ko  taiba  k<- 
Rye  hulauu  nahin  iyi,  baiki  gunah- 
|p2Bg  k... 

'■'•'■i  H  Aur  uuhon  tie  us  se  kahi,  ki 
Yuhanua  ke  «Ingini  k  y  u  n  aksar  roisa 
raklite  aur  d  u 'a  mangte  hain,  aur  isi 
lainii  Farisioii  ke  shiginl  bhi;  par 
Un  khite  pito  hain? 

34  Us  tie  u  n  se  kahi,  Kyi  tata  ba- 
raiiuu  ku,  jab  tak  dnllia  un  ke  sith 
lai,  ihb  rakkwi  snkte  ho? 

;i.ri  I'ar  »t  din  aweijsri-,  ki  dulhi  nti 
sc  judi  kiyii  j&og*  ;  nu  dinun  BWn,  wc 
alkuia  rOM  rakbunge. 

36  ^  Aur  us  m;  un  se  ek  masai  bhi 
kahi ;  ki  Koi  purine  kapre  par  nayo 
kapre  M  tukra  kicke  paimtod  nahin 
lagita;  nahiij  to,  wuh  naye  ko  pharta 
hai,  aur  naye  kapre  ki  paiwand  pnr- 
fen  H  ui'i  btd  n.iiiiij  khata. 

37  Aur  nayi  mai  purani  mashkon 
nien  koi  nahin  bharti;  nahin  to,  nayi 
mai  maslikon  ko  phirke  liah  jaegi,  aur 

Mii  barliid  hon^i. 

38  Italki  nayi  mai  nayi  masliki  _ 
iiK'ti  vakhni  chahiye;  ki  donon  bftchi 
rahetid. 

3it  Aur  purani  .pike  kof  lisi  dam 
nayi  nahin  chdhti:  kyiinki  kakui  hai, 
ki  I'uriai  bihtar  hai. 

VI  UA'B. 

AUR  dnsre  bare  eabt  ko  yiin  hni, 
ki  jad  wuh  khetun  ke  bicb  se 
jati  tha,  u*  ke  shagiid  bal<;n  torkar, 
aur  hathon  ae  malkar,  khine  lage. 

2  Tab  baV.e  Farision  ne  anbej  ka- 
hi, Tum  kyiin  wah  karte  ho  jo  sabt 
ke  diaorj  men  kami  rawa  nahin? 

3  Yteti'  bb  unhen  jawab  meg  kahi, 
Kvd    Mm    ne    itua    nahin    parhi.    jo 

81 


Daiid  ne  kiyii,  jab  wuh  aur  us  ke  b&- 
thi  bhiikhe  the; 

4  Wuh  kyiijikar  Khudi  ke  ghar 
mert  gaya,  aur  nnzr  ki  rnlian,  jo  ki- 
hinon  ke  aiwa  trfcre  ko  k'biui  fftwi 
na  tha,  lekai  kbain,  aur  apnfl  sithioii 
ko  bhi  din  ? 

5  Phh  U9  IH  unliru  kaba,  ki  Ihn  i 
A'dam  Mtat  ka  bhi  KTm.idwaiul  hai. 

6  Aur  dusre  sabt  ko  blii  yi'iij  htU, 
Iri  «uli  lbidatkWto»,  men  jakn  ta'Piui 
dene  lagi :  aur  wahati  ek  ftdmi  tha, 
jis  ka  dahinii  Viath  tt£h  S»ya  tha. 

7  Tab  faqih  r>  Farfd  us  ki  tak  tnen 
lage,  ki  ahayad  wnh  sabt  ke  dln 
clianga  kare,  lo  us  par  faryid  karne 
ka  liaijw  pawen. 

8  Tar  us  ne  im  ke  kbivalon  ko  jan- 
kar  us  admi  se,  jis  ka  hatii  suklia  tha, 
kaili,  ki  Uth,  aur  bieh  men  k  hari  lio. 
Wuh  uth  khari  hui. 

9  Tab  yisi'i'  De  unheij  kahi,  Main 
tum  ae  ek  bit  piichbialiun  ;  ki  Sabi. 
ke  din  kyi  kami  rawa  liai  y  hhnla 
karna,  ki  bttc4?  jari  baobaoa,  ki  jin 
mama  ? 

10  Aur  un  Bab  ki  taraf  dekhke  us 
admi  se  kahi,  Apna  haid  pfialla.  Us 
DC  aiwa  kiyi:  aur  us  ki  hatii  diare  ki 
raonind  thangi  ho  gayi, 

11  Tab  we  sab  diwanagi  se  bbarke 
ipas  meri  kaiine  lage,  ki  Ilam  Yisu' 
ke  sith  kyi  karen  'f 

\2  Aur  un  diiuiri  men  aisi  hui,  ki 
wuli  jiabir  par  du'i  m&ngno  ko  gayi, 
aur  Khud'i  se  du'i  m&EgCB  mm  r;it 
bitii.' 

13  T  Aur  jab  dln  bui,  us  ne  apno 
shdginlon  ko  pas  buhikc  un  men  se 
barah  ko  chuni,  aur  un  ki  iiam  rasiil 
rakhi ; 

14  Ya'no,  Shama'nit,  fjis  ki  nira 
Patrus  bhi  raklii,)  aur  ub  ke  bhii 
Aiuiryji.-,  Ya'uub  aur  Yiihanni,  Fail- 
bua  aur  Bartfcfilama, 

15  Mati  0  Thumi,  Halfi  ke  bcte 
YaV|iib,  anr  Shania'un  jo  Zelotcs  kah- 
lata  tha, 

F 


Baraku!  o  la'nat  ka  zikr. 


LU'QA',  VI. 


Mamh  kd  lown  ko 


16  Ya'qiib  ke   bhdi  Yahud&h,  aur  liye   harakat   clmlio:  jo   hnoheg   >a- 


Yahuddh  Jskariyuti  k  o,  jo  us  kd  pa- 
karwanewala  hiid. 


_,  tiii  ke  liye  du'd  miugo. 
29  Jo  tere  ek  gil  par  raare,  ua  ko 


17  5  Aur  un  ke  sdth  utarke  maidin  !  diiard    blif    (ibcr  d.© ;    aur  jo  koi   teii 


iiicri  k  hari  hiid;  wahdn  uh  ke  ahi- 
girdon  kl  jamd'at  tbi,  aur  logon  ki  bari 
bhir,  jo  sire  Yahddiya  aur  Yaru»a]am, 
aur  Siir  o  Saidii  kesamuudar  ku  kinare 
se  un  |*is  di  tlii,  ki  we  01  ki  suuen,  aur 
apnl  bimdrioii  se  cbange  bon  ; 

18  Aur  wo  bbi,  jo  napdk  riihon  se 
duk  L  pate  the,  de ;  aur  cbange  hiie. 

19  Aur  sab  log  cbdhte  tbe  ki  uso 
chliuwcn :  kyunki  otfwat  us  so  nikalti, 
aur  nah  ko  changa  karti  thi. 

20  T  Fbir  ua  ne  apne  shagirdon  par 
nazar  karke  kahd,  ki  Mubarak  bo  tum, 
jo  garib  ho:  kydgki  Khudd  ki  bid- 
ah iba  t  tutiiliiiri  hai. 

21  Mubarak  ho  tum,  jo  ah  bhfikhe 
lio:  kyiinki  duiida  boga,  Mubarak  bo 
tum,  jo  ab  rote  ho :  kyunki  liansoge. 

22  Mubarak  bo  tiun,  jab  lbti  i 
A 'dam  ku  liye  log  tum  se  kina  rakhen, 
aur  tumhen  kharij  kar  den,  aur  ma- 
lam a  t  karen,  aur  tuuihdra  ndin  bura 
janke  nikdleii. 

23  Ua  din  khnsh  ralio,  aur  khushi 
se  ucbblo:  is  liye  ki,  dekbo,  damdn 
par  tumhdrd  bard  badld  hai :  kyiinki 
uu  ke  bipdiiloTi  ne  irnbion  ko  sdth  aisi 
h  i  kiyd. 

24  Magar  afaoa  tuui  par,  jo  dau- 
latmaiid  00 1  kyiinki  (uni  npni  tasalli 
pd  chuke. 

25  Afson  tum  par,  jo  asini»  ho! 
kyiinki  bhukhe  hoge.  Afsoa  tum  par, 
jo  ab  hanato  bo!  kyuuki  {jam  karoge, 
aur  rooge. 

2C  Afsos  tum  par,  jab  sab  log  tum- 
ben bbald  kabcn!  kyunki  un  ke  bdp- 
dade  jnutho  uabiuu  w  aisa  lii  suluk 
kartu  the, 

27  f  Par  tumben  jo  sunteho,  main 
kabtd  hiin,  ki  Apne  dushnianon  ko 
piyar  knro ;  jo  tum  aa  kina  rakhon,  uu 
k;i.  l-kalii,  karo; 

28  Jo  tumben  la'uat  karen,  un  ke 

82 


qabd  lewe,  kurt-a  lone  se  bhi  mau'a  na 
kar, 

30  Jo  koi  tujh  se  feuchh  mdnge, 
use  de;  aur  ua  so,  jo  teri  mal  ie,  pliir 
niat  mang. 

31  Aur  jaisd  tum  cbdbte  bo  ki  log 
tutn  se  karen,  tum  blii  uu  se  waisii  iii 
karo. 

32  Aur  agar  tum  unhrn,  jo  tumben 
piydr  knrte  hain,  piydr  karo,  (■>  tum- 
haid  kyd  ihsin  hai?  kyunki  gunahgir 
bbi  apne  piydr- kar newdlon  ko  piydr 
karte  hain. 

33  Aur  agar  tum  un  kd,  jo  tumhdrd 
bhald  karen,  bbald  karo,  to  ttnnhara 
kyd  Diadu  hai?  ki  gunahgdr  blii  yihi 
karte  hain. 

34  Aur  agar  tum  unhen,  jin  bo  phir 
panu  ki  ummed  hai,  qan  do,  to  tum- 
hdrd kyd  ihsdn  hai  V  kyunki  gunahgir 
bhi  gimahgdron  ko  qare  dete  hain,  ta 
ki  u»  ki  badli  pawen. 

35  Pas  apne  dusbmanon  ko  piydr 
karo,  aur  bhald  karo,  aur  phir  pane  ki 
ummed  ua  rakhke  qarz  do,  to  tumhard 
badia  bara  hogd,  aur  tum  Kbudd 
Ta'dla  ke  famud  hoge:  kyiinki  wuh 
Qi-tlmkK>Q  aur  tshari'ron  ]iar  bbi 
mihrbdn  hai. 

36  Paa,  jaisd  tuinhdrii  Bdp  rahim 
hai,  tum  rahim  ho. 

37  'Aib  na  lagdo,  to  tum  par  bbi 
'aili  lagayd  na  jdegd:  aur  mujrim  ua 
thahrrio,  to  tum  mnjrim  na  thahrde 
i'ioge  :  mu'df  karo,  to  tuui  bhi  mu'df 
kiye  jaoge: 

38  Do,  to  tumben  bhi  diyi  jdegd; 
aebchbd  uapiii  dab  dib,  aur  hild  hi- 
Idko,  niunh-a-muijli  girld  Inid  bharke, 
lumhdri  god  meu  denge.  Kyunki  jis 
paimdnt  se  tum  napte  ho,  usi  se  tum- 
iiiru  liye  bhi  ndpd  jdegd. 

39  Phir  us  ne  un  se  ek  tamail  blii 
kalii,   ki    Kyd  aiuiha   amlhe  ku   ruh 


tallm  'lemi.  LTT'QA' 

dikha  sakti  lini?  kyd  we  dotion  garhe 
mori  »!t  girenge? 

40  Bhagird  apne  ustdd  se  bard 
nahin:  baiki  jab  taiydr  hud,  apuc 
«atid  Kii  hogd. 

41  Aur  us  linke  ko,  Jq  tere  bhdi  ki 
Ankh  mog  hai,  kydn  dekhtd  hai,  par 
ns  kimli  par.  jo  teri  ankh  mon  hai, 
iiahiu  kiiiydl  karti? 

42  Ya  tt'i  kymjkar  apne  bhai  ko 
kali  Faktii,  ki  Ai  bhai,  ruh,  yih  tinka, 
j"  teri  ankli  mon  hai,  main  nikal  diiii. 
par  us  kdndi  ko,  jo  teri  ankh  men  hai, 
n;ihiij  dekhtd?  Ai  riyakiir,  puhlu  lis 
kdudi  ko  apui  ankh  men  un  nikal,  tab 
h'l  oi  tiuke  ko,  jo  tcre  bhai  ki  ankh 
men  hai,  achchhi  tarah  dckhke  nikal 
sakegd. 

43  Kyunki  achchhe  darakht  men 
burd  phal  nnhin  lagtd:  aur  na  bure 
darakht  men  achchhi  phal  lagtd, 

44  Pas  har  ck  darakht  apne  phal 
se  pahchdnd  jatd.  Ih  liye  ki  log  kan- 
ton  se  anjir  nahin  torle,  aur  na  bhat- 
kataiye  se  angur  torte, 

45  Achchhi  admi  apne  dil  ke  ach- 
chhe kha/.ane  so  achchhi  cliizen  ni- 
kaiti  hai;  aur  bura  lidini  apne  dil  ke 
buru  khazine  ee  buri  rhmfl  bahar 
iata :  kyiinki  jo  ilil  men  bhard  hai,  so 
hi  iminh  par  at.a  hai. 

46  f  Aur  tum  kyfig  mujhe  Khudd- 
wand,  Khudiwand,  kahte  bo,  aur  jo 
main  kahta  hiin,  nahin.  kartu? 

47  Jo  koi  inero  pds  dtd  hai,  aui 
meri  bdten  sunkar  un  par  'amal  kar- 
ti hai,  main  tumben  hatdti  hnn,  ki 
wuh  kiK  ki  niinind  hai ; 

48  Wuh  us  shakhs  ki  manind  hai, 
jin  ne  ghar  banite  lu'ie  gahrd  khodke 
chatdn  par  new  ddli :  jab  barh  ai,  to 
dhir  us  ghar  par  zor  se  giri,  par  use 
hila  na  saki :  kyunki  us  ki  new  cbatdn 
|K  thi. 

49  Aur  wuh,  jo  sunkar  'amal  men 
nahin  ldtd,  uh  shakhs  ki  manind  hai. 
jis  ne  zamin  par  be'-new  ghar  baniyd ; 
aur  dhir  ua  par  zor  se  giri,  aur  wuh 

83 


VIP.  Ek  guhim  kd  sihhaf  panti-. 
thal  yir  pari;  aur  us  ghar  ki  bari 
barbadi  bui. 

TTI  RA'B. 

AUR  jab  wuli  iogon  ko  aprn  siri 
biten  suni,  cliuka,  to  Kai'ar- 
nahum  men  iyi. 

2  Aur  ek  subaddr  kd  gulim,  jo  ub 
kd  bahut  piydrd  tbd,  bimdri  so  ruarne 
par  thd. 

'A  Ua  nfl  Yiait*  ki  khabar  sunke 
Yahddion  ke  kai  ck  buzurgon  ku  us 
pds  bhejkar  us  ki  minnat  ki,  ki  akar 
ub  ke  guldm  ko  changd  knro. 

4  Aur  uuhon  m  Yisii'  k<-  pds  Ake 
us  ki  bari  iniimnt  kurku  kahd,  ki  Wuh 
is  liki  hai,  ki  tti  us  par  yili  ihsan 
kare: 

5  Kyunki  wuh  hamili  qaum  ko 
piydr  kartd  hai,  aur  hamdre  iiye  ek 
'ibadatkhdiia  baniyd  hai. 

6  Tab  YisiV  un  ko  stith  chald.  Aur 
jab  wuh  ua  ke  ghar  se  dor  na  thi, 
subaddr  ne  doston  so  us  pd*  kahli 
bheji,  ki  Ai  Khuddwand,  taklif  na 
kar :  kyunki  main  is  Idiii  nahin,  ki  td 
miTi  CLWial  talfl  awe: 

7  Isi  sabab  main  ne  apne  ta'in  Ijlii 
is  liiq  na  jand,  ki  tere  pis  Aiiti  j  airf 
kali  de,  to  inera  olihokrd  cbangi  nogd, 

8  Kyunki  main  bhi  diisre  ke  ikh- 
tiydr  meQ  hrtrj,  aur  sipdhi  mere  hukm 
men  hain  :  jab  ek  ko  kahti  hiin,  Jd, 
wuh  jati  hai;  aur  &Un  ko,  A',  wuh 
dti  hai ;  aur  apne  guldci  ko,  ki  Yih 
kar,  wuh  kartd  hai. 

9  Yisu'  ne  yih  sunkar  ta'ajjub  kiyi, 
aur  phirke  u  n  logon  rb,  jo  us  ke 
pichho  dte  the,  kab:i,  Main  tum  se 
kahti  lilin,  ki  Aiad  bari  iman  Israel 
men  bhi  na  piya. 

10  Aur  we,Jo  hhru'e  paye  the,  jab 
ghar  men  phir  de,  to  us  bimdr  gulam 
ko  chaagd  ))Ayd. 

11  %  Aur  diisre  din  aisd  hiid,  ki 
wuh  Xlin  ndm  shabr  ko  rawdua  hda ; 
aur  ua  ke  bahut  se  «hdgird  aur  bari 
bliir  us  ke  sith  thi. 

[     12  .iad  wuh  us  skalir  ke  phitak  kt 


J'  i),  h  «r.  n  iiii.  ki  baiat.  LU'QA 

nazdik  palmiicha,  to  dckho,  «k  rminla 
k"  bdhar  leiate  tbe,  .i"  apni  mi  k  A, 
k)  Injwa  tbi,  ikiautd  bebt  thd:  aur 
riuhi  ke  bahut  sc  log  ua  ke  Baih 
tllS. 

13  Aur  us  ko  dekhke  Khudawand 
ko  us  par  rahm  dyd,  aur  use  kaha, 
Mat  ro. 

14  Aur  pAfi  ake  tdbit  ko  chbiid  ; 
aur  utMnewale  tlialiar  gaye.  Tali  us 
Ot  kaiti,  Ai  jawau,  main  tujh  se  kahtd 
hiin,  Uth. 

1"j  Aur  wuh  miirda  uth  bahha,  nur 
bolne  lagd.  Aur  us  uo  uso  KU  ki  mi 
ko  sompa. 

16  Aur  sah  ilar  gnyc,  aur  Kliniki  ki 
ta'rif  karke  bo'le,  ki  liard  nabi  ham 
m  u  utkii;  aur  Khuda  ue  apne  logoti 
pai  Bazar  ki. 

17  Aur  us  ki  yili  bal  sdre  Yahtidiya, 
aur  tamani  aspds  ke  nmlk  nien  phaili. 

IH  Aur  Yubaiind  ke  shdgirdon  ue 
u.*o  in  sab  bdton  ki  khabar  di. 

19  ^  Aur  Yi'ilmuna  ne  apnn  sha- 
iziuhm  men  se  do  ko  bulakar  SW  ke 
pds  kabid  bhcjd,  ki  Kya  jo  anewdld 
thd,  ti'i  hi  liaiV  yii  ham  diisrc  ki  rdh 
takeij  'l 

20  l.'n  nuurdoB  ne  uh  pas  jake  kahd, 
ki  Yilbanua  baptisma-deiiLwsLle  ne 
ham  nc  tere  pas  kabid  bheja,  ki  Wuh, 
jn  duewdla  t  ha,  ti'i  hi  hal?  yd  hajii 
diate  ki  idh  taken? 

21  Us  EO  ufii  gbari  bah  u  ton  ko 
bimdrioii,  aur  baldon,  am'  had  rulujn 
.se,  chiiuga  kiyd;  aur  bahut  H  amilum 
ko  iokhai 

22  Aur  YisiV  ne  jawab  nWD  un  M 
kabd,  ki  Jake  jo  tum  ue  dekha  aur 
nini  Yuhanna  M  kabo,  ki  Audbe 
dyklii.d  luiiti,  lamire  chalte  hain,  korbi 
ohange  hota  kain,  bahire  sunte  latin, 
murde  jilae  jate  hain,  garibon  ko 
khu&hkhabari  sunai  jdii  bai. 

23  Aur  mubarak  wuh  bai,  jo  icujh 
se  thnkar  ua  k  bau. 

24  T  Jab  we,  jinhiij  Yiilmmiii  CM 
bhcja  tha,  gaye,  lab  \"n>\\'  Yuhauuaki 

84 


VII.  Us  pir  Masih  ki  gnwahi, 

ibdhat  logon  so  kahne  lagi,  ki  Tum 
jaiifral  mm  kya  dekhne  gaye?  Kyd 
ek  aarkandd,  jo  hawa  se  biltd  hai  ? 

25  Phir  tum  kyd  dekhne  gayo? 
Kyd  ek  mard,  jo  rniilaiui  kapre  pahine 
hai?  Dekho,  \vo,  io'umdaposhak  ]>a- 
binte,  aur  'aish  nw;n  gunrdn  kartw, 
lnidshalum  ke  niabalion  meti  hain. 

20  Phir  lum  kyd  dekhiuj  ^ayc  ? 
Kyd  ek  nabi  ?  Haii,  Bttdjj  lum  a«  kali- 
td  hiiij.  baiki  nabi  se  bard. 

ih  wiihi  hai,  jis  ki  bdbat  likhd 
iLai,  ki  Dekh,  main  apnu  rasul  ko  tere 
age  bhejia  hun,  jo  teri  rdh  ko  tere  dge 
durust  karega. 

L!K  KyMnki  main  tum  so  kalitd  blin, 
ki  Un  men  se  jo  'auraton  se  paida  huo, 
Yubaiind  bajitiMiiianliJiicwalu  ao  koi 
nabi  bara  nabin  :  Ickiii  jo  Khudd  ki 
ii;i'isii:iii:ii.  m  c  n  ehtiot^  hai,  us  so  hara 
hai, 

2Vi  Aur  sah  Iflgog  ne  Rinike,  aur 
mahnuJ-lonewdloii  ne  Khmia  ko  sach 
nianko,  Ytihannd  se  haptisma  liyd. 

30  Par  FarisfOD  aur  shun'at-sikb- 
luuewdhm  110  apni  nishat  Khudd  ke 
irada  ko  ndchi'z  janke  us  se  bapiisma 
ua  liyd. 

SI  *[  Aur  Khudawand  nekahd,  Pas 
is  zamane  ke  logon  ko  ki<  Re  ui>h.it 
di'm,  aur  kis  ki  mdtiind  kahun? 

li^i  We  im  larkon  ki  mdnind  baiQ, 
jo  bazdr  men  baithke  ek  diisre  ko 
pukarkur  kalite,  ki  Ham  nc  t  u  nih  si  rc 
liye  baijsli  bajai,  aur  tum  ria  ndche  ; 
aur  hain  ne  tuvnhdre  liye  nidtaiu  kiyd, 
par  tum  na  roe. 

38  Kyiinki  Vdliannd  liaptisma-de- 
newald  dyd,  jo  oa  roti  khatd,  aur  ua 
inai  piki  thd:  aur  tuui  kahio  ho,  Us 
par  t.-k  shiiitdu  hai. 

ii4  ]l»u  i  A'dam  dyd,  jo  khdtd  pird 
hai ;  aur  tum  kahte  ha,  ki  Dekho,  ok 
li.irii  l.hiui  aur  mai-khor,  aur  mahsiil- 
leuuwiloy  aur  gunahgaron  kd  dost  1 

36  l':u  hikmat  apue  Bab  larkon  se 
taadk  pdti, 

Sfi  1   l'hirek  Farid  m-us  se'arzki, 


At<mh  lec  jyinwon  par  LU'QA' 

ki  Mere  sath  khd.    Aur  wuh  Farisi  ku  I 
ghar  jdke  khane  baitlui. 

37  Aur,  dekho,  us  «h  alir  men  ekj 
'aurat,  jo  gunahgdr  thi.  jab  jAiia  ki! 
wiih  Furi.si  ke  ghar  khano  baitki  hai, 
sang  i  marmar  ke  'itrddn  dipij  'm-  l:ii, 

38  Aur  wuh  piehhe  pdnwon  ke  [jas 
kiwi  tlii,  aur  ro  roke  ausii  M  us  ke 
pdnw  dhone  lagi,  aur  aptie  sir  ke  balon 
■e  poochhks  ua  ke  pdnwon  ko  shauq 
M  ohuma,  aur  'itr  nmJa. 

39  Aur  iiB  Fariai  ne,  jis  ne  ua  ki 
da'vvat  ki  thi,  yih  deklikar  dil  men 
kaha,  ki  Agar  yih  nabi  ln.ta,  to  jdntd 
ki  yih  'aurut,  jo  use  chhuti  hai,  kaun 
alir  kaisi  hai :  kyunki  gntiahgar  hai. 

40  Yisu'  ne  use  jawdb  mag  kaha,  ki 
Ai  Shama'un,  main.  tujh  se  kuuhh 
kaha  chahta  h  d  n.  Ua  ne  kaili,  Ai 
Ustad,  k  a  h. 

41  l".k  shnkhfl  ke  do  gandar  the : 
ek   pan    sau    diuar   ka,    dusra   padias 

ki. 

42  Par  jab  un  ko  ada  karne  ka 
maudiir  na  thd,  donon  ko  haklirtli  diya. 
So  kah,  un  mag  ae  kaun  us  ku  ziyada 
piydr  karega? 

18  Bhaaut'nn  ne  jawab  mag  kahd. 
Hari  danist-  meu  wuh,  jiseua  mr/.iyada 
bakhshd.  Tnb  us  ne  use  kaha,  Ti  ne 
titik  fmsal  kiya. 

44  Aur  us  'aurat  ki  taraf  mutawaj- 
jih  lioku  Shama'nn  se  kaha,  Tii  ia  'au- 
rat ko  dekhta  hai?  main  tere  ghar 
aya,  tii  ne  mujhe  pan  w  dhune  ko  pani 
tia  diya :  par  is  ne  iuere  pdnw  du.-wn 
sc  Jhoe,  aur  apue  air  ke  balon  se  pon- 
chhe : 

45  Tfl  ne  mujh  ko  na  chumi :  |iar 
ia  no,  jab  se  main  aya,  mere  pari  w 
shauq  m  chdmnd  ua  chhord : 

46  Td  ne  mere  sir  par  tel  na  mala : 
par  is  ue  mero  panwoij  par  'itr  mala. 

47  Is  liye  main  kahti  hi'm,  ki  Us 
ke  gundh  jo  bahu  t  hain,  mu'af  hue ; 
kyunki  us  ne  bahut  piyar  kiya;  par 
jis  ke  tlwre  uiu'af  hue,  wuh  thori  pi- 
yar karta. 


,   VIII.  tHr  mah.'i. 

48  Aur  un  'aurat  se  kaha,  Tere 
gunih  uiu'af  hue. 

49  Tad  we,  ju  us  ke  sath  kasino 
baithe  the,  dil  nien  kalmc  lage,  ki  Vih 
kaun  hai,  jo  guuah  bhi  uiu'af  karta 
hai? 

50  Par  US  ne  'aurat  ko  kahd,  Tere 
iman  ne  tujhe  bachdyd;  «alamat  chali 

j*- 

VIII  BA'R. 

AUR  us  ke  ha'd  ynn  hud,  ki  wuh 
shahr  shahr  aur  gdnw  gdnw  jd- 
ka  uianaili  kaila,  aur  Klimia  ki  bid- 
skdliat  ki  kliushkhabari  deta  Uni:  aur 
WB  barah  us  ke  sdtli  the, 

2  Aur  kitni  'auraten,  jo  had  riilmu 
aur  biriiariun  se  changi  h  di  thin,  Mari- 
yaui,  jo  Magdalini-  kahlati  thi,  jis  ee 
sat  deo  nikal  gaye  the, 

3  Aur  Yuanna,  Herodis  ke  diwan 
Ki'i/.a  ki  jord,  aur  Kiisanna,  aur  bahu- 
teri  aur,  jo  apne  nidl  se  us  ki  khidmat 
kaiti  thin. 

4  "J  Aur  jab  liari  bhir  Mi.  aur  bar 
shahr  ke  log  us  ke  ]>as  dte  the,  us  ne 
tamsil  men  kahd :  ki 

5  Ek  kisdn  bij  bone  gaya;  aurbotfl 
waqt  kuchh  rdh  ko  kinare  giri;  aur 
wuh  raunda  gaya,  aur  asindn  ki  chiri- 
yuTj  m;  uML't'hug  liya. 

(i  Aur  kuchh  ehatan  par  giri ;  aur  - 
■gka  siikii  gaya,  kyuijki  use  tari  na 
[lahuiidii. 

-7  Aur  knehh  kautim  nteg  giru ; 
kati  ton  ne  sith  barhke  use  dal>d  liya. 

8  Aur  kuchh  tchehhi  Eamin  mag 
gira,  aur  ugke  sau  gima  phala.  Yili 
kahke  \ts  ae  pukiri,  ki  Jise  sunne  ke 
Itiiu  hun,  sune. 

9  Us  ke  shagirdon  ne  us  se  piichha, 
ki  t'ih  tamsil  kva  Hai  ? 

10  Us  ne  kahd,  ki  KhudA  ki  Md- 
shahat  kd  hhcd  jdnnd  tunihen  diyi 
gayd  hai  :  par  autou  ka  tamsil  mag; 

;ki  wedekhtehue  nadekhen,  aur  nuote 
hoe  na  i-amihen. 

11  TuBunt  yih  hai:  Mj  Khuda,  ki 
k  aki  i  u  hai. 


Bij-b&neitH&e  kl  tamsil.  LCQA' 

12  Jo  rdh  ke  kindre  hain,  \ve  hain 
ki  (iimtfi  hiliri  :  tab  Shaitan  ake  ia  ka- 
lam ka  un  ke  SU  so  nikiil  la  jati  hai, 
t,i  k  i  aisd  na  liu  k  i  iman  ldke  najat 
piwao. 

13  Aur  chntan  pnr  ke  we  hain,  ki 
jab  kaJam  ko  smitc  hain,  to  kbushi  H 
tjabul  kar  lete  liain,  lokio  jar  uahiii 
rakhta  ;  kuehb  diu  j  mau  ldke  d/.mdisu 


ke  warit  phir  jate. 
14  Aui     ' 


Aur  jo  kdnton  mcin  giro,  we 
liiiin  ki  santa,  aur  chal  nikalte,  aur 
fikr,  aur  daulat,  aur  zindagdui  ki  Wah, 
urihen  dabd  deti  hain,  aur  pfaal  ke 
jnkne  ki  naulut  uhln  paho&ohtf. 

lo  l'sir  ju  achchhi  zamin  par  gire, 
wo  haiti  jo  achchhe  aur  BttH  ou  n 
kalam  ko  sunke  ydd  rakklc,  aur  sabr 
liarku  phalte. 

16  i  Koi  chirag  jaldke  bartan  se 
nah  m  oliliipatd,  na  paiang  tale  rakhtd, 
buiki  abirdgdfa  pai  rakhta  hai,  ta  ki 
andar  lini'ivalii  iirijilla  dekhen, 

17  Kyiuiki  kuchii  poskida  nahm. 
jo  Bihlr  na  hona;  aur  na  koi  chhipd, 
Jo  maldm  na  ooe£,  mu-  khul  ua  jdegd. 

IB  Pan  dekiio,  ki  tum  kin  tarah  riiu- 
tehoi  kyrinki  jo  rakhtd  hai,  use  diyd 
jae^a  ;  aur  jo  nahin  rakhta,  ns  se,  ju 
apnidanisL  men  takhta  hai,  liydjacgd. 

19  %  Tab  ua  ki  md  aur  us  ke  bhai 
uh  pas  ae,  aur  bhir  ke  sal>ab  us  ec 
nmldrjdt  na  karwnkeii. 

20  Aur  use  khabar  htSi,  ki  teri  lari, 
aur  tere  bhai,  bahar  kharo  tujh.ed.ckha 
chdhta  hain. 

21  Us  ne  jawab  mori  uuhorj  kaba. 
ki  Hari  mi,  aur  mere  bhai,  we  hain, 
ki  K'lmdii  kd  kalam  sunte,  aur  us  par 
'amal  kar  t  e  hain. 

22  ^  Aur  ck  din  aisd  hud,  ki  wah 
aur  uh  ke  shagird  naw  par  chariie,  aur 
us  ne  uu  U  k;iiia.  ki  AV»,  jldl  ke  par 
<:h;iKn.     'IVo  welechale. 

23  Par  jab  ndw  cbali  jati  thi,  wuh 
so  gayd;  aur  jhil  pir  liari  aiidhi  di, 
aur  naw  piini  se  bharne  lagi,  aur  wc 
khatre  men  pare. 


,  VIII.         Matil  hi  tindM  ko  roknd. 

24  Tab  we  us  jjas  de,  aur  use  jagd- 
ko  kahd,  ki  Sahih,  ai  sihib,  ham  balik 
bote.  Tab  us  ne  uthke  bawa  aur  pan! 
ki  lahron  ko  dhaiukaya ;  to  tnam 
gayirj,  aur  niwA  hua. 

25  Aur  nn  se  kahd,  Tumhdra  iman 
kahan  hai '!  We  dar  gnye,  aur  ta'ajjub 
karke  apas  men  kalme  lagi',  ki  Y  ih 
kaun  hai  ?  ki  hawa  aur  paui  par  hukm 
kurta  hai,  aur  we  ua  ki  maute  haim 

26  H  Aui"  we  Gadarinfon  ke  raulk 
men,  jo  us  par  Jaitt  ke  samlnu?  hai, 
naw  chrtiako  iiahunche. 

27  Aur  jub  wuh  kiuaro  par  utra,  to 
us  shahr  ka  ck  mard,  jin  par  muddat 
m  deo  tlie,  aur  na  kapre  pahinta,  aur 
na  ghar  men,  baiki  qahron  ke  darnu- 
yan  rahta  tha,  use  mild. 

28  Jab  us  nc  Yisd'  ko  deklia,  cliil- 
lake  us  ke  panwon  par  gira,  aur  bari 
awdz  se  kabd,  ki  Ai  Yisif,  KbuddTa''- 
dld  ke  Bete,  nmjli  ko  tujh  se  kva 
kdni?  teri  mimiaL  karki.  liiin,  ki  iuu- 
jiw  dttkh  uade. 

20  (Is  liye  ki  wuh  us  ndpak  ruh  ko 
liukin  kart.il  thd,  ki  is  ddmi  se  nikal 
jd.  Kyiinki  aksar  uee  pakan  i  thi,  aur 
harcliand  usc  Mujitnii  aur  lierion  so 
jakarke  khalmrdaii  karte  the,  parwaii 
zanjirM  ko  tortd  thA,  aur  deo  use  ba- 
vali.iii  i:ieti  ilanrat.a  thd.) 

30  Tab'Yisii''  ne  us  se  piirhha,  ki 
Teri  kyd  ndm  hai?  Wuh  bola,  Tu- 
inan  :  kydiiki  ImliuC  deo  us  par  tlie. 

31  Unhot)  ne  us  ki  minnat  ki,  ki 
Iianieri  athah  garlie  men  jano  ka  hukm 
na  kar. 

lili  Wabdg  sl5aroij  kd  bard  gol  rwt- 
hdr  par  ehartd  thd:  unhoi;  ne  oa  ki 
minimi  ki,  ki  hamen  un  men  jaue  de. 
Us  ne  jane  diya. 

33  Aur  deo  us  adm!  pe  nikalke  su- 
aron  par  charhe  :  aur  gol  karare  par  se 
jhifmerLkud'kardiibgaya.  ' 

34  Chardnewale  ns  hdl  ko  dekhke 
bhdgc,  aur  jakc  shahr  aur  ua  ki  nawalii 
men  khabar  di. 

|     35  Tab  we   us  hal   ke  dekhue  ko 


fibay&C»  ka  tk  sol  nikdlnd.       LT"QA',  IX. 


Jdirus  ki  beti  kojildna. 


nikle;  aur  Yisu'  ke  pis  ae,  aur  us 
ddmi  ko,  jis  se  deo  nikal  gaye  the, 
k&pro  pahine,  aur  hoshydr,  flrf  ke 
panwori  ke  pil  baithd  pdyd,  aur  dar 
gaye. 

30  Tab  dekhnewdlnn  ne  mi  ko  kha- 
bar di,  ki  wiili  jis  lui-ii  deo  the  kis 
taruh  changd  hiid. 

37  %  Aur  ri:idarink>a  ke  ispds  ke 
mulk  ke  sah  logon  ne  us  se  darkhwast 
ki,  ki  haradre  pas  se  chald  jd;  kyuriki 
un  men  bani,  dar  paith  gaya  th&;  aur 
wtili  niw  par  charhko  phira. 

38  Aur  us  mard  ne,  jis  par  se  sha- 
yatiu  atar  gaye  the,  us  ki  minnat  ki, 
ki  Mujhe  apne  sdtb.  rahne  de ;  par 
Yisti*  ne  use  rnkhsat  karke  kahd,  ki 

39  Apne  ghar  ko  phir,  aur  we  bare 
kdm.joKhuda  ne  tere  saih  kiychain, 
bayan  kar.  Wuh  gayd,  aur  un  bare 
kamera  ko,  jo  YistV  ne  us  ke  sdth  kiye 
the,  tamam  nlianr  men  sunayd. 

40  Aur  aisa  hiid,  ki  jab  Yisui1  phira, 
logurj  ne  us  kii  istiubal  kiya,  kyunki 
sab  us  ki  rdb  takte  m 

41  K  Aur,  deikko,  ki  Jainis  ndnie 
A  shakhs,  JO  'ilvidfitklidue  kd  sardar 
thd,  dyd,  aur  Yisu'  ke  qadauii'n  par 
girke  us  ki  minnat  ki,  ki  Mere  ghar 
chal: 

42  Kyunki  us  ki  ik  lauti  beti,  jo 
baras  baYah  ek  ki  thi,  manis  pu  ihi. 
Aur  jab  wuh  jaiie  laga,  log  us  par  gire 

[■■:     !■       ■  .,    i, 

43  K  Aur  ek  'aurat  ne,  jis  ku  Mmb 
baras  se  lahu  jdri  thi,  aur  apnd  sdra 
mal  hakimon  par  kharch  kira,  pai*  kisii 
bo  changi  na  ho  saki, 

44  Us  ke  pichhe  dke  us  ki  posnak 
kddaman  chhiid;  aur  usi  dam  us  ka 
lahu  bahnd  band  ho  gaya. 

45  Tab  Yisu'  ne  kaha,  Kis  ne  mu- 
jhe dibuai1   Jab  sab  inkdr  kame  lage, 


mujhe  chhnd;  kyunki  main  jantdhun 
ki  tpiwat  mujb  mey  se  nikli. 

47  Jal>  us  'aurat  ne  dekhd,  ki 
chhipti  naliirj,  kampti  lu'ii  di,  aur  ua 
ke  panwon  par  girke  sab  logon  ke 
aainhiM  use  Vmydn  kiya,  ki  kis  liye 
chhua,  aur  kls  tarah  se  usi  dam  changi 
ho  gayi. 

48  Tab  hb  no  use  knhd,  ki  Ai  beti, 
khdtir-jam'a  rakh,  ki  tero  imdn  ne 
i   ...■!..'■■  ■  >i 

49  f  Aurwuhyih  kali  rana  thd.  ki 
'ihadai.khane  ke  sardar  ke  ghar  so  ek 
nu  akar  use  kahd,  ki  Teri  beti  mar 
gayi ;  Ustad  ko  taklif  na  do. 

50  Yisrt'  ne  mmke  jawab  BWQ  use 
kahd,  ki  Mat  dar:  sirf  iman  ld;  wuh 
bach  jdegl. 

51  Aur  jab  wuh  us  ke  ghar  ayd,  to 
Patrus,  aur  Ya'qub,  aur  Yuhanna,  aur 
01  larki  ke  md  bdp  ke  siwa  kisi  ko 
andar  jane  na  diyd. 

52  Aur  sab  us  ke  liye  roto  pitte 
the;  par  us  ne  kahd,  Mat  roo;  wuh 
mar  nahiu  gayi,  baiki  soti  hai. 

53  We  us  par  hanso,  kyunki  jdnte 
the  lti  raar  gayi  hai. 

54  Magar  us  ne  sab  ko  nikalke  us 
kd  hdth  pakrd,  aur  pukdrke  kahd,  ki 
Ai  larki,  uth. 

55  Aur  us  ki  nih.  phir  di,  aur  wuh 
usi  dam  u|hi;  aur  Yisu'  nc  hukin 
kiyd,  ki  Use  khine  ko  do. 

5Q  Tab  us  ke  md  bdp  hairdn  htie : 
par  us  ne  unhen  takid  ki,  ki  yih  jo  hiid 
kisi  se  nd  kaho, 

IX  BA-B. 

U  S  ne  apne  bdrah  slidgirdon  ko 
ikattha  karke  tiuhe-n  sab  shai- 
tdnon  par,  aur  litniariuTi  ko  dafa  kamo 
ke  liye,  qudrat  o  ikhtiyar  liakiishd. 

2  Aur  imhen  bheja,  ki  Khuda  ki 
bidsfaihat  ki   matiadi   karen,  aur  bi- 


fatrue  aur  us  ke  sdthiun  ne  kahd,  ki  maren  ko  changd  karen. 


Ai  >i\h\h,  Ifig  tujh  |>ar  gire  parte  liain, 
aur  dabae  lete,  aur  t,ii  kahta  h.ii,  ki 
Kis  ne  mufhfl  chhiid? 

46  Par  Yisu'  ne  kaha,  ki  Kisu  ne 


Aur  un  se  kahd,  ki  Rdh  ke  liye 
kuchh  na  lo,  na  chharian,  na  jlioH,  na 
roti,  na  rupiya;  na  ddmi  pieblie  do 
kurte. 


Itaaulon  ko  kampar  bhrjnt'i.    LU'QA' 
4  Aur  jal>  kisi  ghar  ineu  dakhil  lio, 

wahin  raho,  aur  wahin  Re  rawiua  h:>. 
R  Aur  jnli    log    tiiiiilun    qabul    na 

k-.ireij,  to  u|  duUM  biliar  jike  apne 

piijworj  ki  k  hak  un  par  guwilii  ke  liye 

jliani. 

(i  We  rawiua  hokc  liar  basti  nien 

giutrte,  aur  liar  jaoah  khush-khah 

sunate,  aur  ohnuga  karie  the. 

7  f  Aur  ehauth.il  ko  Mkim  Hc- 
roiiis  no,  jo  kuchh  Y  isii' n  e  kiyi  thi, 
«uni:  aur  ghabrayi,  is  liye  ki  ba'ze 
kahte  the,  ki  Ytihanni  murdon  mtin 
m  ji  utha  hai; 

8  Aur  lia'ze,  ki  lliyas  Kahir  hiiii  hai; 
aur  diiare,  ki  ek  agle  nabion  oien 

u  Lini  hai. 

9  Par  1 1 1 1*  "lis  no  kahi,  ki  Main  iic 
Yilbanni  ki  sir  kat  (Jala  :  magar  yih. 
jis  ki  bAbat.  aisi  liaU.ni  Bunti  hun,  kauu 
bai?    Aur  cihihi  ki  um  dek  h  e. 

10  Tf  Aur  rasiilou  ae  phirke  jo 
kuehli  kiyi  tb.i  uh  sc  bayan  kiyii. 
Aur  wnh  un  ko  leke  alag  Bai  t  sa  i  di 
iisinie  (dialir  ko  efc  wiraiic  mi'ii  gSYa. 

11  Aur  log  jinko  ub  ko  piekhe 
cliale:  wuli  un  ko  Khudi  ki  bidshi- 
hat  ki  biteri  karne  lagi,  aur  jo  change 
hone  ke  uiubtij  the,  unben  changi 
k  iya. 

liJ  Aurjab  din  ikbir  hone  lagi,  mi 
binimu  iiu  iike  u st'  k:ihii.  ki  Logon  ko 
rukhaat  de,  ki  aspd»  ki  basti  o  n  aur  un 
ki  iiawihi  im-ii  jika  tiken,  aur  khauu 
ki  tadlur  kareu  :  kyriuki  baui  yakin 
wirdne  men  Lain. 

13  Ua  iie  un  «j  krdii,  kl  Tum  hf  uh 
k'.>  khaui  do.  Unhoii  ne  knha,  ki 
Haniaro  p4s,  riwi  piuok  roti  aur  do 
BMObhtl  ki',  kuohh  u:diin  bui;  OMK 
hiu,  ham  jiko  in  sab  logon  ke  liye 
kit«U[  iiinl  lerj. 

14  Kyiinki  we  paneh  hazir  mard 
ke  rjarib  the,  Tab  uh  ne  apne  sbi- 
girdon  se  kaha,  ki  TJn  ko  paulidu 
I  ii  ;..is  kl  p;tnt  karke  bit  hio. 

15  Unhon  neuai  tarah  kiyi.aur  sab 
ko  bitbivi." 

'88 


.  IX.    Sh'ijfirdt-v  ki  kuini  ■•hal  rhahiye. 

16  Tab  u»  ne  un  pin  eh  rotfcn  aur 
do  mschhlion  ku  Inke,  aur  aamin  ki 
taraf  ddchke,  un  ko  barakat  di,  aur 
torke  apue  shigirduri  ko  d  iya,  ki  logon 
ku  Age  lakhen. 

17  Aur  unhon  no  khiyA,  aur  aab 
isdda  hi>:  aur  un  tukrnn  ki,  jo  mi 
ho  baeh  rahe,  barah  tokriin.  uthiin. 

18  %  Aur  yrin  bui,  ki  jab  ifua  ni- 
rale  mendua  miugui  thA,  slid^irtl  uh 
k<  satli  the;  uo  im  un  se  puohhi,  ki 
Log  mujb  ko  kyi  kahte  hain,  ki  main 
kauu  ban 3 

19  Unhon  ne  jawab  nu-n  kahi,  ki 
Yiihanna  baptifema-drncwiia;  aur  ha- 
'ze,  lliyas;  aur  diisre,  ki  ek  a^le  ua- 
bion  se  phir  uthi  hai. 

20  Tab  uh  no  un  m  kahi,  Tum  kyi 
kahte  ho,  ki  main  kaun  luiij?  Patvus 
ne  jawab  n  iuri  kahi,  ki  Kiiuda  ki 
Masili. 

21  V.h  no  un  so  tak  i  d  ki,  aur  fitr- 
miyi,  ki  vih  kisti  Be  na  kaho; 

22  Aur  kahi,  ki  Zanir  hai  ki  Tbn 
i  A'dam  bahut  dukh  Hkbe,  aur  buzurg- 
on  aur  sai-dir  kabinnn  aur  fin|ilioii  w 
radd  kiyi  jiio,  aur  mari  jie,  aur  ti.sre 
uiii  ji  ulin.-. 

23  *j  Aur  uh  no  sah  ne  knhi,  ki 
Agar  koi  clialie  ki  mere  pichbe  awe, 
to  ftpoi  iukar  karu,  aur  apni  galib  liar 
[■o»  ntliakt*  iiii'ri  [lairaui  kara. 

24  Is  liye  jo  koi  chibe  ki  apni  jin 
bnchiwc,  uae  kbocgi  :  par  jo  koi  mere 
liye  apni  jin  khwga,  wulii  We  bath;i- 
wegi. 

25  Kyiinki  idmi  ko  kyi  laida,agar 
tamim  dunya  ha.-il  kare,  par  apni  jin 
kUo  do,  yi  wuli  barbid  bowe  ? 

26  Kyiinki  jo  luujk  se  aur  meri 
biton  se  sharmiegi.  Iba  i  A'dani  bhi, 
jab  apne  aur  apne  Bip  aur  pik  lirirth- 
ton  ke  jalai  ke  sitb  awegi,  ua  Be 
sharmiegi, 

27  Par  main  tum  se  sauh  kahtd  hiin, 
ki  Ba'n  un  nien  se  yahan  khnre  hain, 
jo  na  niarenge  jab  tak  ki  Khudi  ki 
bfdsbUutt  ua  dsKoen. 


Ek  buri  nih  ka  LfQ 

28  ^  Aur  in  M  ton  ke  roz  a^h  ek 
ba'd  aisii  lniii,  ki  wuh  Pitrua  aur  Yii- 
hauna  aur  YVqiib  ko  sith  leko  pahat' 
par  diri  maiigno  gaya. 

29  Atir  ilu';i  maiigte  lii  aksi  ln'ia,  ki 
uh  ke  eh  ih  re  ki  surat  badai  gayi,  aur 

bak  mil'ed  barriiq  ho  gayi 

30  Aur,  dekho,  do  mani,  jo  Musa 
aur  Uiyas  the,  ua  se  gnftogti  karte 
the; 

31  Yih  jiiliil  men  dikhii  diye,  aur 
uh  ke  nur  iio  ka,  jo  Y  arti  .salam  rnerj 
waqi'  linu*:  par  thi,  atftt  kari*  thi.'. 

32  Hanr  Patrus  aur  u»  ku  sithi 
nind  H  bhare  the:  jab  jige,  U>  ua  ke 
jalai  ko,  aur  un  do  niardon  ko  jo  u& 
H  Nitli  klmre  tim,  dek  ha. 

33  Aur  aiaa  hiia,  ki  jad  we  ns  se 
jmia  hoUfl  UgB,  Patrus  ue  Yisu'  se 
kaha,  ki  Ai  sihib,  hamari  yahan 
rahni  nehchhi  hai :  tin  dera  banawen ; 
ek  tere,  aur  ek  Musi,  aur  ek  Iliyis  ke 
liye:  aur  nahin  jin  t  a  t  ha,  ki  kya 
kahti  hai. 

34  Wnh  yih  kanta  hi  thi,  ki  badai 
iya,  aur  un  par  saya  k  iya :  aur  badai 
men  jdiie  se  we  dar  gaye. 

3~5  Aur  badai  se  ek  awiz  nikli,  ki 
YVh    mori  piyiri    lleti    hai :    us   ki 

BUllO. 

3fi  Aur  iwaz  ato  hi,  Yisii'  ko  akela 
piyi.  Aur  we  chup  rahe,  aur  unhon 
ne,  jo  kucbh  dekili  thi,  uu  dinoti  men 
ki.-u  as  ua  kaha. 

37  1  Auraisa  lnia,  ki  jabwepabar 
se  utre,  to  dilsre  diti  ek  hari  bhir  usu 
a  miU. 

38  Aur,  dekho,  ki  ck  ir.ard  ne  bhir 
men  se  chillikc  kaba,  ki  Ai  ustad, 
main  teri  tniiuiat  karta  luirj,  ki  mere 
bete  par  nazar  kar;  ki  wah  meri  ik- 
lan la  hai : 

39  Aur,  dekli,  ek  ruh  OM  pakapi 
hai,  aur  wuh  ekiek  chilliti  hai;  aur 
ua  ko  iilsiL  aiuthiti,  ki  wuh  kaf  hhar 
lata  hai,  aur  us  ko  kuehalke  ua  pai  se 
niushkil  se  utarti  hai: 

40  Aur  main  ue  tera  sbftgUdog  ki 


»9 


& ,  IX.  niHhui. 

minnat  ki    ki  use  nikilen;  lukai  wo 
ua  sakmu 

41  Tab  Yisii'  as  jawab  men  kaha, 
ki  Ai  be-iuian  o  terai  pusht,  main  kab 
tuk  tumhaie  satli  raliuiigi,  aur  Uim- 
hdri  bardisht  karungi'?  Apne  bete 
ko  yahtin  11 

42  Jab  wuh  iti  thi,  dao  ue  use  pa- 
takke  aiuthaya.  Par  Yisii'  no  us  napik 
nih  ko  dbamkayi,  aur  larkokueliau^.i 
kiyi,  aur  use  us  ko  bap  ko  aompa. 

43  T  Aur  nah  Klmda  ki  buzur$;i 
dekbkc  liairan  hue.  Jab  sab,  un  obi- 
B0Q  ke  sabab  jo  Yisii'  uo  kin,  ta'ajjub 
karte  the,  ua  ne  apuo  shagirdon  se  ka- 
ha, ki 

44  Tum  in  batorj  ko  apne  kanon 
men  rakhuj  kyiinki  lbn  i  A'dam  \^,u 

lu  niiili  in-';;  hamUa  kiy.i  i^eoA 

45  Par  we  isbat  konaaanijhejiaiki 
wuh  uh  se  chhipi  thi,  ki  we  USB  dary- 
aft  na  karen  :  aur  is  bat  ke  pik'hhuu 
men  us  we  darte  llie. 

46  ^  Tiiir  un  ke  darmiyau  yih 
bnbs  u(hi,  ki  ham  men  sab  se  bara 
kaun  hai  V 

47  Yisii'  ne  un  ke  dilon  kd  khiyal 
jiuke  ek  larke  ko  liya,  aur  apne  pas 
khara  kiyi, 

lr!  A i.i r  un  se  kaha,  ki  Jo  is  larke 
ko  merc  nam  par  o^abul  kare,  raujliB 
qabul  karta  hai;  aur  jo  mujhe  qabiil 
kare,  ua  ko,  jis  no  mujhe  bueja,  qabiil 
karta  hai  ;  kyunki  j0  tiun  men  sah  se 
ehluili  hai,  wuhi  bari  hai. 

40  T  Yuhanna  ne  jawab  men  kalii, 
Ai  t-iiliil),  ham  ne  ek  shakhs  ko  tere 
nam  se  deoii  ko  uikalte  dekhd  ;  aur  us 
ko  rok  raklia,  kyiinki  wuh  hamaro 
sath  pairaui  uahin  karta. 

.50  Yisii'  no  us  se  kaha,  ki  Uao  rok 
na  rrtkho,  kyiinki  jo  haniare  birkhilat' 
nahiii,  bamari  taraf  hai. 

51  1  Aur  aisa  hiia,  ki  jab  we  din, 
ki  jin  men  wuh  lipar  uthaya  jae,  pura 
houe  jjur  the,  Y'ani^ilam  ko  jane  par 
qasdan  apna  rukh  kiya. 

02  Aur  us  ue  apne  age  [«igam-dt- 


Apnl  barai  na  chahnA.  LU'QA' 

ncwalebheje:  we  iakefctimarioTi  kiek 
basti  men.  ddkhil  bd«,  ki  us  ke  liye 
taiyiri  karen. 

53  Lekin  unhon  ne  uh  ko  nabul  na 
kiyd,  kythjki  us  ka  munh  Yardaalaiu 
kl  taraf  jane  ko  tha. 

54  Us  ke  shAgird  Ya'q(Sb  aur  Yrt- 
bnimtl  M  yib  dikhkc  kaha.  ki  Ai 
KiiwiawaDi!,  kya  tii  chahui  bal  ki 
jaisA  lliyae  ne  kiya,  liam  hukm  karen 
ki  tinta  se  ag  nazil  howe,  aur  unhen 
jalawe  ? 

86  'lab  ijs  ne  phirko  unhen  dham- 
kaya,  aur  kaha,  Tum  n&hin  ji-nte  ki 
tum  kaisi  rdh  ke  lio. 

56  Kyt'mki  lbn  i  A'dam  logon  ki 
jan  b&rbad  ka.rnenahin,  baiki  bachaue 
iya.     Tacl  we  dilari  baatf  ko  chale. 

;>7  %  Aur  nlsal  bM,  ki  jati  wo  rah 
mi'ij  ciiali)  jate  the,  kisu  ne  us-o  kalia, 
Ai  Khudawand ,  jahan  t  n  jdtA  hai, 
main  tero  piclihe  tJj.ih'iii^A. 

58  Yisii'  ne  oee  kubis,  ki  Lomrion 
ku  liye  iDjindt'ij  bain,  aur  ehiriyon  ke 
liye  basere ;  par  lbn  i  A'dam  ko  Uni 
jiynh  iiiibiij  ki  apna  air  rakhe. 

59  Phtr  us  ne  diisre  M  kaha,  Mere 
pichhechal.  Uh  ue  kahA,  Ai  Ktmda- 
wand,  mujhe  nikhsat  de,ki  pahle  jSke. 
apne  bap  ko  garitn. 

60  Visu'  ae  oh  fcnhS,  Jane  do,  ki 
murda  apne  murdon  ko  gAfBB  :  pai"  l-i'i 
jako  Khudi  ki  bicUh&hftt  ki  khabar 
dc. 

61  Dfare  ne  bhi  kaha,  ki  Ai  Khn- 
ddwauri,  main  tero  pielibe  chah'miia ; 
lekin  pdhle  jsnijhe  jiiiip  dc,  ki  apne 
ghar  ke  loeog  se  rukhsnt  bo  Aiiu. 

62  Y'isu'  ne  uko  kaha,  ki  Jo  koi 
SpnA  haik  bal  pai  riikhfcn  pkth&B 
dekhta  hai,  wub  Kbuda  ki  hAd.shahut 
ke  laiq  nabi  y. 

"  X  BA'n. 

U  S   ke  ba'd  Khiidawand.  ne  eattar 
aur   inuqarrar   kiye,  aur   apne 
samhne  bar  nlin.br  aur  ha.r  jnjrah  men, 
jahin  a;.i  jaya  cbAbtA  tha,  utiben  do  do 
karko  bbeja; 
90 


.',  X,      Satlar  aur  wd'iz  chuntip.  M,  hd?. 

2  Aur  un  ne  kaha,  ki  Fas!  to  hahut 
bai,  par  rnazchir  thore :  is  liye  khet  ke 
m  pf  i  k  ki  niinnat  karc,  ki  mazdtir  apne 
khet  men.  bhoje. 

3  Tum  jAo;  dekho,  main  tumben 
barron  ki  iniiniiid  hlieriyi .'ii  imin  bhtjta 
hdn. 

4  Na  batiU  le  jtio,  na  jbnli,  na 
jutiiin  :  aur  rah  inen  kisi  ko  salam  na 
kij'yo. 

5  Aur  jisgbar  unmilakliil  bo,  pable 
kahu,  ki  Is  pw  ku  ul£m. 

fi  Airnr  «alauiali  ka  beta  wahan 
b'"^a,  tmuharii  salam  us  par  thahr- 
e;:a  :  nwliin  U>,  tutubart  tara/  phir 
awe^a. 

7  Aur  usi  ghar  men  Taho,  aur  jo 
kiichh  m  ki  taraf  x<;  uiile,  khio,  pio: 
kyi'inki  mnzduri  mamliir  ki  baqq  hiu. 
Gh;ii'  gbar  n  pWra. 

H  Aur  jin  «bJkbr  men  dakhil  bn,  aur 
m  tniiilu'ii  <.]nbul  karen,  jo  kuchh 
bonoMn  saiubne  rakha  jae,  khan  : 

9  Waban  ke  biuiaron  ko  chanpS. 
karo,  aur  un  se  kaho,  ki  Khuda  ki 
Mrkbabat  tiunbare  nazdik  di. 

10,  Aur  jis  shahr  men  ki  diikin!  bo, 
aur  we  tumben  oobil  na  karen,  to  ba- 
har jake  wainln  ki  sarakon  par  kaho, 
ki 

1 1  Is  frard  tak,  jo  tumhare  slcihr  se 
ham  par  pari,  ham  tum  par  jhAr  dete 
hain :  magar  yib  jano,  ki  Khuda  ki 
MdsbAhat  tUTahAro  tuunik  ai  bah 

li;  Maig  tum  se  kahti  Mrj,  ki  Us 
din  Sadiim  kd  hdl  us  nhahr  ki  bania- 
bftt  riyida  ipihil  bardfcbt.  ke  hogi! 

13  Ai  Kor&ziit,  t-ujh  jwr  afsos  !  Ai 
Baitnnida,  tujli  par  afsoK !  kyiinki  yib 
karji.ui:Ueij,  jo  uimliire  darmiyan  ili- 
khai  payin,  a^rar  Siir  o  SaidA  uien  di- 
kbai  jatin,  to  unbon  ne  tat  orhke,  aur 
khak  mog  baithke,  kab  ka  ta'uba  kiyi 
hotA. 

14  Ma^ar  Riir  o  Saidd  ke  liye  tum- 
hiiri  oi*b»1  'adalat  men  bardaaht  kar- 
iib,  :'u-,in  hoga. 

15  Aur,ai  Kafarnilhtiin,  tu  jo&sruan 


Vn  kd  manndi  knrke  phir 


LU'QA',  X.  Ek  shari'ahhin  h'i  sum'O. 


tak  pahunchAyd  gayA  hai,  dozakh  men  ,ki     hamesha    ki    zindagi    ki    waria 


girAyA  jin  «A. 

16  Jo  tumhAri  suntA,  meri  suntA 
hai ;  aur  jo  tumben  haqir  jantA  hai, 
mujhe  haqir  jAuta  hai:  aur  Jo  inujhe 
haqir  jAntA  hai,  nse  jia  ne  mujh  ko 
bhejA  hai,  ha<|ir  jAntA  hai, 

17  ^  We  satUir  khusJit  ae  phir 
Ake  kahne  lago,  Ai  Kliudawand,  tere 
nani   bo   Bhayatln   bh'i    hamArc    tahi' 

18  Tab  lis  ne  nn  se  kahA,  Main  nc 
Shaitan  ku  bijli  ki  mAnind  Asman  H 
girte  dek  ha. 

19  Dckho,  main  ne  tam  ko  sirap 
aur  bicbehliii  ke  raundm;  B»r,  aur 
dusknian  ki  sari  nudrat  par,  ikiitiyar 
diyA  hai;  aur  koi  kistf  tarah  tumben 
nuqsAn  na  pahunchawega. 

W  Mugar  isi  pmr  khu.-di  na  bo  ki 
nihen  tumhire  tahi'  hain ;  fetaJjtd  \- 
liye  klmshi  karo,  ki  tumhare  iiam 
tfmtm  par  likhe  hain. 

UI  1  Usi  ghari  Yiku'  nc  ji  men 
khush  hokn  kahA,  Ai  BAp,  tanin  aur 
zaniin  ko  Kliudawand,  main  teri  ta'rif 
kartA  htm,  ki  tu  ne  in  chiswn  ku 
lianaon  aur  'oiilniaiKlnn   se    chliipiiya, 

£ar  bachehon  par  zahir  kiya  :  han,  ai 
.ip,  ki  yiinhi  lero  huzur  men  pasan- 
dida  hi'ii. 

22  Aur  mere  BAp  ne  sab  kuchb 
mujhe  sorupA  hai  :  aur  koi  nah  i  y  JAntA 
ki  Bela  kaun  hai.magar  BAp;  aur  BAp 
kau  n  hai,  magar  Beta,  aur  wuh  jin  par 
Beti  zAhir  kiya  cba'he. 

23  1  Aur  shAginhui  ki  taraf  rniita- 
wajjih  hoku  mi  se  nirAle  men  kahA, 
Mubarak  we  Ankheii,  jo  yib  chJUSD 
dekhtin,  ki  tura  dekhte  ho, 

24  Kyunki  iiiamtum  se  kabtA  hun, 
ki  Bahut  se  nabion  aur  badsluilmn  m- 
chabA,  ki  jo  tinn  dekhte  ho,  dekheg, 
par  na  dekhi ;  aur  jo  kuchb.  sunte  ho, 
HOMO,  pai  na  sunA, 

25  Aur,  dekho,  ek  shari'at-sikhlAne- 
wAla  uthfi,  aur  yih  kahke  tu  ki  :i/.- 
niAish  ki,  ki  Ai  ustad, main  kva  karun 

91 


26  Us  ne  use  kahA,  ki  Shari'at  men 
kyAlikhA  hai?  tii  hiu tarah  prirhtii  hai? 

27  Us  no  jawAb  meri  kahA,  Tu 
Kliudawand  ko,  jo  tera"  Khuda  hai, 
apne  «Are  dil,  aur  apni  lari  jan,  aur 
apne  sarezor,  aur  apni  uari  samaib  se, 
piyar  bar;  aur  jaiaA  Ap  ko,  waiaa  bi 
apne  parosi  ko. 

28  Us  ne  use  kahA,  Tu  ne  thik 
jawab  diyA:  yihi  kar,  to  iiogA. 

29  Par  us  ne  yih  ehAhke  ki  apne 
ta,ir_  Hfetbic  thahrAwu,  Yisu'  se  kaiiA, 
ki  MerA  parosi  kauu  hai? 

30  Yisii'  no  jawAb  men  kahA,  ki  Ek 
ehakhs  Yarusalam  se  IrihA  ko  utar 
jAtA  thA,  aur  dAktion  men  jA  para. ;  we 
use  nangA  aur  ghAyal  ka'rke  idh-mflA 

Ciuiul'  i^iiye. 

3 1  lttifaqan  ek  kAhin  us  rAh  se  ja 
niklA :  aur  us  ko  dekhke  kiuAre  se 
cbalA  gayA. 

32  Isi  tarah  ek  Lewf  bhi  us  jagah 
AyA,  aur  use  dekhkar  kinAre  ne  cbalA 
gayA. 

88  Par  ek  musAfir  SAmari  wah  Ari 
AyA,  aur  us  ko  deklike  rahm  kiyA, 

34  Aur  us  ke  pA«  Ake  us  ke  zakb- 
nion  ko  tel  aur  riai  dhAlko  bAnd'ha, 
aur  apne  jAtiwar  pir'  sawir  karAke 
MarAe  men  Le  gayA,  aur  us  ki  khabar- 
dAri  ki. 

35  Aur  dusre  din  jab  jAne  lagA,  do 
diuar  nikalkar  libat hiyaiv  ku  m;.  ■..  t 
kahA,  ki  Is  ki  fchabardiri  kar:  aur  jo 
kuobh  is  se  ziyAda  kiiarch  hugA,  main 
phir  ake  tujlie  ada  kunilai, 

S6  Ab  in  tinon  meo"  se,  us  ka,  jo 
dAkiion  men  ja  parA  thA,  tu  kis  ko 
parosi  jAntA  hai? 

37  Us  ne  kahA,  Us  ko,  jis  no  us  par 
rahm  kiyA.  Tab  Yisu'  ue  use  kahA, 
Jii,  tu  bhJ  aisA  hi  kar. 

38  1  Aur  aba  hiid,  ki  jab  jAte  the, 
wuh  ek  basti  men  paliuneliA :  aur 
Martil»  tiAme  ek  'aurat  ne  use  apne 
ghar  men  utara. 


Du'a  mtbngne  fcd  taur.  LV  QA',  XI.  Farmon  par  'aib  lagiuta, 

39  Aur   alariyam   n;ime  us  ki   ek  uthkar  uw  n, i  degii,  mugar  ua  ki  U- 

hahin   thi,  jo   Yisd*  ke   pdrwon   ptelfiay&f  kesahab  uthega,  aur  jitni  dar- 


baithke  uh  ki  kalam  sunti  tbi, 

40  Bar  Martlid  ue,  bfthut  khidmat 
se  ghabrai  bui,  ua  ke  pas  fJse  kflht,  ki 
Ai  Khudiwand,  k  ya  tujha  [mrwa  B*- 
bin  ki  mari  batin  ne  niujhe  akela 
khidmat  iiii-ri  chliora  hai?  «b  use  kali, 
ki  meri  madad  kara, 

41  Tab  Yiau'  06  jawab  mon  use 
kaha,Martha.aiMartha,tu  bahul  cMz- 
on  ku  wastenkrugbiibrahat  meii  had  i 

■lli   Par  ok  dii/.  >.aiiir  bai :  60  Ma- 
riyam   ne  wuh  achcidia  hissa  dunia 
bai,  jo  ua  no  uber  liyd  ua  jaoga. 
XI  BA'B. 

AUR  aisa  bila,  ki  wuh  pk  jagah 
du'a  uiangta  tbi;  jad  mang 
chukd,  ek  06  U»  ki;  slitigirdon.  meij  se 
us  ko  kahii,  Ai  Khudiwand,  batu  ko 
du'a  mdngua  siklia,  jai.-a  ki  Viihauiia 
n+!  apuc  slidgiidi>9  ko  sikhayi, 

2  Us  ue  uu  s-  kaha,  Jab  tum  du'a 
mango.  Do  kabo,  Ai  haiiiare  Bap,  jo 
Amnin  par  bal,  'i'ere  dahi  ki  taqdis  bo. 
Teri  bibUhahat  awe.  Teri  nmrad  jaisi 
asman  par,  zaniin  par  bhi  bat  awr, 

3  Hamari  roz  ki  roti  bar  roz  hamen 
de. 

4  Aur  hainure  giuiahon  ko  bak bah  ; 
kyiinki  bam  bhi  bar  ek  ko,  jo  hamara 
«jarzdar  hai,  bakludite  baui.  Aur  haiu- 
erj  azmaish  mag  ua  dai;  baiki  lima 
ko  burai  ae  chhma. 

R  Ua  ne  un  se  kaha,  Tura  men,  se 
kaun  bal  jia  M  ek  dost  ho,  aur  wuh 
adbi  rdt  ku  us  ke  pas  jake  kabc,  ki  Ai 
dottj  MUJhe  titi  reli  ttdhirdo; 

G  Kyiinki  mera  dos  t  saiar  h  lririv 
nas  liyi  bai,  aur  nn?re  pas  kuchh  ua- 
bin  ki  uh  ke  age  rakkiin ; 

7  Aur  wuh  andar  sg  jawab  mej) 
k.'iiir,  ki  Hujhe  taklif  na  de:  ki  ab 
daiwa/.a  bumi  hai,  aur  mere  larke 
mere  eatb  btohhaune  pai  hiin ;  main. 
uthkar  tujbe  do  nahin  sakta, 

8  Main  tum  we  kahta  hiin,  Agarcbi 
wub  ii  sabab  ki  wuh  ua  ka  dost  bai, 

92 


kar  hai,  use  deua. 

9  So  main  bhi  tumben  kabta  hnn, 
Mango,  to  luTiiUoy  diya  jacgd  ;  dhiiu- 
dbo,  to  paoge ;  kliatkbatao,  to  tum- 
barc  liye  k  hobi  jaega. 

10  Kviiiski  bar  uk  jo  BtAogtfl'  bai, 
Ifla  hai;  aur  jo  dhi'mdbt.-i  hai,  pita 
hai;  aur  jo  khatkhatata  hai,  ua  ke 
Uye  kholdjaega. 

11  Tuiu  meu  se  kauu  aisd  bap  bai, 
ki  jab  us  k&  bela  roti  mauge,  use  y&t- 
tharde?  ya  machhii  mauge,  macbbii 
k  t'  hadlc  use  aainp  de  ? 

12  Ya  agar  anda  mangu,  ua  ko  bicli- 
'■liini  de? 

li  Pas  jab  tum  bure  hokar  apne 
larkon  ko  achchhi  ehi'/.uii  deno  jante 
tto,  to  wuh  Bap,  jo  asman  par  bal, 
kitna  ziyada  un  ko,  jo  ua  «e  mangte 
hidu.  Bab  i  Quds  degi? 

H  1  Aur  wuh  ek  deo  ko,  jo  gnnga 
tba,  nU.il  t  a  iba.  Aur  aisa  hua,  ki 
jab  dco  ujkal  gaya,  wuh  gungdbola; 
aur  logoii  oe  ta'aijuh  kiya. 

15  Par  ba'/on  ne  un  meij  ue  kahii, 
ki  Wuh  deiig  ke  nanlar  Ua'al-Kabiib  ki 
iiiaitaii  ae  di'oii  ko  nikdita  bai. 

IB  Auroii  ne  azmaish  ke  liyc  us  se 
ek  asiuaui  uishdn  matigi. 

17  Par  u»  ne  un  ke  kbiydlon  ko 
jdnke  uu  kc  kalid,  ki  Jo  jo  biidshabut 
apas  men  tnvrk tiildf  holi,  wirau  lui  jait 
hai;  aur  aisii.  liar  ok  gbar  jo  apna 
barkbildl'  bai,  ujar  jdtd  hai, 

la  Pas  agUMUnto  apoe  w  khilaf 
ho  jac,  m  n.,  ki  badshdhat  kyunkar 
qaim  rtihegi  ?  kyiinki  tum  kahte  bo. 
Main  dcon  ko  Ba'al-Babiib  ki  madad 

nikilta  hdn. 

19  Bliald,  agar  main  deoaj  ko  Tta'al- 
stabiib  ki  madad  sc  uikalta  luin,  to 
tuinli.'irti  bete  kis  ki  madad  se  nikdlte 

_f  i»  liye  we  hi  tumhari  Insaf 
karenye. 

20B«r  agar  mam  Khudi  ki  ungli 
we  deoti  ko  uikalta  hiin,  to  be-yhakk 


w 


UJUV,  xr. 


z&hiri  UU, 


Kliudtl  ki  baduhahat.  tumhire  pin  4-     32  Xinawah  ko  log  'adalat  merj  is 


[Hkb< 

21  J  ab  zorawi 

pot  ghar  ki  ehauki  de,  us  ka 
mal  b;ti'li;i  rahta  hai: 

22  Par  agar  koi  uh  se  zoriiwar  us 
par  charh  awe,  aur  uao  jlto,  t»  wuh 
sab  hat'hyar,  jin  par  us  ka  bharosa 
tba,  ehhin  letii  hai,  aur  us  ke  kir.  Ih 
mal  ku  baut  deta  hai. 

23  Jo  moro  sath  nahin,  mera  mu- 
kluilit"  hai :  aur  jo  nifire  satu.  jam'a 
ualiitj  karti,  so  bithrata  hai. 

24  ..lab  milisi  k  ruh  admi  se  brihar 
nikalti,  tfl  siikhi  jagahoij  rnen  aram 
dhuiniliti  phirti ;  aur  jab  uahin  piti, 
kahti  hai,  ki  Main  anoa  ghar  ko,  jis 
«f  uikli  lidn,  phir  jaiingi ; 

25  Aur  aku  KM  jhara  aur  lais  pati 


2fi  Tab  jak«i  aur  sat  ruhen,  jo  uh  se 

W.ltar  hain,  apne  sslih  lili  hai;  aur 

we  us  meii  dakhil  lioku  wahaii   hasti 

hain:   aur   uh   admi   ka   piuhhla   hal 

■    bur»  linta  hai. 

27  Tf  Aur  aisa  hiU,  ki  jab  wuh  yih 
bfttafl  kahta  vha,  ok  'aurat  ne  bhir 
BMn  ae  pukarke  use  kaka,  Mubarak 
hiti  wuh  pet,  jis  men  tu  raba,  aur  wuh 
eliliatian  jo  Mi  ne  pin. 

28  Us'iie  kaha, Hta,  mubarak  we 
hain  Jo  Khuda  ka  kalam  sunte,  aur 
use  mante  hain. 

29  %  Aur  jab  ban  bhir  hone  lagi, 
us  ne  kahna  shurii'kiya,  ki  Is  «amani- 
ke  log  bure  hain  :  we  nkh&ii  dhun- 
dhte  hain ;  par  koi  nishan  un  ko  oiva 
na  jaega,  niaga  r  Ytinaa  nabi  ka  nishan. 

30  Ky  utiki  jaisa  Yunus  Nniawah 
ke  logon  ke  liyc  nishan  htia,  usi  tarah 
lini  l  Adam  bhi  is  zamane  ke  logon 
ke  liye  hogd. 

31  'Adiilat  tncrj  dakkhin  ki  malika 
is  zamami  k*  logon  ke  Raih  ut.hegi,aur 
unhen  gunahgar  thabrawegi  i  kyunki 
wuh  umfri  ke  kami  re  «e  Sulaiman  ki 
hikmat  sunne  ii ;  aur,  dekho,  yahAn 
f- k  La-  ji>  Sulaiman  n&  bara  hai. 

i»3 


zamace  ke  logon  ke  sath  nthengc,  nur 
tebal  halhyAr  bau- ! unhen  guunlig;ir  thahriwengi;:  kyi'mki 
unimu  ne  Ytinas  ki  mau  Adi  se  tauba 
ki;  aur,  dekho,  yahan  Ydnas  ah  beri 
hai. 

33  Koi  chirag  jalakc  chliipe  makan 
men,  ya  paimane  tale,  uahin  raklna, 
baiki  chiragdan  par,  ta  ki  andar  jane- 
wale  roshni  dekhun, 

84  Badan  ka  cliirag  ankii  hai :  i* 
liye  jab  teri  linkh  achohhi  hai,  to  teri 
sara  badan  nwhaa  hai;  aur  jad  bini 
hai,  to  tera  badan  bhi  anilhera  hai. 

35  Pas  khabardiir,  liafi  na  ho,  ki 
wuh  mi  r,  ju  tujh  men  hai,  ti'uiki  im 
jae. 

36  So  agar  tera  tamani  badan  man- 
au ho,  aur  kui  'azii  andhera  na  rahe, 
to  tamani  tuhan  hoga,  Biaa  ki  jatM 
eidrafj  apnt  chamak  nv  tujlie  roshau 
kare. 

37  f  Aur  jab  wuh  liat  karta  tha, 
ek  Farisi  no  usseilarkhwastki,ki  merc 
«arh  khiina  bhaiye ;  tud  wuh  andar 
jiike  khiine  bait  ha. 

38  Aur  t'arisi  ne  yih  dekhko  ki  us 
ne  khine  ke  age  nabin  uahaya,  ta'aj- 
jub  kiya. 

311  Par  Khudawaiiil  i»;  at  ko  kaha, 
ki  Ai  Farihin,  tum  piyala  aur  rikabi 
ko  tifiar  se  »Af  karte  ho;  par  Umihdni 
andar  hit.  aur  bunii  se  bhara  hai. 

40  Ai  n&dano,  kya  jis  ne  bahar  ko 
lianaya,  andar  ko  bhi  na  banftyi  ? 

41  l'as  jo  chi/.i'ti  t.uinhare  via  ma> 
jud  hain,  un  men  M  khair.it.  kvo) 
aur,  dekho,  eab  kuchli  tumhare  liye 
p&k  hog&. 

42  Par,  ai  Fari.sio,  tum  par  afsos ! 
ki  tum  podinu,  uur  siuiali,  aur  har  ek 
tarkari  ki  dahyaJri  detrf  ho,  aur  insaf 
aur  Khuda  ki  nmhubbat  ko  tarah 
dete :  ohahijnj  tba,  ki  in  ko  karte,  aur 
ud  ko  bM  na  chhone. 

43  Ai  Farisfo,  tum  par  afsos!  ki 
tum  'ib.adatkhanon  men  wnlr  japah, 
aur  bazaron  men  salam  ko  chihto  ho, 


Masih  kd  ta'lim  dend,  M  log     LU'QA 

44  Ai  riyakar  faqlho,  aur  Farisio, 
tum   |ia,ra(Mis!  ki  tum  cbliipi  gang 

ki  minimi  ho,ki  frlmf  ju  un  parchalte 
hain  nahin  jaute. 

45  <j  Tab  Hhari'at  ke  ftikldanewal- 
on  men  86  ek  nc  us  ke  jawab  men 
kalii,  ki  Ai  Ustad,  in  bAtotj  ke  kahno 
se  tii  hainen  bbi  malamat  karta  ha:. 

46  Us  ne  kaha,  Ai  shari'at  ko  sikh- 
lariflwalo,  tum  parafnoflI  ki  tam  aise 
hojb,  jin  ka  uthaiia  niuahkil  hai,  nd- 
BUegm  Udtaao,  aur  ap  ok  ungli  se 
un  bojhorj  ko  naluri  eiduite. 

47  Tum  par  afsosl  ki  tum  nabion, 
ki  qabrorj  ko  bansf.o  ho,  aur  t  umbar? 
bipaidorj  ne  un  ko  qatl  kiya. 

48  Pas  tum  apne  bapdidon  ke  kam 
liar  gawahi  dete,  aur  us  se  rii/i  ruhi.  ■. 
kyiinki  unhort  ne  un  ko  qatl  kiya,  aur 
tum  un  kf  qabren  banata  bo. 

49  Is  liye  Klinda  ki  hikmat  ne  bhi 
kflhd  hai,  ki  Main  nabion  aur  rasul  t  m 
ko  un  ke  ])afl  bhejfiriga  :  we  un  men 
se  ba'zorj  ko  qatl  kurerjge,  aur  sati- 
werjge: 

50  Tft  ki  Bab  nabion  ka  khi'in,  jo 
duitya  ke  «huni'  .se  bahaya  gaya,  is 
zamani-  ke  logon  se  talab  kiya  jas: 

51  ITabil  ke  khi'in  se  !eke  Zakariyah 
ke  khuu  tak,  jo  qurbaugah  aur  haikal 
ka  bich  men  mira  (jaya :  harj,  main 
tmii  sm  kali*»  hrin,  ki  ls  h/ zamana  ke 
logon  se  tulah  kiya  jaega. 

52  Ai  ahari'at  kesikhlinewalo,  tum 
par  afaos  i  ki  tum  ne  ma'rifat.  ki  kan- 
ji le  li :  tum  ap  dakhil  na  hue,  aur 
daklii[  honewiion  ko  bbi  nok  rak  ha. 

63  Jad  wuh  yih  haten  un  se  kari 
raha  tba,  fiiqib  aur  Fanai  DBB  bc-tarah 
chimatne  aur  chhcrne  lage,  ki  w  uli 
bahut  W-ten  kue : 

54  Aur  ghat  lagake  talash  men  the, 
ki  us  ke  munh  Ke  koi  bit  r>akar  pawen, 
t»  ki  us  par  nallah  karen. 
XII  BA' U. 

ITNE  men    hazarnrj  admi   ki  bhlr 
jam'a  hiii ;  is  tarah  ki  ek  dtlsre ' 
par  giri  parui  tha.  *  us  ne  bab  se  pahle 
04  ' 


XII.  rii/'ikdri  st'  r'f-uiko.s  rahen. 
apne  shagirdon  se  yili  kahna"  shurri' 
kiya,  ki  Farisiorj  ke  khaiuir  so,  jo  riya 
hai,  ehaukas  nih  o. 

2  Kyuuki  koi  chiz  dhanpi  nahin, 
jo  khul  na  jae ;  aur  na  chhipi,  jo  jam 
na  jae. 

3  Ia  liyo  ki  jo  kuchh  tum  ne  an- 
dhere  men  kaha  hai,  tmj41fl  men  su- 
naya  jaega ;  aur  to  kuchh  tum  ne 
ki'thrioii  iih'B  kanun  kau  kaha,  koth- 
on  par  manadi  kiya  jaega. 

4  Magar  main  tum  se,  jo  tnere  dost 
lio»  kahtti  hiin,  ki  Un  se,  jo  badan  ko 
qatl  karte  hain,  aur  ba'd  uh  ke  kuchh 
aur  kar  nahin  sakte,  mat  dam. 

G  I,ekiu  inaiii  tumben  batata  hiln, 
ki  kis  se  dam:  Uh  sc  daro,  jia  ko  qatl 
karne  ke  ba'd  ikutiyar  hai  ki  jahan- 
uani  men  d;ile ;  lian,  maiti  tumben 
kahta  lu'm,  ki  Dai  as  dam. 

tj  Kya  do  paise  par  paneh  gauriyii 
liahio  "biktiij?  par  kihi  ko  un  nien  se 
Kbuila  bhiila  nahin. 

7  Baiki  tumharo  sir  ke  sah  hal  bhi 
giue  hain.  Pas  niat  daro :  tum  bahut 
[liiuraiyi'Ti  se  bihtar  ho. 

8  Aur  main  tumben  kahtS  hurj,  ki 
Jo  koi  admion  ke  a?e  inera  iqrar  kare, 
Ibu  i  A 'dam  bhi  Khuda  ke  firishtcn 
ke  age  us  ka  iijrar  karega: 

9  Par  jis  ne  admion  ke  age  mera 
inkarkiya  hai,  KJnida  ke  firishion  ke 
i'ige  us  ka  inkar  hogi. 

10  Aur  jo  koi  Ion  i  A'dam  ke  khi- 
laf koi  bit  kabe,  us  ko  mu'aT  hogi  : 
par  jis  ne  Ruh  i  Quds  ke  haqq  men 
kulr  kaha,  m  ko  niu'af  na  hogi. 

11  Aur  jab  we  tura  ko  'ibadatkhAn- 
on  men,  aur  hakimon  aur  ikhtiyar- 
wilon  ke  pas  le  jaen,  to  Hkr  na  karo 
ki  kaisa  ya  kya  jawab  doge,  ya  kya 
kahoge ; 

12'Kyiirjki  Rdh  i  Quds  usi  ghari 
tumben  sikhawegi,  ki  kya  kahni  clia- 
hiyc. 

13  %  Aur  bhir  men  se  ek  ne  use 
kaha,  ki  Ai  Ustad,  mere  bhai  ae  kah, 
k  i  Mujiie  miras  baut  de. 


Ldlach  aur  dunyAwi  ckhan        LU'QA't  XII. 

14  I'ar  «s  TiO  ubc  kfchi,  ki  Ai  admi, 
kis  ne  mujlio  tum  par  qa.zi  ya  ban$- 
newala  muijarrar  k  iya  ? 

15  Aur  ua  nc  un  se  kaha,  ki  Kha- 
bardir  raho,  aur  lalach  se  kanam  karo : 
kyiinki  kisii  ki  zmdagi  us  ke  mil  ki 
ziy  adati  ae  nahin. 

1G  Aur  U«  ne  un  se  ek  tamsil  kuhi, 
ki  Ek  daulatmand  ki  kheti  bahul 
lagi: 

17  Wuh  apne  dil  men  sochks  kah- 
ne  laga,  ki  main  kya  karun,  ki  mere 
yaliaii  jagah  naliiu,  jahag  apna  haail 
jam'a  karun  ? 

IH  Tali  ua  ne  kaha.  Main  y  ih  kar- 
linga;  ki  apiii  kothian  dhauiiga,  aur 
ban'  bana&nga;  aur  wahari  apua  ta- 
mim  hasil  aur  mal  jam'a  kaninga  : 

19  Aur  apni  jan  se  kabirnya,  ki  Ai 
jan,  tere  pas  babu  t  «a  mal  barasuti  ke 
liye  jam'a  hai;  cbain  kar,  kba,  jii, 
khush  rah. 

20  Magar  Khuda  ne  ua»!  kahi,  Ai 
nadiii,  isi  rit  teri  jan  tujh  se  ruang- 
enge :  pas  jo  t\i  no  t&iyar  kiva,  kis  ka 
liogi  ? 

21  Aisa  bi  wuh  hai,  jo  apne  liye 
khazana  jam'a  karta  hai,  aur  Khudd 
ku  liye  daulat  nahiri  jam'a  karta'. 

22  T  PMr  un  ne  apno  shagirdon  se 
kaha,  Is  liye  main  tum  m  kahta  hiin, 
lii  Apni  jan  ke  wasta  tikr  na  karo,  ki 
ham,  kya  khawyie;  aur  na  badan  ke 
liye,  ki  kva  pahinotjgo. 

23  Ki  jan  khurak  se  besh  b 
badan  posbak  ae. 

24  Kauwon  ko  dekho,  ki  na  bote, 
na  katte  hain;  aur  na  un  ka  khatta, 
na  kuth  i  hai;  taU  bhi  Khuda  uuhen 
khilata  hai :  tum  to  chiriyog  se  kabin 
bibtar  bo  ? 

25  Tum  men  ae  kaun  hai,  ki  fikr 
karke  apni  'umr  ko  bath  bhar  barha 
sake : 

2ti  Pas  jab  itni  chhoti  bat  nahin 
kar  sakte,  to  kis  liye  baui  chizon  ki 
fikr  katte  bo  ? 

27  Soauun  ko  dekho,  ki  kis  tarah 


M  fikr  M  Ubat. 
barhti  hain :  wena  milinat  kavti,  u.i 
katti  hain  :  par  main  tumben  kahti 
biiii,  ki  Sulaiman  bhi  apni  s:iri  sbftn 
shaukat  mes  un  men  so  ek  ki  ma- 
nind  paliine  na  tha. 

28  Jab  Kliudaghasko.jo  ajmaidan 
men  hai,  aur  kal  tam; r  men  jhouki 

,  aisa  pahinata,  to,  ai  kam-i'atiqa- 
do,  kitna  iiyada  wuh  tumben  pahiu-i- 
wega? 

29  Aur  tum  is  ki  dnryaft  men  na 
raho,  ki  ham  kya  khaenge,  ya  kya. 
pienge,  aur  na  ghabrao. 

30  Kyunki  in  sab  chizon  ki  talilah 
uiya  ke  log  karte  hnin  :  par  tumhari 

Uap  janta  liai    ki  tum  un  ke  imihtaj 
bo. 

31  1  Baiki  Khuda  ki  Mdshahat 
dhundho;  ki  tumben  yu  sab  chissoft 
bhi  milengi. 

32  Aicbhutejhund,matdar;  kyiin- 
ki tumhare  BA  p  ko  pasand  dya  ki 
badshahat  tumben  do, 

33  Jo  kuchh  tumhdrd  hai  becho, 
aur  kbaivat  karo ;  apne  liye  batuo  jo 
puranu  nahin  bote,  aur  kba/.ana  jo 
uabin  ghatta,  auman  par,  jahan  chnr 
nawlik  nahin  atA,  aur  kira  nahin  kbi- 
t-d,  jam'a  karo. 

34  Kyunki  jahan  tumbara  khazana 
hai,  wahin  tumhiira  dil  bhi  rabega. 

35  Clianiye  ki  tumbdri  kamar  ban- 
dhi  rabe,  aur  tumbara  diya  jalta 
rahe; 

;16  Aur  tum  khud  un  (idmion  ki 
maniud  bo,  jo  apne  khawitid  ki  rah 
dekhte  hon,  ki  kab  wuh  ahadi  men  fo 
awe  ;  ta  ki  jab  iwe,  aur  khatkhatawe, 
jhat  us  ke  wiste  darwaza  khol  den. 

37  Mubarak  hain  wa  uaukar,  jin 
ko  un  kA  khdwind  ake  jagta  pavre: 
main  tumben  s:u'!t  kihin  fedn,  ki  Wuli 
ap  kamar  bandhke  unhen  kbann  ko 
bithawega,  aur  pas  ake  un  ki  khidmat 

k:lH/. L. 

'66  Aur  agar  wuh  duare  palrnr,  yA 
tisre  pahar,  awe,  aur  aiaa  |«iwe,  to  mu- 
biiak  iiain  we  uaukar. 


Mwiki  Hudimon  LU'QA' 

39  Yih  tnm  ku  ma'lnm  hai,  ki  agar 
ghar  k  i  malik  janta  ki  ehor  Ha  ghari 
iwegi,  t<i  jajrta  ralita,  aur  &pne  ghari 
mcTj  sindh  m&rne  na  dcta. 

10  Pas  tam  bhi  laiyar  raho  :  ki  ji« 
ghari  tutn  khiyal  naiii'n  karte,  Ibn  i 
A 'dam  (iwcga. 

41  ^  Tali  Fatrus  ne  nse  kaha,  ki 
Ai  Kiiudiiwaud,  tii  yili  tamsil  tam  hi 
■e  kahta  hai,  ya  Bab  seV 

■!'J  Kiiuduwaud  ne- kaha,  Kaun  hai 
wuh  (liyanafalar  ;iur  d>i»a  khansnmau. 
jin  ko  khawnnl  apne  uaukaron  par 
iiiu.|arr;ir  kare,  ki  mi  ke  bina  ki  roti 
Wiqt  par  diya  kare  ? 

43  Mubarak  lini  wnh  nauknr,  Jise 
uh  ka  khawmd  aku  alga  ki  karte  pawe. 

■J4  Main  tum  m  nch  k:il i t:i  lniij,  ki 
wnh  UH  |jn  N.ire  mal  pir  mukhi&r 
karega. 

j  5  l'ar  agar  wnh  naukar  apne  (lil 
meg  kaha,  ki  Sfara  khaiviml  ani;  men 
di'i  karta  hai,  aur  <mliim  lauiicliim  ko 
mania,  aur  khana  pilui,  aur  inusl  houa 
slmni'  kare ; 

40  To  us  imukar  ka  khawind  aisc 
din,  ki  wuh  us  ki  rak  na  take,  KUT 
ai.si  gbtti,  ki  wnh  na  JanO,  awegit  aur 
us  ko  do  tukre  karke  us  ka  hhwa  Ire- 
inninoii  ke  nAlIi  muqanar  kurega. 

-17  Par  wuh  uaiiktir,  jin  ne  apne 
khawind  ki  outnsi  jiini.  pa  apne  l-u.in 
laiyar  na  raklui,  aur  us  ki  mur/i  ko 
iiiiiwali'i  na  kiyil,  bubut  mar  kh&tga. 

Ih  l'ar  jis  ne  na  jan&,  aur  mar 
khane  ka  kain  kiya,  tteori  mar  khae,- 
Ra.  So  jise  bahut  diya  gaya,  us  se 
bahut  hisab  legjni  aur  jise  bahut 
iiiyada  soinpa  gaya,  us  se  /.iyada  man- 
gB&ge< 

4y  1  Main  Barain  par  i?  lasane 
ayi  brirj ;  aur  main  kya  hi  chahta 
lilin,  ki  Ug  cfmki  hoti  ! 

00  l'ar  mujhe  iJc  baptiuma  rana 
hai  :  aur  main  kaisii  tiing  In'iii.jab  tak 
ki  pura  ua  ho  1 

M  Kya  tum  guman  karte  ho,  ki 
main  /amin  par  mol  kivrwane  aya| 
W 


,  xrrr.  Mfl*% 

lii'in?    Naluri,    main    tatahan     k*htii 
h  lili,  baiki  juddt. 

52  Kyiinki  ab  se  ek  ghar  ke  pdnch 
liilmi,  tin  do  ke  iiarkhilaf  honge,  aur 
do  l.in  k.'. 

53  Aur  Wp  beto  so,  aur  bel4  bdp  se, 
anr  uni.  lili  se,  aur  Mi  ma  P",  mr  sa-s 
bahu  se,  aur  bthd  eJbl  M  bnrkhilrif 
boaC 

54  lf  TJa  ne  lagcm  «i  yih  bl.i  kali;i, 
ki  Jab  turn  hadli  rnrh.'iiliim  m;  uthtt 
dekhtu  ho,  to  jliat.  kahte,  ki  Menh  ata 
hai;  aur  aisa  hi  Imta. 

55  Aur  jab  tum  dukhte  lio  l;i  ila- 
kldoi  u!i:ilti  hai,  to  kabtfl  ho,  ki  Garuii 
hogi ;  aur  aisa  hi  hoti. 

54  Ai  riyakaro,  tum  lamin  aur 
asmau  ko  imtiyiK  karue  iautuho;  is 
zainane  ko  kyiin  nalii[i  iintiydz  karte  ? 

57  Aur  tum  Ap  hi  kyrin.  tiuhin  thah- 
rate,  ki  ivajib  kya  luiiV 

ii«  T  Aur  jab  tu  apne  mudda'i  ka 
nftth  hakim  ke  pas  jiita  hai,  rah  men 
kosiiish  kar  ki  tu  us  se  chlmniva  \:\>- ; 
nisS.  an  hti,  ki  wuli  tujlr  ku  hakim  p&S 
kliimih  lc  jav,  aur  hakim  tu'|li  ko  piya- 
d&  k  e  luiiviilr  kate,  aur  piyada  tujli  ku 
i|iiid  men  <l:Uo. 

5!J  Main  tujh  sc  kahta  li i'i n ,  ki  Jab 
tak  kaiiri  kauri  ada  na  kare,  ivnliuij  m 

h;l  obfaAtejga. 

X1JI  BAB, 

U  S  wnqt  ba'te  hii/ir  the,  jo  uw  un 
Jalilion  ki  khulMir  dete  the,  jin 
ka  khun  i'ilatus  ne  uu  W  ipiri-aiiiun 
ke  siith  mildya  thd. 

2  Yisii'  ne  nnhen  jawab  men  kaha, 
K  ya  tum  samsjlite  h<>,  k  i  ye  Jah'H  >iif- 
rlaliliim  ^  Kiyilda  ^iinah^ar  the,  ki 
aisa  duk  h  paya? 

.'!  Miiiri  tum  se  kahta  hi'n>,  Nahin  : 
pai  agar  tum  timba  na  karo,  aab  isi 
tatah  iialak  hoee. 

4  Ya  wo  atharab,  jin  par  Siloam 
men  hurj  gira,  nur  dab  mare,  kya 
smiajtite  lio,  ki  we  Taruaalam  k<'  sali 
rahntwalou  ne  tlyada  giuinligar  the? 

u  Main  tum  .-n.'  kahta  lnin,  Nahin  : 


Anjir  ke  tfaraJeht  !,-i  faimtf.       LU'QA',  XIII.     Khanlal  ke  dana  H  tnmsil. 


par  agar  tauba  na  karo,  tum  sab  isi 
tarah  haldk  hoge. 

U  1  Aur  us  11«  yih  tamsil  kahi ;  ki 
Kiai  ke  anjur  ke  hdg  mori  ek  anjir  kfi 
darakht  la<;d  thi :  us  ne  ake  us  ka 
mewa  dhundhd,  par  na  paya. 

7  Tab  us  ae  bagbin  ae  kahd,  Dekh, 
tin  baras  ae  main  ake  is  anjir  ka 
phal  dliuririhtd  hun,  par  nahin  pdtd: 
iisu  kat  rial ;  kdhe  ko  zainin  roke 
hai? 

8  Us  ne  jawab  men  use  kahd,  Ai 
Khudawand,  is  sal  aur  use  rahue  de, 
ki  us  ke  giril  thald  kltotlun,  aur  khad 
ddli'm : 

9  Shiyad  ki  phale :  iialsiii  to,  ba'd 
'.is  k  c  kat  daliyo. 

10  Aur  sabt  ke  din  wuh  ek  'ibiidal- 
khdne  men  ta'lim  deta  thd. 

11  *$  Aur,  dekho,  ek  'aurat  thi,  jiM 
ko  athdrah  harus  se  kisi  ruh  ke  ba'is 
kamzori  htU,  aur  wuh  kubri  ho  gayi 
thi,  aur  apne  ta,fn  inutluu,  sidhi  ua 
kar  sakti  tlii. 

12  Y  isu'  ne  use  dekhke  pos  buldyd, 
aur  us  sc  kahd,  Ai  'aurat,  tu  apni 
kamzori  se  chhuti. 

IS  Aur  ua  ne  apne  hath  uh  par 
rakhe:  wunhin  sfdlii  bo  gayi,  aur 
Khudd  ki  ta'rif  karne  lagi'. 

14  Tab  'ibadalkhino  kii  sardar,  is 
liye  ki  YisiV  ne  "sabt  ke  din  changa 
k  t  ya,  k  ha  fa,  hiia,  aur  jawab  deke  loguii 
ko  kahne  la^d,  Cliiia  din  bam  jin  nun 
kain  kami  rawa  hai :  pas  un  meii  ake 
change  ho,  na  ki  sabt  ke  din. 

15  Tab  Khudawand  ne  use  jawab 
men  kahd,  ki  Ai  riydkdr,  kyd  bar  ek 
tum  men  se  sabt  ke  din  apne  bail  ain 
gadhe  ko  than  se  nahirj  kholtd,  aur 
pdui  pildne  nahin  le  jdtd  ? 

16  Pas  kyd  mundsib  na  thi,  ki  yih 
jo  Abirahdm  ki  beti  hai,  jis  ko  Shaiiaii 
ne,  dekho,  atharah  baras  se  bdndh 
rakhd  thd,  sabt  ke  din  us  band  se 
chhurai  ide? 


hue:  aur  sari  bhir  \in  jalil  kartion  se, 
jo  us  se  hiie,  khush  bui. 

18  t  Phir'us  ne  kahd,  Khudd  ki 
bddslidhat  kis  ki  manind  hai?  main 
use  kis  se  uisbat  diin? 

19  Khardal  ke  ddna  ki  mdnind  hai, 
jis  ko  ek  idrai  ne  leke  apne  bdg  men 
boyd;  wuh  ngd,  aur  baji  per  hnij 
aur  ebiriyou  ne  us  ki  dalion  par  baserd 
kiyd. 

20  Aur  phir  us  ne  kahd,  Mu  i  u 
Khudd  ki  bddshdhat  ko  kis  m  nisbat 
d'un? 

21  Wuh  kharnirki  manind  hai,  jjee 
ek  'aurat  ne  luke  tin  paimdna  ate  men 
mildya,  yahdij  lak  ki  wuh  Bab  kha- 
inii'd  ho  gayd. 

22  Aur  wuli  Yariisalain  ko  jate  hiie 
shahr  sindir,  gauw  gdnw,  phirke  ta'- 
lim deta  tlid. 

23  Tab  ek  ne  use  kahd,  Ai  Khuda- 
wand, kyd  thore  hain,  jo  najat  pdte? 
Us  ne  un  se  kahd,  ki 

21  ^  Jan  ee  koshish  karo,  ki  tum 
tang  darwdza  se  ddkhil  bo:  kydnki 
main  tum  se  kanta  hi'rn,  ki  bohutere 
chdhenge  ki  ua  se  dakhil  hon,  par  na 
sakengo. 

25  .lab  ki  gliar  ke  mdlik  ne  ut.hke 
darwdza  band  kiyd  ho,  aur  tum  biliar 
kliara  boni,  aur  yih  kalike  daneaza 
khat.kiiatand  abuto*  karo,  ki  Ai  Klni- 
ddwand,  ai  Klmdiiwatid,  limnare  liye 
khol ;  wuh  andar  se  jawab  men  tum 
se  kahegd,  ki  Main  tum  ko  nahin  pah- 
chiluta,  ki  kah^  ke  ho  : 

26  Tab  tum  kahne  lagoge,  ki  Ham 
ne  tere  huzur  khaya  piya  hai,  aur  lu 
nehurodrigali  kuchonnicn  ta'lim  di  hai. 

27  Par  wuh  jawab  degd,  Maifl  |l|hl 
ie  kahta  hiin,  ki  tum  ko  nahin  pah- 
chdntd,  ki  kalian  ke  ho;  ai  badkaro, 
tum  sab  nuijh  se  dnr  ho. 

28  Wahdn  nniii  aur  ddnt  pisnd 
hopd,  jab  Abirahdm,  aur  Iz,biq,  aur 
Ya'qub,  aur  sab  nabfun  ko  Khudd  ki 
bdilshiihat    men    slnimil,    aur    dp    ko 


17  Aur  jad  wuh    \  ih  baten  kahtd 
hd,  us  ke  sab  mukiudii'  sharminda  bdhar  nikalihud,  uekht>g< 
97 


Yarumhim  par 


LU'QA',  XIV. 


:vha  karno. 


29  Aur  log  piirab,  pachchhim,  ut- 
tur,  dakkbin  se  dwenge,  aur  Khtuld  ki 
bdd^hdhat  aien  Iwiithesga. 

30  Aur,  dekho,  jo  pichhle  hain. 
pahle   horjge;  aur  jo  pahlo  hain,  so 
pichhle  bonge. 

31  %  L'si  dlo  hn'ze  Fnriston  ne  dke 
use  kaba,  ki  Kikal  ja,  aur  yahan  se 
rawdna  bn:  kyinkiHerodis tnjheoatl 
kiyaclialita  hal 

32  Ua  ue  mi  so  kaba,  ki  Jdke  us 
Jomri  ue  kaho,  ki  Dekh,  main  shai- 
tanon  kn  uikiiltd  huu,  aur  aj  o  kal 
cbanga  kar  rabi  buQ,  aur  tisro  diri 
apn:i.  U:\rn  pura  kari'iijga. 

33  Pas  ninjho  zarnr  liai,  ki  Aj  o  ka.1 
aur  parson  «air  kanin  :  kytinki  uahin 
ho  Bukti,  ki  nabi  Yarusalam  ke  babar 
balak  b  o. 

34  Ai  Yarunalam,  ai  Yarusalam,  jo 
nabioTi  ko  qatl  karti  bai,  aur  uti  ko,  jo 
lorepas  bhojo  jiii>'c',par,tlirfti> karti  bai : 
kai  Mr  main  ne  cbaba  ki  tere  larkon 
ko  jaina  karun,  jis  tarah  niurgi  apne 
bacbohoTi  ko  apne  paron.  tale  jam'a 
karti  hai.  par  timi  ne  na  chaha ' 

d5  Di-kho,  tumbara  ghar  tumhire 
liye  ujar  ehbord  jata  bai :  aur  main 
tumben  sach  k'abta  lunj,  ki  Mujh  ko 
na  uekbogc  us  waqt  tak  ki  turn  ka- 
boge,  Mubarak  hai  wub  jo  Khudd- 
wand  ke  nam  par  ata  bai. 

XIV  BA'R 

A  ISA'  hild,  ki  wuh  sabi  ke  din 
buzurg  Farisi'un  mcn  se  ek  ke 
ghar  kbane  gayi,  aur  we  us  ki  tak 
m  e  n  t  lu-. 

2  Aur,  dekho,  ki  ek  shakhs  us  kn 
sambne  thd,  jiso  jnlandhar  tha. 

3  Yisii'  no  jawab  men  shari'at  ke 
siklldnewdlon  aur  Farision  sg  kaha,  ki 
Sabt  tte  din  cliauga  kanta  rawa  bai,  y  i 
mihrri  ? 

4  We  ohup  rahe.  Tab  us  nn  uae 
pukarke  changa  kiya,  aur  dibor  diya ; 

f>  Aur  jawab  mon  un   H  kihfi,  ki 
Tinn  men  ao  kami  hai,  ki  agar  us  ki 
W 


gadlii  ya  bail  kue  men  gire,  «uh  tut't 
sjiiit  ke  din  us  ko  ua  nikale? 

6  We  us  ki  in  bdton  kd  jawab  na 
de  pakon. 

7  1  Aur  mihmaiion  ko  jab  dekhd, 
ki  we  kyuykur  sadr  jagalien  pasaud 
kartc  liain,  un  se  ek  tamsil  kahi,  ki 

8  Jab  kol  tujhe  sliiidi  men  bulawo, 
uah  ee  nnche  mat  baith;  ki  shdyad 
tujh  se  bbi  kisi  bare  ko  buldyd  ho ;  , 

9  Aur  jis  no  teri  aur  us  ki  inibindiii 
ki  hai,  dke  tujh  se  kahe,  ki  Yih  uh  ko 
de;  aur  sharminda  hoke  tujb  ko  sab 
su  niche  baitbnd  para. 

10  Baiki  "jab  teri  mil  imani  bo,  sah 
ae  nichi  jagah  baith;  td  ki  jad  wub, 
jis  ne  tujh  ko  buldya  bai,  awe,  tujh  ko 
kahe,  ki  Ai  doflt,  A,  nnchi  jagah  batyh ; 
tab  un  ke  aaumnc,  jo  tcro  sitb  kbaue 
baitke  liaiti,  teri  "inzaX  hogS. 

11  Kyi'mki  jo  koi  ap  ko  bara  thak- 
rdta  hai,  cbhota  kiyd  jaegd;  aur  jo 
apuo  ta,ig  ohhotd  tliabratd  bai,  bara 
kiyd  jdega. 

12  ^f  Aur  us  ne  apne  mihmduddr 
se  kaba,  ki.Titb  tudin  kd,  ydsbdm  ka, 
kluiua  laiyar  karo,  to  apne  dwtOfc  yd. 
bhaion,  yd  rishtaddron,  yd  daulatmand 
parosioa  komatbuld;  tdua  b"  ki  ws 
bh'i  tujho  buldvvon,  aur  tera  badld  ho 
jiii'. 

13  Baiki  jab   tii    ^iydfat   kare,   to 

faribon,  lanjuti,  laugnm,  andhon  ko 
uli:" 

14  Tab  tii  mubarak  hoga;  kyiirki 
un  ke  pas  kucbh  ualiin,  ki  tera  badld. 
den :  par  tujhe  rAstbd/.un  ki  uiydmat 
ruen  badld  diya  jdegd. 

15  Tf  Aur  ok  ne  un  mcn  ee,  jokbdnc 
bait  hw  tho,  yih  sunko  us  s?  kaha, 
MuMrak  wub  jo  Kbudd  ki  bddshdhat 
nteji  roti  khdegd. 

16  Aurusneusckabd.ki  Kkshakhs 
nesbam  ka  bara  khdnd  taiydr  karke 
babuton  ko  buliyd. 

17  Aur  khdnc  ko  waqt  apue  naukar 
ko  bhejd,  ki  mihmdnon  ko  kahe,  ki 
A'o ;  ab  sah  kuetib  taiydr  bai. 


Bare  Ithdnii  ki  tamdl. 

18  Is  |>ar  sablion  ne  milkar  \t/.r 
karna  ahunV  kiyd.  "Pahlo  ne  use  ka- 
hd,  ki  Main  ne  ek  khet  kharidd  hai ; 
Hrdt  hai  ki  jake  uso  dckhiin;  main 
teri  minnut  karia  hiin,  ki  mori  taraf 
0  Nar  kur. 

19  Diisre  no  kahi,  Main  ne  panch 
joribai!  kharidi  hain;  jsitii  hi'iii  k  i  mu 
ko  dzmdun;  main  teri  minnat  kartf 
hun,  ki  mere  liye  'u/r  kar. 

20  Tisre  ne'kahi,  Main  dc  bydh 
kiyd  hai,  is  sabab  se  nahin  a  sakta. 

21  Pus  uk  naukar  ne  ake  apue  khu- 
ddwand  ko  in  baton  ki  khabar  ilf.  Tab 
ghar  ke  milik  no  gussa  hoko  apnc 
uaukarse  kaha,  Jalil  shahr  be  biziron 
aur  galion  meg  ja,  aur  garibon,  aur 
lunjon,  aur  laugron,  aur  amilum  ko 
y  aba  n  Id. 

22  Naukar  ne  kaha,  ki  Ai  kbudd- 
wand,  jaisa  ti  uo  farmdya-,  hi'ii;  tau 
bhi  janah  hai. 

23  Khuddwand  ne  ub  naukar  pc 
kaha,  ki  Hahoii  aur  klict  ke  dandim  ki 
taraf  jd,  aur  jis  tarah  bane,  logon  ko 
ld,  ki  meri  ghar  bhar  jdo. 

21  Kyi'mki  main  tum  m:  kahtdhrin, 
ki  Koi  ihakbi  uu  men  se,  jo  bulat) 
gaye,  mera  khana  na  diakhegd. 

25  ^  Aur  bahut  loir,  us  ke  sdth 
chale:  aur  us  no  pbirke  un  se  kaha, 
ki 

2fi  Agar  koi  mere  pAs  Awe,  aur  ap- 
ne  biip,  aur  mi,  aur  jon'i  larke,  aur 
bhai  bahin,  baiki  apni  jan  ki  dush- 
mani  na  kari),  merd  shdgird  ho  nahii 
sakti. 

27  Aur  jo  apni  salib  uthdke  mere 
nichhe  nah  i  n  ata,  mera  shdgird  nahin 
lio  nak  i  d. 

28  Kyiinki  tum  men  kaun  hai,  ki 
jad  ek  burj  banaya  chahe,  pahle  baith- 
kc  kharch  ki  hisab  na  kare,  ki  mam  un 
se  taiyar  kar  ■afcdngd? 

2'.>  Aisd  na  ho,  ki  jad  new  dfi.li, 
taiyar  na  kar  sak  A,  to  jo  log  dekhen, 
ii8  par  hnnsne  lagen  ; 

30  Aur  kahen,  ki  Is  shakh: 
99 


LU'QA',  XV.  Kliai  hui  hlier  ki  tamfil. 

ndna  shuru'  kiya,  par  taiyar  :~:i  kar 


saka. 

!l  YA  kami  badshah  dusrc  Mdahah 
larai   karne  jae,  jo   baithke  pahle 

salah  Dakaru,  ki  main  dan  lia/.ar  admi. 

ke  sAtli,  us  se  ki  bis  bazar  ddmi  leke 

mnjh  par  dtd  hai,  mmpibala  kar  sa- 

kungd?  . 

32  Kabin  to,  jad  wnh  hanoi*;  d«r 
hai,  paigdm  bhejke  silih,  ko  liye  min- 
nat karegA. 

33  8o  Ui  tarah  jo  koi  tum  men  se 
apne  ndremal  bc  kanai.i  ua  kua,  mera 
ihdsrird  nahin  ko  sakti. 

31  T  Namak  achchhd  hai :  lekiu 
agar  namak  bigar  jac,  to  kis  ebi?.  bq 
mu«ddr  hogd? 

35  Na  zamin  ko,  na  khad  ke  karn 

kd  hai;  baiki  use  bahar  plieiik  dete 

hain.    Jia  ko  kin  sunne  ke  hon,  sune. 

XV  BA'B. 

TAB  sab  maliRul-Iencwdle  aur  gu- 
nahgdr  us  ke  ua^dik  dte  the,  ki 
us  ki  sunitn. 

2  Aur  Fanai  aur  faqjh  kurkurake 
kaht«  the,  ki  Yili  shakhs  gunabgiron 
ko  qabtil  karta  hjii,  aur  liu  ke  sath 
kh  itii   lial. 

3  T  1'ab  us  ne  un  se  yih  tamsil 
kahi,  ki 

l  Tam  n  i'.'  n  u  kwm  hai,  jis  ki>  pa> 
sau  bher  hon,  agar  un  men  se  ek  kho 
j;ii>.  ii(i  iiiiiiinawr  ko  bayalmn  men  na 
clihore,  aur  us  khoi  hui  ko,  jali  tak  oa 
pdwe,  dhiindhd  na  karc? 

5  Aur  pake  khushi  so  apno  kdnclho 
par  utbi  na  le  ?' 

C  Aur  ghar  meg  jike  dostog  aur 
paroslon  ko  buldke  na  kahe,  ki  Meru 
sith  khushi  karo;  kyunki  main  ne 
apni  khoi  bui  bh«  pil? 

7  Main  tum  se  kahtd  bun,  ki  Is  hi 
taur  dsman  men  ek  gunahgir  ke 
wdsre,  jo  tauKa  kartd  hai,  ninanawr> 
rfistbdzon  se,  jo  tauba  ki  hijat  nahin 
r.ikhtp,  ziyada  khushi  bo^i. 

8  K  Ya  kaun  'aurat. hai,  jis  pds  das 
dirham  hun,  agar  ek   kho  jai;,  chira^ 


Musrif  befe 


LU'QA',  XVI. 


k  i  tamsil. 


bdlke  ghar  ko  na  jhdre,  aur  jab  tak  tia 
pdwo,  koshish  n  dhuiidha  tia  kare? 

9  Aur  jab  pawo,  doston  aur  (liirusion 
ko  bulike  na  k&he,  ki  Mere  sdth 
khoshl  karo;  ki  main  ne  apni  khoyi 
hud  dirbjua  piydV 

10  Main  tumhon  kahti  hun,  ki 
Khudd  ke  firiehtoij  ko  Age  ek  guuali- 
gar  ke  liyo,  jo  tauba  kartd  hai,  khushi 
hoti  bai. 

11  T  Fhir  us  m  kahA,  Ek  shakliB 
k  o  .l.i  bc-te  tb 

12  Un  men  ae  chhote  ue  bip  se 
kahd,  ki  Ai  bap,  mal  ki  hissa,  jo 
mujbe  pahunchti  bai,  mujkc  de.  Ub 
no  mil  unhen  bdnt  diya. 

13  Aur  tliore  din  ba'd  chliote  bot.c 
ne  sah  kuchh  jam'a  karke  ek  dur  ku 
milik  ki  nalar  kiyi,  aur  wahdn  apnd 
mil  bad-chili  men  nrayA. 

14  Aur  jab  sab  kiiarch  kar  chuki, 
us  mulk  men  bara  lidi  puri  ;  aur  wuh 
muhtaj  hone  lagi. 

16  Tab  us  nmlk  ke  ek  ra,fs  ku  ya- 
han  i;i  laga ;  ub  ne  use  apne  khetun 
m  e  n  lillar  «-'harane  bhejd. 

1~0  Aur  uso  drzn  thi,  ki  un  chhilkon 
se,  jo  suar  kbatc  hain,  apni  pct  bhare : 
ki  kol  use  na  detd  thd. 

17  Tad  liosli  men  dke  kalia,  Meru 
bap  ke  kitne  inaniluron  ko  bah  u  t  roti 
hai,  aur  main  Muikhon  marta  Mti  ! 

lfl  Main  nfliko  apD*.'  bap  pds  jaiin- 
gd,  aur  uso  kalulngd,  ki  Ai  bap,  main 
ne  iUrnaii  ki  aur  fcero  hazm  guroili 
kiyi  hai, 

19  Aur  ab  htUiq  nahin  ki  phir  teri 
beta  kalil&ug  :  mujbo  apne  mazdaron 
men  se  ek  ki  mdmnd  bani. 

20  Tab  uthke  apne  bdp  pas  chala. 
Aur  wuh  ablii  diir  thi,  ki  us  ko  ikkh- 
ke  ub  ko  bdp  ko  rahm  .Iya,  aur  daurke 
us  ko  gale  laga  HyA,  aur  bahut  diurai. 

21  Bete  n.)  ua  ko  kalut,  ki  Ai  bap, 
ne    asman    ki   aur  tere    huziir 


gundh  kiyi,  aur  ah  i.s  qabil  nahin  ki 
phir  tera  beta  kahliun. 

22  Bdp  ne  apne  naukaron  ko  kahd/sAradn  uahin  rah  sakti. 
100 


ki  Achchhi  sc  achcbhi  poshdk  nikdl 
Ido,  aur  use  imhirino ;  aur  us  ke  hdth 
men  augutbi,  aur  pari  w. j  m  nienjuti: 

23  Aur  palo  Me  baehhro  ko  lak  e 
zabh  karo,  ki  khdeu,  aur  khushi  nia- 
nacij  : 

24  Kyunki  inerA  yih  beta  nnia  tha, 
ab  jiyihai;  khogayd  thd,  ab  mila  hai. 
Tab  we  khufilii  karnc  lugi:, 

25  Aur  ur  ka  Iwira  beta  kbet  oicii 
Iba :  jab  ghnr  ke  na>idik  Ayd,  gdne  aur 
ndchne  ki  awdK  suni. 

2G  Tnb  ek  naiikar  ko  bulake  pii- 
chhi,  ki  Yihkydhai? 

27  Us  ne  uae  kaha,  ki  Teri  bbdi 
Ayd  hai;  aur  tere  Mp  ne  pald  hui 
baelihni  zabh  kiyd  hai,  is  liye  ki  use 
bhald  changd  pdva. 

28  th  na  kbai'A  holte  na  chdhd  kt 
andar  jae :  tab  us  ko  bdp  ne  bAhar  Ake 
um:  maudyd. 

29  Us  ue  bdp  se  jawAb  men  kalid, 
Dekb,  itnc  baraa  se  main  teri  khidmat 
kartd  him,  aur  kabbi  tere  hukrn  ko 
barkhildf  na  chald :  par  tii  ne  kabhu 
ck  bakri  kd  bacbcba  majhe  m  diyd, 
ki  apne  dostoii  ke  sdih  khushi  nw- 
nAiiri : 

30  Magar  jab  terA  yih  beti  Ayd.  jis 
ne  terA  uidl  kasbion  men  uraya,  tu  ne 
ns  ke  liyo  motd  bachhrd  zabh  kiyd. 

31  Us  n©  us  ko  kahd,  Ai  bet«,  tu 
aadd  more  pds  hai,  aur  jo  kuchh  merA 
hai,  so  terd  hai. 

Par  khushi  mandna,  aur  khush 
hond,  liani  thd  ;  kyunki  teri  yih  bbdi 
mvlA  thd,  ho  jivA  hai,  aur  k&o  gav;i 
thA,  ab  miU  hal 

XVI  BA'B. 

AUR  ua  ne  aun.0  shagirdorj  se  bhi 
kahd,  ki  KUu  daulatmand  ki  ek 
khAnsimin  tha;  jis  ki  togog  ue  ua  so 
gila  kiyd,  ki  yib  UtA  mal  urati  hai. 

2  Tab  us  ne  us  ko  buldko  us  se 
kahd,  ki  Kydnkar  hud,  ki  main  tere 
haqq  men  yih  suntdbun?  Apni  khdn- 
Miimdui  kd  hisab  do  ;  ki  ah  se  tu  khan- 


Be-imdn  naukar  ki  tamsil.       LU'QA', 

3  Us  khausaiuiiu  OS  upno  ji  HMD 
fcahd,  ki  Kya  kariin?  kyunki  mera 
mdlik  khan=amdui  mujh  ue  lc  letd 
Ini;  main  khutl  nahin  wikta,  nur 
bhikb  mdngne  sc  mujbe  sharm  ati  hai. 

4  Ab  jan  gayi  ki  kya  kartun,  ta  ki 
i«d  khinsamini  se  chhut  jiun,  mujbe 
log  apne  gharon  men  rakherj. 

5  Tab  fljiuo  'iqi  ke  sah  <iarzdaron 
men  ae  liar  ok  ko  pas  Imlako  pB,h lu  so 
pikhha,  ki  Tu  kitni  mera  milik  ka 
dharitd  hai  ? 

6  Uh  ne  kahd,  Sau  paimann  tel. 
Tab  us  ko  kaba,  ki  Apui  dastawez  le, 
aur  jaid  baithke  packis  likh  dc, 

7  Pbirdusrcue  kahi,Tu,kitlli  dhar- 
itd hai  ?    Uh  ne  kaba,  San    paimaua 

Selu'm.  Uh  k:ili;i,  ki  Ajini  dattiwez 
■,  aur  assi  iikb  dc. 

8  Tab  milik  nc  be-iman  khansa- 
iiiau  ki  ta'rit'  ki,  is  liye  ki  us  na  bosb,- 
yiri  ki:  kyiinki  dnuya  ke  log  apne 
waqt  men  nur  ke  (arzandon  se  bosh- 
yar  haiii. 

9  So  main  tum  so  knhta  biin,  ki 
■'lu'. :iii  daulat  se  apne  liye  dost  pakla 
karo;  ki  jad  tum  jdtc  raho,  hameslia 
ke  makinon  men  jagah  den. 

10  Jo  nihayat  thore  men  imdndar 
hai,  so  bahut  men  bhi  iiuandir  hai ; 
aur  jo  nihayat  thoi-o  uicii  berfm&n  liai, 
so  bahut  men  bhi  be-irnin  hai. 

11  Jab  tuui  jhiithi  daulat  mon  [man- 
dar na  ralie,  to  sachchi  tuniheii  kaun 
Ml|'i|]'l  k;ir.-_;;i  'i 

12  Aur  jab  tum  begine  ke  mil  meii 
unindar  na  rnbe,  tu  kaun  wuh  dega 
jo  tumhari  bi  ho? 

13  1  Koi  naukar  do  khawimhm  ki 
khidmat  nahin.  kur  sakti:  is  liye  ki 
ya  ek  ki  dushmani  karcgd,  aur  ddsru 
ki  dosti ;  yd  ek  ko  tninegi,  nur  dusre 
ko  na-chiz  jinegd.  Tum  Khudd  aur 
daulat  donou  ki  khidmat  nahin,  kar 
sakte. 

U  Aur  Farisi,  jo  daulat  ko  piyir 
karte  the,  in  sab  hiton  ko  sutike  tbat- 
thc  incn  urine  lage. 
101 


XVI.  Mdlddr  aur  La'azar  ki  tamsil. 

15  Tab  08  lio  UU  ku  kaba,  ki  Tutu 
we  ho,  jo  idmkm  ke  dge  ip  ko  rdstbiz 
zihir  karte  baiu  ;  lekin  Khudi  tum- 
bire  dil  ki  jiSnUi  hai :  kyunki  jo  ad- 
mion  ki  nazaroe  men  bara  hai,  Khuda 
ko  dge  makruh  hai. 

16  Shari'iit  aur  ambiyd  Yilhanni 
tik  the;  tab  se  Khuda  ki  b&Uhaoat 
ki  khushkhabari  di  jiti  bai,  aur  bar 
ek  eor  marka  ua  men  dakliil  nota  hai. 

17  Para.sniauaurzaTulnki  tal  jana, 
shart'at  ke  ek  nuqta  ke  mit  jiuu  sc, 
bahut  dsilii  bai. 

18  Jo  shakhs  apui  jord  ko  chbor  di^, 
aurdtisri  sc  byab  karu,  ziuii  kani  hai : 
aur  jo  koi  us  'aurat  ko,  ki  chbor  di 
gayi,  bydhe,  zina  kari , i  hai. 

19  1  Ek  daulatmand  thi,  jo  lal 
aur  iniliin  kapro  p:ibiutd,  aur  roz  ruz 
sbiu  o  shaukat  se  'aisb  knrla  tlia. 

20  Aur  La'azar  Uanie  ek  girili  ddnii, 
jo  nasiir  se  bhara  thd,  jise  us  ki  dew- 
rbi  }iar  dil  jdto  the; 

21  Aur  w  uh  drzii  rakhtd  thi  ki  un 
tukj-i.u  h  j"  daulatmand  ki  roez  m 
girte  the,  apui  pot  bbare :  baiki  kuli-.' 
ike  us  ko  ghdo  ch'atte  the. 

22  Aur  ni^ii  hmi,  ki  wuli  garib  mar 
gayi,  aur  ririshton  ne  usc  lv  jdke  Abira- 
him  ki  god  mon  rakbi;  aur  daulat- 
mand bhi  miid,  aur  giri  gayi ; 

23  Ua  nc  dozakh  ku  dai'iniyin  'azdb 
nun  hokfl  apui  ankbi/n  uthain,  aur 
Abiraham  ko  dur  se  dekhd,  aur  us  ki 
god  mon  La'azar  ko. 

24  Aur  us  ne  pukarke  kahi,  ki  Ai 
bdp  Ahirahdm,  mujli  par  raiim  ka1, 
aur  La'aaai  ko  bhej,  ki  apni  imgli  ki 
siri  pini  se  bhigoke  meri  zubau 
thandi  karo;  kyunki  main  is  lau  men 
tarapti  h uij. 

25  Tab  Abiraham  dc  kaba,  ki  Ai 
b  te,  yid  kar  ki  lu  apni  licdaaf  mag 
aohchhi  chizyn  le  ehuki,  aur  La'azar 
buri  chizon:  so  ab  wub  tasalil  pita 
hai,  aur  tti  taraptd  hai. 

26  Aur  in  sah  ke  alwi  hamdre 
tumliire  darmiyiu  ek  bani  garlid  dbari 


I'mdn  se  iqtidar  LTJ'QA'. 

gaya  hai :  aM  ki  we  jo  yahan  se  tuiu- ' 
iidre  piU  jaya  chahen,  ria  ja  sakeu ; 
aur  na  we  log  jo  wahdn  hai  n,  is  par 
h&marfl  pas  a  sakfce. 

27  Tab  us  ne  kaha,  Pas,  ai  bap,  teri 
mirmat  karta  hiiii,  ki  tii  use  mere  bap 
ke  ghar  bttej : 

28  Kytinki  mere  p&nch  blidi  hain; 
tf  ki  un  pai  gawalii  den,  aisa  na  lio 
ki  we  bhi  is  'azab  ki  jabali  mcij  awen. 

29  Abinihdni  ne  ukc  kaba,  ki  Un 
ke  iids  Musa  aur  ambiya  hain ;  chd- 
iiiye  ki  we  uu  ki  suncn. 

30  L'a  nu  kahd,  Xaliin,  ai  bap  Abi- 
raham;  par  agar  koi  murdon  m 
un  ke  pas  jde,  we  tfi.uba  karenge, 

31  Ua  ne  uso  kaha,  ki.lab  we  Musa 
aur  nabion  ki  na  warta,  to  agar  mur- 
don rueg  se  koi  uthe,  to  us  ki  na 
ininerige, 

XVII  ItA'R 

PTITR  08  ne  shdgirdon  se  kahd,  Yih 
naliin  bo  sakta  ki  tbokar  khil- 
dnew&li  chizen  na  dwey :  par  afaos  us 
par,  jis  ke  ku  bab  aweij  ! 

2  Aaar  chakki  kd  pat  us  ke  gale 
rucn  bandhd  buta,  aur  w  uli  samuudar 
men  phenkd  jata,  to  yih  us  ke  [iye  un 
se  bibtar  bota,  ki  wuh  ek  ko  in  chhot- 
oq  men  se  thokar  khikiwe, 

if  ^  Khabardar  raho:  agar  tera 
lihai  tera  gunah  karc,  use  &&a{ ;  agar 
taiiba  kare,  hbc  mu'af  kar. 

4  Aur  agar  ek  dia  men  stit  har  tera 
guuah  kari',  aur  ek  <lin  men  sdt  bar 
aku  kahe,  ki  Tauba  kartd  huti ;  use 
iim'Af  kar. 

5  Tab  rosulon  n  e  Khudawaiid  se 
kahd,  Haiuara  iman  ziyada  kar. 

6  Kbuddwand  ne  kaba,  ki  Agar 
tim  men  kbaruiil  ko  ddua  ke  barabar 
iradn  ho,  to  jab  tum  is  tiit  ke  darakht 
ko  kaho,  ki  Jar  se  ukharke  darya  men 
lag  ja,  to  turatidri  manegt 

7  Aur  tum  meg  se  kauu  hai,  jis  ka 
ik  naukar  bal  jote,  yd  uharwahl  kare, 
jab  khet  se  dwe,  uao  kahe,  ki  Jald  a, 
aur  khdoe  bakh? 

102 


XVII.  jokotd. 

8  Aur  we  na  kahe,  ki  Mera  aham 
ka  khaua  taiyar  kar,  aur  jab  tak  k  hina 
piiin  kamar  bdndhke  mari  khidmat 
kar ;  ba'd  u»  ke  tu  Ap  kha  pi  'i 

9  Kya  wuh  us  naukar  ka,  ihsan 
manta  hai,  ki  jo  kam  us  ne  fanude  tbe, 
kiyo  ?  main.  jantd  hitn,  nahig. 

10  Iai  tarah  tum  bhi,  jabsab  kuchh 
jo  tumhdro  liyo  farmaya  gaya,  kar 
chuke,  to  kaho,  ki  Ham  niKMHTUf 
bunda  fiaiii  ;  kyririki  jo  ham  par  karri.i 
wajib  tha,  wuhi  kiya. 

i  I  \  Aur  aisd  tnia,  ki  jab  Yanisa- 
lam  ko  jatd  thd,  Samariya  aur  Jalil  ke 
bich  se  guzra. 

12  Ain  ek  basti  men  jite  hiie  daa 
korhi  use  mite,  jo  diir  khare  tlie  : 

13  Unhon  ne  chilidko  koha,  ki  Ai 
Yiad',  ai  sahih,  ham  par  rahm  kar. 

14  Ua  ne  dekhke  uuberj  knlid,  ki 
Jake  apne  ta.iij  kahinon  ko  dikhao. 
Aur  aisa  hua,  ki  we  jate  hue  pdk  sal' 
ho  gaye, 

15  Aurek  ne  un  men  sejab  dekhd 
ki  changa  hiid.bari  awaz  se  KhuuYi  ki 
ta'rif  kartd  hiia  phird, 

16  Aurniuiih  ke  lihai  Yi.-u'i'ke  pdn- 
won  pdB  girke  un  ka  shukr  kiyd :  aur 
wuh  Samari  tha. 

17  Tab  Yhiu'  ne  jftwib  men  kaha, 
ki  Kyd  dasog  pak  sdf  »a  hiie?  phir 
we  nau  kalian  liuiu? 

18  Kyd  siwa  is  pardesi  ke  koi 
na  mild,  ki  phirke  Khudd  ki  ta'rif 
karo? 

19  Aur  use  kahd,  Uthke  rawana 
ho :  tero  iman  ne  tujhe  bachdyd. 

20  K'  Aur  jab  Farision  ne  ub  ee 
piloiiha,  ki  Khu-M  ki  bidahdaat  kab 
awegi?  ua  ne  jawab  men  un  se  kahd, 
ki  Khuda  ki  batUlidhat  lumuld  ke  adth 
nahin  Ati : 

21  Aur  we  na  kahengo,  ki  dekho 
yahin!  yddekho  wahaii  hai !  kyi'mki, 
dekho,  Kliud.i  ki  badbhahat  tumhare 
diirniiyaii  hai. 

22  Aur  tihigirdon  se  kaha,  We  din 
jab  arzii   karoge,   ki   Ion   i 


Khudd  H  hdihltdhid  kibdhat.  LU'QA', 
A'dam  ke  dinon  uien  se  ek  ko  doklio, 
aur  na  dekhoge. 

23  Aur  we  tmn  ko  kabenge,  ki  De- 
kho  yah&n,  y»,  doklio  wahdn  hai :  tutn 
mat  niklo,  aur  pichhe  na  jdo. 

24  Kyunki  jaisa  bijli,  jo  AsmAn  ki 
ek  taraf  se  kaundhkc  luari  taraf  cha- 
inakti  hai,  waisd  )ii  Iba  i  A'dain  bhi 
apne  din  inen  hoga. 

25  Lekin  pahle  zarur  hai  ki  wuh 
bahut  dukh  ufhdwc,  aur  is  zamane  ke 
logon  ao  radd  kiya  jawe. 

2b'  Aur  jaisd  ki  Nuh  ke  dinon  men 
hiia,  isi  tarah  Ibu  i  A'darn  ke  dinon 
mori  bhi  kogd, 

27  Ki  log  khdte,  pite,  byah  karte, 
bydhe  jdte  the,  us  ain  tak  ki  Nuh 
Uabtl  mag  gaya,  aur  tdlau  ue  dko  sab 
ko  barbdd  kiya. 

28  Aurjaisaki  Ldt  ke  dinun  incn 
hiid,  ki  log  k  bata,  pita,  aur  kharid 
GWofcht  karte,  aur  pef  lagate  aur  ghar 
bsnata  the ; 

29  Far  jis  din  ki  Lut  Sadum  n 
nikld,  ag  aur  gandhak  ne  daruan  se 
b:irn-skc  sah  ku  barbad  kiya  ; 

30  So  isi  tarah  hogd,  jis  din  ki  Ibu 
i  A'dam  zAbir  hogd. 

31  Us  din  wuh  jo  kutim  par  bu. 
aur  us  ki  asbab  ghar  mcn,  IW  ke  leue 
ke  waste  nlche  na  aive ;  aur  jo  khet 
uien  lu.),  waisd  hi  pichhe  ua  phiri 

■V2   Nih  ki  juru  ko  ydd  karo. 

88  .1"   ihfcfhi   cbiihu  ki    apni  jAn 
,  use  khoegd ;  aur  jo  shakli 
apni  jau  khowe,  use  bacbdwegd. 

'H  Aur  main  lum  se  kanta-'  hurj,  ki 
Us  rat  do  admi  ek  lii  miang  par 
bOfigB  ;  ek  pakra,  dusra  chlii'ra  JAegi. 

35  Aur  do  'auraten,  jo  ek  sdth 
chakki  piati  hongi ;  ek  pakri,  ddsri 
ehbori  jacgi. 

36'  Ain-  do  Admi",  jo  khct  men  honge 
ek  prikni,  dusra  chhora  jaega. 

37  Onhon  no  jawab  men  use  kahA, 
ki  Ai  Khudawand,  kalian  ?   TJa  nc  un 
IB  kahd,  Jahdn  ki  murda  hai,  giddli 
wabin  jam'a  honge. 
103 


XVIII.  .Ifutatj&zi  bewa  ki  hahaU 

XVIII  BA'B. 

P  HIU  us  ne,  is  liye  ki  un  ko  liamt- 
sha  du'd  rneg  lage  rahna,  aur 
susti  na  karai  zariir  hai,  ek  tamsil 
kahi,  ki 

2  Kisu  shabr  men  ek  qdz.i  thd,  jo 
na  Khudd  ae  dartd,  aur  ua  lidrui  ki 
kuohh  parwd  rakhtd : 

3  Aur  uni  shahr  men  ek  bewa  thi, 
,o  us  ke  pas  ati  aur  use  yih  kahti  thi, 
ki  Mere  dushman  ke  hath  se  uitrd 
inadf  Iur. 

4  Us  ne  kuchh  din  na  clidhd:  lekin 
piclihe  apue  ji  men  kabd,  ki  Harchaud 
main  na  Khudd  se  darta,  «ur  na  admi 
ki  kuchh  parwd  rakhtd; 

5  Tau  bhi  is  liye  ki  yih  hewa  mu- 
jhe  bahut  satati  hai,  us  kd  insaf  kar- 
ungii;  aitid  na  ho,  ki  wuh  bahut  dne  sc 
akhir  ko  merd  dimdg  khrt.li  karo. 

b'  Khuddwand  ne  farmaya,  ki  Sunn, 
jo  kuchh  is  be-insdf  <\rt,zi  no  kahd. 

7  Pas  kyd  Khudd  apne  bargualda 
logon  kd,  jo  rdt  din  us  se  farydd  karti.', 
iusdf  na  karegd?  kyd  un  ke  waste  dtr 
karegd  ? 

8  Main  tuui  se  kahtd  hun,  ki  Wuh 
jald  un  kd  iLsaf  karegd ;  magar  kya 
Ibu  i  A'dam  ake  zanuu  par  iman 
piweg*? 

9  ^i  Phir  us  ne  un  se,  jo  apne  upar 
bharosd  rakhte  the  ki  raathaz  hain, 
lekin  auron  ko  ndchiz  jaute  the  yih 
tamsil  kahi,  ki 

10  Do  sbakhs  hsikal  mcn  du'a 
nadugue  gaye;  ek  Fami,  diisrd  raah- 
sul-lenowdld. 

11  Farisi  alag  khard  hoke  yiin  du'a 
rudugtd  tha,  ki  Ai  Khudd,  main  tera 
shukr  kartii,  ki  auron  ki  nianiml 
lutora,  Kdlira,  Kindkdr,  yd  jaisd  yih 
raahsul-lonewAId  hai,  nahin  lum, 

12  Main  nafta  rucn  do  bar  roza 
rakhtd,  aur  main  apne  sare  mAl  ki 
dahyaki  detd  hiin- 

13  Piir  uh  mahstil-Iuiiewillo  ne  dor 
.se  khard  hoke  itna  bhi  na  chdlid  ki 
|dsmau  ki   taraf  dnkh   uthiwe,  baiki 


Ek  amir  ke  suwdl  LU'QA' 

diliati  jiiltS.aur  kahtA  ihii,  ki  Ai  Khu- 
d;i,  rnnjli  gunahgaf  pan  ralun  kar. 

14  Main  tum  so  kahta  min,  Yili 
shakhs  dusre  se  rtbtbd/.  thaharke  apne 
ghar  gaya:  kyunki  jo  ap  ko  bard 
thahrdtd  hai,  cuhotd  kiyri  jdega;  aur 
jo  apne  ta.in  chhotd  tlialiratd  hai,  baja 
kiya  jauga. 

15  Phir  we  chliote  In.jknn  ko  us  ke 
pds  Ua,  ki  un  ko  chhtie  :'par  shdgirdon 
ue  dek  h  ke  un  ko  ddntA. 

1G  Magar  Yisu'  ne  baclidion  ko  pas 
buMke  katai,  ki  Lajkoji  ko  mm  jias 
dne  do,  aur  unhon  mana  u»  kun»: 
kyiinki  Khudd  kl  badskdhnt  aisog  hi 
k  i  hai. 

17  Main  tum  se  sacb  kahid  hiin,  ki 
.lu  koi  h'hud»  Vi  btdiMhat  ku  ohnofe 
larfcfl  i;i  mdnind  uabul  nahin  kavta,  us 
i'jcn  kabhu  dakbil  na  hogd. 

18  Aur  ek  sardar  ne  us  Be  puekha, 
Ai  uek  ustad,  main  kyd  karun  ki 
liameshn  ki  zitukiiii  ka  waris  b.oun? 

1!)  Yisu'  ne  us  ko  kahd,  Tu  kyihi 
uiujU  ko  Dek  kahtd  hai?  koi  nekj 
iialitn,  magar  t'k,  ya'ne  Khudd. 

20  Tu  lmkmon  kojdntd  hai,  kiZind; 
na  kar,  Qatl  na  kar,  Ohori  na  kar,. 
,llii'it.ki  gav&hi  na  de,  Apne  bdp  aur 
Kpai  nid  ki  'iazat  kar. 

21  Us  ne  kahd,  Yih  sab  iarakpui  m 
niiiiii  iiuiiitd  dyd. 

22  Yi*u'  no  yili  sunkar  use  kahd, 
Tiiu  nhi  tujh  ko  ek  chiz  baqi  hai :  sab 
kuohfa  Jo  d-rd  liai  beoh,  MB  garibori  ko 
bdnt  do,  to  dsmin  men  tere  iiye 
khazdtia  hogd:  aur  dkar  nieri  pairaui 
kar. 

28  Wuh  yib  suaka  bahut  gamgin 
hiid,  kyiinki  bara  daulatniand  thd. 

24  Yifid'  ne  us  ko  bahut  gamgin 
dekhkar  kahd,  ki  Un  ko,  jo  bahut  mdl 
raklirc  liain,  Khudd  ki  bauskdbat  men 
ddkliil  hond  kabid  muahkil  hai! 

2fi  Kyiinki  unt  kd  siii  ke  ndke  meij 
no  gu/ar  jdnd  us  se  dsdn  hai,  ki  koi 
lianlatinand  Khudd  ki  bddsbdhat  men 
dakbil  lio. 
104 


XVIII.  kd  jawab. 

liC  Aur  jinhon,  ne  yih  sund,  kahd. 
Pas  kaun  nujdt  pd  saktd  liai? 

27  Us  ne  kahd,  Jo  insdn  ko  nazdik 
r  i  ;i  - 1 1 1  ii  a  i  j  U  i  ii  hai,  Khudd  ke  nazdik 
lnutukin  hai. 

28  Tab  Patms  ne  kahd,  Dekh,  hmn 
ne  sab  kuchh  cbhord,  aur  teri  pairaui 
kf. 

29  Us  ne  un  se  kahd,  Main  tum  se 
sach  kahtd  liun,  ki  Koi  nahin,  jis  ne 
gbar,  yd  md  bdp,  yd  bhdion,  yd  jorfi, 
ya  larkoG  ko,  Khudd  ki  bddshdhat  ke 
wdste  chlior  diya  bal, 

30  Ki  is  zamdne  men  us  se  kabin 
ziydda  na  pawe,  ain-  uh  jaluin  mag 
hamesha  ki  /indagi, 

31  T[  Aur  us  ne  barahoij  ko  sdth 
leke  nu  se  kaha,  ki  Dokho,  ham  Yani- 
salam  ko  jdte  kain,  aur  sah  ,ji>  imbiur, 
ki  ma'rifat  Ibu  i  A'dam  ke  haqq  men 
liklid  hai,  piird  hogd. 

82  Kyi'mki  wojh  gair-([aumwaion  ke 
hawalit  Iciyd  jaega,  aur  we  us  ko 
thatthe  men  uriwenge,  aur  he-'izzat 
kaicnge,  aur  ua  par  thiikenge : 

33  Aur  ua  ko  kore  mdrke  qatl 
kaienni  aur  wuh  tisre  diuji  uthegd. 

34  Lekiu  uuhon  ue  un  men  se  koi 
bit  na  saiujhi :  aur  yih  kaldm  un  par 
obbjpfi  rabd,  aur  in  baton  kd  matlab 
zarra  un  ki  saumjh  men  na  dya. 

35  %  Phir  aisd  hud,  ki  jab  wuh 
Yarihu  ko  nazdik  dyd,  ok  andbd  rdh 
par  baithd  bldkh  mdngtd  thd : 

36  Us  no  jdneivdlon  kd  shor  sunke 
ptichhd,  ki  kyd  hai? 

37  Tab  unlion  ne  usc  kahd,  ki  Yisu' 
Nlsari  jatd  hai. 

::n  Us  ne  pukarko  kahd,  Ai  Yisu', 
lbn  i  Ddi'id,  mujli  par  t-ahm  kar. 

39  Unhon  ne  jo  age  jdte  the,  us  ko 
ddntd,  ki  cliup  rah  :  par  wuh  aur  bhi 
diiliaya,  ki  Ai  lbn  i  Ddtid,  inujh  par 
rahiu  kar. 

40  Tab  Yisu'  ne  thaharkft  farmdyd, 
ki  Us  ko  mcro  pds'ldo.  Jab  nazdik 
dyd,  us  ne  ub  se  puehhd, 

41  Tii  kyd  chdbta  hai,  ki  main  tere 


m/i  Znkki  khiraj'ijii- 


LU'OA'.  XIX. 


ke{fharjiU<r. 


i:.'in?     Uh  ne  kahd,  Ai  Khu- 
.  iwiiiifl,  yih,  ki  mujl.i:  d  11  klien  mil.']]. 

42  V  isu'  ne  us  eo  kahd,  ki  Phir 
iiin;i  lio:  tere  iuidn  nc  tujhe  changi 
kiyd. 

43  Wuli  uh!  dam  dekhne  lagi,  aur 
Klunid    ki    tn'rif   knri-d   hiid    ub   ke 

Sichhe    chala.      Aur    sah    logon    ne 
ckhkc  Khudd  ki  ta'rif  ki. 
XIX  KAU. 

AUR   wuh   Yarihn   inen  hoke  jdtd 
tha. 

2  Aur,  dekho,  Zakkf  udine  ek  mard 
ne,  jo  mahsu  l-l«uewdlon  k&  sardar  aur 
daalatnuDd  tha, 

3  (.'halia    ki   Yisu'    ko    dekhe,   ki  j  dawand,  tori  mind 
kaun  hai;  lekin  bhir  ke  eabab  dekh'kin. 
na  saka,  kyiinki  nati  tha. 

4  Tab  dge  daurku  ek  gdlar  ko  per 
l>ar  ckarh  gayd,  ki  use  d>-khe :  kydnki 
wuh  usi  lah  se  jdue  ko  tha. 

5  Jab  Yisii'  ua  jagah  pahunchd, 
«pai1  nigdh  ki,  aur  use  dekhke  us  se 
kahd,  Ai  Zakki,  jald  utar  d ;  kyunki 
aj  mujho  tere  ghar  rahrid  zarur  hai. 

6  Tab  us  ne  jald  utarke  khushi  se 
us  ko  (jabdl  kiyd. 

7  Jab  sabliog  ne  yih  dekhd,  kur- 
kurdke  kahd,  kfWuh  ek  guuakgdr  ke 
yafidn  ja  utrd  hai. 

8  Par  Zakki  no  khare  hoke  Khudd- 
wand sa  kahd,  Dekh,  ai  Khuddwand, 
main  apni  adhd  mdl  gari'bon  ko  <lota 
biig,  aur  agar  kisi  ka  kuchh  dagabaid 
Be  fiyd  hai,  ub  ka  ck&uguna  detil  lu'in. 

9  Tab  Yisu'  ne  us  ko  kahd,  ki  A'j 
ib  ghar  mon  najdt  di,  is  liye  ki  yih  bhi 
Abimliani  ka  betd  hai. 

10  Kyiiiiki  Ibu  i  A' dam  dya  hai,  ki 
kboe  hue  ko  dhiindhe  aur  bochdwo. 

11  T  Aur  jab  w'cyiheun  rahe  the, 
ua  ne,  is  liye  ki  Yariisalam  ke  nazdik 
llia,  aur  we  khivdl  karte  the  ki  Khudd 
ki  badfihdhat  ablii  sihir  hnd  clidhti 
hai,  ek  tamsil  bhi  kahi ; 

12  Aur  yun  kahd,  ki  Ek  amfr  dur 
ke  miilk  ko  chald,  td  ki  apne  liye 
bddahdhi  leke  phir  dwe, 

105 


13  Us  ne  apne  naukaron  roen  se  dus 
ko  bulake  dua  niind  uu  ko  din,  aur  uri 
se  kahd,  ki  Mere  phir  dne  tak  hyohar 
karo. 

14  Lekin  ub  ke  shahr  ko  ddrai  us  se 
dustnnani  rakhte  the;  aur  us  ke 
pichhe  payam  bhejko  kahd,  ki  Ham 
nahin  cha'hte  ki  yih  ham.  par  bdd- 
sbdhat  kari:. 

15  Aur  yun  hi'iti,  ki  jad  wuh  bdd- 
shdhi  leke  phir  dya,  i  n  naukaror,  ko, 
jinhen  riipiya  Bonipc  the,  bula  bhcja, 
ki  jane  ki  har  ek  nc  kaiad  byohar 
kiyd. 

Iti  Tab  pahle  ne  ake  kahd,  Ai  klm- 
das  mind  paida 


Us  ne  uae  kahd,  Shdbdsh,  ai 
achchhe  taukar ;  'm  liye  ki  balmt  thora 
mcii  t&  fmdnddr  nikld,  ab  ti'i  das  shai'ir 
par  ikhtiyar  rak  h. 

18  Aur  dusre  ne  dko  kahd,  Ai  khu- 
ddwand, teri  mind  ne  piiich  mind 
]  liiiihi  kin. 

19  Us  ne  uso  bhi  kahi,  Tn  bhi 
pduch  ahahr  kd  sarddr  ho. 

20  Tiat»  ne  dk«  kahd,  Ai  khudi- 
wand,  dekh  apni  udna,  jis  ko  iiuun  uu 
riiindt  mun  bdndh  rakhd  hai : 

21  Kyt'mki  main  tujb  «e  dartd  thi, 
ki  lu  sakht  adu  ii  hai ;  ki  t  u  leta  liai 
jo  nahin  rakhd,  aur  kdttd  hai  jo  nahin 
boyd. 

22  Us  ne  use  kahd,  Ai  namak-ba- 
rdm  naukar,  main  tujb  ko  tere  hi 
nmuh  se  qdil  kitrta  hiin.  Jab  tii  nc 
jaiia  ki  main  sakht  admi  lnin,  aur  jo 
nahin,  rakhd,  letd,  aur  jo  nabib  boyd, 
kdttd  h tiii ; 

23  To  mere  rfipiyoc  ko  sairdf  ki 
kothi  inon  kyiin  ua  rakhd,  ki  main  dke 
use  siid  «ainct  letd  ? 

24  Tab  us  uo  un  se,  jo  us  ke  psa 
khare  llie,  kahd,  ki  Wuh  miud  us  se 
lu,  aur  das  luiudwalo  ko  do. 

25  (Tad  uuhon  no  use  kahd,  Ai 
Khuddwand,  us  ke  pas  dua  miud  to 
haiii.) 


J/W/i  hi  nawiir  JtoJce  LTJ'QA',  XX.       Tarumlam  mtn  ddkhil  Jioita- 

20  Is  liyc  main  tum  se  kahta  hiiij,jMain  tutu  se  knhti  h6n,  ki  Agar  ye 
ki  Jib  ke  pds  bal,  ue  ko  diyd  JAagst  j  chup  rabun,  to  MtthWelulUegge, 


r  jis  ke  uahin,  us  se  wuh  blii  jo  us 
ke  paa  hai,  h  liyi  jaega. 

Ii7  Pnr  ttWt  6B1  'lnsliTujinoTi  ku, 
jinhon  ne  na  chdhd  ki  main  mi  par 
hadsh&hi  karun,  yaliin  lao,  aur  nuere 
tjmfciw  qntl  karo. 

2*  K  Aur  jab  yih  balenkah  chuka, 
£ga  hirlike  Yanisalam  ki  taraf  eh  a  la. 

29  A.ur  aisd  hrta,  ki  jab  Baitfaga 
aur  Bail'aniya  ke  ntfdfk  us  patuk  ke 
pas,  jo  Zaituni  kahldta  hai,  aya,  apne 
shik'irdon  men  w  do  ko  yih  kahke 
bheja,  ki" 

30  Sarahce  ki  basti  nicu  jao  ;  aur 
us  men  ihikliil  hote  hue  «k  gadhi  ki 
baclicha  liaudha  paoge,  jis  par  kabin 
kuiddmi  sawarnahin  rifii :  use  kliolke 
lao. 

31  Aur  agar  koi  tum  ao  puchho,  ki 
Kyi.;n  kbolte  ho?  use  yiin  kahu,  ki 
Yih  Khudawaud  ko  darkar  hai, 

32  Su  bhcje  hi'ioc  nejake,  jaiaa  us 
ue  un  sci  kaha,  waisa  hi  paya. 

33  Aur  jab  gadhe  ka  baoheha  khol- 
ne  lage,  us  ke  inalikoii  ue  un  bu  kaha, 
ki  Is  bactiche  ko  kyuu  kholte  ho? 

34  Unhon  ne  kaki,  ki  Kbudawand 
ko  darkar  hai. 

35  Aur  wo  us  ko  Yibu'  ke  pas  lae  : 
tiur  apno  kapra  us  bacbcbe  par  bi- 
ihliike  YisiV  ko  sawar  kiya, 

36  Jab  jaid  tha,  unhon  do  apne 
kapre  nih  mvn  biohiae. 

37  Aur  jab  wuh  mudik,  baiki 
Zaitun  ko  pabdr  ki  utdr  par  pahunehd, 
us  ke  sbdgirdon  ki  sari  jama'at  sab 
kardinal*  m  ke  sabab,  jo  dekhi  thin, 
khush  hokc  bulaud  awaz  se  Khuda 
ki  ta-'rif  karoe  lagi ;  ki 

38  Mubarak  hai  wuh  badshah,  k 
Khuda wand  ke  ndm  si.'  ata  hai :  asman 
[Hir  sulh,  aur  'diam  i  bala  men.  jaldl, 

39  Aur  us  bhir  mori  se  ba'/e  Farisf- 
on  ne  use  kaha,  ki  Ai  ustad,  apue  shd- 
gfrdon  ko  dant. 

40  Um  nu  jawjib  men   ira  se  kaha, 

ioti 


■1 1  1  Aur  jab  mudik  like  sbahr  ko 
dekha,  us  par  roya, 

42  Aur  kaha,  Kash  ki  tii  apne  isi 
din  men  im  liaton  ko,  jo  teri  salamati 
ki  hain,  janta  1  par  ab  wo  teri  aakhon 
ao  cKhipi  hain. 

43  Kyiinki  we  din  tujh  par  dweTige, 
ki  tere  dublnuau  tere  gird  niorcha 
lii'unllike,  aur  charon  or  gherke,  tujhe 
sab  taraf  «e  tBEts  kareu-^c, 

44  Aur  tujh  lio,  aur  tere  larkon  ko, 
Jo  tujh  men  hain,  kliiik  men  miia- 
wengu  ;  aur  we  tujh  mcii  patthar  po 
jiatthar  na  clihorenge ;  is  liye  ki  tu  ne 
us  ivaipi  ko,  ki  tujTi  par  nigah  thi,  na 
pahcliaua. 

45  Tab  haikal  men  jaku  unben,  jo 
us  meg  bechteHur  kharidte  tlic,  nil;:ti 
ue  laga ; 

4G  Aur  fin  se  kaha,  I.iklt.-i  hai,  ki 
Mera  gliar  'ibadat  ka  ghar  hai ;  pir 
tum  ne  us  ko  cborou  kd  khoh  banaya. 

47  Aur  wuh  har  roz  haikal  men 
ta'lim  deta  tha,  Magar  sardar  kdhin, 
aur  faqih,  aur  qaum  ke  aardir,  chahte 
the  ki  us  ko  ii«tl  kareg, 

48  Par  yih  karae  ki  koi  tadbir  na 
pdte  the  ;  kyunki  sab  log  us  ki  suuno 
ke  liye  us  se  lage  rahe. 

X£  BA' B. 

AUK  iinhin  dinon  men  ek  din,  jab 
wuh  haikal  men  logon  ko 
ta'lim  aur  khush-khabari  duta  tha, 
aiaa  hua,  ki  sardar  kahiii  aur  faqil), 
buzurgon  ko  sath,  us  ke  pas  a  khai'e 
huc ; 

2  Aur  kuline  lage,  ki  Uam  m  kah, 
tii  kis  ikhtiyar  se  yih  kartd  hai?  aur 
kauii  hai,  jb  no  tujh  ko  yih  ikhtiyar 
diya  ? 

3  Us  ne  unhen  jawdb  men  kaha,  ki 
Main  bin  tum  bo  ek  bdt  piichhta  hun  ; 
mujli  sekaho; 

-i  Yiihannd  kd  baptiama  aemdn  se 
tha.,  ya  lUlmion  seV 
5  Uuhon  nu  Apas  men  salib  ki,  ki 


Tdkittdn  H  tamsil.  LIJ'QA' 

Al'ilt  ham  kahen,  A'srnan  se  ;  to  wnhi 
ittuveeft,  l'hir  timi  ne  uso  ky&n  mi 
mana  't 

'j  Aur  agar  ham  kahen,  ki  A'dmioa 
se;  to  sab  lo^  ha.ni  par  patthrau  kar- 
fflge:  kyunki  unheri  yaijiu  hai,  ki 
Yuhanud  nabi  thd. 

7  Tab  unhon  ne  jawdb  diya,  ki  ham 
nahin  jantu,  ki  kahan  se  thd. 

6  Yisfi'  ue  u»  ko  kaha,  Main  biii 
tum  se  nahin  kahtii,  ki  yih  kis  ikhti- 
ydr  se  kuda  lilin. 

y  5"  l'hir  wah  logon  se  yib  tamsil 
kabnu  laga ;  ki  Kisi  shakhs  nt  ek  an- 
giir  k»  bag  lagake  use  bdgbduon  ke 
HUpurd  kiyd,  aur  wuddat  tak  pardes 
men  ja  raba. 

10  Aur  maushtt  par  ek  nauknr  ko 
baghaiion  ku  pas  bheja,  td  ki  we  us 
angiir  ke  bag  ka  phal  us  ku  den  ;  lekin 
b£gbaBQB  ne  ua  ko  pitko  khali  hati; 

pii,:i-d. 

11  Pkir  us  ne  di'isrc  otoku  ku 
bbeji  ;  iinhon  ne  us  ko  bhi  pitke,  aur 
be-'izzat  karke,  khdli  hdth  pnerd. 

12  Kiir  us  ne  tisre  ko  bhejd ;  un- 
hon  ue  gbiiyul  karke  us  ko  bhi  nikal 
diva. 

13  Tab  us  bdg  ke  mdlik  ne  kaha,  ki 
Kya  kariiij?  main  apno  piyare  bete 
ku  lilujiinga:  shdyad  use  dekhkardab 
i.i'-ij. 

14  Jab  bdgbdnon  ne  uhc  dekha, 
fcpU  mq)  salah  ki,  aur  kaha,  ki  Vih 
waris  hai :  do,  us  ku  mdr  dalen,  ki 
Mnv:is  imuijri  ho  jae. 

15  Tab  us  ko  bag  ke  bahar  nikalke 
mdr  d.ilii.  Ab  bag  ka  malik  uu  ko 
satu  kya  karegi? 

18  wuh  dwega,  aur  un  bagbanon 
ko  qatl  karegd,  aur  bag  auron  ko  som- 
poga.  Unhon  ne  yih  sunku  kahd, 
Aisd  na  howe. 

17  Tab  ub  ne  un  ki  taraf  dekhke 
kaha,  Phir  wuh  kya  hai,  jo  likha  hai, 
ki  Wuh  pattltar  ji»e  raj^inm  ne  radd 
kiyd,  mifci  kone  ka  Kira  hud? 

18  liar  ck  jo  us  patthar  par  giru, 

107 


',  XX.  Qai&ar  ko  jizyt  dtme  ki  bibit. 
chur  hoga  ;  aur  jis  par  wuh  gire,  use 
pis  dalega. 

19  ^  Tab  earddr  kahiuon  aur  faqi- 
hon  ne  cbdha,  ki  uni  wnqt  us  par  hdth 
dalcn ;  par  logon  ee  dare,  kyiinki  jdiid 
ki  yih  tamsil  unhin  ke  liaiju.  men  kahi. 

20  Aur  us  ki  tak  men  the,  aur  un- 
hon nc  kai  jasuson  ko  bhejd,  ki  rast- 
ba>.on  ka  bhes  ikhtiyir  karke  uh  ki 
koi  bat  pakar  pdwen,  wi  ki  us  ko  hakim 
ke  ^abzaoikhtiyarnjeit  haivalakarcn. 

21  Tab  unhon  ne  uh  se  piichlia,  ki 
Ai  Ustad,  ham  jdnte  hain  ki  tu  du- 
rust  kahtd  aur  sikhatd  hai,  aur  zdhir 
uar  nazar  nahin  karta,  baiki  sachdi  se 
Khudd  ki  nih  batara  hai : 

22  Hamen  Qaisar  ko  jizya  dena 
rawa  hai,  ki  aahin  ? 

23  Par  us  ne  un  ki  dagftbdzi  daryaft 
karke  un  se  kaha,  ki  Mujh  ko  kydii 
daiuato  ho  ? 

24  Ek  dinar  mujhe  dikbdo.  U»  par 
kis  ki  surat  aur  sikka  hai?  Unhou 
ne  us  ke  jawab  men  kahd,  Qainar  ka." 

25  Tab  us  ue  uu  se  kaha,  Pas  jo 
(Jaisar  kd  hai,  Qaisar  ko  do,  aur  jy 
iylmdd  kd  hai,  Khudd  ko. 

20  Aur  we  logon  ke  dge  us  ki  bat 
pakar  na  saken :  aur  us  ke  jawab  «e 
ta'ajjub  karke  chup  ho  rahe. 

27  1  Tab  Sadnqiog  meg  se,  jo  qi- 
yamat  kd  inkdr  karte,  ba'eofl  nc  jhU 
ake  us  ae  yih  kahke  piichlia,  ki 

28  Ai  Usidd,  Miisd  ne  hamilre  liye 
likhd  hai,  ki  Agar  kisd  kd  bhdijuru 
(.■hhorkc  mar  jde,  aur  wuh  be-auldd 
mar  jae,  to  \w  ka  bhai  tu  kl  joni  ku 
iewe,  aui1  apuo  bhdi  ke  liye  nasi  qdim 
kare. 

20  Ab  sdt  bhai  the :  pahlii,  joni 
karke  be-auldd  mar  gayd. 

30  Tab  dusre  ne  us  'aurat  ko  liyii, 
aur  w  uli  l.ilii  be-aulid  mnd. 

31  Tisre  ne  us  ko  liyd  ;  isi  tarah  un 
sdton  nc;  aur  sah  be-auldd  mue. 

Aur  sab  ke  ba'd  wuh  'aurat  bhi 

33  Pas   ojydinat  mcti   un   men   se 


Qii/amat  ki  babat.  LU'QA' 

wuh  kis  ki  jorfi  kogi?  kyunki  w  uh 
sdton  ki  y>vn  tlii. 

34~  Y  isu'  uc  jawlb  men  un  se  kaha, 
ki  Is  jahin  ke  log  bydh  karte,  aur 
bydhe  jitu  hairi. 

35  Lekin  io  log  ns  janin  ke  aur 
uiyimat  ku  shar'tk  hone  ke  ldiq  Jhn- 
harfe,  lia  bydh  karte  hain.,  aur  ua 
bydbo  jdtc ; 

36  Phir  nahin  marnc  ke:  kyunki 
wo  (irishton  ki  manind  haijt;  aur 
qiyamat  ku  bete  lioku  Khuda  ke  bete 
hain, 

37  Aur  murdon  ke  ji  uthne  par 
Miiwa  ne  bbi  jliari  ke  ahwdl  ke  bayan 
iii.n  Lahan  kiya ;  chuiianchi  Khudd- 
wnml  ko  Al'imliiiin  kd  Khuda,  aur  Iz,- 
haq  kd  Khuda,  aur  Ya'uub  kd  Khuda 
kalita  hai. 

38  Lekin  Khuda  murdorj  ka  Khu- 
da nahin,  baiki  zindon  kd  hai :  ki  sab 
us  ke  pda  zinda  hain. 

30  f  Tab  ba'zc  fiuphon  ne  jawab 
men  use  kabi,  ki  Ai  Uetdd,  tii  ne 
kluili  farindyd. 

40  lia'd  us  ko  kian  kd  hiwdo  na 
pari  ki  us  «o  kuchh  piichhe, 

41  Aur  uh  ne  un  se  kahd,  Kis  tarah 
kahte  hain,  ki  Masih  Ddiid  kd  Be$d 
hal '? 

4-  Aur  lWid  Zabur  ki  kitdb  men 
np  kalita  hai,  ki  Khudawand  ne  nicro 
Khudawand  ae  kahd,  ki  Mere  dahiue 
lullli  mi  baith, 

43  Jab  tak  ki  main  tere  dushmauon 
ko  tere  pdnwon  ki  cliauki  karibi. 

44  Pas  Ddrtd  to  use  Khudawand 
kahtd  hai,  phir  wuh  m  kd  betd  kia 
tarah  hiid? 

45  %  Jab  sah  log  sun  rahe  the,  ua 
ne  apne  ehdgirdun  w  kaha,  ki 

4ti  Faoihon  se  khabardar  raho,  jo 
lanibi  posliak  pabine  phirnd  chihte, 
aur  bdziron  men  talam  ko,  aur  'ibd- 
datkhanori  men  aadr  kursion  ko,  aur 
liiilunaiiiorj  mon  lipar  ki  jagahon  ke 
muhhtdq  hain; 

47  Webcwon  ki-gharonkokhdjite, 
108 


,  XXI.  Oarib  bewa  kr.  do  ckhadam. 
aur  dikbdnc  ke  liye  lanibl  diauri  na- 
mdn  karte  hain  ;  pas  unhin  ko  ziydda 
saza  uiilegi. 

XXI  BA'B. 

U  S  ne  ankh  uthake  dauUtmand  >ij 
ko,  jo   ki  npni  nazr  liaikal  ke 
khazdna  men  dalte  tlie  dekha. 

2  Aur  ek  kangdl  bowa  ko  bh(  do 
clihaddm  ddlte  dekha. 

3  Tab  us  ne  kaha,  Main  tam  ia 
saoh  kahtii  lilin,  ki  is  kangal  bewa  M 
sab  se  ziydda  dala : 

4  Kyuijki  un  wabkon  no  apne  ziyd- 
da tnfi  u  Kliudi  ki  nazrog  men  ddld: 
]wir  us  ne  apni  garibl  ki  sdrf  piiuji 
ddli. 

5  *{  Aur  jab  ha'ze  liaikal  ke  haqq 
men  kahte  the,  ki  wuh  nafi»  patihai- 
on  aur  liadyon  sc  drdsla  hai,  us  ne 
kabd, 

C  We  di  n  dwcnge,  ki  un  merj  se  jo 
tura  dekhte  ho,  patthar  p:ir  jiatthar  uit 
chliiitegd,  ki  girdyd  na  jac. 

7  Tab  unhon  ue  ub  m  pilckud,  ki 
Ai  TT«tad,  yih  kah  bogd?  aur  ua  ke 
hone  kd  kyd  iiUlian  hal  V 

8  Us  ne  kahd,  Dekbo,  koi  tum  ko 
gumrdb  na  karc:  kyiinki  bahutere 
mere  ndm  par  awenge,  aur  liaiienge, 
ki  Main  wuhi  biin  j  aur  ki  Wacjt  naz- 
dik  hai :  i«ir  un  ko  pichhe  na  jdiyo. 

9  Am  jab  lardlori  aur  fasddon  ki 
khabar  suuo,  tt>  na  ghabrdiyo:  kytin- 
ki  pjihle  uu  kd  w4qF  hond  zarur  hai ; 
par  ab  tak  akhir  ualiin. 

10  Plilr  us  no  un  se  kaha,  ki  Q,iuin 
qaum  par,  aur  badshihat  badshdhat 
par  e  hari  i  dwcgi. 

11  Aur  jagah  ba  jagah  bare  bare 
bhuncbdl  dwerjge,  aur  kdl  aur  mari 
paregi :  aur  bhaydnak  chizen  aur  bare 
barc  ni&hdn  dsman  se  ^aliir  hongc. 

12  Lekin  in  sab  bdton  se  pahle  we 
mere  nam  ke  sabab  tum  par  hdth 
(ldlcnge,  aur  BatawaggSj  aur  'ibadat- 
khdnon  aur  qaidkliduuQ  mori  k>gon  ke 
hawdla  kareDc;',,  aur  hadsbdhon.  aur 
liakhnon  ke  pas  khincbeijge. 


Yarit&alam  A-t  garatjo  hogi.     LXT'QA' 

13  Aur  yih  tumhare  liye  gawahi 
:haiiri'i;i. 

14  Pas  apne  iVil  meg  thaliri  raklio, 
ki  haru  pahle  sc  likr  ua  karen,  ki  kyd 
jawab  dejjge. 

15  Is  liye  ki  main  tumben  aisi  zubAn 
aur  hikmat  duiigii,  ki  Uinihdro  sal» 
dnshnian  khilaf  kahne,  aur  adnihna 
kamc  kii  maqdur  na  rakhenge. 

16  Aur  tum  nid  bdp,  aur  bhAlon, 
aur  rishtaddi-orj,  aur  doston  se  bhi 
giriftiir  kiye  jiogo ;  baiki  wo  lum  men 
80  ba'zog  ko  qatl  karenge. 

17  Aur  mere  ndm  ke  sabab  sab  log 
tum  Ke  kina  rakhenge. 

18  Lekin  tumhAre  sir  ki  t'k  bal  bhi 
giraya  na  jiegi. 

1U  Tum  sabr  6e  apui  jin  baehao 
rskho. 

20  Aur  jab  tum  Yarusalam  ko  fau- 
jon  se  ghira  dekho,  to  jdn  lo  ki  us  ka 
ujar  bumi  nazdik  hai. 

)il  Tab  we,  jn  Yahiidiya  men  hon, 
juihanm  par  bhag  jaen,  aur  we,  Jo 
shahr  men  bon,  bahar  nikal  jaen ;  aur 
we,  jo  dihat  mun  bon,  bhi  tar  na  iweft, 

22  Kviinki  we  dm  intiuam  ke  hain, 
ki  Bab,  ju  likhd  hai,  pdrA  hogA. 

23  Far  un  dlnon  men  iietwalion, 
aur  dddh-pildnewalion  par  at'aos !  ky- 
tinki  zainfn  par  hari  tangi  aur  is  qaum 
par  ga^ab  hogd. 

24  Aur  we  talwdr  ki  dbdr  sc  gir 
jaenge,  aur  asi  r  hoke  sab  qaumon  ke 
darmiyin  pahunchae  jierjge,  aur  jab 
tak  gair-qaumon  ki  \vaqt  puri  na  lio, 
Kusulam  gair-qaumon  se  raundi 
jacgi. 

25  %  Aur  siiraj  o  chdnd  aur  tiron 
men  nishAnlAn  hongi  j  aur  zamin  par 
qiunniin  ki  niusiliat,  aur  uamundar  aur 
us  ki  lahron  ke  shor  ke  sabab  ghabrd- 
h:U  bwrl : 

20  Aur  logon  ki,  dar  ke  roire,  aur 
un  chi/.on  ki  jo  zamin  par  atl  hain 
rali  dekhne  se,  jin  men  jan  na  rahegi ; 
is  liye  ki  Asmin  ki  miwaten  hflai 
i;t<'Uirj. 

109 


XXII.      Mtttth  ke  pftfr  une  ki  bafxil. 

27  Aur  tab  log  Ibn  i  A'dam  ko  badli 
men  qudrat  aur  bare  jalai  ke  sath  ate 

deknegge, 

28  Aur  jab  yih  ehi/.en  hone  lagag, 
sidhe  hoko  Bir  lipar  utbAo;  is  liye  ki 
tum  hara  chhutkira  nazdik  hai. 

29  Aur  us  nc  un  se  ek  tamsil  kahi ; 
ki  Anjir  ke darakhtaur  sab  darakhtou 
ko  dekho ; 

30  Jab  un  men  konpalen  nikalti 
hain,  tum  ip  hi  dekh  karke  jAiite  bo 
ki  ab  garmi  nazdik  ii. 

■'U  So  isi  tarah  tum  bhi,  jab  in 
obizon  ko  hote  dekho,  to  jano  ki  Khu- 

ki  badsbahat  nazdik  Ai. 

.'■-  Hain  tum  sc  sach  kalita  Iiiin, 
ki  Jab  tak  yih  sab  lio  na  luwe,  yih 
pusht  hargiz  na  gtizregi. 

33  A 'aman  o  zamin  bal  jienge :  par 
meri  baten  kabhi  na  talungi. 

34  1  Apne  se  khabardar  raho,  aisi 
na  howo  ki  tumhara  dil  babut  khdne, 
nurmatwdld  h'.me,  aur  Kindagi  ki  iiknuj 
Ke  bhdri  ]u\  aur  wuh  diu  tuin  par  aclia- 
nak  a  pare. 

35  Ia  liye  ki  wub,  jal  ki  tarah,  za- 
min ke  sah  rahiiewalon  ko  glier  legd. 

3C  l'ae  jdgte  raho,  aur  har  waqt 
du'i  mdngo,  tA  ki  tum  in  sab  chizon 
sc,  jo  honewili  bain,  bach  jane  ke  aur 
Ilm  i  A'dam  ke  simhne  khoro  hone  ke 
iaiq  tiialiro. 

37  Aur  wuh,  din  ko,  haikal  men 
ta'lim  doti,  aur  rit  ko,  biliar  jAko 
Zaitilni  ndme  pabir  par  rabti  tbi. 

38  Aur  subh  ko  sab  log  us  ki  bAten 
sunae  ko  haikal  mon  Ate  the. 

XX IT  BAU 

A  B  'Sd  i  fatir,  jia  ko  'id  i  fasab  kahte 
hain,  nazdik  Ai. 
2  Aur  sardar  kAhin  aur  faqih  tadbir 
meo  tbo  ki  us  ko  kis  tarah  mir  dAlen ; 
kytinki  logon  se  darte  the. 

;t  ^f  Tab  SbaitAn  YahudAh  men,  jo 
Iwkariyiiti  kahlAlA,  aur  barahou  ki 
ginii  men  tbd,  aamdyd. 

4  Us  uo  jAkc  sardar   kihinon  aur 


A'khiH  *id  ifamh  LU'QA' 

sipdhiorj  ke  wnnlar  se  saldh  ki,  ki  us  ko 
kia  tarah  un  ke  bawila  kaie. 

5  Wo  khush  hiie,  aur  uae  rupiya 
den  o  ki  iqrar  kiyd. 

G  Usaemtin  liyA^  :mr  n.i>>i'i  (ltnindh- 
ta  thd  ]tl  bagair  hangama  ke  use  un 
ko  hawdla  kare. 

7  \  Tab  fatfr  ka  din,  jis  metj  Tasah 
Babi  kanta  fitri!  tbd,  iya. 

■i  Yisti'  ne  Patrus  aur  Yukannd  ko 
yih  kaitke  bhcjd,  ki  Tum  lio,  bamire 
liye  (asah  taiy&r  kato,  td  ki  klideis. 

9  Unhon  ne  ubc  kabd,  Tu  kabin 
chdhtd  hai  ki  baui  taiydr  karen? 

10  Ua  uo  un  Be  kabd,  Dekho,  jab 
shahr  ntim  dakhil  hoge,  ek  ddmi  pdnl 
ka.  ghard  liye  tumhi'n  roib^a  ;  jis  <:har 
trterj  wiih  jde  ot  ke  piclthe  cbaie  jao. 

11  Aur  ghar  ko  milik  ne  kaho,  ki 
Ustid  bahti  hai,  ki  Wuh  roihmin- 
khana  kanan  bai,  jis  meu  main  apne 
shairinltm  ke  sdth  fasali  kodim? 

12  Wuli  tumben  ek  bani  i>dhikhd- 
na  farab  bichha  dikhdwegd :  wahln 
taiydr  karo. 

13  Unhon  ne  jdke,jatsd  us  ne  un 
ne  kaha  thd,  pdyd,  aur  fasah  taiydr 
kiyd. 

14  Aur  jab  waqt  dyd,  wuh  anu 
barah  rasulon  ko  sdth'  khdne  baithd. 

15  Aur  un  se  kaki,  llujbc  ban 
khwdhish  thi,  ki  duk  h  e  ah  n  e  ke  dge 
yib  (asali  tumhftre  sath  khdiin  : 

W  Kytirjki  main  tam  nokahtdhtiri, 
ki  Use  phir  kabhtS  na  khdilngd,  jab 
tak  Kbudd  ki  badshdnat  menteri  na 
ho. 

17  Aurpiydla  ko  leke  abnkr  kiyd, 
nur  kaha,  ki  U  ko  k>ko  lipan  men  birit 
lo: 

18  Kyunkimain  tum  sekahfdhun, 
ki  Angur  kd  ras  pbir  na  piuggd,jab 
tak  Ktiuni  ki  Mdshihat  na  km, 

19*  t  Phir  roti  li,  aur  shukr  karke 
teri,  aur  yih  kaiike  un  ko  di,  ki  Yih 
iricrd  badan  bai,  io  tambar*  wdste 
diya  jdtd  hai:  yib  meri  yddgdri  ke 
waste  kiyd  karo. 
110 


XXII.  H  babat, 

20  Aur  isi  tani)  kh&Le  ke  ba'd  us 
piyala  ko  lekar  kabd,  ki  Yib  piyala 
tuero  labu  se,  jo  tiimhire  waste  bahaya 
jatd  hai,  ek  naya  'abd  bai. 

21  1  Par,  «Ykho,  us  kd  hdth,  jo 
mujbe  ghiftir  karwiti  bal,  awet  anti 
tuez  par  hai. 

22  Bo  rbn  i  A'dam  to,  jaiad  ub  ke- 
Aste  muqarrar  hai,  jdtd  bai :  magar 
s  Bbakhs  parafso\jo  nsegirifiAr  kar- 

wdtA  bai  I 

23  Tab  we  Apa*  nmii  puchbnfl  lage, 
bt  ham  men  m  wuh  kauu  hai,  jo  yib 
karogd  ? 

24  ^J  Aur  un  iimn  takrir  tbi,  ki 
ha.m  men  so  kauu  nal»  se  bara  tbahre. 

2.'i  0a  ne  un  se  kaha,  ki  Qaiunon 
ke  bddsbdh  un  ]jar  bukiimat  karb:; 
bain  ;  aur  jo  log  un  par  ikhtiyar  rakh- 
te  hain,  kluulriwaud  i  ui'amat  kahlitt. 

26  Tar  tum  aise  na  ho;  baiki  jo 
tum  men  bard  itai,  cbhote  ki,  aur 
koiwind  khidiuat-karocwdlc  ki  iitit- 
niud  ho. 

27  Kyiinki  kauu  bara  bai,  wuh  jo 
khdne  bailTid,  yd  wuh  jo  khidmat  kar- 
td  bai?  kya  w  n  b  nabin,  io  khane 
liaithdhai?  lekin  main  tumhdre  dar- 
miydn  kiiuluiat-karnewdle  ki  miiiind 
hun. 

28  Tum  wc  bi  ho,  jo  meri  dzma- 
isbon  men  sadd  mere  siitb  rahe. 

29  Aur  jaisd  mere  Bdp  ne  mere  liye 
ek  bidah dbai  muqaxrar  ki,  main  l»hi 
tumbin  liye  rjauqarxar  karti  hun  ; 

30  TA  ki  meri  bidsbdbat  men  me- 
ri mes  par  khao,  pio,  aur  takhton  jtar 
baithkar  Isrdcl  ke  bdraii  gharinon  ki 
'adilat  karo. 

31  t  Phir  Khudawond  ne  kahd, 
Sbama'dn,  ai  Snarria'iiii,  dekh,  Sbai- 
tdn  ne  cbdhA  ki  tumhen  gehi';n  ki 
taralt  pbatke ; 

32  Lt-k'in  main  ne  tere  liy.!  du'i 
mdngi,  ki  terd  imdn  jdtd  na  raba  i  aur 
jab  tii  phire,  to  apne  bhatag  ko  maa- 
b6t  kar. 

33  Tab  us  ne  use  kabd,  ki  Ai  Khu- 


Patrvs  H  bdbat  peshingoi.  LU'QA' 
ddwand,  main  tere  sath  qaid  hoiie, 
baiki  tnarne  ko  taiyAr  lirin. 

34  Tad    ub    ne  kabd,   Ai   Patrus, 

main  tujh  se  kahtA  hun,  ki  dj  murg 

i  dega,  jab  tak  tu  tin  martaba 

mera  inkar  na  kare,  ki  main  use  na- 

hiri  jAntd. 

SG  Aur  110  ne  un  sc  kaha,  ki  Jnb 
main  ne  tmnhcn  bc  batuc,  aur  be 
jholi,  aur  be  ivition  ke  bhejd,  k  y  A  tum 
ko  kisti  ebi/  ki  hajsit  Mi  ?  Unbon  ne 
kahA,  Kisu  ki  nahiii. 

36  TJs  ne  unhen  kaha,  Par  nb  jis 
ke  pas  hat.i'i  A  bo,  lewe,  aur  isi  tarah 
jboli  bhi;  aur  jin  pAs  nahiy,  ai>ue 
kajiru  beckke  talwar  kharide. 

'■'■'•  K >  i'i ijU i  main  tum  se  kabtd  hun, 
ki  yih  nawishta,  ki  Wuh  bedug  n  "'L! 
ginA  gaya,  sarur  liai  ki  mere  haqq 
mtn  uiirA  ho :  is  liye  ki  yib  baten,  jo 
mori  babat  hain.anjdm  taknahuLchtiii. 

38  Unhon  ne  kaliA,  ki  Dekb,  ai 
Kb.ud.wami,  yakin  do  talwAr  haig. 
UH  nn  un  se  kaha,  Bahut  hai. 

39  *{  Aur  wuh  nikalko  apne  das- 
tur  |»r  Zaitiin  ke  pabdr  ki  taraf  cha- 
Id :  aur  tis  ke  shAgird  us  ke  pichhi!  bo 
Uye. 

40  Aur  ua  jagak  pahunehke  ua  nc 
un  se  kahA,  Du'a  mangu,  tA  ki  A/.md- 
iah  men  na  paro. 

41  Aur  us  ne  un  se  tir  ke  ek  jpppe 
par  barbke  ghutne  tekkar  du'A  nian- 
gi,  aur  kaha,  ki 

42  Ai  Bdp,  agar  tu  cbdhe,  to  yih 
piyala  mnjli  sc  dur  kari: ;  lckin  nafiri 
onani  turbin,  baiki  teri  niarzi  ke  mu- 
wdfiq  ho. 

43  Aur  dsmdu  se  ek  firishta  us  ko 
dikliAi  di  ya.  jo  usu  quwat  detA  thA. 

44  Aur  wuh  jdukani  men  phan*fc6 
bahut  girgirdke  du'd  mdngtd  thA;  aur 
us  kA  paai'na  lahu  ki  biind  ko  mAnind 
liukiir  /.amin  par  gind  thA. 

45  Aur  du'A  se  uthkar  apne  shd- 
girdon  ke  pda  dyd,  aur  unhen  yam  s* 
Bote  pdyd, 

4(i  Aur  «n  se  kabd,  ki  Tum  kyun 
111 


',  XXII.  Masih  foi  giri/tar  ftoRti 

sote  ho?    uthkar  du'd  mSngo,  tA  ki 
AzmAJah  men  ua  paro. 

47  1f  Wuh  yih  kah  rahA  tha,  ki  dc- 
klm,  ek  bhir  dikkiii  di,  aur  ek  uu  ba- 
rahon  men  se,  jo  Yahudah  kahlutd 
tba,  uu  ke  Age  Age  Lukar  Yiku'  pit 
d  ya,  ki  us  ko  cliunte. 

48  Tab  Yisti'  ne  use  kaha,  k  i  Ai 
Yahudah,  kya  tu  Ibn  i  A'dam  ko  bau 
se  pakarwdta  hai  'i 

49  Jab  unhon  ne,  jo  us  ke  ird  gird 
the,  wuh  lidi  ju  houewdld  thd  dek  ha. 
to  use  kabd,  Ai  Khuddwand,  kya  bam 
talwar  chaldwon  ? 

50  1  UB  men  se  ek  ne  sarddr  ka- 
bin ke  naukar  ko  lagai,  aur  u  ka 
dahind  kdn  urd  diyA. 

51  Tab  Yisti'  ne  jawdb  men  kaha, 
Itne  hi  par  rahno  do.  Aur  DJ  ke  kdn 
ko  chhukar  us  ko  changd  kiyd. 

"i2  Phir  Tisii'  ne   sarddr  kAbiimii. 

haikal  ke  Hardaruii,  aur  btunrgOfl 

jo  ns  par  charh  Ae  the,  kuini,  ki 

Tum  jaise  chor  iwktirae  ko  taiwarei. 

aur  ldthiAn  tekar  nikh'  ho? 

63  Main  hai  n»  haikal  men  tum- 
bdre  sd<h  thd,  aur  tum  ne  mujli  ptt 
hdtb  na  ddlA ;  lekin  yih  tundiaii 
ghftrf,  aur  zulmat  ka  ikhtiyar  IilU. 

54  T  Tab  we  use  jiakarke  le  chale, 
aur  aarddr  kdhin  ke  ghar  men  le  gaye. 
Aur  l'atnis  diir  dur  us  ku  pohhe 
elialA  jata  tha. 

55  Aur  jab  unbon  nc  ddldn  ke  bieh 
men  dg  jaldf,  aur  uiilkar  Itiuthe  the, 
Fatrus  un  ke  bieh  men  baitha. 

5(3  Ek  laundi  ne  uae  Ag  ke  ji.is  hni- 
thA  dekhkar  us  par  kbiib  ni«Ab  knv- 
b  babi,  Yib  bhi  us  ko  sAth  thd. 

57  Par  us  ne  us  kd  inkdr  karke  ka- 
bd, Ai  'aurat,  main  use  nahin  jdnta. 

68  Thori  der  ba'd  kisi  aur  ne  use 
dekhkar  kabd,  ki  Tu  bhi  un  men  ae 
hai.  Fatrus  ne  kahA,  ki  Ai  Adrai. 
main  naliirj  linu. 

59  Ghauje  ek  ba'd  aur  kisi'i  ne  td- 
kid  sc  kah  A,  ki  Yih  ddmi  be-shakk  us 
ke  sdth  thd:  kyunki  Jalili  hai. 


Yahiidi  ug  par  fatwa  dete. 

60  Pfttrua  ne  kaha,  Ai  shakhw, 
main  uahin  aamajhtd  ki  lu  k  ya  tah- 
ta hai.  Yih  knh  hi  rahd  tbd,  ki  jhat 
niurg  ne  bau  g  di. 

61  Tab  Khuddwnnd  ne  phirke 
Patras  par  tti^rih  ki.  Aur  l'atrus  ko 
Khnddwand  ki  bat  jo  usc  kahi,  ki 
uurg  ki  bdng  dene  ite  dge  tii  incrd 
titi  bar  inkar  karena,  ydd  ai. 

62  Aur  Patnu  bahar  jdke  zor  zar 
voya. 

63  T  Aur  we  mard,  jin  ke  baw&le 
Yiaii'  tha,  lis  ko  that.the  incn  urane 
aur  marmi  lago. 

64  Aur  us  ki  dnkh  mdndke 
rminb.  par  taraslnchn  mAre,  aur  us  ne 
yih  kahke   pnchhd,  ki   Nubtiwat   M 
kali,  ki  kis  ne  tnjh  ko  mara? 

ti."j  Aur  «s  ke  ha.qq  mcn  aur  bhi 
bahu  t  kufr  bake. 

06  ^  Aur  jab  din  hiia,  logon  ke 
lni/.ur'ioij,  aur  sardAr  kdhinon,  aur 
faqihon  ki  jama'it  lagi,  aur  we  use 
;t.pni  'adalatgah  msn  laV,  aur  kaha, 

67  Agar  tvi  Maxih  hai,  to  ham  se 
kah.  (Jh  ne  un  «e  kaha,  Agar  ranin 
t.tim  ae  kanun,  to  tum  yaqin  na  kar- 
ogo: 

68  Aur  agar  puchhtin  bhi,  to  mujhe 
jawab  na  doge.  aur  na  chhoroge. 

68  Ab  se  Ibn  i  A'dam  'Kbuda  ki 
qurtrat  ke  dahiuu  hati)  baitM  rahegd. 

70  Tab  sabhon  ne  kahi,  Pm  kva 
trf  Khnda  ka  Beta  hai  ?  Us  ne  un  se 
tahi,  Jo  tum  kahto  ho  wuh  hi  main 
hdn. 

71  Tab  unhon  ne  kaba,  Ab  namun 
aur  gawdbi  kya  darkar  '<  kyugki  hai?} 
ne  us  hi  ke  niunb  se  sirna. 

XXIII  BA'B. 

AUR  sari  jama'at  uthke  ubo  Pildtus 
pas  le  gayi. 
2  Aur  ua  par  nalish  karni  sburiV 
ki,  ki  ise  bain  ue  qaum  ko  bahkatc, 
aur  Qaisar  ko  malmil  dene  ae  man'a 
tuirto,  aur  apne  ta,iu  Masih  bidahah 
kahte  paya. 


Tab   l'ilatus   ne 
112 


LU'QA',  XXIII.  Vs  ko  Pi?ri(«sjKi«  Ujand. 
Kyd  tii  Yahudion  ka  Badsbdh  hai  ? 
Ha  ne  us  ke  jawab  men  kaha,  WuM 
hai  jo  td  kahti. 

i  Tab  l'ilatus  ne  sardar  Vahinorj 
aur  logon  m  kahd,  ki  Main  is  shakhs 
ka  kuchh  qusiir  nahin  pata. 

5  Par  unhon  nc  aur  bhi  tundi  se 
kaha,  ki  Yih  Jatil  sn  lokar  nara  Ya- 
hiidiya  men,  yahiin  tak,  ta'lim  de  de 
lo^ron  ko  ubharia  hai. 

(j  Hilatus  ne  .lalil  ka  nam  sunkar  ' 
piichhd,  ki  kyd  yih  admi  Jalili  hai  ? 

7  Jad  jaili-  ki  Hcrodis  ke  'amal  ka 
hai,  ase  Herodi»  ]<&»,  jo  un  diuoii  Ya- 
nisftlam  men  thd,  bhejA. 

H  ^  Aur  Herodis  \i-\C  ko  dokhke 
bahut  khush  hua:  kyunld  muddat  se 
chahta  tha  ki  usc  dekhe,  is  Iiye  ki 
us  ki  babat  bahut,  kuchh  auna  tha, 
aur  ua  ki  koi  karamat  tlekhnc  ki  uni- 
1 1  K' d  thi. 

U  Aur  ua  no  us  sc  bahu  teri  bdtcn 
puchhin ;  par  us  ne  uae  kuchh  jawab 
na  diya. 

10  Aur  sardar  kahinon  aur  faqihon 
ne  khare  boke  ua  par  siiMdat  so  ni£ 
lis  h  ki. 

11  Tab  Herodis  ne  apni  fauj  garnet 
use  nacbin  thahrdya,  aur  usc  chatn- 

:hamatf  poshtik  pahiniiku  us  ka  ta- 
n.iskhur  kiyd,  aur  phir  Piliitus  kane 
bheji. 

12  U  Aur  uni  din  Pildtus  aur  Her- 
ndis  dpas  rnen  dost  hn  gaye;  kyunki 
dge  un  men  dnshmani  thi. 

13  ^  Aur  Pilatus  ne  aarddr  kahin- 
on, aur  sardaron,  aur  logon  ko  pas 
buliks  un  se  kab.'i,  ki 

14  Tum  is  shakliH  ko  mcre  pds  yih 
kahte  Ide,  ki  Yih  logon  ko  bahliata 
hai :  dekho,  main  no  tumhdrc  dg(i 
taht]iq  ki,  par  un  (]usi'irori  men  se,  jin 
ko  tum  us  par  thahrdte  ho,  main  ne 

shakhs  mcn  kuchh  na  paya : 

15  Aur  na  llerodis  ne :  kydijki  mairi 
m  tmtihi.-n  us  ke  pds  bhejn, ;  aur,  de- 

Ikho,  us  kd  koi  nisi'i  l.dm  na  thahrd. 


piichha,  jo  (jati  ke  hii'i  ho. 


feo  ,-hhor  <J«,><i.  LWQA',  XXIII. 

Ifi  Tb    liyo    u»    ko    tarnbih    kfcrfc 
thhor  ddy.ga. 

17'  (U«e  har  'M  nieij   znrur  thA: 
kisd  ko  uu  ko  wdste  chhor  de.) 


.Wf.-iJi  io  «titt  demi, 

31  Kyiinki    jab   hare   darakht    ke 
sdth  aisd  karte  hain,  to  sukhe  ke  sdth 

i '  k  yd  uh  k  iya  jdegd  ',• 

32  Aur  we  do  nur  Admion  ko,  jo 


18  Tab  sab  milke  chilUe,  ki  Use  badkAr  the,  le  chale,  ki   us  ke  sdth 
le  jd,  aur  Barabbds  ko   hamdro  liyo  mdrejAeij. 
chhor.  33  Aur  jab  we  us  jagah   par   jise 


10  ('W uh  kisd  faaad,  ]o  sb.abr  m 05 
hua  tha,  aurkhi'm  ko  siibab,  qaid  tha.) 

20  Pildtusne  yih  didhko  ki  Yisi'i' 
ko  chhor  de,  phir  unhen  samjhdyA. 

21  Par  unhon  ne  ohillako  kaha-,  ki 
Us  ko  salib  de,  salib  do, 

22  ftarf  bar  usnc  1111  so  kahA,  Kyd[i? 
uh  uc  kyd  badi  ki  hai?  main  uo  us 
roen  qatl  ke  latcj  koi  qusur  na  paya: 
i»  Hyc  main  use  tambih  karke  chhor 
dungd, 

23  Par  unhon  ne  shor  machdke  use 
tang  kiya,  aur  chaba  ki  use  salib  ilf 

i'le.     Aur  un  ki,  aitr  fsard&r  kahinon 
:l  jiwa/.en  galib  lu'iiu, 

24  Tab  Pildtus  ne  hukm  kiya,  ki 
«n  ki  khwAhish  ke  muwAfiq  ho. 

25  Aur  un  ke  waste  us  fchftkhl  ko, 
jo  faaad  aur  kbun  ke  sabab  qaid  tha, 
jise  unhon  ne  cblha  tha,  chhor  diya ; 
aur  Yisii'  ko  un  ki  marzi  par  hawai» 
kiyd. 

26  Aur  jab  us  ko  le  jate  the,  Sha- 
ma'i'm  nam  Qurcni  ko,  jo  dlbdt  se  At-A 
tha,  pakarko  salib  us  ]>ar  rak  h  di,  ki 
Yisu  ke  pichhe  pichhe  le  cliale. 

27  %  Aur  logon  ki  ban  hhir,  aur 
'auraten,  jo  uh  ke  waate  chhdti  pitti 
aur  ro  rahi  thin,  us  ke  picblie  pfchhi 
chalin. 

28  Virtii*  ne  phirke  un  se  kahA,  ki 
Ai  Yard  salam  ki  betio,  mujh  par 
roo,  baiki  Ap  jwir  aur  apne  larkoii  ]>ar 
roo. 

29  Kyiinki,  dekho,  we  din  tite  hain. 
jin  men  kahenge,  Mubarak  hain  ban- 
jlicn,  aur  wuh  pet  jo  na  jnne,  aur  we 
chhdtidn  jinhon  ue  diidh  im  pilAyd. 

30  Tab   paharon  se   kahna  ahurii' 
karerjge,  ki  Hain    jiar  gir  paro 
pahdrion  se,  ki  Hamen  chhipAo. 

'  m 


Kalvari  nam  mkhle,  n&hunche,  to  wu- 
han  use  salib  di,  aur  badkdron  ko  bhi, 
ek  dahine  aur  diisra  bani. 

34  1  Aur  Yisu'nckaha.ki  Ai  BAp, 
un  ko  mu'df  kar;  kyfinki  we  nahin 
jdnte  ki  kyd  karte  hain.    Aur  unhon 

chitthi  ilAlke  us  ki  |«»shdk  birit  li. 

35  Aur  log  khare  dekh  valie  the. 
Aur  sardar  un  ke  »Ath  tliaitba  kacke 
kahte  the,  ki  Auron  ko  baehayd ;  agar 
yih  Masih  Khudd  kd  barjjuzida  lini, 
to  Ap  ko  bachawe. 

3ti  Aur  sipdliion  nebhi  usparhan-i 
ki,  nur  pas  jdkar  aur  use  i-irka  dekur 
kahd, 

37  Agar  td  Yahudion  kd  MiUltil 
.i,  to  apne  ta,in  baehd. 

38  Aur  us  ke  i'ijiar  YiVndni,  Rnmi, 
r  Ibrani  m'en  yih  nawishta  likhd 
4,    ki    YIH     YAIIU'Dl'OK     KA' 

HA'DSHA'H  HAL 

3',)  T  Aur  ek  un  badk:i:urj  meg  se, 
jo  salib  par  latkfte  gaye  the,  use  ta'na 
nidrke  kahta  tha,  ki  Agar  td  Ha*ih 
hai,  to  Ap  ko  aur  hatn  ko  bachd, 

40  Ddsro  ne  uso  maldiuat  karke 
jawdh  diyA,  Kyd  td  bhi  Kb.idd  se  na- 
hiri  dartA,  jis  hdl  bi  is  lii  asi  ihcii 
giriftdr  hai* 

41  Aur  bam  to  wajibi,  kyiinki  apne 
kdmon  kd  hadld  pdte  hain  :  par  us  n  e 
to  koi  bejd  kdiu  uahln  kiyd. 

42  Aur  ua  ne  Yisd'  se  kaha,  Ai 
Khuddwand,  jab  t&  apni  tAdahahat 
nien  Awe,  niujhe  yad  kijiyo. 

43  YisiV  ne  ueo  kahA,  Main  tujh  se 
sach  kahta  bdji,  ki  A'j  ti'i  mere  sAth 
bibisht  mon  hogd. 

44  Aur  chhatliwcTi  ghante  ke  q»rib 
thd,  ki  i<ari  zamiu  par  anaheri  chhd 
gayd,  aur  nauwen  ghante  tak  rahA ; 


Masih  ji  utftke  «/>  ko  LU'QA", 

45  Aur  Kilraj  tarik  ho  gaya,  aur  hai- 
kal  kaparda  bich  se  phat  gaya. 

46  1  Aur  Yisu'  uc  bari  iwaa  ne 
pukarke  kalut,  ki  Ai  BAp,  uiahj  "I"1' 
nih  tere  hilhon  ruen  aoniptaluin:  yih 
knhke  dam  chhor  diyi. 

47  Aur  sii  badar  ae  yih  hal  dekhkc 
Khu.ia  ki  ta'rif  ki,  aur  kalia,  Be-sliakk, 
vili  admi  ra«tbdK  tha. 

48  Aur  eab  log,  jo  yih  taruaHha 
dekhno  ae  the,  jad  yih  wiqi'at  dekhin, 
dihili  pitte  phire. 

41)  Aur  U8  ko  aab  janpahdiin,  aur 
ttl  'aurateii,  jo  Jalil  ae  ua  ke  aath  ai 
tliin,  diir  kbari  hoke  yih  hal  dek  h  rabi 
thin.. 

60  T  Aur,  dekho,  ek  nhakhs  Yusuf 
oame  uiut>hir,  j*»  nek  aur  rastbaz  tha ; 

51  Aur  wuh  un  ki  salah  aur  kim 
uieti  «harik  na  bila:  yih  Yahud  ion  ke 
shahr  Aramntiya  ki  tha;  aur  w  uh 
khud  Khuda  ki  badalutliat  ka  intissir 
Urti  th:i: 

5'2  Ua  hb  Pilatua  ke  pas  jake  liati' 
ki  lish  luan^i, 

53  Aur  ua  ko  utarke  kattin  men 
lapets,  aur  ek  q»br  men,  p  pntthar 
uiiu  kliudi  thi,jah:Ln  koi  kabhu  rakhd 
na  gaya  tha,  rak  ha. 

54  Aur  wuh  iaiyiri  ka  diu  tha,  aur 
sabt  ke  diu  ki  ]«u  phatnc  lagi, 

55  Aur  we  'auraten.  libi,  jo  ua  ke 
sulii  JaUl  ae  ai  thin,  pichlie  pichbe 
clialiy,,  aur  qabr  ko  aur  us  ki  Uah  ko, 
kl  ku  tarah  rakhi  yayi,  deSfcti  thin. 

56  Aur  phirke  kiiushbuiin,  aur 
murr  taiyir  kiyi;  lekin  ahar'a  ke 
muwafln  Bati  ki>  din  aiilui  kiya. 

XXIV  BA'B. 

AUR  we  hafte  ke  pahle  diu  bon 
tarke,  un  khu&hbuiog  ko  jo  tai- 
yir  ki  thia,  leke  qabr  par  ain,  aur  un 
ke  sath  kai  aur  bhi  thin. 

2  Aur  unhon  ne  pattliar  ko  qabr 
par  ae  dhalkaya  luia  paya. 

3  Aur  amlar  jake  Khudawand  Yisu' 
ki  lasli  ua  pai. 

4  Aur  aiaa  htia,  ki  jad  we  u»  bit  se 

114 


XXIV.  thagirdon  par  z&hir  kartA. 
bairan  thin,  dekho,  do  shakha  cham- 
chainiti  posli&k  pahine  u  n  ke  pas  kbare 
the: 

o  Jab  we  darti,  aur  apue  sir  zamiu 
par  jhukati  thin,  unhon  U  un  ae  kaha. 
Timi  kyviii  /.imia  ko  niurdun  men 
dliuudhtiiUi  bo? 

6  Wuh  yahan  nahin  hai,  baiki  ntha 
hai ;  yad  karo,  ki  han<>%  jab  Jalil  men 
tha,  tum  bo  kyi  kahd  tha,  ki 

7  Zarur  hai  ki  Ibn  i  A'dam  gunah- 
^.ivin  kl  hiith  men  hawala  kiya  jae, 
aur  salib  diya  jae,  aur  tiaro  diri  utlic. 

8  Tab  us  ki  hiten  unhen  yad  ain. 

9  Aur  qabr  par  sc  pbirke  uu  gya- 
rahon,  aur  sab  baqi  logon  ko,  in  sab 
bat. m  ki  khal>ar  di. 

10  Aui'Miii'iyani  Mandul  ini,  aur  Yli- 
anni,  aur  Mai-iyain,  Ya'uiSb  ki  ma,  aur 
duari  'auraten,  jo  aath  thin,  inhun  tie 
rasiilcm  ae  yih  baten  kahin. 

11  f'ar  iu  ki  l>iten  unhen  kahdni 
si  samajh  patin,  aur  uu  kA  i'atibar  ua 
kiya. 

ia  Tab  Patrua  uthke  qabr  ki  taraf 
daura;  aur  jhukkar  dekha  ki  eirt' 
kafan  pari  hai,  aur  is  majare  ae  ta- 
'ajjub  karta  ht'ta  apue  ghar  cliali  gaya. 

13  T  Aur,  dekho,  usi  din  un  meij 
ae  du  admi  us  kasti  ki  tftraf,  jis  ka 
nim  Ainmius,  aur  Yarusalam  se  pamit 
char  kos  ke  faaila  par  h»i,  jate  the : 

14  Aur  we  uu  aab  batnn  ki  babat, 
jo  waqi'  h  m  thin,  apaa  men  bit-chit 
kart«  tbe. 

15  Aur  aiaa  bi'ia,  ki  jab  we  bitehit 
aur  pi'ichh-pachh  kar  raho  the,  Yisu' 
Ap  nimiik  ike  un  ke  aath  chala; 

16  [,1'kin  un  ki  dnkli<n  band  ho 
gayi  thin,  ki  ua  ko  na  pahcliftni. 

17  Us  na  un  so  kaha,  Yih  kya  bdtcn 
hain,  jo  tuTii  nih  mon  ipjiB  mtn  karto 
jati.'  lio,  aur  udashote? 

18  Tab  ek  ne  jis  ki  nim  (Jliunas 
thi,  jiiwdb  mon  u-se  kahi,  ki  Kyi 
akeli  tii  hi  Yarusalam  men  pafdeaf 
bal,  ki  jo  Icaahh  Lu  dinog  ua  men  Ma 
Iiai,  naliiri  jauta? 


Mtt&  ji  i/fhke  dp  ko  LU'QA', 

19  Us  ne  un  ne  katili,  Ky*  ?  Unhon 
ne  usc  kaili,  Yisu'  Kasari  ke  majare, 
jo  nabi  tha,  aur  Khuda  aur  sdri  qaum 
ke  sanihne  karn  aur  kalam  men  qud- 
ratwald : 

20  Aur  kyunkar  sardar  kabin  aur 
harmire  saidiron  ne  ub  ko  rjatl  ke  hukm 
he  liye  hawdla  kiya,  aur  salib  di. 

21  Par  ham  ummed  rakhte  the,  ki 
yihi  Israel  ko  makhlasf  deno  ko  tha: 
aur  iri  si-b  ke  niwi,  ;ij  i  isra  roz  hai  ki 
yih  wdqi'dr.  huin. 

22  Aur  haru  meii  nc  kai'auratim  ne 
bhi  ham  ko gliabra rakha  hai, ki  tarku 
U3  ki  qabr  par  gayin, ; 

23  Aur  uh  ki  lisk  ko  na  piikar  ain, 
aur  bolin,  ki  Ham  ne  firishton  ki  royat 
di;khi,  jiuhun  ue  kahd,  ki  W  uh  ziuda 
hai. 

24  Aur  lia'/cj  nc  harnarc  sathion 
men  se  qabr  par  jake,  jaisa  ki  un  'aur- 
ftton  m  kaha,  pava;  par  us  ko  aa 
dekil 

25  Tab  un  nc  un  se  Italia,  ki  Ai  na- 
dano,  aur  nabion  k  i  Bari  lidton  ke 
mdnue  inen  sust-mizajo; 

26  Kya  zari'ir  na  tha,  l;i  Masih  yih 
dnkh  uthawe,  aur  apne  jaldl  men  dd- 
khil  ho'? 

27  Aur  Miisd  ae,  aur  eab  rabion  se, 
ahurtf  karke  w  uh  baten,  jo  sab  kitabuii 

e  h:t.iq  ineii  hnin,  un  ke  liye 
tafsir  kiri. 

28  Aur  we  us  baati  ko,  jahdn  jate 
the,  nam.Uk  pahimcbe:  aur  ain  ma- 
'iuni  pari,  ki  wuh  age  barha  cfaahta 
hai. 

29  Tab  mihon  ne  use  yih  kahke 
rok  a,  ki  Ilarnare  satli  rab :  kyiinki 
Hharn  htia  chahti  hai,  aur  din  diiuld. 
Tab  wuh  bhitar  jdke  un  ke  sath  rahd. 

30  Aur  ai.ia  bila,  ki  jab  wuh  nn  ke. 
sdrh  khiine  baitha  thi,  roti  Sekar  OH 
imitabarrak  kiya,  aur  torkn  un  ko  ni. 

31  Tab  un  ki  ankhen  khul  gayin, 
aur  us  ko  pahehana;  aur  wuh  un  ke 
pas  se  gaib  lio  gayd. 

32  Tab  imhon  ne  Apu  s  men  kahii, 

115 


XXIV.  sha-girdon  par  zdklr  karld. 
Jab  rak.  men  ham  so  b&'en  kartd,  aur 
hamare  liye  ki  tabun  ka  bbed  kholtd 
tha,  to  kya  ham  logon  ke  dil  men  josh 
na  hila  ? 

33  Aur  usi  ghari  uthkar  we  Vani- 
salum  ko  pliire ;  aur  gyarahun  aur  un 
ke  sathion  ko  ikatrue  paya, 

34  Jo  kahte  tuu,  ki  Kbndawand 
h.-ic1i  nnicli  u  tha,  aur  Shama'iin  ko 
dikhai  divi  hai. 

36  Tad  unhon  ne  nih  ka  bal  bayan 
kiya,  aur  yih  ki  kyunkar  unhon  ne 
us  ke  roti  torne  men  use  pabulidml. 

36  1  Aur  we  yili  bilten  kar  raiie 
the,  ki  Yiafi'  dp  un  ke  bich  nan 
khard  hiia,  aur  un  se  kaha,  Tumhcn 
salai  n. 

37  Par  uuhou  ue  ghahrike  aur  dar- 
ke  khiydl  kiya,  ki  kisi  nih  ko  dek'hte 
liain. 

38  Magar  us  ne  un  se  kaha,  ki  Tum 
kyun  ghabrdhat  meii  lu>?  aur  kain- 
ku tumhare  dilurj  men  andeshe  paida 
bote? 

39  Mere  hath  pdnwraj  ko  dekho,  ki 
inaiii  hi  hfiii,  aur  inujiu:  ehhiio,  aur 
dekho;  kyiinki  nih  koMsni  nur  haddi 
nahtn,  jaisa  nnijlt  men  ilekhtc  ho. 

#0  Auryib  kalike  uuheg  apne  li&th 
aur  ] Jiiuw  dikhde. 

41  Aur  jali  we  ni:irc  kliuuhi  ke 
i'atibar  na  karte,  aur  muta'ajjib  the, 
us  nu  un  so  kaha,  ki  .Kya  yahaij  tum- 
hiire  pis  kuulih  khane  ko  hai 'r 

42  Tab  unhog.  ne  bhiini  hril  maohh- 
U  ki't  ek  l.ukra,  aur  shabd  ka  ek  ehbat- 
td  us  ko  diyi. 

43  Ua  ne  leke  un  ke  sauihne  khaya. 
i4  Aur  un  Be  kaha,  ki  Yih  we  hi 

biten  hain,  jinhra  main  no  jab  ki 
jtiinihdrts  ^;ltii  tha,  tum  se  kahd,  ki 
Zarur  hai  ki  Kab  kuchh  jo  Mfisa  ki 
tauret,  aur  nabion  ke  nawishttjn,  aur 
za buron,  men,  tneri  babat  likhtl  hai, 
pura  ho. 

45  Tab  un  ke  rihnon  ko  kholi,  ki 
kitdbon  ko  namjlieii ; 

46  Aur  un  m  kalia,  ki  Yiin  likha 


SaiAn  YU'HANNA',  I.  mujassam  hud. 

hai,  aur  yiin  M  zarnr  thd,  ki  Masih  I  »0  Tf  Tab  wuli  uuhen  wahan  se  ba- 
dukh  ut.hiwc,  aur  tlsre  din  murdun  har  lkit'aniya  tak  lo  gaya;  aur  apne 
m,.!,  n,.  i'j  ntlu-:  hdtb.  uthdke  uulu.n  harakat  di. 

!~7  Aur  'Yantealam  «o  leke  sari  51  Aur  aisi  bui,  ki  jak>  wuh  unhpr 
qamnim  men  tauba  aur  guuihog  ki.barakat  do  rana  thd,  un  se  judi  hii;i, 
nm'all  ki  nianadi  ub  ke  u;iiu  se  ki  jae.  I  aur  aHmdn  par  uthaya  gaya. 

18  Aur  tum  in  bdton.  ke  gawih  bo.       52  Aur  unhon  no  ub  ko  uijda  kiya, 
■19  5  Aur,  dekli»,  main  apne    Uap 'aur    ban    khushi    so    Yaruealam    ko 
ke  uh  mau'fid  ko  tum  par  bhejtd  iu'in  :  phire  : 

lekin  ram,  jab  tak  'diam  i  haid  ki|  68  Aur  haiuesha  haikal  mcij  Khu- 
(jiiwat  bu  nwhbbas  na  ho,  Yanisalam  dft  ki  ta'rif  aur  shukr  karto  ralie 
shahr  men  thahru.  I  A'iuin. 


YU'HANNA'  KI  INJIL. 


I  BAU 

IBT1DA'  men  Kalam  thd,  aur  Ka- 
limKhudake  sdtli  tha,  aur  Ka- 
)im  Khmfi  thd. 

2  Yilii  ibtuli  men  Khudd  ke  sith 
tha. 

3  Sah  cliizen  iib  se  maujud  hiiiij  ; 
-iur  koi  chia  maujud  na  thi  jo  hagair 
iib  ke  h  lii. 

■1  Zuidagi  ua  raerj  thi ;  aur  wuli 
rimja«l  insan  kii  niir  ihi. 

5  Aur  aur  tariki  men  chamakta 
hai  :  aur  tariki  u«  uae  dnrvaft  aa 
kiya. 

Bf  Elt  shakhs  Khiidd  ki  taraf  se 
hheja  giivii  tiiri,  jin  kii  nam  Ytihannd 
thd. 

T  Yih  gawdhi  ke  iiyo  ayd,  ki  Nur 
par  gawdbi  de,  ta  ki  sab  (ia  ke  ba'is 
H  iman  lawen. 

)<  Wuh  Niir  na  tha,  par  Nur  par 
gawdhi  denc  ko  dya  tha. 

H  Haqiqi  Niir  wuli  thi,  jo  dunya 
nvin  dke  har  ok  admi  ko  roshan  kartd 


10  Wuh  jahil]  i 
lUi 


i  thi,  aur  jahau 


u»  bi   se   maujud  hiid,  aur  ja&an  ra 

use  na  jana. 

11  Wuh  apnon  pds  iya,  aur  apnon 
no  use  qabul  na  kiya. 

12  Lekin  jitnon  no  use  qabul  kiya, 
us  uc  unhi'iL  i'|Lidar  bikliHlii,  ki  Khu- 
di  ko  farzand  bon,  ya'ne,  unhen  jo  ns 
ku  narn  par  iman  lite  Lain. 

113  Wo  na  lalui  ae,  na  jiam  kikhwa- 
Iiiaii  se,  na  mard  ki  khwihiah  ae, 
magW  Kbudi  k«  paidi  hue  liain. 

li  Aur  Kalam  mujassam  hui,  aur 
wuli  fazl  aur  ristt  se  bbarpdr  hoke 
ham&rv  diirniiyaii  rnlii,  aur  baui  m- 
US  ki  aixi  jaliil  dekha,  jaisi  Bip  ke 
eklaute  ki  jalil. 

15  H  Yuhanna  ne  us  ki  bdbat 
gawibi  di,  aur  pukdrke  kabi,  Yili 
wubj  hai  jis  ki  zikr  main  kartd  tM, 
ki  wuh  jo  mere  pichhe  di 
mujh  se  muqaddam  hai ;  k 
mujh  se  palilo  thd. 

lfi  Aur  us  ki  bharpuri  i 
aa  piyd,  baiki  fazi  par  fwd. 

17  Kyunki  shan'at  M  (Isi  ki  raa'- 
rifat  sg  di  g.vyi,  niagar  fazl  aur  sachai 
Yisd*  Ma.-ili  so  pahunehi. 


wili  hai 

n k i  wuh 


i  huni  w! b 


Mitiih  ki  babat  Yultaana 


18  Khuda  ko  kisi  ne  kabhi  na  de- 
kliil ;  eklautd  Betd,  jo  Mp  ki  gud. 
uien  hiu,  usi  ne  batla  diva. 

fa  f  Aur  Yrihauud  kS  gawdhi  yih 
thi,  j«b  ki  Yahiidion  ne  Yaniaalam  se 
kdhinoij  aur  Ldwion  ko  bbcju,  ki  oa 
se  puchhen,  ki  Til  kaun  hai  't 

20  Aur  w  ne  iqrdr  kiyd,  aur  inkdr 
BN  kiya;  baiki  iqrir  kiy;i,  ki  Kain 
Masih  nahin  hi'm. 

21  Tab  unhim  ne  us  se  ptichha,  To 
aur  kauo?  Kya  t  (i  Hiyds  hai?  TJs 
m;  kahd,  Mairj  naluri  Iniii,  Paa,  dyd 
tu  wuh  nabi  hai  ?  Ua  ne  jawab  diya, 
Naluri. 

22  Tab  unhon  ne  us  se  kaba,  ki 
Tu  kanu  hai  'f  td  ki  haui  unhon,  jin- 
hnii  \i<-  huni  ko  bhejd,  koi  jawab  den. 
Tu  apac  haqq  mcii  kya  kahtA  liai  ? 

23  Usnekaha.ki  Mairj.jaisd  Vas'- 
aiydh  nabi  ne  kahd,  Baydbdn  iniii  eh 
piik;ini<'walu  ki  dwd/,  lilin,  ki  Turn 
Khudawand  ki  rdh  ko  dumst  karo. 

24  Magar  ye  Faritdori  ki  taraf  se 
biicje  gaye  the. 

25  Aur  iinhori  ne  us  se  isuw.il  kiyd, 
aur  kahd,  ki  Agar  tu  na  Masih  liai, 
ua  liiyas,  aur  na  wuh  nabi,  paa  kyiirj 
baptismu  deU  hai  V 

26  Yuhanni  ue  jawab  moa  unhon 
knhd,  ki  Main  pdni  se  baptisma  detd 
lilin  :  par  tmuhare  darmiyan  ek  khard 
hai,  jise  tam  nahin  jdnte ; 

27  Vib  wuhi  hai,  jo  mero  pichhe 
anewala  t  ha.  aur  rnujh  se  muqaddain 
tiid,  jis  ki  juti  kd  tasma  main  kholne 
ke  ldiq  nahin  htin. 

28  Yih  bdten  Bait-'abdra  moii  Yar- 
ilau  ke  pdr,  jahaij  Yiihannd  baptisma 
detd  thd,  wdid'  huin. 

2i*  %  Pusri:  diii  Yiihannd  ne  Yisii' 
ko  apne  pds  dte  dekbd,  aur  kahd,  De- 
kho,  Klrudd  kd  Earra,  jo  jahdn  kd 
-unali  ut  ha  le  jdtd  bai. 

30  Yih  wuhi  hai,  jin  ke  haqq  inen 
main  ne  kahd,  ki  Ek  mard  mere  pi- 
rhhe  dta  hai,  jo  mujh  se  muqaddam 
■  :::\,  kviinki  wuh  mujh  st'  pahlc  thd. 
117 


YU'IIAXNA',  I.  ki  gawahijo  us  nt  di. 

31  Aur  rnaig  to  uae  na  jdntithft: 


par  b  liyo  main  pdni  au  baptiama 
detd  dya,  ta  ki  wuh  Isrdel  par  rfhii 
ho. 

32  Aur  Yiihaund  ne  yih  kahkc 
gawdhi  di,  ki  Main  ns  Rrih  ko  kabu- 
tar  ki  tarah  aamdn  se  ittarle  dekhd, 
aur  wuh  ua  par  titah  ri. 

33  Aur  main 'u»e  najdntdtlni  :  pv 
jis  no  mujhe  bheja,  ki  ]iani  w  buptia- 
ma  duu.  ua  ne  mujhe  kahd,  ki  Jis  par 
tu  Ruh  ko  utarte  aiur  thabarte  deklie, 
wuhi  bai  jo  Kiih  i  Quds  ae  baptisma 
detd  hai. 

dekhd,  aur  gawdhi 
di,  ki  yibi  Kbudd  kd  Beta  hai. 

35  ^  Phir  diisre  din  Yiihannd  aur 
do  us  ke  Mhdgirdon  ineti  se  khnro  the  i 

36  Tab  Yi'ihannd  ne  Yiafi'  ko  chal- 
to  dekhkar  kahd,  Pekho,  Khudd  kd 
Barra! 

37  Aur  un  do  shdgirdon  ne  us  ku 
kalam  karte  suni,  aur  Yhui'  ko  ptohhe 
ho  Hye, 

38  Tab  YiHii1  ne  munh  pherke,  aur 
miliki  pichbe  dte  dekhkar,  un  ko  ka- 
hd, T um  kyd  dhitndlite  ho?  Unhon 
ne  us  bc  kahd,'Ai  Rabbi,  Qia  k;i  tnr- 
juma  yih  hni,  ai  Ustdd,)  tu  kahdn 
rnhtd  hai  ? 

39  Ub  ne  unhen  kahd,  Chalo,  do- 
kha.  Pas  wc  do,  aur  jahdn  wuh  rahta 
tlta  dekhd,  aur  us  roz  us  ke  nSth  rabfl ; 
aur  yih  daswig  sd'at  ke  qarib  thd. 

40  Ek  un  donon  nien  Bejinhog  m 
Yuhannd  ki  suni,  aur  ua  ke  pichhe  ho 
liyo,  Shama'dn  Patrua  kd  bhdi  Audryls 
thd. 

41  Us  ne  pahle  apno  bhdi  Shatna'un 
ku  fidyd ;  aur  us  se  kahd,  ki  Haru  ne 
Masih  ko,  jis  kd  tarjuma  Kristus  hai, 
pdyd. 

42  Tab  wuh  use  Y'isu'  pis  Idya :  aur 
Yiaii'  no  ua  par  nigdh  karke  kahd,  ki 
Tii  Yuuas  kd  lietd  Shama'un  hai :  tu 
Kefda  kahldwcgd,  jia  kd  tarjuniu  I'ai  ms 
hai. 

43  1"  Dusro  din  Yiau'  ne  chdha  ki 


.tfatti'i  Qdnd  men  pdni  h.'  YU'IIAN 
Jalil  men  jdwe,  aur  Failhus  ko  pdke 
kahd,  Mcre  pichhii  dml. 

44  Aur  Failluis  Baitsaida  kii,  jo 
AndryAs  aur  Patrus  ka  ahahr  hai, 
biahinda  thA. 

45  Failbiia  ne  Nathanad  ko  paya, 
aur  uso  kahd,  ki  Jis  ka  zikr  Musi  oc 
tauret  nu-ij  nur  nabi<nj  H  kiyd  hai, 
liom  ne  use  payA,-  wah  Vtinnf  ka  beta 
tisu'  NAsari  hai. 

46  Nathanai-1  ne  ub  si)  kaha,  K  ya 
Ninarat  se  kof  achchhi  cbl/-  DwaJ 
sakti  hai?  Failbus  no  kaha,  A'  aur 
dekh, 

47  Yisii' ne  Nathanael  koapui  1:vr:if 
ato  dekhkar  us  ke  bttN  toBO  knbi. 
Dokho  ok&achcbaiaraeli,jisnien  raakr 
iiahirj  hai ! 

iH  Nathanael  ne  us  k  kaha,  Tu 
■mujhe  kahau  se  jauhi  hai  ?  V  isu'  ne 
jawab  diyd,  aur  uae  kahd,  Us  se  pahle 
ki  Failbiis  ne  tujhe  buldyi,  jab  tii 
n  lir  ke  darakht  tale  thd,  main  ne 
uijhe  dekhd. 

49  Nathanael  ne  jawib  men  ns  se 
kahd,  Ai  Kabbi,  tu  Klm.li  ki  Beta,  tu 
Isrdt'l  kd  bddslidh  hai. 

50  Yisu'  ne  jawdb  diyd,  aur  us  «e 
kahd,  Kyd  tii  is  Hye  iman  lAtd  hai  ki 
main  ne  tuju  ae  kalid(ki  Main  cis  tujh 
ko  anjir  kedarakht  tale  dukhd?  fcti  in 
se  btiffl  majare  dekhegd. 

51  Phir  vis  oo  kahd,  Main  tum  ae 
sach  sach  kuhtA  hiin,  ki  Ab  se  turo 
Asman  ko klniU^inir  Khiidakn  (irisi  i  ton 
ko  upar  jdte  aur  Ibn  i  A'dam  par  utarte 
dekhoge. 

II  BA'B. 
4  UR  tisrf:  diri  Qdna  e  Jali]  mrii  kisi 
A     ka  bydh  hi'td;  aur  Yisii'  ki  mi 
vvahdn  tlii : 

2  Aur  Yisu1  aur  us  ke  shdgirdon  ki 
bbi  us  bydh.  men  riVwut  thf. 

3  Aur  jab  mai  ghat  gayi,  YisiV  ki 
md  ne  us  ae  kahd,  ki  D  n  ke  pds  mai 
na  rahi. 

4  Yisii'  no  us  se  kahd,  ki  Ai  'aurat, 

118 


XA',  IL  mailandtd. 

mujhe  tujh  bg  kyd  kdm?  meri  waqt 
hanon  iNiliin  dyi. 

5  Ua  ki  ina  ne  khddirnon  ko  kahd, 
Jo  kuchh  wuh  tumben  kahe,  m  karo. 

6  Aur  wahdn.  |>atthar  ke  chha 
matke  talnimt  ko  liye  Yahddiori  ke 
diis*  i'ir  ke  muwifiu  dharc  the,  aur  har 
ck  men  do  yd  tin  isian  lu  sauidi  thi. 

7  Yisu'ne  Hiin.cn  kaili,  M.-ttkon  men 
Dani  bharo.  So  unhon  ne  un  ko  lab  A 
ab  hhara. 

8  Phir  us  ne  unhen  kaha,  ki  Ab 
nikdlo,  aur  majlia  ke  aardAr  pds  le  jao. 
Aur  we  le  fraye. 

'J  Jab  niir  i  majlia  ne  wuh  pdni,  jo 
mai  ban  gaya  thd,  cbakhd,  aur  uahin 
jdna  ki  yih  kahaij  se  thi,  magar 
l  liakur,  ki  jinhotj  ue  wuh  pdni  nikdli 
thd,  jdnte  the,  to  m  i  r  i  majlia  ne  dulho 
ko  buldyd, 

10  Aur  usc  kahd,  ki   Har  ahakh.3 

pahle  achchhi  mai  kharch  kand  hai, 

aur  ndqhs  ua  waqt  ki  jab  piko  chhak 

nye :  par  tti  no  achchhi  mai  ab  tak 

.k f. i  clihorf  hai. 

U  Yih'  pahld  mu'ajiza  Yisii'  M 
QAna  e  Jalil  men  dikhdyd,  aur  apni 
jaldl  zAhir  kiya,  aur  us  ke  ehdgird  ua 
par  iindn  Ide. 

12  1  Ba'd  ua  ke,  wuh,  aur  us  ki 
in'i,  nur  ua  ke  bhdi,  aur  shagird, 
Kafanidhum  men  gaye  ;  par  unhon  ne 
wahan  balmt  dinoij  tak  luaudni  ua 
kiya. 

13  t  Tab  Yabiidion  ki  'id  i  fasah 
nawiik  thi,  aur  Yisfi'  Yarusalam  ko 
gayi. 

14  Aur  haikal  men,  bail,  aur  bher, 
aur  kabiitar-faroshon  ko,  aur  sarraibn 
ko  baithfl  lido,  pdyi: 

15  1*ab  ub  ne  rasai  kd  kord  bandke 
un  aab  ko,  bheron  aur  bailon  samet, 
hatkal  ae  nikdl  diyd,  aur  sarrifon  ke 
take  bikhrd  diye,  aur  tak  hte  ulat  diye ; 

16  Aur  kabiitar-iaroahon  ko  kahd, 
In  chisorj  ko  yahirj  »c  1g  jd :  mere 
Bip  ke  ghar  ko  byopar  ki  ghar  mat 
bando. 


Masih  K  nasihat  jo  u$  ne      YU'HAN! 

17  Aur  u&kctradgirdon  ko  yid  dyd, 
ki  yun  likhi  hai.ki  Terc  ghar  kigairat 
raujhe  kha  gayi. 

18  f  T»  b  Yahridion  ne  jawab  men. 
use  kahd,  K  ya  idahan  tu  hamey 
dikhliti  hai,  jo  yih  kira  kartd  hai  ?  ' 

19  Yisti'  ne  jawdb  dekar  uuhcn 
kahd,  ki  Ia  liaikal  ko  dha  do,  aui 
main  uso  tin  din  meu  khard  karunei. 

20  Tab  Yahudlon  ne  kahd,  Cbhiya- 
lis  baras  bc  yih  baikal  ban  rahi  hai, 
aur  tfi  use  tin  din  inep.  khard  karegdV 

21  l'ar  us  ne  apne  badan  ki  haikal 
ki  babat  kahd  i  hi. 

22  lu  liye,  jab  wuh  murdon 
ji  uthd,  to  u»  ke  aliagirdon  ko  yad  dyd, 
ki  us  ne  yih  mi  si-  kahd  thi:  aur  «t 
kitdb  aur  Yisii'  ke  kalam  par  iradn 
lie. 

23  Tf  Aur  jab  ki  wuh  Yanisalam  ke 
hich  'id  i  fasah  men  thi,  to  bahutere 
u  n  mu'ajiKon,  ko  jo  us  ne  dikhde 
dekhke  us  ke  nira  ]>ar  iradn  Ide. 

24  Lokin  YisiV  ne  apne  ta,in  un 
par  na  chhori,  ia  liye  ki  wuh  nb  ko 
jinta  thi, 

25  Aur  muhtdj  na  thd  ki  kol  insan 
ke  \v.v\q  men.  gawdhi  de:  kyttnki 
wuh  d[>.  jo  kue  h  h  ki  iii^dn  men  thi, 
jdtitd  thd, 

UI  BA'IJ. 

FARI'SI'ON  u.en  se  ek  slmkhs 
NiqudemusnimYahiidion  kiek 
sarddr  thd: 

2  Us  ne  rdt  ko  Yisu*  pds  akar  us  se 
kahd,  ki  Ai  Habbi,  bara  jdnte  hain  ki 
i.ii  Klnidi  ki  taraf  ne  ustad  hoke  dyd : 
kydnki  koi  ye  mu'ajize  jo  tu  dikbdtd 
hai,  jab  tak  ki  Khudi  us  ke  s&th  na  ho, 
nah  i  n  iiikhd  sakti. 

H  M  ne  jawi  b  dekar  us  hg  kahd, 
Main  bujh  se  sach  sach  kahtd  hiln, 
Agar  koi  uar  inau  paidd  na  lio,  towtih 
Klmda  ki  hidshdhat  ko  dekh  nahin 
■akta. 

4  Niqudemua  ne  us  se  kahd,  A'dmi 
jab  bt'irha  Ini  paya,  to  kyiinkar  paidd 
ho  saktd  hai?  kyi  us  men  yih  taut 

ny 


NA',  III.  Niyitdtmm  ne  ki  thi. 

hai,  ki  do-b&n  apni  mi  ke  pet  nieti 
dar  de,  aur  paidd  howe  ? 

5  Yinn'  no  jawdb  diya,  ki  Main 
tujhe  sach  aach  kahtd  hiin,  Agar  idmi 
pdni  aur  B6h  se  paidi  na  howo,  to  wuh 
Jthudiki  bidsbdhal  imai  dikhil  ho 
nahin  sakti. 

6  Jo  jisra  se  paidd  h  fiil  bai,  jinm 
hai ;  aur  jo  Ruh  se  paidd  bui  hai,  nih 
hai. 

I  Ta'ajjub  na  kar  ki  main.  i-  tujhe 
kahd,  ki  Tumhen  sar  i  Dau  paidil  honi 
Mftir  hai. 

8  Hawdjidhar  chdhti  bai  chalti  hai, 
aur  tu  us  ki  iwd?,  suntd  hai,  par  lialini 
jdntd  ki  wuh  kalian  ae  iti,  aur  kabin 
ko  jiti  hai :  bar  ek  jo  Riili  se  paidd 
luiii  nisi  hi  hai. 

t*  Nhjudeinus  ne  jawdb  men  US  M 
kaiia,  Vih  biten  kyiinkar  ho  sakti 
hain? 

10  Yisii'  ne  jawdb  diya,  aur  us  se 
kaki,  K  ya  tii  bani  Isrdel  ki  ustdd  bai, 
aur  yih  bdtcn  uahiii  Santa? 

II  Main  tujhe  sach  sach  kahtd  hiin, 
ki  Jo  hara  jdnte  hairj,  kahte  haiji,  aur 
jis«  bnm  ne  dekhd  hai,  us  par  gawibJ 
dete  hain :  aur  tum  hamdii  gBWihj 
ijabiil  nahin  karte. 

12  Jab  main  ne  tumben  zarain  ki 
b.iteii  knhin,  aur  tum  yaqin  uahiii 
karte,  phir  a^ar  main  tataheg  famili 
ki  bdtcn  kahdn,  to  tum  kyiinkar  yacun 
karoge  V 

13  Aur  kol  ismdn  par  nahin  gayd, 
siwd  us  shakhs  ke  jo  dsmiin  par  s.' 
utrd,  ya'ne,  Ibu  i  A'dam  jo  damin  par 
hai. 

14  \  Aur  jis  tarah  Musi  ne  sirap 
ko  baydl>du  men  bulaudi  par  rakhii, 
usi  tarah  »e  Karfir  hai,  ki  Ibn  i  AViam 
bbi  nthiyijie; 

15  Ti  ki  jo  koi  us  par  imdn  liwe. 
halik   n«    liowe,   baiki    hamosha    ki 

'udagi  [liwe. 

16  %  Kynnki  Ehudi  ne  jahan  ko 
aisd  piydr  kiyd  hai,  ki  us  ne  apnd 
iklauti  Buti  bakhsha,  ta  ki  jo  koi  \\n 


Fman  aur  b<.-imdni  YL'HANNA',  IV. 

par  iman  l:iwc,  balak  na,  howe,  baiki 
liiuiieslia  ki  ziudagi  pdwe. 

17  KyLiijki  Khudd  De  apne  Bete  ko 
■ahAn    Btorj   is   liye    nahin   bbeja, 
jaban  par  VU&  k  A  bukm  kate,  baik 
liye,  ki  janin  ns  ke  sabub  uajdt  pdwe. 

18  1T  Jt>  us  par  irudn  latd  hai,  us  ke 
liye  Rttd  kii  bukm  nahiij  :  lekin  jo  us 
[tar  imdn  nahin  lata  bai,  us  ke  wdste 
pa/.a  led  bukni  ho  eliukil ;  kyiinki  wuh 
Khudd  ke  iklaute  Bete  ke  nain  par 
imdn  na  Uiyi. 

19  Aur  s:izd  ke  liukiu  ka  sabah  yib 
bai,  ki  nur  jahan  inen,  ayd,  aiu*  iusdn 
ne  lariki  ka  iii'ir  se  ziyada  piydr  kiyd ; 
kyiinki  un  ke  kam  lmre  tbe. 

20  Kyiiiiki  Jo  koi  burai  kartd  liai, 
wuh  uiir  .se  duabinani  rakhta  hai,  aur 
mir  ke  \t&$  nahin  dtd,  ta  aib»  na  ho  ki 
us  ke  kitin  fisb  bo  jdwen. 

21  Pai1  wub  jo  haqq  karta  hai,  nur 
ke  pds  dtd  bai,  td  ki  uw  ke  kiiiu  zahir 
howen.  ki  wo  Khudd  ki  mani  se  bain. 

22  t  Ba'd  liu  Mtoii  ke  Yisu'  aur 
ua  ke  shagird  Yahudiya  ki  sarzanrin 
uien  do ;  aur  wub  wahdu  un  ku  sdth 
rahd  kartu,  aur  bapfciama  detd  tbd. 

23  f  Aur  Yuhannd  bbi  8iliin  ke 
garfb  'Ainon  men  baptisuia  detd  thd, 
kyi'mki  wahdri  pdni  bubut thd;  aur  log 
de,  aur  baptisma  pdyd. 

24  Ki  Yubaniid  lumoz  qaidkhdno 
raerj  ddld  tia  gaya  tlid. 

2">  ^T  Tab  Yuhannd  ke  aMgirdon 
aur  Yabiidif)Tj  ko  darmiydn,  twlidrat  ki 
babat,  bahs  bui. 

2(i  Aur  wo  Yuhannd  pds  de,  aur  us 
se  kahi,  ki  Ai  Rabbi,  wub  jo  Yardan 
ke  |nir  tere  sdth  thd,  jis  par  tii  ne  ga- 
wdhi  di,  dokb,  ki  wub  baptiaiua  detd 
hai,  aur  sab  uh  ke  pdw  alu  Lain. 

27  Yiihannd  ne  jawab  diyd,  aur 
kahd,  ki  Koi  insan  kisi  cliiz  ko,  magar 
jis  bdl  ki  wuli  usb  dsmdu  »e  di  jdwe, 
pa*  D&hfrj  sakta. 


29  Jis  ki  dulhin  hai,  wub  dulhi 
bai ;  par  dulho  kd  dost  jo  khara  bai, 
aur  us  ki  suutd  bai,  dulho  ki  d'wdz  sc 
babut  ktiush  botd  bai ;  pas  meri  yib 
khuani  puri  btii. 

30  Zariir  bai  ki  wub  barho,  par 
main  ghatiin, 

31  Wu'h  jo  lipar  se  dtd  hai,  sab  ke 
lipar  hai :  wuh  jo  zamin  se  hai,  zaiuini 
bai,  aur  zamiu  ki  kahtd  hai :  wuh  jo 
dsman  so  dtd  bai,  sab  ke  lipar  hai. 

32  Aur  jo  kucbh  us  ne  dek  h  a  aur 
sund  hai,  us  ki  gawdbi  detd  bai,  aur 
koi  shukhs  us  ki  gawdbi  qabtU  nahin 
karta. 

33  Jis  iio  us  ki  gawdhi  qabtil  ki 
hai,  mulir  ki  bai  ki  Kbudd  Mdh6bJ 
hai. 

34  Ivyiinki  jise  Khudd  no  bbejd  bai, 
wuh  Kbuda  ki  batoii  kahtd  hai ;  kyiiij- 
td  K'ini.iii  p;aLi];'usb  karko  Ruh  uahnj 
dotd. 

86  IldpBeto  ko  piydr  kartd  hai, 
aur  sab  chi/en  us  ko  liath  men  di  bain. 

36  Jo  ki  Bule  par  imdn  Idtd  bai, 
hamcsha  ki  zindagi  us  ki  bai :  aur  io 
Boto  i»r  imdu  naliirj  Idtd,  haydt  koua 
dckhegd,  baiki  Khudd  kd  qahr  us  par 
t'iiiil X  bab 

IV  BA'B. 

AUR  jab  Khudiwnnd  nc  jand,  ki 
Fariaiojj  ne  euna,  ki  YienV  Yii- 
hannd se  Eiyada  shagb-d  kartd  hai,  aur 
baptiama  deU  hai, 

2  (Hdlanki  Tiaii'  dp  naliirj,  baiki  us 
e  shdgird  baptisma  dete  tbo,) 

3  Tab  wuh  Yahudiya  ko  chhorke 
Jalil  ko  phir  gayd. 

4  Aur  zariir  ibd  ki  wuh  Samariya 
hoke  Jiwe. 

5  Tab  wub  Sdmariya  ke  ek  shabr 
uien,  jo  Siikdr  kahldtd  hai,  us  milkiyat 
ko  liazdik  jo  Ya'qub  no  apne  bete 
Yunuf  kodi  thi,  dyd. 

"  Aur  Ya'quh   ka   kila  wabin  tba. 


28  luiu  kbud  meru  «aw&h  bo,  ki.Chunauchi  Yiau'  safar  se  indndahokb 
ajain  ne  kahd,  ki  Maig  Masih  nabinJus  kue  par  yiin  hi  baitbd  Yib 
magar  ua  se  dge  bbejd  gaya  hiin.  [cbliatbi  ghari  ke  qarib  thd. ' 


Masih  'k  Samari  'aurat  se     YUHANNA',  IV.  guftogu,  kartu. 

T  Tab  Samanya  ki  ek  'aurat  pduijddwaud,  inujhe  ma'ldinliotahai,  ki  ap 
i    :ii,     Yisii'  nousse  kaha,Mujhc pabi  haiu. 


jtm  ko  de. 


20  Hainire   bdpdadoi 


B  Kyunki  us  ke  shagird  shahr  men  par  parastish  ki ;  aur  tum  kulit*  lio,  ki 
gaye  tlie,  "ki  kuchh  khane  ko  mol  len.  \  w  uh  jagab  jaban  narasilah  karni  cha- 
9  Samariya   ki    us    'aurat   nc  use  hiye,  Yardsalain  men  hai. 

21  Yiaii*  ne  us  se  kahd,  ki  Ai  'aurat, 
Bwri  hdt  ko  yauin  rak  h,  ki  wuh  ghan 
iiti  hai,  ki  jin  m«n  tum  na  tu  is  pahir 
par,  aur  na  Yanisalam  uien,  JJap  ki 
parastish  karogo. 

22  Tum  ua  ki,  jise  iiahiij  jante  ho, 
paiastiali  kartu  lio:  baui  uh  ki.jise 
jante  liiiin,  parutlah  kartu  haiu  :  kyun- 
ki  uajat  Yahudion  men  se  hai. 

23  Par  wuh  ghari  dti  hai,  baiki  ab 
hi  hai,  ki  jia  mim  saehche  parau tar  riili 
aur  rasti  su  Bap  ki  parastish  kareiige  ; 
kyunki  Bdp  bhi  apue  pirastarou  ko 
oliabta  hai  ki  aisc  howen. 

24  Khuda  Kuh  hai,  aur  us  ke  paras - 
taron  ko  f&r/.  bai  ki  nih  aur  rasti  se 
p.irastish  karen. 

25  'Aurat  ne  ua  se  kahii,  Main  janti 
hun  ki  Masih  (jia  ki  tarjuma  Kristus 
hai,)  ara  hai ;  jab  wuh  awega,  to  bam- 
oq  sab  bdton  ki  khabar  duga. 

26  Yisti'  !!<■  u,;  :■,■  kaha,  Main,  jo 
tujh  se  hilttt  inin,  WnU  luiii. 

27  1  Itno  men  us  ke  shagird  ae, 
aur  ta'ajjub  kiya  ki  wuh  'aurat  ae 
liaten  karta  iba ;  par  kisi  ne  na  kaha, 
ki  T  u  k  ya  ehabta  hai?  ya,  Us  sc  kis 
Iiye  bdten  karta  hai  't 

28  Tab  'aurat  nc  apna  ghara  chhora, 
aur  shahr  men  jake  lo^on  se  kaba, 

20  A'o,  ek  mard  ko  dekko,  jis  nc 
sab  kain  jo  main  ne  kiyc  niiijhe  kahe  : 
kya  yih  Masih  nabin.  'j' 

30  Tab  we  shahr  bo  niklo,  aur  ua 
pas  de. 

31  \  Is  'arse  men  us  ke  shdgirdon 
ne  us  se  darkhwast  karke  kaha,  ki  Ai 
Habbi,  kuchh  kbaiye. 

32  Lekin  us  ne  unhen  kali  d,  Mere 
pas  khane  ke  liye  khurak  hai  jiae  tum 
nahiii  jante. 

33  la  liye  shagirdon   ne  apas  men 


kaba,  ki  Kydtikar  tu,  jo  Yahudi  hai, 
mujh  se,  jo  Samariya  ki  'aurat  bun, 
pani  piae  ko  maugta  hai"?  kydnki 
Yahudi  Saiuarion  se  subbat  nabin 
rakhte  hain. 

10  Yisu'  ue  jawab  men,  us  se  kahd, 
Agar  tu  Khuda  ki  bakhhhiflh  ko,  aur 
us' ko  jo'tujh  se  kaljta  liai,  Mujhe 
pine  ko  do,  pabcbanti,  ki  wuh  kaun 
hai,  to  tu  us  so  niaugti,  aur  wuh  tujhe 
jitd  pani  duta. 

11  'Aurat  uo  us  se  kaba,  Ai  Khuda- 
wand,  tujh  pas  jiani  khinchne  ko 
kucli li  naliin,  aur  ki'ia  gahra  hai:  phir 
ta  ne  wuh  jita  pani  kanan  au  piyi? 

12  Kya  tu  hamdre  bap  Ya'qub  se, 
jia  ne  ham  ko  yih  kua  diyi,  aur  kbud 

1  m:,  aor  us  ke  beton  n  e,  aur  us  ke 
charpayon  ne  us  se  piya,  bara  bai  ? 

13  Yisu'  na  jawab  diya,  aur  us  se 
kahd,  Jo  koi  yili  pani  piu,  phir  piy*asa 
boga: 

li  Pur  jo  koi  wuh  pani,  jo  main 
use  diingA,  pie,  wuli  abatl  tak  jiiyasa 
na  boga ;  baiki  jo  pani  main  use  deia 
bun,  us  men  pani  ka  sota  ho  jaega,  jo 
hamesba  ki  ziudagi  tak  jari  raiiuga. 

15  'Aurat  ne  us  sc  kaha,  Ai  Klui- 
diiwand,  yih  pani  mujh  ko  de,  ki  main 
piyasi  na  hourj,  aur  na  bharne  ko  ya- 
ban  diin, 

16  YislV  ne  us  sc  kaba,  Jake  apne 
shauhar  ko  huld,  aur  yahdn  d, 

17  'Aurat  ne  jawab  diya,  aur  kahd, 
ki  Main  be-shauhar  biin.  Yisu'  ne  us 
se  kaba,  ki  Tu  ne  durust  kahd,  ki 
main  bu-shauhar  bun : 

ltt  Kyunki  tu  fSaoh  khaham  kar 
chukf  hai,  aur  wuh  jo  ab  tu  rahhti  hai 
tcrd  kliasam  nabin;  tu  ne  yih  sach 
kahd.' 

l'J  'Amat  ne  us  se  kaba,  Ai  Khu- 
121 


Masik  -;A-  Samari  \ 


YU'IIAKSA' 
liye  khini 


kahd,   kj    Kyd  ];■>! 
IdyA  hai  ? 

34  YiBiV  ne  unhen  kahA,  IferA 
khdni  yib  hai,  ki  anne  briHJnowAU?  ki 
marzi  baji  lAun,  aur  ns  k;i  kain  pura 
karun. 

35  Kyd  tum  nahin  kabte,  ki  Abhi 


!/'■/'<':'■'  '•"'■b''. 

46  Aur  Yisu'  phir  QAnao  Ja'i)  man, 
jahin  us  lio  paui  ko  mai  bandya  thA, 
AyA.  Aur  badshdh  kd  ek  iimlAzim 
thA,  jis  kd  betd  Kal'arudhuiu  raen.  bi- 
uiAr  thd. 

47  Jab  suna,  ki  Yisii'  Yahudiya  se 
JalH  men  AyA,  us  pds  gayA,  nur  ub  ki 


chAr  mahine  bani  haig.,  lab  faal  Awi-gi  ?  minnat  ki,  ki  dwc,  aur  us  ke  bete  ko 
dekbf,  niaig  tum  se  kahtd  hrin,  Apni  ebangA  kare  :  kyunki  wuh  marne  par 


ankhen  uthdo,  aur  kheton  ko  dekni 
ki  wc  kdtne  ku  ttye  pak  chuke  hairi. 

36  Aur  katnewdld  mazduri  pAtA 
hai,  aur  hamesha  ki  zindagi  ke  Iiyc 
mm  jam'*  kartd  hai,  ta  ki  wuh  jo 
botd  liat,  aur  wuh  jo  kdttA  bai,  donorj 
bdbam  kliush  howen. 

37  Aur  ub  liar  yili  masai  tilik  dti 
bai,  ki  Ek  botd  hai,  aur  drisra  kdttd 
hai. 

38  Main  ne  tumhen  bhcja  hai,  tik: 
use,  jis  men  tum  ne  inihnat  nahin  ki, 
kdto :  gair  logon  ue  miunat  ki,  aur  tam 
mi  k  i'  milmat  men  sbatnil  titi  u. 

39  K  Aur  us  shahr  ke  babut  se 
Samari  us  'aurat  ke  kahne 
gawdhi  di,  ki  Us  nu  Bfcb  kuchh  jo 
main  ne  kiya  liai  mujkc  kahA,  us 
iman  lae. 

40  Aur  un  Hdmarion  ne  us  pds  Ake 
us  ki  minnat  ki,  ki  hamare  satii  nh  : 
chunAnchi  wuh  do  roz  walidn  rahd, 

41  Aur  unke  siuri  ani  babuture  uwi 
ke  kalAm  ko  sabab  f  mau  Jat'j 

42  Aur  us  'mirat  ko  kahA,  Ab  bani 
lai|at  tere  kuhne  ko  iman  naluri  ]:ile; 
kyiinki  hain  ne  khud  mi  ria,  aur  jante 
hain,  ki  yib  filhain'riat  juhdn  kd  NajAt- 
denewAld  Masih  bab 

43  K  Aur  wuh  do  KM  ba'd  waliAn 
Be  rawdua  bokar  Jalil  ko  jtayA, 


44  Kyiinki   Yisii' ne  khud  gawdhi  :iisdre  hain. 


thd. 

48  Tab  Yisii'  ne  use  kahd,  Agar  tum 
iiisliiiiian  aur  kardmaten  na  dokhogo, 
to  iman  na  laoge. 

4'J  Bidtthi.li  ko  mu  lazim  ne  us  H 
kahd,  Ai  Khudawaml,  ptahtal  us  se  ki 
mera  larki  mar  jawi.-,  ular  a. 

50  Yisu'  nc  use  kabd,  JA,  terd  betd 
jitdhai.  Aurusmard  ne  us  bdt  kd,  jo 
Yisii'  ne  uwe  kabi,  i'atiqad  kiyd,  aur 
cluiia  mi 

51  Aur  wuh  rdh  hi  men  thd,  ki 
uh  ke  naukar  use  milc,  aur  khabar 
|>ahunchdi,  ki  Terd  betd  jitd  hai. 

52  Tab  us  ne  un  se  rmeliha,  ki  Use 
kis  waqt  se  drdm  hone  laga?  Unhtin 
ne  kahd,  ki  Kal  satwin  j;hari  us  ki  tap 
jdti  rahi. 

53  Tab  bdp  nc  jdna,  ki  wubi  gbari 
tbi,  jab  Yisd  ne  ub  se  kahA  ihA,  ki 
Terd  beta  jitd  bai,  Aur  wuh  khud 
aur  us  kd  sArA  ghar,  imin  l.iyi. 

54  Yib  dusrA  ma'njiM  hai,  jo  Yisu' 
Yahudiya  M  Jalil  nu-tt  dke  dikJi- 

idyd, 

Y  BA'B. 

BA"I>  us  ke  Yuluidiou  ki  ek  'id  thi, 
aur  Yisii'  Yanisalain  ku  gayd. 
2  Aur  Ytininalain  men  bher-darwazu 
ke  p4a   ek    hauz  hai,  jo  TbrAni  dmb 
Bait-IIasda  kabldtA  hai;  us  ke  pdnch 


di,   ki  nabi   apne   watan   men  'izzat 
nahin  pAtA. 

45  Aur  jab  wuh  Jalil  men  AyA,  to 
.Talilion  ne  us  ki  khAtirddvi  ki,  ki 
aab  kAmon  k<>,  jo  us  ne  Y:in'isalain  ke 
bich  'id  men  kiyo  the,  dekha  thd ; 
kyiinki  we  bbi  'id  men  gaya  the. 
122 


3  Un  men  nA-tawdnon,aur  andhon, 
aur  ianttron,  aur  pazhmurdon  ki  ek 
bar!  bhir  jiari  thi,  jo  jjdiii  ke  hilne  ki 
niiHita/ir  tbi. 

4  Kyuuki  ek  lirislua  ba'ze  waqt.  us 
bom  mag  utnrke  jjAhi  ku  hildtd  thd, 
aur  paui  ko  hilne  ke  ba'd  jo  koi  ki 


\  ek  bimar  admi  ko        YU'HANNA',  V.  changii  ftttrft. 

i~  S  Lekin  Yisii'  ne  unben  jawab 

diyi,  ki  Meri  BAp  ab  tak  kdm  kiya 

karti   hai,  aur   main   bhi    kini   kiyii 

18  Tab  Yahutlfon  iie  aur  bhi  ziyada 
us  ku  (jiiil  karne  chdhi  ;  kyunki  u» 
na  n&  ftioal  sabt  hi  ko  &a  mana,  baiki 
Khudd  ko  apni  Bap  kali  k  t  apne  ta,in 
Khuda  ke  harabar  kiya. 

19  Tab  Yiail'  ne  jawab  diyd,  aur  nn 
se  kahi.  Main  tnm  ae  sach  Nu  kaliUi 
bar,,  ki  Beta  Ap  se  kuehh  nabin  kar 
sakti,  magar  wuh  jo  Uap  ko  kartu 
dekhe ;  kyunki  jo  kuchh  ki  wuh 
kartd  hai,  lio  t  i  bhi  uni  tarah  se  kartd 
hai, 

20  I»  liye  ki  Bap  Bete  ko  piydr 
karta  hai,  aur  wah  kuchh  ki  k  had 
karti  bui,  use  dikhdti  hai :  aur  wuh 
un  se  bare  katn  usc  dikhiega,  ki  tam 
ta'ajjub  karoge. 

21  Is  liye  ki  jis  tarah  Bdp  murdon 
ko  uthdta  hai,  aur  jildtd  hai,  Beta  bhi 
jinhuu  chahta  hai  jildti  liai. 

22  Kyunki  Bap  kisi  shakhs  ki 
'addlat  nahig  karta,  baiki  us  'ne  sari 
'nddlat  Bete  ko  somp  di  hai : 

23  Td  ki  nah  Bete  ki  'ir.zat  karen, 
jis  tarah  se  ki  Bap  ki  HtzsA  kafte  iinirj. 
Jo  Bete  £i  'izzat  nahirj  karta,  Bip 
ki,  jis  ne  use  bhtjd  hai,  tsaat  nahin 
karta. 

24  Main  tum  se  aneh  s.ich  kahti 
hiiu,  Wuh  jo  mori  kalam  siinta  hai, 
aur  ua  par,  jie  ne  mujhe  bhoja  hai, 
latin  latd  liai,  liamesha  ki  zinda^i  us 
ki  bi.i,  aur  us  par  saza  ka  hukm  nahin, 
baiki  maut  mo  guzarke  wuh  zindugi 
uien  pahuneba  hai. 

86  Miun  tum  «e  Rach  sach  kahti 
hi'iTi,  ki  Wuh  ghsrt  iti  hai,  aur  ab 
hai,  ki  jis  men  murtlo  KhudA  ke  Bete 
kl  Awdz  Bunerige,  aur  wo  tuinke  jienge. 
28  Kyiinki  jis  tarah  BAp  Ap  men 
/.indagi  Takhta  hai,  usi  tarah  ue  ne 
Bet.e  ko  bhi  diya  bai,  ki  apne  mon 
ne  yih  kdm  sabt  ke.zindagi  rakhe ; 

|     27  Baiki  OM  ikhtiyir  bhi  diyi  bai, 


pahle  uf  mi'n  utarta,  kaisi  hi  bimiri 
nion  giriftar  bui  ho,  ub  se  chanai  ho 

Aur  waban  ek  sbakhs  thi,  jo 
«ttitis  baras  se  iia-tawini  meti  giriftar 
ho  rabi  thi. 

fi  Yisii'  ne  jab  use  pare  lirto  dekbi, 
aur  jini  ki  wuh  hari  muddat  m  us 
hilat  merj  hai,  to  us  ue  kuna,  ki  Kya 
tu  chihti  hai  ki  cbangi  ho  jie? 

7  Us  ni-tawin  ne  use  jawab  diyd, 
ki  Ai  Khudiwand,  mujh  pas  Admi 
nahiji,  ki  jab  yili  pilui  hilayi  jae,"to 
mujhe  haius  men  ddl  do  :  aur  jab  tak 
main  ip  se  Aun,  dt'isri  mu  j  h  se  |iahlo 
utar  ra  \;Ui  hai. 

8  Viau'  no  use  kahA,  Uth,  aur  npnd 
khatoliuthikarehaliji.  ' 

0  Wonhi  wuh  Bhakhs  changi  ho 
sayi,  aur  apnd  kliatoii  utha  liyi,  aur 
chala  uyi  :  aur  wuh  nbl  kd  din  thi. 

10  ^[  Ia  liye  Yahudi on  ne  use,  jo 
dtt&gi  lnia  iba.  kulii,  ki'Yih  sabt  kd 
roa  hai;  tujhe  rawa  nahin  ki  kliatolu 
ko  uthi  le  jiwe. 

11  Us  ne  unben  jawdb  diyi,  ki  Jis 
ne  mujhe  ehangd  kiyi,  ai  nfl  mujiic 
farmiya,  ki  Apud  kijuloli  uthdkc 
chali  i&, 

12  Tab  uahon.  ne  us  ne  piichhi,  ki 
Wuh  kaun  shajjihs  hai  jia  no  cujbe 
l;ahi,  Apni  kbatoli  uthdke  chali  ji 'r 

13  Ua  no,  jo  changi  htfi  tba,  na  jd- 
nA  ki  wuh  kaun  hai,  is  liyo  ki  Yisu' 
wahaii  se  tnl  gayA  thi,  kyfiiiki  us 
jagah  men  bhil  thi. 

14  Ba'd  u»  ke  Yisn'  ne  use  haikal 
men  pdyd,  aur  iia  se  knhi,  ki  t)okh,  tti 
obangd  ho  gayd,  phk  gundh  na  kami, 
H  howo  ki  td  us  se  badtar  balA  men 
pare. 

15  Wah  ahakh»  rawina  hui,  aur 
Yahiidion  ko  ittild'  di,  ki  jie  ne  mujhe 
duuigd  kivi,  Yisu'  haL 

10  Ia  liyo  Yahiidion   ne  Yisu'  ko 
■satiyi,  aur  us  ke  qatl"  ki  ghit  men 
laga:  kyunki 
roz  kivd  thi. 
123 


Maxik  hl  apne  Bap  kiyawdM,  YL"HAN'\A'J  VI. 
ki  'addlat  kure,  is  liye  ki  wuh  ]lm 
A'dara  hai. 

28  Ia  se  ta'ajjub  na  karo,  kyunki 
wuh  «hari  dti  hai,  ki  jis  mefl  wu  sab, 
jo  qabron  mon  b.nig,  uh  ki  dwdz 
sutienge, 

29  Aurniklenge  ;  jinhon  nc  neki  ki 
■.'i.  /i  tulari  ki  i.jiyam.at.  l;o  wdstc,  aur 
Jlnhflj)  ae  bodi  ki  hai,  snzd  ki  qlytonat 
ke  liye. 

30  Main  dp  sc  kuchh  kar  naluri 
sakta:  jaiKa  main  sunta  hun,  hukm 
kartd  liiin  :  aur  nicri  'addlat  duruttt 
hai  ;  kyiinki  apni'  marzi  ko  nahin,  par 
Bap  ki  marzi  ko,  jin  ne  inujke  bhejd, 
chdutd  hun. 

31  Agar  main  apne  par  gawdhi  dtin, 
to  meri  gawdhi  haqq  nahin. 

32  T  Diisrd  hai,  jo  nmjh  par  ga- 
wdhi dctd  hai;  aur  inaij_i jdutd  luiii  ki 
wuh  gawdhi,  Jo  uiujlj  p:  u-  ditla  hai, 
haqq  liai. 

33  'I'uiu  ne  Yrihaund  ke  pas  paydin 
bkeja,  nur  us  ne  haqq  par  gaivalri  di. 

34  Lekin  main  insan  ki  giiwahl 
nahin  chahtd;  par  main  yih  bdten 
kabid  hun,  ta  ki  tum  najdt  pdo. 

35  Wuh  jaltd  aur  chamakta  chirdg 
tlia  ;  aur  tum  chdhte  thc  ki  lhori  der 
lak  us  ki  roslini  se  khush  ruh  u. 

•  W  Lekiu  tnujh  pas  Yukannd  ki  ga- 
wdhi se  ek  hari  gawdhi  hai :  ia  liye  ki 
ye  kdm  jo  Ddp  ne  inujhe  sompe  haiij, 
id  ki  pure  karun,  ya'ne,  ye  kau»  jo 
main  kartd  nun,  uiujh  par  gawdiii 
dtite  haiii,  ki  Ddp  lio  ruujho  bhejd  hai. 

37  AurBapJis  do  niujhe  blieja  hai, 
U3  nc  ipinujh  par  gawdhi  di  hai.  Tum 
lio  kublii  us  ki  dwdu  nahin  suni,  aur 
na  us  ki  .surat  dekhi. 

38  Aur  tum  uh  kd  kalam  apne  dilon 
mon  nahin  rakhte  ;  kynrjki  tuin  us  par, 
jise  us  ne  blieja,  imdn  nahin  Mte. 

3fl  ^  Tum  nawisliUm  mondkundh- 
teho:  kyunki  tum   gumAn  karteho 


ur  l'iiJiantui  ki,pah  lund. 

40  Aur  tum  nahin  chdhte  ki  mujh 
pas  do,  la  ki  ziudagi  pao. 

41  Main  uh  'izzat  ko,  jo  insan  ki 
taraf  se  hoti,  manzfir  nahin  kartd. 

42  Main  tumben  jantd  hi'in.  ki  tum 
meri  Khucid  ki  muhabhat.  nahin. 

43  Main  apue  Bap  ke  ndua  sg  dyii 
hun,  aur  tum  mujhc  cpibfil  nahin 
karte;  agar  koi  dusni  apne  nam  se 
dwe,  to  tum  use  qamil  karoge. 

44  Tum  jo  djas  mon  ek  duare  ki 
'izzat  chdhte  BO,  aur  wuh  'izzat,  je 
akule  Khudd  se  hai,  naliin  dhuncllite, 
kyiinkar  fmdn  la  nkte  bo9 

4o  Gumdn  mat  karo,  ki  main  Bdp 
ke  pds  tumhdri  farydd  kMtduttt  ek  to 
hai  tumlidri  farydd  kanioivald,  ya'ue, 
Mn.sa,  jis  jwir  tumhard  hlmrosd  hai. 

4d  Kyunki  agar  tum  Miisd  par 
iman  lace,  to  nuijli  par  bhi  imdii  late. 
is  liye  ki  us  ne  mero  haqq  miin  likhd 

47  Lekinjis  hdl  ki  tum  u»  ke  na- 
wi.shtun   ku  yaqiu  na  karoge,  to  mert 
bdton  ko  kyiinkar  yaain  karoge? 
VI  BA'B. 

Y  ISU"  un  bdton  ke  ba'd  Jalil  ke 
daryd  ke  pdr,  jo  daryd  e  Tibari- 
yds  hai,  g&yd. 

2  Aur  ek  bari  bhir  us  ko  pichhe  h  o 
li,  kyiinki  unhon  ne  us  ke  mu'ajize,  jo 
us  m'  l.imaron  par  dikhde,  dekhe  tiic. 

3  l'iiir  YisiV  pahdr  par  gaya,  aur 
wahdn  apue  shagirdori  lie  «ath  baitha. 

4  Aur  Yahiidion  ki  "id  i  faaah 
nazdik  tlii. 

5  ^  Pas  jab  Yisii'  ne  dnkhen  uth- 
j,  aur  ueklui  ki  hari  bhir  mere  pas 

dti  hai,  to  FailbuB  se  kaha,  ki  Ham 
kahan  se  in  ke  khdne  kfl  liye  rotidri 
khariden  'i 

(i  Par  us  ne  yih  imtihdn  ki  rdh  ee 
kahd  tlid,  kyunki  wuh  dp  jantd  thd  jo 
kiya  uliahtfi  tha. 

Failbiis  ne  use  jawab  diyd,  ki  Do 


ki  un  men  tuinhdre  liye  hamesha  ki  Isau  diuar  ki  rutidn  un  ke  liye  bas  na 
ziudagi  hai;  aur  yih  we  hi  bain,  joj  hoijgi,  ki  un  mes  se  liar  ek  thord  sd 
uiujh  par  gawdhi  deto  hain.  pdwo. 

124 


Masih panch  iiazdr  admimt  ku  YU'UANXA',  VI. 


8  Ek  ne  us  k*?  sbdgirdon  men 
Shama'un    Patrus   kd-  bhdi   Andriyds 

■  kahd, 

9  Yalian  L'k  clihokra  hai,  jis  ko  pas 
jau  ki  panch  rotidn,  aur  do  ehhoti 
madihlian,  hain ;  par  yili  -itno  logon 
men  kya  hain  ? 

10  Tab  Yisri'  ne  kahd,  ki  Logcrj  ko 
bithdo.  Aur  us  jagah  bah  u  t  ghau  thi. 
So  ginii  men  takhminan  panch  hazdr 
niard  baithe. 

11  Aur  YiaiV  ne  rotidn  utha  lin, 
aur  shukr  karke  shdgirdon  ko  din,  aur 
shagmlon  lio  unhen,  jo  baithe  tlie 
i'iniiM  |  aur  isi  tarah  machlilion 
■S,  jid  qadr  ki  we  ch&lite  the. 

1^  Aur  jab  we  eer  ho  chuko,  to  us 
ne  apnc  shagirdon  so  kahd,  ki  Un 
tukfog  ku  jo  lxtch  raha  hain  jatu'a 
kii'u,  La  ki  kuohli  khmab  lia  howo. 

18  Cliunanehi  unhon  ne  jain'a  kiye, 
aur  jau  ki  pdueli  rocioti  ke  tukron  se, 
jo  un  khanowaloB  se  bach  raiie  thc, 
barah  tokrian  lihnriij, 

14  Tab  un  logon  ne  yih  mu'ajiza, 
jo  Yifiu'  ne  dikhdyn,  dckhkar  k;ilia, 
PUhaqiqat  wuh  nabi  jo  jahdn  ineu 
dnewdla  tha  yihi  hai. 

15  T  Pas  Yiaii'  mg  ma'Iiim  karke 
ki  we  chiihte  hain  ki  dwejj,  aur  use 
zabardasti  [.«karke  bddshdh  karen,  dp 
akcli  pahar  ku  jiliir  gayd. 

lu'  Aur  jab  ahdin  hdi,  to  uh  ke 
shagird  dnryd  ku  kinare  gaye; 

17  Aur  kishti  par  charhku  darya 
par  Kid'arnahum  ko  chale.  Us  watjt 
andherii  ho  chala  tha,  aur  YisiV  un  pas 
*i.i  ava  llui. 

ly  Aur  ajidlu  ke  sabab  darya  lab- 
ranc  laga. 

19  Aurjabwcqarib  puehisya  tis  K  r 
partdb  ke  kheo  ohuko  thc,  unhon  ne 
Yiaii'  ko  darya  par  chaite,  aur  kishti 
ku  qarib  ite  dek  ha,  aur  dur  gaye. 

20  Tab  us  ne  unhen,  kaha,  ki  Main 
"■'"   daro  inat. 


kgttt)  par,  jihdii  we  jate  the,  jd  pa- 
huuchi. 

2'J  ^  D&sre  din,  jab  bhir  ne,  jo 
darya  ke  us  pdr  kbarf  tbi,  yih  deklut, 
kl  wahdg  siwa  us  ek  ke,  jis  par  us  ke 
shdgird  charh  baitho  the,  toi  dusri 
kishti  na  thi,  aur  yih  ki  Yisu'  apne 
shagirdon  ke  sdth  us  kishti  par  na 
gayd  tnd,  baiki  sirf  us  ke  shagird  gaya 
the; 

23  (Par  aur  kiahtidn  Tibariyas  su 
us  jagah  ke  nazdik,  jahdn  Uflhotj  ne 
Khudawand  ke  shukr  ke  ba'd  roti  khai 
thi,  ain  :) 

24  Pas  kb  m  hhir  nc  yih  dekha 
hai,  ki  wahan  na  Yisii'  aur  na,  us  ke 
Nhagird  buiii,  to  we  bhi  kishtion  par 
oharhe,  aur  Yisii'  ki  talash  men  Kal'ar- 
nahuiu  ko  i'n'. 

2i"i  Aur  unhon  nc  use  rtaryd  par  pd- 
ke  us  uh  kahd,  ki  Ai  Rabbi,  td  yahdn 
kab  dya  ? 

2ii  Yisd'  nc  unhon  jawdb  djytt,  nur 
kiiha,  ki  Main  tum  se  snch  sach"  kahtfi 

'_.  ki  Tum  inujhe  dhi'indhto  ho,  fa 
liye  ki  tum  ne  mu'ajize  dekhe,  so 
nahiri,  baiki  is  liye  ki  tum  rotidn 
khdke  ser  hde. 

Fdni  khurdk  ke  liye  nahig,  halki 
u  b  khdno  ke  liyo  naihimt  kam  jo 
hamesha  ki  zindiif;!  tak  thaharra  hai, 
ki  Ibu  i  A'dam  wuh  tumhen  dogd; 
kyiinki  Bdp  ne,  jo  Khudi  hai,  u  par 
iniihr  kar  di  hai. 

'OH  Tab  unhon  no  us  so  kahd,  ki 
Hain  kyd  kareg.'td  ki  Khuda  ke  kdm 
hajd  ldwen  1 

li9  Yiau'  ne  jawdb  men  utthen  kaha, 
Khuda  kd  kdm  yih  hai,  ki  tum  us  par, 
jise  us  ne  bheja,  imdn  ldo. 

30  Tab  mihon  ne  na  se  kahd.  Pas 
tii  kauu  sa  niwliau  dikhdtd  hai,  td  ki 
bani  dekhke  tujh  par  iman  ldwen?  tu 
kya  kartd  hai? 

31  Hamdre   bdpdddou  ne   baydbdn 
eg   mann  khdyd;  ehundnchi   likhd 

liL    Pliir    unhon    ne   khitah!    se  usc  hai,  ki   Ua    ne   unhen    asmdn  se  ro$ 
kishti  pir  le  liyij  aur  kishti  filfaiir  iis|khinc  kodi. 


Masih  dp  ko  zindagi 


YL"HANNA',  VT. 


fct  roti  thahr&ta. 


32  Tali  Yisft'  oo  unhen  kahd,  Main 
t  uni  ae  sach  sauh  kanta,  hun,  ki  Musa 
110  tumben  asuidui  roti  naliiu  di,  baiki 
merd  Bdp  tumben  nobohl  dsmani  roti 
detd  hai. 

88  ls  liye  U  Kliudii  k!  r.>ti  wuh 
hai,  jo  daman  so  ntnrti,  aur  jah&n  ko 
zindagi  tiak  hslili  bai. 

34  Tab  unlion  ne  us  w  kaha-,  Ai 
Khuddwand,  ham  ko  haniesha  yih 
roti  diyd  kar. 

35  \  i' isu'  ne  imken  kaha,  Main 
zindagi  ki  roti  liiin:  jo  mujh  pas  ata 
hai,  nargiK  bhukhd  na  hogd:  aur  Jo 
mujh  par  iman  lata  hai,  kabhf  piydsa 
n  a  hogd. 

3li  Lekin  main  ne  tumhen  kaha 
hai,  ki  Tum  ne  to  mujhc  dekhd,  par 
im&n  nabi  n  Ide. 

37  Harck,jiBC  R;tp  ne  mujhe  diyd 
hai,  mujh  pas  dwega ;  aur  use  jo  mujh 
pas  ata  hai  main  hargiz  n  ikal  na 
dungd. 

3H  Kyunki  main  asmdn  par  no  is 
liye  nahin  utri,  ki  apni  marzi  par, 
baiki  na  ki  marzi  i>ar  chaluii,  jis  ue 
mujhc  hhejd  hai. 

39  Aur  Bap,  jis  ne  mujhe  bhejd  hai, 
yih  chahta  hai,  ki  main  uu  an  s*1  j<i 
us  no  mujhe  diyu  hain  kisi  ko  na 
khoiin,  baiki  use  akhiri  din  phir 
uthdun. 

40  Aur  jis  no  mujhe  bhrja  bui,  ns 
ki  marzi  yih  hai,  ki  har  ek  jo  liete  ko 
dekbe,  aur  uh  naf  iman  Idwc,  hamesha 
ki  zindagi  pawe;  aur  ki  main  use 
akhiri  din  meri  uthatin. 

41  Tali  Yahudi  us  par  kurkurae,  is 
liye  ki  uh  ne  kaha,  Wuh  roli,  jo  as- 
man  se  utri,  main  hun. 

42  Aur  unhon  ne  kaha,  Kyd  yih 
Hati'  Yi'iHtif  ka  h«t£  nahin,  jis  ke  bdp 
aur  mi  ko  ham  jiiiite  hain  ?  phir  wuh 
kyuiikar  kalita  hai,  ki  Main  asmau  M 
utra  hiin  1 

43  Tab  Yiati'  ne  jawdb  men  un  ko 
kaha,  ki  A'pas  men  niat  ktirkurao. 

44  K.oi  shakhs  mujh  pas  a  nahin 

126 


sakta,  magar  jia  ha!  ki  Bap,  jis  ne 
mujhe  bheja  hai,  use  khinch  lawe  ;  aur 
main  use  akhiri  din  nirn  ullidlinga. 

45  Nabiorj  ne  yih  likhd  hai,  ki  We 
sah  Khuda  ke  sikhldc  hi'ie  Imrige.  B 
liye  har  eh  soak  h  s,  jis  ue  Bap  se  auua 
aur  sikliti  hai,  mujh  pas  ata  hai. 

4(i  Yih  imhiri  hai  ki  kisi  shakbs  ue 
Bap  ko  dekbd  hai,  magar  wuh  jo  Khu- 
da ki  taraf  so  hai,  usl  ne  Bap  ko  dckkd 
bai. 

47  Main  tum  ae  sach  saeh  kahta 
hun,  Jo  mujh  par  iman  lata  hai, 
hamesha  ki  zindagi  usi  ki  hai. 

48  Zindagi  ki  roti  main  hi  hun. 

49  Tumhdro  bapdddon  ne  bayaban 
men  manu  khdyd,  aur  mar  gaye. 

50  Roti  jo  asmau  se  utani  hai  wuh 
hal,  ki  koi  ddmi  use  khako  na  mare. 

51  Main  hiiii  wuh  jiti  roti,  jo  dsman 
se  utri ;  agar  koi  shakhs  is  roti  ko 
lehae,  to  abad  tak  jitd  rahegd;  aur 
roti  jo  main  dnnga,  mera  gosht  hai,  ju 
main  jcdi&n  ki  /.imlagi  ko  liye  diinga. 

52  Tab  Yahudi  yih  kahke  apas  men 
bahs  karne  lage,  ki  Yih  mard  apnd 
gosht  kyi'mkar  hamon  do  sakta  hai, 
ki  khdon? 

53  Tab  Yiau'  ne  unhen  kahd,  Main 

i M  :-iieh  sach  kanta  hun,  Agar  tum 

Ibn  i  A'dam  kd  gO«bt  na  khao,  aur  m 
kd  lahtl  na  pio,  to  tum  men  zindagi 
nahin. 

54  Jo  koi  meri  gosht  kbdtd  hai, 
aur  merd  labu  pita  hai,  hamesha  ki 
zindagi  usi  ki  hai ;  aur  main  use  akhiri 
diri  lilhaiinga. 

55  Kyfinki  mera  gosht  nlhaqiqat 
khdne,  aur  merd  lahil  iilhaqiuiat  piue 
ki  chii  hai 

56  W'ili  jn  niM-ii  gosht  khatd,  aur 
nmrd  labu  pitd  bai,  uni  j  h  men  rahta 
bai,  aur  Tilam  us  \m:\i. 

57  Jis  tarah  sc  ki  zinda  Bdp  ne 
ninihi'  l'liijd,  aur  main  Bap  ae  zinda 
lii'.ij  ;  isi  tarah  wuh  bhl  jo  mujhe 
kbiild  bai  mujh  se  zinda  hoga. 

68  Wuh  ruti  jo  ieaata  fe   ntri,  yib 


MadL  ke  biid'O 


hai ;    ri»    jaisA  ki   tumhAi 
mana  khake  mar  gayc;  wuh  jo  vili 
roti  khavA  hai,  abad  tak  jitA  rahegA. 
59  Us  ne  K:  i  fam  ih  u  m  men  ta'Hm 


YUTIANNA',  VII. 

hApdAde 


ux  se  tukar  karvd. 
VII  BA' B. 
ke  Yisu"  Jalil  nicrj   sair 


B. 
karta  raha,   ki   Yahudiya   nu:n 
Mb  kami  na  chAhA,  ia  liyo  ki  Yahudi 
deto  hi'io  'ibadatkhane  men  yih  baten  ii»  ke  qatl  ki  fikr  men  the. 
kabin.  2  Aur  Y&Mdion  kT  'id  i  khfma  naz- 


I  Tab  uh   ko   ahAgirdon   uierj 

bahuton  uc  sunke  kahA,  ki  Yih  sakht 

kalam  bal ;  use  kaun  sun  saktA  bal  ? 

61  Yisu'  iio  az  khud  jdukar  ki  us  k*; 
shAgird  A|>as  men  ia  bat  par  kurkurate 
hain,  unhen  ksM,  KyA  yih  tum  ko 
thokar  ka  bA'is  bal  ? 

62  Pas  agar  tum  Ibu  i  k'3taa  k.. 
A  par  jAte,  juhan  wuh  Age  tha,  dekbogft, 
t  n  kya  hogA? 

63  "T: ii"!*  hai  wiiii,  Jo  jihiti  hai;  jisin 
8C  kmhh  iaiiia  nahin;  yih  baten  jo 
main  tumben  kahti  hiin,  ruh  Lain,  aur 
zindagi  hai  n. 

64  ?ar  tum  men  ba'/.e  hain,  jo  iman 
nahin  late.  KyiSyki  Yiail'  ibtida  se 
jAnti  tlia,  ki  wejo  iman  nahin  liit-e, 
kaun  hain,  aur  kaun  uao  nakarwaegA. 

65  Phir  ua  ne  kaha,  la  liye  main  nc 
tumben  kaha,  ki  kui  shakhs,  siwa  us 
ke  jiso  men  BAp  ki  taraf  se  'inAyat 
huA,  mujh  pas  nahin  A  saktA. 

66  T  "Us  waqt  se  us  ke  shA^rdon 
men  se  bahutere  ulte  phir  gaye,  aur 
ba'd  us  ke  ua  ke  *Ath  na  obalo. 

67  Tab  Yiaii'  ne  bArah'.m  ki>  kalut, 
KyA  Unn  bui  chdhte  ho  ki  cbale 
jao? 

68  Shama'iin  Patms  ne  BM  jawAb 
diyA,  Ai  Khudawand,  ham  kia  ke  pas 
jaen  ?  basMataa  ki  zindagi  ki  bdteii  to 
tere  pAs  hain. 

69  Aur  ham  to  iman  lAc  hain,  aur 
jAn  ji,aye  hain,  ki  tti  zinda-KhudA  kA 
Beta  Masih  hi 

70  YisA'  nc  unliefi  jawab  diyA,  KyA 
main  ne  tum  bAralion  ko  nahin  chuna, 
aur  ok  tum  men  sc  shaitan  hai  ? 

71  Us  nc  Shama'tin  ko  bete  YAhii- 
dih  Isbariynti  ki  bAbat  kahA :  kyiinki 
wuhi  us  ko  pakarwaue  chAlitA,  aur  un 
bArahon  mim  «o  tliA. 

ia?  ~ 


dik  Ai. 

Tab  us  ke  bh*io£  ne  us  se  kahA, 
YahAn  ee  rawAna  ho,  aur  Yahudiya 
m.  n  ja,  IA  ki  un  kamon  ko,  jo  tii  karta 
hai,  tere  shAgird  bhi  dekhen. 

4  Kyunki  aisA  kol  nahin  jo  kuchh 
kAm  chhipke  kare,  aur  chAhe  ki  ap 
niashliiir  hio.  Agar  tu  ye  kfim  karta 
hiii,  to  apne  ta,in  jahAn  ko  dikhA. 

5  Kyiinki  us  ke  bhAi  bhi  us  par 
iman  na  lAe. 

(i  Tab  Yisu'  ae  unhcii  i'urmAyA,  ki 
MerA  waqt  hauuz  iiahin  aya  :  par  tum- 
hara  waqt  har  dam  banA  hai. 

7  DunyA  tum  se  'adAwat  nalrin.  rakh 
sakti ;  par  mujh  sc  'adAwat  rakbti, 
kyiinki  main  us  par  gawAhi  dctA  hiin. 
ki  us  ke  kAm  bure  hairj. 

Tum  is  'id  men  jAo !  main  abhi 
h  'i'i  men  naliiij  jani,  ki  mci»  w;iqt 
banoz  pdrA  naliiii  hsiA. 

9  So  wuh  yih  biitorj  unhen  kahke 
Jalil  men  ralia. 

10  T  Lokin  jab  ns  ke  bhAi  rawan» 
hue  the,  wuh  bhi  'id  men  gaya,  zAhira 
nahin,  baiki  chhipke. 

lfTab  Yahudi 'id  men  use  dhun- 
dhne  lage,  aur  kahA,  ki  Wuh  tahan 
hai? 

VI  Aur  logon  irn-n  us  ki  babat  bari 
takrar  thi:  ba'zc  kahto  tbe,  ki  Wuli 
nek  Admi  hai :  aur  kitno  kahte  the,  ki 
Nahin,  baiki  wuh  Jogon  ko  gumiAh 
ku  r  t  A. 

18  Lokin  Yahi'idion  ko  dar  se  koi 
shakhs  zibirA  us  ki  bAbat  ua  kalita 
thA.' 

14  %  Aur  jab  'id  Adhi  guzar  gayi, 
Yisii'  ne  liaikal  men  jake  ta'lim  di. 

15  Tab  Yahudi  ta'ajjub  so  bole,  ki 
Ismardko  bagairparlui  kvtitikar  kitAb- 
t»  kd'iltu  bat  f        ' 


MuMtah/rae  YD'HANNA',  VTI.  Masih  U  Vd,.'(. 

16  Tisfi' nn  unhen  jawabnir-n  kah,i,  chAnte,  nur  jilnte  ho  ki  main  kaitan 
ki  Meri  ta'Iim  meri  nabi  n,  baiki  us  ki  kd  hun :  nur  main  an  m  nnhin  ayli 
hai,  jis  ne  mujhe  bhejd.  'lain  :  magai  mori  bhe.jnew&14  sachchA 

17  Wuh  tthakhs,  jo  us  ki  marzi  par  |  hai,  jis  se  tum  watp'f  nahin  ho. 
chald    cbAbe,  jAnegd,   ki    yih    ta'Iim '     29  Main  use  jAntd  hun ;  ia  liye  ki 
Kiiuda  ki  hai,  ya  ki  main  Ap  se  detAjmain  us  ki  taraf  so  hiin,  aur  01  M 


hun. 


mujlio  bheja  bui. 
30  Tab  unhun  ne  chalid  ki  aso  pa- 


13  Wuh  jo   apni   taraf  se   kucbh| 
kahtA  hni,  apni  Dtunugf  chahtA  riai:.kar  len:    par  is  liyo  ki   us  kd  waqt 
hanoz  na  pahuncha"  tha,  kisi  ne  us  par 
hdth  na  cbUA. 

31  Aur  bhir  mpn  sp  bahutere  us  par 
iman  Ide, aur  bnle.ki  Jab  Masih  dwegd, 
to  k  ya  m  ae,  jo  ia  ne  dikhde  hain, 
ziyada  mn'ajize  dikhdwogd  ? 

32  1  Farisiog  no  jamd'at  ki  takrar, 
jo  us  ki  babat  ho  rahi  t.bi,  suni;  tab 
Faritiion  aur  sarddr  kali  i  mm  no  jiiyade 
lilicjo,  ki  use  pakar  leg. 

33  U.i  waqt  Yiau'  no  unhen  kahA, 
Ab  lu  tbori  der  tak  main  tmnhare 
sAth  lniij.  aur  us  pas,  jis  no  majhe 
liliri:!,  jiita  hun. 

34  Tum  mujhe  dhiiTtdhoge,  aur  na 
pdoge,  aur  jahan  main  hun,  tum  a  na 


iekin  wuh  la  us  ki  bosom  chAhta  hai, 

jis  ne  use  bheja,  so  wuhi  sachchA  hni, 
aur  us  men  ndrdati  nahin. 

19  K  ya  Musa  ne  uimhen  shari'at  na 
di,  lckin  koi  tum  men  ne  shari'at  par 
'amal  nahin  karta  ?  Tum  kyt'm  ID8M 
qatl  ki  fikr  men  ho? 

20  Lo'ji'ij  ne  jawab  diya,  aur  kaha, 
Tujh  pAs  ek  deo  hai ;  katm  tujhe  qatl 
kiya  chdhtd  ? 

21  Yisu'  no  jawab  men  unbeQ  kaha, 
Main  ne  ck  kaiti  kiya,  aur  tum  sab  us 
ko  ba*is  ta'ajjub  kartc  ho. 

22  HiUA  nc  tumben  khatna  ka 
hukin  diya,  lialarjki  w  uli  Musa  se  na- 
liiij,  baiki  bdpdddon  so  hai ;  bo  tum 
salii,  ko  diu  admi  ka  khatna  karto 
ho. 

23  Pas  agar  nabt  ke  roz  Admi  ka 
khatna  kiya  jdtd  hai,  tA  ki  MiisA  ke 
shar'a  se  'udiil  na  bo,  to  k  y. 'l  tum  is 
liyo  mujh  par  gussa  ho,  ki  main  ne 
sabt  ke  din  ek  inard  ko  hilkull  changd 
kiy4? 

24  Zahir  ko  muwAiiq  'adAlat  na 
kain,  baiki  wajibi  'adAlat  kara 

25  Tab  ba'ze  Yarusalamfon  ne  kaha, 
Kya  yih  wuh  nahin,  ki  jise  qatl  kiya 
cbahte  haiji? 

2(!  Lekin,dckho,  wuh  to  be-dharak 
boltA  hai,  aur  we  use  kuchh  nahin 
kahtu ;  pas  kya  sardAron  no  bhi  yaqin 
kiya,  ki  filhaqiqat  yihi  Masih  hai? 

27  Lckin  hauien  ma'lum  hai.ki  yih 
kahdn  ki  hai;  par  Masih  jab  awega, 
to  koi  na  jAnogd  ki  wuh  kahdn  ki 
bai. 

28  Tab  Yisu'  haikal  men  ta'Iim  deta 
hiie  yun  pukArA,  ki  Tum  mujhe  pah- 

1LJ8 


35  Us  waqt  Yahi'uiinn  ne  dpas  mon 
k  ah  d,  ki  Wuh  kahdn  j4eg4,  jo  use  baru 
na  pawenge?  ky4  wuh  un  logon  ke 
pas,  jo  Yunanion  men  paraganda  hiie, 
j4eg;4,  aur  Yiin4nion  ko  ta'Iim  do°4? 
86  Yih  ky.'i  hit  hai,  Jo  M  ne  kabi, 
Tum  mujhi  dbi'mdhoge,  aur  na 
pdoge:  aur  jahan  main  lilin,  tum  u  a 
sakoge  ? 

37  Phir  'id  ke  pichhle  din,  jo  bara 
n  hai,  Yisu'  kliara  hni,  aur  pukdrke 
.ha,  Agar  koi  ]>iydsd  ho,  mujh  pas 
4we,  aur  pie. 

3H  Jo  mujh  par  imdn  lata  hai,  us 
ke  badan  se,  jaisd  kitdb  kahti  hai,  jite 
pAni  ki  nadian  jdri  hongi. 

39  Us  ae  yi'h  Kiih"ki  bdbat  kabi, 
jise  we,  jo  us  par  imdn  Idu,  pAnc  par 
the;  kyuaki  Biih  i  Quds  ab  tak  na 
utri  tlii,  is  Uye  ki  Y'isn'  hanoz  apee 
jali!  ko  na  pahtmeha  tha. 

40  "J  Tab  un  logon  men  se  bahitte- 


Vi-IIANNA',  VIII, 


Ziudkdr  'aurat 

ton  ne  yih  eunkac  kaha,  FiLhattitja.t, 

yilii  wuh  Nabi  hai. 

41  Auron  ne  kaha.  Yih  Masih  hai. 
Pai-  ba'/.on  uu  kaha,  Kya  Masih  Jalil 
se  ata  hai  'i 

4'.i  Kya,  kitalwu  111«»  yih  bit  nahin, 
ki  Masih  Daiid  ki  nasi  se,  aur  Bait- 
laham  ki  basli  so,  jabari  Daud  tha,  atd 
hai? 

43  So  logon  men  us  ki  babat  ikhti- 
laf hua. 

44  Aur  ha'zon  ne  chaha  tha,  ki  use 
Bakar  ]<ti  i  par  kisi  ne  UU  par  hiiih  ua 
«lale. 

45  1  Tab  piyade  sardar  kahinon 
aur  Farisiort  ke  pas  ae;  aur  unhoy,  ne 
ua  ne  kaha,  Tum  use  kyiin  na  lae  P 

H!  Piyadon  ne  jawab  diya,  ki  Ilar- 
giz  kisi  s'naklus  iic  is  adiiii  ki  maulud 
kalam  nahin  kiya, 

47  Tab  Karision  ne  unhen  jawab 
diya,  Kya  turn  bhi  guiurah  kiyo  gaye 
ho? 

48  Ky&  koi  enrdaron  ya  Farision 
men  se  us  par  iman  laya  ? 

4~9  Par  yo  log,  jo  sbari'at  se  waqif 
Ilahin,  la'nati  hain. 

50  Nhiudemus  ne,  jo  rit  ko  Yisu' 
pin  aya  tha,  aur  un  men  se  ek  tiui, 
unhen  kahi, 

51  Kya  hamarf  shari'at  kisi  ko, 
piislitar  us  se  ki  us  ki  aune,  aur  jane 
ki  wuh  kyi  kami  hai,  guiiahgar  thab- 
rati  hai  ? 

5  U  Unhon  ne  us  ku  j» w  ah  men  kahi, 
Kya  tu  biii  Jalilse  hai?  Dhi'iiidli.aur 
d»kh  :  ki  Jalil  men  se  koi  nabi  barpa 
nahin  hai. 

53  Phir  har  ck  apne  ghar  ko  gaya. 
V  IH  BA'B. 

PAR  Yisii'  koh  i  Zaitun  Oto  gaya. 
2  Aur  aubh  sawere  haikal  men 
pbir  dikiiil  bila,  aur  Bah  log  u»  ke  pas 
ia  ;  aur  us  uo  baitbkur  unhen  ta'liin 
di. 

3  Tab  faqih  aur  Farisi  ok  'aurat  ko, 
W'  zina  men  pnkri  gayi  thi,  ua  pas  lae, 
aor  ueo  bicii  men  khara  karku 
129 


M  ktibttL 
4  Us  se  kahi,  ki   Ai   Ust.au,   yih 

'aurat  zina  men  'ain  fi'al  ke  waqt  pakri 

Rayi 

o  Mdsa  ne  to  Taurat  men  bam  ko 

hukm  diya  hai,  ki  aision  ko  sangsar 

karun;  par  tu  kya  kahta,  hai? 

U  Uiihon   ne  azmaish  ke  liya  yih 

kaha,  ta  ki  ua  par  nalish  ki  wajh  pa- 

weri.    Par  Yisii'jhukku  ungli  se  samin 

par  likhne  laga, 

7  Aur  jab  w  e  as  se  Buvtal  karte  ga- 
ye,  to  un  ne  sidhc  hokur  unhen  kaha, 
JO  ki  tum  men  be-gunah  hai,  pahle 
wuhi  uso  patthar  mare. 

8  Aur  phir  jhukkezamin  [«r  likha. 
i)  Aur  we  yili  sunkar  dil  hi  uil  men 

ap  ko  gunahgar  samajhke  barun  ku 
loke  chhoton  tak  ek  ek  karke  chalo 
gaye :  aur  Yisti'  akela  rah  gaya,  aur 
'aurat  bich  uieij  khari  rabi, 

10  Tab  Yisu'  ne  sidue  hokar  'aurat 
ku  siwa  kisi  ko  na  dckha,  aur  u.s  M 
kaha,  Ai  'aurat,  we  U;ri>  nalish-kanie- 
wale  kalian  Kain  'i  kya  kiai  nts  tujh  par 
hukm  na  kiva? 

11  Wuhboli,  Ai  Khurliwand,  kisi 
IM  nahin.  Yiaii'  ne  us  ae  kaha,  Main 
bin  tujh  jiar  hukm  nahin  karti;  ja, 
aur  phir  gunah  na  kar. 

12  %  'i'ab  Yisti'  ne  phir  un  ne  khi- 
tah karke  kaha,  Jahan  ka  nur  main 
hun;  jo  meri  pairaui  karti  andhere 
men  na  chalega,  baiki  zindagi  ka  nur 
pawega. 

1J  'i'ab  Farision  ne  us  se  kaba,  Tu 
apne  haqq  men  gawihi  duta  hai ;  teri 
gawahi  saeh  nabin. 

14  Yisii' ne  jawab  diyA,  aur  unhen 
kaha,  Agarchi  main  apni  babat  ga- 
w:iiii  dct;i  hiin,  btu  bhi  meri  gawahi 
sachhai:  kyiinki  m&in  jauta  hiin,  ki 
iiiuiij  kalian  so  aya  hiin,  aur  main 
kahaii  ko  jati  lirtn ;  par  tum  nahin 
jaute,  ki  main  kabag  se  aya  bufi,  aur 
kahan  ko  j&ta  hdn. 

15  Tum  jism  ke  mutabiq  hukm 
karir  hu;  main  kisi  par  liuk  m  nahig 


Apui  ta'Hm  ko haq<i  thohr&ke  YtT'HANNA',  TITI.     Tahttditm  kofiwdhd-v. 

16  Aur  agar  main  luikm  karun,  to 
mara  hukm  haqq  hai;  kyunki  main, 
ftkeU  nahin,  par  main  aur  Bap  jin  ne 
nnijho  bheja. 

17  Tumhari  fihnri'iU  meg   yih  bhi 


likliit  hai,ki  doadmion  ki  gawahi  sacl 
hai. 

18  Kk  to  main  hiin,  jo  apni  babat 
gawahi  deta  bi'm,  aur  llip  bhi,  jis 
niujba   bheja  hai,  mere   liye  gaw&bi 
dcta  hai. 

lit  Tab  urihon  ne  ub  ue  kaha,  Tera 
Dap  kalian  hai?  YimV  ne  jawab  diya, 
Tum  na  ruujhe  janfce,  aur  na  mere  Wp 
k" ;  ini  tam  mujhe  jati  w,  to  mere  Bap 
ko  blil  jante. 

20  *  inti'  no  yih  batcri  haikal  ko  an- 
dar bait  ul  mal  men  ta'Iun  dete  hiie 
kabi]) ;  aur  kisi  ne  lis  par  hath  na  dale, 
ki  uh  ka  waqt  lianoz  na  a  y  a  tha. 

21  Tab  Yvb6'  ne  phir  unhen  kaha. 
Siam  jata  hiin,  aur  tum  miijlio  dhiin- 
dhoge,  itu  apne  gun&h  men  maroge  ; 
j/iJuiTi  iiiiiin  jala  hiln,  tum  a  nahin 
nkte  ho. 

22  Tab  Yabudion  no.  kaha,  Kyii  wuh 
apne  ta,in  mar  dalega'r  jo  kabta  hai, 
Jabari  main  jaia  lilin,  tum  a  nahin 
sak  i  u  h  o. 

23  Uh  tie  imken  kaha,  Tum  niche  »e 
bu;  main  lipar  kg  Inig:  tum  ia  ja.liau 
ke  ho;  main  'u  jahan  k:i  nahin  Imii. 

21  Isliye  iuaiq  ne  tumben  kaha7  ki 
tum  apne  gunahon  men  maroge  ;  kyun- 
ki  agar  tum  iman  nablg  Hio,  ki  main 
hi  bun,  to  tum  apne  guTtahmj  moij 
maroge, 

25  Tab  unhon  ne  us  se  kaha,  T'u 
kauubaiV  Yisu'ncunbcn  kaha,  Wnlu 
jo  main  ne  tumben  akuru'  hi  u  kaha. 

2fi  Miij h  pas  bakat  batcn  kain,  ki 
tutnliare  haqq  men  kahiin, ~anr  hukm 
karun:  par  jis  ne  mujho  bheja  hai, 
Bacheiia  hai :  aur  ruam  bhi,  wulii  bat- 
en,  jo  main  ne  tu  »  aunl  hain,  jahan 
ko  kabta  fidn, 

27  VVe  na   Hamjbe,  ki  wuh  un  m 
Sapki  babat  kakui  04, 
130 


2S  Phir  Yiaii'  ue  uuheu  kaki,  Jab 
tum  lbni  AMaui  ko  i'mchc  par  charh- 
aogo,  tab  tum  Jaaoge  ki  main  liiiri,  aur 
main  ap  ne  kucbh  nahin  kaita ;  magar 
jo  mere  Bap  ne  mujho  sikhiaya,  mairj 
wuh  liaten  kabtd  hiin. 

2i)  Aur  jis  mu  mujhe  bheja  Jiai,  mere 
wath  hai:  Bap  ne  mujhe  akela  uahin 
chhura,  kyiinki  main  hamesha  uiw 
kam  karta  hiin.jo  nnekhuBh  atc  hain. 

30  Jab  wuh  ye  batcn  kabta  tha,  to 
bahutere  ns  par  imdn  lae. 

31  TabYiKii'  ne  im  Yahridion  ko,  jo 
na  paj  iman  lati  the,  kaha,  Agar  tum 
mi'ri  liat  par  sabit  rahoge,  to  tum 
t&kqlq  mere  BnArfrd  hoge  j 

32  Aur  aachai  ko  janoge,  aur  sach- 
(ii  tum  ku  a-^ad  karegi. 

33  1  Unhog  ne  uao  jawab  diyd. 
Ilam  Abirahiim  ki  nasi  hain,  aur  kisi 
ke  (mlam  kabhfi  na  the;  tii  kyimkar 
kabta  hai,  ki  Tum  azad  kiye  jaoge? 

34  Yisii'ne  unhen  jawab  diya,  Main 
tum  »e  sat'h  aach  kabta  lain,  ki  Jo 
koi  gumih  karta  hai,  gunab  ka  gulam 
hai. 

35  Aur  gulam  abnd  tak  ghar  men 
nalilij  raiita ;  Beta  abad  tak  rahta  hai. 

3tJ  Pas  agar  Beta  tum  ko  azad  kar- 
egd.to  mm  tahqiq  faad  hoge. 

37  Main  janta  Ini  n,  ki  tum  Abira- 
hiim ki  naisi  ho ;  lekio  tum  mere  qatl 
ki  fikr  men  ho,  kyriuki  tum  men  mere 
kalam  ki  jagat  naliin. 

38  Maig  ne  jo  kuchh  apne  Bap  ke 
pas  dekha  hai,  wuht  kabtd  hiin  :  aur 
tam  wuh.  jr..  tum  ne  Wpae  liap  ke  pis 
dekbi  hai,  karto  lio. 

39  l.'iiiniii  no  jawab  meiius  so  kaha, 
IlamdrA  bap  Abiraham  hai.  Yisii'  ne 
r.nli.n  kaha,  Agu  tum  AVjiraham  ko 
faraand  hote,  to  tum  Abiraham  ke  se 
kam  karto. 

40  Par  tum  mujhe  qatl  kiyachabto 
ho,  jo  aisa  ahakliw  hai,  ki  hftqq  bit,  jo 
main  ne  Khiiita  w  suni,  turnhen  kahi ; 

ib  A  bual  lilin  ne  naliin  kiya. 
i     ^1  tata  apue  bap  ke  kam  karteho. 


TaUdioz  U  YU'IIASNA',  !X.  fttflfr  rfWMl  Jml&m. 

Tab  unhon  ne  us  sekaM,  Hain  haram  J  mIhi  k  J  i  a  morc  kalani   par  'amal*  kare, 
se  paida  nahin  htie  ;  hamard  Bap  ck  U)  ahad  tak  maut  ka  imun    ua  cha- 


hai,  ya'ue,  Khuda. 

42  Yisa'ne  uohenkaha,  Agiir  Khu- 
da tumhard  Mp  hota,  to  tum  mujhe 
'aziz  jante;  kyi'irjki  main  Khuda  sc 
tiikla.  aur  dy&  haji;  kyunki  main  Ap 
sc  nahin  aya,  par  uh  ne  mujhe  bheja. 

43  Timi  mori  'ibarat  kyi'm  naliin 
samojhtc  ?  is  liye  ki  incrd  kaldm  sun 
lialiin  s:ikk\ 

44  Tum  apne  bapSliaitansebo,  aur 
chahto  lio  ki  apne  Mp  ki  khwalibdi 
ke  muwifiq  tua.  Wuh  to  shunV  u 
f|atil  thd,  aur  sachfti  par  sAl)it  M  raha; 
kyunki  us  men  sachdi  nahin.  Jab 
wuli  jhutb,  kahtd  hai,  to  apne  lii  se 
kahta  hai;  kyunki  wuh  jluUtia  bal, 
aur  jhuth  ka  bani  bai. 

45  Par  tum  is  «abah  se  ki  main 
sach  kahtd  hiin,  mujh  par  iman  naliin 
bite. 

4*1  Eann  tum  men  sc  mujh  par 
«misili  sabit  karta  hal?  Agar  main 
Hicfa  kahti  hiin,  tum  mnjh  par  iman 
kyun  nahjn  Idte? 

47~  Jo  Khuda  ka  hai,  Khuda  ki 
b6tes  sunia  hai :  tum  h  liye  nabii) 
suutu  ho,  ki  tutn  Khuda  ke  nahin  lio. 

4a  lab  Yahudion  ne  jawab  men  u* 
sc  kuini,  Kya  ham  aehdihd  nahin 
kahte,  ki  tu  .Samari  hai,  aur  tere  satu 
ek  deo  hai  J 

49  Tisu'  no  jawab  diya,  Mere  sath 
doo  nahin  ;  par  main  apne  Bap  ki  'i /.zat 
kami  hiin,  aur  titni  meri  be-'izzati 
karte  ho. 

50  Aur  main  apni  buzurgi  nahir 
dbundhrd;  ek  hai,  jo  dliutidlita  hai 
aur  hukm  karta  hai. 

51  Main  tum  ne  sach  sach  kahta 
liv'iii,  Agar  koi  abakus  mere  kalam  par 
'amal  kare,  to  wuh  abad  tak  maut  ko 
banzia  na  dekhoga. 

52  Tab  Yahudion  ne  us  se  kaba. 
Ab  ham  ne  jdnd,  ki  tujh  pas  ek  doc 
bai.  AHr&hiim  bub  gaya,  nur  am- 
bivil  bin.  aur  tu  kahta  hai,  Agar  koi 

131 


khega. 

5S  Kya  tu  hnraare  bap  Abirahdin 

buzurgtar  hai,  aur  wuh  mar  gaya ? 
atnbiya  l>hi  tnur  gaya;  tu  apue  ta,in 
kya  tbahrdta  hai? 

54  Y  isu'  ne  jawab  diya,  Agar  main 
apni  buzTirgi  kaiti  hiin,  to  meri  bu- 
zurgi  kuchb  nahin  :  par  mera  Bap  bai, 
jise  tum  kahtc  ho,  ki  hamara  Khuda 
hai,  wuh  meri  buzurgi  karta  liai. 

y i"i  Tum  ne  use  nahin  j&nd ;  lekin 
main  use  jdntd  hiin;  aur  ani  maig 
kahiin,  ki  main  use  nahin  jari  t  a,  (o 
main  tuinhari  tarah  jlniljui  bunga : 
«r  uiain  use  jdntd  lilin,  aur,  U  ke 
alam  rai  'amal  karta  hiin. 

50  lumharu  bap  Abiraham  bubut 
ruishtaii  thd  ki  men  diu  dekhe : 
chuudDcbi  us  ne  dcklui,  aur  khush 
hud. 

57  Tab  Yahudion  ne  ub  se  kahd, 
Teri  W  to  pachas  harus  ki  n.ibin, 
aur  kya  til  00  Abirahaui  ko  dekhi 
hai? 

f>B  Yi&ii'  no  mihi'n  kaba,  Main  tum 
m  each  sach  kahtd  luiii,  Paahtar  us  w> 
ki  Ahiraham  ho,  main  ln'nj. 

69  Tab  unhon  ne  patthar  uthiie,  ki 
use  mdron ;  par  Yiau'  no  apne  ta.iu 
ponhida  kiyd,  aur  «n  ke  bich  se  gu- 
/.arkar  haikal  se  nikl.i,  aur  yun  cbald 


<;:iy:i 


IX  BAU 


PHIIl  us  ne  Ute  biie  ek  sbaklis  ko, 
jo  janam  ka  audhd  tlid,  dekha. 

•1  Aur  us  ke  shagirdori  ne  us  se 
puchha,  ki  Ai  Kablii,  gunali  kis  ne 
kiyd,  is  sbakhs  no,  ya  us  ke  iiil'l  l>ap 
no,  ki  yib  umllia  pabla  hua? 

3  Yisd'  uu  jawdb  diyd,  Na  to  is 
slmklis  at  iiuinib  kiyii,  na  us  ]n:  toi 
bap  ne;  lekiu  yiin  lnia,  i:i.  ki  Khuda 
ke  kain  tti  men  sAhil  howttm 

i  /in'irhai  ki  jls  ne  uiujho  blieja, 
main  us  ke  kamort  ko,  jab  tak  ki  dui 


M  atidht  ka,  dnkh  pana.        YU'HANNA',  IX.         Faritivn  teii  be-imaU  i 


hai,  kurdi; ;  rst  &t\  hai,  aur  koi  us 
waqt  kain  uahin  kar  sakti. 

6  Jab  tak  main  janin  mcn  huiJ, 
jahdn  ka  m'ir  hm_i. 

6  Yih  kahko  us  ne  zamiu  par  thukd, 
nur  thiik  se  mitti  gdndhi,  aur  wuii 
mitti  uh  audhe  k{  aiiklunj  par  lop  ki, 

7'  Aur  usta  kahd,  Ja,  aur  Bilodtn  ke 
batu  mag,  Qi>  ka  tarjuma,  UhejA  lni:i 
Ini),  uahA.  Tab  w  uh  jAke  uihAyA, 
aur  bina  hofce  AyA. 

8  ^  Tab  lmmaayojj  ne,  aur  jinhon 
ne  age  ow  andhd  dekui  thA,  kahd, 
«vi'yili  wuh  nahin,  jo  baithA  luiii 
bliikh  miogU  thA? 

fl  lla'zon  ne  kahA,  Yih  wuhi  hai  l 
aurun  ijo  kahd,  Y1I1  uh  ki  manind  hai; 
uh  ne  kahA,  Main  wuhi  hun. 

LO  l'liir  unhon  M  us  so  kahA,  Teri 
ankhen  kyrinkar  khul  tfayiij  ? 

11  f"  s  lio  "jawab  diyA,  aur  kahA,  ki 
Uk  rnard  M,  jib  ka  ndm  Y  isu'  hai, 
mitti  guiidhi,  aur  racri  daklioti  par 
lag'a'i,  aur  mujhe  kahi,  ki  SiloAm  ke 
haus  DUS  j*\  *ar  'i»h4,  So  main  jdko 
nahdyd,  aur  binA  liuA. 

12  "lab  unhon  ne  us  ra  kali  S.  ki 
Wuh  kahdn  hai"V  Us  ne  kahA,  Main 
nahin  jdiuA. 

lfT*j[  We  use,  30  pahle  andhd  thA, 
Farision  pia  lc  ff»re, 

14  Aur  jab  ki  Yisti'  110  mitti  gtindh- 
ke  us  ki  Ankhcn  khuli  thiij,  Wlt  k** 
«liu  ilid. 

15  Pl'ir  Fariaion  ne  bhi  us  ne  pd- 
chlla,  ki  T6  ne  apni  Ankhcn  kyunkar 
pAiti  ¥  Uh  ne  nnhcn  kahd,  ki  Di 
mari  Anklmij  pai  gin  mitti  lagdi,  aur 
main  nahdyA,  aur  binA  hiia. 

Ui  Tah  Farwioij  men  se  batara  ne 
kahd,  Vib  mard  KhudA  ki  taraf  so 
r.ahfn,  kyiinki  sabt  ku  din  ko  nahin 
HidutA.  Aurorj  ue  kahA,  Kyutjkai  ho 
aaktA  hai,  i;i  franahgAr  insdu  ais<:  tuu- 
'njJHO  dikbAor'  So  uu  men  ikhtilaf 
thA. 

17  Unhon  ne  uh  andhe  shakbs  ko 
phir  kahi,  fii  us  ke  bac|q  ibsq,  jis  na 
182 


ieri  Aukhen  kholin,  kya  kahtA  hai  V 
Wuh  bott,  ki  Wuh  afc  nabi  hai. 

IH  I'ar  Yahfidiori  ne  yih  bat  yaqin 
naki,  ki  wuh  andha  thA,  aurbiua  hiil, 
jab  tak  ki  unhvij  ne  us  ahakhs  k«  mA 
bap  ko,  jo  binA  hiiA  thA,  bulaya. 

19  Aur  un  so  yih  kuliku  pudiha,  ki 
Kyd  yih  tuinliAra  betA  hai,  jise  tam 
kahte  ho, andhd  paidd  hiia?  phir  wuh 
afa  kyiiijluir  dakuti  hai? 

20  Uh  ke  ind  bdp  iie  jawAb  meij 
uiilion  kahd.  Hara  jaute  hain  ki  yih 
hamdra  lieti  hai,  aur  yih,  ki  wuh 
andhd  paidd  luhi  ; 

'Jl  Lekia  yih  ham  naliin  jAiite,  ki 
wuh  ab  kyiinkar  deklitd  hai;  yA  kia 
ne  us  ki  Ankliert  klioli  hain,  liam  na- 
hin  jAnto ;  wuh  balig  hai ;  ua  t»  pii- 
chlio;  to  wuh  apnf  Ap  kabesa. 

T2  Us  ke  md  bAp  Yahudion  «e  dar- 
1.1!  lho,  aur  is  liye  unhcm  no  yih  kahd: 
kyt'mki  Yahudion  nt'  «k A  kiya  ilid.  ki 
agar  koi  iqrdr  kare  ki  wuh  Masih  hai, 
to  Ibidatkhino  se  kharij  kiyd  jAwe. 

23  Ih  wd.ste  us  ke  md  Iwlp  nc  kahd, 
ki  Wuh  bAlig  hai ;  ua  sc  puchho. 

24  Tah  unhuri  ne  us  sliakha  ko,  jo 
andhA  thA,  phir  buldkar  uh  ae  kahA, 
ki  IjhudA  ki  liuz.urgi  kar ;  hara  jdute 
hain  ki  yih  mani  gooahgat  hai. 

25  U»  ne  jawdb  diyA,  aur  kahd,  ki 
Main  nabin  jdutd  ki  wuh  Kunah<.-dr 
hai,  ki  nah  i»  :  main  ek  bat  janlA  hun, 
ki  main  andhA  thA,  ab  binA  min. 

2(i  Tab  unhon  ne  ria  so  phir  puchhd, 
ki  Us  no  tujli  ae  kya  kiya¥  kyi'mkar 

1  no  teri  dnkhi-u  kholirj  'i 

27  Ub  ne  unhen  jawdb  diyd,  Main 
ue  to  turnhoii  abhi  kahA,  aur  tum  no 
na  annd:  kyd  tura  phir  suna  chahUs 
hu?  kya  tuinbhf  ua  ko  ahduird  bom} 

2H  Tab  unhon  no  nas  malAmat  ki, 

s  kahA,  Ttl  us  kA  ibigird  hai ;  laun 
MdWi  k«  shairird  hain. 

29  Huni  jdute  hain  ki  Ivhudi  ne 
Musd  ke  sAth  kaldm  kiya;  par  ham 
naiin  jaote  ki  yili  kalian  ka  hai. 

30  Us  shakhs  ue  jawab  111011  iinhon 


ndmi  ko  kharij  karrni.         YU'HANNA',  X.  Manh  ne.k  ch-tuptin  hai. 


kahi.  Ia  men  ta'aijub  hai,  ki  tum  i 
hin  jAnte  ki  yih  kahin  ki  hai,  aur 
ne  meri  iukhen  kholi  hain. 

31  Hain  jinto  haig  ki  Khuda 
;rui>;ilit;aroii  ki  nahin  Kimia;  par  agar 
koi  Khuda- paraui  ho,  aur  us  ki  rnam 
j*r  chale,  lu  as  ki  wuh  sua  t  a  hai. 

32  Dunyi  ke  Bhuxu'  ro  suunc  men 
nak  i  n  iyi,  ki  kiai  ne  janarn  ke  andhe 
ki  inkhen  kholi  bon. 

33  Agar  yih.  mard  Khudi  kl  taraf 
se  tia  h.it si.,  to  kuchh  na  kar  sakti. 

34  Unhon  ne  jawab  men  us  so  ka- 
hi, Tii  lo  bilkuli  gunihon  nien  paiihi 
Inii,  aur  kyi  ham  ko  sikhlrit;i  hai  V 
Tab  unhon  ne  use  kliirij  kar  diya, 

35  Yisii'  ne  «uni  ki  unhon  11«  tua 
kharij  kar  diya  ;  tau  us  ne  A»  pakar 
ub  so  kahi,  Kya  tii  Khudi  ke  IJete 
par  iman  lata  hai? 

3ti  Usne  jawab  men  kaha,  Ai  Khu- 
diwand,  wtih  kaun  hai,  ki  main  uh  par 
iman  laun  ? 

37  Yisti'  ne  us  se  kaha,  Tu  ne  to 
use  dcklia  hai,  aur  jo  tujli  se  boiti  hai, 
wulii  hai. 

38  Ufl  ne  "kahi,  Ai  Khudiwand, 
main  iumn  liti  hdn.  Aur  ub  ne  use 
s<ijda  kiva. 

3!l  %  Tah  Yisu'  ne  kahi,  ki  Main 
'adilat  ke  liye  is  dunyi  men  iyi  htin, 
ti  ki  wo  jo  nahin  dekhte  hain,  dekhcn, 
aur  jo  dekhte  ham,  andhe  ha  jiwen. 

40  Aur  Farision  ne,  jo  us  ke  sith 
the,  yih  biten  sunke  us  se  kaili,  Kya 
ham  bin  andhe  hain? 

41  Yisii'  ne  unhen  kahi,  Agar  tum 
andhe  hote,  to  giinahgir  11.1  hote:  par 
ab  tum  to  kahte  lio,  ki  Ham  dekhte 
h:iiij  ;  is  liye  tumhiri  guiiak  raliti 
hai. 

X  BA'B. 

MA1N|  tum  ae  sach  aach  kali  tahun, 
Jo  ki  darwiy-e    se    hherkhine 
men  dikhil  nahin  hota,  baiki  aur  taraf 
se   ipar   charhti   hai,  wuh  chor  aur 
■.ifii.ir  hai. 
'       133 


2  Lekin  wuh  jo  darwiM  ne  dikhil 
hoti  hai,  bheron  ki  unrariyi  hai. 

3  Us  ke  liye  (Urban  khulti  hai; 
aur  bheren  uski  iwiz  sunti  hain  j  aur 
wuh  apui  bhemn  ko  mim  loko  hulitd 
.hai,  aur  unheu  bahar  te  jati  hai. 

4  Aur  jab  wuh  apni  bheroii  ko  bi- 
har  nikilti  hai,  to  nn  ko  ige  (m 
chalti  hai,  aur  bheren  ai  ke  pichhe 
ho  leti  hain  ;  kyinki  we  us  ki  iwiz 
pahehinti  hain. 

fi  Aur  we  begtafl  ke  pichhe  nahin 
latin,  baiki  us  se  bhagt.i  hai  n  ;  is  liye 
ki  beginon  ki  iwiz  nahin  pahehintin. 

6  Yiftu'  ne  yih  tamsil  unhen  kahi ; 
lakin  we  na  samjhc  ki  yih  kyi  biteii 
thin,  jo  wuh  un  se  kahta  tlii. 

7  Tab  Yi«u'  ne  nnlion  piir  kahi. 
Main  tum  se  sach  sach  kaliti  htin,  ki 
bheron  ki  darwiza  main  hun. 

8  8ab  jitne  mujh  se  ic;e  ae,  chor  aur 
batmir  hain  :  par  bheron  ne  un  ki  ua 
suni. 

Darwi/a    main   hun :    agar   kol 
shakhs  mujh  so  dikhil  ho,  to  najat 
liiwegi,  aur  andar  biliar  iyi  jiega, 
r  charigih  pi«ga. 

10  Chor  nahin  ita,  magnr  churine, 
aur  qail  kanie,  aur  halik  kame  ko : 
main  iyi  hun,  ti  ki  wezindagi  pawen, 
aur  /.iyida  hisil  karun. 

11  Achchha  garariyi  main  hun  : 
achchhi  garariyi  bheroii  ke  liye  apni 
jin  deti  hai. 

12  Par  mazdur,  aur  wuh  jogarariyi 
nahin,  aur  bheron   ki   milik   nahin, 

.iya  ite  dekhkv  bheroii  ko  ehhor 
deti  hai,  aur  bhi»  jiti  hai ;  aur  biie- 
riyi  nnhen  phirti  hai,  aur  bheron  ko 
parigniida  k  arti  hai. 

18  Mazdiir  bhiyti  hai,  kyCinki  wuh 
mazdur  hai,  aur  bheron  ku  liye  likr 
nahin  karti. 

14  Aolichbi  gararivi  main  hun,  aur 
apniou  ko  pahehinti  hun,  aur  meri 
niujhu  |«ihchinti  hain. 

15  Jia  tarah  so  Hip  mujhe  jdnti 
hai,  us  tarah  main  Liap  ko  jinti  hiin  : 


M'.tsih  aur  Bup  k\i 


YU'HANNA',  X. 


e  k  thuharna. 


aur  main  bhernn  ke  liye  apni  jari  detd 
b  'i  n, 

III  Aur  meri  aur  bhi  bheren  hain, 
]d  is  bherkhdne  ki  nahin  ;  zan'tr  hai 
ki  ruairj  cmherr  bhi  ha'nj,  nur  we  meri 
awaz  aunengi ;  aur  ek  hi  gali»,  aur  ek 
hi  garariyi  hoga. 

17  Bdp  mujhe  is  liye  piyar  karta 
hai,  ki  main  apni  jati  detd  liuti,  td  ki 
main  uae  phir  liiu. 

18  Koi  shakhs  uso  mujh  se  nahiij 
leti,  pnr  main  use  ap  hu  detd  liiiij; 
atari  ikhtiyar  hai  ki  usu  duri,  aur 
meri  ikhtiyir  hai  ki  usc  phir  liin. 
Yih  hukm  main  :ie  ajjno  Bdp  «e  paya. 

19  1  Tah  Yahiidion  k«bicli,m  bit 
03  ke  afttab,  pl.ir  ikhtilaf  bui. 

20  Aur  bahu  ton  ue  un  rutin  se  ka- 
ha,  ki  Us  ko  sdth  sk  doo  hai.  aur  wuh 
siri  hai;  tur»  us  ki  kyrin  sutitc  ho 

21  Auron  ne  kahi,  Yih  baton  1 

ki  nahin,  jin  men  dsa  hai.     K  ya  deo 
andhe  ki  ankhcii  khol  sakti  hai  ? 

22  II  JaruBofam  msrj  tajdid  ki  'id 
hiu,  aur  jaro  kii  rnaiisiiN  tJui. 

23  Aur  VisiV  haikal  kuandar  JSulai 
mani  usd-re  nicrj  phirta  tha. 

24  Tah  Yahiidkm  110  use  i  gheri, 
aur  us  si  k:ili:i,  ki  T  d  kab  tak  hamdre 
dil  ko  adhar  meii  rakhogi?  Agar  tu 
Ujufh  hai,  lo  liain  ko  naf  kah  de. 

25  Yisi'i'  M  unhen  jawab  diyd,  ki 
Main  M  bo  Uniiiinj  kalui,  uar  linu  ue 
y.,  jin  ua  kiya :  jo  kira  main  apnu 
Bap  ke  nim  se  karta  lnin,  yih  niere 
gawdh  hain. 

24  Lekiu  tnm  iinau  naMrj  lain, 
kyiiiiki  jala*  main  u  tumben  kafaa, 
ium  mori  bhcron  nien  se  nahin. 

27  Meri  bheren  meri  dwi/.  sunt! 
hain,  aur  main  uiilieij  jiutd  hit  n,  aur 
we  mere  piehhe  ohalti  hain. 

28  Aur  main  nuhen  hamesha  ki 
zindagi  baklislui  hun .  aur  we  kabhi 
balik  na  lioiigi,  aur  koi  iirihcii  mere 
hdth  se  chhin  na  lega. 

2!l  Meri  Bap,  jis  06  unhen  ruujhe 
diyd  hai.  nah  se  hara  hai ;    aur  koi 
134 


unhen    incre    Bap  ke    bith    ho  chhin 
nahin  le  sak  ia. 

30  Main  aur  Bap  ok  hain. 

31  Tah  Yahiidion  ne  phir  patthnr 
nfliaV,  lii  us  par  paUhrau  karun. 

32  Yimi*  ne  unhen  jawab  riiya,  ki 
Main  ue  gpne  Biip  ki]  bnliut  H 
aelielihe  krim  tuiuhen  dikhae  hain  ; 
un  iiicti  su  k  i  s  kain  ke  liyu  luui 
mujbe  pattlirao  karte  bo  ? 

3J  YiiMdion  ne  uue  jawab  diyd, 
aur  kalid,  ki  II ain  tujiiu  aclichhe  kdm 
ko  liye  nahiij,  baiki  is  liye  tujhe 
Dfttthrio  karto  inim,  ki  td  kttfr  kahtd 
h;ii.  nur  'mn&u  boko  apue  ta.ij»  Kbuda 
baudtd  hai. 

84  Viwu'  ue  unhen  jawab  diyii,  Kya 
tuiulian  shari'iit  rnen  yih  nahin  liklid 
hai,  ki  Main   ne    kaha,  Tum   kbudi 

ho  y 

35  Jah  ki  ua  no  unhen,  jin  ke  pas 
Ktuda  k,i  kalam  dya,  khuda  kaiio, 
m  r  niuuikin  naliin  ki  kitdb  bdtil  bo  ; 

86  Tnm  BM,iiM  Khudii.  ne  luakli- 
stis  kiya,  aur  jahil)  men  blteja,  kahte 
ho,  ki  Tu  kul'r  baklii  hai;  ki  main  ne 
kaha,  Main  Khuda  kd  llw.a  hun. 

87  Agar  main  apu  e  Baji  ke  kdm 
nahin  kuna,  to  mujh  pai'  intan  niat 
lio.  " 

38  Lekin  agar  main  karta  luin,  to 
agarehi  mujh  pir  iman  na  Ido,  tau  bhi 
kini  o  n  par  imau  liio,  ta  ki  tum  jiino, 
aur  yaipu  koio,  ki  Dap  mujh  men  hai, 
aur  maiii  un  uicn  Lu.11. 

39  Tahunlinn  no  phir  ofaihi  ki  uae 
pakar  len ;  par  wuh  un  ke  itdthog  se 
tiika.1  gayij 

40  Aur  Yardau  ke  pir,  m  jogoh, 
jaliatj  Vubanni  pahle  baptisma  diyd 
kai  li  tha,  phir  gaya  ;  aur  wahin  raha, 

■11  Aur  Imhulun  ne  us  pd»  jako 
kaha,  ki  Ydhannd  no  to  kol  mu'ajUa 
nahin  dikhdya ;  par  eab  bdten  jo  Yii- 
hoafii  ue  19  ke  haqq  men  kabin  sach- 
chi  thin. 

42  Aur  wahin  bahut  sc  us  par  imdn 

lio. 


A 


ka, 

XI  BA'R 
UR     La'nzar    Ddme    ek 

Bait'aniyd    kd     rahnewala, 


YU'JIANNA',  XI.  marjami. 

14  Tali  Yiflo'  ne  unhen  saf  kaba,  ki 
shakhs,  La'aienr  m»r  gaya. 

15  Aur  main  Uunhdre  liyi-  is  par 


Mariyam  M»  us  ki   bahiti  Mart.hd  ke.  klmsh  hi'.ij,  ki  main.  wahaii  ua  tlid,  td 


gayw  kd  tha,  biiudr  Ihd. 
(Wuhi  Mariyam,  jia 


ki  tum  Iman  Jao;  par  do,  bam  us  pa.-j 
Khudd-  j  den.. 


wand  ko  'itr  maid,  nur  apne  balon  w      16  Tab  Thumd 
us  ke  pdnwon  ko  poaohha  tha,  uai  ka 
bhrii  La'a/.ar  bimar  tha.) 

3  So  us  ki  bahiuon.  ne  us  ko  yih 
kabid  bhejd,  ki  Ai  Kbudawand,  dekh, 
jisu  tu  piyar  karta  hai,  bimar  hai. 

4  Yisii"  no  sunkc  kaha,  ki  Yiii 
maut  ki  bimar!  nahiy.,  lekin  Khrnid 
ki  buzurgi  ke  liye  hal,  td  ki  ua  ke 
nahab  kg  Khudd  ke  Bete  ki  buzurgi 
ki  jawe. 

6  Aur  Yisti'  Martha  ko,  aur  us  ki 
bahin,  aur  La'asar  ko,  piyar  karta 
tha. 

U  Bo  jab  us  ne  aund  ki  wuh  bimar 
hai,  aur  do  roz  us  jagah,  jahdn  wuh 
tha,  rahd.  * 

7  Tab  ba'd  us  ke  shdgirdon  N  kalia, 
A'o,  ham  phir  Yahiidiya  meij  jaeu. 

H  Shagirdon  ne  us  se  kaha,  Ai 
Kabbi,  abhi  Yahudion.  ua  chahd  tha 
ki  tujhe  patthrdo  karen,;  aur  tii  wahdn 
phir  jritA  hai? 

9  Yisii'  ne  jawab  diyd,  ki  Kyd  din 
ke  bdrah  ghante  liahm?  Agar  koi 
din  ke  waqt  chale,  t*>  wuh  thokar 
nahin  khdtd;  kyiinki  wuh  ia  jahdn  ki 
roshni  ik'khla  hai. 

10  Par  agar  koi  rdt  ke  waqt  chale, 
to  «nih  thokar  khdtd  hai,  kyi'iriki  us 
nua  rotan!  uahin. 

11  Usneyih  bdicn  kabin;  aur  ba'd 
us  ke  uu  bo  kahii,  ki  Hatnara  dost 
T.a'azsr  so  gaya  liai  ;  par  main  jatd 
liun  ki  usc  jagalin. 

12  Tab  us  ko  shagirdoii  nc  kaba,  Ai 
Khuddwand,  agar  wuh  sota  hai,  to 
ohanga  ho  jdegd. 

13  Yisii'  ne  to  us  ki  maut  ki  bdhat 
kaha ;  par  unhon  ne  khiyal  kiya  ki 
wuh  oiud  ki:  ar&iu  ki  babat  farindtd 
tha. 

135 


i   Didiraiuit 

kahtc  haig,  apne  hani-pairaunn  «o 
kahd,  A'o,  ham  bhi  cbalen,  td  ki  us  ke 
-alh   i:  .uvri. 

17  Pas  Yisu'  ne  dke  darydft  kiya 
ki  chdrdin  hficki  use  qabr  ineij  rak  b  d. 

18  Aur  Bait'aniyd  Yarusakm  se 
nawHk.  takhminan  ek  pakku  k(M  ke 
qarib  tha. 

19  Aur  bahut  sc  Yahudi  Marthi 
aur  Mariyam  ke  pas  de  the,  ki  un  ke 
bhdi  ki  bdbat  uu  ae  mdtam-pnrsi 
karen. 

2U  So  Mart.hd  ne,  jojj  sund  ki  Yisu' 
dtd  hai,  us  kd  istiubdl  kiya;  par 
Mariyam  ghar  mei)  baithi  raki. 

21  Tab  Martha  ne  Yisu'  ko  kahd, 
Ai  Kbudawand,  agar  tu  yiilidn  hotd,  to 
merd  bhdi  ua  marla. 

22  Lckin  maiij  juiiti  hdfl  kt  ah  bhi 
jo  kuchii  tu  Khudd  se  nidnge,  Khtjdd 
tujhe  degd. 

■12  Yisu'  ne  us  se  kaha,  Teri  bhdi 
phir  jl  utlicgd. 

21  Martha  ne  us  se  kahd,  Main 
jdnti  liun  ki  qiydinat  nien  picl.iih-  <iin 
phir  ji  uthegd. 

2f>  YiKd'  ne  us  se  kahd,  (jiydmat 
aur  /.indagi  main  bi  hdfl ;  jo  inujh  par 
irndn  Idwe,  agarchi  wuh  mar  gaya  ho, 
tau  bhi  jiegd  : 

26  Aur  jo  koi  jitd  hai,  aur  mujli  par 
imdn  lata  hai,  kabbJ  01  uiarega.  Kyd 
tu  yih  yaqin  rakliti  hai  V 

27  Ua  ne  us  se  kahd,  Ildn,  ai  Kbu- 
dawand, mujlie  yaqin  hai  ki  Khudd 
kd  Bctd  Masih,  jo  dunyd  mtm  auewala 
thd,  tii  h/  Ini. 

28  Wuh  yih  kahke  chali  s;ayi,  aur 
chu]ike  apni  bahin  Mariyam  ko  buldke 
kahii,  ki  Ustad  dyd  hai,  aur  tujliu 
bu  lata  hai. 


Matihh&uiM  YU'HANNA',  XT.  ijabr  par 

29  Wuh  yih  bit  sunte  UI  jald  uthi,  flspis  khare  ham,  main  m  yili  kadi 


aur  us  pas  ii. 

30  Aur  Yisii'  banoa  basti  men  na 
pahuncka  tbd,  baiki  «isi  jagah  thi, 
jaliirj  Martini  UH  mili  thi. 

31  Tab  Yahudi  jo  ua  ke  nith  ghar 
men  the,  aur  use  tasalli  dete  tho,  yili 
d'klike  ki  Mariyam  jald  uthi,  aur 
binar  gayi,  yun  feahte  hu«  us  ke  pi- 
chhe  ho  liye,  ki  Wuh  qabr  par  roiie 
jati  liai. 

32  Aur  jab  Marivam  wahin  jahirj 
Yisu'  tha  Ai,  aur  use  dekha,  to  us  ke 
fladamorj  par  girke  uh  se  kahi,  Ai 
Khudawand,  agar  t. u  yabau  hoti,  to 
nicra  bhai  umr  na  jati. 

88  Jab  Vinil' lio  IH  k»  dekhi  ki  roti 
hai,  aur  Yahudion  ko  bhi,  j"  ua  ke  sath 
ae  the,  ki  rute  hai  n,  to  dil  sc  ah  mari, 
aur  initam  kiya, 

84  Aur  kaiia,  Tum  ne  uae  kahdn 
rakhi?  Unhon  ue  kalii,  Ai  Kbudi- 
wand,  i,  aur  dekh. 

86  YM'  roya. 

3C  Tab  Yahudi  boTe,  ki  Dekho,  uw 
kilua  jiivilr  karti  thi  I 

37  lia'aim  ne  un  mim  se  kahi,  KyA 
yih  mard,  ji»  ne  andbe  ki  inkhen 
kiiolin,  na  kar  taki  ki  yih  shakhs  bhi 
ua  niarta'? 

38  Tab  Yisd'  apno  dil  sc  phir  ih 
karti  hui  gabr  par  iya.  Wuh  ck  gir 
thi.  aur  us  par  ek  patiyi  d  hari  thi. 

39  Yibu'  farmiii  hai,  ki  Patiyi 
uthao.  Ub  raurda  ki  bahin  Marthi 
ua  M  ];aliti  hai,  Ai  KhuriAwand,  us  ne 
to  ah  badbu  iti  hai,  kyiinki  use  chir 
diti  ln'ie. 

40  Yisii'  uu  w  kahti  hai,  KyA  main 
ne  tujhe  nahin  kahi,  ki  Agar  tu  imin 
liwe,  lo  KhudA  kA  jalai  dekhegi  ? 

41  Tab  unhog  ne  patiye  ko  wahan 
«c,  jahin  wuh  murda  gari  thi,  uthiyi. 
I'hir  Yinu'  ne  apni  ia  klen  uthiiti, 
aur  kahi,  Ai  Uap,  main  teri  shukr 
karti  hi'm  ki  tu  ne  meri  suni  hai. 

!'J  Aur  main  ue  jani  ki  tu  mori  nit 
imnti    hai :    p.i;   in   lugun  ke  bi'is,  jo 
136 


ti  ki  we  imiu  liweii  ki  tu  ue  mujhe 
bheji  hai. 

+3  Aur  yih  kalike  buland  Awiz  se 
chillAyi,  ki  Ai  La'asw,  bihar  nikal  i. 

44  Tab  wuh  jo  mar  gaya*  tha,  ka- 
fan se  hith  o  pinw  bandhe  hiic  nikal 
iyi:  aur  ua  ki  chihra  cinin^iiil 
niniAl  se  Lipat  A  hi'ii  thA.  Yisii'  ne 
unlvrj  kahi,  V  m  khul  do,  aur  jine  do. 

4-5  Tab  Yahudion  inerj  se  bahutore 
jo  Hilirmu  kane  Ae  the,  aur  ye  kim 
jo  Yisu'  ue  kiye  dekhe  the,  us  par  imin 
tie. 

4G  Par  un  men  se  baV.on  ne  Farinion 
ke  pas  jike  we  kim,  jo  Yisii'  ne  kiyo 
the,  bayan  kiye. 

47  1  Tab  sardir  kihinon  aur  Fari- 
sion  ne  Sadr  majlis  jatn'aki.aur  kahi, 
ki  Ham  kyi  karte  liain  ?  ki  yih  mani 
bahut  mu'ajize  dikhati  hai. 

48  Agar  ham  usc  yiinhi  chhoren,  to 
sab  ua  par  imin  liwerige;  aur  Kiiuii 
ikc  hauiira  inulk  aur  inuuuiyat  ko  bhi 
lu  lenge. 

4H  Aur  un  men  se  ek  ne,  Qayifa 
nam,  jo  us  sil  sardir  kahin  thi,  un  se 
kahi,  Tum  kuuhh  nahin  jinte, 

50  Aur  na  andesha  karte  hn  ki 
hamire  liye  yih  Uh  tar  hai,  ki  ek  idmi 
qaum  ke  badle  mare,  aur  na  ki  «liri 
cuuim  lialik  howe. 

51  Par  us  no  yih  apni  taraf  sc  na 
kahi ;  lekin  uh  sabab  so  ki  us  baras 
sardir  kihiu  thi,  peshkhabari  ki  ki 
Yiai'i'  us  qaum  ko  wAntw  marcfji  ; 

b'i  Aur  na  sirf  us  qaum  ke  wiste, 
hal  k  i  is  winte  bhi,  ki  wuh  Khudi  ko 
farzandon  ko,  jo  pariganda  htie,  baham 
jam'a  kare. 

53  flo  weusi  mz  se  ipaa  men  mash- 
warat  karne  lage,  ki  ua  ko  jin  bo 
miron. 

54  la  liye  Yisu'  Yahudion  men  ige 
ko  zihiri  na  phirA,  baiki  wahAu  se 
bayibin  ki  nawihi  ki;  ririim  nim  ek 
shahr  men  fjayA,  aur  apue  ahigirdon 
ko  -sath  wabiji  guzrAn  karue  lagi. 


Masih  l-o  YU'TTANNA',  XTT. 

65  f  Aur  Yahfldion  ki'  IA  i  tanah   ki  Ija'azar  ko,  j 
rnzdik  Ihi;  aur  babutere  'id  ke  nahleidekheri. 
us  nawAhi  su  Yariisalam  ko  gaye,  tA 
ki  apne  ta.in  pak  kareti. 


5t>  Tab  unhon  ne  YisiV  ki  tulilah  ki,  ruAren  : 


TToak'anva  bahtid. 
t  ub  Le  jilayd  thA, 


10  T  Tal>  sardSr  kahinon  ne  maish- 
warat   ki,   ki  La'azar  ko  bhi  jan  se 


»ur  haikal  nien  khure  hoke  Apas  men 
tlhl.  ki  Tum  kyA  guniAn  karte  ho,  ki 
wuh  'id  men  ua  awega? 

57  Aur  sariiar  kahin.>n  aur  Farision 
no  bhi  hukm  diyA  thA,  ki  Agar  koi 
iiinta  ho  ki  wuh  kabin  hai,  to  dikh- 
iawe,  ta  ki  use  pakar  len. 

XII  BA'B. 

PHIR  Tisu'  fasah  ae  cblia  iro:  Age 
Bait'aniyA  men,  jahan  I-a'iv/.nr 
tha,  jo  miiA  tha,  aur  ji«c  us  ne  murduu 
TLiL-n  h  iitliiiya  tha,  iya. 

2  Wfthftn  unhon  ne  M  ke  liyo  ziyA- 
fnt  ki ;  aur  Martili"  khidmat  karti  thi ; 
]wir  l.a'azar  ek  UB  men  St)  tha  jo  ua  ke 
sath  khAne  baithe'the. 

3  Tab  Mariyam  ne  Adh  aer  khAlis 
Alir  qimati  jatamAsi  ka  'itr  lekar  V 
ke  pAnwon  |>ar  mala,  aur  apu  e   balon 
ko  ua  ko  i>Anw  ponehhe ;  aur  ghi 
ki  bii  «e  bhar  Raya  thA. 

4  Tab  Yuluidali  Iskariyiiti  i" 
Shama'un  ka  beta,  aur  us  ke  shAgirdon 
men  se  ek  tha,  jo  uso  pakarwAyA 
chAhtA  tha,  kahA,  ki 

5  Yih  'itr  tiu  aau  dinAr  ko  kyun  na 
becha  gaya,  aur  muhtajou  ko  na  diyA 
gaya? 

(i  Us  neyih  naia  liyokabA.ki  muh- 
t/ijon  ki  kuchh  likr  kartft  tha,  p:ir  U 
liye  ki  wuh  obor  tha,  aur  thailA  sath 
rakhta  tha,  aur  jo  kuchh  us  men  parta 
tha,  utha  letA  tha. 

7  Tab  Visi'i1  u  kahA,  ki  Use  chhi  _ 
de,  ki  us  ne  yih  mere  kafan  dafan  ke 
din  ke  liye  rak  ha  tha. 

8  Kynnki  muhtaj  bamesha  tum- 
hare  «alh  rahte;  par  main  hamesha 
i  umbari'  sal  h 

9  Aur  Yahuuion  ke  bahut  log  jan 
gaye  ki  wuh  wahAn  hai,  aur  we  Ae,  na 
siri'  YwiV  ke  sabab,  baiki  is  liye  bhi 

1ST 


11  Kyurjki  ua  ke  sabab  ae  bahut 
Yahudi  phir  jAte,  aur  Yisi'i'  par  Emfia 
lAto  the. 

12  1  IWsre  roz  bahut  log,  jo  'id 
men  ae  the,  yih  suuke  ki  Yisu'  Yard- 
aalam  men  Ati  hai, 

13  Khajur  ke  darakhton  ki  ddlidn 
lifl,  aur  ua  ke  istiqbft'l    ko  niklc,  aur 

ikAre,  Ilosh'anna:  MubArok  wuh  jo 
Kjtudftmod  ke  nAm  sc  AtA  hai,  L-rAid 
ka  llft-ishAh. 

14  Aur  Yisii'  ek  sadhi  ki  bachcha 
pAkar  ub  par  aawAr  liiid;  jaisA  ki  li- 
klui  hai, 

15  Ai  Saihtiii  ki  Iieti,  mat  dar ; 
dckh,  ut»  Btojb&h  gadhi  ke  bachche 
par  aawAr  hokc  AtA  hai. 

1(1  Ub  ke  shAgird  pahle  ye  bAten  na 
samjhe  ;  lekin  jab  YisiV  apnejalaTkn 
pahunchA,  tab  unhon  ne  yAd  kiyii  ki 
ye  bAten  us  ke  ha.|q  men  likhi  thin,  aur 
yih,  ki  unhon  ne  tisi  su  yiii  suluk  kiyi. 

17  Tab  un  logon  ne  jo  us  ku  sath 
the,  jia  waqt  us  ub  La'aaar  ko  rjabr  se 
bahar  bulAyA  aur  murdi>Q  rncn  se 
uthAyA  tha,  gawAhi  di. 

18  la  bA'is  wuh  bhir  ua  ke  isttnliAl 
ko  nikli,  kyi'mki  unlion  ne  buiiA  ki  us 
ne  yih  nni'ajka  dikhlayA. 

IH  Tab  l''arisiori  no  A]>aa  int--n  kaha, 
Tum  dckhte  ho  ki  tum  Be  kuchh  ban 
uahin  partA?  Dekho,  ki  ek  'Alam  us 
ka  pairau  ho  chalA. 

20  1  Aur  un  ke  darmiyAn,  jo  'id 
men  parastish  kanie  Ae  the,  bi'/.c 
Yi'uiAiit  the. 

21  Wc  FailbuB  ke  pa>,  jo  BaitsaidA 
e  Jaili  kA  tbA,  Ae,  aur  us  se  'arz  ki,  aur 
kahA,  ki  Ai  sAhib,  ham  chAhte  hajn,  ki 
Yiail'  ko  dekliun. 

22  Failbna  ne  Ake  AndryAs  se  kaha  : 
aur  phir  Andryaa  aur  Failbda  ne  Ywii' 
ko  khnbar  di. 


ifasih  ki  nhikdi/ut 

23  %  Yisfi'  ne  unhcn  jawab  d  iya, 
aur  kahA,  ki  Wacit  Ayd  ki  Ibu  i  A'dam 
jalai  pAwe, 

21  Main  tum  se  wieh  sach  kahtA 
Iii'lii,  ki  Gehuii  ka  dana,  agar  zamiu 
men  girkc  mar  n»  jAwe,  to  akela  rahta 
hai ;  par  agar  wuh  mare,  to  bahutsd 
phaJ  lata  hai. 

25  Jo  aimi  jan  kfl  "ada  rakhtd  hai, 
use  khoegA;  aur  wvili,  jo  i.-*  jahdu  men 
apni  jjiu  se  'adawat  rakhta  bal,  DM 
hamesha  ki  ziudagi  ke  liye  mahfuz 
rakhega. 

26  Agar  koi  meri  khidmat  kare,  to 
cliahiyu  ki  wuh  meri  patrauf  kare  j  aur 
jibjagah  main  hiin,  meri  khddim  bhi 
wuliin  hogd:  agar  koi  meri  khidmat 
kare,  to  liiiji  uh  ki  'izzat  karogd. 

27  Ab  meri  jati  ghtibrdti  hai;  aur 
main  kya  kahon  ?  ki  Ai  Kap,  mujhe 
is  ghari  «e  bacha?  lekio  main  to  Lsf 
ghari  ke  liye  aya  hog. 

28  Ai  Bap,  apne  nam  ko  jalai 
bakhsh.  Wuijhiii  asmdn  «u  awiiz  ai,  ki 
Main  ne  jalai  bakhahA  hai,  aur  phir 
jalai  bakhshdgga. 

29  Tab  logoti  ne,  jo  khare  the,  yili 
suuke  kaha,  ki  Uada'l  garjt :  auron  ne 
kaha,  ki  Kirislita  us  ae  bola, 

uO  Yisii'  ue  jawab  diya,  aur  kaha, 
ki  Yih  away,  mere  waste  uahiij,  baiki 
tumhare  liye  ai. 

:'l  Ab  U  dnnyd  par  hukm  hotA 
hai :  ab  ih  duuya  ka  sardar  nikal  dfyA 
jaega. 

32  Aur  main  jo  liilij,  agar  zamin  se 
lipar  uthdya  jalin,  Lo  Bab  ko  apne  pas 
kliinchiingi. 

33  Vs"  uo  yih  kahke  pati  iliya,  ki 
wuh  Via  maut  so  marue  par  hai. 


YU'IIAXNA',  XII.  b'  log  iman  nahiv  hit*  fli 
■ai.  Jab  tak  ki  n  i';  r  tumhare  pas  hai, 
:halo,  na  ho  ki  tariki  tumben  jA  pak  re ; 
aur  wuh  jo  andhere  men  ehaliA  hai, 
naliiy  jan'la  ki  kUliar  jati  hal, 

36  Jab  tak  nur  tatahan  paa  lini. 
nur  par  iniAn  liio,  ta  ki  tuiu  nur  ke 
fanand  ho.     Yisu1  ne  yih  liAtim  kah- 

,aur  jake  apue  la.in  un  se  eliliip:i>  :i. 

37  ^  Aur  agarchi  us  ne  un  ke  ni 
ba  rii  itne  mu'ajize  dikhac,  par  wc  tik 
par  iman  na  Ide  : 

38  Ta-  ki  Yas'aiydh  nabi  U  kalam, 
jo  us  ne  kaba,  pura  howe,  ki  Ai  Khu- 
diwand,  hamArc  paigain  ko  kis  ne 
y»qin  kiya  hai?  aur  Khudawand  ka 
bau  kis  pai  zAhir  hua  hai? 

89  ls  liye  we  imdn  na  la  saken,  ki 
Yas'aivah  m;  phir  kaha, 

40  Ub  ne  un  ki  ankheg  andhi  km, 
aur  un  ke  dil  sakht  kiye  hain,  ta  ua 
ho  ki  wc  ankhon  ee  dekhen,  aur  dil  «t 
ttatnjiieii,  aur  rujiV  lAwen,  aur  main 
unhcn  changA  karun. 

41  Yas'aiyah  nc  yih  farmayd  ihA, 
jab  us  ke  jalAl  ko  dekha,  aiu-  uh  ki  ba- 
bat biton  kiii. 

42  ^  Hawujiid  us  ke  sardAron  meri 
so  bhi  bahut  us  par  imdn  Ide;  magar 
Kaiisiuii  kr  1>:l'ls  niilmit  iur  iijrar  ua 
kiyA,  na  ho  ki  'ibadatkhane  sk  khAiij 
kiye  jAerj. 

43  Kycnki  we  us  buKurgi  ko,  jo 
insan  se  bot:,  us  buzurgi  se,  jo  Khiuiii 

toraf  se   huti,   ziydda  'aziz  janre 


34  Logon  ne  us  sejawab  mon  kahd,'  mere  bhej ii«wdl«  ko  dokhld  hai. 


Ham  ne  shari'at  se  suni  hai  ki  Masih 
alwd  tak  rahegd :  phir  tii  kynnkar 
k  ihta  hai,  ki  Zarui  hai  ki  Ibn  i  A'dam 
uthAya  jieV  yih  Ibu  i  A'dam  kaun 
hai? 

36  Tab  VihiVuoiuiheij  kaha,kiNiir 
tlmri  aur  dcr  tak  tumhare  darniiydn 
'     138 


the. 

44  %  Yisii'  ne  pukArkc  kabd,  Wuh 
jo  itiujii  pai  iman  lata  hai.  tnujh  par 
nahiii,  baiki  us  par  jisne  mujhe  bheja, 
iuiAn  lata  hai. 

46  Aur  wuh  jo  niujli?  dekhtl   hai, 


46  Main  jahAn  men  bui  hoke  dyd 
hiin,  tA  ki  jo  koi  mujh  par  iman  lawe, 
ainllnT«  men  na  rahe. 

47  Aur  ai;ar  koi  shakhs  meri  bateij 
,-iuiL',  aur  iman  ua  ldwe,  to  main  us 
par  hukm  naliin  kartd;  kyfnjki  trtalg 
is  liye  nahiii  Ayd,  ki  jahdn  par  hukm 


.Vmili  msilan  ke  sikhlata.   YITHAN'STA',  XIII. 

karun,  baiki  ib  liye  ki  jahan  ko  back- 


ki  wf'irotani  hiren. 
9  Shama'i'm  l'atrus  no  us  se  kahd, 
ki  Ai  Khudawand,  sirf  mere  pinw  na- 
radd  kar  detd.jhin,  baiki  hath  aur  sir  h\\\. 

'     10  Yisri"  ne  u»  30   kaha,  W  uh  Jo 


kuna, 


4ti  Wuh  jo  mujh 
aur  men  bdtug  ko  quiml  mili 

«w  ko  liye  ek  liukiu  karnewala  hai : nuhl.iya  gayahai,  siwa  panwdhoneke 
j  ih'un,  jo  main  ne  kaha  hai,  wuhi  us'muhtaj  tubin,  baiki  sarasar  pak  hai: 


ko  pichhle  din  gunahgdr  thabriegi. 

4y  Kyiiyki  main  nc  to  iip  se  nahir. 
kaki,  bailkr  Bdp  ne  jis  ne  mujhe  bheja 
mujhe  fanmln  diyd,  ki  main  kya  bol- 
i.n,  aur  main  kya  kalu'm. 

60  Aur  mam  jinta  hun  ki  us  ka 
fitnnan  hamesiia  ki  ziudairi  hai:  pas 
fa  kuchh  ki  main  kahta  hiin,  jis  tarah 
Bdp  ne  mujhe  kaha,  usi  tarah  kahta 
nun. 

XIII  BA'B, 
J  T'D  i  fasah  se  pahlc,  jab  ki  Yisu'  ne 
J_  jiiia  ki  mera  waqt  a  pakumoU 
hai,  kl  is  jahan  se  Bap  pas  jdun, 
jaisa  wuh  ags  apnon  ku  jo  dunyi  men 
the  piyar  knrta  iba,  waisa  hi  akhir  tak 
piyar  karta  rahd. 

H  Aur  jab  ijbiim  ka  khani  chund 
gaya  thd,  ie  liye  ki  Skutati  ne  Shama- 
lin  ke  beto  Yahiidab  I.-kariyiiti  ke  dil 
men  dald  th.i.  k  i  om  pakafwac 

3  Tisu' yib  jankar  ki  Uap  H  sah 
ebi  zen  mere  hatkoti  men  din,  aur  main 
Khudd  ke  pas  se  aya,  aur  Khuda  ke 
pas  jati  hiin, 

4  Klian*.'  M  ufha,  aur  apne  kapn 
Uar  rakh»,  aur  rumal  h:  k  w  apnl  kamar 
men  bandha, 

5  Ba'd  us  ke  ek  bdsan   men  pani 

iv  shdgirdon  ke  pdnw  dhoni\ 
aur  08  rumal  se  jo  kamar  men  bandha 
tha,  ponchhne  lagi. 

i:  l'iiir  wuh  Slumia'un  Fatrus  tak 
aya :  tab  us  u  iu  se  kaha,  Ai  Khuda- 
wand,  tu  mere  panw  dhotd  hal  ( 

7  Yisu'  nu  jawab  men  us  se  kaha, 
Jd  ki  mam  karta  hiiii,  ab  tti  nahin 
janta,  par  ba'd  us  ke  jdnegd. 

8  Patri  is  ne  us  se  kaha,  ki  A'prnere 
paijw  kabhi  na  dhowen.    Timi' 
jawab  diya,  Aiiar  iii:inj  tujhe  oa  i 
to  mew  tath  tura  hissa  na  liogi 

139 


tum  pak  ha,  lekin  aab  naliii_ 
1L  Kyiinki  wuh  to  apnc  pakar wane- 

wale  k«  jauta  tha,  is  liyu  us  ne  kaha, 

Tum  sah  pak  nahin  ko. 

"  '  Jab  wuh  un  ko  panw  dho  chuka 

thd,  aur    apne    kapre    liye.    the,    plii: 

hait.likar  uulu-n  tim,  A'ya  tum  jante 

ho  ki  main  ne  tum  se  kyd  kiya  '! 

mujhe  Uetid,  aur  Khiuhi- 

wand,  kaha  karte  bo :  tum  khub  kahte 

ho,  kyiinki  main  hiin. 

14  l'asjabki  uuijh  Khndawund  aur 
Ustid  ne  tumhdris  panw  dhoo,  to  tiiui- 
hen  bhi  lazim  hai  ki  ek  dte<  ku 
panw  dboo. 

15  Is  liye  main  no  tumben  ek  na- 
muna  diyd  hai,  ta  ki  jaisa  main  ne 
tum  se  kiya,  tum  bhi  karo. 

1G  Main  tum  se  sach  sach  kahtd 
hun,  ki  Naukar  apne  li.pi  so  bar.i  na- 
hin, aur  ua  wuh  jo  hhcja  gaya"  hai,  apne 
hhejnoivale  ^'. 

17  Agar  tum  yih  haten  samajbte, 
aur  un  [«r  'amal  karte  ho,  to  mubarak 
ho. 

18  \  Main  tum  sah  ki  babat  nabin 
kahta  ;  main  jauta  hiin  jiaiwjj  niain 
ne  chund  hai :  lekin  yih  nota  ta  ki 
nawishta  pura  howe,  Us  no  jo  mere 
Nath  roti  khati  hai,  mujh  par  latutbii 
hai. 

19  Ab  main  tum  se  is  ke  waipi'  hone 
sopahle  kahta  hi'iu,  ki  jah  wuh  wuqu' 
mi.ii  awi',  to  tum  iman  lao  ki  main  hi 
hiin. 

'10  Main  tum  se  aach  sach  kahta 
lniij,  Wuk  jo  us  ko  jise  main  bhejta 
hiin  etftbdl  karti  hai,  mujhe  qabul 
karr.i  liai ;  aur  wuh  jo  mujhe  qabul 
iisu  karta  liai,  UB«,  jis  ne  mujhe  bheja, 
i,  ijabul  kartd  hai. 
|     21  Yisu'yun  kahks  dil  men  ghab- 


Mntih  khtibnr  (fafii 
raya,  aur  gawati!  dcke  bola.  Main  tum 
m  sach  sach  kahta  lilin,  ki  Bk  ttOO 
uien  se  mujhe  pakurwnoga. 

22  Tali  shagird  sini  b  h  a  mnj  hoke 
ki  us  ne  kiw  ki  babat  kaha,  ek  dusre  ko 
dekhne  lnjr.e. 

23  Aur  uh  ke  shafiirdon  merj  se  ek, 
jiso  Yisu'  piyar  karri  tha,  Yisu'  ki 
<lihii1i  ki  taraf  jliukii  hua  kliau.*  iiiru 
ahatuil  t liii. 

24  Tab  Shama'un  Pafcrua  ne  use 
ishara  kiya,  ki  daryaft  kare  ki  wuh, 
jia  ki  babat  uh  ne  kaha,  kami  hai. 

25  'Jab  us  ne  Yisu'  ke  simi  ki  turi 
ziyada  jhukke  m  se  kaha,  Ai  KhmhL- 
waiid,  wuh  feaun  hai  V 

2ti  Yisii1  ue  jawab  diya,  Jise  main 
niwdlc  ko  tar  karke  deta  hfin,  wuhi 
hai.  P)iir  us  ne  niwala  tar  karke 
Hbaina'iin  ke  bete  Yahiidah  Iskariyut.i 
ko  diya. 

27  Aur  ba'd  us  niwala  ke  Shaitan 
uh  men  samaya.  Tab  Yisu'  ne  une 
kaha,  Jo  kuchh  ki  tii  karta  hai,  jald 
kar. 

28  Par  un  men  hc,  jo  khane  baithe 
the,  kisi  m  na  jana  ki  yih  ua  no  use 
kis  liye  kaha. 

20  Kyfinki  bnV.nn  ne  guman  kiya, 
ki  is  liye  ki  Yahfidah  ke  pas  thaili 
ilii,  ki  Yisu'  use  yih  kahta  tha,  ki  Jo 
ham  ku  'id  ke  liye  darkar  hai,  mol 
le;  ya  yih,  ki  muhtajon  kokuohh  do. 

30  Pas  wuh  niwaLa  lekar  tilfaiir 
nikla;  aur  riit  tlii. 

31  1  Jab  wuh  ehala  gaya,  Yibu' 
ne  kaha,  ki  Ab  Ibn  i  A 'dam  ne  jalai 
paya,  aur  Khuda  M  uh  ke  ba'is  jalai 
paya. 

32  Agar  Khuda  ne  uh  se  jalai  paya 
ho,  tu  Khuda  use  bbi  apno  se  jalai 
dega,  aur  use  filfnur  jalai  desa. 

33  Ai  bachcho,  main  thori  dor  tak 
tumharesath  hun.  Tum  niujln'  iUiuu- 
dhogo,  aur  joisa Iti  main  ne  Yalnidimi 
se  kaha,  ki  Jalian  main  jiit.a  hun,  tuvn 
nahin  a  sakte,  waisa  ab  main  tumben 
bbi  kahta  hrin. 

140 


YI.'llANNA',  XIV.      H  ia»i 


use  paharw&tgA, 

31  Main  turuhen  ek  naya  huktn  deta 
h  (S  n,  ki  Tum  ek  diisre  «e  rauhabfaal 
rakho;  jaisa  main  ne  tiira  ae  nnbabtat 
rakiii,  aiso  bi  tura  bhi  ek  dusre  se 
muhabbat  rakho. 

35  la  se  Bab  janerjgo  ki  tum  mere 
ibigird  ]i",:i.:;ir  Lumapasmen  muhab- 
bat  rakho. 

36  %  ShnmaMn  Patrua  no  us  se 
kaha,  Ai  Khiidawand,  tii  kahan  jata 
hai  ?  Yisu'  ne  use  jawab  diya,  Jahan 
main  jata  Imn,  tii  ab  meru  piehbe  a 
nahin  sakti ;  par  agc  ko  mere  piehbe 
awega, 

37  PatruB  ne  use  kaha,  Ai  Kfiuda- 
wand,  main  tere  piehbe  kyi'm  ab  nahin 
'  aakla  ?  main  tere  liye  apni  jan  diiuga. 

38  Yisii'  ne  use  jawab  diya,  K  ya  tfi 
mere  liye  apni  jan  degi?  Main  tum  se 
sach  sach  krahtt  buri.  ki  Murg  bang  na 
depa,  jab  tak  ki  td  tin  martaba  intrii 
inkar  na  kare. 

XIV  BA'B. 

TUMHA'RA'dil  na  ghabrawc:  tum 
Kbuda  par  fmaii  late  ho,  mujh 
par  bhi  imanlao. 

2  Mere  Hap  ko  ghar  men  bahut 
makan  hain:  nahin  to,  mnin  tumhen 
kahta.  Main  jata  hun,  ta  ki  tumharo 
liye  jagali  taiyar  kariin, 

3  Aur  jia  hal  ki  main  jata,  aur 
tumeare  liyo  jagAh  taiyar  karta,  to 
phir  aiinga,  aur  tumheg  apno  tath 
liinga,  tji  ki  jalniij  main  ht'in,  tum  bbi 
h  oo. 

4  Aur  jahan  main  jati  hiin,  tum 
jante  ho,  aur  rah  bhi  jdnte  ho. 

5  Thnma  ne  use  kaha,  Ai  KhmU- 
wand,  ham  nahin  jante  ki  trt  kahan 
jata  hai ;  aur  hari  kyi'mkar  us  rah  ko 
jan  sikon? 

(i  Yisu1  ne  U»e  kaha,  Eah,  aur  hai]q, 
aur  Kindagi  main  hiin ;  koi  bagair 
men  wasile  Dap  ke  pa»  a  nahin  aakta 
bot 

7  Agar  tum  mujhe  jante,  to  mere 
litip  ko  bhi  jante  ;  aur  ab  se  tum  uau 
jrintt!  ho,  aur  use  dekhahai. 


iTaa&t.  Jltih  ke 


YU'HANNA',  XIV.  bhejne  U  wa'da  karta. 


8  Pftilbi'w  ne  asa  kaili,  Ai  Khuda- 
wand,  Uap  ko  hamen  dtkhla,  ki  hainen 

kafi  1,:U. 

y  YisiV  ne  ufc  kabA,  Ai  Failbus, 
main  itnl  muddat  se  tumhare  sAth 
hiin,  aur  tu  ne  mujhe  na  janaV  fi(  ne 
mujhe  dekhA  hai,  «ia  no  BAp  ko  deklia 
hai ;  aur  tu  kynnkar  kahta  hai,  ki  BAp 
ko  ham  e  n  dikhlA? 

lO  K  ya  tu  yaqiu  Dan  i  n  kartl  ki 
mairi  Uap  men  hun,  aur  Bap  mujh  men 
hai  ?  yib  bAten  jo  main  tumben  kahta 
);iin,  main  Ap  Ke  nahiri  kahta;  lckin 
I'pl'lii,  jo  iiuijh  men  rahta  liai,  wah  yo 
kiitn  harta  hai. 

]  I  Mari  bat  yaqin  karo,  ki  main 
Uap  men  hun,  aur  Ban  mujh  men  hai; 
uuniahiii  u>,  in  kiiuiuii  ke  suilab  mujh 
par  iman  lio. 

12  Main  timi  m  sach  aach  kahta 
hun,  ki  jo  mujh  par  iman  lAtA  hai,  ye 
kain,  jo  main  kartU  hun,  wuh  bhi 
karegi,  aur  to  se  bhi  bare  kain  karena ; 
V.  v  iijki  main  apne  Bap  paa  jati 
hnn. 

I  :t  Aur  jo  kuchh  tum  mere  nAm  sc 
BUEngpge,  main  wuhi  kartinga,  ta  ki 
liap  Bete  men  jalai  pAwe. 

1 4  Agar  tum  roera  nant  se  kuchh 
maugo^e,  to  main  wulii  karun  ga. 

15  %  Agar  tum  tUBJhe  piyar  karte 
ho,  to  mere  hukmon,  par  'amal  karo. 

16  Aur  main  npue  liap  si:  darkhwast 
kaningA,  aur  wuh  tunihen  diisra  Ta- 
salli-denuwAla  bakhnhega,  ki  hame- 
sha  tumhare  mlI.Ii  rain: ; 

17  Ya'ue,  Kiih  i  Haqq>  jise  dunya 
hasil  nahiji  kar  saku',  kyiiuki  use  na 
dekhti  hai,  aur  na  use  jAnti  hai ;  lckin 
nun  uscjantohu,  kyi'iiiki  wuh  tumhare 
tath  nihti  hai,  aur  tum  ineti  huwegi. 

18  Main  tumben  yatim  na  chhor- 
iijitta:  main  ttmiiniro  |i;U  Alingi. 

19  Ab  tliorider  hai  ki  dnnyi  mujhe 
phir  nadekhegi;  par  tuuituiijiu-dflilito 
ho,  nur  is  liye  ki  uuiii  jitA  hun,  tum 
Lhi  jioge. 

20  u«  «'z  tum  jAnogo  k  main  Bap 

m 


men,  aur  tum  mujh  men,  aur  main  tum 
wm  htm. 

21  Jis  pas  mere  alikim  hain,  aur 
wuh  un  par  'amal  karta  hai,  wuhi 
mujh  se  ninliabbat  rakhti  hai;  aur 
wuh  jo  mujh  se  niuhabbat  rakhti  hai, 
mere  Bap  kA  piyArA  boga,  aur  main 
use  piyar  karuugA,  aur  apno  ta,in  m 
par  zaJiir  karunia. 

83  YaluidAli  ne,  na  wuli  jo  Iska- 
riyutf  thA,  use  kabA,  Ai  KhudAwand, 
yib  kytinkar  hai,  ki  tu  Ap  ko  ham  par 
zihir  kiyA  chAiita,  aur  dunyA  par  na- 
bi ij  ? 

23  Yibu'  im  jawAb  mim  use  kaha, 
Agar  koi  mujhe  piyar  karta  hai,  wuh 
mere  kalAui  par  'amal  karegA,  aur 
mera  Baip  uae  piyar  karuga,  aur  ham 

;  pAs  awenge,  aur  UI  keutb  rali:ngi-. 

'M  Jo  mujhe  piyar  nahin  karta,  nmre 
kalAm  par  'amal  nabin  karta;  aur  yih 
kalam,  jo  tum  suute  ho,  merA  Dahin, 
baiki  BAp  kA  hai,  jia  tie  mujhe  bhejA 
hai. 

25  Main.  no  yih  battn,  tumhare  sAth 
hote  biie,  tum  bg  kabin. 

26  Lekin  wuh  Taaaili-dmawfSi,  jo 
Riih  i  Quda  hai,  jise  BAp  meru  mim.  be 
bbejegi,  wuhi  tumhen  sab  chineti  sikb- 
lAwegA,  aur  «ah  bAten,  jo   kuchh  kl 

ne  tutnhetj  kuhi  hain,  tumben. 
j$i  dilAwega. 

17  SalAoi  tum  logog  ke  liye  chbor- 
ke  jita  lnin  ;  apiti  saiamati  main  tum- 
ben dota  hiin ;  na  jis  tarah  so  ki  dunyA 
deti  hai,  maifl  tuothen  deta  htin. 
TumhiirA  dil  na  ghabrae,  aur  na  dam. 

28  Timi  sua  chuke  ho  ki  main  ne 
tum  ko  kahA,  ki  Main  jdtd  hun,  uur 
tum  pAa  phir  Ata  htin.  Agar  tum 
nuijhe  piyAr  karto,  to  tum  mere  is 
kahne  se,  ki  Main  BAp  pAs  jAta  bdn, 
klmah  hoto;  kyiinki  mera  Bap  mujh 
so  bani  hai. 

i'»  Aur  ah  main  ne  tumben  U8  ko 
wiqi'  hone  ho  peshtar  kaba,  ta  ki  jab 
wuh  wnqA'  men  Awe,  to  tum  imAn  lau. 

30  Ba'd  ia  ke  main  tuai  6e  bahut 


Shaijirdon  ko  Metrik  mrn       YU'HAN 

kalfuri  im  karringd;  is  liye  ki  is  jahdn 
kd  sarddr  dtd  hai,  nur  mujh  meri  iis  ki 
kol  ebiz  nahin. 

31  Lekin  is  UhAK  se  ki  dunyd  jdne 
ki  main  Bdp  se  muhamiat  rakhtd  lilin, 
jis  tarah  BAp  ne  mujhe  farnid  diyd, 
main  waisd  hi  karUi  hun.  Utho, 
vahdn  sechaleri. 

XV  BA'B. 

MAIN    eachche  Wg&t  kd  darakht. 
ht'nj.  aur  im-rd  l'>dp  brtgbdn  bui. 

2  Jo  da.li  mujh  nien  mewa  nahin 
ldti,  wuh'  uae  obbdnt  ddltd  hii:  nur 
bar  ek  jo  mewa  lali,  wuh  un  (if  kar- 
td  hai,  td  ki  wuh  siiydda  mewa  lawe. 

3  Ab  tum  ua  kaldm  k«  wabah,  jo 
main  ne  tumben  kahd,  pak  Inie. 

i  Mujh  men  qdiin  DO,  aur  main 
tum  men.  Jin  tarah  ki  ddli  Ap  au 
mewa  nahin  Id  Bakti,  magar  jab  ki 
wuh  angtir  ke  darakht  men  ipiiin  ho, 
usi  tarah  lum  bhi  nuhiij,  inagar  jab  ki 
mujh  men  qdim  ho. 

5  Angur  kd  darakht  main  Ini  n,  tum 
dAlidn  ho:  wuh  jo  mujh  rnen  tjiim 
hotd  hai,  aur  main  ua  men,  wuhi  ba- 
hut  mewa  Idtd  hai;  kyi'mki  mujh  n 
juda  tum  kuchh  nahin  kar  aakte. 

6  Agar  koi  mujh  mag  qdim  na  ho, 
to  wuh"  ddli  ki  tarah  phenk  diyd  jdta, 
aur  siikh  jdtd  hai,  aur  log  unherj  ba- 
turte  hain,  aur  Ag  raeg  jlmukie  kain, 
aur  »8  jal  jati  hain. 

7  Agar  tum.  mujh  men  qdim,  aur 
meri  hdten  tum  men  qaim  howen,  to 
jo  chdhoge,  mdngoge,  aur  tumhdre  liye 
wuhi  hogA. 

8  Kere  Bdp  kd  jahil  isi  se  hai,  ki 
tum  bahut  mewa  lio,  m  tum  mere 
shajjird  boge. 

9  Jftisd  Bdp  ne  mujhe  piyiir  kiyd, 
waisd  bi  mitiij  m-  tumben  piy&l  h  Ij  i  ; 
tum  meri  muhnbbat  men  adbit  raho. 

10  Agar  tum  mere  hukmon  jiar 
'amal  karo,  to  tum  meri  Bttuhabbat 
men  qdim  hoge,  jaisd  ki  main  ne  apne 
Bip  K«  bukumu  par  'amal  kiyd,  am- 
is ki  muhabbat  men  q4im  lnm. 

142 


NA',  XV.    Blidmil  hotie  h  vnk  anjam. 

11  Main  ne  yih  bdten  tumben  ka- 
hin,  td  ki  meri  kbushi  tum  men  haul 
rahe,  aur  tumhdri  khushi  kdmil  ho. 

12  Merd  hukm  yih  hai,  ki  Jalai 
main  no  tumhen  piydr  kiyd  hai,  tum 
bhi  ek  Uilere  ko  piydr  karo. 

13  Kol  ehakhs  us  se  ziydda  mu- 
halilmt  nabi  n  kartd,  ki  apui  jdn  apne 
doston  ke  liye  de. 

14  Jo  kuchh  ki  main  ne  tumben 
farmdyd,  agar  tum  karo,  to  mere  dost 
ho. 

lf>  Ba'd  is  ke  main  tumhen  khadim 
uh  kab'iiigA,  kyitnki  kbdditu  nahin 
jatitA  ki  u»  kd  kbudawand  kyi  kartA 
hai :  baiki  main  ne  tumhen  doat  kahd 
hai,  ki  Bab  bdten,  jo  main  ne  apne  Bdp 
se  suni  hain,  main  ne  tumben  batldiii. 

16  Tum  no  mujhe  nahin  cbund  hai, 
baiki  main  ne  tumben  <;himi  hai,  aur 
tumheij  muqarrar  kiyd  hai,  ki  tum  jdo, 
aur  DMWB  lao,  aur  tuiulidia  mewa  bdqi 
rahe ;  td  ki  tum  merd  mim  leke  jo 
kiiehh  Bdp  se  mdngo,  wuh  tumhen 
dewe. 

17  Main  r.umben  yih  hdten,  farmdta 
luin,  ki  Tum  ek  iliisru  ko  piydr  karo. 

18  Agar  dunyd  tum  bc  du^hmani 
kartl  hai,  to  tum  jdnto  ho  ki  ub  no 
tum  se  age  mujh  M  duHhmuni  kl. 

Y.)  Agar  tum  dunyd  ke  hote,  to 
dnuyd  unog  ko  piydr  karli:  leklo 
is  liye  ki  tum  dunyd  ke  nahin,  baiki 
main  ne  tumhen  dunyd  ee  chunke  juda 
kiyd  bai,  is  wdMto  dimyd  tum  60  dusb- 
mani  k  u  r  t  i  hai. 

20  Uh  bit  ko  jo  main  ne  tum  se 
kahi,  yrtd  karo,  ki  Naukar  apne  kbd- 
wind  M  bari  imbiij.  Jab  unhon  ne 
mujhe  satdya,  tn  m  tumberi  bhi  «atd- 
vMmm ;  agaf  unhon  ne  mere  k:iLuu 
ko  mand  hai,  to  wo  tumhdrd  bhi  md- 
neage. 

'41  Lekin  yih  sih  knehb  mere  ndm 
ke  sahab  tum  se  karenge,  kynuki  we 
uae,  jiK  uo  mujlie  bbi-ja  bai,  ualiiu 
jan  t  e. 

'S2  Agar  main  na  aya  hotd,  aur  uu- 


Ut  tiis-tUi  ki  babat  jo  Ruhse  YU'HANJTA',  XVI.  0 Masili  m  honewali  (M. 
hen  nakahta.toun  kagunah  nahula:  jf&lda  hai:  kyiiiiki  a^ar  main  najAi'ir, 
lek~i»  ab  uii  pas  ua  ku  gunah  ka  'uzr  to  Tasalli-denewala  mm  pas  na  awega ; 
nahin.  par  agar  main  jiiuo,  U>  main  use  tum 


2<fWuh  jo  mujh  bo 'adawat  karta 
hai,  mere  Uap  m  bhi  'adiiwat  karta 
hai. 

r  main  un  ke  bich  men  ye 
kain,  Jl-  kisi  iltisru  M  nahin  kiyr,  na 
kiye  hota,  10  un  ka  gunah  na  nota; 
par  ab  to  utihon  ne  riekha,  aur  mujh 
seaur  inere  Jiap  po  dushmaui  ki. 

26  l:''kin  yih  hiia,  tak  i  wuh  kalam 
j.i  mi  ki  sh:ii-i\il  iiii'n  likha  hai,  ki 
IJulion  ne  mujh  au  be-sabab  dushmani 
ki,  pura  lio. 

26  Par  jabki  wuh'l'asalli  denewala, 
jisc  main  tumhare  liye  Dap  ki  taraf 
sebhi'jun^A.ya'ue,  lluh  i  Kami,  j"  Map 
Mi  nikalli"  hai,  iwe,  to  wuh  mere  liyo 
gawihi  degfc- 

27  Aur'tmn  bW  gftWfhl  dofO,  ky- 
uiiki  timi  Kburii'  se  mere  si  ih  ho. 

XVI  BA'B. 

MAIN  ne  ye  baten  tumben  kabin. 
ta  ki  tum  thokar  na  khao. 

2  We  tum  k  o  'ibatiatkhar.uri  ne  ni- 
kal  dejge;  baiki  wuh  ghari  ati  hai, 
ki  jo  koi  tumhen  qatl  karc,  gumau 
kari'^a  ki  main  Khudd  ki  bundagi 
baji  lata  hun. 

3  Aur  luin  se  aisa  suluk  is  liyo  kar- 
ou^f.-,  ki  uuhon  ne  na.  Bdp  ko  jaua,  na 
iiiujbo. 

4  Aur  main  ne  yih  batinj  lum 
kabin,  ta  ki  jab  wuh  waqt  awe,  to  tum 
yad  k*ro  ki  main  ne  turn  H  kabin  : 
aur  main  ne  shun'i'  iiimj  ye  baten  tum- 
ben na  kabin,  kyiinki  main  tumhdre 
sath  i  ha. 

5  Lekin  ab  main  uh  pas, 
mujhu  bheja,  jata  hun  ;  aur  tum  men 
U  k"i  mujh  se  nahin  puchhta,  ki  Tu 
kabag  jiita  hai? 

G  Baiki  ia  liye  ki  main  ne  ye  baten 
!   iliin,  tum  hara  ilil  gamsebhar 


pas  bhej  diinga, 

a  Aur  wuh  takar  dunyi  ko  gundh 
Ke,  aur  t&ttf  «c,  aur  'adiilat  se,  taqsirwar 
tliahraoga: 

0  Gundh  ao,  ia  liye  ki  we  mujh  par 
iman  nahin,  Ide; 

10  Basti  se,  is  liyo  ki  main  apne 
Bap  pas  jata  hun,  aur  tum  mujhe  phir 
na  dekhoge; 

1  [  Ailalat  m\  ia  liye  ki  is  jahan  ke 
nrdil  par  hukm  kiyilgaya  hai. 

""eri  aur  bahut  mi  baten  hain,  ki 
main  tumben  kaln'ai,  par  ab  tum  uu 
ki  bardashl  itahin  kar  sakte. 

L8  Uikin  jab  wuh,  ya'ue,  Riih  i 
Haqq  awe,  to  wuh  tum  ko  siri  sachai 
ki  rali  batawegi;  is  liye  ki  wuh  apnl 

kahegi  ;  lekin  jo  kuehh  wuh  sunegi, 
ao  kahegi ;  aur  tuinhen  ayaude  ki  kha- 
baren  d>-gi. 

14  Wuh  ineri  buzurgi  karegi ;  is  liye 
ki  wuh  mori  chizon  men  »c  pawegi, 
aur  tumhen  dikluiwf^i. 

15  8ab  cbizeri,  jo  Bap  ki  hain,  meri 
hain  :  ia  liye  main  ne  kaha,  ki  wuh 
mori  chiitot)  men  se  legi,  aur  tumhen 
dikhiwegi. 

lli  Thori  der,  aur  miijbo  na  de- 
khoge ;  aur  phir  thori  dor,  aur  niujhe 
dekhoge:  kytinkt  main  Bap  ke  pai1 
jata  hiirj. 

17  Tab  us  ke  ba'ze  shdgirdorj  ne 
Apai  men  kab:i,  Yih  kya  hai,  jo  wuh 
li:iiiii'i_i  kabiu  hai,  ki  Thori  der,  aur 
tum  mujhe  na  dekhoge;  aur  phir  tborl 
der,  aur  tum  inujhc  dekhoge  j  aur  yih, 
Ih  liye  ki  main  Bap  pas  jata  hun  V 

IS  Phir  unlion  u  kaha,  Yih  kya 
hai,  jo  wuh  kahta  hai:  ki  Thori  der  V 
haui  nahin  jaute,  ki  wuh  kya  kahiii 
hai. 

19  So  Yisu*  ne  jaua  ki  we  cbahte 


hain   ki   mujh   se  suwal    karen, 
Lekin  main  tumhen  soeh  kahta  ,unhcn   kalid,  Tum   apns  men   UB   ki 
i,  ki  Tumhiire  livu  paeri   jaua  hi  j  babat  piiohbto  ho,  jo  main  ne  kaha, 
UB 


Masih  H  akhiri  7iusihat.     YU'IUNN.V,  XVII.   U»  ki  du'a  ranalon  k*  Vye. 


ki  Thori  der,  siur  tiim  mujtie-  na  de~ 
khoge,   aur  phir    thori    iler,  aur    tum 

mujhe  dekhogeS 

20  Main  tum  ne  sach  fiai-h  kahta 
litin,  ki  Tum  rooge,  aur  uala  karoge, 
par  dunyd  kiiualt  hoffi ;  aur  tum  gaui- 
gin  hoge,  lekiu  tumhari  gam  khushi 
bo  jiegd. 

21  Jati  'aurat   janno    lagi  i    liiii,    ti. 

f*mgia  hnti  hai,  is  liyo  ki  us  ki  gin  . 
paEuncbi  :  lekin  jali  larkajani,  to  is 
kSushl  we  ki  duiiyi  nien.  ek  ddmj 
juiiiia  liiia,  uh  dard  ko  phir  ydd  nah  i  j 
karti. 

22  Pas  tuni  ab  eamgin  lio ;  par  main 
tumben  phir  «lckfi  UEga,  aur  tum  hara 
dil  khush  boga,  aur  tuinhari  khusbi 
kui  tura  se  i-'jtiiin  ua  legd. 

23  Aur  tum  us  din  uiujh  sc  kucbh 
suwdl  ua  karuge.  Main  tam  se  eacli 
Mfih  kahta  hu»,  Jo  kucbii  tum  nierd 
iiu.ni  leke  Bdp  ae  mangogo,  wub  tum 
to  degd. 

24  Ab  tak  tum  ne  merc  ndm 
kuchh  nuhiu  mau  «a  ;  mangi>,  ki  t 
paoge,  La.  ki   tuinhari   khushi   kamil 

25  Main  no  je  bdterj  tanisilon  men 
tumben  kabin ;  par  wuh  w»qt  dt~a  bai, 
ki  mairj  tumben,  tanisilon  men  phir  na 
kuluiravi,  baiki  Bdp  ki  adi' khabar  tum- 
ben d  ungsi, 

26  TJs  din  tum  merc  mim  se  mang- 
oge,  aur  main  tumben  uahin  kahtd  ki 
main  Udp  so  tumhdre  Jiye  darkliwasi 
karungd ; 

27  Is  liye  ki  Bdp  tn  dp  hi  tumben 
}Ay&r  kartd  hai,  kyiinki  tum  ue  mujbe 
piyar  kiyd,  aur  imdn  Ide  bo  ki  main 
Knudd  im  n  i  k  la  Ini  n. 

2n  Main  Uap  se  nikld,  aur  dunyd 
men  dya  rum  :  phir  dunyi  ae  rukbeat 
hota,  aur  Bap  pas  Jdti  lnin. 

29  Un  kti  nhdgirdon  nc  use  kahd, 
Dekil,  ab  tii  Hal'  kalitd  hai,  aur  tamsil 
nitii  nakiii  kahta. 

30  Ab  haiu  jdnte  hain  ki  tfi  aab 
kuelili   janta  hai.  aur  niuhtaj  naluri  kil 

114 


koi  tujh  aesuwdlkarn;  la  80  baui  iiuiiu 
la.1  ki  tu  Klmdd  se  nikld  hai, 

SI  Yisti'  ne  unhcn  jawab  diyd,  Kyd 
ab  tum  imdu  Ide  hoV 

32  Dekku,  gliari  iti  bai,  baiki  d 
□hulu,  ki  tum  men  se  har  ek  paia- 
ganda  boke  apni  rdh  legd,  aur  tum 
mujhe  akdd  chhor  doge;  tan  blij 
main  akeld  uahin,  kyunki  Bdp  meru 
nal  I  i  hai. 

Uli  Main  ne  tumben  ye  bdtenkahln, 
tdki  tuminnjli  un-n  itminan  pdo.  Tum 
dunyd  men  miisibat  ufbaugfi ;  li  kirt 
kliatir-jani'a  rakbo,  ki  main  ne  duiiya 
ko  jita  hai. 

XVII  BA'B. 

Y  ISU"  ne  ye  biten  farmdin,  aur 
apui  diikhen  dsman  ki  Uraf 
uthdin,  aur  kahd,  Ai  Bdp,  ghari  d 
piiliuuchi  liai;  apne  Bete  ko  jaUL 
Ifiikbsh,  td  ki  tera  Butd  bbi  tujhe  jalai 
baklisbe : 

2  Cliundnelii  tii  ne  use  aab  jismon 
ptr  iklniyar  diyd  bai,  td  ki  wub  un 
aab  ko,  iiuherj  tu  nt>  use  bakhsha, 
hamesha  ki  zindagi  duwe. 

3  Aur  haiiu'sba  ki  /.indagi  yih  hai, 
ki  wc  tuju  ko  akeld  sauhelid  Kbuda, 
aur  Yitid'  Masih  ku  jise  tii  ue  bheja 
liai,  jdnen. 

4  Main  ne  zaiuin  par  teri  jaldl 
zalirr  kiyd  )iaj :  main  u.s  kdm  ko,  jo  tii 
ne  mujhe  kanie  ko  diyd  hai,  tamdm 
kar  cbuka. 

5  Aur,  ai  Bdp,  ab  tii  mujhe  apne 
siitli  tu  jalai  se,  jo  main  dunyi  ki 
paiddisb  se  peslitar  ten  .-atb  rakbtd 
tba,  lni/uj-gi  de. 

(1  Mniii  netere  ndni  ko  un  ddmion 
par,  jinben  tii  ne  dunyd  men  se  mujhe 
diyd,  zabir  kiyd  bai  :  we  tere  the,  aur 
td  ne  unhen  mujbe  diyd  bai,  aur  un- 
hnn  ne  tere  kaldui  par  'amal  kiyd  hai. 

7  Ab  uuborj  ne  jAna-  bai  ki  sab 
v.\\v/a:u  jo  tu  ne  mujbe  din  teri  taraf  we 
bai  n. 

8  Is  liye  k  i  main  ne  we  lidten,  jo  tii 
ne    luujhu    bata    diii,    unben    bati   di 


Masih  ki  du'd  YUTHASS 

hain ;  aur  unhon  Be  unhen  qahi'tl  Iciji, 
aur  yaqin  jana  ki  main  tujh  se  nikld 
iinri,  aur  we  imAn  Ide  hain  ki  tu  ne 
mujlii'  bhijA  hai. 

I)  M.Vin  un  ku  liyo  darkhwdst  kartA 
hun,  main  dnnvd  ke  liyo  nalntj.  tOttaf 
un  ke  liye,  jinlicn  tii  ne  mujhe  diyd 
hni,  darkhwdst  karti  hiin,  ki  we  tere 
kain. 

10  Aur  Bab  mere  tere  hain,  aur  tere 
raere  hain  ;  aur  main  un  sc  buzurgi 
ftJbt  in'iij. 

11  Main  dunyA  men  dgc  na  rahun- 
ga,  par  ye  dunya  nwn  hain,  aur  main 
tujh  pAs  Atd  'hun.  Ai  quddus  BAp, 
kpm  lii  iiAtu  ko  unhen,  jinhen  tt'i  ne 
mujhe  bakhslid,  hifawit  se  rakh,  tiki 
we  batuan  tarah  ek  ho  jdwen. 

12  Jab  tak  ki  main  un  ke  Bflth 
dunya  mert  thd,  tab  tak  main  ne  tm 
nam  ye  un  ki  hifdzat  ki,  baiki  jin  ko 
tri  ne  mujhe  diyd  hai,  main  nc  un  M 
nigahbani  ki:  aur  kol  nn  men  se, 
kiwA  haldkat  ke  farzand  ko,  balak 
nahiii  hua,  td  ki  nawislna  pfird  ho. 

13  Aur  ab  main  tujh  pas  Ata  ban. ; 
aur  main  yili  bahti  dunya  men  kahta 
hun,  td  ki  meri  kbosbf  nn  men  kamil 
ho  rahe. 

14  Maitj  ne  teri  kalam  unhen  diyd, 
aur  dunyA  ne  un  se  dttshmanf  ki,  ii 
iiye  ki  jiii^i  main  dunyA  kA  nahin  htin, 
we  bhi  dunya  ke  nnhin  hain. 

1  j  Main  vih  darkhwdst  nahin  kartd. 
ki  tu  uniierj  dunyA  men  sc  uthA  le 
par  yih,  ki  tii  unhen  08  sharfr  bo  ha- 
chae. 

16  JaisA  ki  main  dunvA  M  niihin 
lilin,  wc  lihi  dunya  ke  nahin  hain. 

17  Unlniti  apni  sachdi  bc  pdk  kar 
teni  kalAm  sachdi  hai. 

18  Jis  tarah  tfi  ne  mujhe  dunyA 
men  hhejA,  main  uo  bhi  unhen  dunyA 
men  hhejA  hai. 

IH  Aur  un  ke  wiate  main  apni  taq- 
(Hl  kartd  hun,  td  ki  we  bhi  aachAi  «t 
njuqaddas  hun. 

20  -Main  nirf  unhin  ke  liye  nahin, 
146 


A',  XVIII,  raaulon  ke  liyr. 

baiki  un  ke  liye  bhi,  jo  un  ke  kalAm 
H  miLJli  par  imdii  ldwenge,  darkhwdst 
kartA  hun  ; 

21  Tiki  we  sab  ek  howerj,  jaisdki 
tii,  ai  Kap,  mujh  metj,  nur  main  tulh 
men,  ki  we  bhi  ham  men  ek  bon ;  td 
ki  dunyA  imdii  !Awe  ki  lu  ne  mujhe 
bhcjd  hai. 

22  Aur  wuh  jahil  jo  tii  ne  mujhe 
diyii  hai,  main  ne  unhen  diyd  hai ;  td 
ki  we  ek  hon,  jis  tarah  so  ki  ham  ek 
hain. 

23  Main  un  uien,  aurtti  mujh  men, 
td  ki  we  ek  hoko  kamil  howen  ;  aur  ki 
dunyA  jAue  ki  tu  ne  mujhe  bhejd  h:ii, 
aur  jis  tatah  ki  trt  no  mujhe  piyar 
kiyA,  tii  ne  unhen  bhi  piyftr  kiyA  hai. 

24  Ai  Bdp,  main  eh ah  t A  hi'm  ki  we 
bhi,  jinhen  tu  ne  mujhe  bakhshA  hai, 
jatian  mabj)  hiin,  more  sdth  howen  :  tA 
ki  we  mere  jaldl  ko,  jo  tii  ne  mujhe 
bakhshd  hal,  dekhon  :  kyiinki  tii  ne 
mujhe  dunyA  ki  paidaish  «e  Ago  piyar 
kiyA  hai. 

Sg  Ai  'Adil  BAp,  dunyd  ne  tnjho 
uhfrj  jiuiH,  magar  main  ne  tujhe  jAcA 
hai,  aur  inhon  ne  jana  hai  U  ta  U 
mujho  bhojA. 

20  Aur  main  ne  terA  ndra  nn  par 
zahir  kiyA,  aur  zAhir  karungd:  ta  ki 
wuh  piydr,  jis  bo  tri  no  mujhe  piydr 
kivd  hai,  un  men  ho,  aur  main  un  merj 
htin. 

XVIII  BAU 

Y  ISU"  yih  biterj  knhke  apne  shd- 
L'inii'ij  ko  sdth  Qidriin  ke  ndle 
ke.  piir  piya,  jabdn  ek  bA.gcha  thd;  ua 
men  wnli  aur  oa  ke  shAgird  ddkhil 
hde: 

2  Aur  Tahudah  bhi,  ji«  ne  use  pa- 
ka.rwa  diyd,  wuh  jagab  jAntA  tha.  ki 
Yisu'  aksar  apne  ehAgirdon  ke  sdth 
walidn  idyd  kartd  tha. 

3  fabYahiiddh  mpihion  kA  ek  gol, 
aur  snrdAr  kdliinon  aur  Farision  bo 
piydda  leke,  mash'alon  aur  chiragon 
aur  halliyaton  ke  sath,  waluin  dyd. 

4  Aur  Yiisii'  ne  sab  kuchh,  jo  u^  par 


JftW  kd 2'ahra  jand.  YU'HAXNA',  XVIII,  Patiiia  m  se  in&dr  kartu. 
honewAla  tha,  jAnke  Ago  barha,  aurlju  sardar  kahiu  se  kuclili  jin-pahchAn 
>  kalisi,  ki  Tum  klise  dhiindhte  rakhta  tha,  babar  niklA,  aur  us  se  jo 


ln.y 


!i  Unhon  ne  use  jawab  diya,  YihCi' 
Kasari  ke,  Yisu'  ne  uuhen  kftlid,  ki 
Main  hiin.  L's  traqt  YahiUiah  bhi, 
];■•  110  use  pakarwAya,  un  ke  sath 
khara  thi 

(>  Aur  jonhin  Qa  ne  uiihcn  kahA,  ki 
Main  hun,  wu  pichh.fi  hate,  aur  zamin 
par  gir  pare. 

7  Tab  us  nc  uii  se  ph  i  r  puchhA,  ki 
Tum  kiso  dhundhte  lioV  We  bule, 
Yisu'NAsari'ko.  ' 

8  Yisu'  iio  jawab  diya,  Main  ne 
tumben  kahii,  ki  Main  hun:  pas  agar 
tum  mujhe  dhiindhte  ho,  to  inheu  jAne 
do. 

9  Yih  ia  liye  hiiA,  td  ki  wuh  kalam, 
jo  ua  ne  kahA,  parA  ho,  ki  Jinhen  tu 
■  l- ■  niiijiie  diya,  main  ne  un  men 
ko  bhi  nun  ua  kiya. 

10  Tib  Sliauia'un  Patrus  ne  talwAr, 
[o  us  pas  ihi,  khinchi,  aur  sardar 
k:ifii.n  ke  naukar  par  chalai,  aur  ua  k  A 
dahinA  kau  urA  diya.  Ua  naukar  ka 
jiam  Malkus  tha. 

11  Tab  Yisii'  ne  Patrus  sc  kaha, 
A  pni  talwAr  miyan  men  kar ;  kya  wub 
l-iyiila  jo  mere  BAp  ne  mujh  ko  diya, 
main  m  pilin  ? 

12  Tab  sipAhi,  aur  Bubadar,  aur 
Yahudioa  ke  piyAdon  ne  milku  Yisu' 
ko  psikrn,  aur  use  Ijandha, 

18  Aurpahle  uso  Animspaslugnye; 
kyi'mki  wuh  Qayafa  ndm  us  baras  ke 
nardar  kabin  ka  ftaaura  tha, 

14  Yih  wuhi  Qayai'A  tha,  jia  ne 
Yahtidion  ko  salah  di,  ki  umm.it  t  ke 
badle  ek  kii  marnA  bihtar  hai. 

15  K  Par  Hhama'un  Patrus  aur 
ddfrf  slwiird  YistV  ke  ptoUtt  bo  liye ; 
kydnki  ua  shAgird  aur  harddr  kAbin 
men  kuchh  jAn-pahchAn  thi,  aur  wuh 
Yisu'  ke  ssath  sardAr  kabin  ke  dAlAn 
men  gaya. 

Ifi  Lekin  Patrus  ctarwAze  par  hiihar 
kharA  rahA.    Tab  wuh  diiwrA  shAgird, 

'    Hb' 


tlarbani  karti  thi  kahke  Patrus  ko 
andar  le  ay£. 

17  Tab  u»  chhokri  ne  jo  darbAn  thi 
Patrus  w  kaha,  KyA  tii  bhi  ia  sbnkhs 
ke  s-liauhdon  men  se  nahiii?  W' uh 
bolA,  ki  Main  nnbin  lilin. 

IH  Par  naukar  aur  piyAda  koelon 
ki  Ag  sulgakar  jAro  ke  Mbtb  H  kharc 
hiie  tApte  tlio ;  aur  I'atrus  un  ke  sath 
klmni  tap  rahA  thd. 

l'J  \  Tab  sardAr  kabin  ne  Yisd'  se 
us  ke  abA^irdon  aur  us  ki  lalim  ki 
bAbat  suwAl  kiyA. 

20  Yisd'  ne  u»g  jawab  diya,  ki 
Main  ne  ashkara  'alam  ae  baten  kin  ; 
main  no  hamesha  'ibAdat-kiiiiin-,  .nu 
haikal  men,  jahin  Yahudi  har  waqt 
jam'a  hote  iiain,  ta'liui  di,  aur  poshiila 

.1,  kiidliti  naluri  kahA. 

21  Tii  mujli  se  kyi'm  puelihtA  hai? 
un  ms  piichh,  jinhon  ne  umjh  se  auna, 
ki  main  ne  unhen  kya  kahA ;  dekh,  ki 
we  jAnte  hain,  jo  main  IM  kahA. 

22  Jab  us  ne  yih  bAten  kabin,  tab 
piyAdon  men  se  ek  ne,  jo  pas  klnu'a 
tha,  Yisii'  ko  taniAncha  niArke  kahA, 
Kyiin  tu  sardir  kabin  ko  :iiJa  jawab 
detA  hai  ? 

23  Yisii'  ne  use  jawab  diyA,  Agar 
main  ne  bura  kaha,  to  lnmti  ki  gp,wuil 
de;  par  agar  acliehhi  kahA,  to  tu 
mujlie  kyuri  unirta  hai '? 

21  \\a-  Aiimis  ne  use  bandbA  bui 
Qaydia  sardAr  kAhin  ke  pAs  bbejA. 

25  AurShama'un  Patrus kliara  ini/i 

iAp  rahA.     Sounhon  ne  use  kahA,Kya 

tii  bhi  us  ke  shAgirdon  men  n  naliiii 

Ub  ne  inkAr  kiya,  aur  kahA,  ki 

Main  mihiii  hiin. 

16  l'lur  MHfw  kabin  ke  naukaron 
mon  se  ek  ne,  jo  us  shakhs  k  A,  ki  jis 
kii  krin  PatrtM  tw  kar  d;ila  tha,  ri^lir.i- 
dAr  thA,  kahA,  KyA  main  ne  tujhe  us 

sAth  baKehe  mefl  nabin  dekha? 

?7  T;ib  P.itnis  ne  phir  inkAr  kiya  ; 
aur  wunhin  morg  ons  bang  di. 


Pildtus  kd  suwdl.  YTJUANNA',  XIX.  * 

28  1"  Tata  Yisii'  kO  Qaydt"A  pas  se 

diivdn-khdne  men  lao,  aur  yih  subh 
ki  waqt  thd,  aur  we  khud  diwdu- 
khdne  meij  na  gayo,  ta  ki  napak  na 
howcn,  baiki  fasah  khawen. 

29  Tab  Pilatus  un  pAs  niknl  dyd, 
aur  kahd,  Tum  ismard  parkydfaryad 
karte  1 1'  ■  '.' 

30  Unhurj  ae  jawab  mon  uh  hc 
kaba,  ki  Ajjar  yih  badkirdir  na  hoti, 
to  ham  uso  tero  hawdla  na  karte. 

31  Tab  Pildtus  ne  uuhen  kaba,  Tnm 
use  le  jdo,  aur  apni  shari'at  ke  mutd- 
biq  us  ki  "adalat  karo.  Yahudi'on  ne 
tO  use  kahd,  Ham  ko  rawii  uabin  ki 
kisi  ko  ]dn  se  mareri. 

32  Yib  is  liye  hfia,  ta  ki  Yisd'ki 
bat,  jo  us  ne  apni  maut  ki  tarah  se 
lahan  karko  kahi  thi,  puri  howe. 

33  Tab  Pildtus  pidr  diwdn-khane 
men  dakhil  hua,  aur  Yisd'  ko  bulake 
uh  se  kahd,  liyd  td  Yaluidion  kd  BA<1- 
ahah  hai  ? 

34  Yiad'  ne  use  jawab  diyd,  Tu  yili 
bat  dp  ao  kabta  hai,  ya  ki  auron  ne 
mere  haqq  men  tujh  so  kahd  hai  i 

35  Pildtus  ne  jawdb  diyd,  Kyd 
main  Yahudi  hdn  'i  Teri  hi  qaum  oe 
aur  sanlar  kdhinon  ne  tujh  ko  mere 
hawai»  kiyd  ;  td  ne  kyd  kiyd  hj 


Ma&ih  ftc  kor?  m&rna, 

39  8o  tumhdrd  dastdr  hai,  ki  mam 
fasah  men  t  umbara  liye  ok  ko  chbor 
duti ;  kyd  tum  chdhte  ho,  ki  main 
tumbarc  liye  Yaluidion  ko  Bddshdh 
ko  ohhor  ddn  ? 

40  Tab  un  sabhon  ne  phir  ohlllake 
kahd,  ki  Is  ko  nah  m,  baiki  Barabbas 
ko,     Par  Barabbds  bal.indr  (ha. 

XIX  BAit. 

TAB  Pildtus  ne  Yisd'  ko  pakarke 
kore  mdre. 

2  Aur  sipdhion  ne  kdnton  kd  tAj 
sajkc  us  ke  eir  par  rakhd,  aur  use 
argawdni  ptwhdk  pahindi, 

3  Aur  kahd,  Ai  Yahddion  ke  BAd- 
shdh,  Salam!  aur  uulion  ne  uw  laui- 
auuhe  mi  re. 

i  Tab  Pilatus  ne  phir  bahar  jikis 
nnlirii  fcaha,  ki  Dekho,  main  use  tum 
pas  bahar  1«  dyd  bdn,  td  ki  Uun  jano 
ki  main  us  kd  kuehh  BuHk  nahin 
pdtd. 

5  Tab  Yisu'  kdnton  kd  tdj  rakhe, 
aurargawdni  pushak  pahinehue  bahar 
dyd.  Aur  Pilatus  ne  uu  se  kahd, 
Dekho  yih  ddiui ! 

(i  So  jab  sardar  kabin  aur  piyddnn 
ne  use  dekhd,  to  ehillaka  kaha,  ki 
Salib  dc,  Salib  de.  Pilatus  ne  unheg 
kahd,  Tunihin  use  lo,  aur  salib  do, 


3(i  Yisii'   ne   jawdb  diya,  ki   Meri  kydnki   main  us   tni'n   kuehh   ipisiir 
—  naliiti  pdtd. 

7  Yahddion  ne  use  jawab  diyd,  ki 
Ham  shari'atwdle  bain,  aiur  hamari 
sbnvi'ar  ke  nmtabiq  wan  .|atl  ke  tftkj 
hai,  is  liye  ki  us  ne  »poe  t*4fl  Khudi 
kd  Unta  thahravd. 

8  %  Jab  Pilatus  ne  yih  bat  suni,  to 
ziydda  dard ; 

y  Aur  diiviiti-khdne  men  phir  an- 
dar jakv  Yisii' se'kahd,  Tu  kahar,  ka 
hai?  Par  Yisd' ne  use  kuehh  jawab 
na  diya. 

10  Tab  Pildtus  n  use  kaba,  kl  Td 
nmjh  se  nabin.  boltd?  kj-d  tu  naMg 
jin  t  a,  ki  mujhe  ikhtiyar  Imi,  cliahi'm, 
to  tujbc  salib  dus''  aur  uhiihr.ii,  to 
tujlii!  L'lihor  ddn  ? 


hadshahat  la  jahdn  ki  nahiri :  agar 
nieri  bddsbahat  ia  jahdn  ki  hoti,  to 
mere  uaukar  larai  karte,  td  ki  matg 
Yahudion  ko  hawdla  na  kiyd  j;ii;i ;  pai 
ab  tiiuri  bddshdhat  yahdn  ki  nahin 
hai. 

:17  Tab  Pilatus  ne  use  kahd,  So 
kyd  tu  bddshdb  hai  ?  Yisd'  ne  jawdb 
diyd,  ki  Jaisd  dp  larmdte,  main  bdd- 
shdb lnin.  Main  is  liye  paidd  hud, 
aur  is  wdste  dunyd  men  dyd,  ki  haqq 
pu  gawdhi  ddn.  So  jo  koi,  ki  haqq 
se  hai,  meri  dwdz  suntd  hai. 

38  Pildtus  ne  use  kaba,  ki  Haqq 
kydhai?    Yih  kabke  pita  Tnluimon 
pU  Itdliar  raya, aur  iniheii  kaba,  Main 
us  kd  kuehh  nusdr  nabi»  pdtd. 
147 


Mtuth  ke  Imrt»  par 


YTJ'HANNA',  XIX. 


U  Yisii'  ue  jawab  diya,  ki   Agar  Bdduhah  niat  lildi,  luilki  yih  likh,  ki 
yih  tujbe  dparse  diydmi,  jiitd,  tomujh   U*  M   kahd,  ki   Main  Yabudion   k:i 


par  turi  kuchh  ikhtiyar  na  hotd 
jis  ne  niujke  tere  hawiila  kiyd,  ua  ka 
gunab  tlyida  hai. 

12  tls  wwjt  se  PiUtUS  no  cluihi'v  ki 
•  isi!  clihur  de;  pas  Yahud  ion  no  chil- 
!  iki-r  kulii,  ki  Ac;iir  tii  is  mard  kodihor 
detd  hai,  t»  tii  Qaisur  ka  khuir-kliu-iih 
iiiihin ;  jo  koi  anno  ta.in  biidshdh 
tfaahrati  hai,  wuli  Qaisar  ka  mukhdlif 
Loke  boltd  hai. 

13  f  Pildtus  yih  bat  sunkar  Y  isu' 
k  o  bahar  lavfl,  aur  uh  inaqdm  mwj  'y 
Chabdtura,  aur  Mbrdni  mag  Gabbritha 
kablaia  hai,  uiasnad  par  bait  ha. 

14  Aur  fasah  ki  taiydri  ka  din  tua. 


[ladshdh  liur}. 

22  Pildtus  ne  jawdb  diyd,  ki  Main 
ne  jo  likhd,  m  likhd. 

23  1"  Pliir  sipahion  no,  jab  Yira' 
ko  salib  pai  khinch  chllke,  U>  us  ku 
kaprori  ko  liya,  aur  chdr  blan  ki\v, 
iiar  sipalii  ke  liye  ek  hissa  ;  aur  «s  ke 
kurto  ko  lihi  liya:  aur  knrtd  bin  siya 
sardsar  bind  hiid  thd. 

24  Tri  liye  unhon  ue  ajian  men  kahd, 
ki  Ham  use  ua  phdren,  baiki  uh  juir 
chitrlii  ddleg,  ki  yih  ki»  ka  boga  :  yih 
i«  liye  Md,  ki  nawishta  Jo  kabid  hai, 
ki  Uuborj  ue  mori  poshdk  baut  \i,  aur 
mero  kurte  ku   liye  ehitthidn   daliri, 


uhhathu   ghmito    ke    qarib   thd.  jpnra  howe.     So  Bipdliio&  ue  aisa  hi 
rhir   ua  iie   Yahdaiorj    ko  kahd,   ki  kiyd. 


ilvklMi  iLjmi  Badshiih! 


25  f  Tab  Yisii'  kt  salib  jm» 


15  Tab  wo  chiltae,  ki  Lo  jd,  le  jd^md,  aur  us  ki  rad  ki  baliin,  Harbam 
iiae  salib  de,     Pildtus  no  cmheg  kasa,   nUfapaa  kl  joni,  aur  Mariyam  Mag- 


Kyii  uiain  tumhare  B&tahjh  ko  salib 
dan  i  Santai  kahinon  ue  jawab  diyd, 
ki  Qalsat  fcealwa  hanidr,ikoi  birtatih 
nahiu  hai 

10  Tab  ua  ne  use  u  n  ke  hawdla 
kiyd,  ki  OM  salib  di  jdwc.  Aur  we 
Ylsd'  ko  pakarke  lc  gaye. 

17  So  wuh  apni  salib  uthde  hua  us 
Engab  ko,  jo  khopri  ka  maaaro  kablata 
hai,  jis  ka  tnrjiiiua  'Ibrani  men  Gdl- 
gdid  hai,  nikal  jjayd: 

18  W  anda  unimu  ne  use  aur  ue  ke 
sath  do  aur  ko  salib  par  khinehd,  tar- 
fein  men  ck  ek,aur  liafi*  ku  atcfa  mag, 

19  %  Aur  Pildtus  no  ok  kitaba 
likha,  aur  salib  [iar  laga  diya.  Wuh 
likhd  vili  thd,  ki  YISTJ"  NA'SAIII' 
TAHUTU'OS  KA'  IIA'DSHA'JI. 

KO  Da  kitdbo  ko  bahut  m  Yahu- 
diori  ne  parhd,  ia  liye  ki  wuh  maqdm, 
jahil)  Yisii'  salib  par  khiijchd  gayd 
thd,~shabr  ke  niudik  thd;  aur  wuh 
'Ibiani,  aur  Mnani,  aur  Latiui  men 
likha  thd. 

21  Tab  Yahudiunkesarddr  kdhinor 
no  Pildtus  ko  kahd,  ki  Yahudion  ka 
14» 


dalini,  kiiari  ihin. 

'M  Yisd'  no  apni  md  ko,  aur  ua 
«bdgird  ko,  jise  wuli  piydr  kartd  thd, 
nas  khare  litio  dokhkar  apni  md  ko 
kahd,  ki  Ai  'aurat,  dekh,  yih  tera  betd! 

27  Plur  us  ne  us  shagird  ko  kahd, 
Dekh,  yih  teri  md!  Aur  usi  gbari  se 
wuh  ahdgird  use  apno  ghar  le  gaya. 

88  "J  UaM  us  ke  Vis;'i'  ne  jdnke 
ki  ab  sab  bdteu  puri  ho  cbukin,  yih 
knbd,  td  ki  Dawbhtt  pura  hewe,  ki 
Hai  u  pljaaa  hun. 

'J']  Wiihan  ek  1>artan  airke  se  bhard 
hiid  dhard  tba:  uniion  ne  isfanj  ko 
sirke  nun  tar  karke.aur  Kiilaki  liautlii 
par  rakhko,  us  ko  munb  men  diyd. 

30  Pliir  Yisii'  ue,  jab  sirkd  ehnkhd, 
to  kahd,  Pt'ird  hdd;  aur  nir  jhukdke 
jin  di. 

31  Pliir  Yahddiun  M  is  libas  se  ki 
tatdug  nbt  ke  din  saiilion  DKr  na  rah 
jawen,  kydnki  wuh  din  taiydri  kd  thd, 
baiki  bara  hi  isabt  thd,  I'ildtiiH  m 
diirkhwds'r  ki.ki  un  ki  hinp'ii  tef^aur 
Idsh'eu  utdri  jaen. 

32  "Tab  aipdhion  ne  akc  pahle  aur 


Masih  ki  maut  o  dafar, 

duaro  ki  tdngeg,  jo  ua  ke  sdth  salib  par 

khinehe  gaye  the,  tong. 

33  I .«-kin  jab  unhog  ne  Yisu'  kl 
taraf  rike  dckha  ki  wuh  mar  chuka 
hai.  t.i  ns  ki  tangen  natorig : 

34  Par  sipihion  men  ao  ck  ne  bhd- 
le  m  us  ki  puli  chhedl,  aur  filfaur  uh 
Be  labu  aur  pdiii  nikld. 

33  Aur  jis  ne  yih  dckhd,  gawaht  di, 
nur  us  ki  gawibi  fiaehehi  hai,  aur  wuh 
jdiita  bai  ki  sach  kahtd  bai,  ta  ki  timi 
[mau  Ido. 

36  Kyfinki  yih  bdten  huin,  ki  na- 
wishta  pura  howe,  ki  Us  ki  koi  haddi 
tori  ua  jdegi. 

37  Aur  phir  di'mri  nawiakta  is  maz- 
niun  kd  liai,  ki  Wfl  ua  par,  jiac.  unhog 
ne  chhedi,  nazar  karcnge. 

38  1  Aur  lia'd  ua  ke  Yusuf  Ara- 
niatiya  ne,  jo  Yisu'  kd  shdgird  thil, 
lekin  Yahudi. m  ke  dar  Be  posbida  mag, 
l'ildtus  Be  ijazat  chahi  ki  YibiV  ki  lash 
ku  h  Uwft;  aur  Pildtus  ua  ijdwit  di. 
So  wuh  ake  Yisu'  ki  ldsh  le  gaya. 

39  Aur  Niuudemus  bbi,  jo  pahle 
Yiau'  pds  rit  ko  gaya  tha,  iy&,  aur 
pwhu  iffl  ki  atkal  murr  aur  'fid 
miidke  laya, 

40  I'hir  unhog  ne  YisiV  ki  ldsh  leke 
use  sufi  kMM  meij  khuahbuiorj  ke 
sdth,  jis  taiu  se  ki  dafan  karne  mefl 
YaMdion  kd  dastiir  hai,  kaniaya. 

41  Aur  wah  jin,  jis  jagab  ki  use  sulih 
di  gayi  thi,  ek  bag  tha,  aur  us  brtj^ 
nieij  ck  uayi  qabr  thi,  jis  Eien  knbhii 
koi  ua  dhari  gaya  1 1ni. 

42  8o  unhun  nc  Yisu'  ko  Yahud  i<>n 
ki  taiydri  ke  dTn  ke  bi'ia  wahin  rakbi, 
kvunki  yih  nabr  iiaadik  thi. 

XX  BAT5. 

H  A  FT  E  ke  pihlu  din  Mariyani 
Magdalini  tarke,  aisd  ki  hanoz 
andhcra  tha,  uabr  ]>ar  di,  aur  pattliar 
ko  <jabr  sii  tdia  hdd  dckhd. 

2  Tab  wuh,  Shama'iin  Patnn 
ub  dusre  shdszird  pas,  jise  Siri'  piyar 
kartd  thi,  dauri  di,  aur  unhcn  kahi, 
ki  Khudawaud   ko   qabr  se   nikal  le 

'   ua 


YU'HANNA',  XX.  Uskajiu{hna. 

iy«,  nur  ham  uahin  jante  ki  unhog 
i  use  kalian  mkha. 

3  Phir  Patrus  aur  wuh  diisra  shd- 
gird  nikle,  aur  gabr  ki  taraf  gaye. 

4  ChunancM  we  donorj  ik:» tt 'Jl- 
daure,  par  dtisri  Hhdgird  Patroi  M 
barh  gaya,  aur  qabr  por  pahlfi  pt> 
hunclia. 

5  Us  ne  jhukke  sdti  kiii.ru  pare 
dekho;  par  wuh  andar  na  gayd. 

6  Tab  Shama'iin  Pat.rus  ua  ke 
pichlie  pahunchd,  aur  qabr  ke  andar 
gaya,  aur  si'iii  kftpifl  pare  \\w  dekhe. 

7  Aur  wuh  rumdl,  jis  m  urt  ki  *ir 
bandha  th.i,  un  suti  kaprorj  ko  tiiHh 
uahin,  par  judi  lapeta  hud  ek  Jagab 
para,  dekha. 

'b  Tab  diisrd  abigtrd  bhl,  jo  qabr 
juir  pahle  iya  tbd,  andar  gaya,  aur 
dukhke  yaqin  kiyd. 

9  Kydnki  we  hauoz  ua  nawisate  ko 
na  jdnte  the,  ki  murdon  uien,  ae  us  kd 
ji  uthnft  zarur  bai. 

10  Tab  wc  shdgird  apne  apoe  gliar 
uien  pbir  gaye. 

l"l  %  Latin  Mariynm   bahu   oatr 

r  roli  khari  tahi,  aur  rota  hAejab 

omhf  lucu  jhukke  nazar  ki, 

12  To  do  firiahte  auffld  jHMihdk  men, 

ek  ko  sirhane,  aur  dtisre  ke  piindm-, 

jahdn  Yisu'  ki  Idah  rakhi  thi,  baith.' 

dekVio ; 

18  Jinliog  ne  use  kahd,  Ai  'aurat, 
tii  kyfin  roti  hai  ?  Us  ne  unhen  kahd, 
ia  Byu  ki  we  mere  Khudiwand  ko  le 
gaye,  aur  main  uahin  janti  ki  unhun 
ne  us»  kahdn  rakhi. 

14  Jab  wuh  yun  kab  chuki  to 
[liclibc  phiri,  aur  Yisu'  ko  khare  dekha, 
aur  na  pahckand  ki  wuh  Yisu'  hai. 

lu  Yisu'  ne  use  halia,  ki  Ai  'aurat, 
tfi  kyi'uj  roti  hai?  kis  ko  dhtindhti 
hai  V  Us  nc  ua  ko  bdgbdu  jdnke  ub  rc 
kaiid,  ki  Ai  sihib,  agar  us  ko  yahdu 
se  utliiya  bo,  to  mujh  se  kah,  ki  use 
kabin  rakhi  bai,  ki  main  oh  le 
jdungi. 

1(>  Yiad'  ne  use  kahi,  Al  Mariyum. 


Mati  h  kd  n6Mr  )«ma. 
Wuh  mutewsjjft  ln'ii,  i 


YU'HANNA' 
■  uso  kaha, 
Itabbiinf ;  ya'ne,  Ai  TJatad. 

17  YisiV  ne  ub  se  kaha,  Mujh  ko 
mu  t  chliti ;  kyiiiiki  main  mUtOE  i'ipar 
apne  Bap  ko  pas  nahin,  gaya:  par 
mete  Wiftion  pd»  Ta,  aur  ujlhen  kah, 
ki  Main  ujmr  apne  Uap  aur  tunihdre 
i'.n|i  pin,  aur  iipiii'  KlnuUaur  tumhare 
Khoda  pas,  jati  him. 

J8  Mariyam  Maydaliui  ai,  aur  sha- 
sirtUn  w  kaha,  ki  Main  ne  Khuddwand 
ko  dekhd,  aur  ua  ne  mujli  sc  yih  bAtisn 
kabin. 

]!l  1  I'hir  «si  dmjohaftekiipakld 
(Hnth*,flham  ko  waq  t,  jab  wahdn  ke 
dnrwiize,  jabari  shagird  jam'a  htie  tbc, 
Vitljutlion  ko'ditr  U  bara  the,  Yiufi' 
Ayi,  aur"  bioh  men  khara  haa,  aur 
imhen  kaha,  Tuni  par  salam. 

20  Aur  yun  kahke  apne  hatimu 
aur  pasif  ko  unhen  dikhava.  Tab 
shagird  Khudawand  KO  dekhke klmsh. 
hiie." 

21  Aur  Yisu'  ne  pliir  imhen  kaha, 
Tam  wur  taJam;  Jli  tarah  Kap  ne 

Tiiujhe  bbeja  lini,  main    bhi  uaf  tarah 

ntnili  ti  bhejtf  nun. 

22  Aur  yih  kabke  us  ne  un  pnr 
phi'inka,  aur  mi  se  kaha,  ki  Tum  RiV 
i  Oudi  leo : 

23  Jin  ke  gunahon  ko  (uni  luikh- 
sho,  un  ke  gunab  hiikhsho  jate  hain  ; 
jiriben  tum  ua  bakhabogc,  na  bakhsbe 
"ia,,  n  20. 

L'-l  «J  Par  Tliiimfl  un  barahon  raen 
s,:  ek,  jis  k;i  la*|ab  DidumiiR  tha,  Yiru' 
ke  6Xe  want  un  ke  with  na  tha. 

25  Tab  aur  shdgirdon  ne  nwo  kabd, 
ki  Bam  ne  Khuddwand  ko  dckhd  hal, 
Par  ua  ue  unhon  kaha,  Jab  tak  ki 
main  ub  ko  bathon  mpQ  biluu  lit;' 
DIBOM  na  dekblin,  aur  kilon  ke  nish- 
auon  men  apni  unglf  na  dalun, 
apne  hath  ko  ub  ke  pahM  mes,  dakhil 
■1 1  karfln,  ksfeha  yaqta  na  karangi. 

20  1  A'throz  kebaM,  iabiiBkesba- 
(rird  pbir  andar  the,  aur  tlnima  un  ke 
*ath  tha,  to  darwaze  band  hote  hiie 
150 


XXI.  Thi'rmd  H  he-i'vtiqadi. 
Yiwu'  aya,  aur  bich  men  khara  hoke 
bola,  Tum  par  salam. 

27  Pbir  ua  ne  Tbiuna  ko  kaha,  ki 
Apni  ungu*  pas  la,  aurmere  hathon  ko 
dekh,  aur  apnd  hdth  pas  la,  aur  use 
inero  pahlii  men  dai ;  aur  be-hndn  mat 
ho,  baiki  iman  la. 

28  Aur  'J'luirad  ne  jawab  men  use 
knhd,  Ai  mero  Khuddwand,  aur  ai 
mere  Rhndi, 

29  Yisti'  ne  usc  kaha,  Ai  Thiima,  ls 
liyo  ki  tti  ne  mujho  dekhd,  tu  iman 
layd    hai:  mubarak    WO    baiu,  |inborj 

i  nahin  dekha,  taubhi  iman  lae. 

30  T  Aur  babutsc  aur  mu'ajize,  jo 
is  kitab  nietj  likhe  nahhj  gaye,  Yisi'i' 
ne  apne  shagirdon  ke  satuline  dikhae  : 

31  Lekin  ye  lfkhe  gayc,  ta  ki  tum 
in,:in  lAo  ki  Visii"  M:Lsih  hai,  Khuda 
ka  Heta,  aur  ta  ki  timi  iniAn  ttke  Bfl 
ko  nam  t*e  zindagi  pao. 

XXI   HA'B. 

A  Uli  ba'd  na  k«  YisiV  ne  phir  apne 
t;»,iij  daryde'I'ilwriyns  ke  kindro 
par  shdgirdon  ku  dikhayii,  atu'  h  tarah 
zdhir  bua,  k  i 

2  Shaina'i'm  Tatnin,  aur  Thuma,  ju 
Diduinuft  kablata  hai,  aur  Nathanael, 
jo  Qiind  e  Jali!  kd  hai,  aur  Zahadi  ke 
bcto,  aur  us  ke  shdgirdon  men  se  aur 
do  ikalthe  the. 

3  Shama'vin  Patru»  ne  unhen  kn)i:i, 
ki  Main  macbbli  ke  sbikiir  ko  juta 
biin.  Unkofl  ne  ua  w  kaM,  llau,  lln 
irro  sdtb  chaTengc ;  aur  nikalke  filfaur 
kisliti  |iar  rliarbe  ;  par  us  rat,  ko  kuchh 
na  pakra. 

4  Alir  jab  taVh  1 1 11  i,  to  V  itfS1  kiudre 
par  khara  thd;  lekin  shilgirdoii  Ofl  U 
jdnd  ki  wtth  Yisti'  hai. 

5  Tab  Yiau'  ne  unhen  kabd,  Ai 
larko,  kvd  tumhare  pds  kucbh  khanc 
ko  )iai?  Unlioij  ne  jawab  diya,  ki 
Nahin. 

G  l'ar  ua  ne  un  se  kabd,  Kisbti  ki 
dubni  taraf  jal  ddlo,  to  tutii  pdoge. 
Pas  unhon  ne  dala,  tab  maohhlion  ki 
bahutayat  B0  usc  kliinth  na  saken. 


Tihri  takidjo  Masih  n> 

7  U  live  us  shdgird  DO,  jise  Yisii' 
piydr  kartU  thd,  Patetis  se  kahA,  ki 
Yih  Khuddwand  hai.  So  Shama'iin 
Patrus  ne  sutike  ki  wuh  Khuddwand 
hai,  chddar  kamar  «t  bAndhi,  kyrinki 
wuh  nangA  lliit,  aur  apne  ta,in  daryA 
men  dAl  diyA. 

8"  Aur  baqi  shagird'  mrietililion  ka 
jiU  kbinchte  Wkishti  parae;  kytinki 
WB  kindre  se  diir  iia  the,  mftgU  do  MU 
hdth  ki  atka.l. 

9  Jon  kio&re  par  Ae,  wahan  HBbO| 
ne  koelon  ki  Ag,  aur  us  par  niachhli 
rakhi  hiii,  aur  roti  dekhi. 

.1.0  Yisi'i'  ne  unhen  kahd,  Un  machh- 
lion  men  se,  fa  turo.  ne  pakrin,  lio. 

11  Shama'iin  Patrus  ne  charhke  jAl 
ko  ck  sau  tirpan  bari  niachlilion  se. 
bharehiie  kliinchd:  aurngarchimachh- 
KAn  us  bahutdyat  sc  thin,  par  jAl  np 
phatA. 

12  Tisu'  BA  unhen  kahA,  A'o,  kliana 
khAo.  Aur  shagirdtm  men  *Q  kiBi  ko 
jur,at  na  hai  ki  us  ne  piichhe,  ki  Tu 
kaun  hai  ?  kyunki  We  jantc  the  ki  wuh 
Khuddwand  hai. 

13  Tab  Yisti'  ne  dke  roti  lt,  nur  un- 
hen di,  aur  visi  tarah  Ke  machhlt  di. 

14  Yih  tiara  martaba  thd,  ki  Yisrr 
n<!,  niurdon  men  so  ji  utlroe  ke  ba'd, 
apne  ta'in  shAgirdonko  dikhldyA. 

18  1"  Aur  jali  wokbanA  khachuke, 
tM  Yisii'  ne  ShamaVm  Patrus  ko  kaha, 
Ai  Shama'iin,  Ytinas  ke  bata  kya  tu 
mujhe  in  se  ziyada  piydr  kara  hai  V 
Ub  ne  nse  kali  A,  Han,  ai  Khudawaud; 
tu  khud  jAntd  hai  ki  main  tnjbe  piyaf 
karid  hug.  Us  ne  use  kali  i,  ki  Mere 
barre  charA, 

16  Us  no  do  bAra  nac  phir  kaha,  ki 
Ai  Snama'un,  Yunas  ke  beta,  Ayd  tu 
iiinjir-  piydr  kartA  hai?  Wuh  bola, 
ki  Hio,  'ai  KlmdAwand,  tii  to  jdutA 
hai  ki  main  tujh  ko  piyAr  kartu 
bnn.  Us  ne  nne  kaha,  ki  Merf  bhcreri 
eh  ii  r  4. 

17  TJs  nc  use  tisre  martaba  kahd,  ki 
Ai  Shama'iin,  Yiinas  ke  bete,  dyA  to 

151 


YU'HANNA',  XXI.  Potnts  ko  ki. 

mujhe  piyar  kartA  hai  V  Tab  Patrus, 
is  Liye  ki  us  uc  tisri  bdr  us  se  kahA,  ki 
A'yd  tu  mujhe  pivdr  kartA  bai,  dilgir 
Inid,  aur  use  kahd,  Ai  Khudawand,  tii 
to  sah  kuekh  jdntd  hai;  haiki  tujhe 
ma'Uiin  hai,  ki  main  tujhe  piyAr  kartA 
hlin.  Yiail'  ne  use  kaha,  Men  bheren 
charA. 

IH  Main  tujh  se  sach  sach  kahtd 
hit  n,  ki  Jah  tak  ki  tii  jawAn  thd,  td  Ap 
apul  kamar  bdndhtA  thA,  aur  jahdu 
kahiij  chahta  thA,  chaltA  phirtd  thA: 
par  ja'b  ti'^biirhd  hojA,  to  apne  hdthon 
ko  phailaeRai  aur  dusrd  teri  kamar 
bSdttbflgi,  aur  wah*n  jahAn  tii  na 
ehAhc,  tujhe  le  jdegd. 

19  Ub  ae  in  bAton  sc  pa1A  diyd,  ki 
wuh  kaun  si  maut  sc  Khudd  kA  jalai 
7,Aliir  karegA;  aur  yih  k'ahke  use  phir 
kahd,kl  Mere  picbhe  lio  le. 

20  Tab  Patrus  ne  phirkc  us  goigtrcl 


ko,  jisH  Yisu'  piyAr  kartA  thA,  aur  jis 
sliAm  ke  khAne  men  un  ke  riBfl  Dftl 
jhukke  piichhA,  ki  Ai  KhudAwand, 
wuh  jo  tujhe  iwkarwali  hai,  kaun  hai  'i 
pichho  Ate  dekhd. 

21  Patrus  ne  use  dekhke  Yisii'  ko 
kahA,  Ai  Kbuddwand,  ia  shakhs  kd 

22  Yisii'  ne  use  kahd,  Agar  main 
1,'haln'm  ki  jali  tak  main  dnu,  wuh 
yahin  thuhre,  to  tujh  ko  kyA  ?  tii  mere 
picbhe  ho  le. 

23  Tab  bhdion  rnen  yih  bAt  raash- 
hiir  hiii,  ki  wuh  ahigird  na  marecaj 
lekin  Yisu'ne  use  nahinkahd,  ki  Wuh 
na  maregd,  ma«ar  yih  kahA,  ki  Agar 
main  ehAbiin  ki  mere  Aue  tak  tbahre, 
to  tujh  ko  kyA? 

24  Yib  wuh  BhAgird  hai  jis  ne  in 
kimon  ki  gawdhi  d(,  aur  in  liAton  ko 
liklid ;  aur  ham.  ko  yaqin  hai  ki  ub  ki 
gawahi  saob  hai. 

25  Tar  aur  bhi  bahut  se  kdm  hain, 
jo  Yis6'  no  kiye,  aur  agar  wo  judA 
judA  likhe  jAtfl,  to  rnain  guman  kartA 
inin  ki  kitdben  jo  liklii  jalin  dunyA 
men  na  sanid  saktin,     A'min, 


ACTS 

RASU'LON  KE  A'AMA'L. 


I  BA'B. 

Al  Theofilus,  wub  pahli  kaifiyat 
main  na  tssnif  ki,  un  sah  baion 
ki,  Jo  ki  Yittu'  shuru'  M  kurtd,  aur 
sikbata  rabi, 

^  Ua  din  tak  ki  wuli  apne  rasuloii 
ko,  jinlicii  UB  ne  chu.ua  thd,  Rub  i 
Quds   ee   hukru  dokar,   upar   ulkdyd 


3  Un  par  ub  ne  iftu  dukfa  othfa 

ke  pichho   dp  ko  bahut  si   MU»   ui- 
ahdufon  so  zinda  zdhir  feiyd,  ki  wub 
eh  Alis  diu  tak  unhen.  nanar  dtd, 
Khudd  ki  badahdiat  ki  bdtey  kahti 
raba; 

4  Aur  un  ke  satb  ekjd  hoku  hukm 
diya,  ki  Yarusalam  ac  bdhar  ua  j:io, 
baiki  Bdp  ko  us  wa'de  ki,  jis  kd  zikr 
1 1  i  i  ■.  i  maja  se  mu  chuke  hv,  rdh  dekho. 

0  Kyiiijki  YlUiatuid  M  tO  pdiii  M 
K'ijiftMK.-i  djyd;  par  turu  thore  dlaaij 
ka  la'd  Hiili  iQ.udsso  baptismu  pdogu. 

6  Tab  unhog  ne,  jo  ikatthe  tbe,  ua 
ae  pikhhd,  aur  kaha,  ki  A\  Khudd- 
wand,  kyd  tti  ini  Wtqt  Israel  ki  bad- 
abaliat  ko  pbir  buiial  kiya  cbilita 
hai? 

7  Par  ua  nt  unheii  kaha,  Tumlidrd 
kdm  naliiii  ki  un  wao,tun  aur  mau- 
siinoii  ko,  jinhcn  Bdp  ne  apue  bi 
ikhtiydr  uien  rukbd  bai,  jano ; 

6  Lekin  jab  Ki'ili  i  Quds  iiuu  par 
dwe^i,  Uiui  qjiwat  pdog<0|  aur  Yaniau- 
lani,  aur  adre  Yahiidiya,  u  Samanya 
men,  baiki  samin  ki  Ladd  tak,  meru 
gawah  boga. 

i'  Aur  ivuh  yiu  kahke,  un  ke  dekh- 
t«  biie,  tipar  u{hdyd  gayd  ;  bui  badll 
ne  uee  un  ki  tuturan  aachhlpd  livA. 
152 


10  Aur  ua  ke  jdte  hiie,  jab  wc  dsmdn 
ki  taraf  tak  rabe  tbe,  dekho,  do  mard 
siifod  j-oahak  pahiue  uu  ke  pis  kbare 
the ; 

11  Aur  kabne  lage,  Ai  Ja.iJi  DWdo, 
tum  kyurj  kliare  dsiunn  ki  taraf  dekhie 
ho?  yibi  Yisii',  jo  tumhdra  pda  so 
damdu  par  uthaya  gayd  bai,  asi  tarah, 
\h  taruh  tum  tiu  use  damdu  ko  jati* 
dekbd,  pbir  dwogd. 

12  Tabweua  pahdr  se,  juZaitiiij  ];■! 
kalihitri,  Jo  Ya  ni -ia  la  r  n  na  nazdik,  baiki 
faqat  ek  sabi,  ki  niauzil  dur  bai,  Yan':- 
sajam  ko  phiro. 

13  Aur  jab  dikail  hue,  to  ek  bdld- 
khdue  par  gaye ;  wahdu  Patrus  aur 
Ya'iidb,  aur  Yulianni  aur  AndrydM, 
fTulnia  aur  Thumd,  Rirtbulamd'aur 
Mati,  iialfa  kd  beta  Yu'qiih,  aur  Sba- 
in&'un  Zcdotea,  aur  Ya'qilb  kri  Iduii 
Vafuklab,  tahta  tbe. 

li  Yo  sab,  'auraton,  aur  Yiaii'  ki 
md  Mariyom,  aur  ua  ko  bhdion  ke 
sdth,  ek-dil  hoko  du'a  aur  nuuuat  kar 
ralm  tbe. 

15  T  Uultin  diuoQ,  Patrus  abdgird- 
in  ke  darruiyda,   (un   sab    ke    udm 

ruitke  ek  sau  bis  ke  qarib  the,)  kbard 
bokc  bold, 

16  -Ai  \)hiio,  zariir  thd  ki  wub 
nawishta,  jo  lliih  i  Quds  ne,  DdAd  bi 
/.ubdui,  Yiilu'idab  kobaci'i  meij,  jo  Yiad* 
ke  pakarncwdlon  kd  ralmuma  tbd,  dgt' 
ae  farmayd,  pi'ird  liowe, 

17  Kyiiiiki  wub  hain  men  giud 
gayd,  aur  uu  ue  ia  khidmat  mcii  liiasa 
payd  thd, 

18  So  uh  ne  apni  kadi  ki  m&zduri  se 
ek  kbet  mol  liyi,  aur  aundbe  luurib 


fanteWit  ke  dia  men  A'AMA'L,  II. 

gira,  aur  uh  ka  pet  phat  gaya,  aur  uh 
ki  tamaiu  antrian  nikal  parin. 

19  Aur  yih  Yariisalaui  ku  sab  rah- 
ncwahm  ko  uia'lum  hiia;  yahan  tak 
ki  tU  kliet  ka  ndtii  unhin  ki  /.uban 
inen  Htinal-daiaa  hiia,  ya'ue  klu'm  ki 

Zauiill. 

20  Kyunki  Zabur  kl  kitab  men 
Ukba  hai,  ki  Ua  ka  tuakan  ujar  jae, 
aur  us  mcri  koi  basnowaia  narahe,aur 
us  ki  ta'inati  ka  'uhda  dtiara  ' 

21  Pas  cbahiye  ki  iu  tnardon  mon 
se,  jo  liar  waut  hanuire  sath  raho,  jab 
Khudawand  M'  huni  mun  aya  jaya 
ku  ria  t  Ini, 

22  Yuhanna  ku  baplisma  se  li.-ko  us 
din  tak  ki  wuli  hamare  pas  se  upar 
utkaya  gaya,  iu  inen  bc  ek  hainsire 
sath  us  ke  ji  utbnu  ka  gawah  howe, 

28  Tabunhon  ne  do  kokhnra  kiya, 
ek  Yusuf  jo  Barsabas  ka'ulata,  jis  ke 
laaab  JukIus  tha,  aur  diisra  Mat- 
tliiyas. 

24  Aur  yih  kabke  du'a  maugi, kiAi 
Kimdawaud,  sab  ku  dilog  ke  jaunu- 
walo,  dikha  ki  in  donon  luun  su  ui  nu 
kia  ko  cbund  bai,  ki 

25  Wub  itt  khidmat  o  risAJat  inen 
hissa  le,  jis  se  Yabiiddh  k  h  ari  j  hokc 
apni  kias»  jag&h  ko  gaya. 

26  Aur  unhog  ne  un  pai  ebittnian. 
dalin;  aur  chitthi  Matthiyas  ku  naui 
par  uikli;  tab  wuh  gyarah  rasulon 
men  ttbumar  kiva  gaya. 

II  BA'B. 

AUR  jab  Pantekust  ka  din  aya  tha, 
we  sab  ek  dil  hoke  ikalthe  OJ&e. 
2  Aur  akhftrgf  asinan  suuk  Awaz  Ai, 
jaiso  buri  aiidhi  uhale,  aur  us  se  sara 


Patrui  ka  w'az  kun 


ghar,  janin  we  bai the  the,  bhar  gaya. 

3  Aur  unhon  judi  judi  Ag  ki  si 
zubaneg  dikMi  din,  aur  un  men  se 
barek  par  bailbin. 

4  Tab  we  sab  liiih  i  Quds  se  bhar 
gaye,  aur  gair  zubanen,  jaiwo  Ruh  ne 
i.:il i-  n  bolnc  ki  qudrat  bukbshi,  bolne 
lage. 

0  Aur  Khuda-tars  Yahudi  bar  ek 
153 


ipuim  men  se,  jo  AsmAn  ko  tale  bai, 
Yarusalaiu  mon  a  rahe  the. 

b'  So  jab  yih  awaz  di,  to  bhir  lag 
gayi,  aur  sabdang  In'it!,  kyunki  bar  ek 
ne  tuihen  apni  ajjui  boli  bolte  suni. 

7  Aur  sab  hsirau  hoke,  aur  ta'ajjub 
karko,  apas  men  kahne  lagu,  Dekho, 
kya  yih  sab  jo  bolte  kain,  Jalili 
nahin  ? 

8  Pan  kyugknr  har  ek  ham  men  m 
apu*  apne  watan  ki  boli  s  u  a  t  a  hai? 

i)  Partbi,  aur  Modi,  aur 'Elami,  aur 
rahnewAle  STa*uputdmiyar  Y'ahi'nliya 
aur  Qapj)adui[iya,  Pun  tua  atu*  Asia  ke, 

10  Prugivi  aur  Pamtuliya,  Misr, 
anr  Libya  ke  us  biasa  ko  jo  Qureno 
ke  'ilaoa  meri  liai,  aur  Ruini  musatir, 
Yahddiaur  Y'abt'idi  murid, 

11  Kreti,  aur 'Arab  boke  ham  apni 
apni  zubanim  ineii  unben  Khudi  ki 
bari  baten  bolt.c  suiuu  li.iin, 

12  Aur  sab  bairau  bfif,  aur  gbab- 
rdke  ck  ddare  se  kahne  laga,  ki  Yih 
kya  hiia  chahtd  hai  ? 

13  Auron  no  tbattlio  se  kaha,  ki  Ye 
nayi  mai  ko  naslie  Jiien  hain. 

14  1  Tab  Patrus  no  un  gyarahon 
ko  sath  kharc  hoke  apni  awaz  buland 
ki,  aur  un  ho  kaha,  Ai  Yalnidi  maidu 
■  '  Y:Lr,'i.-iilam  ke  sab  rahnewalo,  yih 
janu,  aur  kAu  lagaku  rueri  baten  suno : 

15  K.i  ye,  jaisi  tuin  suinajhte  ho, 
riashu  men  nahin,  kyunki  abhi  pakar 
din  ayit  bai. 

lb'  Baiki  yih  wuh  hai,  jo  Y'uel  nabi 
ki  lna'rilat  farmaya  gayd :  ki 

17  Khuda  kabta  bai,  ki  Akhiri 
ilinon.  mag  aisa  boga,  ki  main  apni 
liiih  mun  so  sah  adinion  par  dbaidngd : 
aur  tuiuliaru  Lete,  aur  tuiuhari  beti&n, 
nubiiwat  karungi,  ain-  tnmhare  ja'wari 
roya  dokhenge,  aur  tunilidre  buddhe 
khwab: 

18  Aur  main  un  ditmu  tam  apne 
bandon  aur  bindion  par  apni  Rih 
meg  se  dhilunga:  aur  we  nubuwat 
karenge. 

ly  Aur    main    opar    asman    men 


Bahut  lof/on  ka  A' AMAT*,  TT.  murid  h-mii. 

achamMia,  aur  nichc  ndl  par  ai- j  ke  ji  uthne  ki  ttkf  feJyai,  W  us  ki jan 


shaniarj,  lalui,  aur  Ag, 
hidui,  dikhAiingA: 

20  Surai  andhera,  aur  cbdnd  lahii  ho 
jaegA,  peshtar  uh  k<'  ki  Khuddwand  kd 
DUEtUg  aur  nadir  din  dwe  ; 

'J  L  Aur  yiin  hogd,  ki  harek  jo  Khu- 
ddwand kA  ndm  legi,  najAt  pawegA. 

£2  Ai  IsrAcli  mardn,  yu  bAton  suno, 
ki  YisiV  N  asari  ek  mard  thd,  jis  kd 
Khuda  kl  taraf  se  honA  t.um  par  sdbit 
h'rVA,  »11  rau'aji/.uri  nur  achambhori  aur 
nishdnion  se,  jo  Khuda  M  uh  ki  nia'- 
rifat  tumbAre  hu'li  men  dikhdin,  jaisA 
tum  Ap  hhi  jAnte  bo : 

23  Usi  ko,  jab  KhudA  ke  thahrAe 
hiie  irade  aur  'ilm  i  azali  se  sompA 
guyd,  tum  ne  pakrA,  aur  be-dinon  ke 
hatb  se  kilo  garwAke  q.itl  kiyA  : 

24  Usi  ko  KhudA  ne,  rumit  ke 
band  kholkr,  uthayd :  kyiinki  rmim- 
kin  m  Iba  ki  wuh  uh  ke  qabze  men 
rahe.  • 

25  Ts  liye  ki  Daud  iw  ke  haqq  men 
kahtd  hai,  ki  Main  ne  Khuddwand 
pnr,  j»  sadA  mere  sAmhne  hai,  Age  se 
nazar  ki,  ki  wuh  meridahni  taraf  hai, 
■:>  ki  main  na  hatur»  : 

2(»  Im  wibali  m'erA dil khush hai, aur 
meri  zubdn  nihal  hai ;  baiki  merA  badan 
bhi  ummed  men  chain  karagA: 

27  Is  liye  ki  t(t  meri  jAn  KO  'Akan  i 
gaib  mi'ij  na  chhoregd,  naapnequdduB 
ko  sarne  degA, 

28  Tu  ne  mujhe  /.indagi  ki  rdhen 
batdin ;  tu  ne  mujhe  apne  didAr  ke 
bAHl  kluishi  se  bhar  diya. 

2!)  Ai  lihdhi,  mujhe  uanm  ke  ra.is 
DAi'id  ko  haqq  men  be-aharak  kahne 
do,  ki  wuh  moa,  aur  tiapi  Ma  gaya.  am- 
al tak  iis  ki  qabr  hamdre  danniyan 
maujud  hai. 

30  So  is  sabab  sc  ki  nabi  tha,  aur 
jantd  tbA  ki  KhudA  ue  us  se  qamm 
khAi  hai,  ki  main  teri  nasi  se  Masih  ko 
jism  ke  n'i  h  sahi*  karnggi,  ki  tere 
takht  par  baithe  ; 

31  Ue  ne  vih  rahle  se  idnkar  Masih 

154 


dhfiTjweri  kA  'Alam  i  gaib  men  chhori  na  gayi,  : 
ke  badan  ne  sarno  paya. 

88  I  'b)  Yiftii'  ko  KhudA  ne  uthdyd ; 
ua  ke  ham  sab  gawdh  hain. 

33  Pas  KhudA  ke  dahine  hath  bu- 
land  hoke,  aur  BAp  se  Ruh  i  Quds  kA 
wa'da  pdko,  u»  ne  yib,  jo  tum  ab 
dekhte  aur  suiite  hn,  dhdld. 

34  Kyrinki  Daud  Asmdn  par  na 
gaya;  lekin  wuh  khud  kahtA  hai,  ki 
Khuddwand  ne  mere  Kliudawaud  H 
kahd,  ki  Mere  dahine  baitb, 

16  Jab  tak  ki  main  teredushmanon 
k. .  ten  pdnwim  ki  ciiauki  na  karun. 

30  Pas  TsrAel  kA  sArd  gharaud  ya- 
,  nan  jAne,  ki  KhudA  ue  usi  Tisu*  ko, 
jise  tum  ne  salib  d!,  Khuddwand  aur 
Masih  bhl  kiyA. 

37  ^  Jab  utihon  ne  yih  sunA,  torm 
ke  dil  clibid  gaya,  aur  Patrus  aur  baqi 
rasrtlon  se  kahA,  ki  Ai  bhAiu,  baui  kya 
karen  V 

:ihr  Tab  I'atrus  ne  un  se  kahA,  Tauba 
karo.  aur  tum  men  se  bar  ek,  gunahon 
ki  mu'AH  ke  liy,  Tisli'  Masih  kenaiii 
par  baptiama  lc,  to  liuh  i  Quds  kd  in- 
'dm  pdoge. 

39  Ib  liye  ki  yih  wa'da  tum  se  aur 
tuiiihdre  larkou  se  lini,  aur  un  sah  se, 
jo  ddr  hain!  jitiiori  kw  hamAi'd  KhudA- 
wand KhudA  buldwe. 

40  Aur  wuh  bahut  aur  bdtorj  kt 
gawahidn  layA,  aur  yih  kahkc  nasihat 
ki.ki  Apie  ko  is  f erhi qaum se  bacbAo. 

41  %  H"  jinhon  neuski  bat  khuahi 
se  qubdl  ki,  bapfiftna  paya:  aur  usi 
roz  tin  haair  Admi  ke  qarib  shdmil 
iirte. 

42  Aur  msulon  se  ta'Um  pAne,  aur 
subbat  rakhnc,  aur  n>ti  torne,  aurdu'A 
inAngnemeri  liga  rahe. 

43  Anrliar  ek  jAu  ko  khanf  Ml 
aur  Iwibut  Ke  acliambhe  aui 
rasdloo  se  Kdbir  bi'iin. 

14  Aur  sab  jo  iman  Ide  the,  ikat- 
Mic  raba,  aur  Bttl   obiBOfl    nieii   sliarik 


Ihe: 


Ek  Itttigre  ko 


A'AYA'L,  ITT. 


chuiKjd  kan> d. 


milkiyat   aur   asb&b  |  chai\*rd  hiid  tha,  Patrus  aur  Yiihanui 
l>echke,  harek  ki  wuiU.it  ku  muw«flq,  ko  liptd  jdta  Uii,  sab  ]>%  nihuvui,  hai- 


sab  ko  baut  detfl  Uufc 

4G  Aur  bar  roz  ek-dil  hoke  Laik;).]  SnJaiman  kd  kahldtd  liat, 
mon  rabe,  aur  giur  ghar  rotidn  torke  daure  ae. 


rdn  hoke   uh    baratnada   ki   taraf  jo 
k  o  pan 


kbusbi  aur  sidhe  dil  se  khana  khdte 
ibe, 


12  T|  Tar  Patrus  ne   yih  dekbkar 
loj*on  n  kaba,  ki  Ai  leraeli  uiardo,  is 


47  Aur  Khudd  ki  ta'rif  karto  the,  par  tum    kynn   ta'ajjub  karto? 
aur   sab   lojjori    ke    na/dik    'azi/.  tho.  kyiin    liamen  aisa  dekli    nhe    ho,    ki 


Aur  Khuddwand  bar  ros  im  ko, 

n  u  nftj&l  pai,  faUWyfl  mm  mil:U:'t  h 


tha. 

III  BA'B. 

PAS  Patrus  aur  Yiihannd^k    siil.li 
du'd  ke  waqt  tisre   pahftr  Imikal 
ko  chale. 

2  Aur  log  janam  kd  ok  langrd  liyo 
jdte  tue,  jise  har  roz  Idke  haikal  ke  us 
darwaze  par,  jo  Khubsumt  kahldtd 
hai,  bithdte  the,  ki  haikal  ke  jdnewdlon 
so  bhikh  mAnfir  ; 

3  Jabus  uePatru*  BUI  Yiilianiiri  ko 
haikal  mi;n  jate  dekhd,  un  se  bhikh 
mangi : 

4  Par  Patnis  ne  Yuhanna  ke  sdth 
un  par  nazar  karke  kaha,  ki  Hamari 
taraf  dekli. 

5  Wuh  lo  is  ommed  par,  ki  uu  ae 
kuchh  pawe,  uti  ko  tak  raha. 

6  Tab  Patrus  ae  kaha,  Rupa  aur 
soua  niere  pds  nahiii ;  par  jo  niere  pds 
hai,  tajin  detil  lilin;  Y\s&'  Masih 
N  asari  ke  iiiim  «e  ut.h,  aur  chal. 

7  Aur  us  kd  dah'ini  hath  pakarku 
minya;  usi  dam  us  ke  paijw  aur 
taklme  mazbiit  ho  gayc. 

H  Aur  wuh  ki'uike  k  hara  hud,  aur 
chalnc  laga,  aur  kiidtd  phdndta,  aur 
Khudd  ki  ta'rif  kartd,  un  ko  sdth 
haikal  meij  gaji. 

9  Aur  sab  logon  ne  use  chalte  phirte 
aur  Khudd  ki  ta'rif  karto  dekhd: 

10  Aur  unkopahchaua.kiyih  wuhi 
hai  jo  haikal  ko  Khubsurst  dlrwto 

bhikh  nidngno  bait  ha  tha:  aur 


iya  bani  un  apni  qudrat  ya  ilimlari 

us  shakhs  ko  chalnc-  ki  taqat  di  ? 

18  Abirahauiaur  Iz.h&M  aur  Ya'qul> 
ke  Khudd  ue,  hainare  bapdddou  ke 
Khudd  ne,  apne  Bet.e  Yisu'  ku  jaldl 
liiyd,  jise  turn  ne  hawdla  kiyd,  aur 
Pilatiis  ke  huziir,  jab  us  nechhordcnd 
insdf  j&na,  inkdr  kiya. 

14  Han,  tum  ne  us  Quddiis  aur 
Tldstkdr  kd  inkdr  kiyd,  aur  ohdhd  ki 
ek  khuni  tumhdre  liye  chhord  jde : 

18  Flii  rindag)  ko  Malik  ko  qatl 
iyd,  jise  Khudd  ne  murdon.  men  ae 
uthdyd  ;  aur  haru  usko  gawdh  hain. 

lf)  lisi  ke  ndm  ne,  us  iman  ke 
maflfl  j"  aa  ke  bAxb  par  hai,  is  absklu 
ko,  jise  tum  dekhteaur  jaut.e  ho,  ma» 
but  kiyd;  tidri,  usi  iman  ae,  Jo  08  ki 
tvkf  ae  hid,  yili  kaniil  t.auduruKti  tum 
sab  ke  sauihne  uaedi. 

17  Aur  ab,  ai  bhdio,  main  jdntd 
hnn  ki  tum  ne  yih  ndddni  kg  kiyd, 
jaisi!  liimhirc  sardaruti  ne  bhi. 

iw  l'ar  jin  baton  ki  Khudd  ne  ap- 
ne sab  nabiun  ki  zubani  dg«  sc  kha- 
bar  di  tlii,  ki  Masih  dukh  uthawegd, 
BO  puri  kiri. 

1^  ^(  Pas  taulwi  karo,  aur  pbiro,  ki 
tumhdre  gunah  mit.de  jden,  td  Ki  Khu- 
dawand  ke  huaur  se  tdzagi-ljakhsh 
rtiyaui  :v.v>u  : 

20  Aur  wuh  YisiV  Masih  ko  phir 
bhejc,  jis  ki  manddi  tum  logog  ke 
dsrmiydu  dge  so  h(ii. 

21  Zan'ir  hai  ki  asmdn  use  liye 
rahe,  uu  ^amdnon  tak  ki  sab  eldzen, 


niajarc  se,  jo  u*i  par  gtizrd  thd,  dangljin  kd  zikr  Khudd  i 


aivr  hairdn  hue. 
11  Aur  jis   waqt   wuh   lai 
155 


aab  pak 


nabion  ki  zubdni  dunya  ke  skuni'  ae 
;ra,   jo  [kiya,  apni  hdlat  pnr  dwen. 


I'atrtts  aur  Yuhannd  A'AMA 

22  Kyunki  Musi  ne  to  bapdidon 
so  kiikA,  ki  Klmiliiwiiud,  fa  tumhari 
Khudi  hai,  tunihire  bkaiog  men  se 
tumhdre  liyu  ok  nabi  inori  milnind 
barpd  kaivgA;  jt>  kuchh  wuh  tumben, 
kahe,  us  k  i  sah  suno. 

23  Aur  nii.ii  hogA,  ki  bar  nafs  jo 
us  nabi  ki  na  suno,  wuh  qaum  men 
se  nest  kiyA  jdegA. 

21  Baiki  nab  nabion  ne,  Sarauel  se 
loke  pichhluii  lak,  jitnon  no  kalam 
kiya,  in  dinon  ki  khabar  di  hai. 

25  Tum  nabion.  ki  nulad,  aur  us 
'ahd  ki  ho,  jo  Khudi  ne  hamAro  KAp- 
iliid.iij  ■■■■•-  b&ntibA  tuu,  jab  AMrahun 
se  kaki,  Baiki  teri  aulad  se  diuiyi  ke 
sire  ghardne  harakat  pawenge. 

26  TumhAre  pas  KhudA  ne  apne 
Beto  Yisii'  ko  utkike  pahlo  bhejA,  ki 
tum  men  se  bar  ek  ko  us  ki  badion  se 
phorko  harakat  dc. 

IV  BA' II. 

JAB  wo  logou  se  yih  kah  rahe  the, 
kabin,  aur  haikal  ki  «ardir,  aur 
Sadikp,  un  par  charh  ie ; 

2  Kyunki  naraz  htie  ki  we  logog 
lin  sikhiim  tho,  aur  Yisii'  ke  sabah  $ti 
murdon  ke  ji  utbne  ki  khabar  dete 
tho. 

3  Aur  utilion  nc  un  par  hAth  dalu, 
aiu- diisre  din  tak  paure  men  inklii: 
kydiiki  sbim  ho  gayi  thi. 

4  Par  kakutero  un  nion  so,  jinborj 
ne  kalii.ii]  suni,  iman  lie ;  aur  un 
logon  ki  ginti  jidnek  hazAr  ke  qarib 
thi. 

5  %  Aur  diisre  diu  yun  ki'iA,  ki  un 
ko  sardiir,  aur  buzurg,  aur  faejih, 

6  Aur  sarddr  kdhin  Annds,  u  Qayi- 
fi,  aur  YnhannA,  aur  Iskandar,  aur 
jitne  audit  kabin  ke  ghariue  ke  tlie, 
YaniKalam  men  jam'i  lu'ie. 

7  Aur  mi  ko  ldcb  men  kliarikarke 
pdchha,  ki  Tum  ne  kis  hjtiddr  aur  kis 
nain  se  yih  kivA  ? 

8  Tah  Patrus  no   Ruh   i   Quds 
ma'mfir  koke  un  se  kahA,  Ai  qaum  ke 
sardar».  aur  ai  IsrAal  ke  buzur; 

156 


L,  IV.    Sadr  Majlis  ke  dge  lidzir  hote. 

U  Agaf  sij  ham  ne  is  ihsan  ki  liA- 
bat,  jo  is  za'if  ndmi  par  hai,  ptichhd 
jata  hai,  k  i  wuh  kyuiikar  changd 
hda; 

10  To  tum  sab,  aur  Iuraiil  ki  siiri 
qaum  ko,  rna'ldni  ho,  ki  Y  isu'  Masih 
NAaari  ko  nam  se,  jis  ko  tum  no  salib 
di,  aurjise  Khuda  ne  munhm  ineij  H 
phir  utkiyi,  usi  se  yih  mard  tumhare 
sduihno  bhala  changA  k  bara  hai. 

1  I  Vili  wuhi  patthar  hai,  jise  tum 
mi'amaron  no  nachiz  jinA,  jo  koue  ka 
sira  ho  gaya. 

12  Aur  kisi  diisre  se  najit  nahirj : 
kyunki  Asinan  ko  tale  admiog  ko  koi 
dilari  nim  nahin  baklmhii  gayi,  jis  se 
ham  najit  pd  saken. 

13  1  Jab  unhon  ne  Patrus  aur 
Yuhanna  ki  dileri  dokbi,  aur  daryiil't 
kiyi  ki  we  l>e-'ikn  aur  'awAmm  men 
se  Jiaiii,  to  ta'ajjub  kiyi :  phir  ma'liiin 
kiyi,  ki  we  Yisi'i'  ke  satli  the. 

14  Aur  us  shakhs  ko,  jo  changi 
hrt;i  thi,  itu  ko  sath  kliare  dekhke 
kuchh  khlldf  na  kab  saken. 

15  Par  uubeii  bnkiii  karke  ki  maj- 
lis  se  babar  jao,  ipas  men  saldb  karne 
lago, 

1G  Yih  kahke,  ki  Ham  in  ddmitm 
sckydkaren?  kyi'njki  ok  wirih  mu'- 
ajisy»  mdiMn  ne  dikhlaya,  jo  Yardbalnm 
ke  aab  rahnewalon  ]iar  zaliir  bai ;  aur 
ham  is  ki  inkdr  nalu'n  kar  sakte, 

17  Lekin  td  ki  yih  logou  mon 
ziydda  maslihur  na  ho,  ham  unhen 
khnb  dbamkdwerj,  ki  phir  is  ndm  se 
kina  iidiiii  ko  na  bolen. 

IH  Tab  unhen  bid'ake  tikid  ki,  ki 
Yisu'  ke  ndm  par  hargiz  na  bolen,  aur 
ta'iiin  na  derj. 

19  Par  Patrus  aur  Yuliannd  ne  ja- 
wab men  unhen  kahi,  Tum  hi  insdf 
karo,  ki  Khudi  ke  nazdik  yih  durust 
bai,  ki  kara  Khudi  ki  bit  ae  tumbari 
bit  ziyAila  suii«i. 

20  Kyiinki  mumkiu  nuliin,  ki  ji> 
ham  nc  dekhi,  aur  suni  hai,  so  na 
kabem 


Rihdi  par  unfai  nhnhr  !:ar>,d.    A 'AMAT,. 

21  Tab  unhog  ne  un  k»  aur  dham- 
kdke  olifaor  dlyd,  kyiinki  logon  ke 
tabitb  un  ki  sazd  deue  ki  koi  rih  na 
;  ;ii,  i-  Hya  ki  nah  log,  BI  mijare  ke 
bd'is,  Khudd  ki  tarif  karte  the ; 

i'ii  Ki  wuh  (bakhs,  jis  ko  changd 
karne  se  yih  rmi'aji«a  zdhir  hiid,  cha- 
Ufi  baru  ke  iip.tr  thd. 

23  %  Ph  r  w  chhiilko  apno  logon  ke 
pis  gaya,  aur  jo  kuchli  sardar  kdhinon 
aur  buzurgon  ne  un  se  kabd  tha,  ba- 
yan kiyi. 

24  Jab  unhon  ne  yili  sund,  tu  ck- 
dil  hoke  Khudd  ki  taraf  dwdz  buland 
[L  nir  kulisi,  ki  Ai  Rabi),  til  wuh 
Kliuda  hai,  jis  ne  dsman,  aur  /amin, 
aur  samundar,  aur  sab  kuchh  jo  un 
men.  hai,  paidi  kiyd ; 

25  Tu  no  kpne  hande  Didd  ki  zu- 
hani  knha,  ki  Uair-qaitmon  ne  kyiin 
dhiim  niachai,  aur  logon  ne  batil 
khiyal  kiye? 

26  Klmdawatid  aur  us  ke  Masih  ke 
barkhiiaf  hoke  zamin  ke  hadshih 
uf.hu,  aur  sarddr  hdhum  jam'a  hde. 

27  Sach,  ki  tere  quddiis  Hetc  YirnV 
ke,  jise  tii  no  Masih  kiyd,  barkhiiaf 
lioku  BmmUi  aur  Puntius  Pilitus 
^lir-o^unuon  aur  Israel!  logon  ke  s&th 
jam'a  luii:, 

28  Ta  ki  jis  ki  honii  tere  liith 
tere   iradc   ne   ige   ae   t  h  ah  r  A    rak  h  a 
'amal  men  lawcti. 

29  Ab,  ai  Khuddwand,  un  ki  dliain- 
kion  ko  dckh :  aur  apno  bandon  ko 
yih  bakhnh,  ki  «e  kamal  dileri  m  terd 
kalam  «imdwen, 

30  Jab  ki  tii  apnd  hdth  changi 
karne  ko  phaild  de ;  aur  tere  qiuldus 
Ttitu  Yisi't'  ko  i  ia  tn  se  nishdnian  aur 
achainbhe  zdhir  DOB> 

31  T|  Aur  jab  we  du'A  mdng  chu- 
ke,  wuh  makin,  jaluiu  we  jam'a  tlic, 
hildyi  gaya :  aur  sab  Rdh  i  Quds  ne 
bh&f  gaye,  aur  Khudd  kd  kaldm  iileri 
te  maiae  lage. 

3L!  Aur  imdnddron  ki  jamd'at  ek-dil 
aur  ek-jdn  luii :  aur  kisi  ne  apno  mil 
157 


T,    Handntydh  n  S'i/ira  kdjhuih. 

i  apnd  na  kalia,   baiki   sdri    uhizon 

s'N  sharik  the. 

3*3  Aur  rasiilon  ne  bara  iqtiddr  m 
Khuddwand  Siri'  ke  ji  utune  par 
gawdhi  di :  aur  un  sab  par  bara  lasi 

m: 

34  Kyugki  k"i  un  inen  muhtdj  na 
tliiL:  is  liye  ki  jo  log  zamin  o  makdn 
ko  mdlik  the,  un  ko  lieehke  un  ki 
qimat  lite, 

35  Aur  rasiikm  ko  ptffwog  par 
rakhte  the:  aur  liar  ek  ku, us  ki  zaru- 
rat  ko  muwdfi'i,  baut  diyd  jdtd  thd. 

30  .Aur  Yriscs,  jis  kd  rasfilon  ne 
Rarnabds  (ya'ne,  Nasihat  kd  betd,) 
ndm  rakhd,  jo  qaum  kd  Ldwi  aur 
paiddiiih  so  Kunrusi  thd, 

37  Ek  khotrakhtd  thd,  uso  Wchke, 
aur  us  ki  qimat  lake,  rasulon  ke  pdn- 
par  rakhi. 

V  BA'B. 

ATTR  Hananiydh  ndme  ek  niard  aur 
us  ki  joni  Safird  ne  apni  milki- 
yat  btehi, 

2  Aur  qimat  men  se  kuchh  rakh 
chhont;  bo  us  ki  joni    lihi  jani.i  thi ; 

kuchh   ldke  ra.au Ion   ke  pdnwon 
par  rakh». 

3  Tab  Patrus  ne  kahd,  Ai  Hana- 
niydh, kyun  Shaitan  tero  dil  men 
samdyd,  ki  "tii  Hiili  i  Quds  se  jhuth 
boU-,  aur  namin  ki  qimat  men  se  kuchh 
rakb  ehbore? 

4  Kyd  jab  tak  tere  pds  thi,  teri  na 
thi?  aur  jab  bechi  gayi,  tere  ikhtiydr 
men  na  rahi?  tii  ne  kyfiri  is  bit  ko 
apne  'dil  men  jagah  di  i  tii  ailinion  se 
nahin,  baiki  Khudii  ne.  jlnith  bo!i, 

5  Yih  bdten  BUUte  hl  HaiidniyAh 
gir  para,  aur  us  ka  dam  nikal  gaya : 
aur  sab  ko  jinhon  ne  yih  sund  liari 
khauf  dya. 

6  Aur  jawdnon  no  uthko  uso  kaf- 
naya,  aur  bdbar  le  jake  gara. 

7  Jab  ghante  tin  ek  g'uzro,  us  ki 
joni  is  inijaro  so  be-khabar  hoke  bhi- 
tar  di. 

8  Patruri  ne  OM  kahd,  Mujh  se  kah, 


Busaiun  hi,q<nd  tsechltttf  jchia.  A'AMA'I 
Kyi  zamiu  itne  lit  par  bechi?  Ub!^ 
nc  k ^ Ini,  Hiu,  itne  par. 

i*  Fhir  Piitrus  ne  use  kaha.  Tum 
DC  kyvhj  ekd  kiya,  ki  Khudawand  ki 
K'ih  ko  izmdo?  del;h,  tere  shauhar 
ke  gdrnewalou  ku  pdnw  darwaze  par 
halo,  aur  tujlie  bhi  bahar  lu  jAuiiye. 

10  Tab  wuiiliin  ua  ke  parnmij  pas 
girke  uh  ka  dam  nikal  gaya;  aur  ja- 
wdnon  ne  bhitar  Ake  uae  murda  paya, 
aur  bahar  le  jike  us  ke  sbauhar  pas 
gdra. 

•  11  Aur    taradm   kalisiyd,  aur  aab, 
jiiiImuj  ue  yib  suna,  bahut  dar  gaye. 

12  If  Aur  ruBiilon  ke  hathon  se 
balmt  si  ninhinlan  aur  mu'ajizc  logon 
ke  danniydn  ziihir  kiye  gaye;  (nur 
we  sab  ek-dil  huke  Sulaiman  ke  bard- 
made  men  ikatthe  the. 

13  Par  auro'n  meii  nc  kisi  kd  hiwdo 
ua  para,  ki  un  meQ  ja  mile :  magar  log 
uri  ki  tu'rif  karte  the. 

14  Aur  aur  bhi  ziydda  mard  aur 
'auratey,  baiki  guroh  ki  guroh,  Khudd- 
waod  pai  iman  lake  un  men,  slidmil 
kote  the.) 

15  Yahin  tak  ki  log  liimAroii  ko 
sarakun  par  kike  charpakm  aur  kha- 
tol&n  par  rakhte  the,  Ia  ki  jab  l'atrus 
awi!,  uh  kd  sdya  hi  un  men  so  kisii  juir 
H|  jaw.'. 

ib'  Aur  chdron  taraf  ke  shakron  ke 
log  bimdrort  ko,  aur  un  ko  ju  napdk 
nih'j'j  tas  satdo  the,  lake  Yarusalam 
men  jaru'a  hue;  so  sab  change  kiye 
gaye. 

1T  ^f  Tab  nardiir  kabin  aur  us  ke  sab 
sdtbi,  (jo  Saddqi  ke  firqe  ku  tlu.i  dijh 
H  bliarko  u  the, 

18  Aur  raHiloii  pai  LaLh  dai  t,  aur 
nnbt'u  i^aidkhduu  i  'amin  nun  band 
kiyd. 

19  Par  KlmdawiWid  ke  A  firinhte 
M  nil  koqaidkkdne  ku  darwaze  kkole, 
nur  uiilic'Tj  liaiiar  lu  aku  kahd, 

20  Jao,  aur  haikiil  men  khare  bnke 
la  zitidagi  ki  sab  bdten  logon  s*1  kano. 

21  We  yih  sunke  l:nki-  haikal  men 

158 


Un  ka,  'uzr 
iikhlinu  [gas,  Par  sardar 
kabin  aur  us  ke  eathion  nc  dke  Sadr 
Majlis  ko  aur  lm.nl  Israel  ke  buzurgflg 
kijama'atko  ikatl.be  kiyi,  aur  qaid- 
kliani!  men  kahla  blu'ji,  ki  unh™ 
laweg. 

22  Magar  piyddoy  ne  r«ihi:uchke 
imhrn  qalokh£ae  iiiru  n:i  paya,  aur 
phir  dke  khabar  di, 

23  Aur  kalia,  ki  Haui  ne  to  qaid- 
kbane  ko  ban  khabardari  se  band,  aur 
chaukiilAron  ko  bahar  darwazon  par 
khara  paya :  par  jab  khola,  to  kn6  ko 
andar  na  pAya. 

21  Jonhin  sardar  kabin,  aur  huikat 
l;r  wneOt,  aur  sardar  kahmon  ue  yili 
bdt  suni,  un  ki  babat  ghabrf  gayo,  ki 
kya  horf. 

25  Tab  ki^iu  nc  ake  unlicrj  khabar 
di,  ki  l>ekho,  wo  mard,  jinben  trum  nc 
aaiukhane  roen  dtila  tha,  haikal  mau 
fehare  logon  ko  sikhliite  bain. 

26  7»b  haikal  ka  sardir  piyadon 
ke  sdth  jftke  unhen  laya,  lekin  zalar- 
dast.i  M  naliin  :  kyaiiki  Ujm  se  darto 
tbo.ki  alaS  nn  ho  ki  ham  parpattbrao 
karen. 

27  Aur  unhen  lake  Majlis  ke  bicli 
rnen  khara  kiyii :  tab  sardar  kabin  ne 
tiu  H  yili  kanta  jn'n'hha, 

28  Kyi  ham  nc  tura  tw  bari  takid 
na  ki,  ki  is  nain  par  ta'lim  na  denaV 
par,  di'kbo,  tum  ne  Yan'tsalam  ko 
apni  ta'lim  se  bhar  diya,  aur  i»  «haklu 
ka  kitin  ham  par  l:lya  chaht«  ho. 

2il  T  Tab  Patrtw  aur  rasulon  ne 
jawab  men  kahd,  Ham  ko  Kkudd  ki 
buku  aVmiion  ke.  tiukm  £ti  ziydda 
liiaiina  farz  hai. 

30  Hanidre  bd|idddou  ke  Khuda  ne 
Yisii'  ko  uthAyd.jise  tum  ne  kdth  par 
laik  Ake  mar  daki. 

81  U'al  ko  Khudi  ne  Milik  aur 
NajAt-denewdta  ihahrako  npne  dabinc 
lidth  par  buland  kiyd,  tdki  Israel  ko 
lauba  aur  gtmahon  ki  niuail  bakbehe. 

32  Aur  ham  in  baton  par  us  ke 
^awali  hain;  aur  liiili  i  Q.uds  bhi,  jiae 


Haj  i  i*  kr.  sdmhne.  A'AMA 

Kliuda  ne  unimu,  jo  us  ki  tabi'-dari 
kartu  naifi,  bakhshd  bai. 

33  ^  Wh  yib  aunkc  kat  gaye,  aur 
s4du.li  ki  ki  unlit'ii  qatl  karcu. 

34  Tab  Garnaliel  iidmock  larisi  ne, 
jo  ariari'at  k%  inu'altim,  aur  anu  iogon 
nien  'uwtdar  thd,  UljjUa  men  utukt 
bukm  diya,  ki  rasuki  n  ko  mrra  bahar 
lojao; 

35  Aur  unhen.  kabti,  ki  Ai  Isrieli 
mardo,  ap  ae  khabardar  lio,  ki  tum  in 
admiorj  ko  s&th  k.vi  kiya  cbabte  bo; 

3o  fvyiinki  indinon  ku  dge  Theudds 
a«  uthke  kaha,  ki  Main  kuclih  lilin 
aur  takbftiinan  cbar  sau  mani  u»  w 
mil  gaye ;   wuh  mara  gayit,  aur  sab 

t"ine  uh  ke  tdbi'  tbc,  pareshan  o  tabib 
de. 

37  Ba"d  us  ke  YaliudAh  Jalili  i*m- 
cawlsi  ke  dirion  men  utha,  aur  baliut 

■  .-;ipii'/  i'ifhha  khinchi:  wuh 
bbt  balak  hua,aur  sab,jitnuuaket4bi' 
tbe,  cbliitar  bitar  bo  gayc. 

38  Aur  ab  main  tumben  kabtil 
hun,  ki  Iti  admiog  su  kinfira  karo, 
un  ko  jane  do :  kyfmki  agar  yib  tadbir 
yd  kaui  insan  se  hai,  to  zdi'  hogi : 

iti)  I'ar  agar  Khuda  se  liai,  to  tum 
BflB  zdi'  nabi  n  kar  aakte ;  aiad  ua  bo 
kitum  Khudd  se  bbi  larncwalc  tliabro. 

40  Unhorj  riH  ua  ki  mani :  aur  ra- 
sdlon  ko  pii»  bulake  koj-e  marc,  aur 
Imkin  kiya,  ky  Yisu'  ka  uam  par  bal 
na  karna ;  tab  unhen  cahor  diya. 

il  K  Pas  we  Majlia  ke  huzur  ae 
chalegaye,  aur  khush  biie,  ki  baru  [a 
Uiu  to  tlmhro  k'i  un  ke  nim  ke  liye 
be-burmat  howen. 

41i  Aur  we  hai1  Kffl  liaikal  men,  aur 
«bar  gitar  sikhlane,aur  Yili1  Mtrifa  ki 
k  Mistik  babari  dana  K  bir,  ua  rake. 

VI  BA'B. 
N  umur;    un  Jafe  shagird  bahut 
hote  the,  Yunani-iua.il  Yahudi 
'Ibr&nicn  ss  kurkurauo  lagc,  kyunki  un 
ki  bawaon   ke  tOB  ki  khnbargiri   iniin 
eafiat  hnti  taf. 
159 


C 


'L,  VI.  &U  admi  cftune  jdie. 

U  Tab  un  barahon  ne  sbagirdon  ki'. 
gol  ko  bdham  bulake  kahd,  AchehM 
nahifl  lagti  ki  ham  Khuda  ke  kalini 
ko  ubborko  ruezori  ki'kbidmat  karey. 

3  Pataj  ai  bhaio,  apne  nion  te  i» 
mii'atabat  abakhs  ko,  jo  Kdb  i  Quda 
aur  danai  se  bharc  horj,  ubuno,  ki  baiu 
un  ko  U  kam  par  munarrar  karerj. 

«i  Aur  bain  dp  dud  aur  kalam  ki 
khidnmt  nit'n  niaahgill  rahengt. 

5  ^  Aur  yib  bac  sari  jaruii'at  ko 
pasand  di :  aur  unbon  ne  Btafknils 
nirae  ek  mard  ko,  jo  iman  aur  Hiih  i 
Quda  se  bbard  thd,  aur  FailbdB,  aur 
Prukhtwus,  »nr  Kiqduur,  aur  Tiumu, 
aur  Pdrruauds,  aur  Niqulas  Antaki  ek 
Yalnidi  murid  ko,  c  huni : 

U  Inuen  rasiikm  koage  khara  kiyd  ; 
aur  unboii  ne  du'a  maugke  tipm.'  liiilb 
UD  BU  raklu'. 

7  Aur  KJiudaka  kalam  plwil  gayi  ; 
aur  Yatusalarii  mun  shagirdon,  !id 
ahumar  habut  bi  barb  gaya :  aur 
kaliiuoii  ki  bari  gurob  iman  ke  tdbi' 
hul 

8  Aur  Stafauus  iman  aur  ijuwat  se 
ma'tnur  hoko  bare  baru  mu'aSse  aur 
iiisbdiiian  logon  ku  bicb  ndbir  karta 
rahd. 

9  f  Tab  us  'iMdatkbane  se,  jo 
Liljarlinon  ki  'ibadat.k'jdi)a  kaiMti 
hai,  aur  Qurenum.  aur  lakandarioii, 
aur  uu  a\en  ac  jo  Qiliv\iya  aur  Asia  ae 
an,  ba'zc  nthkii  Hiaianus  se  btibs  karno 
lage. 

10  fttrwe  M  dduat  aur  n'ih  ka,  jin  no 
»mli  kalam  karta  thri,  sdmbni  ua  kar 
nfc«B< 

i;  Thb  ualion  no  ha*x0  mardon  ko 
;anthd,  ki  kaborj,  ki  Hant  no  us  ko 
diisi  aur  Kbudd  ki  ni.sl«;  kui'r  hiktu 
aund. 

i  Tab  unborj  ne  logon,  aur  hu- 
«urgou,  aur  £aqihorj  ko  ubhS.r4,  aur  us 
pai'  cbiiru  ae,  aur  pakarku  Siidr  Majlia 
men  \n  gaye, 

13  Aur  jbuthe  gnwabon  ko  khara 
k  yii ;  unhoii  no  kaha,  ki   *ii  «iiakni 


Sttywntu  apm  hichno 

is  jidk  ninkdn  aur  slmri'at  k(  nisbat 

kuf'r  baknp  H  biK  naliiij  dtd  : 

14  Kyunki  liam  ne  use  yih  kahte 
sirna,  ki'WuM  Yisfl'  Naaarf  ifl  makan 
];'■  diiaegd,  nur  un  rasnmn  ko>jo  Musa 
ki  ma*rSkt  hamen  pahunchig,  bada! 
dilegA. 

15  Tab  sabhnn  ne,  jo  majlis  men 
baitao  tho,  us  par  gaur  se  nazar  ki ; 
unherj  us  ka  ehihra  firislitu  ka  sa 
ehihra,  nazar  dyd. 

VIT  BA'R. 

TAB  sarddr  kdhin  no  kaha,  Kyd  yc 
hdr.en  y&nhia  hain? 

2  Wnli  hobi,  Ai  bbaio,  aur  ai  (Iba, 
stmo ;  ki  KhudA  c  zn-1-jald)  hamirfl 
bdp  Abirahdra  par,  jis  waqt  wul 
MasuputArniya  mcn  tha,  peshtar  us  ke 
ki  wun  H  amin  meu  $4  bui,  zabir  lnia, 

3  Aur  use  kaili,  ki  Apne  mulk  aur 
apnckhanddn  meu  u  nikul  ja,  aur  us 
mulk  mcn  jise  main  tujhe  dikhdnngd 
chalii  jd. 

■1  Tafc  KhaHion  ke  mulk  so  bahar 
jdkc  liarrin  mcn  ja  raha :  aur  wahdn 
se,ua  kcbdpko  nmrne  ke  ba'd,Khudd 
n«  us  ko  is  mulk  mon.jia  men  tum  ab 
rahte  ho,  pahimchdyd. 

5  Aur  us  ko  kuchh  miras,  baiki 
cradam  rakhiur  ki  jagah,  «s  nien  na  di  : 
par  wa'da  kiya,  ki  Main  yib  Basahi 
tujhe,  aur  tere  ba'd  teri  nasi  ko,  iluij^i, 
ki  terf  milkiy.Jt  ho  jdo,  ftgarobl  us  ka 
kol  larkd  na  thd. 

6  Aur  Kbudd  ne  yiin  farmaya,  ki 
Teri  nasi  begano  mulk  incn  ja  rahcgi ; 
aur  we  im  ko  gulana  *nen  rskbonin, 
aur  cbar  sau  haras  tak  bad-suluki 
karengEO. 

7  Phir  Khndd  ne  kalii,  ki  Main  us 
tpHim  ki.  p  ki  gulami  roerj  wo  ra- 
henge,  'adJJat  karunia :  aur  ba'd  us  ke 
m  biliar  awem;",  aur  isi  jagah.  mori 
bandagi  bazenge. 

y  Aur  ub  no  us  ec  khatne  ki  'atid 
kira  ;  so  us  so  iz,Mq  paki»  bdd,  aur 
dthwen  din  na  ka  klmtna  kivd;   aur 
"100 


A'AMA'L,  VII.  'uzrkarta. 

Iz,hdq  se  Ya'qob,  aur  Ta'qdb  se  bdrah 
gbnrdno»  ku  bani  paidd  hi'ie. 

9  Aur  ntd&roQ  no  riah  so  YucuF  ko 
bechd,  ki  Miwr  rneu  le  jden.  :  par  Kbudd 
ua  ko  sath  tha, 

10  Aur  use  us  ki  sab  musibaton  so 
nikala,  aur  use  Misr  ke  badshau  Fira'- 
fin  ko  buKur  maqbdttyat  aur  hikmat 
liakbshi :  aur  us  ne  use  Misr  aur  apiio 
Ndie  ghar  ka  mukhtar  kiya. 

U  Ab  Miur  ke  saro  mulk  aur  Kan- 
":lii  men  k:i.i  i>ara,  aur  bari  muciibat  di : 
aur  hamarc  bdpdddon  ku  kbdud  mu- 
yausar  nahin  Ata  tha. 

12  I.fkin  YaJq«b  ne  sunko  ki  Misr 
men  andj  hai,  hamdre  bapdddon  ko 
pahli  bdr  bheja. 

13  A  ur  duri  bar  Yilsiif  npne  bhdion 
par  zdbir  Im  gaya ;  aur  Yusuf  ka 
ghariuj  Flra'fo  no  nia'lum  hua. 

14  Tab  Yrisuf  ne  apne  bdp  Ya'rjiib 
aur  uh  ke  sare  kunbc  ko,  jo pacliliattar 
ibakha  the,  buld  bheii. 

15  Aur  Ya'nub  Misr  men  gayd; 
wahan  wuli  aur  hiimare  bdptladtt  mar 


lfi  Aur  wo  ua  ko  Sikm  mcn  lo 
gaye,  aur  us  mautmre  men,  jia  ko 
AbirabAtn  no  bani  Hai  nur  Sikm  ko 
bdp  so  rfipiya  deke  mol  liyd  tbd,  s*!^- 

17  Pas  j'ih  us  wa'da  kd  waqt,  jis 
k(  Kbudd  ne  AbirahAm  i«oqasftin  khdi 
thi,  nazdik  dyd,  lu^  Misr  men  barline 
aur  bahiit  bone  lage, 

18  Us  waqt  tak  ki  dusrd  U&Bh£h 
nthd,  jo  Y6suf  ko  na  jdntd  thd. 

19  Us  ne  hamdri  qaum  se  fitrat 
karke  hamaro  bapdadim  se  bad-suluki 
ki,  yahdrj  tak  ki  us  ne  un  ko  chhote 
larkon  ko  phenkwd  diya,  td  ki  wo  jiie 
na  ralicn. 

20  Us  waqt  Miisi  paidd  hud,  jo 
nilidyat  khubsurat  tbd ;  us  ne  tin 
iTialiiuo  tak  apne  bdp  ke  ghar  men 
panvarish  pii : 

21  M  agar  jab  ki  wuh  phenkd  gaya. 
FiraYm  ki  beti  m  use  u  tha  liyA,  aur 
us  ko  apnd  betd  karke  ]>dl(L 


$t<zfanus  apne  bachao  ineii       A'AMA' 

22  Aur  Miisa  ne  Mi^riun  ki  tamani  I 
hikmat  inun  tarbiyat  pai,  aur  kalam 
n  kain  men  wihtb  i  iijtidir  t  lift. 

23  Aur  jab  wuh  piire  ctiilis  baras 
ki  hiia,  us  ke  ji  men  Ayi,  ki  jakc  apne 
lihai  baui  Israel  ki  khabar  h. 

24  Tab  t-k  ko  zulm  uthate  dekhkar 
us  ki  himayat  ki,  aur  Miari  kojinse 
marke  us  ka,  ji»  par  zulni  hu.i  t  ha, 
badla  liya : 

25  KyTiiiki  us  ne  khiyal  k  iya,  ki 
mere  bhai  nsajbegae  ki  Khmta  BMN 
liith  so  uuheri  chutkari  degi :  l>ar  we 
na  namjhe. 

2fl  Phir  dusro  din,  jab  we  larte  tho. 
unhen  dikhii  diya,  aur  un  lio  yuQ 
kahke  mila  dene  ehihi,  ki  Ai  inardu, 
tum  to  bhai  bo;  kyiin  «k  dusre  par 
zulm  kartc  taf 

27  Ltkin  us  ne,  jo  apne  paraui  par 
buIiu  karfa  tha,  use  yih  kahke  batara, 
ki  Kib  ne  tujhe  ham  par  hakim  aur 
<pizi  thahriyi  hai? 

2ti  Kya  jis  tarah  kai  us  Misri  |C0 
(jati  kiya,  tu  mujho  oatl  kiya  chahta 

bal? 

2'J  Musi  to  is  bit  par  bhagi,  aur 
Midyan  ko  mulk  men  ji  raha;  wahaii 
us  ke  do  belo  paida  hfic. 

30  Aur  jab  chalis  baris  pure  huc, 
tab  Khudawand  ka  Srishta,  Sini  ke 
;>;ili  ir  k>-  kiyabiii  men,  ;il'  k  i  lau  men, 
jhari'kc  Viich,  mu  dikhai  diya. 

31  Musa  ne  yih  royat  dekhke 
ta'ajjub  kiya:  aur  jab  daryaft  kar- 
ne  ko  uazdik  cbala,  Khudawand  ki 
awaz  use  pahunchi, 

32  Ki  Main  t-ere  bapdadoB  ka 
Kbiuhi,  Abirahain  ka  Khuda,  aur 
Iz,haq  ka  Khuda,  aur  Ya'qub  ka  Khu- 
da  hun,  Tah  Musa  kamp  gaya,  aur 
use  daryaft  kanio  ki  jur,at  na  bui. 

33  lab  Khudawand  ne  use  kah&, 
ki  Jiiti  apno  parjwoji  se  utar:  kytinki 
yib  jagab,  jaiiAn  tu  khari  hai,  pAk 
zamin  hai. 

31  Main   nigih   karke   apne   logon 
ki,  jo  Miar  men  hain,  munibat  dekh 
161 


T,,  VII.  W  harta. 

raha  hun,  aur  main  ne  un  ki  ah  mami 
suni,  aur  unhen,  chhuraue  utn't  linu. 
Aur  ab  a,  maiti  tujhc  M  iur  luey  bhe- 

35  TJsi  Musa  ko,  jis  se  unhon  ne 
ink&r  karke  kahi,  ki  Kis  ne  lujLe 
hakim  aur  ejazi  bauiya  ?  usi  ko  KhudA 
no,  us  iirishte  ki  ina'rifat  jo  use  jhari 
mi:u  nazar  ayi,  bhejA,  ki  hakim  aur 
ohliutkarA-deuewAlA  ho. 

36  W  ubi  uuheri  m'kil  liyA,  aur 
ffin  ke  miilk,  aur  i,al  Marnuudur,  aur 
chalis  bnras  bayabdn  men,  mu'ajize 
aur  nishaniac  dikhata  raha. 

37  1f  Yih  wuhi  Miisa  hai,  jis  nc 
bani  Israel  m  kaha,  ki  Khudawami, 
jo  tumhara  Khuda  hai,  tuniharu 
l>KiJ!n!j  men  se,  tumhare  liye,  mujb 
sa  ek  nabi  zahir  karega;  u.-»  ki  suno. 

38  Yih  wuhi  h;ii,  jo  bayaban  raen 
majiis  ke  dariniyan,  us  uriahte  ke,  jo 
us  bc  Sini  ke  pahir  par  bola,  aur 
hamare  bapihUlon  ke,  satu  (ha:  usi  ko 
zindagj  ki  kalam  mili,  ki  linu  lu 
pilmncha  de: 

3fl  Par  hamai'e  Iwipdadon  nc  us  ki 
tabi'dar  boni  na  eliihii,  laiki  us  ko 
radd  kiyi,  aur  un  ke  dil  Mjw  ki  tami' 
phire: 

40  Aur  Hirun  se  kahi,  ki  Hamire 
liye  aise  ma'bt'td  barui,  jo  hamire  a^e 
ige  chaleg:  kyiinki  yih  Musi  jo 
hamen  Misr  ku  mulk  w;  nikal  laya, 
ham  nahin  janle  ki  use  kyi  hui. 

41  Aur  un  dinog  unhon  ne  ek 
bachhri  ban  iya,  aur  u»  but  ko  tpnbiiii 
charhii,  baiki  apne  hithon  k.-  i;:lm 
par  khushi  manik 

42*  Tab  KhuiU  ne  phirks  unhen 
chhor  diyi,  ki  ismdn  ki  fauj  ko  pujen  ; 
jaisi  ki  nabion  ki  kitab  men  likhi 
hai,  ki  Ai  briw  ke  gharanu,  kyi  Uuu 
ne  mujh  ku  bayabin  men  ehalin  baraa 
zabihe  aur  nazren  cbarbiin? 

43  Tum  ne  Malik  ke  khaiuie  aur 
apne  ma'bud  Bamfau  ke  tire  ko, 
ya'ue,  im  surat»»  ko  jinheii  tum  ne 
sijda  karne  ko  baniyi,  utui  liya  -,  pas 


main  tumben  nikalke  llabul  ke  pari 
bauaiingi. 

44  Shahadat  ka  kiaimu,  jaisA  Miia& 
se  baten-karnenalo  ne  fanu;iy;i.  th;i,  ki 
Ua  namune  ke  niuwAfii],  jo  tfi  ne  dekh£ 
thi,  bani,  bayiibati  men  hamire  bip- 
didon  ke  darniiyan  thit. 

45  Usc  hamire  bapdadc  aglon  se 
[wko,  Yasku'  ko  aath,  un  oiiamog  ki 
miras  leto  waqt,  jin.  ko  rjhuda  no 
hamarc  bapdadon  ke  wimhne  ."e  nikal 
diya.  Ide;  yih  hal  D&iid  ke  dinon  tak 
raha; 

40  Jib  par  Khuda  ko  huzur  so  fazl 
hi'ia,  aur  us  ne  ijazat  mangi,  ki  Ya'qiib 
ku  Khudi  ko  wasto  maakan  ka  thikina. 
dhundho, 

47  Tar  Sulaiman  nc  us  ke  liye 
makan  ban&ya, 

48  Lckin  Khuiii  Ta'Ala  un  haikalnn 
men,  jo  hath  se  ban  e  hain,  nahin 
ralifca ;  chuminebi  nabi  kabfci  hai,  ki 

40  Khudawand  farnititi.  hai,  A's- 
min  mera  takht,  aur  zamin  men  pSnw 
ki  cbauki  hai;  tura  mere  liye  kaunsa 
gliar  hanaogo?  yi  kaunsi  jagah  mere 
aram  k  i  hai  ? 

M)  Kya  more  hath  ne  yo  sab  diran 
nahin  ban&in  ? 

51  %  Ai  aarkasho,  aur  AU  aur  kau 
ke  iiA-makhtiiuo,  tiini  har  waqt  Ki'ih 
i  Qudt*  ki  «a m  lini  karte  b.01  jaiac 
tumhare  bdpdade  the,  waise  hi  tum 
bhi  ho. 

52  Nabion  men  se  kin  ko  tumhare 
biipdidon  no  na  sataya?  ban,  unhorj 
ne  Ua  Ristbaz  ke  Ane  ke  khabar-denc- 
waloij  ko  qatl  kiya;  jis  ke  ab  tum 
pakarnewale  aur  khfini  huc: 

53  Tum.  ne  firinhton  ke  waaile  ao 
shari'at  pai,  par  'amal  men  na  lic. 

54  %  We  ye  baUm  sunte  hi  apne  ji 
men  kat  gaye,  aur  us  par  dant  ptnifl 
lage. 

r>5  Par  wuh  Kuli  i  Quds  se  ma'mur 
bokcAainaH  ki  taraf  dek  h  rahi  tha>aur 
Khudi  ki  jalai,  aur  Yisu'  ko  Khudi 
ke  dahine  hath  kkara  bua  dukba, 
162 


A'AMA'L,  V 1 1  F.  paUhrm  karn-d. 

5fi  Aur  kahi.  Deklio,  main  asmin 
ko  khula,  aur  lhn  i  A'daru  ko  Khudi 
ke  dahine  hath  khare  dokhti  hiin. 

57  Tab  unhon  no  bnre  sor  so  chil- 
lako  apne  kAn  hand  kiye,  aur  ck  dil 
boke  us  par  lapke, 

58  Aur  (dialir  ke  hihar  nikalko,  us 
par  patthrAn  ktya:  aur  gawabon  M 
apne  kapre  Si'ilus  name  ck  jaiv.-in  fcfl 
panwnn  pil  rakh  diye, 

59  So  unhon  no  Htafanus  par 
patthran  kiya,  jo  yih  kabko  du'a 
mingta  tha,  ki  Ai  klmdawand  Yisii', 
nieri  riib  ko  «jabal  kar. 

60  Fhip  wuh  gbntnc  tekkar  7/.-r  m 
pukara,  ki  Ai  Klmda'wand,  yih  gunab 
un  ko  hisab  men  niat  rakh.  Aur  yih 
kahke  so  gayA. 

VIII  BA'U. 

A  Uli  Sulua  us  ke  qatl  par  mattsSq 
hiia.  Aur  ua  waqt  kalisiyo  nar, 
jo  Ya rtlsalain  men  thi,  bara  zulmhiia; 
aur  raadlon  ko  chhorkar  baqi  aab 
Yahfidiya  aur  Saiuariya  ki  har  jagah 
men  Ular  bitar  ho  gaye. 

2  Aur  dindar  mardon  nc  Stafanue 
ka  dafan  kiyA,  aur  ua  par  bara  raatam 
kiya. 

3  Aur  Siilus  kaiiaiyc  ko  tabdh  karta 
iba,  ki  ghar  ghar  ghuske  aur  mardun 
aur  'auraton  ko  ghasitkar  fjaid  meg 
dalta  tbi. 

4  Pas  ive,  jo  titar  bitar  huo  the, 
har  jagah  jake  kalim  ki  khiislikhabori 
dete  tbe, 

5  Aur  Failbiis  Samariya  ke  ek  shabr 
men  jako  un  ke  fige  Masih  ki  maniidi 
kartA  tbA. 

6  Aur  lopirj  re  un  mu'ajiaouko,  jii 
Failbua  karta  t)ia,  sunku  aur  dekhkc, 
ek-dil  hokar  us  ki  baton  pai  ji  lagay.-i. 

7  Kytfnki  nipik  riihen  bahuton  sc, 
jin  par  charhi  thitj,  hari  awAz  so  chil- 
like  utar  gayirj  ;  aur  bahut  matiiij,  aur 
langre,  cliange  kiye  gaye. 

S  Aur  ua  sbahr  men  bari  kbuthi 
ML 

9  Ua  ke  j>able  ua  shabr  meg  roha- 


A'AMA'L,  V  UI, 


Shama'un  jadugar  H 
ina'un  ndmeek  shakhs  jadugari  kari:!, 
nur  Samanya  ko  logoij  lt*  - « s  l«.  r  i  - ;  r  uk  h  t.;i , 
aur  yih  kahta  iba,  ki  Main  kuchli 
hun : 

l'J  Aur  chboto  se  l>are  tak  sab 
ki  taraf  ruju'  lake  kahte  the,  ki  Yih 
Klmdd  ki  haH  rmdrat  liai. 

11  So  w  sabab  uh  k  i'  taraf  rujii'  Ide, 
ki  uh  ne  ek  muddat  *e  apui  jadisan 
ke  waeile  se  unhen  dang  kar  rakha 
tha. 

12  Par  jab  wc  Failbiis  i»r,  jo  Khn- 
dd  ki  bdd&hdhat  aur  Yisa'  Masih  ke 
iiiiLii  l,i  khiL^li-kbuhiiri  deta  tha,  yaqin 
Ide,  to  kya  'aurat,  kya  mard,  sabkon 
ne  baplisma  liya. 

13  Tab  Shama'iin  bhi  khud  iman 
lava  :  aur  baptisma  pake  Failbus  ke 
sath  rabi,  aur  mu'ajize  aur  bar!  ban 
nishanidrj  jo  Kabir  boti    thfri  dekhke 

dttaa  I  fia, 

14  Jab  rasulon  ne  jo  Yanlsalam 
men  the  suni,  ki  Mamariun  ne  Khuda 
ka  kalam  qabul  kiyii  hai,  tab  tinhon 
ne  l'atrus  aur  Y  ilhami  a  ko  un  ke  pas 
Mir-ja: 

15  Unhon  ne  jdke  un  ke  liye  dn'l 
inangi,  ki  Ruh  i  Quds  pawen : 

16  (Kyuriki  ab  tak  wuh  un  men  m 
kisfi  par  nazil  ua  lini  tlii :  unhon  ne 
rirf  Khiidawan.!  Yisil'  ke  ndrn""par 
baptit,ma  paya  tha.) 

17  Tab  unhon  ne  un  par  bdth  raklic, 
aur  unhon  ne  Ruh  i  Qnds  pai. 

18  Jab  Shama'un  ne  dekhd  ki  ra- 
.«ulon  ke  hath  rakhne  Be  Ruh  i  Quds 
<li  jdti  hai,  to  un  ke  pas  naqdi  lake, 

19  Kaha,  ki  Yih  ikhtiyar  mujhe 
bhi  do,  ki  jia  par  main  hath  rakbun 
wuh  Ruh  i  QudB  pawe. 

20  Par  PatruB  ne  use  kaha,  Tere  rf- 
piyo  ton  sath  barbad  hon,  ia  liye  ki 
tti  ne  khiydl  kiyd,  ki  Kbuda  ki  bakh- 
shish  rfjpiyun  H  hftflU  hoti  hai. 

21  Tera  is  bat  men  na  bissa  hai,  na 
hakhra:  kyunki  terd  dd  Khuda  ke 
dge  sidhi  nahin. 

22  Pas  apni  is  shardrat  se  tauba  kar, 

163 


bsjd  darkliwcUf. 
aur  Kbuda  ne  minnat  kar,  ki  aWyad 
tere  dil  ka  yih  kbiyal  tujbe  um'af  h,.. 
L'.'I  lu  liye  ki  main  dokbta  hi'm,  ki 
Tu  pit  ki  karwakat,  aur  badi  ke  band 
mim  giriftdr  hai. 

24  Tab  Shama'iin  ne  jawab  men 
kakfi,  Tum  mere  liye  Khudawand  se 
du'd  raango,  ki  jo  cdtcn'tum  nekahh, 
un  men  se  KOf  mujli  par  na  awe 

25  l'liir  we  gawati!  deke,  nur  Khu- 
ddwand  ka  kalam  sunake,  tarfLaalaHi 
ko  nkire,  aur  Sdinarion  k(  liohut  si 
bastion  men  khuwlikliabari  dete  gaye. 

2f>  Tab  Kbudawand  ko  flrfahte  ne 
Failbiis  so  "kaldm  kiyd,  aur  kaiti,  ki 
Uth,  aur  dakhin  taraf  us  rdh  Dftr  ia,  |o 
Yariisalam  bo  'Azah  ko,  jo  bayiban 
men  hai,  jdti. 

27  Wuh  uthke  rawaua  Li'ia:  aur, 
dekho,  ek  BaMhi  khoja,  Ilalishic.n  ki 
malika  Qandaqe  ki  waalr,  jo  ub  ke 
sare  khazane  ka  mukbtdr  tlid,  aur 
Y'an'iMalain  nwtrj  ba.ndagi  kanie  ko  aya 
thd, 

28  Phiriijdtd  thd,  aur  apni  rath  par 
baithd  Yaa'aiydb  nabi  ki  kitab  ku 
(liirii  rahd  thd. 

W  Tab  Riih  ne  Failbiis  Ba  kah;i. 
Nazdft  j»,  aur  its  rath  ke  nath  ho  k'. 

.'50  Pas  Failbiis  no  ustar.n 
use  Yas'aiyah  nabiki  Maajparhtesuni, 
aur  kahd,  A'yd  jo  kuchh   t"ii  pafhtf 
hai  samajhtd  hai  V 

31  Us  ne  kahd,  Yih  kis  tarah  ho 
sake,  jab  tak  kol  meri  hidayat  na  kara? 
Tab  us  ne  Failbus  Be  darkliwast  ki, 
ki  Une  sath  lawir  ho  baithiye. 

32  Uk  kitab  ki  'ibarat,  jo  wuli 
parhtd,  tha,  yih  tlii,  ki  Wuh  jaiee  bher, 
jise  zabh  karno  ko  lc  jate  hairj,  au'r 
jaiso  barra,  jo  apno  bdl-kataniowale 
ko  Banihne  be-zuban  hai,  usi  tarah 
wuh  apnd  munh  nahin  kholtd  : 

33  Ub  ki  'ajis!  moa  unhon  nc  ua  ne 
insdf  uthfi,  liyd :  aur  kami  uh  ki  pusbt 
kd  bayan  karegd?  kyunki  zamiu  par 
bo  us  ki  jdn  uthdi  jdti  hai. 

34  Khojc  n'e  Failbus  ke  jawab  men 


6'rtftw  rahmat  ihihi  s«  A'AMA' 

kaha,  ki  M:uii  teri  miiinat  kartA  hiin 
k  i  nabi  kis  ke  haqq  men,  yih  kahid 
hai  ¥  kyA  apnc,  yA  kisi  dusr»  ke  haqq 
men  ? 

85  Tab  Failbi'm  nc  apni  zuban 
kholko  uaf  nawishie  h  shurti'  kiya, 
aur  Yisii'  ki  kliuslikliauari  use  <ii. 

36  Aur  jAto  jAte,  rah  ke  darrniyAn, 
ok  pan!  par  piuiunche :  tab  khnjo  ne 
kahA,  ki  Dekfi,  pdni.ab  nmjhe  baptis- 
mu pAne  m  kawi  chu  rokti  Jiai  ¥ 

37  Failbiis  ne  kahA,  Agar  tii  apne 
taindru  dil  ku  imAn  Idtd  hai,  to  rawi 
hai,  Ub  ne  jawAb  men  kalni,  Maig 
imAn  lAtA  luiu,  ki  Yhtn'  Masih  KhudA 
kA  Beta  hai. 

3H  Tali  us  Ee  lnikm  kiyd,  ki  raih 
khari  karon  :  aur  Failbiis  aur  khojd 
donon  panf  men  utre :  aur  us  ne  us  ko 
baptUma  diyA. 

39  Jal)  wc  pani  se  nikalkc  (ipar  Ao, 
KhudAwand  ki  Ruh  Failbiis  lio  le 
gayi,  aur  klioje  ne  un  ku  phir  na  dekhA, 
aur  khusbi  se  apni  rAb  ]f. 

40  Tar  Failbiis  Azotus  men  mild: 
aur  gnzarte  hiie  sah  shahron  ntan  tab 
tak  Qaisariya  men  nu  Aya,  khushkhsi- 
bari  uetd  rah  A. 

IX  BA'B. 

A  UU  hanoz  Siilus,  KhudAwand  ke 
shAgirdon  kedhamkAneaur  qatl 
kurae  nit-n  dam  mArtA  Ju'iA,  sardar 
kahin  ke  yabdn  gayA, 

2  Aur  us  M  Dimalui  ke  'ibAdat- 
khAnon  ke  liye  is  rnazrndii  ke  khatt 
mdnge,  ki  agar  main  kisi  ko  U  tariq 

S  r  pAiin,  kyA  mard  kyA   'aurat  use 
ndlike  YaruMilaiii  men  laiin. 

3  Aur  jate  jAte  aisA  hiiA,  ki  jab 
IliinistKj  ku  nudfk  pahunchA,  to  ek 
bargi  Asmdn  se  ck  nur  us  ke  chaugird 
chamka : 

4  Aur  wuh  7-amin  par  gir  parA,  aur 
uh  ne  ek  fcwi*  BUni,  JO  UM  kahti  thi, 
Ai  Sdlus,  Ai  Huius,  to  nmjhe  kyi'm 
eatAtd  hai  'i 

5  Tab  u»  ne  piichha,  Ai  KhudA- 
wand,  tii  kauu  hai?    KhudAwand  ne 

164 


T,,  IX.  taibhojdtd. 

kuini.  Main  Yisif  htin.jise  tii  sataUt 
liai !  paiae  ki  kil  par  IA  t  uiainA  tere 
liye  muBhkil  hai. 

6  Ua  ne  kdmpke  aur  hairAn  liokar 
kahA,  Ai  KhudAwand,  tu  kyA  ehAhtd 
hai  ki  main  koruii?  KhudAwand  ne 
use  kaliA,  U$h,  aur  shahr  men  jA,  aur 
jo  tujhe  kornd  zarur  hai,  tujh  ae  kahA 
jAegA. 

7  Aur  weninrd  jo  uskehamrAh  lho 
hairAn  khare  rah  gaye,  ki  AwAz  to 
.siinti',  par  kisu  ko  na  dekhta  the. 

H  Aur  Sulus  zaniin  par  se  nthd; 
aur  Ankh  kholke  kisii  ko  na  <k'kha: 
tab  we  uu  kA  hdlh  pakarke  Dimishfj 

il  Aur  wuh  tin  din  tak  dckh  w. 
saka,  aur  na  khdta  na  pita  thd. 

10  U  iH ur PimWm TnfinHwHlnljTih 
ndrne  ck  uhagird  thd,  aur  KhucUwnnd 
ne  royA  men  us  se  kahA,  Ai  HanAni- 
yAh.  Wuh  bolA,  Ai  Kbudawaml, 
ik'];h,  niuiij  ba/:ir  hiin. 

11  Tab  KhudAwand  ne  use  kahA, 
Utu,  aur  us  nnk  par,  jo  Sidbi  kalilati 
hai,  jd,  aur  YahudAh  ko  ghar  meg 
•Siilus  ndme  Tarsijsi  ko  dhiindh:  ki 
dekh,  wuh  du'A  mAugta  hai, 

12  Aur  us  do  rnyA  men  Handniyah 
udine  ek  mard  ko  dekhA,  jis  ne  andar 
dke  us  par  hAth  rakba,  tA  ki  wuh  pblr 
dek  b  n  e  lage. 

13  Par  HauamyAh  no  jawdb  diyA, 
ki  Ai  KhudAwand,  mairi  ne  balmion 
hb  ifl  sliakiis  ke  iiaq(|  nmij  sund,  ki  ns 
ne  Yariisalam  inon  tere  rauqaddason 
ke  sat.li  kaisi  badi  ki  ha: : 

14  Aur  yahdrj  bhi  ua  ne  sarddr 
kdhinon  ki  taraf  se  iklitiydr  pAyA,  ki 
sab  ko  jo  rerA  nAm  lete  hain,  bAndhe. 

15  Par  KhudAwand  ne  use  kaha, 
Tu  jA :  kyunki  wuli  qautnon,  aur  had- 
Khdhon,  aur  bani  IsrAel  ke  &%n  mera 
nAm  zdbir  karno  kd  ek  chund  hfid 
wnhihi  lini : 

lti  Ki  main  use  <likhdunga  ki  &at 
niere  nAm  ke  liye  kalau  didih  uthina 
aarur  hai. 


liu 


Aineas  ka  AAMA 

17  Tab  Handniydh  gayd,  aur  us 
gbar  m«Q  dakhil  hud;  aur  apne  hdth 
tu  pm  rakhkar  fcaua,  Ai  bhdi  Bdhu, 
Khuddwand,  ya'ne  Yisii'  ne,  jo  tujb 

W  ls  rda  menjis  se  tii  aya,  zahir 
la,  mujho  bnefc  hai  ki  ui  phir  bina 
pac,  aur  Ruh  i  Quds  ne  bbar  jde. 

18  Aur  wunhin.  misi  chhilke  ke 
kuchb  us  ki  ankhon  sc  ^ir  para:  aur 
wuh  usi  dam  dekhuo  laga,  aur  uthke 
baptisma  paya. 

19  Phir  kuchh  khdke  taqat  hasil 
ki.  Aur  Srtlus  kai  dia  I>imishq_Tnen 
Bhagirdog.  ko  Bath  rabd. 

20  Aur  fauran  'ibddatkhanon  nien 
Masih  ki  inanadi  karne  laga,  ki  wuh 
Khudd  kd  BetA  hai. 

21  Aurwibhuumiwdludang  hogayo, 
aur  bolo,  Kyd  yih  wuh  nabiij  hai,  jo 
Yarusalam  men  'm  ndni  ke  lenuivalon 
ko  tabdh  kartd- thd,  aur  yahdri  bhi 
irddo  par  dyd  ki  un  ko  bdudhke  t 
ddr  kahimm  ke  pas  lo  jde  ? 

22  Lekin  Siilua  ne  aur  bhi  mazbut 
hoko  aur  dalilon  se  sdbit  karke  ki 
Masih  yih  hi  hai,  Yahiidlon  ko,  jo 
Dimisht]  men  rahte  tho,  ghabrd  diyd, 

23  ^  Atir  jab  bahut  diu  guzre,  Ya 
htidton  ue  us  ke  qatl  ki  salah  ki: 

24  Aur  un  ki  ghdt  Srilua  ko  ma'lum 
ho  gayi.  Aur  we  rdt  diu  pbdtakon 
par  nn  raho,  ki  uao  mdr  daleii. 

23  Tab  shdgirdon  ne  rdt  ko  use 
lekar  aur  ek  tokri  nien  bithdkar  di- 
ivdr  par  se  tale'latkd  diyd. 

26  Aur  Sulus  ne  Yarusalam  men 
[Mlmiirhke  koshish  ki  ki  Hha^inhm 
menmiijde:  pursabus  se  rlarte  the,  k} - 
unkiyaqinna  kiydki  wuh  shagird  hai. 
"*27  Magar  Barnabds  use  apuo  adth 
rasnlon  ke  pas  le  gayd,  aur  un  se 
baydn'kiyd,  ki  U6  ne"  kis  tarah  roh 
meg  Khuddwand  ko  dukhd,  aur  ki  U: 
no  ub  se  bdten  kiri,  aur  kylinkar  wuh 
I)imishq  men  be-dliarak  Yisii'  ke  ndm 
par  kaldm  kartd  t.hd. 

28  So  wuh  Yarusalam  men  un  ke 
satli  dyd  jaya  kartd  thd ; 


IX.  changd  hona. 

25)  Aur  Yisii'  ke  ndm  par  dileri  se 
kalam  kartd  thd ;  aur  Yundiii-md.il 
Yahiidion  ke  siltli  guftogd  aur  bahs 
bhi  kartd  thd:  aur  we  U8  ke  rffar 
ddlne  kedarpai  the. 

30  Tab  oh  di  yili  malam  karke 
use  Qaisariya  men  lo  gnye,  aur  Tareus 
ki  taraf  us  ko  rawdua  kiyd. 

31  Tab  sdre  Yahiidiya,  aur  Jalil, 
aur  Samanya  ki  kalisiyaon  00  dr&iu 
pdya,  aur  mi  ki  taraqqi  ki  gayi,  aur 
khuddwand  ke  khauf  metj  chalii  bui 
lirih  i  Quds  ki  tasalli  se  haj  h  a  i  gayin. 

32  f  Auraisd  hud,  ki  jab  Patrus  bar 
kabin  phlrta  thd,  un  muaadaason  ke 
pds  bhi,  jo  Luddd  men  rahte  the,  pa- 
hunehd. 

33  Aur  wahdg  Aineda  ndmo  ek 
iliakhs  ko  pdyd,  jo  jholo  ka  mara  dth 
baras  se  chdrpil  pai  para  thd. 

M  Patroi  ne  use  kahi,  Ai  Aiueds, 
Yisii'  Masih  tujbe  cliangd  kartd  hai ; 
utli,  aur  apnd  bichhaund  sajd.  "Wuh 
i.i.si  dani  u  t  ha. 

35  Tab  Luddd  aur  Sarnu  ke  sah 
mhnewdle  use  dokhkar  Khuddwand 
ki  taraf  phire. 

86  1  Aur  Ydld  men  ek  sbdgird  Td- 
bitbd  oatD  thi,  jis  ka  tarjuma  Harui 
hai;  wuh  nek  kiimon  Be  aur  ktmi nil- 
on se,  jo  wuh  karti  thi,  mdlamdl  thi. 

37  Aur  aisd  hiia,  ki  un  dinon  wuh 
bimdr  boke  mar  gayi,  aur  unhori  ne 
use  nahlakar  bdlakhaue  par  rakhd. 

38  Aur  is  liye'ki  Luddd  Ydfa  ke 
nazdik  thd,  jab  shagirdon  ne  suni 
ki  PatniH  wahin  hai,  us  pas  do  mard 
bhejke  darkhwast  ki,  ki  hamdre  pas 
dne  mtn  der  ua  kar. 

39  Tab  PatntH  uthke  un  ke  sdth 
obatt.     Jab  pahunehd,  usa  bdldkhane 

|par  le  gaye  :  aur  aab  bewden  roti  liui 
us  ke  pas  d  khari  hiiln,  aur  kurte,  aur 
kaprc,  ju  Harui  ne,  jab  tm  ke  hdth  thi, 

Ibanae  the,  dikhdti  thiij. 

'  40  Tab  Patrus  ne"sab  ko  bahar 
karke  nur  ghutnt-  tekku  du'd  mdngi ; 
phir  Idsh  ki  t'aruf  mutawajjih    hoko 


QttrntUm  ka 

kadi,  Ai  Tabithi,  u{b. 

in  khen  khol  din :  aur  Patrus  ko  dekb 

ke  uth  baithi. 

41*  Tali  us  ne  hAth  barliako  use  uth- 
Aya,  aur  rouciftddason  aur  bewog  ko 
buUke  uso  zinda  un  ke  uupurd  kiya, 

4'J  Yih  sAro  Yafa  men  inashhur  ho 
gayi:  ME  btbutere  Khmlawaud  par 
i  man  lae. 

43  Aur  yi'in  hia,  ki  wuh  kai  dia 
tak  YAfA  men  "Skama'iiu  n  a  m  dabbdg 
ke  yakin  rabi. 

X  BA'R 
AiSARPYA    meri  QuraeHi 

me  ek  mard  tbi,  jo  us  paltan 
ki   Iti'ilianS   knblati    thi,  siiliadar 


A'AMA'L,  X.  Patrus  ko  bulana. 

Tab  us   nejpahuuclie,  Patrus  do  pabar  ke  ijarib 


9 


2  Wuh  npne  s*ro  gharine  samct 
diudar  aur  Kkuda-lars  tha,  aur  logoii 
ko  babut  kkairAt  detA,  aur  nit  KkudA 
se  du'a  mangtA  tha. 

3  Us  tie  c-k  ro«  lisrc  pakar  kt:  aartb 
rnya  m<m  wif  dokha  ki  Kkuda  ke 
6rishle  ne  us  ke  pas  andar  Ake  u» 
kalid.  Ai  Qurnulius. 

4  TJb  no  us  ko  gaur  se  dekili,  aur 
darkc  kaba,  kl  Ai  Kliudawiind.  kyA 
riai?  TJb  ne  uae  kuli  A,  Teri  du'aeri 
aur  teri  kbair&t  yAdgiri  ke  liye  Kkuda 
k»  buzik  piikunekiii. 

V,  Ab  YAi'a  mrii  ddmi  bbej  ki 
Skama'rin  ko,  jo  PatriM  kahlita  lini, 
bula  lAwcn  : 

(j  Wuh  Shania'un  naini;  ck  dabbag 
ke  yakin,  jiw  ka  ghar  sauiundar  ke 
kinare  lini,  mihmin  hai ;  jo  kuchk 
karsa  tujh  par  wajib  hai,  wuh  tujk 
ko  hiiliega. 

7  Aur  iab  firislita,  jia  ne  Qurnclius 
sa  baten  kiri,  chala  gaya,  us  ne  apne 
naakarog  men  su  do  ko,  aur  un  men 
se,  \o  IH  ke  yaharj  liar  waqt  ha/ir 
ralikt  the,  ek  diudar  sipihi  ko  bulake, 

3  Aur  sab  bdten  un  w  bayan  kar- 
ke,  uririnn  Yafa  mcri  bhejs. 

A  1  Diisre  din,  jab  we  rak  men 
i  kak  [&ta  the,  aur  sliakr  ke  uazdik 
169 


kotke  ke  upar  du'a  mau  gue  gaya: 

10  Aur  use  bkiikh  layi,  aur  ckihi 
ki  kuchh  khie :  par  jab  we  taiyar 
karte  tke,  wuh  bo-klmdi  men  pari, 

11  Aur  dekha  ki  Asmiu  khul  gaya\, 
aur  ck  ckiz  ban  ekadar  ki  minimi, 
jis  ke  ekaron  kone  bandhe  the,  zatmu 
ki  taraf  lutkai  hiii  us  ke  pas  utri : 

12  Us  men  samin  ke  sab  qism  ke 
cliirp&ya,  aur  jangli  jAnwar,  aur  kire 
roakure,  aur  hawA  ke  parinde  tke. 

13  Aur  use  ek  awii/,  ai,  ki  Ai  Pnt- 
nis,  uth  ;  zabh  k«r,  aur  k  ha  ji. 

14  Patrus  ne  kaba,  Ai  Kkuuawand 
bargiz  nahin;  kyi'inki  uiaiii  nekabbJ 
kol  haram  yi  napak  eh  i/,  uakiu  khdi. 

16  Diisri  bar  phir  use  awas;  ai,  ki 
jis  ko  Kluida  ne  pak  kiyii  hai,  tii 
haram  ruat  kah. 

10  Yib  tiu  bir  kiid  ;  phir  wuh  chiz 
asrnan  par  kkinehi  gayf. 

17  Jab  Patrus  apue  dil  men  kairdn 
tha,  ki  yih  royft,  jo  main  ne  dekhi, 
kya  hai,  to  dekho,  we  mard,  jiuheii 
Qurnelius  ne  bhejd  tha,  Shama'iin  ka 
ghar  daryaTt  kiyd  tlid,  aur  darwaza 
par  dke  kkare  hde, 

18  Aur  pukarke  puchhte  the,  ki 
Sharna'un,  jo  Patrua  kahlatd,  yahin 
iniliman  hai? 

19  \  Jab  Patrus  ua  roya  ke  khiydJ 
men  thi,  Rt5]i  ae  use  kaha,  Dekb,  thi 
mard  tujhe  dliiunlhtc  hain. 

20  Pas  uthke  niche  ji,  aur  be- 
kkalke  un  ke  aatli  rawdua  ho :  kyun- 
ki  main  ne  un  ko  bheja  hai. 

21  Tab  Patrus  ne  utarke  un  mard- 
oq  se,  jin  ko  Qurnelius  ne  us  pas 
bhejd  thd,  kabi,  Dekho,  jis  ko  tum 
dliundhte  ho,  main  hi  hiin :  tum  U| 
liye  dli  lio  ? 

22  Unhon  ne  kabA,  Qiu*nelius  sft- 
badar  ne,  jo  ristbiz  aur  Khuditars 
aur  YahiiilioTj  ki  sdri  qaum  men  nek- 
aim  hai,  pdk  Srishte  se  htikm  piya, 
ki  tujlio  apne  ghar  bulawe,  aur  tujh 
sc  baten  sunc. 


Quntdiu*kd  A'AMA'L,  X 

23  Tab  na  no  unlie»  bliitar  buldke 
ira  ki  mihmani  ki.  Aur  diisri;  iin 
Patrus  un  ku  s&th  chald,  aur  kai  Vjbai 
Yifa  se  ua  ke,  adth  ho  liye. 

24  Aur  dusre  roz  wo  Qaisariya  men 
ddkhil  hue.  Aur  Qurnelius  apoe 
rishtaddron  aur  dili  doston  ko  ikat- 
the  karke  un  k(  rdh  dekhta  tha. 

25  Aur  aisd  bud,  ki  jab  Patrus  dd- 
khil kone  iaga,  Qurnclius  us  se  jd 
i'nild,  aur  u»  ko  qadamon  par  trirke 
sijda  kiyd. 

26  Lukin  Patrus  ne  use  uthdke  ka- 
hd,  Khard  ho;  main  bhi  b)  insan 
b  li  n. 

27  Aur  us  bo  bdteri  kartd  andar 
gayd,  aur  bahuton  ko  ikatthe  pdyd. 

28  Tab  us  ne  un  se  kahd,  Tum  jiin- 
m  bo  ki  kyiinkar  kisi  Yahudi  ko  be- 
edju  n  suhbat  rakhnS,  yd  us  ke  ya- 
han  jan.i,  rawi  nahin  ;  rnagar  Khudd 
ne'mujh  par  Bibir  kiyd,  ki  main  kini 
ddmi  ko  kannna  ya  ndpdk  na  kaln'm. 

29  Ia  liye  main  tumbdrc  bulane 
par  be-W  chald  dyd :  ab  main  puchh- 
ta  hi'in,  ki  imijho  kis  bdt  ke  liye 
bulaya '/ 

30  Tab  Qinnelius  ne  kabi,  Char 
roz  b£e  ki  main  no  is  ghari  tak  roza 
rakhd :  aur  tisre  pahar  ko  apne  ghar 
men  du'd  Trjdngtd  Lhd,  a»r  kyd  dekh- 
td  Tnin,  ki  ok  mard  liarrdq  posbdk 
pahtne  mere  sdmhne  khard  bai. 

31  Tab  ua  ne  kahd,  Ai  tjurnelius, 
teri  du'd  Buni  gayi,  aur  teri  khairdt 
Khudd  ke  hiwur  yad  hi'ii. 
'  32  Ab  kisi  ko'Ydft  men  bhej,  aur 

SliainaYm  ko,  jo  Patrus  kauldtd  hai, 
yahdn  buld ;  wuh  Shama'un  liubbdg 
ke  yahdn,  jis  kd  ghar  sainundnr  ke 
kindrc  hai,  rnihnidn  hai :  wuh  dke 
tujh  se  kalam  karegd. 

;;:;    Is  liye  u*i  dam  main  no  tere  _ 
bheji;  tii  iic  khiib  kiyd,  jo  dyi.     Ab 
ham  nb  Khudd  ke  age  basir  hain,  td 
ki  jo  kuchh.  Khudd  ne  tujhe  farnidya 
bai,  suuerj. 

34  ■.  Tab  Putrus  no  zuban  kholkc|bakh5msh  jari  nol 
167  ' 


Fatnis  ko  b'ihi  bhrj'ia, 
kabi,  Ab  mujhe  yaqin  hua  ki  Khuda 
zahir  par  nazar  nabiu  kartd : 

35  Baiki  bar  quun  HM&,  jo  na  se 
dnrtd,  aur  rdstbdzi  kartd,  uh  ko  pasand 
dtd  hai. 

36  Yih  wuh!  kalam  hai,  jo  us  ne 
bani  Israel  ke  pds  bheja,  jab  Yisii' 
Masih  ki  ma'rifat,  (jo  sabliuti  kdKhu- 
ddwand  hai.)  sulh  ki  khuslikhabari 
detd  thd. 

37  Tum  is  kalam  ko  jauto  bn,  Jo 
ba'd  us  ke  ki  Ynhannd  ne  bsptiama 
ki  manddi  ki  thi,  tamam  Yahiidiya 
meg,  Jali l  ««  shuui'  karke,  isbtihdr 
kiyd  gayd ; 

38  Ki  kis  tarah  Kbuda  ne  Yisii' 
Ndsari  ko  Ruh  i  Qu'"Ih  aur  ijudi-at  sa 
maniRuh  kiyd;    wub  neki  kartd,  aur 

sab  ko,  jo  Shailan  ki^  liatli  ^o  aulm 
utbiito  tliu,  ohangi  kartd  phird  ;  kyiin- 
ki  Khudd  us  ke  sdth  thd. 

Aur  ham  uu  sab  kdtnon  ke,  jo  us 
ne  Ythudion  ke  mulk  Yartisalam  mon 
kiye,  gawdii  hain;  us  ko  unbon  ne 
kdth  par  latkake  mdr  (Idld : 

40  TJs  ko  Khudd  ne  tisre  din  iit.hdyi, 
aur  use  zdhir  hono  diyd ; 

41  Sdri  qaum  p;ir  iiiiliin,  baiki  un 
gawdliim  par,  ki  dge  se  Khudd  ke 
chune  huethe,  ya'ne,  ham  par,  jiahoj) 
ne,  TU  ku  murdon  men  wt  jt  utbno  ke 
ba'd,  us  ke  sdtli  khdya  aur  piyA. 

42  Aur  uh  uo  hameii  hukm  diyd,ki 
logon  men  manddi  karo,  aur  gawdhi 
do  ki  yih  wubi  hai,  jo  Khuda  ki  taraf 
se  muqarrar  bna,  ki  ssindofi  aur  mur- 
don kd  insaf  karriewdld  ho, 

43  Sab  nabi  ua  par  gawdhi  dete 
hain,  ki  jo  koi  us  par  imdn  ldwe,  un 
ko  ndm  se  apne  gnndbon  ki  mu'ati 
pdwe. 

44  T  Patrus  yo  bdten  kali  ralid 
thd,  ki  Ri'ih  i  Quds  un  sab  par  jo  kalam 
mute  the.  mi/j)  bui. 

45  Aur  makhttin  imanddr,  jitne 
Patrus  ko  sdth'dc  the,  hairdn  hiie  ki 
gair-qauniOT}  par  bhi  U  uh  i  Qud3  ki 


I'atrus  kd  A'^ 

4(3  Kyunki  unhen  tarah  tarah  ki 
inili  huile,  aur  Klmdd  ki  bardi  karte 
suhu.     Tab  l'atnia  ne  phir  kahd, 

■17  Kyd  koi  pani  ko  rok  saktd  ha 
ki  ye,  jinhon  ne  harnaii  tarah  Ruh 
Qmis  pai,  baptisma  oa  jidwen  ? 

■H  Tab  us   ne   hukm  diya,  ki   we 

Kiniduwund    ke    n  ani    jwir    baptisma 

pdwen.     Tuli   unbon    ne    us   Be  dar- 

kliwast  ki,  ki  kuclih  din  wahau  ruko. 

XI  J  UU. 

AU  K  raaulon  .iur  bhdion  ne  jo  Ya- 
bidiya  mim  the,  aumi  ki 
gKitvffitamofl  ue  bhi  Khudii  kd  kalam 
qubul  k  iya. 

2  Aur  jab  Patruu  Yanisalam  men 
dyd,  to  inakhtun  us  so  bahs  karut; 
lage, 

3  Aur  kahd,  ki  Tti  nd-raakhtiinoii 
ke  pas  j^aya,  aur  un  ke  sdth  khaya. 

■1  Tab  Patrus  ne  «huni'  se  «Usus  ke 
sitli  uti  *u  bayan  kiyi,  aur  kaha,  ki 

o  Jab  main  Yafd  kesliuhr  men  du'd 
mang  raba  tba,  ho-khudi  men  ake  ek 
rovd  deklii,  ki  «k  chiK  jaiae  hari  cha- 
dor,  jU  ke  diaron  kono  dsmdn  se  latkde 
luio  tho,  utarke  mujh  tak  di. 

G  Jab  main  ne  khub  dekhke  gnur 
kiya,  i;ib  /uiiiiu  ko  chdrpdye,  aur 
jiingli  janwar,  aur  kire  makore,  aur 
hawa  ke  parinde,  ub  men  dekhe. 

7  Aur  main  ue  ek  iiwa/.  .suni,  ki 
tnujhi-  kahti  hai.Ai  Patru»,  uth ;  zabh 
ku,  aur  kha. 

y  Tab  main  bola,  Ai  Khuddwand, 
bargiz  naluri  ;  kyunki  kabid  kol  haram 
ya  mipiik  ehiz  mere  uiuijh  men  u 
gayi. 

1)  Tab  jawab  men  di'wi  bdr  dsmau 
se  mujhe  awai  di,  ki  Jiwe  Khudd  n(> 
pak  kiyd,  tii  haram  niat  kab. 

10  Yih  tin  bdr  hiiu :  phir  sab  kuchh 
asinin  ki  taraf  khincha  gaya. 

1L  Aur,  dekho,  usi  dam  iiu  adnii,  jo 
Oaisariym  bu  mere  pas  bheje  gaye,  us 
afaai  ke  pilu,  jis  rnen  main  tba,  khare 
the. 

12  Aur  Ruh  ne  mujh  ae  kaha,  ki 
168 


'L,  XT.  'tur  iurwi. 

Tii  be-kliatke  ua  ke  B.ith  ja.  Chuniiu- 
chi  ye  chha  bhai  mere  sath  chide,  aur 
ham  us  shakhs  ku  gliar  men  dakliii 
htie: 

13  Aur  ua  ne  ham  ae  bayan  kiya. 
ki  kis  taruh  tk  tirishte  ko  apno  o;3 1  n  i 
men  khara  dckhtl,  jis  ne  tae  kaha,  ki 
Yafa  metj  ddmi  bhej,  aur  Shama'un 
ko,  jiB  kd  Iaimb  Patrus  hai,  bulwa  ; 

14  W  u  h  tujhe  we  bdton  kabega,  jin 
ae  td  aur  tera  «drd  ghar  najat  pnrega, 

15  Jah  maiij  kalam  kurne  laga, 
llub  i  Quds  un  par  u:'wil  lu'ii,  JaiH 
pahlo  ham  par. 

18  Tab  inujriu  Khu^awaml  ki  bal 
yad  di,  jo  ua  ne  kabi,  Yiihaiina  tM  to 
pani  ae  baptisma  rliya,  par  t  uni  rttili  i 
Quds  se  baptisma  pdogo. 

17  Pasjabki  Khudane  uii  ko  waisi 
ni'amat  di.jaifi  ham  ka  Jo  Kliuddwand 
Yisii'  Masih  par  iman  Ide,  to  main 
kaun  tlid  ki  Kbuda  ko  rok  saktd  ? 

18  We  yih  tmnkar  uhup  rahe,  t\m 
Khudd  ki  ta'rifkarke  kahd,  Beslmkk 
Khudii  ne  gair-qaumon  ko  bhi  zmdat;i 
ke  liye  tauba  bakhshi  hai. 

10  t  Pm  w«i  W  ns  jaur  o  jafd  se  ju 
ki  Stelamu  ke  Mttab  mt$6  hui  thi'n, 
clilutar  bitar  lio  gaye  lho,  pblrte  jiliirii 
Fiafiu  0  Kupi-ua  o  Antakiy.i.  men  pa- 
hunche,  magar  Yahiidion  ku  aiwa  kisi 
ku  kalam  na  sundte  the. 

)  Aur  un  men  se  kai  ek  Euprusi 
Qureni  the,  jinhon  no  Antdkiya 
men  ake  Yuiidin-nia.il  Yahudion  «e 
biii  biileii  kiri,  aur  Klmdawand  YisiV 
ki  khushkbabari  aundi, 

1  Aur  Kbuddwaiid  ka  hdtli  un  ko 
saLli  tba  ;  aur  bahu  t  se  log  jo  iman  Ide 
Khuddwand  ki  taraf  plure. 

22  \  Tab  un  logon  ki  khabar  Ya- 
rusalam  ki  kalisiyo  ke  kau  meo 
pahunchi;  aur  unhoij  ue  Barnabaa  ko 
bhejd,  ki  Antdkiyd  tak  jde. 

'j;i  VVuh  pahunidike,  aur  Khudd  ka 
fazl  dekhke,  khusb  hud,  aur  un  sab  ko 

;iliat,  ki,  ki  Dil  ki  ma/.buti  ke  sdth 
Kliuddwam.l  .se  Uigo  raho. 


Aut^kii/i.  m-  n  Injil  suudnd.    A'AMA' 

2-i  Kyugki  wuh  nek  rnard  tha,  aur' 

Itiih  t  Quds aur  Unta  n  bhari  i  ftorek 

bari  guruh  Khudawand  ki  taraf  rujii' 

m. 

25  Tab  Baraabaa  StUtis  ki  talash 
men  Tarsus  ko  chala  : 

2<>  Aur  «e  pake  Antikiyi  men 
laya.  Alir  aisa  hfia,  ki  we  sil  bhar 
kalisiye  mag  sbamil  lini  karte,  aur 
bahut  loffog  ko  sikhiya  karte  the. 
Aur  pahle  Aotikiya"  nieri  shigird 
Kristian  kuhlao. 

27  1  Uuhin  dinon  kai  ck  nabi  Ya- 
rusalani  se  Antikiya  uien  ae. 

28  Aur  iitiincij  Hc,ek  ne.jia  kandm 
Agabus  tha,  k  hara  hoke  lltih  ki  hida- 
yat ae  zahir  kiyil,  ki  tamani  niamlnkiil. 
umii  bara  kal  paroga-,  jo  Qhudiua  Qaiaar 
ke  waqt  men  waqi'  hiii. 

29  Tuh  shigiraon  mes  se  har  ck  ne 
thanfi  ki  apiie  rnaqdur  ke  inuwalii)  uu 
bbaion  k  i'  khidmat  men,  jo  Yahtidiya 
nien  rahte  the,  kuehh  bhejft 

30  So  utiliun  ne  yih  kiya,  aur  B&r> 
nabas  aur  Hulus  ku  hith  buzurgon  ke 
p&B  biu'ja. 

XII  BA'B. 

AURun  dinon  Herodls  badsbah  ne 
kaliaiye  men  so  ba'zon  jiar  hith 
rtilu,  ki  unlien  aatiwe. 

2  Aur  Yiihiuinako  bhai  Ya'ipib  ko 
tatwar  se  mir  d  Al  A. 

3  Aur  jub  lickhi  ki  Yahiidion  ko 
yih  puma  ay.-i,  to  aur  bhi  ziyoduli  ki, 
ki  Patrus  ko  bhi  pakar  HyA.  (Yih  be- 
khamiri  roti  ke  dinon  meg  hui.) 

4  Aur  us  ko  pakarke  qaid-kliaini 
men  dalA,  aur  char  cb'ar  sipabioa  ke 

tilire  men  sompa,  ki  us  ki  nigahbaiu 
aren,  aur  chilii  ki  Fa&ah  ke  ba'd 
use  logon  ke  satnhne  le  jie. 

5  Pas    (pii  '  '  ' 
:iigahbiirii  hoti'tlii 


tar  kalisiya  us  ke 


5  Pas   qaiil-kliaiiu   incii   Patrus  ki 
:  jiar  i 
Uy<3  uit  Khuda  uu  du'A  mungil  karti 
thi. 

U  Aur  jab   Herodis  ne    use    hAzir 
karne  chaha,  ari  rit,  Patrus,  do  /.aii- 
:■•■]   .--  Ii.iiulliii,  do  sipahion  ke  bich 
169 


'L,  XII.  Tlerutlis  'J'sdion  ko  sat<ifti. 
mcu  soli  tha;  aur  chankiwAlo  darwAze 
par  qaid-khAne  ki  cluuiki  kar  ralio 
the. 

7  Aur,  dekho,  Khudawand  ki  ek 
firishta  A  khara  hua,  aur  as  makan 
men  mlr  chnmka,  aur  us  uc  Patrus  ki 
pasli  par  marke  jagiyA,  aur  kahA,  ki 
Jald  uth.  Tab  zanjiren  us  ko  hathon 
se  gir  gayin, 

H  Aur  us  tirishee  ne  uee  kalni,  ki 
Kiimar  bandl),  mr  apni  jiiti  pahin.  Os 
ue  yimhin  kiya.  l'liir  uaneuac  kaha, 
Apna  kurhi  pahin,  aur  mere  pielihe 
lu»  lc. 

9  Wuh  nikalkc  us  ke  pichho  lio 
liya;  par  na  jarni  ki  yih,  jo  firilhta  m" 
hi'iii,  BBOrj  hai;  baiki  tfamjhd  ki  roya 
il.-liiilii  hl'ih. 

10  Tab  we  pahle  aur  dilsro  pahra 
men  se  nikalko  luiie  ke  phatak  tak,  Jo 
shabr  ki  taraf  hai,  pahunehe ;  wuh  ip 
se  iip  un  ko  liyo  khul  [jaya;  so  wa 
nikalko  ek  gali  se  guzar  gaye;  aur  usi 
dani  firiahta  uh  ke  pas  so  chalA  gaya. 

11  Tab  Patrus  ne  hosh  men  Ako 
kahd,  Ab  main  ue  sach  jana  ki  Kbu- 
diwand  ne  apnd  firiahta  bhejd,  nur 
mtijhe  Herodia  ke  hatii,  aur  Yahudi 
ipiura  ki  siiri  tak  se,  baciia  liya. 

12  Aur  tab  yih  sanijhii  tha,  tab  Yil- 
linuna,  jis  ka  laqab  M»rqns  hai,  us  ki 
ma  Mariyam  ke  ghar  aya ;  wahan 
bahut  log  jaiu'a  hiie,  aur  dii'ti  maug 
nilu'  the. 

13  Jab  Patrus  phatak  ki  kliirki 
khatkhutata  Lhd,  Rotlu  namo  ekchhok- 
ti  ai,  ki  chupke  sune. 

14  Aur  Pulrus  ki  iiw;i/.  nfcoh&ake 
maro  khttflbi  ku  phatak  im  khola,  par 
daurke  aodar  khabar  di,  ki  Patrus 
phatak  par  kburi  hai. 

16  Tab  unlion  ne  use  kaha,  Tii 
diwAni  hai,  Par  wuh  apni  bit  par 
(piini  riilii,  ki  yiin  hi  hai.  Tab  unlion 
ue  kahi,  Us  ki  firiahta  hoga. 

Hi  Magur  I'atnis  khiilkiialiiti  rabi: 
j  tab  uuiiou  no  darwa/.a  kholke  UB  ko 
[dekhi,  aur  dang  ho  gayet 


Pilus  o  Bantalan  ka  A' AM  A' 

17  Us  iif  unheg  hdth  se.  ishara 
kiyd,  ki  chup  raben,  aur  un  se  bayan 
kiyd,  ki  Khuddwand  kis  tarah  lis  ko 
.|a"id-khane  ae  bahar  !dyd.  Phir  kaba, 
ki  Ya'qub  aur  bhdlon  ko  is  bdt  ki 
khabar  do.  Aur  wuh  a?  bahar  jake 
.h'isri  jagah  clia.a  gayd. 

ia  Jab  sul)h  bdi,  nipah!  babut 
ghabrde,  ki  l'atrus  kyd  Ima. 

19  Jab  Ilcrodis  ne  ua  ki  talasb 
karke  ua  paya,  to  chaukidaron  ki 
tahqiqdt  kf,  aur  hukrn  kiyd,  ki  lc  jake 
unhe.ii  jin  so  maro.  Aur  dp  Yahudiya 
M  riiwaua  hoke  Qaisariya  men  jd 
rahd. 

20  T  -Aur  Herodis  Sfir  o  Saidd  ke 
logorj  kc  nibdyat  nd-klmsh  tha:  tab 
we  ck-dil  hoke  ua  ke  pas  ae,  aur 
Blastus  ko,io  badshdh  ki  khwdbgdli 
kd  nazir  tha,  mildke  sulh  chdhi; 
kyiirjki  un  ke  mulk  ko  bddahdh  ko 
miilk  se  asbab  i  ma'aah  muyassar  ate 
the. 

21  Tab  Herodis  ek  din  thahrdke 
aur  bddsliahi  poshak  pahinke  takht 
par  baitlia,  aur  un  se  kaldin  karnc 
lagd. 

22  Tab  log  chillane  lage,  ki   Yih 
Khuda  ki  dwdz  hai,  insan  ki  nahin. 
'  23  Ubi  dam  Khudi  ke.  fnishte  ne 

use   mdi'i,   kyuijki  us   ae  Khudd  ki 
Luzurgi   ua  ki;  aur  wuh  kire  parke 
iuar  gaya. 
"\  1  Pa 


24  J  Par  Khudi  ka  kalam  barhd, 
ai»  phaili. 

25  Aur  Barnahas  aur  Stflua  apni 
khidmat  puri  karke,  aur  Yiihaund  ko, 
jis  ki  laqab  Marqus  hai,  fcit.li  Lekfl, 
Yarusalam  se  phire. 

XIII  BA'B. 

AUR  Antakiya  ki  kalisiye  men  kai 
nabi  aur  muallim  the;  ya'ne, 
Barnabda,  aur  Sharaa'lia,  jo  Nigar 
kahldtd  hai,  aur  Ltyioa  Qureni,  aur 
Mauden,  jo  chauthdi  ke  hdkiin  Herodis 
ke  sdth  pald  thi,  aur  Sdlus. 

2  Jab  we  Khuddwand  ki  bandagi 
170 


L,  XIII.  agya.r pa*  jami. 

karte,  aur  roaa  rakhte  the,  Biih  i 
Quds  ne  kaha,  Merc  liye  Bamabas  aur 
Siilus  ko  akg  karo,  us  kini  ke  liye 
jia  ke  wdsto  main  ne  unhen  buldyd. 

3  Tab  unhon^ne  rona  rakhke,  aur 
du'd  mdn.gke,  un  ]xir  hdth  raklic,  aur 
unhen  nikhsar.  kiya. 

i  f  Pas  wo  ltiih  i  Quds  ke  bheje 
hfle  Sildkiyd  ko  gaye;  aur  wabiu  se 
juhaz  par  Kuprus  ko  chale. 

5  Aur  uuhrn  ne,  jab  ki  Snlamis 
men  the,  Yahndioii  ke  'ibddat-khdnon 
men  Khudd  kd  kalam  suudyd;  aur 
Ytihannd  un  kd  khddim  tiid. 

6  Aur  ua  tainiin  tapu  inen  Pdfus 
tak  sair  karke  unhorj  ne  ok  Yahi'idi 
jddugar  aur  jhdthe  nabi  ko,  jis  kd  udm 
Bar-Yisu'  thi,  p'iyd : 

7  Wuh  Sri  ha  ko  Snrjius  Pulus  ke 
sdth  tha,  jo  saMb  i  tamiz  thd;  us  ne 
BttBabJB  aur  Siilus  ko  buldke  chdhd 
ki  Kliuda  kd  kaldm  sune: 

8*  Par  Windu  jddugar  ne,  (ki  yibi 
ua  ke  nam  ka  tarjuma  hai,)  un  ki 
barkhildfi  ki,  aur  chdhd  ki  Sdba  ko 
[mu  Be  phor  de. 

0  Tab  fidius,  ya'ne,  Pulus  ne  Pub 
i  Quds  se  bhar  jdkc  use  ghurakke 

10  Kahd,  Ai  Shaitdn  ke  l'arz.and, 
hi  j.,  tamani  nmkkdri  aur  'aiydri  H 
bliara,  aur  B*b  Uirah  ki  rasti  kd  dusb- 
man  hai,  kyd  Khuddwaud  ki  sidhi 
rihog  ko  terhi  karna  na  chhoregd? 

lf  Ab,'d'ekh,  Kliuddwand  kd  hath 
tfljjh  par  h*L  aur'td  n.ndhd  ho  jd<'ga, 
aur  muddat  tak  sdmj  ko  na  dekbega. 
Wunhiij  dhundhldpan  aur  andherd  us 
iiar  chhd  gayd;  aur  dhiiiidlud  phira, 
ki  koi  us  kd  hath  pakarke  16  chale. 

12  Tab  Siiba  yih  rudjard  dekhkfl 
Khudawand  kl  ta'lim  se  dang  hokar 
i  mau  Idyi. 

13  Ah  Ptllus  aur  ub  ke  sdihi  Pafus 
se  jaha«  kholke  Pamfiiliya  ke  Pargi 
men  ae :  aur  Ynhaiind  un  se  judi 
hokar  Yanisalam  ko  phird. 

H  t  Aur  we  Pargd  se  guzarke 
l'isidiya  ke  Antdkiyd  men  pahunehe, 


Putus  Pmdiya  ke  Antakiya  A'AMAX,  XIII. 
nur  sabt  ke  di»  'ibddat-kbdne  men  ja 
haitho. 

15  Aur  tauret  aur  iiabiim  ki  kitab 
ke  parhne  ke  ba'd  'iMdat-khdne  ke 
sardaruii  ne  unhen,  kahlA  bhejA,  ki  Ai 
bhiio,  agar  kuchh  nasihat  ki  bit  logon 
ko  liye  rakhtu  ho,  to  bayan  k&ro. 

16  Tab  PultM  khara  hiia,  aur  hdth 
se  ishAra  karke  kahA*  Ai  Israelio,  aur 
ai  Khuda-tarso,  u  u  mi, 

1*7  Ih  qaurn  i  Israel  ke  Khudd  ne 
liamare  bdpdadon  ko  chund,  aur  is 
qaum  ko,  jab  Miar  ke  mulk  men 
pardesi  thi,  barhdyi,  aur  /.abnrdast 
hdth  se  mihen  wahdn  se  nikdl  IdyA. 

18  Aur  baras  cballs  ok  wuli  ba- 
yAbdn  men  uii  ko  dai  ki  tarah  liye 
phirA, 

19  Aur  Kau'an  ki  saraamtn  men 
■fU  aanmofl  ko  haldk  kiyd,  aur  un  ka 
mulk  qur'a  se  unhen  baut  diyd. 

20  Aur  ba'd  ub  ke,  adrhe  onar  sau 
buru  ke  qarib,  Sami'iel  iiabi  tak,  uu 
men  q&rf  in.uqa.rnar  kiye. 

21  Ub  WM}t  se  unhon  lio  badsh&h 
chaha:     tab    Khudd    ne    ek     mani, 
Hinyamm  ku  ghardne  se,  Qis  ke  bete 
Sdiil    ko,   obalis    baras    tak    uu 
muqarrar  kiya, 

22  Phir  uae  utdrke  Daiid  ko  kb 
kiya,  ki  «n  ka  bddskdh  ho :  aur  ub 
jawabi    men.   kaha,   ki  Main   ne    ek 
roard  Yassi  ke  bet*  Daud  ko  apue  dil 
ke  mnwAfiq    pAyA;    wuhi   merf 
khwahisheij  puri  karega. 

23  Uai  ki  nasi  se  Khuda  no,  apne 
wa'de  ke  muw4flq,  Israel  ke  liye  Najdt- 
denewale  Yiai'i'  ko  uthaya : 

24  Jis  ke  Auo  so  Age  Yuhannd  M 
total  ki  tamam  qaum  ke  darmiyan 
tauba  ke  baptisma  ki  man&di  ki, 

25  Aur  jab  Yubannd  apna  danra 
piird  karno  par  thd,  uh  ne  kahA,  Tuin 
mujhe  kaun  samajhte  ho  V  Main  wuh 
nuliin  hiin;  baiki,  dekho,  wuh 
ba'd  ala  bai,  jis  ko  panwon.  ki  jiiti 
main  kholuo  ke  laiq  nahin  hiin, 

26  Ai  bhiio,  Abirahdra  ko  khandAn 


men  Injil  sutiata. 


171 


ke  farzando,  aur  timi  meg  se  jit-ne 
Khuda  so  darte  ho,  tuiuhare  liye  ia 
najdt  kd  kalam  bheja  gaya. 

27  Kyilnki  Yar&aalam  ke  bAshind- 
on  aur  un  ke  Barddrnn  ne,  nso,  aur 
nabion  ki  bdterj,  jo  iiar  sabt  ko  parhi 
jati  hain,  na  jAnke  ua  par  fatwa  dene 
se  un  ko  piird  kiya. 

Agarchi  ua  ke  qatl  ki  koi  wajh 
i,  tau  bhi  Pildtus  se  darkhwast 
ki  ki  use  mAr  dAIe. 

29  Aur  jab  sab  kuchh,  jo  us  ko 
hai)']  un  ij  liklid  tliA,  piird  kar  chuke, 
t  o  use  kath  par  se  utdrke  uabr  men 
rak  h  d. 

30  Lekiu  Kliuda  ne  uae  murdon 
men  se  u^hAyA : 

31  Aur  wuh  bahut  din  un  ko,  jo 
ub  ke  sath  Jalil  se  Yarusalnm  men  ie 
the,  dikbai  diya ;  we  M  logon  ke  age 
us  ke  gaw&h  haiu. 

32  Aur  ham  tum  ko  khuslikhabari 
dete  hain,  ki  un  wa'de  ko,  jo  bapdadori 
se  kiyd  gayd  tba, 

33  Khuda  ne  hainaro  liye,  jo  un  ki 
auldd  hain,  bilkull  piird  kiyd,  ki  Yisii' 
ko  phir  jildyd ;  chundnclii  inare  Zabiir 
men  likhd  hai,  ki  Tii  merd  Betd  hai, 
aj  lii  mai|i  terd  bdp  hua. 

34  Aur  is  ki  bdbat,  ki  us  no  ubc 
murdon  men  se  uthaya,  la  ki  ba'd  us 
ke  na  sare,  ydn  kahd,  ki  Main  DAiid 
ki  pak  aiir  sachchi  ni'aiiiaten  tiunherj 
ddngd. 

35  Is  liyo  wuh  dusri  jagah  bhi 
kahtd  hai,  ki  Tu  apne  Quddns  ko 
sarno  ki  hdlat  dekhne  na  degd. 

36  Kyunki  T)dud  U)  apne  waqt  men 
Khudd  ki  mar?,!  bajd  Idke  ao  gaya,  aur 
apne  bdpdddon  se  jd  mild,  aur  sarne 
ki  hdlat  dekhi  j 

37  Par  yih,  jisu  Kliudd  ne  uthityd, 
sanie  ki  hdlat  nahin  dekhi. 

88  lf  Paa,  ai  bhAio,  yih  tumhon 
ma'liim  ho  jdwe,  ki  usi  ke  wasilo  tum 
ko  gunahon  kl  mu'Afi  ki  khabar  di 
jdti  hai : 

39  Baiki  ubi  so  har  ek  jo  imdn  laid, 


PtUvi  aur  Jtarnnbds  A'AMA'L,  XIV 

un  sal)  biton  se,  jin  se  tum  M  risi  ki 
>li;»ri'.ii.  k  o  r\\  se  be-gunih  uahin 
tkahar  sakte  the,  bt-gundh  thahartd. 

40  Pas  kbahnnbir  rftho,  aisd  na  ho 
ki  jo  nnbion  ki  kitab  men  likha  hai 
tua  par  dwe  ;  ki 

41  Ai  tahqir  kamewalo,  dekho,  aur 
ta'ajjub  karo,  »nr  nest  ho  jio ;  kyunki 
main  tumhdre  zamani;  nii'ii  ek  kam 
kartd  lniFj.  aisi  kam,  ki  koi  tum  H 
kaisd  lii  baydu  karegi,  tum  kabin 
yanin  na  karwre. 

42  Jab  Yahudi  'iMdotkhane  ke 
biliar  jite  tho,  gair-qaumon  ue  un  se 
darkbwaat  ki,  ki  y«  batuu  aglo  sabt 
ko  uu  bc  kahi  jdcn. 

43  Jab  majlifl  uth  gayi.  babut 
Yahudi  aur  murid  Khudi-parast  Pul  us 
aur  Hama  bda  ke  piclihe  cliale:  unhon 
iig  uu  bc  kalam  karke  targib  di,  ki 
Khudd  ki  iii'amnt  par  qaim  raheu. 

4.4  1  Dnare  sabt  ko  qaril>  s&h 
shahr  ko  log  ikattbe  hio,  ki  Khudd 
ki  kaliin  suneu. 

45  M  agar  itni  hhlr  dekhke  Yahudi 
ddh  se  bhar  gaye,  aur  kbikif  kalue, 
aur  kufr  bakt.chue,  Pulus  ki  bdtcn  se 
niukhfthifat  ki. 

46  Tab  Pulus  aur  Barnaba*  nitlar 
hoko  bolo,  ki  Zarur  lini  ki  K hudd  ka 
kalam  pahle  tumhen  aunayajae;  bkin 
j  i.--,  baiki  tumne  ua  ko  radd  kiya,  aur 
ap  ko  hameaba  ki  zindagi  ko  liiq  ua 
«anijlii,  to  dekbo,  ham  phirke  gair- 
iiaumon  ki  taraf  mufawajjih  hote  ha  m. 

47  Kyunki  Kliiidiiwanil  ue  yunhiij 
hanieo  hukm  diyd,  ki  Main  ue  tujh 
ko  gair-qaumon  ka  nur  muqarrar  kiya, 
ta  ki  dunya  ki  intihi  tak  najiit  kii 
ba'is  b  o. 

48  Tab  gair-qaumen  in  balon  ko 
sunke  k  bus  h  huin,  aur  Khuda  ko  ka- 
lam ki  ta'rii'  kamc  lagin :  aur  jitne 
bamesba  ki  ziuda«i  ke  liyo  taiyar  kiye 
gaye  the,  i  min  Ide. 

49  Aur  Khudi  ki  kalam  ua  tamani 
mulk  men  pliaila. 

50  Par  Yahiidion  ne  Khudd-parast 

172 


Iquiiivm  w:t±  <i!e. 
aur  'i//.arwdli  'aurat'm  aur  shahr  ko 
raison  ko  ubhari,  aur  Pulus  aur  Barna- 
bas  par  fasad  utliayi,  aur  unhen  apni 
surbuddnn  H  nikal  diyi. 

5L  Tab  wc  apne  panwori  ki  klnik 
un  par  jhdrke  Iqunitim  men  ie. 

52  Aur  sh&gird  khuahi  aur  Riili  i 
Quds  ae  bliar  gaye. 

XIV  BA'B. 

AUR  Iqrmii.nu  mari  yuti  ht'id,  ki  ive 
ek  sith  Yabudion  ke  'ibidat- 
kbiiim  nii'n  gaye,  aur  aisc  taur  par  k;i- 
Idm  kiya,  ki  Yahiidion  aur  Yi'minioii 
ki  ek  bad  jama'al  iman  lai. 

2  Par  un  Yahiidion  ne,  jo  iman  na 
lae  the,  gair-qaumon  ko  ubhara,  aur 
un  ke  dil  L'liaiuii  ki  taraf  bad  kar  diyc. 

3  Is  liyo  WO  bahut  diu  wiihin  nilir, 
aur  Khudawand  ki  bdba:  be-dharak 
kalimkarte  the;  wuh  apno  fazl  ki  "bal. 
par  gawAbJ  deti,  aur  un  ko  bitbon 
se  niahdnidn  aur  achambbc  dikhata 
rahi. 

4  Aur  shahr  ko  \o#m  mcn  phi'it 
puri :  ha'ze  Yahiidion  ki,  aur  ba'ze 
raaiilrm  ki  taraf  ho  gaye. 

Par  jab  gair-qaumwakm  aur  Ya- 
hiidion Tiu  iijine  BBttMsoB  samet  fasad 
uthiyi,  ki  unhen  be-'izzat  aur  un  par 
jinUhrau  kareij, 

0  Wt  y  ih  ma'liiin  karke  Luqiuniya 
ke  shahr  Lustri  aur  Darbo  aur  un  k<: 
isy&s  ke  mulk  nien  libage; 

7  Aur  wahaii  Injil  sunate  rahe. 

8  )j  Aur  Luatra  men  ek  shftkha,  jis 
ke  panwon  meD  taqat  na  thi,  baitba 
thi :  wuh  apni  mi  ke  pet  hi  se  lunja 
thd,  aur  kabhi  na  chali ; 

9  U»  ne  Piilue  ko  biten  karte  suni; 
jis  ne  ua  ki  taraf  gaur  se  dekhke,  aur 
darydt't  karke  ki  us  merj  imin  hai  ki 
changi  howe, 

10  Bari  iwiz  se  kabi,  ki  Apnc  pdu- 
>n  par  6ldhi  khard  bo;  wuh  uclihai- 

ke  chalne  laga. 

11  Logon  ne  yih,  jo  Pulus  ne  kiyd 
thd,  dekhke,  awa/.  buland  karke,  Lu- 


Wuhdn  ke  Tahudi  A' A 

i|imuiya  ki  boli  men  katul,  Dewte  fiil  m  t 
ke  bL«B  men  ha.ui  }«r  utre  haig. 

12  Aur  unhotj  ne  Baraabaa  ko  Zeus 
kaha,  aur  l'iilus  kn  Harmes,  is  liye  ki 
wuh  kalam  men  tahui  karta  thd. 

13  Aur  Zeij*,  jo  ki  un  ke  shahr  ke 
saroline  tM,  na  ke  pujari  ne,  bati  aur 
ph  u  Ion  ke  bar  phatakon.  par  lake 
iogonke  sat.Ii  cbaria  ki  ciurbani  karcn. 

14  Jali  ilarnabas  aur  Pulus  rasillon 
no  yih  suni,  to  apne.  kapre  phsrc,  aur 
logon  ko  bicb  men  kiide,  yih  chillake, 

15  Aurkahkc,ki  Ai  mardo,  tum  yih 
kya  kaiti  ho?  Ham  bhi  insan  hain, 
aur  tatahan  tarah  hawass  rakhtc,  aur 
timihoii  Injil  Hunite  hain,  ti  ki  in  IjA- 
tiloii  se  kln&ra  karke  zinda.  Khuda  ki 
taraf  phiro,  jis  ne  asomu,  aur  zauiin, 
aur  samutidar,  aur  jo  kuchh  im  men 
lini,  patdd  kiya  .- 

16  Uh  MC  agle  zamAne  mog  sab 
fiaumon  ku  dibor  diya,  ki  apiii  apni 
rah  par  chalen, 

17  Tis  par  bhi  ua  tie  ihsan  kuras, 
aur  asmin  ae  haroare  liye  paiii  barsane, 
aur  mewon  ki  i'aslen  ]iaiua  karne,  aur 
haindrc  dikm  ko  khiuak  aur  khushi 
se  bhar  do  u  c  se  ap  ko  be-gawali  ua 
chhori. 

18  Aur  ye  batcn  kakke  logon  ko 
bari  musbMI  nc  baV.  raklia,  ki  un  ko 
ipiriiiiii  na  charhawep.. 

19  f  Aur  Ynhiidlon.  ae  AntAkiya 
aur  Iqunimn  bc  Ake,  aur  logon  ko  mall 
karke,  Pulus  ko  sangsAr  kiya,  aur  yih 
BHHJhke  ki  wuh  niar  gaya,  use  shahr 
ke  bahar  ghasit  'c  gaye. 

20  Par  jab  tdiagird  ua  ki  gird  o  pesh 
ikatthe  luie,  wuh  u^hko  shahr  men 
aya  ;  aur  dusrc  din  Barnabas  ke  satli 
Darbe  ko  chala  gaya. 

21  Aur  us  shahr  men  Injil  sunake, 
aur  bahut  se  ahAgird  karke,  LusItA  aur 
Ifjiinium  aur  Autakiya  ko  phire. 

22  Aur  ahagirdon  ke  dilon  ko  taq- 
irlyat  data,  aur  nasihat  karte  tbe,  ki 
iman  pir  qaim  rako,  aur  kaha,  Zarur 
hai  ki   haru  bahut   rausihaten  sah  k  e 

173 


L,  XV,  ijdl,  at/at&d  ii'Jidt-. 

Khuda  ki  badsbabat  men  dakhil 
hou. 

2.r!  Aur  tinhou  ne  har  ek  kalisiye 
men  un  kr  liye  buaurgon  ko  muijarrar 
karke,  aur  roza  ke  aath  du'i  roangke, 
unhetj  Khudawaiul  ko,  jis  par  iman 
Ide  the,  BompA 

24  Aur  Pisidiya  ao  guKarke  PaTTi- 
fuliya  mag  pahunohe. 

25  Aur  Parga  men  kaMia  sunA"ku 
Attaliya  ko  gaye : 

2li  Aur  wahan  se  jahA?,  par  charb- 
ke  AntikiyA  rnon  ae,  jahan  ae  U3  kam 
ke  liye,  jo  unhog  ne  ab  pura  kiya, 
Khuda  ke  fiizl  par  aompa  gaye  the. 

27  Aur  unhori  ne  pahunehke  kali- 
atvc  ku  ikatlhe  kiya,  aur  sab  kuchh  jo 
Khuda  ne  un  ke  siath  kiya,  auT  yili  k  i 
us  ne  gair-qnumon  ke  liye  iman  ka 
darwaza  khol.i,  bayan  kiya. 

28  Aur  we  ^li;igi'.dorj  ke  sath  wahan 
bahut  din  ralie. 

XV  BA'B. 

AU  B  \m'xe  Yahudiya  se  ake  bhaion 
ko  ta'Hm  dpne  lage,  ki  Agar 
MdsA  ki  sunnat  ke  muwafiq  turuhira 
khatna  na  ho,  to  tum  tiajdt  nahiii  pa 
sakte. 

2  Pas  jab  Piilus  aur  Barnahaa  se  un 
"      bahut  takrir  o  balu  lidi  rlii, 

to  unhon  ne  yih  thahrAyd  ki  Piilus 
aur  Barnabas,  aur  un  men  se  chand 
aur  iog,  la  ki  tahqiq  ke  liye,  rasiilog 
aur  buzurgon  ke  pas  Yarusakin  men 
jaen. 

3  So  we  kali«iye  se  kuchh  dur  pa- 
huuchae  jake  Eair-qaumon  ke  rujiV 
laue  ka  bayan  Karte  hi'ie  Finike  aur 
S&mariya  se  gii7,re.  Aur  sab  bh&fojj 
ko  bahut  khush  kiy.i, 

i  Aur  jab  Yariisalam  nien  pahunehe, 
kalisiye  aur  rastUon  aur  buzurgon  ne 
un  ko  qabul  kiya,  aur  unhon  ne,  jo 
luirhli  Khuda  ne  un  ke  sath  kiya  tha, 
hayau  kiva, 

S  Tab  Parisiog  ke  nrqe  mes  se  **" 
'zon  ne,  jo  iman  Ide  the,  uthke  kaha, 
ki  Un  ka  khatua  kuniii,  aur  Musa  ki 


Agy&r  ke  khatna  ki  babat 

shai  i'at  par  ckalne  ka  hukm  deud,zarur 

hai. 

G  ^  Tab  rasul  aur  buzurgjam'ahue, 
ki  ia  bdt  ko  sochen. 

7  Aurjabbiiri  bahs  hiii,  Parru3  ne 
khard  hoku  un  se  kahA,  Ai  bhAio,  tum 
jantii  ho  ki  baUut  diri  hrio  ki  Khudd 
ne  haru  men.  se  mujhc  ctumd,  ki  gair- 
ciaunieri  mcri  zuhdn  se  Injil  ki  bit 
suneg,  aur  imdn  lAwen. 

8  Aur  Khudd  nc.jodilki  jdntdhai, 
un  par  gawahi  di,  ki  un  ko  bhi  hanidri 
tarah  Kiih  i  Quds  di ; 

9  Aur  iman  se  un  ki  dil  pak  karke 
ham  raen  aur  un  men  kuchh  farq  na 
rokha, 

10  Tas  ab  tum  kyiin  Khuda  ko  dz- 
mate  ho,  ki  ahAgirdon  ki  gardan  par 
jua  rakhe,  jis  ka  na  hanidre  bdpddde 
na  hain  uthfi  sakte  tbc  ? 

11  Aur  h  ani  ko  yaqfn  hai  k  i  ban 
Klnulawand  Tim'  Masih  ke  fazl  sb 
liojdt  p&weoge,  aur  uni  tarah  se  we  bbf 
pdwengo. 

12  T  Tab  adri  jamd'ftt  chup  rahi, 
aur  Barnabaa  aur  Pfilus  se  yih  bayAn 
aunne  lap,  ki  Khuda  ne  kaiai  nisha- 
nian  aur  kardmaten  un  ke  waailo 
gair-qauinon  men  zdhir  kin. 

13  T"  Jab  we  khAmoah  hiie,  Ya'qub 
kalme  lagd,  Ai  bhdio,  mati  Huno ; 

14  Shama'im  nc  bayan  kiyd  hai,  ki 
kis  tarah  Khudd  nopahiegair  tytumi  :j 
par  nigdh  ki,  ki  un  men  se  ek  guroh 
apne  nam  ke  liyc  chun  le ; 

15  Aur  ia  ae  nabion  ki  baten  inilti 
hain  :  chunanehi  likhd  bai,  ki 

16  Ba'd  is  ke  main  phir  Alingi,  aur 
DAdd  ke  gire  hiie  dera  ko  uthAungA : 
aur  U6  ku  trite  phute  ki  maraniuiat 
karke  use  phir  k  hari  kariingi: 

17  Ki  log  kA  bauiya,  aur  aab  gair- 
OKimaft,  Jo  mere  niin  ki  kahlili  hain, 
Khudiiwund  ko  dhumlhcii.  Khuda- 
wand,  jo  yih  Bab  kuchh  kartd,  aisA 
fani'ldl : i  hai. 

18  KhudA  ko  dunyd  ke  aburu'  se 
apne  sab  kdm  nia'lum  hain. 

174 


A'AMAX,  XV.  takrar  M  kowi. 

10  So  merf  aalAh  yih  hai,  ki  un  par 
jo  gair-na union  men  ae  IChudi  ki  taruf 
phire  hain,  bera  na  (Ulen  : 

20  Par  un  ko  likh  bliejen,  ki  buton 
ki  gandagiorj.aur  ha  nim  k  Ari,  aur  gald- 
ghonti  hiii  chizon,  aur  lu.li li  se  kindru 
rahen, 

21  Kyiinkl  Igle  zamAne  se  har  shahr 
men  Musi"  ki  sluirl'at  ke  innnddi- 
karncwdlo  hote  Ae  hain,  aur  har  saht 
ke  din  wuh  'ibadut-khanon  men  parhi 
jAtf. 

22  Tab  rasulon  aur  buzurgon  ne, 
sAri  kalisiye  aamet,  bihtar  jdnd  ki 
apne  men  se  kai  shakhs  chunke  Pu- 
lua  aur  BaroabAs  ke'  «Ath  AntdkiyA 
jnen  bhejerj ;  ya'ne,  YahiidAh  ko,  ki 
jis  kd  laaab  iiarsabi»  bal,  aur  Silds 
ko,  jo  bhaion  men  muqaddam   ddmi 


tho; 

23  Aur  un  ke  hdtb  yih  likh  bhcjd ; 
ki  Un  bhdion  ko,  jo  gair-qaumon  men 
M  liiiin,  aur  Antakiya,  aur  Suri  ya,  aur 
Qihqiya  men  rahte,  raaiilon  aur  bu- 
zurgon aur  bhdion  kd  silam : 

24  Azbaski  hain  ne  auuA  ki  ham 
men  se  ba'zon  ne,  jin  ko  baui  ne  hukm 
nahin  kiyd,  jdke  tumben  anni  bAton  se 
ghalira  diyd,  aur  tumhdre  dilon  ko  yih 
kahke  pareshdn  kiyd,  ki  Khatna  karo, 
aur  sliari'at  par  chalo : 

25  So  ham  nc  ok-dil  hoke  bihtar 
jAni  ki  ba'z  cliuue  hfie  ddmion  ko 
apne  'azizon  Barnabds  aur  Piilua  ko 
sath, 

26  ,To  ki  aise  ddmi  hain,  ki  unbon 
ne  apni  jdn  hamAre  Khudawand  Y  isi 
Masih  ke  ndm  par  fehatre  men  da'.i, 
tnmbdre  pds  bhejen. 

27  ChunAnchi  ham  ne  Yahud  Ah  aur 
SiUs  ko  bhejAjaur  we  jb  bdten  EUbinf 
bbi  baydn  karenge. 

28  Kyunki  TSiih  i  Quds  ne  aur  bnn 
ne  bihtar  jinA  ki  in  zaniri  bAton  ki! 
hiwA,  tum  par  aur  kuchh  bojh  na 
dAlen : 

'Jlt  Ki  tum  buton  ke  t'harbdwon,  aur 
lahu,  aur  galdghonti  hiii  chizon,  aur 


Uli  bal  kdf-nsiil  hond. 


A'AMA'L,  XVI. 


haramkan  se  parhesi  karo.     Agar-tuml      2  Ai 


PiUus  aur  Sila*  H  babat. 
Lustra   nur  Jqun: 


chizon  m  ap  ko  bacha-e  rakhoge,  to  Win  bhaioii  ke  mudik  nekn&iu  tha. 


khrth  kiiroge.     Salamat  raho. 

30  Tab  wo  rukhsat  hoko  Antikiya 


Pulus  ne  chaha  ki  use  apno  sath 
chale  ;  tab  us  ko  le  jiike  un  Yahii- 


iiioii  io ;  aur  jiimd'&t  ko  ikat  tha-  karke  dion  ke  «abah,  jo  un  at.rdl"  men  the, 


khatt  de  diyd. 

"  31  We  use  parhke  is  tasalli  ki  bdt 

si-  kliimh  hiie. 

82  Aur  Yuhiidih  aur  806«  ne,  ki  we 
blii  nabi  the,  blnlinn  ko  halmt  si  bdton 
se  nasihat  karke  taqwiyat  di. 

33  Aur  we  kuchh  din  rahko  sahih 
salamat  bhaion  bu  rukh.^it  hoke  rasiil- 
oii  ke  nas  gaye. 

34  Mngar  Silds  ne  wahan  rahnd 
bihtar  jaili. 

35  Aur  Pulua  aur  Barnabds  Anta- 
kiya  rnen  nih  k  e  bahut  aur  logon  ko 
satu  Khudawand  ka  kalam  sikhlate 
aur  u»  ki  baahdrat  dete  the. 

30  1  Aur  kai  KM  ba'd  Pulus  no 
Barnabds  se  kaha,  A 'o,  har  ek  ahahr 
men,  jahan  ham  nc  Khuda  ka  kalam 
suiidya,  phir  jake  apne  bhaiott  ko  de- 
khen,  ki  k&isc  hain. 

37  Aur  Barnabds  ki  ralah  tlii,  ki 
Yuhaima  ko,  jia  ka  laqal>  Marqus  hai, 
apne  sath  le  jae. 

38  Magar  Pulus  ne  munasih  na 
j;ina  ki  us  shakhs  ko,  jo  Pamluliya 
men  un  se  judd  liiia,  aur  us  kara  ke 
liye  un  ke  sang  na  gay&j  sdth  le  jae. 

39  Tab  un  men  aisi  taknir  hrii,  k 
ek  diisre  se  juda  ho  gaya;  aur  Barna- 
bas Marqus  ko  leke  jahaz  par  Kupmu 
ko  rawdna  hua ; 

40  Aur  Pulus  ne  Silds  ko  pasand 
k  iya,  aur  bhaion  se  Khudd  ke  fazl  ke 
Mipurd  hoke  rawdna  hiia. 

41  Aur  Suriya  aur  Qiliqiy&  men 
guzarke  kalisiyaon  ko  taqwiyat  detA 
ph  ini. 

XVI  BA-B. 

W  UU  Darbe  aur  Lustra  men  pa- 
hunclia :    aur,  dekho,    wahan 


ka.  khatna  kiya,  kyiinki  we  sab  jAnte 
the  ki  is  kA  bdp  Yunani  th£. 

4  Aur  jab  wo  shahrun  min  guzarte 
e,  to  un  hukraon  ko,  jo  racafop  aur 

huzurgog  ne  Yiimsahun  men  thahrdyd 
tha,  uiifieii  pahunchAyd,  ki  un  ki 
muhdfazat  karen. 

5  So  kalisiyden  Iman  men  mubut 
huiij,  aur  ginti  men  roz  ba  roa  barhti 
gayin. 

6  Jab  we  Friigiya  aur  Galatiya  ke 
mulk  ko  guzre,  to  Ruh  i  Quda  nc  un- 
ben mnn'a  kiya,  ki  Asia  men  kalam 

. sundwon. 

7  Tab  we  Mi'isiya.  men  Ake  Bitii- 
niya  men  jdne  ki  tadbir  raeri  lage :  par 
Ruh  ne  unhen  jane  na  diya. 

S  Sowb  Miisiya  se  guzarkar  Troas 
u  i  ■  ■  f_  nur  ia, 

t)  Aur  Pulus  ne  rAt  ko  royi  dekhi ; 
ki  ek  Maqaduni  Adini  khara  hdi,  aur 
us  ki  mienat  karke  kahta  hai,  ki  Piir 
utar,  aur  Maqaddniya  men  dkebamari 
madad  kar. 

10  Jon  us  ne  roya  dekhi,  ust  dani 
ham  ne  Maqaddniya  men  jAnc  ka 
i  rada  kiya,  yih  yaqin  karke  ki  Kim- 
tUwand  no  hameg  buldya,  ki  unben 
Injil  snnawen. 

11  Pas  Troas  se  kishti  kholko  ham 
sidhe  Samutiwjiya  men,  aur  diisre  din 
NiyApulia  men,  ae ; 

12  Aur  wahan  so  Filippi  men  ao, 
jo  Maqadiiniya  ki  us  qiBniat  ka  mu* 
qaddain  sbulir  aur  ltumion  ki  basti 
hai :  ham  kuchh  din  usi  shahr  meij 
rahe. 

13  Aur  sabt  ke  din  sbahr  ko  bahar 
nadi  kinAre  gaye,  jahan  du'a  mdngne 
ka  diistur  tha;  aur  haitbke  un  'aurat- 


Timtaus  nime  ek  «hagird  tha,  jis  ki  on  se,  jo  ikatihi  thin,  kabiin  karne 
mdYahudin  tbi.juiindn  lai;  par  us  kajlage. 

bap  Yunani  tba :  |     14  T  Aur   Thuatira  shahr    ki    ek, 

176 


Puitis  o  SUas  M  </<iid  hoin'i.    A'  AMA'L,  XVI.  DArogn  ka  murid  harui. 


Kbudd-parant  'aurat  LudiA  nAm,  qir- 
miz  bechnewdli,  Buuti  thi :  ub  kd  dil 
Khiidawnnd  ne.  kliolA,  ki  Piilus  ki 
bAton  par  ji  lagayA. 

15  Aur  jab  uh  nc  apne  gharAne 
Baruet  baptiama  paya,  to  minnat  karke 
kaha,  Agar  tumben  yaqin  hai  ki  main 
KhudAwand  ki  imdndar  MU,  to  ehalko 
mere  ghar  men  nilio.  Aur  hamen 
zabardasti  le  gayi. 

16  ^  Aur  aisd  hiid,  ki  jab  ham 
du'A  mingoe  kl  jagah  Jfte  Hip,  ok 
chhokri,  jis  men  gaib-dani  ki  ruh 
samai  thi,  hamen  mil!,  jo  mib-sd  :' 
apne  mdlikon  ke  liyc  bah  u  t  kuchh 
peidft  k  arti  thi  : 

17  Ub  ne  Pi'iIuh  ke  aur  liamArc 
pichhe  Ako  chiUAke  kahfi,  ki  Ye  admi 
Khuda  Ta'ild  ko  bande  hain,  jo  ham 
lio  najdt  ki  rih  balAtc  hain. 

IB  Yih  us  ne  bahut  dimm  tak  kiyA. 
A'khir  Pulua  ranjida  lnia,  aur  phirke 
us'ruh  se  kahA,  ki  Main  tujhe  Yisu' 
Masih  ke  iiam  par  hukm  karti  hug, 
ki  is  so  nikal  jd.  Wuh  uni  dam  nikal 
gayi. 

19  %  Jab  us  ke  mdlikon  nc  dekha 
ki  thi  ki  kumai  ki  urwned  jati  rahi,  to 
Piilus  o  Silau  kn  pakarke  cljauk  men 
sardArorj  ke  pas  khinoh  la  chale. 

20  Aur  uiiln-n  faiijdari  ke  hdkimon 
ke  age  le  jake  kahd,  ki  Ye  Admi,  jo 
Yahudi  hain,  hamare  sdiahr  ko  bahut 
satAte  hain, 

21  Aur  harn  ko  aisi  rasmen  batAto, 
jin  ka  rndniia  aur  uu  par  'amal  karna 
hamen,  ki  Rnmi  hairj,  rawA  nahin. 

22  Tab  bhir  milke  un  ki  muklidlafat 
inen  ut.lii :  aur  f  nijddri  ke  hakinion  ne 
un  ke  kapre  phdrko  un  ko  bet  mdrne 
ka  hukm  tiiya. 


f  A'dhi  rAt  ko  Ffilus  aur  Silds 
du'A  mangto  hue  KhudA  ki  aiiAisli  ke 
git  gAte  the;  aur  bandlme  unhen 
aunte  the. 

26  Tab  ekbArgi  barA  bhimchAl  Ayd, 
nisA  ki  qaid-khAnc  ki  uew  blii  hil 
gayi :  aur  jiiat  sab  darwazo  khul  gaye, 
aur  aab  ki  beriAn  gir  gayi  n. 

27  Aur  qaid-khdne  kA  dAroga  jdg 
utha,  aur  jab  qaid-khdne  ke  darwAne 
khule  dekhe,  to  yiiiVaimnlikc  ki  ban- 
dhue bhdg  gaye,t«lwdr  khinehko  chAhA 
ki  apne  ta.in  mdr  ddle. 

28  Tab  Pului+ ne  hari  AwAz  se  pn- 
kdrkc  kahA,  Apno  ta.in  mii|sdn  mat 
pahunelia:  kyuiiki  ham  sah  yahdn 
maujud  hain. 

29  Tab  wuh  chirag  mangwAke  hlii- 
tar  daurA,  aur  kampS.  huA  IMlus  aur 
SilAs  ke  pAnwon  par  girA, 

30  Aur  unhen  bAhar  lAke  kahA,  Ai 
Btlhibo,  main  kyA  karian  ki  najit 
|.;iiinV 

31  Unhon  ne  kaha,  ki  Khudiwand 
Yisii'  Masih  par  imAu  IA,  ki  hi  aur 
t«rA  gharAnA  najAt  pAwegA. 

32  Tab  unhun  ne  us  ko,  aur  sab  ko 
jo  us  ko  ghar  men  thi',  Khudawand  Jiii 
kalam  sunAyA. 

S3  Aur  us  ne  rat  ki  usi  ghari  unhen 
leke  un  ke  zakhin  dhoe:  aur  wunhin 
us  ne,  aur  sab  ue  jo  ub  ke  the,  baj>- 
t isma  pAyA. 

34  Aur  unhen  apne  ghar  lAke  un  ke 
sAmhne  dastarkhwAn  biohhAyA,  aur 
apno  tamAm  gbar  aamet  Khuda  par 
iman  lake  khuwhi  ki. 

35  Jab  din  huA  faujdAn'  ke  hakimon 
ne  piyAdon  sc  kahla  bliejA,  ki  Un 
admion  ko  chhor  de. 

36  Tab  qaid-VhAne   ke  dAroga   ne 


23  Aur  unhen  bahu  t  mArke  uaJd-'Pulus  ko  is  bdt  ki  khabar  di,  ki  Fauj- 
khine  men  ddld,  mir  f]aid-khane  ke  diri  ke  hdkimorj  m  kahlA  bliejd,  ki 
darogaso  tiikid  ki,  ki  hari  hoshyAi'i  sc'iumhen  chhor  den:  pas  ab  nikalke 
un  ki  nigahbaui  kar.  [salAmat  chale  jdo. 

■'i  Ub  ne  aiaA  hukm  pAke  unhen  37  Par  Pulua  ne  un  se  kahA,  ki 
andar  ke  qaid-khdne  roen  dala,  aur  un  Unhon  ne  hamen,  jo  Ri'imi  hain,  It;- 
ke  pdnw  kAth  inen  t.hok  di'ye.  |guuah  sAbit  kiye,  logon  ke  sAmhne  bet 

"176 


TasmhmUji  Tahudion  ka 
marke  qaid  men  dald  :  aur  tb  ham  ko 
chupko  nikalte  h;im?  aisa  na  hogd ; 
baiki  wc  iip  ake  hamen  nikal  h;  dialon. 

38  Tab  piyadon  ne  ye  biiten  faujddri 
ke  hakimon  ko  suniin :  jab  unhon 
sund  ki  ltuuii  hain,  todar  gaye. 

39  Aur  ake   nun   ruandyd,   aur 
bahar   lake   miituat   ki,  ki   shahr 
chale  jaejj. 

40  Tab  wa  qaid-khdne  se  nikalkc 
Ludid  ke  yahan  gaye :  aur  bhdion.  ku 
dekhke  unhen  nasihat  ki.  aur  rawfi.na 
hde. 

XVII  BATI. 

TAB  we  Amfipulis  aur  Apullonid 
ae  guzarke  Taswaluuinc  mon,  ja- 
liiih  Yaluulion  ka  ck  'ibddatkli&iia  tiba, 


A' AM' AL,  XVII.  mmhn  paT  fttad  uthdnd. 
karke  kahte  hain,  ki  bddshah  to  dilari 
bai,  ya'ue,  Yisu'. 

8  So  unhon  ne  logon,  aur  shahr  ke 
sardamn  ko,  yib  sunakc  ghabrd  diya. 
*9  Tab  unhon  ne  Yasiin  aur  baqion 
se  zamiu  leku  unhen  ehhor  diya.     ■ 

10  f  Li;kin  bhdion  ne  usi  dam 
ratotj  rat  Pulua  aur  Silau  ko  Barid 
shahr  rnen  bhej  diya;  we  wahai] 
pahunchkc  Yab.vn.Uoti  ku  'ibadat-khaiie 


4e: 

2  Aur  Pulus  apuc  dasttSr  par  o 
paa  andar  gaya,  aur  tin  sablon 
niuvishton  ki  baton  ka  charcha  un  ke 
sdth  kiva." 

3  Ki  un  ka  bhed  kholta,  aur  dalil 
lake  kahta  tha,  ki  Zariir  tha  ki  Masih 
dukh  ufliavve,  aur  murdon  men  se  ji 
ut^he ;    aur  ki  yih  Yisil',  jia  ki  mai 
tur.ihen  manadi  kartd  hun,  wuhi  Masi 
hai. 

4  Tab  un  men  so  ba'zon  ne  min 
liyd,  aur  Pulua  aur  Silas  ke   aharik 
htic :  aur  Khudd-parast  Ytindnion.  ki 
bui  jaina'at,  aur  bahuteri  ashraf  ' 
rnteii  bhi. 

5  U  Par  Yahud  ion  ne  jo  iman 
lie,  dab  ae  bharke  bdzdriou  uien  se 
kai  ek  shariron  ko  apue  sath  liya,  aur 
hliir  higakc  shahr  mcn  hangarua  kiyd, 
aur  Y7asiiri  ka  <;har  ghtrfee  unhen 
dhundba,  ki  logon  ke  samlme  khinch 
Idwen. 

(i  Aur  jjib  unhen  na  paya,  to  YasYin 

aur  kai  bhdion  ko  shahr  ke  aarddron 

■  Nilliito  Jiiir  kh'njc-h  lio,  ki  Ye 

ihutlu,  jinhon  ne  jahdii  ko  ula|  diya, 

yaharj  bai  ae  hain  | 

7  Un  ki  mibmaol  Y  daun  ne  ki ;  aur 
we  aab  Qaisar  ko  hukrnon  ki  bar  khilafi 
177 


ahdg.  ke  log  TassaIuniqlon  se 
nok-zat  the ;  ki  unhoij  ne  bare  sliauq 
se  kaldm  ko  qabfil  kiya,  aur  roz  roe 
nawjfihton  mon  dhftndhte  rahe,  ki  yo 
baten  yilnhi  hnin,  ya  nahirj- 

12  ls  waKtc  babutere  un  men  se 
iman  Ue ;  aur  Yunani  sharif  'auraten 
aur  mard  bhi  thrtre  na  the. 

13  Jab  Taa9aiuniqe  ko  Y'ahiidiori 
no  jana,  ki  Piilua  Khuda  k  a  kalam 
Baria  rnen  bhi  sunata  bai,  to  wahan 
bhi  ake  logon  ko  ubhara. 

14  Tab  bhlion  ne  filfaur  Pulus  ko 
rukhnat  kiya,  ki  samundar  ki  taraf 
jae;  lekirt  Silas  aur  Titntaus  wabig 
raho. 

S  Aur  we  jo  Pdlus  ki  rahbari 
karte  the,  usio  Ateni  tak  lae  :  aur  Si]as 
aur  Timtaua  ke  liye  hukru  leke  ki  jis 
jaldi  se  ho  sake  us  ke  jida  awen,  iswina 
hue. 

16  1   Aur  jis  waqt  Pulus  AUni 
zn  un  ki  nih  lakta  tha,  jab  u«  ne 

dek  ha  ki  shahr  butorj  se  bhara  hai,  to 
us  ka  ji  jal  gaya. 

17  Ia  iiyo  wuh  'ibailaf-khine  men 
Yabddiorj  aur  Khndd-parastorj  se,  aur 
chauk  mL-n  un  j>e  Jo  ruz  use  milte  the, 
bjiliss  ksirta  tha. 

18  Tab  kai  Afquri  aur  BtoioJ  '4Um 
uaae  bahasne  la«a,  aur  ba'zon  ne  kaha, 
ki  Yih  Ivakwasi  kya  kaba  cbabti  hai  ? 
auron  ne  k.ib.i,  Yih  gair  dewton  ka 
kiiaiwr-donewala  ma'ldm  partdhai ;  is 
liye  ki  wtih  unhcrj  Yisd'  aur  idydmat 
ki  klui^hkhabiiri  dcta,  thd. 

10  Tab  we  use  pakar  ke  Ariupagus 


MAh  Ateni  m*n  A'AMA'L,  XVIII.  Injil  m  >dt&. 

par  1«  gaye,  aur  kahd,  A'yd  hameiiiki  KhudA  sono,  rtipe,  yd  patthar  ki 
rna'liim  lio  «akta  hai,  ki  yili  uayi  maulud  hai,  jo  ddmi  ki  liunar  o  tadbir 
ta'Ifni,  jo  td  detd  hai,  kyd  hai  ?  j  bc  gariie. 

20  Kyilnki  M\  lnundre  kanon  mr-ri  SG  Uaraz  ki  KhudA,  jahalat  ko 
anokhi  batin  pahunchiUd  hai !  sohami  wutog  u  tarah  HjSu  ah  sah  adrnlon 
jatid  cfaahtc  hai  r,  ki  iu  n  kyd  garaz !  ko  kir  jngftfe  bukin  deta,  bai,  ki  tauba 
hai.  karen : 


21  (Ia  wdste  ki  sare  Ateniwaio  aur 
inusifir  jo  wahdii  rahd?  thi',  apiii 
ftmtt  kd  waqt,  siwa  nayi  bat  kahni 
aur  Buniie  ke,  dfisre  kam  men  iiahin 
katt*  the.) 

22  T  Tab  Piilus  Ariupagits  ke  bich 
men  kkani  hoko  boli,  Ai  Ateniwaio, 
main  dokhta  huij  l;i  tua  har  surat  H 
dewton  ko  bnre  pujncwale  ho. 

23  Kyunki  main  ne  sair  karte,  aur 
tunilidro  ma'budnn  par  nazar  kartc 
bne,  ek  qiirbdugdh  pai,  jis  par  vih 
likha  thd.ki  NA'-MA'I.U'M  KHUDA' 
KB  LIYB.  Pas  jis  ko  tumbcraa'lum 
kiyo  pnjte  ho,  main  tuni  ko  lisi  ki 
khabar  deta  hiin. 

24  Khuda,  ju  ne  dunya  aur  Bab 
kuchh  p  its  men  hai  [Midi  kiya,  ji.s 
hiU  ki  wuh  dsinan  aur  Uimin  ka  Malik 
hai,  ]ia(h  ki  batuli  hiii  haikalon  men 
nabig  rahtd ; 

25  Na  adtoion  ke  lt&th  se  khidmat 
leta,  goyd  ki  kisii  chiz  kd  inuhtaj  hai, 
kyimid  wuh  to  dp  sah  ko  zindagi  aur 
sdn»  aur  tab  kuclih  bakhshtd  hai 

26  Aur  ek  hi  lahu  Re  admi^ii  ki  sab 
qauinen  tamdni  zamin  ki  sath  par 
basrte  ke  liye  paidfi  kin,  aur  tnuqarrar 
waoton,  aur  uu  ki  sukr.nat  ki  haddon 
ko  thahravd  ; 

27  T:i.  ki  Kimddwand  ko  dhundh- 
cn,  shdyad  ki  totolkar  use  pdwen, 
a;>arehi  wuh  bani  rarti  kisi  m  dur 
nahin : 

2y  Kyfirjki  usf  se  ham  jito,  aur 
chalte  phirto,  aur  maujud  haig  ;  jaisd 


tutnhdre  i-hd'iron  nwg 
ne  kahd  hai,  ki  Ha: 
hain- 


31  Kyunki  un  ne  ek  din  thahraya 
hai,  jis  men  wuh  ra^ti  ae  dunyd  ki 
'addlat  kar.  gd,  u*  ddmi  ki  ma'rilat, 
jise  us  no  muqarrar  kiyd;  aur  use 
murdoij  men  n  ufhake  yih  bat  sab  par 
sabit  ki. 

32  \  Aur  jab  unhon  ne  nmrdon  ke 
ji  nthne  ki  bdt  suni,  to  ba'/e  thatllid 
indnio  lage  ;  aur  baV.on  ne  kaiid,  b*  ki 
babat  Iiaiu  tujh  se  phir  Buncnge, 

33  Tab  Pdlus  un  ku  dariuiyan  se 
c  ha  Ia  gaya. 

34  Par  kitnc  admi  ua  se  milke 
imdu  Ide :  un  men  Diunusius  Ariu- 
[«i'.tis  kd  ek  Galdhkar,  aur  Damaris 
name  ek  'aurat,  aur  kai  aur  un  ke  sdth 
the. 

XVIII  BA'B. 

BA'D  us  ke  Pulus  Ateni  se  rawdna 
hoke  Qurintua  men  dyd. 
Aur  wahdn  Atjula  ndme  ek  Ta- 
hfidi  ko  pdyd,  jia  ki  paiddish  Puntus 
ki  thi,  aur  uiihin  dinon  apni  joru 
Prisqilla  ke  adth  Italia  se  dyd  thd  : 
(kyi'mki  Qlaiidius  u«  hukm  diya  thd 
ki  no  Yahudi  Ram  se  nikal  jdwen  :) 
so  wuh  un  ke  pas  gaya, 

3  Aur  is  liyc  ki  wuh  un  ka  hani- 
pesha  thd,  un  ke  sdlh  raba,  aur  kdro 
karue  lagi :  kyiinki  un  kd  peslia 
kliaima-ihfzi  thd, 

4  Aurwuh  har  eabt  k^'ibiiiiat-khanc 
men  bahs  kartd,  aur  yahiidion  aur 
Yiindnion  ko  q^il  karri  thd. 

5  Aur  jab  Silas  aur  Timidns  Ma- 
qndviiiiya  se  dc,  Piilua  ji  men  majbdr 


Wii  ha'zoji.hfid,  aur  Yahlidiw  ku  dge  gawdhi  di 


i  hi  ki  nasi '  1 


IlBd'  wnlu  Masih  hai. 
(j  Jab  wo  inwjdbala  karne,  aur  kul'r 


29  Pas  Khuda  ki  aasl  boke  hamen  bakne  lage,  uh  ne  apne  kapre  jhdrke 
muudaib   nahin  ki   yih   khiyal  karcnjun  ae  kahd,  Tumhdrd  khun  tumhiri 


Qt*rintttt  mt.n  vn'z  binti  A'AMA'L 
gardau  par;  main  pAk  hiirj :  ab  so 
gair-qaumon  ki  taraf  jdiingd. 

7  f  Wahdn  bc  wnh  chald,  aur 
Jiistus  ndmu  KhudA-parast  koghar,  jo 
'ibAdat-khdnc  so  mild  thii,  gayA. 

8  Aur  'ihadat-khanckdBarddr  Kris- 
pus,  apTie  tamani  ghar  samet,  Khudd- 
wand  par  iuidu  layd :  aur  baliut  se 
Qunnti  suiiku  imftn  Ide,  aur  baptisma 
paya. 

9  Tab  Khuddwand  ne  rdt  ko  roya 
men  Ptilus  sc  kahA,  Mat  dar,  par  kanta 
ja,  aur  clnip  na  ho; 

10  Is  liye  ki  main  tere  sdth  hurj, 
nur  koi  tujh  se  bad-sul&ki  karno  na 

Cawega;  kyiinki  is  ahahr  men  mere 
ahut  log  kain. 

11  So  wuh  derh  bara«  wahdn  tha- 
barko  u  n  ke  darmiyau  Khudd  kd 
kaldni  aikhdtA  rahA. 

12  ■(  Aur  jab  GAllio  Akhaia  ka 
Bdba  tlid,  Yahudi  ekd  karkc  Pi'ilus 
|iar  charh  Ae,  aur  usc  'adAlat  men  le 
gaye, 

13  Aur  kahA,  Yih  ahakha  logon  ko 
bahkdtA  ki  shari'at  ke  barkhildf  Khudd 
ki  jorastish  harem 

14  Aur  jubPufusiiccbdhdkimunb 
khole,  Gilho  ne  Yahudion  w  kabd,  Ai 
Yahudio,agar  kuchh  mim  ydshararat 
hoti,  to*  wajib  thd  ki  main  sabr  karko 
tunihirf  suntA; 

15  Par  agar  yih  suwal  tutnhdrl 
ta'lim,  aur  rjdmon,  aur  sbari'at  ke  hann 
men  hai,  to  tam  bi  jAno;  kyi'mki 
main  nahin  chdhtA  ki  aisi  h&ton  ki 
raunsif  hiin. 

16  Aur  ua  no  unhen  'addla-t-gAh  ae 
nikdl  diyd. 

17  Tab   eab  Yimdnioii    ne  'ibddflt- 
khdne  ke  sardAr  Sostanes  ko  pakarke 
'adalat-gah   ke   sdmhnc   mara.      P: 
GAllio  nu  in  baton  fei  kuchh  parwd  na 
ki. 

18  ^  Aur  jab  Piilus  aur  bhi  baliut 
din  wahdn  rahA  thd,  tab  bhdiun  se 
rukhsat  hoke,  aur  Qankrid  men  air 
uiundake,  kyiuiki  m  ne  tuaunat  mini 

'  179 


XY[II.  Apullus  ki  ioa'z  foi.r„6. 

thijahd/  par  Suriya  ku  rawdnd  lmn, 
aur  Pritwulld  aur  Aujili.  us  ke  &tith 
the. 

L9  Aur  Alasus  men  pahunehke  us 
qa  milieij  wahin  Dhhofd :  aur  dp  'iba- 
dat-kkduomenjdko  Ya'ktidion  se  bdten 
kiri. 

20  Tab  unliorj  ne  ua  se  darkhwdst 
lu,  ki  mu  kurhh  din  uu  ku  Batil  rahe, 
par  us  ne  na  nidnA; 

21  Baiki  uu  m;  yih  kahke  rukksat 
liiid,  ki  bar  hal  men  iiuijhe  zanit  hai 
ki  Yarusaliim  mm  'id  i  iyanda  ko 
kanin;  par  agar  Khud.i  clidlie.to  tum- 
bare  pds  pbir  aungd.  Aur  Afasus  se 
jaliaK  par  sawir  boko  cbala. 

22  Aur  Qaisariya  men  utarke  Ujiar 
cbarh  gayd,  aur  jab  kaliajye  se  ^nldiii 
lialni  tfni,  Aatikiya  ko  utar  gaya. 

23  Aur  kuchh  diu  rahku  wahij  K 
rawdnd  hi'id,  aur  Galatiya  aur  Frdgiya 
ke  m  u  Ikon  men  barabar  i-u/urta,  aur 

b  shdgirdon  ko  rjHpviyat  deti  fiMTd. 

21  %  Aur  Apullua  udnie  ek  Yahu- 
di, jiaki  paidiisb  Iskaudaria  ki  thi,  jo 
zuhAii-dwarsliakJiHaur  pdk  nawishtoij 
men  barA  qdbil  thd,  Al'asus  iuuii  pa- 
huneba. 

25  Is  abjjfhi  uv  rpufcUwaad  ki  rah 
ki  tarbiyat  pai  thi ;  aur  dil  meu  sar- 
^arm  lioke  kalam  karta,  aur  sihhal  se 
rpmd&wand  ki  Mten  «ikbAtA  tha, 
piirsjirrYdbiiimAUAbaptiama  jdntdtha, 

2R  Wuh  ibAddt-klidne  men  be-dba- 
rak  Imlue  lagi:  aur  Aqnli  aur  Pria- 
i[illd  ne,  us  ki  suake  use  apoa  tath 
liyA,  aur  us  ko  Khudd  ki  rah  ziyada 
durusti  se  batdi. 

27  Jab  uh  ne  Akhaia  niea  utar  jdne 
kA  irdtla  kiyd,  to  bhaion  ue  shAgirdou 
ko  likhkc  darkhwast  kf  ki  us  ko  tjabul 
karen :  us  ne  walian  j>ahunclike  un 
ki,  jo  fezl  ke  sabab  im;in  lae  the,  baii 
madad  ki : 

28  Kyurjki  uu  no  pak  namahtcig  se 
sdhit  kurke  ki  yih  Yisii'  wuh  Masih 
l.ui,  Yaiiddii'ii  ki>  sah  ke  age  bari-  zor 
shur  xv  ijdil  kiyd. 


Putus  ke  hdth  m  A'AMA'L,  XIX. 

xix  ba'h. 

AUB  aisA  Mi,  ki  jab  Apullun 
Qurintii8  mon  thA,  Pilus  lipnr 
ke  mulkon  bc  guzarke  Afaaua  men 
AyA,  aur  kaf  ahAgirdon  ko  pAko, 

2  Un  sg  kalia,  Kya  tom  ne,  jab  h 
iniAn  16«,  Biih  i  Quds  pai  ?  Unhorj  ne 
nae  kahA,  Hara  no  to  suni  blii  nahin. 
ki  KiUi  i  Quds  hai. 

3  Ua  no  uu  sk  kuini,  Pas  tu.ni  ne 
kia  kA  baptitiiiia  paya?  Wo  bola,  ki 
Y'ubannA  kii  baptiama, 

4  Tab  Piilua  ne  kaili,  YuhannA  no 
to  tauba  k£  baprisma  diyi,  logon  ae 
y  i  b  kabte  hue  Vi  ua  par  jo  ttum  pi- 
chhe  AtA  hai,  ya'ne  liati'  par,  hnAn 
lawen, 

5  tJnlion  ne  yib  aunkarKhudawand 
Tisii'  ke  nAui  par  baptiama  pAyi. 

6  Aur  jab  TMIus  ne  un  pat  hath 
rakhe  the,  Ruh  i  Quds  un  mr  Ai,  aur 
tarah  tarah  ki  ziibAuun  bolne  aur 
nubdwat  karne  lage. 

7  We  sab  ddnii  barali  «k  the. 

8  Aur  wali  'ibadat-kbAne  mag  jAke 
bo-dharak  bolta,  aur  tin  mahinon.  tak 
bahs  k'arta,  aur  KhudA  ki  liAdahihat 
ki  bAtcti  unhen  samjhAt.A  rahA : 

9  Ltskin  jab  ba'zon  ko  dil  sakht  ho 
gaye,  aur  we  be-imAn  luie,  baiki  log* 
uii  ku  aAmhne  ih  rAli  ko  buni  kahnc 
liigo,   Ui  ne  un  se  kiiuire  hoke  elia- 

?'irdon,  ko  ala»  kiyA,  aur  bar  roz  kisi 
urannus  nAme  ko  madrase  merj  bahs 
karii  thA. 

10  Tih  do  bara»  tak  hotA  rahA ;  aisa 
ki  Asia  ko  sab  rahnewalon  no,  kyd 
Yahudi  kyd  Yunani,  KliudAwand  Ti»ti' 
ka  kuldni  aumi. 

11  Aur  KhudA  Pulus  ke  hAtaon  as 
bare  bare  nm'ajize  dikhAtAthA; 

12  YahAn  tak  ki  niniAl  aur  patke 
us  ke  badan  ko  ehhuwake  biinAron 
par  dAlte  the,  aur  un  ki  hiraAriAn  jAti 
ra.lit.iii,  aur  buri  n'ihen  uu  se  uikaljati 
thin. 

13  K'  Tab  ba'ze  AwAra  jhArne  pln'ink- 
newAle  Yahudion  ne  iklu.ivAr  kiyA  ki 

180 


Ruh  ka  milna, 
uti  par,  jin  iiieu  buri  n'ihoii  samAi  thin, 
Khudawaud  Yisii'  kA  nAm  phunkke 
kaheg,  ki  Ilam  tuai  ku  UI  Yla£'  ki 
qasam  dete  hain,  jis  ki  I'ulua  umiiadi 

Kartii  bai 

14  Aur  un  map  Sqera  Yahudi  sar- 
dAr  kAhin  ko  &&t  beto  the,  jo  yib.  karte 
the, 

15  Tab  btiri  ruh  ne  jawAb  men 
kaliA,  ki  Yisii'  ko  main  jAtitA,  aur 
Pilus  m  bhi  waqif  hiiii ;  l>ar  tum 
kaun  ho? 

16  Aur  wiih  sbaklis,  jis  par  buri 
nih  thi,  un  par  lapkA,  aur  galib  Ako 
un  par  aisi  ziyAdatl  ki,  ki  wo  natige 
aur  ghAyal  us  gbar  ae  bha^e. 

1"  Aur  yih  bat  sab  Yahudion  aur 
Y'iinauion  ko,  jo  Afaaus  niun  mhte"  the, 
tna'lum  hui ;  tab  nabhon.  merj  dar 
samAyA,  aur  Kbudawand  Yinu'  ke  nAin 
ki  buzurgi  ki  gayi. 

18  Aur  bahuteron  ne  un  men  se,  jo 
iman  lAe  tbe,  ake  apne  kArnon  ko 
qabul  diyA,  aur  zAbir  kiyA  j 

19  Aur  luihutorj  ne,  jo  jidiigari 
karte  the,  apni  kitAbtn  ikatthi  karke 
sab  logon  ke  Age  jala  din  ;  aiir  jab  un 
kC  qiniat  kA  hiaAb  kiyA,  to  pacliaa 
bazArrupiya  t  lin.li  rt. 

20  lui  tarah  Khud&wand  ka  kalAm 
uihayat  barli  gayA  aur  galib  IiuA. 

21  T  Jab  yih  lio  cliuka,  l'iilua  ne 
apne  dil  men  t.bAtiA,  ki  Maqadimiya 
aur  Akhaia  se  hoke  Yaru&alam  merj 
jAiin,  aur  kahA,  ki  WahAn  jAne  ko 
ba'd  Iliiro  ko  bhi  mujhe  deklinA  zarrir 
hai. 

22  So  un  merj  ho,  jo  us  ki  khidmat 
karte  the,  do  nhaklis  TimtAuK  aur 
AraatuH  ko  Maqaduniya  mag  bhejko 
Ap  kuchh  din  Asia  men  raba. 

1'S  Aur  us  waqt  is  riin  ki  babat  bara 
fasAd  uthA. 

24  Ky6nki  Demefehu  iiaino  ek  bu- 
nAr  jo  Artamis  ke  rupable  niandir 
banAta  thA,  aur  u  a  ]ioshawAlon  k  o 
bahul  kannva  detA  thA; 

25  TJs  ne  un  ko,  aur  gairon  ko  jo 


Bumeiriu»  Pulim par  A'AMA'L,  XX.  fasiid  harpa  kartu. 

wabd    kilin    karte    the,   jam'a    karke  ki  Afasion  kd  nhahr  ban  devi  Artamis 
kaha,  ki  Ai  miirdo,  tuni  iante  lio  ki  ki,  nur  us  mirat  ki  Jo  Zeua  ki  taraf  se 
harndri    fardgat    isi  kara  ki  badattlat  giri,  pi'ija-karnewdld  hai ? 
hfH.  36  Pas  jab  koi  m  baton  ku  khildl 

26  Aur  tum   dekhtu  aur  aunte   ho  nahiy.   kali  sakta,  to  wajib  lini  ki  linu 
kl  sirfAiasus  men  nabirj,  baiki  tamani  thanie  raho,  aur  be  soche  kuchh  na 
'  'karo. 

37  Kyiinki  ye  mani  jin  ko  turnya- 
hdn  Ide,  na  mandir  ke  chor,  na  nun- 
hdri  devi  ke  nimbi-karnewale  hain, 

38  Pas  agar  Deinetriua  aur  us  ke 
haiii-pesha  kisd  par  da'wd  takhta  bon, 
to  'audlat  kiuili  bai,  aur  Su.be  haitlie 


Asia  ko  aarib  mon,  ie  1'oIub  ne  bahut 
se  logon  ko  targib  dckar  gumrdh  kar 
diyd nai,  ki  kahtd  hai,  yili  Jo  hatli  ke 
bando  bain  Khuild  nahfn  hain. 

27  So  Url  yilii  khatra   nahin,   ki 
hamdrd  pesha  be-qaar   ho  jde,   baiki 
bari    den    Artamis    kii    mandir    bUi ,  .  _ 
jiiehi/.  liu  jde,  aur  us  ki  buzurgi,  jiau  hain:  ek  duBre  par  ndliah  karen. 


tamani  Asia  aur  airi  dunya  piijti  hai, 
jati  rahc. 


3W  Par  jis  surat  mcij  tum  kol  aur 
bat  tahqiq  karne  chahte   ho,  to  dini 


28  Jab  unhoii  no  yih  Bima,  to  gusne  majlis  men  faisal  hogd. 


bhar  gaye,  aur  chillakc  kaha,  ki 
Afttffan  ki  Artamis  bari  bai. 

29  Aur  i.;un;un  ihidDf  men  balwa 
hua:  aur  Bab  niilke  CJahis  aur  Aris- 
tarkhus  ko,  jo,  Magadouly»  ke  ralinc- 
wale  aur  l'tilus  ke  ham-safar  the, 
pakarke  tamashaedh  ko  daure. 

30  Aur  jab  Pulus  ne  chahd  ki  log- 
on. ko  darmiydn  jdOj  to  shdgirdori  ne 
iise  jdne  na  diyi. 

31  Aur  Asia  ke  buzurgorj  men  se 
ba'aon  ne,  jo  us  ke  dost  the,  us  ke  pas 
ddmi  bhejke  minnatki  ki  tamdshagdh 
men  niat  jd. 

32  Aur  bata  kuchh  ohillAe,  aurba'- 
ze  kuchh :  kyunki  jania'at  barham 
darliain  lio  gayi  tbi ;  aur  aksaron  ne 
na  jand  ki  baui  kis  liyo  ikat^he  huo 
hain. 

33  Tab  unhon  ne  Sikandar  ko,  jisa 
Yahudi  dhakiyatethe,  liliir  inen  se? 
kar  diyd.     Aur  Sikandar  ne  lidth 
ishdra  karke  e-ha-hd  ki  logon  ke  sdnibne 
'uzr  kare. 

34  Par  jab  unhon  ne  j&nd  kt  wuh 
Yahudi  hai,  to  &ab  ham-dwaz  hoke  do 
ghante  ke  qarib  chilldte  rahe,  ki  Afa- 
sion ki  Artamis  bari  hai. 

35  Aur  jab  ahanr  ke  muharrir 
logon  ko  tbandhd  kiyd,  to  kabd,  Ai 
Afasia,  kami  Admi  bal  jo  nabin  jduta 

181 


40  Kyiinki  harami  khatra  hai  ki  iij 
ko  liahve  ke  Waste  akta  pir  ndlisb  ho, 
isliyeki  koi  sabab  nabin  k  i  jis  SC  hara 
ia  hangame  kd  jawdb  de  saken. 

41  Aur  yih  kabke  inajlia  ko  bar- 
khwdst  kiyd. 

XX  BA"B. 

JAB  bullar  uiauqilf  hua,  I'dlus  ne 
sbdgirdoa  ko  bulako  unbon  sa- 
Idm  kiyd  ;  tab  wnhan  tio  raw&na  hiia, 
ki  Maijaduniya  ko  jae. 

2  Aur  un  atrdf  se  guzarke,  aur 
urihen  bahut  nasihat  karke,  Ydudii 
men  dyd, 

3  Aur  tln  mahitum  tak  wahdrj  rahil. 
Phk  jis  waqt  jahds  par  Suciya  merj 
jdno  ko  tbd,  Yahudi  ua  ki  ghit  men 
lage :  tab  um  ki  yih  italah  hul,  ki  Ma- 
qaduniya  ki  nih  Ke  phire. 

4  Aur  Sopatrun  Haridi,  aur  Aris- 
tarkhuti  aur  Sikiin<luN,  jo  Tassaluniqe 
ko '  the,  aur  Gaius  Darbe  kd,  aur 
TimlauB,  aur  Tukhikus  aur  Tnit'mius, 
jo  Asia  Ite  tbc,  Asia  tak  us  ko  sdth 
gaye. 

5  Wc  ige  jdke  hamdre  liye  Troaa 
men  thahre. 

B  Aur  fatir  ke  dinon  ke  ba'd  liam 
Pilippi  se  jahdz  pir  rawana  boko 
panoli  i.l  i  1 1  ke  'nrso  men  Troda  men  un 


PtBvs  A/afus  ke  •jiasisoii.  lu.  A'AMA 
ke  pas  pahuuclit; ;  aur  sAt  din  waktu 
thahre. 

7  Aur  hafte  ke  pahlc  din,  jab  shA- 
L'in)  r* -ti  topM  ko  ikattho  Ae,  Puitis  ne, 
ki  dnare  di'n  jane  ko  thA,  ini  ko  Bath 
kalam  kiyi,  aur  apiul  kalam  Adhi  rat 
tak  barhAya. 

8  Aiir  us  bilikhdne  par,  jahAn  wo 
ikatthe  thc,  haluit  uliirag  jal  ruLe. 

S  Anr  Yiitakhus  udin  ek  jawAn 
khirki  jiar  baithA  thA;  usko  ban  nind 
Af ;  BU  jab  Palui  dor  lak  biten  kaita 
ralid,  wuh  mAre  nind  ke  jhukko  tinrc 
darje  kg  niche  gir  pard,  aur  murda 
utbAyd  gaya. 

10  Tab  Pulne  utnrke  oh  Upa^  gayA, 
aur  galo  lagake  kaka,  Siat  ghabrAo; 
kyunki  us  ki  jdn  us  mcrj  bai. 

11  Aur  uparjAkeroti  ton,  aur  khdko 
ittii  der  tak  un  se  bAUm  kartA  rabd,  kf 
bbor  ho  gnyi ,-  isi  tarah  se  wuh  i'halA 
gayA. 

I  'J  Aur  wc  us  jawan  ko  jttd  Ide,  aur 
nihAyat  khAtirjarn'a  htie. 

13  ^  Aur  hara  jaluiz  pol  Acu  AaSUB 
ke  gaye,  i?  irAdo  par  ki  wahAn  Pulus 
k  '  atuie  wilb  cliarhii  b'n,  kyinjki  wuh 
wabari  paidal  jAno  ka  i  rada  karke  yiSn 
fartnd  gayA  thA. 

14  Jab  wuh  Ausun  mcu  hamerj  niihi, 
hain  usu  cliarhdku  Mitulene  meji  de. 

1.1  Aur  wahaij  se  jahil  kholke 
dnsn  diri  Klinis  ke  ertinhiif  Ae;  aur 
tisre  r#n  Samus  men  dikail  hiie;  aur 
TroguUbun  raon  luarjAret  karke  ek  diu 
ke  ba'd  Miletus  men  ae. 

1G  Kyunki  PAlta  us  (bani  thA  ki 
Afcus  ae  guzar  jde,  aini  na  bo  ki  us 
ko  Asia  men  rabnc  ae  der  lage:  is  liye 
ki  wuh  jul.ii  kartA  thA,  ta  ki  agar  us 
se  ho  sake,  to  Pantek  ust  ko  diu  ko 
Yanisahtm  nwu  ^t6, 

17  T  Aur  us  ae  Milctus  sn  Afnsua 
men  kakld  bbeike  kaliniye  ke  bu- 
zurgoii  ko  buinya. 

18  Aur  jab  wu  di  ko  pai  Ae,  to  un- 
hejj  kalia,  Tum  jauto  ho  ki  pahle 
diu  bc  jis  ruen  main  Asia  men  AvA, 

183 


L,  XX.  «osi'Aac  tarif, 

ki*   tarah    har    watit    tumhdrc    aAth 
rahd; 

l'J  Ki  kamAl  farotaui  aur  Angrion 
ke  Hdth,  aur  uri  Azmdishon  ko  nahke 
jin  men  Yahiidion  ku  ehat  lagtne  bo 
main  phaoad  tlid,  KhudAwand  ki 
khidmat  kartA  raha : 

20  Ki  kyi'inkar  main.  ne  koi  bit,  jo 
tumbAro  fAida  ki  dii,  rakii  na  dibori : 
baiki  tumben  khabar  di,  aur  tum  "ko 
jamd'at  men  aur  ghar  ghs?  sikhAi  j 

21  Aur  Yahudion  aur  YunAnion  ko 
sdnihue  gawdhi  di,  ki  Khudi  ke  Age 
tauba  karo,  aur  hantare  Khudawand 
Yi.-ii'  ICatfb  uar  i  mau  lio. 

22  Aur  ab,  dekbo,  main  ruh  kd 
bandbii  Yonisaliuji  ko  jdtd  Jnin,  aur 
ualun  .jAntA  ki  wahdg  mujli  par  kyi 
guzregA : 

23  Magar  itud,  ki  Bub  i  Quds  bar 
sbabr  meii  yih  kalike  gawAbt  detl  hai 
ki  qaid  a  uiuaibat  mero  liye  UiivAr 
baig. 

24  Lckin  main  uso  kucbb  nahiri  ia- 
majhta,  na  apni  jdn  ko  'ani/,  rakhta, 
ki  apnA  daura  aur  wuh  khidmat  bbi, 
jo  main  ne  KhudAwand  Yisd*  ae  pAi, 
ki  Kliud:!  ke  fazl  ki  Injil  pai  gawahi 
dAn,  khuslii  su  pura  katun. 

25  Aur  ab,  dekho,  main  jantd  hiin 
ki  tum  sab,  jin  ko  darmiyAn  main 
KhudA  ki  bAdshAbat  ki  maiiAdi  kartt 
phira,  mcrA  munb  phir  ua  dokhoge. 

20  Pas  main  aj  ke  din  tumben 
avtfb  nkhU  lu'uj,  ki  main  sab  ko 
khun  se  pAk  hur. 

27  Kyunki  main  KhudA  ki  flAri 
maslahat  Tunihen  snuAno  so  biz  n 
raiiA. 

28  %  Pas  apni  aur  us  sire  galk  ki 
khaburddri  karo,  jis  par  Bfih  i  Qud« 
ne.  tumben  nigahbdn  thahrAya,  ki 
KliudA  ki  kalisiyu  ko,  jiac  us  ne  apue 
hi  lahu  we  mol  liyA,  chardo. 

29  Kyunki  main  yih  jautA  hiin  ki 
mero  jArie  ke  ba\l  [jliaraewAle  lilirriye 
tumhdre  dnrniiyAn  dwcnge,  jiuhori 
galla  par  kuchh  tara  na  AwogA. 


Piilus  Ya  n't  salam  men  A'AMA' 

30  Aur  khurt  ttno  merj  so  ddmi 
uthenge,  ju  ulti  batrii  kahensp\  ki 
dkAtprdeg  ku  ftpnf  taraf  kliiuch  len. 

31  ls  liye  jagte  mho,  aur  yid  ra- 
kho  ki  main  tin  baras  rat,  rlin  ru  rokc 
bar  ek  ko  chitdne  sg  baz  na  dyd. 

32  Ai  bhiiio,  ab  main  tu.mb.en  Khu- 
da  nur  us  ke  fsujl  ke  kaum  ko  somptd, 
hiirj,  j.i  ki  tumben  kdmil  knr  «akta 
hai,  aur  sarn  muqaddason  men  miras 
ik1  sakti. 

33  Main  ne  kisi  ke.  riipo,  yd  sone, 
ya  kapri;  kd  Idlach  nahm  kiyd. 

84  lialki  tum  a  p  jdntc  bn  ki  iiilun 
hdthon  ne  meri  nur  men  sitbion  ki 
zaniratan  raf'n  kiri. 

35  Main  ne  sab  b&ten  batdm,  ki 
yiin  hi  milmat  karke  kamz-oron  ki 
madad  karnd,  aur  Khuddwand  Yisu' 
ki  bdten  rfd  rakhua,  zanir  hai,  ki  us 
ne  kabsi,  Dcna  lene  se  mubarak  hai. 

30  J  Aur  us  ne  yih  kahke  ghntnc 
teke,  aur  uu  sah  ke  sath  du'd  mdugi. 

37  Aur  wc  sab  bahi.it  roe,  aur  Piilus 
ke  gale  se  Ing  la^ko  uge  chuninc  lage, 

38  Aur  khdsskar  ia  bdt  par  gamgin 
hne,  jo  us  ne  kahi  thi,  ki  Turn  BMf£ 
munh  pbir  na  dokhoge.  Aur  unhon 
ne  «se  jahaz  tak  pahunchdya. 

XXI  BA'B. 

AUR  aied  hiid,  ki  jab  hain  un  se 
mushkil  se  judi  boks  rawan» 
hfio  th*\  U'  w'dbi  rah  Qi'ia  inen  de,  aur 
diisre  din  Rudus,  aur  wnhan  se  Pateri 
men,. 

2  Aur  ek  jahdz  Fim'cm  ko  jdte  bt'ie 
pako  us  par  charlic,  aur  rawdna  hue. 

3  Aur  jab  Kuprus  nazar  dyd,  «se 
baen  hdth  chhorkar  Suriya  ko  chalo, 
aur  Siar  meti  lagdyd:  kyunki  wabdn 
jaha/  kd  bojh  niirud  thi. 

i  Aur  jab  shdgird  khojne  se  mile 
the,  to  ham  &&t  PM  wahari  rahe :  unhon 
ne  Ruh  ki  raa'rifat  Piilus  se  kalid,  ki 
Yarusalam  ko  na  jdna. 

5  Par  haru  «n  dinon  ku  purd  karke 
nikle,  aur  cbalo  gaye ;  aur  sabhon  «o 
joriion  aur  larkon  samt'.t  dialir  ke  bdhnr 
183 


L,  XXI.  phirjdtd. 

tak  ham  ko  pahunchdya  ;  aur  ham  ne 
samundar  ke  kandre  par  ghutue  tekko 
du'd  mdiigi. 

6  Aur  ham  ek  dusrc  se  widd'  hoke 
jahaz  par  charhe;  aur  wo  npne  apno 
gbar  ko  phire. 

7  Aur  ham  Sur  ro  jabdz  kd  safar 
tamdin  karko  I'tulamais  men  pa- 
hunehe,  aur  bJi&iog  ko  salam  karke 
ek  din  «n  k?  sath  rahe. 

8  Ihisrc  din  Prilus  aur  ham,jo  us 
ke  sdthf  the,  rawdna  hoke  Q,aisany;i 
men  de:  aur  Failbiin  khush-khabari 
deupwdlo  ke  yalidn,  jo  un  aaton  men 
bc  tha,  utarko  us  ke  sdth  rahe. 

9  Aur  us  ki  char  kunwdri  betidn 
t-hin,  jo  nubswiit  karti  thijj. 

10  Aur  j-»b  ham  wuhdn  babut  roz 
ralic,  A-abus  Edme  ok  nabi  Yahudiya 
se  utar  dyd. 

11  TTs  ne  hamdro  pds  dke  Ptilus  kd 
kamartmnd  uthd  liyd,  aur  apnc  hdlh 
pdmv  b:aidliki!  knlid,  Hrih  ul  Quds  yi'nj 
kahti  hai,  L's  mard  ko,  jis  kd  yih 
kjimnrband  Jini,  Yahudi  Y'arnsalam 
men  yiinhin  bandherjge,  aur  gair- 
(p/amog  ke  bdthon  incn  hnwdla  kar- 
engc. 

12  Jab  yih  sunil,  to  ham  nc  aur 
wahdn  ko  logon  ne  us  ki  minnat  ki 
ki  Yarusalam  ko  niv  jdwe. 

13  Tar  Puitis  nc  jawab  diyd,  ki 
Tum  k  ya  karte  ho,  ki  rote  aur  mori 
dil  torte  ho?  kyunki  main  na  sirf 
bdndhe  jdne,  baiki  Yarusalam  meu 
Kiiudiiwand  Yi™'  ko  ndm  pu  matitie 
k'o  bhi  taiydr  lnin. 

14  So  jab  us  no  na  mdnd,  to  ham 
yih  kahko  chup  rahe,  ki  Jo  Khudd  ki 
uiarzi  ho. 

15  Aur  un  dinoj)  ke  ha'd  ham  npne 
safar  ke  asbdb  ko  taiydr  karke  Yuru- 
ailam  k  o  gaye. 

16  Aur  bisanya  se  kai  ek  sh;igird 
bamdre  satli  chale,  aur  h&meg  Mnason 
Kuprusi  ek  qadini  shigird  ke  pas  la 
gaye,  ki  ham  us  ke  yahan  inihmdn 
hone  ko  tbc. 


We  u»  par  hamla  karte.  A'AMA1 

17  Aur  jiil)  ham  Yartisahiin  mei} 
pahuncho,  bhaioij  ne  khushi  se  hanien 
([aliri  1  kiya. 

18  Aur  ilusro  din  Puhishamdre  sdth 
Ya'qiib  ke  pas  gayd ;  aur  sab  buzurg 
wahdn  ikatt.ln;  tfio. 

19  Aur  lis  ne  unherj  salam  karke, 
jo  kuchh  Khuda  ne  un  ki  khidmat  ku 
wasile  gair-qaumon  men  kiya  tha, 
murasaal  haydn  kiya. 

20  Aur  unhon  ne  yih  sunke  Khu- 
ddwand  ki  sitaisli  ki,  aur  vs  ko  kahd, 
Ai  bhai,  tu  dekhtd  hai  ki  Y&hiidion 
men  se  kitne  hazdr  haiij  jo  iman  Ide: 
aur  sab  shari'at  ke  gairatmand  hai  n. 

21  Aur  unhon  ne  tore  haqq  mag 
khabar  pai,  ki  tu  sab  Yahudlon  ko, 
jo  gair-qaunion  ke  darmiyan  rahto 
hain,  sikhata  hai  ki  Musa  se  phir 
jaen,  ki  kahta  hai,  Apue  larkon  ka 
krmtns  niat  karo,  na  aharfat  ke 
dasturon  par  chalo. 

22  Ab  kyd  karun?  Ing  bo-shnkk 
kasratsc  jam 'a  honge ;  kyunki  sunenge 
ki  t  u  ay-a  hai. 

23  s',  i  yih  kir,  jo  ham  tujh  se  kahte 
hain;  HamAru  pas  char  mard  hain, 
jinli'-n  nii/.r  adA  karui  hai; 

24  Unhen  leke  dp  ko  un  ko  sdth 
pak  kar,  aur  uu  ko  liyo  kuchh  kharch 
kar,  ta  ki  we  apnd  air  mundAwcn:  to 
wab  janerjge  ki  jo  baten  bani  ne  tere 
haqq  mon  suni  hain,  su  kuchh  nahin  ; 
baiki  td  ap  bhi  shari'at  ko  hifz  karke 
durust  etialtd  hai, 

25  Parjogair-qaumon  men  se  iman 
lio,  un  ki  babat  ham  ne  Umbraku 
Hkha  hai,  ki  we  aisi  aisi  baten  ua 
maneg:  magar  buton  ko  charhdwe, 
aur  lahii,  aur  gala  ghonti  bui  ohtepfe 
aur  haranikdri  se,  ap  ko  mahfuz  «kli- 
en. 

~2G  Tab  PAlui  un  ruardon  ko  leke, 
aur  dusre  din  ap  ko  un  ku  sdth  pak 
kurku,  haikal  men  dakhil  h^d,  aur 
khabar  di  ki  pak  karne  ke  diu,  jab 
tak  ki  ia  uien.  se  har  ek  ki  uazr  na 
charhai  jae,  pfire  kareiige. 
184 


L,  XXI,  QiVa  ka  sarddr  use  bachaiii. 
|  27  Par  jab  aat  din  pure  hone  par 
the,  Aaia  ke  Yahildion  n  e  use  hai  k  a  1 
men  dekhke  sah  loguii  ko  ubhdrd,  aur 
us  par  hath  dale, 

28  Yon  "chillako  ki,  Ai  Israelj 
mardo,  madad  karo ;  Yih  wuhi  admi 
hai,  jo  aab  ko  har  jngah  qaunt  ke,  aur 
shari'at  ke,  aur  li  makan  ke  khilaf 
sikhdtd  lini :  aur  'a  lava  ia  ke  Yunanion 
ko  blii  haikal  meii  laya,  aur  ia  pak 
makan  ko  napdk  kiya  hai. 

29  (Kyiitjki  uiilinn  ue  ajje  Trufinms 
A faai  ko  u»  ke  sdih  shnhr  men  dekhd 
tha,  jis  ki  babat  unhon  ne  kbiydl 
kiyi,  ki  Pulus  us  ko  haikal  mon  laya 
tha.) 

30  Aur  tamdm  shahr  men  hangdma 
had,  aur  los  daurke  jam'a  hilo;  aur 
Pfilus  ko  pakarke  haikal  ke  biliar 
ghafiitd;  aur  filfaur  darwaze  baud  kiye 
gayo." 

31  Aur  jab  we  us  ka  qatl  ke  darpai 
tho,  fauj  ke  sardar  ko  khabar  pabun- 
chi,  ki  tamdm  Vnrusala'm  mett  huilar 
ho  rahii  hai. 

W' uh  usi  dam  aipdhion  aur  au- 
baiiaron  ko  leke  un  par  daurd :  aur  wo 
sarddr  aur  sipdhfon  ko  dpkhkc  Piilus 
ke  m  Ani  t.1  se  hiz  do. 

Tab  sardar  no  nazdik  dkc  uso 
giriftar  kiya,  aur  do  zanjinm  sebdudh- 
no  kd  hukni  diya ;  aur  puebhd,  ki  Yih 
kaun  kai,  aur  us  ne  kya  kiyd  ? 

34  Aur  bhir  racn  ae  ba'ze  kuchh 
chillde,  aur  1  '.iV,  ■  kuchh :  so  jab  shor 

gul  ke  sabab  kuchh  haqiqat  daiyaft 
na  kar  sakd,  to  hukm  diya,  ki  Use 
qil'a  men  le  jao. 

35  Aur  jab  sErhi  tak  pahunehd,  tu 
logon  ke  hujam  ke  sabab  aipdhion  ko 
use  iitliaua  para. 

__   Kyurjki  dangal  cliilldta  hua  us 

ke  piekhe  pard,  ki  Use  utha  dai. 

37  Aur  jab  Piilus  ko  qil'a  ke  andar 

jdoe  bn,  us  ue  sarddr  se  kabd,  Kyd 

ujbe  ijdzat   hai   ki   tujh   se  kuchh 

kahiin?     Us   no  kabd,   Kyd   Yunani 

jdntd  hai  ? 


Pilus  layan' karta 

38  Pas  tu  wuh  Mieri  nahin,  jo  iri 
dinon  *o  Age  fanod  uthAke  un  chAr 
bazar  dakuon  ku  jan^a!  men  le  gavA  ? 

39  £q1ub  iie  kahA,  ki  Main  Yahudi 
Adini  nun,  Qiliqiya  ke  shaiir  Tarsus 
nAme  ki,  jo  kam  mashhiir  nahin  hai, 
rahnewala  hun ;  main  teri  minnat 
kartd  hiin,  ki  ratrjhe  logon  ae  boluc  ki 
ijazitt  do. 

40  Jab  i«s  ne  use  ijAzat  di,  Pfilue  ne 
airlii  par  khare  hoke  togOBj  ko  Mtb  se 
isfiArakiyd.  Jab  eab  cnup  chdp  hi<c, 
wuk 'Ibrani  z  uban  men  bomfl  lagd.aur 
kaki, 

XXII  BA'B. 

Al  bhASo,  aur  ai  aba,  mera  'uzr  jo  ab 
tuui  M  kartd  hiit}  sana. 

2  Jab  unhon  no  annA  ki  'Ibrani 
zubAn  rnen  un  M  bolta  hai,  to  aur  bhi 
chup  huo.    S.  i  iis  ne  kahd, 

3  Main  to  Yahudi  admf  hun,  QiU- 
q>ya  ke  sbahr  Tarsus  men  twiidd  hiU, 
lekjn  isi  shahr  men  mori  parwarit>h 
mil,  nur  Gamaliel  ke  aadamon  par 
bapdadoii  ki  shari'at  ki  birffctcirj  mes 
tarbiyat  pdi,  aur  KhudA  ko  liyo  aisa 
gairatiuand  tha,  jaise  tum  aib  dj  ko 
diri  lio. 

4  Chundnchi  main  ne  mardon  aur 
Guratan  ko  bamlbke  aur  qaii.}-kbaiic 
men  dAlke  is  tariqa-\vAl<in  koniaut  tak 
satAyd. 

5  Baiki  sardar  kabin,  aur  huzurgon 
ki  s4ri  jama'at,  bhi  mero  gawAh  hain : 
ki  un  se  main  tahimu  ke  liye  kbatt 
loke  Dimishq  ko  rawana  hiiA,  ki  jitne 
wahAn  bon,  unhen  bhi  bandlikc  Yarii- 
sakm  men  lilin,  ta  ki  saza  paivon. 

6  Par  jab  main  chala  jAti,  aur 
Dimishq  ke  nazdik  pahuiicha  thd,  to 
aisi  hf.d,  ki  do  pahar  ke  qarib  cki-ek 
bara  nur  Asmat,  so  mere  girdAgird 
ckarnka. 

7  Aur  main  zarnin  par  gir  pari, 
aur  AwAz  suni,  jo  mujhe  kabti  tbi,  ki 
Ai  fitilus,  Siilua,  tti  inujlio  kviui  satata 
hal? 

8  ilain  ne  jawAb  diyft,  ki  Ai  Khu- 

185 


A'AMA'L,  XXII.  ki  kyunkar  mwid  k&d. 

dAwand,  tii  kauo  hai?  Us  nc  mujh 
.-t-  kiil.a,  Main  Yisii'  Nisan  hi'nj,  ji.st- 
tu  Balita  W. 

9  AurmeresAthionne  nurtodekhd, 
aur  dar  gayc;  lekin  us  ki  awaz,  Jo 
mujhe  bulat»  thA,  na  suni. 

10  Tab  main  ne  kalis,  Ai  Khudd- 
wand,  main  kyikaruri?  Khud'awand 
ne  niujh  se  kaiti,  Uth,  aur  Dimifchq 
mcrj  jji;  wahan  Kib'  kuclih  jo  tere 
ksite  ki;  liye  muqarrar  huA  hai,  tujho 
kahi  jSega. 

11  Aur  jab  main  us  mir  ke  jalai  fce 
sabab  na  dekh  sakA,  to  apne  sAtbion 
ke  mere  hit  h  tbAmbno  ac  main 
Dimishq  men  AyA. 

12  Aur  Hautiniah  ndm  ok  tnanj,  jo 
shari'at  ke  muwifia  <limliir,  aur  wahan 
ke  Hb  rahncwilo  Yabudion  ke  nazdik 
nek-iiiiin  thA, 

13  Mere  pas  AyA,  aur  kbare  hnke 
lujhe  kaba,  Ai  bhai  Silius,  phir  binA 
o.     Aur  usi  gbari  main    ne    us  par 

nigAli  k  S. 

14  Aur  us  ne  kahA,  HamAre  bAp- 
dadon  ke  KJiudA  ne  Lujh  ko  Age  se 
barguzidaki.ya,ki  tu  tu  ki  niarni  jAne, 
aur  us  KAstbdz  ko  dekbe,  aur  us  ke 
muiih  ki  awdz  auno  ; 

15  Kyunki  t^  uskeliyesabAdmion 
ke  Agc  uu  bAton  ki,  jo  tii  ne  dekhfii", 

r  sunin,  gawAh  hogA. 

10  Aur  ab  kytm  der  karta  hai? 
uthke  baptisma  le,  aur  KbudAwm.] 
kA  nam  lgke  apno  gunihon  ko  dho 
dil. 

17  Aur  jab  main  Yarusalam  men 
pbir  AyA,  aur  haikal  nten  dn'A  mAngtA 
thA,  aisd  hiia,  ki  main  bekbud  ho 
BW< ; 

18  Aur  na  ko  dokhA,  jo  mujho 
kahtd  thA,  Jaldi  kar,  aur  shitab 
Yanisalam  so  nikal  jd;  kytinki  teri 
gawdhi  mere  haqq  men  ipjn'il  na 
karengc. 

19  Aur  main  ne  kaha,  Ai  Khtidi- 
wand,  wo  Ap  jAnte  h  ain  ki"  main 
unben,  jo    tujh   par    iman   Ide,   qaid 


Pulm  bayan  harta  A'AMA'L,  XXIII. 

karla,  aur  har  ek  'ibddat-khdne  mvQ 
koro  mdrtd  thd : 

20  Aur  jab  tere  sbahid  Staliinus  kd 
khiin  bahaya  gityd,  main  bhi  wahdn 
k  Lara,  aur  us  ke  qat  I  par  ra>,i  tha,  aur 
tis  ku  aatilon  ko  kapron  ki  khabarddri 
karti  tha. 

21  Aur  us  ne  miijli  H  kahd,  Ja,  ki 
main  tujhe  {jair-qaunion  ku  pas  diir 
bhejiirj^d. 

22  We  isi  bdt  tak  uh  ki  sun  rahe 
tab  apni  Awaz  buland  karke  ciiilliic, ki 
Aise  ko  ramin  par  ko  uthd  dai,  ki  us 
ka  jit-a  raknd  muuiihili  uahhj. 

23  Aur  jab  we  chilldte,  aur  apno 
kaprc  phciiktc,  aur  khdk  nrato  the, 

24  Sard»r  no  hukm  diya,  ki  Use 
qil'a  niog  le  jdwen,  aur  faniiiiyd,  ki 
Use  kore  marka  azmawtii ;  ta  ki  use 
ma'liim  ho  ki  we  kis  sahab  us  ki  zidd 
mm  yt'ijj  chillde. 

2o  Jab  we  use  tasmon  eo  jakarte 
the,  Piilus  nc  uh  mibaddr  sg,  jo  pds 
kbard  tha,  kaba,  Kyd  tumben  jain 
hai  ki  ok  ddmi  ko,  jo  Riimi  aur  bc- 
qusur  hai,  kore  maro  ? 

26  Subadar  yili  sunke  aftyi,  aur 
sarddr  ko  khabar  di,  aur  kaha,  Kha- 
bardar,  tu  kyd  kiyd  chalita  hai 
kynuki  yib  ddmi  Bdtni  hai. 

L'7  Aur  fiarddr  ne  pas  ake  tu  ko 
kaha,  Mujbe  linl-il,  kyd  tii  Kuini  hai? 
Uh  qo  kahd,  Hdn. 

28  Bardar  u-'  jawdh  diya,  ki  Main 
ne  bahut  naqd  deke  yih  rutba  hasil 
kiyd.  Pfilus  ne  kaha,  Main  tu  alat 
hi  puida  lu'ia. 

2!i  Filfaur  we,  jo  us  ko  dzniaya 
chdhto  the,  us  ee  ban  ac;  aur  sarddr 
bhi,  yih  jdukar  ki  wuh  TCumi  hai,  aur 
main  ne  use  bdndhd,  dai  gayd. 

30  Subh,  ko  ia  irdua  sc  ki  haqiqat 
ko  jdne,  ki  Yahudi  us  par  kyd  da'wd 
rakhu:  hain,  ub  ki  Banjirag  kholin,  aur 
hukm  diya,  ki  aardar  kabin  aur  uu  ki 


ki  ky-unkar  murid  Aiii't. 
XXIII  BA'B. 
rjlAB  P&lus  ue  Sadr  Majlis  ki  taraf 


I       nazar    karke    kahd,   Ai    bhdio, 

main  aj  tak  kamal  liikniyati  m  Khuda 
ke  huzur  chald. 

2  Tab  sarddr  ktihin  Flandnidh  ne 
un  ko,  jo  ub  ko  pas  k  hara  the,  Imkm 
diya,  ki  Us  ke  lnunh  par  thaperd 
mdren. 

3  Tab  Fulua  no  us  ko  kaha,  Khudd 
tujhe  maregd,  ni  sul'edi  pheri  hui 
diwdr:  kyd  ui  hai  thd.  hai,  ki  shari'at 
kt-  MHivviiti'j  inera,  infsdf  ka»,  MI 
shari'at  ko  barkhildf  mujlie  rodrne  ka 
hukm  deta  hai'? 

4  Unlum  no,  jo  pdfl  khare  the  kahd, 
Kyd  ni  Khuda  ko  sardar  kdhiu  ko 
burd-kahtkhai? 

5  Piilus  nekaha,  Ai  bhdio,  main  ue 
na  jana  ki  sarddr  kahin  hui ;  kyunki 
likhi  liai,  ki  Apni  riaum  ke  sarddr  ko 
burd  mu  t  kau. 

6  Aur  Pulus  yih  janke  ki  ba'ze 
Sadiiqi  aur  ba'za  Fariwi  hain,  Majlis 
men  pukdrd,  ki  Ai  bhdio,  nuig  Pa- 
risi,   aur   Farisi   kd    betd   hiin ; 


nilirdog  kl    babat    umraed    aur  i|iy;i- 
niat  ke   sabab  mujh  j>ar  ilzdm  iiiti 


iota 


7  Jab  us  ne  yib  kaha,  Farision  aur 
Raduijiou  men  kikrdr  hui :  aur  Majlis 
nioii  plult  pari. 

y  Kyunki  Saduqi  to  kahte  haig,  ki 
qiydmat  nahin,  aur  na  iirislita,  na  ruh 
hai :  par  Fanai  donon  kd  iqrdr  karte 
hain. 

9  Aur  bard  shor  hud :  aur  FarUiou 
ko  firqo  ke  fnqih  uthe,  aur  yun  kahke 
jhflgarne  lage,  ki  Ham  is  ddtni  men 
kuchh  burdi  nalitn  pdte  hain  ;  ]iar  agar 
kifi  ruli  yd  nrishte  ne  is  se  kaldm  kiyd 
lin,  to  ham  Khuda  sc  na  lareii. 

10  Aur  jab  bari  takrir  hiii,  to  sar- 
lar  ne,  is  khauf  sc  ki  inabadd  Pulus  u  n 

phara  jawe,  fauj  ko  hukm  diyd,  ki 


Bari   Badr  Majlis  jam'a  howen;   phir.Utarke  use  un  ke  liicli  B6  zabardnsti 

Piilus  konSche  le  jake  un  ke  bieh  ineri  nikdle,  aurqiramcn  le  dwt*. 

khard  kiyd.  |     11  Aur  uni  rat  K  huddwand  ne  us  ke 


Pulvs  Sadr  Mujtis  ke  age      A'AMA'L,  XXIII. 


pas  dke  kaha,  Ai  Tulus,  klidtir-jnrii'a 

rakli :  ki  jaisa  tii  iic  raeri  bdbat  Yani- 

Mtam  nien  gawdhi  di,  waisa  lii  tujlii 

1  Btiin  mca  bhi  (jawabi  dena  zariir  hai. 

1L'  Aur  jab  iJin  luU,  ba'ze  Yahudion 
ne  ckd  karkc  la'nat  ki  qasani  khiU, 
aur  kalut,  ki  Juli  tak  liam  Tiilus  ko 
nal!  na  kartm,  mi  kuclih  khdegge  na 
jiicijge. 

18  Aur  we,  jinhon  no  dpas  men  yili 
pu  mi  kMf,  ciiafiH  so  ziyai.ia  tho. 

14  So  unhoij  ne  sarddr  kahinoij  aur 
buaurgon  ke  pas  jake  kuli»,  Haru  ne 
la'nnt  ki  aanm  khai,  ki  jab  tak  Palu* 
koqati  na  karen,  kuehli  nachakhorjge. 

16  l'as  ab  tuni  Sadr  Majlis  warnet 

':■■  sardar  se  'arz  karo,  ki  IcaJ  «u» 

ure  pas    la.vc,  p  iya  tum    uh    ki 

i  i  ilr  ki  Laqfqat  ziyada  darvali 
fBji,  chAlit*-  ho :  par  ham  taiyar  hain 
ki  us  ke  pahuuche  ae  pahlo  use  haldk 
karen,. 

16  Aur  Puitis  kd  bhdnjd  im  ki  «hat 
ka  hal  Biinkc  chaltt,  aur  qil'a  men  jake 
PtUuskokhaKu  di. 

17  Tab  Piilus  ne  subaddron  men.  se 
pk  ko  bulakc  kana,  Ia  jawdn  ko  sardar 
ku  pas  le  jja ;  ki  wuh  ubc  kucbh  kahd 
ohahta  lif.i. 

18  Pm  wuli  nse  aardar  ]ias  le  gflya, 
aur  kahd,  Piilus  qaidi  ne  mtrjbe  apne 

E  as  bahikc  darkhwdat  ki,  ki  is  jawan 
ci  tere  pas  latin,  ki  tujh  so  kuchh  kaha 
clialita  hai. 

19  Tah  aardar  nc  us  ka  hath  pa- 
karke,  aur  uae  alag  le  jdke,  jnidilia.  'k  i 
W  uh  kvd  hai,  jo  mujh  se  kala  chahta 
hai? 

20  Vb  no  kaha,  Yahudion  ne  cka 
k  iya  hai,  ki  tujh  sc  diirkliwist  karen, 
ki  k:il  l'iilus  ko  Sadr  Majlis  men,  Idwe, 
§a?i  kj  we  ns  ke  Ml  kiaur  bhi  tahqi- 
qai  kiya  chdhtu  hain. 

21  Pas  tu  un  ki  namaniyo,  kyiiiiki 
un  merj  chaiis  shakhs  se  ziyada  us  ki 
AU  mem  lage  hain,  iiiiiii.u  nc  h'nat 

...   .....  M.'";:  L_i    i.:  I. 


ah  t.'iiyar,  | 


hazii-  kota, 
r  tere  wa'da  ke  muulazir 


haiij. 

22  Tab  sardar  ne  jawdn  ko  rukh- 
sat  kiya,  aur  hnkm  diya,  ki  Kisi  se 
niat  kah,  ki  tii  ne  initjii  par  yih  zahir 
kiya. 

23  Aur  do  flubaddrnrj  ko  pas  bulake 
kahd,  Do  sau  aipahi,  aur  sattar  sawar, 
aur  do  san  blidlebardar,  Mtt  ki'  tfjsri 
^biiri  taiyar  kar  rakho,  ki  Qaisariya  ko 
jdwerj ; 

21  Aur  jiinwar  bhi  ha/ir  karo,  ki 
PtUuB  ko  aawttr  karke  Felikaa  hakim 
ke  pas  sahih  0  ^alamat  pahunchfiwcn. 

25  Aur  is  mazrmin  ka  khatt  likha : 

26  Qlaudiu«  Liisias  ka  Felikas 
hakim  bahddurko  salam. 

27  Is  mard  ko  Yahudion  ue  pakra, 
aur  use  halak  karne  par  the  ;  par-main 
yih  ma'him  karkc  ki  Riimi  hai,  fauj 
samet  charh  gaya,  aur  OM  chhura 
laya. 

28  Aur  jab  cliaha"  ki  daryiift  kar- 
i'in,  ki  uiihon  ne  kis  Rabab  se  us  par 
nalisli  ki,  to  use  un  ki  Sadr  Majlis  mcn. 
le  gaytf  ; 

29  Aur  daryaft  kiya  ki  we  npni 
shari'at  ke  maidorj  ki  babat  us  par 
udlisli  kavle  hain,  p:ir  us  ka  koi  cpimir 
nahin  thahrd  jo  o,atl  ya  qaid  ke  laiq 
fao. 

Aur  jab  mujho  ittila'  hflf,  ki 
Yahudi  is  mard  ki  [ikat  mcB  lajc  ham, 
main  nc  use  jal'l  tere  pas  bht'j  diya,  aur 
us  ke  muilda'ion  ko  bin  hukiu  diyi,  ki 
tere  huziir  us  par  da'wi  karon.  Ziyada 
salam, 

31  Pas  aipaliirm  ne,  hukm  ke  mu- 
wafin,  Piilus  ko  Lftke  ritofl  rat  Anti- 
patris  men  jiahunchayi. 

32  Aur  dttfre  din  sawaroi}  ko  us  ke 
sath  rawana  karkc  iip  qil'a  ko  phire. 

33  Uiihon  ne  Qaitciriya  mag  pa- 
hunoliko  hAkim  ko  khatt  diyA,  aur 
Pulus  ko  bhi  us  ke  age  hazir  kiya. 

34  Hakim  ne  khatt  parhke  piichhd, 


hai,  k  i  jabtak  use  halak.  ki  Wuh  kissiiba'ka  hai? 'Aur  rnaliim 
-akarcL>.  na  khaenge  ua  pienge ;  aur  (karkc  ki  Qiliqiya  kd  haij 


Putus  Fdikm  ke  dje 


A'AMA'L,  XXIV.  apni  ta'Um  ki  kytfai  karta. 


i  Kflha.Jab tera  mudda'i  bhi  bd/ir 
honge,  main  turi  Buiuinga.  Aur  hukru 
diya,  ki  Uw  Herodls  ki  bargdh  men 
qaid  raklum. 

XXIV  BA'B. 

PA'NOH  din  ke  be'd  Harianlah  sar- 
dAr  kdhio  ba'z  buicurgon.  nur  Tar- 


tullus  nan»  ok  wakil  ke  sath  wahdn. 
avd,  aur  hakim  ke  age  PiIIub  par  naliBh 
ki. 

2  Jab  wuk  butaya  gaya,  Tartullus 
larydd  kame  lagi,  aur  kahA,  Ralihaz 
is  ke  ki  tore  waaflo  hamen,  hari  cliain, 
aur  teri  rtur-andeshl  ae  is  qaurn  ke 
liyp  intizdm  ke  achchhe  BUJAm  bottt 
hain, 

3~Ai  Felikas  bahAdur,  hani  is  ko 
liar  waqt  aur  har  jagah  kamal  sauki 
guzar!  ke  sAtu.  mau  lete  hara- 

4  Par  is  liye  ki  tujhe  ziydda  taklif 
n»  dan,  maini  teri  ruiuuai  kartA  hurj, 
ki  tu  apni  milirbani  ae  hamari  do  ok 
baten  ROH. 

6  Ki  ham  iui  is  mard  ko  mufsid,  aur 
tamam  dnnya  ke  Hab  Yaliudion  men 
fitna-angez,  aur  Ndaarion  ki  bid'at  kft 
ek  sarda'r  pAyA ; 

6  Ua  ne  baikat  ko  nApAk  karne  kA 
bhi  qaad  kiyA,  aur  ham  ne  tine  pakra, 
aur  chaha  ki  apni  shari'at  ke  muwd- 
fiq  ub  k!  \iddiat  karen. 

7  Par  Lusias  sarddr  alce  bari  zabar- 
dastl  ko  sath  u«e  h  amar  e  hAtuon 
chhiu  le  gaya. 

8  Aur  ua  ke  nmdda'ion  ko  hukm 
diya,  ki  tere  paa  jaen  :  so  td  tfp  tahqiq 
karke  in  sab  baton  ko,  jin  ki  baru  un 
par  nali-h  kartu  ham,  khud  usi  88 
daryaft  kar  «akta  hai. 

9  Aur  Yalnidion  no  bhi  mAn  liya, 
aur  kahd,  ki  Y.!  hdlen.  yiinhlri  hain. 

10  TnbPulus  ne,  jabhAkinisebolne 
ka  jahara  pitya,  jawab  diya,  Azhaski 
main  iauta  bun  ki  td  bahu  t  banci]  §e 
is  (janin  ka  hakim  bai,  main  bari 
kbaiir-jiima'l  se  ftjmi'tUBr  bayan  karlii 
nun : 

11  Ky  utiki   tu  daryaft  kar   sakti 

188" 


hai,  ki  ti6rah  diri  se  ziydda  nahin  luic 
ki  main.  Yarusalaiu  uicy  'ibadat  karne 

gfty*- 

12  Aur  unhon  ne  haikal  inenniujhe 
kiai  ke  sAth  liahs  karte,  ya  logon  men 

lawid  nthdtena  ]>aya,  na  'ihddat-kbau- 
otj  mtm,  na  shalir  roeg ; 


13  Aur  na  in  bdton  ko,  jin  ki  we 
mujh  _par  ab  nAlish.  karte  bain,  sabit 
kar  sakto  hain. 

14  Leldn  turo  edmhnc  yih  iqrdr  kar- 
ti  hdn,  ki  jia  rab  ko  we  bid'&t  kahte 
hain,  ils(  men  apOfl  bapiiidon  ke  Khu- 
,l(i  ki  bandagi  kaiti,  aur  sab  kuchh  jo 
sliari'at  aur  iiabion  ki  kitaborj  Uien 
tikba  hai,  yaqin  janta: 

15  Aur  Kliiida  88  yih  ummed  rakh- 
tri  hiin,  jis  ko  we  bhi  mau  leto  hain,  ki 
murdotj  kt  qiyamat  hogi,  ky&  ra^toa 
kyii  iia^rastoij  ki. 

16  Aur  main  i»i  sababkoshitri  kar- 
ta hi'in,  ki  hauiwha  Kliuda  aur  atlmion 
ke  age  meia  dii  mujhe  malimat  na 
karo. 

17  Ab  kai  baras  ba'd  main  apni 
qaum  ko  khairiit  [«ihunchino,  aur  nazr 
charhanc  "aya  lilin. 

18  Is  par  Asia  ke  ba'ze  Yahudion  no 
mujhe  haikal  inon  taharat  kiye  hiie 
paya,  par  na  to  dangal  ko  sdth  bote, 
ua  faaad  uthate  dekha, 

19  8o  iiaheri  tere  sfimhne  Mzir 
hona,  aur  agar  un  ka  m  n  j  h  par  kuclih 
da'wa  bo,  nalish  karmi  wajib  tia, 

20  Ya  yihi  kbud  kahiCB,  ki  jab  main 
Sadr   Majlis  ke   .samhuc   kliara  tha, 

iUJh  TUtfa  kuchh  badl  pai ; 

21  Magar  isi  ek  bit  ki  bdbat,  jo 
main  neun  men  khara  hoke  pukani, 
ki  Mtirdon  ki  qiyamat  ke  «bab  aj 
mujh  }iar  iTzam  lio tA  hai. 

•H  1'Vlikan  ne,  jo  is  tariqa  ki  biiten 
khiib  jaiita  tha,  yih  stinke  unhen 
t'dkliir  mm  dala,  aur  kahi,  Jab  Lusi- 
as'fauj  kd  sarddr  Awe,  to  main  tum- 
hArc  iouqaddamo  ki  *ab  bal.  n  !;d(.al 
kaningd. 

23"  Aur  Kubadar  ko  bukm  diya,  ki 


A'AMAT,,  XXV. 
HIT   drAm 

kisi 


Putus  ka, 

?i';]us  ki   kbabardari   kflr,  aur 
■_.  rakh,  siur  uh  ke  logoti  men. 
-■  m  khidmat  kanie,yA  us  paBAne 
m  mau'a  mat  kar. 

24  Aurchancl  roz  ba'd  Felikas  do 
»pni  joni  Prrisilla  ke  sAth,  jo  Yahndin 
ihi,  Akc  Ptfli.is  ktf  hu)a  Meja,  aur  oaao 
llaalh  ke  dfn  k!  suni. 

86  J';ir  jad  «uli  rAstbazi,  aur  par- 
hezgdri,  aur  ayanda  'adAlat  ki  l>dbat 
bd«*n  kar  rabi  tha,  to  Felikas  Bfl 
khaufkluikc  jawab  diyd,  Is  waqtjA; 
fur*Rt  pake  tujhe  phir  bulatinga. 

2R  Pai  us  ko  yib  ummed  bhi  thi, 
ki  Pulu«  se  kuchh  naqd  pAwe,  ta  ki 
us  ko  chhor  de :  is  Bye  uae  aksar  bti- 
lata,  aur  us  ko  sAth  ptftogA  kartA  tha. 

27  Aur  jab  do  baras  guzre,  Purkius 
Festus,  Felikas  ka  qAim  ruaqam  ho 
AyA:  aur  Felikas  yih  chAhko  ki  Ya- 
iuidion  ko  apna  raanimin  kare,  Priius 
ko  qaid  iii  men  chhor  paya. 

XXY  BA'B. 

PAS  Festus  sfiba  men  ddkhil  hoke 
tin  roz  ha'd  Qa.isariya  se  Yaru- 
niarj)  ko  gaya. 

2  Tab  sarda-r  kabin  aur  Yahiidion 
ko  ra,ison  ne  us  ke  dge  Ptilus  par  nA- 
lisli  k  i ; 

3  Aur  us  ke  muqaddanie  men  yih 
milirbani  cbdhl  ki  use  Yarfisalam 
men  hnla  bheje :  aur  ghfit  rucn,  tbe  ki 
uh  ko  rAh  men  niar  dalerj. 

4  Par  FtfftUB  ne  jawab  diyd,  k  i 
Pfilua  to  Qai«iriya  hi  men  qaid  rabe, 
aur  main  ap  jald  wahAn  jAurjga ; 

5  Aur  kaha,  Pas  tum  men  se  jinben 
maqdu>  ha  sath  ohakm  ;  aur  agar  is 
shnklis  uien  kuchh  badi  hai,  us  par 
B&Uu)  karen. 

6  8o  un  ke  danniydn  din  daa  ek 
rahko  Qaisariya  ko  gayd ;  aur  dda- 
re  din  'addlat  ke  takht  par  liaithke 
hulun  diya,  ki  Pulus  ko  liwen. 

7  Jab  wuh  hazir  h<U,  we  Yahudi, 
jo  Yartisalam  su  de  the,  us  ke  gird 
khare   hoke   Pulua   par   bahutorl  aur 

189 


F\gtut  ko  agojand. 
bbftj'i  nAJishen  karne  lape,  jo  sAbit  na 
kar  saken. 

8  Us  dg  apnd  'nar  knrke  kabA,  ki 
Main  ne  na  Yahiidion  ki  ahnri'at  ka, 
aur  na  haikal  kA,  aur  n»  Qais»r  kA,  koi 
gunAh  kiyA  hai. 

9  Par  Festua  ne  yih  clidhkc  ki 
Y;il)iiili- m  ko  ajuiii  manmvm  kare, 
PfiJus  ku  Jamih  dek»  kahd,  KyA  tu 
chahtd  hai  ki  Yarfisalam  ko  jae,  aur 
wahAn  mere  Ag«  iri  bdton  ki  bAbat 
terA  insaf  hn  't 

10  Par  Pulus  ne  kaha,  Mairj  Qaisar 
ke  takht  i  'adilat  ku  Age  khnrA  hurj ; 
chAhiye  ki  yakin  merA  ins&f  ho;  Ya- 
hudioQ  kA  main  ne  kuchli  oitttil  nahin 
kiyA,  chunnncLi  tti  bhi  kinib  jAntA 
hai. 

11  Par  agar  cjusurwAr  hdn,  aur 
maia  n«  kuchh  qatl  ka  lAiq  kiyA,  to 
mArejAne  ne  inkAr  nahin  kartA;  par 
jo  un  batori  ki,  jin  ki  we  mujh  par 
nAIish  karte  hain,  kuchh  asi  nahin,  to 
koi  mujh  ko  un  ke  hawala  nahin  kar 
sakta.   Main  Qfttnr  ki  iluhAi  detA  hun. 

12  Tab  Festus  ne  salAhkAron  se 
maslahat  karke  iawAb  diya,  ki  Tu  ne 
Qaiaar  hi  ki  duliAi  di;  Qaisar  hi  ke 
I-as  jAegA. 

13  Aur  kuchh  diu  "bito  Agrippa 
badshAh  aur  Barnitn'  Qais4iriya  men 
Ae,  ki  Festus  ko  salam  karun. 

14  Aur  jab  ka,i  din  wahAn  raho 
the,  Festus  ne  Polo»  kA  hai  bad«hah 
se  zikr  kiyA,  aur  kaba,  Ek  shakfut  hai 
jise  Felikas  qaid  men  chhor  guya : 

15  Us  par,  jab  main  Yarfisalam 
men  thA,  sardAr  kAhinTjii  aur  Ya- 
hfidion  ko  buzurgon  no  iiAlish  ki,  aur 
cbAhA  ki  uh  par  sazA  ki  hukm  diyi 
jae. 

16  Unhcn  main  ne  jawab  diyA,  ki 
Rfimion  kd  dastfir  naliin  ki  kisfAdmi 
ko  halakat  ke  liye  hawala  kare-j,  jab 
tak  ki  uiudda'i  'alaihi  apne  muddalta) 
ke  rfi-ba-rt  na  ho,  aur  da'wd  kA  jawAb 
na  dene  pdwe. 

17  So  jab  we   yahan   bdham   hoe, 


Qauar  H  <fnhdl  dettd.  A'AMA'L, 

main  ne  kuchli  dor  na  ki,  baiki  diisrc 
din  takhl  par  baithkar  liukm  diya,  ki 
L's  niard  ko  lio. 

18  Par  jab  us  ke  mwlda'i  khare 
lilit?,  unhon  ne  us  ke  haqq  mm  aisd 
koi  ilxam  pcsL  na  kiva,  jia  ka  mujhe 
khiydl  tlia: 

19  Baiki  apne  din  aur  kisi  Yisii'  ki 
bdbat,  jo  uiar  gaya,  jiso  Pulus  kahta. 
thd  ki  zinda  hai,  ns  ne  bahs  kartu  the. 

20  Jab  main  is  tarah  ki  takrir  se 
shakk  men  para  Iba,  us  se  piichbd, 
Eyii  tu  Yarusala.ni  nien  jdne  ko  razi 
hai,  ki  waliari  in  batoii  ka  faisala  lio? 

21  Par  jab  Piilus  no  duhai  di,  ki 
mera  insaf  Jandb  i  'A'li  hi  ki  tahi]jq 
par  nmuquf  rabo,  main  ne  liukm  diya, 
ki  jab  lak  use  Qaisar  ku  pas  na  bbej 
liun,  us  ki  nlgahbani  karcii. 

22  Tab  Agrippa  ne  Fwstwa  se  kaki. 
Main  bhi  chahta  liun  ki  is  admt  ki 
sunun.  W  uh  bola,  Kiil  tu  us  ki  siuiega. 

23  Pas  diare  din,  jab  Agrippa  aur 
Baniiqi  hari  uban  o  uhaukat  se,  sardar- 
on  aur  ubahi  ke  ra.ison  ke  siilh,  di- 
wankbino  nien  dakbil  Liic,  Festus  ke 
lmkiii  se  Pulus  ko  lac. 

24  Tab  Festus  ne  kaba,  Ai  Agrippa 
bddshah,  aur  sab  mardo  jo  hamare  sath 
hazir  ho,  tnm  is  ko  dekhte  lio,  jis  ki 
babat  YahVidiim  ki  sari  guroli  Yani- 
ealam  men  aur  yaban  more  pichlie 
pari,  aur  duU&Li  bai,  ki  Us  ki  age  ko 
jita  rahnd  wajib  nahin. 

25  Par  jab  mujh  se  daryitft  hud  ki 
us  no  kuchh  qatl  ke  laiq  nahin  kiya, 
aur  us  ne  dp  Jaiiab  i  'A'li  ki  duhai  di. 
to  main  nc  thand,  ki  use  bbej  dun. 

26  Aur  mujhe  us  ke  haqq  mori  ki^i 
bat  kd  yaqiu  nahin,  ki  apne  khuda- 
wand  ho  likhi'm.  Is  waste  main  no 
use  tumhare  age,  aur  kbass  kar  terw 
huzur,  ai  Agrippa  badsbah.,  b.a»ir  kiya 
bai,  \i  ki  tahqiqat  ke  ba'd  kuehh  likli 
sakiin : 

27  Kyunki  qaidi  ko  bhejnd,  aur 
nalishen  bhi,  jo  us  par  hain,  na  batdna, 
mujhe  na-munisib  ma'h'mi  liota  liai. 

190 


xxvi  r.A'ii. 

1AB  Agrippa  ne  Pulus  se  knhi. 
.L  Tujhe  apnd  'uar  karne  ki  ijdzat 
bab  Tab  Pulus  hith  phaildke  apni 
'uzr  yiin  bayan  fcartie  Ingd: 

2  Ki  Al  had.shdh  Agrippa,  mi  Bab 
baton  ki  bdbat,  jin  ka  Yahudi  mujh 
j»r  da'wa  karte  hain,  aj  tero  s;imhne 
uzr  ksirua  apni  sa'id'at  jdnla  bfin ; 

;I  Khasa  is  liye  ki  tu  Yahudion  ki 
Bab  raamon  aur  maslon  se  waqif  hai; 
is  fiabab  main  teri  rninnat  kartii  hiin, 
ki  tahammurne  merf  sun. 

4  Pas  nierl  ciial  ko  jawdni  sg,  ki 
kis  tarah  ehuru'  so  ipnl  qanm  ke 
darmiyau  Yariisalaru  nn:ii  nibahta 
raha,  yih  aab  Yabiidi  jantf  hain  : 

5  8o  we  mujhe  shurii'  xo  janke 
a^ar  chahen  to  grawahi  defl,  ki  maiij 
Farisi  lioke  ham  logori  ke  mazhab  ke 
sab  se  parhezgar  firqc  ku  muwdfiq 
z'mdagi  kfttta  thd. 

fi  Aur  ab  us  wa'de  ki  ummed  ke 
eabab,  jo  Khuda  ne  hamare  MpdadcO 
se  kiya  tha,  nniin  'lulalat  men  bazir 
k  iya  gaya-  hun  : 

I  "Us  bl  wa'de  ko  pAne  ki  ummed 
par  hamare  barah  firqe  dil  o  jan  6e 
rat  din  banda-zi  kiya  karto  hain.  Isi 
ummed  ko  Siibab,  ai  bailsliah  Agripp;i, 
Vulimli  !ii'.ij!i  par  ffcryAd  karte  bain. 

y  Yih  bat  kyi'iy  r»-4'atibar  samajhte 
ho,  ki  Kliudti  murdon  ko  jilat-a.  hai? 

9  Han,  main  ne  bhi  eamjha  ki 
Yisii'  Kasari  ke  nam  ki  liahut  bar- 
kbilafi  karna  mujh  i«r  wajib  hai. 

10  So  bhi  main  ue  Yaruaalam  meg 
kiya :  aur  sardar  kdbinon  ne  ikhtiyiir 
pako  liahut  se  muqadd:ison  ko  ijiiid- 
kbaiio  men  band  kiya;  aur  Jab  qail 
iiiye  jdtn.  the,  main  ham  i  bliartd  tlia. 

II  Aur  bar  'ibai.lat-kluuic  men  ak- 
sar  unhen  sana  dilake  zabardastl  un 
se  kufr  kahwata  ;  aur  uu  par  nibayat 
janin  knrke  begauon  ke  shahron  tak 
aatdta  tbd. 

12  Is  hal  men  jab  sardar  kdhi 


J'jrijip'i  ke  httzir 

W     ikhtiydr    aur     parw. 

&faalabq  kn  jdtd  thd; 

13  Do  pahar  ko,  ai  badsh&h,  main 
ne  rdh  men  dekhd,  ki  dsnidn  no  ok  nur, 
siinij  se  barraq,  mere  aur  mere  B&thion 
ke  gird  chamaktd  bni. 

14  Jab  ham  sab  zamhi  par  <-ir  ]«trc, 
main  ne  ok  awdz  suni,  jo  niujli  w 
bolti,  anr  'Ibrani  y.uUlu  men  kahti  tbf, 
ki  Ai  yubin,  Sdlus,  tfi  mujhu  kyun 
satata  hai?  paiue  ki  kil  par  irit  in&rniL 
tore  liye  mu&hkii  b&i 

15  Main.  ne  kaha,  Ai  Khuddwand, 
tu  bina  hai  V  Wub  bold/Main  Stoff 
hurj,  jise  tu  satata  hai. 

113  Lekin  uth,  aurapnepdnwoTi  par 
khani  ho:  kyiinki  maiii  ia  liye  tujh 
imr  zdhir  lnia,  ki  tujho  uu  chizoii  kd 
khidini  aur  gawdh  tjialir:ivm,  jinbey 
tu  ne  dekhd,  aur  jo  main  tujh  par 
z.iiliir  kariingd; 

17  Aur  maiii  tujhe  bachdiirjgd  U 
qaum  aur  gair-qaumon  ae,  jin  ke  pas 
ah  tujhe  bhejta  hiiii, 

IH  Ki  tn"  ao  k/  dukhen  kliol  de,  ti 
ki  andherc  se  ujalo,  aur  Shaitdu  ke 
ikhtiydr  se  Khuda  ki  taraf  ph iren,  aur 
gundhon  ki  nni'afi,  aur  inuqaddatiun 
men  miras  pdwen,  tu  inidu  ke  Vttfle 
jo  mujh  par  hai. 

19  Ih  liye,  ai  badshab  Agrinpa, 
main  us  aumani  royd  kd  mi-farmdii  na 
luidT 

20  Baiki  pakde  utihog.jo  Dimisbq, 
aur  Yarrtsalani,  aur  sdre  mulk  Valid- 
diya  men  haiu,  aur  gair-<{iHiii]'m  ko 
bhi,  chitdyd,  ki  tauba  karen,  aur 
Khudi  ki  taraf  phireQ,  aur  tauita  ke 
muwdiiq  'amal  karen. 

21  Iiihin  baton  ke  sabab  Yalnidiori 
no  uiujbe  hnikal  men  jwkarke  mere 
qatl  ka  qasd  kiyii. 

22  Par  Khudd  so  madad  pdkc  aj 
tsk  khard  Mrfl,  nur  cbhote  )>are  pir 
piwahi  detd,  aur  kuchh  naluri  kasta 
In'm,  magac  we  bdterj  jiu  ke  wdtu' 
hono  ki  khabar  nabit 
bin  di  hai': 

191 


VAMA'U  XXVII. 
gi     l«ike 


apitA  't'zr  bayan  ketrna. 

23  Ki  Masih  dukii  uthdwcgd,  aur 
murdofl  mm  ae  pahli  ji  uthuga,  aur  ia 
qaum  aur  guir-qaumi>n  ko  nur  dikbld- 
wegd. 

21  Jab  wub  iipnd  "uar  yi'm  kartd 
tba,  Fostus  nu  bari  liwaz  se  kahd,  Ai 
1  lulus,  tu  di  wan  a  hai ;  bubut  'ilm  ne 
tujh  o  diwana  kiya. 

25  Wuh  bola,  Ai  Fcs'tus  bahddur, 
main  diwdna  uahin  ;  Iwiiki  Kacbdi  aur 
lioshydri  ki  baten  kiihta  liun  ; 

26'  Ki  bddfihdii,  jis  ke  samiiue  ;ib 
main  lit-dliaralc  boltd  bui),  y  ih  baton 
i:inia  hmj  |  baLki  luujbe  yaqia  hai,  ki 
in  bdton  men  se  koi  nu  par  ohUpi  na- 
hin  ;  kyiinki  yih  mdjard  to  kom:  meij 
nsag  htm. 

27~Ai  badshdh  Agrip]M,  kyd  td 
nabiorj  par  yaipn  lata¥  main  jantd 
hrin  ki  yaqiu  iatd  hai. 

28  Tab  Agrippe  ne  Piilua  se  kabd, 
Nazdik  bal  ki  teru  samjluiiie  se  main 
Masilii  ho  jdfin. 

29  Pulus  bold,  Khudd  kare,  ki  sirf 
tu  bi  nnbin,  baiki  sab  jo  dj  muri  suut« 
bain,  faqat  naatiik  uahin,  luilki  hilkull 
aiwe  howen,  JalsA  main  b\in,  bagair  in 
zanjiron  ke. 

30  Jab  ub  ne  yih  kaba  tba,  bddalidh, 
aur  hikiin,  aur  Harniqi,  aur  un  ky 
hani-niahiD  utho : 

31  Aur  alag  jake  ok  diisrc  se  baton 
karne  aur  kahne  lage,  ki  Yih  ddtni 
aisa  kucbii  nahin  karld,  jo  qfltl  yd 
qaid  ke  ldiq  ho. 

32  Aur  AfilipMi  nu  Fesfcuj  se  kahd. 
Agar  Qaisar  ki  iluhdi  na  detd,  to  yih 
ddmi  cltlnit  Kaktd. 

XXVII  BA/B. 

AUR  jab  muqarrar  hua  ki  hamja- 
bdz  |ar  Iidlia  ko  jden,  uuhon  no 
l'ulua  aur  kitue  aur  qatdion  ku  Jiilius 
ndin  AusustUBi  paltan.  ke  ek  siibadar 
ke  hawdla  kiyi. 

2  Aur  ham  Adramutteui  jahdz  par, 

aur  Muad  ue  jo  Asia  ke  kiitdra  kindre  jdiie  par  thd, 

[tliarhke  rawdna  hue  ;  aur  Aris tarkhua 


PtWws  ka  jahae  y<w 

Macmdilm  TMoahadaakf  hnmAre  sAth 

tha. 

3  Drisre  din    hnvn    Bsldi   Tm  _ 
hunche.      Aur    J61iii8    ne    Piilus  «e 
khusli-suluki  karke  ijAzat  di,  ki  apne 
doston  ke  pas  jake  cliain  kare. 

i  WaMfl  n  rawAna  hokfi  Kupn 
ke  niche  niche  guzre,  ia  liyo  ki  hawA 
mukhdlif  thi. 

5  Alir  jab  ham  Qiliqiya  aur  Pamfii- 
liyriki:  ssitmmdarfloguCTO  the,  to  Munl 
nam  Luqm  ke  shahr  men  Ae. 

6  Wahan  subadAr  ne  IskandariA  ka 
ek  jahaz  Italia  ko  jfito  hue  pako  ha- 
men  iis  par  bithaya. 

7  Aur  jab  bam   bahut  din   Abis  t  a 
AliiHta  ciiiilo,  aur  mushkil   se  Kuidi 
ke  sAmhne  Ae,  to  is  Jiye  ki  hawa  b; 
men  Age  barhuo  na  doti  thi,  Qretc  ke 
niche  niche  Salmone  ke  sAnihne  hoke 


8  Aur  us  se  ba-mushkU  guzarkc 
kisi  maqam  men,  jo  Husn-Bandar 
kiihlata  hai,  ao:  LasoiA  shahr  iis  ke 
nazdik  thA. 

H  Itne  men,  jab  bahut  waqt  guzrd, 
aur  ab  jahaz  ke  cbalne  men  khatra 
parA,  is  liyo  ki  roza  ka  din  bhi  guzar 
gaya  thA,  Pulus  no  unhnn  chitAyA, 

10  Aur  unhen  kahA,  Ai  mardo, 
main  dekht.A  Ini  n  ki  is  safar  ke  «Ath 
taklif  aur  bahut  nuqsAn  hogA,  11:1  sirf 
bojh  aur  jahaz  ka,  baiki  hamAri  janon 
k;i  bhi. 

11  Par  srfibadAr  no  nAkliuda  aur 
jahAz  ke  mAlik  ki  bdton  ko  Pulus  ki 
baton  se  ziyada  niAnA. 

12  Aur  is  liyc  ki  wuh  bandar  jArA 
kiit-iii'  ke  liy<:  achchhA  na  thA,  aksaron 
ini  salah  ki  ki  wahan  H  bhi  rawan» 
hon,  ki  agar  ho  sake  to  Finlke  men 
pahuuchko  JArA  kAten:  ki  wuh  Q.ret« 
kA  ek  bandar  thA,  jo  dakkhin  ]adt- 
chhim  aur  u  Uar  pachchhim  ke  rukh 
tiiA. 

13  Jab  kuchh  kuchh  dakkini  hawA 
cbalne  lagi,  un hon  ne  yih  samajhke 
ki  apne  matlab  ko  pahunehe  langar  |  tApii  men  jA  pnrenge. 

192 


A'AMA'L,  XXVII.  Rum  ku  j,\„,\ 

uthayA,  aur  Qrete  kA  kinAra  pakarke 
rawAna  h  u  e. 

14  Lekin  thori  dur  ba'd  ek  barl  tri- 
fAni  hawa,  jo  Yiirukludon  kablat.i  hai, 
us  par  se  utbke  un  par  ]>ari. 

15  Aur  jab  jahil/,  ikhtiyar  men  na 
rahA,  aur  hnw.ika  sAmhnA  na  kar  «aka, 
to  hain  ne  use  chhor  diyA,  ki  clialA  jAe. 

16  Aur  ek  tAprt  ke  tale,  jis  kA  nAm 
Qlaudu  hai,  bah  gaye,  aur  hari  inush- 
kil  se  dongi  ko  qabu  men  lAo. 

17  Use  unlion  no  pas  lake  tadbiren 
kiri,  aur  jahaz  ko  niche  se  bAndhA; 
aur  chor-bAlu  mcn  dha.s  jAno  ke  dar  Be 
ham  no  jaliAz  ki  pAl  wAI  utar  diyA, 
aur  yiirdii  (-halo  gWW. 

18  Par  jab  Andhi  nc  liamcn.  nihA- 
yat  satAyA,  to  diisre  din  unhon  ne 
jiihAz  ka  bojb  phcnk  diyA. 

19  Aur  tisro  din  ham  ne  apne  hath- 
on  se  jahil  kA  asbAb  bhi  pheukA, 

20  Aur  jab  bahut  dinon  tnk  na  s\\- 
raj  aur  na  Ure  nazar  Ae,  aur  bari 
Andhi  chalti  rahi,  Akhir  ko  bachne  ki 
urnmed  hamen  bilkull  na  rahi. 

21  Aur  bahut  fAqnn  ke  ba'd  Pulus 
ne  un  ke  bich  men  khare  hoke  kaM, 
Ai  mardo,  lAzim  to  thA  ki  tum  meri 
bAt  mdnke  Qrelo  «e  rawAna  na  hotc, 

ir  yih  taklif  aur  muptau  ua  uthAte. 

22  Par  ab  tumhari  miniiat  kartA 
hiin  ki  khAtir-jaiu'a  nkliu  ;  ki  tum 
men,  se  kisi  k!  jan  lui  noqsrfll  na  hogA, 
faqnt  jahAa  kA; 

n  'Kyunki  KhudA,  jis  kA  main  hun, 
jis  ki  baudagi  karta  hun,  us  kA 
firishta  isi  rAt  ko  mere  pAs  AyA, 

24  Aur  kahA,  Ai  Piilus,  mat  dar; 
kyiinki  zarnr  hai,  ki  tu  Qaisar  ke  dge 
hAzir  ho ;  aur,  dekh,  KlmdA  no  sah  ko, 
jo  tero  sAth  jahAz  men  sawAr  liain, 
i-ujhi!  ba.khsh  diyA. 

25  Is  liye,  ai  mardo,  kli.itir-jam'a 
ho,  kyi'mki  main  KhudA  pBt  i'atiqad 
rakhtA  hun  ki  jaisA  mujh  se  kahA 
jin  y  A,  waisA  h  i  hogA. 

26  Lekin    zariir   hai    ki   ham   kivi 


■  t/,  u 


■  ;<*!lhl  A'AilA'].,  XXViH 

Jali  chandahwin   rat   ai,  ki  jiw 


/i,  ;./.■ 


.,.(„. 


darya  e  Adrii  BMB  takra 
rahe  the,  iwllu  rdt,  ko  mallaliim  m 
atkal  bc  malam  ki.v:i,  ki  kiwi  vmilk  ke 
....  '!ii.  bfltn  j'iilmnche  . 

28  Aur  pdui  ki  tuah  leko  bis  pursa 
(•ayil :  nur  thori  age  barhke  aur  phir 

■  «•  ]»ndrah  pursa  paya. 

29  Aur  ia  gar  ac  ki  mabada  chatan- 
"'J  I'iir  j*  P*i«lh  jahaz  ko  pichhe  «e 
<bar  lancar  drile,  aursubh  ki  khwahiah 
inea  Ingc  roho, 

30  Aur  jab  mallalion  na  chaha  ki 
jahil/,  pir  M  bhag  ja-eri,  aur  i*  bahan* 
sg  ki  gttlahi  tc  langar  dalcn,  ooiiire  ku 
samundar  men  utanic  lagc, 

31  Pulus  db  bundar  aur  sipahion 
se  kaha,  Agar  ye  jaliaz  par  ua  raheri, 
lo  tum  unhin  bach  nakte, 

82  Tt\h  Bipfhiofl  Iie  donge  kf  rassf 
katko  asa  gira  diya. 

;1S  Aur  din  hone  na  pay.i  ki  Polusi 
ne  eab  ki  mhmat  ki,  ki  Kuchh  khao, 
aur  kaha,  A'j  chaudah  din  hut  ki 
turn  rak  dekhto  ho,  aur  ftioa  kiya,  aur 
kuchb  kbilna  na  liyi. 

34  h  liye  turahari  udnnat  knrta 
nun,  ki  kuchli  khaiyo,  ki  is  mon  tuni- 
iiart  nalatnati  hai ;  kyt'inki  tum  mon 
H  ttiKi  ke  Bir  ka  ek  bal  jhar  ua 
jaega. 

35  Aur  yih  kahke  U  ne  roti  li,  aur 
mi  sal  i  ke  wimhnc  Khuda  ka  nhukr 
kiya,  aur  torke  khano  laga. 

36  'lidi  we  pab  kbatir-jam'a  ht'ic, 
aur  ap  blii  kuclib  kliaya. 

37  Aur  sab  railake  jahaz  men  do 
mu  cbibattnr  adini  tlie. 

'>  Aur  unbon  m  khake  aur  ser 
hnke  anaj  ko  samundar  incn  phenk 
.  .a.  a  ir  jahaz  halka  kiya. 

39  Aur  jab  din  hd&,  unhorj  ne  ua 
ramin  ko  na  pahchaiia :  par  ek  kol 
dekha,  jis  ka  kinara  hamwar  tlia,  aur 

I  cq  m-  chahi  ki  agu  ho  aake,  to 
>aliiz  ko  uh  par  charha  le  jiien. 

10  Sn  langar  kfttke  saniundar  mon, 
chhor  diye,  aur  patwaron  ki  nwsian 
193 


bhi  kholin,  nur  pai  hawa  kn  rukh  par 
charhakc  kbiftre  ki  taraf  chulo. 

•11  Aur  ek  jabali,  jah(in  do  «imun- 
dar  mite  tbe,  pahuncliku  jabat  ko 
«amin  par  dauri  diya;  so  galabi  to 
dliakka  khakw  |ibaijKgayl,  |>ar  pichhal 
lahron  ke  zor  ao  tiit  gayii. 

42  Aur  Hipiilui.ii  ki  yih  sahih  thi.ki 
rini'liiaj  kn  m.'ir  dili'ti,  U  ho  k)  kol 
pairke  bbagjaa 

43  Lokin  siibnd&r  ne,  yih  chahkc 
ki  Pul  uh  ko  baohawo,  un  kois  iradese 
baz  rakhil,  aur  hukm  diya,  ki  J»  log 
[.air  eakte  baiti  jiaiilo  ki'idke  kinare 
par  jAeij  : 

44  Aur  baqi,  ha'7.0  takbton  par,  aur 
ba'ze  jahiz  ke  aur  asbab  ur.  Aur 
yrinliiii  ini»,  ki  sah  ko  Bab  aalimat 
kbusliki  ]iar  pahunehe. 

XXVIII  BA'C. 

AUR  jab  bach  nikle  the,  tab  jari 
gaye  ki  us  tapii  ka  uam  Malite 

2  Aur  ub  ke  jangli  Mshiiulou  11« 
ham  pai  uiltayat  udhrbani  ki :  kyiin- 
ki  menh  ki  j  hari  aur  jare  ke  Sftbab 
unhon  ne  ag  itulgai,  aur  baui  eablion 
ko  pan  bulaya. 

3  Aur  jab  Piilus  ne  likri  ka  gflttha 
jam'a  karkc  ag  mon  dala,  ek  nag  gar- 
mi  pako  riikla,  aur  us  ke  hath  par 
lipat  gaya. 

4  Jynnhin  un  janglion  ne  wuli  kira 
us  ko  hatii  par  lipta  dekhd,  ek  nts 
diisre  se  kaha,  Yti^inan  yib  Adini 
kiuini  liai,  ki  agarehi  samiindar  se 
bach  gaya,  pH  Ilahi  iriti^am  un  jhw 
naluri  rfetA  hai. 

5  Par  us  no  kfre  ko  ag  men  jhatak 
diyi,  aur  kuchli  sara  oa  paya, 

6  Par  we  rounlazir  the  ki  wuh  toj 
jaegd,  ya  ekaek  marke  gir  parcga : 
lekin  jab  der  tak  intiaar  kiy:i,  aur 
dckba  ki  tu  ko  kuclib  zarar  na 
pahuneba,  to  aur  khiyal  karke  kaha, 
ki  Yih  ek  dewt;i  hal, 

7  Aur  us  jagah  ke  dspas  Publiua 
name  us  tapii  ko  sardar  ki  milkiyat 

N 


Pilus  Rum  men 


A'AMA'L, 


thi ;  ub  ne  hiimerj  j*har  le  jAke  tin  din 
t&k  bsiri  dosti  ne  min  mani  ki. 

8  Aur  yiln  huA,  ki  Publius  kd  bdp 
tap  aur  jiryin  i  lahu  se  bimAr  parA 
thA:  Pulus  ne  lis  ke  pAs  jake  du'A 
mAngl,  aur  ub  par  hath  mkhke  ufie 
changa  kiyA. 

U  Pas  jab  yih  mnshhur  buA,  tab 
aur  log,  jo  taptl  men  blmJr  the,  ae, 
aur  change  hue: 

10  Aur  unhon  ne  hamari  bart  'izzat 
ki ;  aur  chalte  waqt,  jo  kuchh  h  amen 
darkAr  thi,  lAd  diya. 

Jl  Aur  tin  mnhine  ba'd  Iskaudari 
jahAz  ]>ar,  jo  jare  bhitr  ua  tapii  men 
raba,  aur  jis  kA  nishAn  Bfftflknri  Iba, 
rawAna  hm 

12  Aur  BirAipis  men  lagAke  ttn  din 
rahe. 

13  Aur  wahan  Be  Rcghim  men 
ghiim  Ae :  aur  jab  ek  ros  ba'd  dakha- 
niyachali,  dusru  diu  Putiuii  meii  ae: 

14  Walian  ham  bhaion  ku  pake  un 
ki  minnat  se  sat  din  un  ke  pas  rahe: 
aur  yunhin  Rum  ko  chale. 

10  Wal.an  ae  bhii  hamar!  khabar 
sunke  Appius  ke  diarik  aur  Tin-SarA 
tak  hamaro  istiabal  ko  Ae:  aur  Pulus 
ne  unbes  dekhkar  Khuda  kA  ahukr 
luyii.  .uii  klmnijiun'a  ln'iA. 

10  Jab  ham  Rum  men  pnhunche, 
su hadir  ne  qaidion  ko  risau  i  khAsu  ke 
eiirdar  ke  hawai  a  kiya:  par  Piilua  ko 
ijAzat  bui  ki  ukelA  ek  upahi  ke  uith, 
jo  us  kA  nigahbAn  thA,  raba 

17  Aur  ynn  hiiA,  ki  titi  ro?,  ba'd 
Fulua  ne  Yahudiun  ke  ra,ison  ko  bfi- 
ham  bulaya:  aur  jab  ikatthe  biie,  un 
se  kaha,  Ai  bhlio,  harchand  main  no 
ijamn  ki  aur  bApdAdon  ki  tariqon  ke 
khilAf  kuchh  na  kiyA,  tau  bhi  qaidi 
hoke  Yanisalam  re  Rnmton  ke  hathem 
men  hawaJa  kiyA  gaya. 

18  Unhon  ne  merA  bAl  daryAft 
karke  chAha,  ki  mujhe  chhor  den, 
kyunki  mere  qatl  kA  koi  wabah  ua  tha. 

19  Par  jab  Yabudion  ne  inukhA- 
lafat  ki,  main  ne  lachAri  bc  Q«isar  ki 

194 


XXVIII.  Injil  U  manadi  kartd. 

duhfii  di;  par  la  waste  tiahin,  ki  apui 
qaum  par  faryad  karae  kA  mori  koi 
sabab  hal. 

20  So  isi  liyo  main  no  tumben 
bulaya,  ki  tumben  dekhtin,  aur  guft- 
ogii  karun  ;  kyunki  larAol  bi  ki  ummcd 
ko  eabab  main   ia  zanjir  Be  bandhi 

L'l  Tnbon  ne  us  sti  kahi,  Ham  ne 
mi  Valu'uiiya  so  tere  haqq  men  khatt 
pAe,  na  bhaion  men  so  kiai  ne  Akc  teri 
kuchh  khabar  uundi,  >A  Itadi  bayan  k(. 

22  Par  ham  chahte  bain  ki  tujh  ae 
sunen,  ki  lu  kyA  winiajhtA  hai :  kyunki 
is  firqe  ki  babat  ham  ko  ma'luni  b"ii, 
ki  sab  kahin  use  burd  kahtc  haiii. 

23  Aur  jab  unhon  ne  ua  ko  liye  ek 
din  thuhnlya,  bshaten  ua  ke  dere  par 
Ae;  us  ne  un  ko  Kliuda  ki  badahAbat 
par  gawAbi  dy  deko,  aur  MiisA  ki 
ahari'at  aur  nabion  kl  kitab  ge  Mastilt 
ke  liaqf[  men  dab'len  IA  Jake,  aubh  se 
shani  tak  ta'Iim  diya  kiya. 

24  Aur  ba'zoii  ne  us  ki  Mttsn  ko 
man  liya,  aur  ba'ze  be-iniAn  rahe. 

25  Jab  apa.s  men  inuttnfi'i  na  ln'ie, 
we  PiihiH  ke  yih  ek  bAtkahte  hi  cliah* 
gaye,  ki  Riib  i  Quda  ne  Yaa'aiyah  uahi 
ki  ma'rifat  hamare  bdpdadon  ae  kbub 
kaha, 

26  Aur  farmAya,  ki  Is  qaum  ke  pds 
jA,  aur  knh,  ki  T  uni  k.inoii  ne  aunoge, 
par  na  samjhope :  aur  Atikhon  *<■■  '.lekh- 
oge,  par  daryAft  na  karoge : 

27  Kytinki  is  qaum  k£  dil  inota 
huA,  aur  we  apnc  kAnon  Be  lincbA 
sunte  hain,  nur  unhon  ne  apni  Ankhcii 
ini'ind  lin :  ai.sA  na  ho,  ki  ankhon  Be 
dekhen,  aur  kanon  H  Ktiuen,  aur  dil  se 
sarujhen,  aur  ruju'  lAwon,  aur  main 
iitilien  changA  karun. 

2S  Paa  tum  ko  malfim  liowc,  ki 
KbudA  ki  uajAt  gair-qauuion  ke  pda 
bheji  gayi,  aur  we  use  aun  bhi  lengi. 

29  Jab  us  ne  yih  bAten  kahi  thiii, 
Yahudi  Apas  men  bahut  bahs  kartu 
ciialc  gaye. 

"■)  Aur  Piilua  puro  do   baras  apne 


Piiln*  Injil  ki  labat  RU'MI'ON,  I.  layan  harta,. 

kirae  ko  ghar  mon  rnlid,  aur  eab  ko  joltok   Klmda  ki  hfclslialiat  k(  nmnMi 
ua  pas  Ate  th<?  qabul  klya,  ko.rtd,  nur  Khudawnnd  Yisii'  Masih  ki 

31  Anr  kamal  be-parw&l  m  bini  rok  jbatoij  sikhata  nih». 


20  seconds  for  Fellow  Christians  -  Dear  Lord, 

Thank  you  thatthis  PDF  Ebook 

has  been  released  s  o  that  we  are  able 

to  learn  more  about  you  and  wiser  versions. 

Please  help  itto  have  wide  circulation 

Please  help  the  people  responsible  for 

making  this  Ebook  available. 

Please  help  them  to  be  able  to  have  more 

resources  available  to  help  others. 

Please  help  them  to  have  all  the  resources, 

the  funds,  the  strength  and  the  time  that  they 

need  and  ask  for  in  order  to  be  able 

to  keep  working  for  You. 

I  pray  that  you  would  encourage  them  and 

that  you  protect  them  physically  and 

spiritually,  and  the  work  &  ministry  that 

they  are  engaged  in. 

I  pray  that  you  would  protect  them  from  the 
Spiritual  or  other  Forces  that  could  harm  them 
or  their  work  and  projects,  or  slowthem  down. 

Please  help  them  to  find  Godly  friends  who 

are  able  to  help.  Provide  helpful  transportation 

for  their  consistent  use. 

Remind  me  to  pray  for  them  often  as  this 

will  help  and  encourage  them. 


Please  give  them  your  wisdom  and 
understanding  sothey  can  better  followyou, 
and  I  ask  you  to  do 
these  things  in  the  name  of  Jesus,  Amen, 


Prayers 


a  Few  Resources 


Ideas  and  Ebooks  (Livres  /  Libros) 
For  your  Consideration 


Glad  to  have  this  New  Testament  ? 


Help  us  by  PRAYING  for  us  !! 


Invest  in  your  own  Eternity 
Spend  time  praying  ! 


(thank  you) 


SHARE  THIS  PDF  (E-Book)  with  your  Friends 

So  thatthey  will  have  a  stronger 

Spiritual  Life  ALSO 


Concerning  Christians  and  Christianity 

1.  Christians  are  those  who  follow  the  teachings 
ofJesusChrist. 

2.  The  Teachings  of  Jesus  Christ  are  explained  in  the 
book  called  the  Gospel  (Injil)  or  the  New  Testament. 

3.  The  New  Testament  is  the  First  Place  to  find  and  record 

the  teachings  of  Jesus  Christ,  by  those  who  actually  knew  Him. 

4.  The  New  Testament  has  never  been  disproved 
archeologically  or  historically.  It  has  and  remains  accurate. 

5.  The  New  Testament  P  redicts  thatcertainevents  will  happen  in  the 
Future, 

7.  The  ReliabilityoftheOld  Testament  and  the  New  Testa menta re 
clear  indications  of  the  accuracy  ofthe  New  Testament, 

8.  J  esus  C hrist did  Notfail  in  His  missionon  Earth. 

9.  Jesus  Christ  P  re-existed,  This  means  thatHeexisted  BEFORE 
the  Creation  ofthe  World. 

10.  When  C  hristians  worship  J  esus  C  hrist,  they  are  NOT  worshiping 
another  Human  being, 

11.  J  esus  C  hrist  did  notbecomeGod  by  performing  good  works, 

12.  Christians  cannotperform  good  works  in  order  to  go  to  Heaven.  Those 
who  wantto  find  God  mustadmit  they  are  notable  to  be  PerfectorHoly, 
and  that  they  need  the  helpofGod  to  helpthemgetridoftheirSins, 


14,  More  than  500  M illion  Christians  around  the  world  todayare  NOT 
Roman  Catholic,  The  Vaticandoes  NOT  speakfor  C  hristianity  in  many 
situations. 


Concerning  Christians  and  Christianity  (2) 

1 5.  Judas  did  NOT  die  in  the  place  of  Jesus  Christ  on 
the  cross. 

16.  Jesus  Christ  had  no  motive  to  escape  his  fate.  Jesus  Christ 
was  born  to  communicate  His  message  of  Hope  and 
Redemption  for  mankind. 

1 7.  Without  the  Blood  of  Jesus,  it  would  be  impossible  for  those 
who  believe  in  Jesus  Christ  to  be  saved,  to  have  Eternal  Life. 

18.  Christians  worship  ONE  God,  NOT  three  Gods, 

19.  InTrue  Christianity,  Historically,  the Trinity  is  = 


a)  God  the  Father 

b)  God  the  Son 

c)  God  the  Holy  Spirit 


20.  The  worship  of  Angels  orCreated  Beings,  orCreatures  oranything 
exceptGod  (God  the  Father,  God  the  Son  [Jesus  Christ], 

and  God  the  Holy  Spirit,  isforbidden. 

21.  The  Trinity  IS  NOT  =  Mary,  J  oseph  and  J  esus 

22.  The  Trinity  is  NOT  =  J  esus,  J  oseph  and  God  the  Father 

23.  Gabriel  is  NOTanothernameforJesus  Christ. 


24.  Anyone  can  become  a  Christian  if  they  wantto. 

25.  Christianity  IS  notsomething  thatcan  bedone  EXTERNALLY. 
A  person  is  a  Christian  becauseof  whatthey  believe  in  theirHeart, 
inside  of  them.Theirown  sincerity  before  God  is  the  true  test. 

26. Those  who  acceptan  electronic  mark[666]  forthe  purchaseofgoods, 
in  their  right  hand  orforehead  are  NOT  able  to  become  Christians. 


Concerning  Christians  and  Christianity  (3) 

Peopleare  innocent  if  they  do  not  know  and  have  no  wayofknowing  that 
theyaredoing  wrong.The  Christian  God  places  theknowledgeofgood 
and  bad  in  the  hearts  of  each  and  every  individual. 

NooneexceptGod  is  Holy. 

Itis  wrong  to  murder  innocent  people. 

It is  wrong  to  kill  Christians  who  have  notactively  harmed  anyone. 

People  are  NOT  Christians  simply  because  theirfamily  is  "Christian". 

Peopleare  NOT  Christian  because  they  are  born  INTO  a  "Christian"family. 

Apersoncannotbecomea  Christian  "AUTOMATICALLY". 

Noonecan  beBORN  a  Christian,  butbecominga  true  Christian  will  guarantee 
Eternal  Life,  in  Heaven  and  with  God. 

ThePresumptionthata  person  is  a  Christian  simply  because  they  are 
going  into  a  Church  and  sitting  there  is  False. 

Churches  have  people  inside  of  them  thatare  NOT  Christian,  butthey 
wantto  learn  more  aboutGod. 

A  Church,  or  a  Church  Official  CANNOT  MAKE  anyone  a  Christian. 

Christians  do  NOT  convertanyone  by  Force,  because  this  action  is  a 
violationoftheCHOlCES  thatGOD  alone  is  abletomake.To  force others  would 
suggestthatGod  is  weak,  and  cannotdothis  by  H imself.  The  Christian  God  has 
much  Strength  butuses  ittoshow  loveand  help  in  this  life,  notunkindness. 

OnlyGod  could  FORCE  someone  to  do  something  againsttheir  will,  and 
the  C  reator  of  the  Universedoes  NOT  behavein  thatmanner. 

The  Choice  of  whatto  believe  or  notto  believe  is  up  to  Each  individual, 
who  mustmake  uptheirown  mind,  oftheirfree  will. 

There  is  no  way  to  impose  Christianity  on  anyone  by  Force. 


Conversions  by  Force  to  Islam  are  NOTrecognized  byGOD  or  Christians. 


Concerning  Christians  and  Christianity  (4) 

Those  who  are  converted  from  Christianity  to  Islam  by  Force 
or  coercion,  are  Still  Christian,  AND  STILL  considered  Christian. 


Once  a  person  is  recognized  by  God  as  a  genuine  Christian,  they  are 
"sealed"  permanently.  There  is  no  way  for  any  Human  to  change  this. 

Forcing  any  Christian  to  say  that  they  convert  or  accept  Islam  simply 
makes  that  Christian  to  state  something  which  is  FALSE.  There  is 
no  such  thing  as  Genuine  conversion  that  God  can  recognize 
OUT  of  Christianity,  if  that  person  was  a  Christian. 

To  suggest  that  Christians  could  be  converted  by  Force,  actually 
means  (signifies)  that  there  are  actions  that  humans  can  take  that  can 
FORCE  God  somehow  to  UNDO  or  ALTER  what  He  has  done.  This  is 
not  the  case.  Actions  that  Humans  Force  other  Humans  to  take  are 
not  recognized  by  God  as  a  true  Change  of  Mind,  ora  Change  of  Heart 

Once  a  person  becomes  a  Christian,  Ali  of  their  sins  (past,  present, 
and  future)  are  forgiven.  They  are  reconciled  to  God  for  Eternity,  and 
nothing  can  change  this.  Forced  Conversionsto  Islam  are  not  considered 
Valid  eitherby  God  or  Christians.  No  one  can  undo  in  the  Heart  of 
a  person,  what  God  can  do.  The  link  between  a  Christian  and  God 
is  a  link  that  Cannot  be  broken.  Saying  anything  to  the  contrary 
will  not  alter  or  change  this. 

Christians  do  not  Depend  on  their  sanctuaries  or  Church  buildings 
in  order  to  meet  with  God.  Harming  a  building  againsttheGod  who  made 
the  Universe  is  not  a  genuine  sign  of  success  or  progress.  Christians 
simply  make  use  of  any  buildings.  Christians  are  able  to  meet  and 
pray  and  talk  to  God  by  themselves,  wit         a  Church  building  and 
without  a  Priest  or  Pastor.  God  is  always  with  them. 

Harming  a  Church  building  simply  proves  that  some  people  are  afraid 
of  Church  Buildings.  That  is  all.  The  Earliest  Christians  did  not  have 
Churches  or  Buildings  for  Hundreds  of  Years. 

Harming  a  Church  Building  does  not  harm  God,  and  itdoes  not  harm 
Christians.  It  simply  makes  them  go  and  use  a  different  building,  or 
to  meet  without  one. 


Concerning  Christians  and  Christianity  (5) 

Some  people  have  not  examined  churches  very  much.  MANY  are 
very  simple  and  do  NOT  have  decorations  or  much  inside  of  them. 
In  Christianity,  this  is  intentional.  This  symbolism  is  on  purpose, 
intending  to  signify  that  the  INNER  LIFE  of  the  Christian,  is  what  is 
importantto  God,  and  NOT  the  building  in  which  people  worship. 

Man  looks  on  the  external  and  outward  appearance.  GOD  looks  on 
the  inner  heart  of  each  individual. 

There  would  be  no  reason  for  anyone  to  become  upset,  if  they  did 
not  think  that  Christianity  was  making  progress.  Those  who  are  upset 
are  upset  because  Christianity  has  answers,  reasons  and  arguments 
that  do  not  seem  to  be  defeated.  God  is  big  enough  to  defend  himself. 

If  Christianity  is  false,  it  should  be  possible  to  explain  to  Christians 
why  and  how  Christianity  is  false.  Killing  or  harming  Christians  is  only 
an  excuse,  a  method  of  hiding  from  the  reality  that  intellectual 
conversation  and  explanations  of  those  who  are  violent  do  NOT  have 
the  answers  to  defend  with  kindness  or  reason  what  they  believe. 

Christians  believe  that  almost  all  violence  is  a  waste  of  time.  It  does 
not  accomplish  what  it  is  "supposed"  to  accomplish.  Those  who 
have  arguments  are  able  to  advance  those  and  explain  them  to  others 
Those  who  do  not  use  violence  instead.  This  method  does  not 
convince  Christians  or  others  to  adopt  methods  of  violence. 

People  become  like  the  God  they  serve.  If  the  God  they  serve  is 
unkind  and  unmerciful,  that  is  what  the  followers  become.  If  the  God 
being  worshiped  is  cruel  and  mean  to  women  and  children,  then  that 
is  what  the  followers  of  that  God  usually  will  become. 
Jesus  Christ  is  love.  Christians  try  to  be  loving. 


People  have  the  option  of  accepting  to  believe  in  the  Teachings  of 
Jesus  Christ  in  the  New  Testament  or  rejecting  those  teaching.  The 
choice  in  this  life  is  up  to  each  person.  God  is  the  one  who  makes 
His  own  rules.  Thankfully,  the  God  of  this  world  decided  to  use 
Love  and  kindness  to  explain  Himself  so  that  all  of  us  would  have 
a  chance  to  learn  and  to  experience  the  unconditional  love  of  Jesus 
Christ.   (books  are  listed  in  this  Ebook.  Those  who  want  to  refute 
Christianity  may  want  to  start  by  refuting  the  books  listed  in  this  PDF) 


Concerning  Christians  and  Christianity  (6) 

True  Christians  are  NOT  afraid  to  have  conversations  with  those  who  are  not 
Christians.  Christians  are  NOT  afraid  to  have  conversations  with  those  who  are 
islamic  or  from  any  other  faith. 

Christians  are  NOT  afraid  to  talk  aboutthe  weakness  of  Christianity,  ifthatis  a  topic 
someone  else  wants  to  discuss. 

Christians  willnotstoneyou  orharmyou  becauseyou  disagree  with  them. 

Christian  will  notmakeyouslave  IF  you  do  NOT  convertto  Christianity. 

Those  who  truly  believe  in  theTRUTH  ofwhattheyclaim  to  believe  are  NOT  afraid 
to  discuss  the  contentof  whatthey  believe  with  other  people. 

Christians  mayshare  with  you  thatyou  are  not  100%  perfectand  Holy,  and  Christians 
will  Admitand  acknowledge  thatTHEY  are  NOT  perfectorHoly. 

Christians  admitthattheyneed  asavior,  thattheycannotbegoodenough  on  their 
own.andthattheycannotperform  ENOUGH  good  and  HOLY  actions  to  pleaseGod. 
Thatis  thestarting  pointforanyonetobecomea  Christian. 

Those  who  engage  Christians  in  discussions  aboutreligion  should  be  willing  to  look 
atthe  history,  the  archeology,  the  science  and  all  of  the  aspects  of  religion  and  the 
books  thattheyuseordefend.  Thatis  simplybeing  honest.  And  those  who  seek 
spiritual  truth  are  NOT  afraid  to  discuss  honestiy  issues  of  religion. 

IF  GOD  is  GOD,  then  GOD  will  STILL  be  GOD  after  a  conversation  takes  place. 
Those  who  follow  God  should  be  willing  to  think  and  use  the  mind  thatGod  gave  to 
them.  IF  God  gave  people  a  mind,  HE  expects  them  to  use  it.  Discussions  are  part 
of  the  use  of  the  mind. 


There  is  a  lot  of  history  about  OTHER  religions  thatcan  befound  in  the  West.  In 
other  nations,  FEAR  ofbeing  wrong  induces  and  provokes  censorship.  But history 
can  be  proven  and  demonstrated.  The  Dead  Sea  Scrolls  were  found  in  1947-48. 
Those  scrolls  contained  the  J  ewish  Old  Testament.  They  were  dated  scientifically 
tobe  200yearsOLDER  than  the  time  of  J  esus  Christ.  The  J  ewish  Old  Testament 
has  NOTbeenchangedoraltered.This  issimplya  scientific  and  historic  Fact. 

God  Preserves  His  Word.  His  word  is  the  Old  and  New  Testament.  IF  you  are 
seeking  truth,  what  do  you  have  to  fear  from  Truth  ? 


Concerning  History  and  the  Early  Church 

Christians  do  NOT  pray  to  MARY.  The  Bible  never  teaches  to  Pray 
to  Mary.  Mary  was  born  a  human  sinner,  and  became  a  Christ-follower. 

Prayers  to  ANY  Human  (Except  Jesus  Christ,  who  was  God 
who  became  Human  for  a  short  time)  is  IDOLATRY 

Christians  do  not  pray  To  Statues,  which  is  IDOLATRY 

Christians  do  not  pray  To  Icons,  which  is  a  Graven  Image, 
which  is  ALSO  IDOLATRY. 

The  Early  Church  and  the  Early  Christians  did  NOT  pray  to  Mary. 

The  Early  Church  and  the  Early  Christians  did  NOT  pray  to  Saints, 
as  this  would  be  blasphemy,  and  taking  worship  and  adoration 
away  from  God. 

It  is  the  Mediation  of  Jesus  Christ  alone  which  serves  to 
communicate  between  God  and  Man,  and  NOT  any  other  Human. 

Christians  know  which  books  of  the  Bible  are  part  of  the  Bible  and 
belong  in  the  Bible.  There  is  a  great  deal  of  evidence  and 
documentation  over  the  whole  world  for  the  conclusion,  about 
which  books  belong  in  the  Bible. 

Some  books  mav  help  to  clarifv  or  explain  (these  are  Free  Books): 


Forthose  who  read  English: 

1)  The  Seventh  General  Council  (held  787  AD)  in  which  the 
Worship  of  Images  was  established,   by  John  Mendham  -    1850 

2)  Image  worship  in  the  Church  of  Rome  by  James  Endell  Tyler 

3)  Primitive  Christian  Worship  by  James  Endell  Tyler 

4)  The  worship  of  Mary  [proven  to  be  Unbiblical] 
by  James  Endell  Tyler 


THESE  BOOKS  are  AVAILABLE  For  FREE  ONLINE 


Concerning  History  and  the  Early  Church 

We  recommend,  foryour  potential  consideration, 
the  following  books: 


1)  The  Seventh  General  Council  (held  787  AD)  in  which  the 
Worship  of  Images  was  established,  with  copious  notes 
from  the  Caroline  books  compiled  by  order  of 
Charlemagne    by  Rev  John  Mendham  -    1850 


2)  Image  worship  in  the  Church  of  Rome  by  James  Endell  Tyler 

The  image-worship  of  the  Church  of  Rome  :  proved  to  be  contrary 
to  Holy  Scripture  and  the  faith  and  discipline  of  the  primitive  church 
and  to  invoive  contradictory  and  irreconcilable  doctrines  within  the 
Church  of  Rome  itself  (1847) 


3)  Primitive  Christian  Worship  by  James  Endell  Tyler 

Primitive  christian  worship,  or,  The  evidence  of  Holy  Scripture  and 
the  church,  concerning  the  invocation  of  saints  and  angels,  and  the 
blessed  Virgin  Mary  (1840) 


4)  The  worship  of  Mary  by  James  Endell  Tyler 


5)  The  Pope  of  Rome  and  the  popes  of  the  Oriental  Orthodox 
Church 

by  Caesarious  Tondini  (1875)  also  makes  for  interesting  reading, 
even  though  it  is  a  Roman  Catholic  work  which  was  approved 
with  the  Nihil  Obstat  (not  indexed  by  the  inquisition)  notice. 


THESE  BOOKS  are  AVAILABLE  For  FREE  ONLINE 


Concerning  History  and  the  Roman  Catholic  Church 


Historic  Information  on  the  Roman  Catholic  Church 
can  be  found  -  in  online  searches  -  under  the  words: 

papai,  roman  catholic,  papist,  popish, 
romanist,  vatican,  popery,  romish, 

There  are  many  free  Ebooks  available 
online  and  at  Google  that  cover  these  topics. 


There  is  of  course  the  Standard 

works  on  the  proven  history  of  the  Vatican: 

The  Two  Babylons  by  Alexander  Hislop,  which  uses 
more  than  200  ancient  Latin  and  Greek  sources. 

The  Roman  Schism  illustrated  from  the  Records 


of  the  Earlv  Roman  Catholic  Church 


by  Rev.  Perceval. 


Those  who  have  trouble  with  Vatican  documents  concerning 
early  Church  Councils  should  conduct  their  own  research 
into  a  document  called  the  "Donation  of  Constantine", 
which  was  the  false  land  grant  from  the  Roman  Emperors 
to  the  Vatican. 


Saved  -  How  To  become  a 

Christian 

how  to  be  saved 

A  Christian  is  someone 

who  believes  the 

following 


Steps  to  Take  'm  order  to  become  a 

true  Christian,  to  be  Saved  &  Have  a 

real  relationship  &  genuine 

experience  with  the  real  God 

Read,  understand,  accept  and 

believe  the  following  verses  from 

the  Bible: 

1.  AM  men  are  sinners  and  fail  short 
of  God's  perfect  Standard 

Romans  3:  23  states  that 

For  all  have  sinned,  and  come  short  of 

the  glory  of  God; 


2.  Sin  -  which  is  imperfection  in  our 
lives  -  denies  us  eternal  life  with 
God.  But  God  sent  his  son  Jesus 
Christ  as  a  gift  to  give  us  freely 
Eternal  Life  by  believing  on  Jesus 
Christ. 

Romans  6:  23  states 
For  the  wages  of  sin  is  death;  but  the 
gift  of  God  is  eternal  life  through  Jesus 
Christ  our  Lord. 

3.  You  can  be  saved,  and  you  are 
saved  by  Faith  in  Jesus  Christ.  You 
cannot  be  saved  by  your  good 
works,  because  they  are  not  "good 
enough".  But  God's  good  work  of 
sending  Jesus  Christ  to  save  us, 
and  our  response  of  believing  -  of 
having  faith  -  in  Jesus  Christ,  that  is 
what  saves  each  of  us. 

Ephesians  2:  8-9  states 

8  For  by  grace  are  ye  saved  through 
faith;  and  that  not  of  yourselves:  it  is 
the  gift  of  God: 

9  Not  of  works,  lest  any  man  should 
boast. 


4.God  did  not  wait  for  us  to  become 
perfect  in  order  to  accept  or 
unconditionally  love  us.  He  sent 
Jesus  Christ  to  save  us,  even 
though  we  are  sinners.  So  Jesus 
Christ  died  to  save  us  from  our  sins, 
and  to  save  us  from  eternal 
separation  from  God. 

Romans  5:8  states 

But  God  commendeth  his  love  toward 
us,  in  that,  while  we  were  yet  sinners, 
Christ  died  for  us. 

5.  God  loved  the  world  so  much  that 
He  sent  his  one  and  only  Son  to  die, 
so  that  by  believing  in  Jesus  Christ, 
we  obtain  Eternal  Life. 

John  3:  16  states 

For  God  so  loved  the  world,  that  he 
gave  his  only  begotten  Son,  that 
whosoever  believeth  in  him  should  not 
perish,  but  have  everlasting  life. 

6.  If  you  believe  in  Jesus  Christ,  and 
in  what  he  did  on  the  Cross  for  us, 
by  dying  there  for  us,  you  know  for  a 


fact  that  you  have  been  given 
Eternal  Life. 

I  John  5:  13  states 
These  things  have  I  written  unto  you 
that  believe  on  the  name  of  the  Son  of 
God;  that  ye  may  know  that  ye  have 
eternal  life,  and  that  ye  may  believe  on 
the  name  of  the  Son  of  God. 

7.  If  you  confess  your  sins  to  God, 
he  hears  you  take  this  step,  and  you 
can  know  for  sure  that  He  does  hear 
you,  and  his  response  to  you  is  to 
forgive  you  of  those  sins,  so  that 
they  are  not  remembered  against 
you,  and  not  attributed  to  you  ever 
again. 

I  John  1 :  9  states 

If  we  confess  our  sins,  he  is  faithful  and 

just  to  forgive  us  our  sins,  and  to 

cleanse  us  from  all  unrighteousness. 

If  you  believe  these  verses,  or  want 

to  believe  these  verses,  pray  the 

following: 

"  Lord  Jesus,  I  need  you.  Thank  you 

for  dying  on  the  cross  for  my  sins.  I 

open  the  door  of  my  life  and  ask  you 


to  save  me  from  my  sins  and  give 
me  eternal  life.  Thank  you  for 
forgiving  me  of  my  sins  and  giving 
me  eternal  life.  I  receive  you  as  my 
Savior  and  Lord.  Please  take  control 
of  the  throne  of  my  life.  Make  me  the 
kind  of  person  you  want  me  to  be. 
Help  me  to  understand  you,  and  to 
know  you  and  to  learn  how  to  follow 
you.  Free  me  from  all  of  the  things  in 
my  life  that  prevent  me  from 
following  you.  In  the  name  of  the 
one  and  only  and  true  Jesus  Christ  I 
ask  all  these  things  now,  Amen". 

Does  this  prayer  express  your  desire  to 
know  God  and  to  want  to  know  His  love 
?  If  you  are  sincere  in  praying  this 
prayer,  Jesus  Christ  comes  into  your 
heart  and  your  life,  just  as  He  said  he 
would. 

It  often  takes  courage  to  decide  to 
become  a  Christian.  It  is  the  right 
decision  to  make,  but  It  is  difficult  to 
fight  against  part  of  ourselves  that 
wants  to  hang  on,  or  to  find  against 
that  part  of  our  selves  that  has 
trouble  changing.  The  good  news  is 


that  you  do  not  need  to  change 
yourself.  Just  Cry  out  to  God,  pray 
and  he  will  begin  to  change  you. 
God  does  not  expect  you  to  become 
perfect  before  you  come  to  Him.  Not 
at  alL.this  is  why  He  sent  Jesus...so 
that  we  would  not  have  to  become 
perfect  before  being  able  to  know 
God. 

Steps  to  take  once  you  have  asked 
Jesus  to  come  into  you  r  life 

Find  the  following  passages  in  the 
Bible  and  begin  to  read  them: 

1.  Read  Psalm  23  (in  the  middle  of 
the  Old  Testament  -  the  1st  half  of 
the  Bible) 

2.  Read  Psalm  91 

3.  Read  the  Books  in  the  New 
Testament  (in  the  Bible)  of  John, 
Romans  &  I  John 

4.  Tell  someone  of  your  prayer  and 
your  seeking  God.  Share  that  with 
someone  close  to  you. 

5.  Obtain  some  of  the  books  on  the 
list  of  books,  and  begin  to  read 


them,  so  that  you  can  understand 
more  about  God  and  how  He  works. 

6.  Pray,  that  is  -  just  talk  to  and  with 
God,  thank  Him  for  saving  you,  and 
tell  him  your 

fears  and  concerns,  and  ask  him  for 
help  and  guidance. 

7.  email  or  tell  someone  about  the 
great  decision  you  have  made  today 
m 


Does  the  "being  saved" 
process  only  work  for  those 
who  believe  ? 

For  the  person  who  is  not  yet 
saved,  their  understanding  of 
1)  their  state  of  sin  and  2)  God's 
personal  love  and  care  for 
them,  and  His  desire  and 
ability  to  save  them....is  what 
enables  anyone  to  become 
saved. 

So  yes,  the  "being  saved" 
process  works  only  for  those 


who  believe  in  J  esus  Christ 
and  Him  only,  and  place  their 
faith  in  Him  and  in  His  work 
done  on  the  Cross. 

■  ■■and  if  so  ,  then  how  does 
believing  save  a  person? 

Believing  saves  a  person  because  of 
what  it  allows  God  to  do  in  the  Heart 
and  Soul  of  that  person. 

But  it  is  not  simply  the  fact  of  a 
"belief".  The  issue  is  not  having 
"belief"  but  rather  what  we  have  a 
belief  about. 

IF  a  person  believes  in  Salvation  by 
Faith  Alone  in  Jesus  Christ  (ask  us 
by  email  if  this  is  not  clear),  then 
That  belief  saves  them.  Why  ? 
because  they  are  magical  ? 
No,  because  of  the  sovereignty  of 
God,  because  of  what  God  does  to 
them,  when  they  ask  him  into  their 
heart  &  life.  When  a  person  decides 
to  place  their  faith  in  Jesus  Christ 
and  ask  Him  to  forgive  them  of 


their  sins  and  invite  Jesus  Christ 
into  their  life  &  heart,  this  is  what 
saves  them  -  because  of  what  God 
does  for  them  at  that  moment  in 
time. 

At  that  moment  in  time  when  they 
sincerely  believe  and  ask  God  to 
save  them  (as  described  above), 
God  takes  the  life  of  that  person, 
and  in  accordance  with  the  will  of 
that  human,  having  requested  God 
to  save  them  from  their  sins  through 
Jesus  Christ  -  God  takes  that 
person's  life  and  sins  [all  sins  past, 
present  and  future],  and  allocates 
them  to  the  category:  of  "one  of 
those  people  who  Accepted  the  Free 
Gift  of  Eternal  Salvation  that  God 
offers". 

From  that  point  forward,  their  sins 
are  no  longer  counted  against  them, 
because  that  is  an  account  that  is 
paid  by  the  shed  blood  of  Jesus 
Christ.  And  there  is  no  person  that 
could  ever  sin  so  much,  that  God's 
love  would  not  be  good  enough  for 
them,  or  that  would  somehow  not  be 
able  to  be  covered  by  the  penalty  of 


death  that  Jesus  Christ  paid  the 
price  for.  (otherwise,  sin  would  be 
more  powerful  than  Jesus  Christ  - 
which  is  not  true). 

Sometimes,  People  have  trouble 
believing  in  Jesus  Christ  because  of 
two  extremes: 

First  the  extreme  that  they  are  not 
sinners  (usually,  this  means  that  a 
person  has  not  committed  a  "serious" 
sin,  such  as  "murder",  but  God  says  that 
all  sins  separates  us  from  God,  even 
supposedly-small  sins.  We  -  as  humans 
-  tend  to  evaluate  sin  into  more  serious 
and  less  serious  categories,  because  we 
do  not  understand  just  how  serious 
"small"  sin  is). 

Since  we  are  all  sinners,  we  all  have 
a  need  for  God,  in  order  to  have 
eternal  salvation. 

Second  the  extreme  that  they  are 
notgood  enough  for  Jesus  Christ  to 
save  them.  This  is  basically  done  by 
those  who  reject  the  Free  offer  of 
Salvation  by  Christ  Jesus  because 
those  people  are  -literally  -  unwilling 


to  believe.  After  death,  they  will 
believe,  but  they  can  only  chose 
Eternal  Life  BEFORE  they  die. 
The  fact  is  that  all  of  us,  are  not 
good  enough  for  Jesus  Christ  to 
save  them.  That  is  why  Paul  wrote  in 
the  Bible  "For  all  have  sinned,  and 
come  short  of  the  glory  of  God" 
(Romans  3:23). 

Thankfully,  that  is  not  the  end  of  the 
story,  because  he  also  wrote  "  For  the 
wages  of  sin  is  death;  but  the  gift  of  God 
is  eternal  life  through  Jesus  Christ  our 
Lord. "(Romans  6:  23) 


That  Free  offer  of  salvation  is 
clarified  in  the  following  passage: 

John  3: 16  For  God  so  loved  the 
world,  that  he  gave  his  only 
begotten  Son,  that  whosoever 
believeth  in  him  should  not  perish, 
but  have  everlasting  life. 
17  For  God  sent  not  his  Son  into  the 
world  to  condemn  the  world;  but 
that  the  world  through  him  might  be 
saved. 


Prayers  that  count 

The  prayers  that  God  hears 

We  don't  make  the  rules  any  more 
than  you  do.  We  just  want  to  help 
others  know  how  to  reach  God,  and 
know  that  God  cares  about  them 
personally. 

The  only  prayers  that  make  it  to 
Heaven  where  God  dwells  are  those 
prayers  that  are  prayed  directly  to 
Him  "through  Jesus  Christ"  or  "in 
the  name  of  Jesus  Chrisf. 

God  hears  our  prayers  because  we 
obey  the  method  that  God  has 
established  for  us  to  be  able  to 
reach  him.  If  we  want  Him  to  hear 
us,  then  we  must  use  the  methods 
that  He  has  given  us  to 
communicate  with  Him. 


And  he  explains  -  in  the  New 
Testament  -  what  that  method  is: 
talking  to  God  (praying)  in 
accordance  with  God's  will  -  and 
coming  to  Him  in  the  name  of  Jesus 
Christ.  Here  are  some  examples  of 
that  from  the  New  Testament: 

(Acts  3:6)  Then  Peter  said,  Silver  and 
gold  have  I  none;  but  such  as  I  have  give 
I  thee:  In  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ  of 
Nazareth  rise  up  and  walk. 

(Acts  16:18)  And  this  did  she  many  days. 
But  Paul,  being  grieved,  turned  and  said 
to  the  spirit,  I  command  thee  in  the 
name  of  Jesus  Christ  to  come  out  of  her. 
And  he  came  out  the  same  hour. 

(Acts  9:27)  But  Barnabas  took  him,  and 
brought  him  to  the  apostles,  and 
declared  unto  them  how  he  had  seen  the 
Lord  in  the  way,  and  that  he  had  spoken 
to  him,  and  how  he  had  preached  boldly 
at  Damascus  in  the  name  of  Jesus. 


(2  Cor  3:4)  And  such  trust  have  we 
through  Christ  to  God-ward:  (i.e. 
toward  God) 

(Gal  4:7)  Wherefore  thou  art  no  more  a 
servant,  but  a  son;  and  if  a  son,  then  an 
heir  of  God  through  Christ. 
(Eph  2:7)  That  in  the  ages  to  come  he 
might  show  the  exceeding  [spiritual] 
riches  of  his  grace  in  his  kindness  toward 
us  through  Christ  Jesus. 

(Phil  4:7)  And  the  peace  of  God,  which 
passeth  all  understanding,  shall  keep 
your  hearts  and  minds  through  Christ 
Jesus. 

(Acts  4:2)  Being  grieved  that  they  taught 
the  people,  and  preached  through  Jesus 
the  resurrection  from  the  dead. 

(Rom  1:8)  First,  I  thank  my  God 
through  Jesus  Christ  for  you  all,  that 
your  faith  is  spoken  of  throughout  the 
whole  world. 

(Rom  6:11)  Likewise  reckon  ye  also 
yourselves  to  be  dead  indeed  unto  sin, 


but  alive  unto  God  through  Jesus  Christ 
our  Lord. 

(Rom  6:23)  For  the  wages  of  sin  is  death; 
but  the  gift  of  God  is  eternal  life  through 
Jesus  Christ  our  Lord. 

(Rom  15:17)  I  have  therefore  whereof  I 
may  glory  through  Jesus  Christ  in  those 
things  which  pertain  to  God. 

(Rom  16:27)  To  God  only  wise,  be  glory 
through  Jesus  Christ  for  ever.  Amen. 

(1  Pet  4:11)  ...if  any  man  minister,  let 
him  do  it  as  of  the  ability  which  God 
giveth:  that  God  in  all  things  may  be 
glorified  through  Jesus  Christ,  to  whom 
be  praise  and  dominion  for  ever  and 
ever.  Amen. 

(Gal  3:14)  That  the  blessing  of  Abraham 
might  come  on  the  Gentiles  through 
Jesus  Christ;  that  we  might  receive  the 
promise  of  the  [Holy]  Spirit  through 
faith. 


(Titus  3:6)  Which  he  shed  on  us 
abundantly  through  Jesus  Christ  our 
Saviour; 

(Heb  13:21)  Make  you  perfect  in  every 
good  work  to  do  his  will,  working  in  you 
that  which  is  wellpleasing  in  his  sight, 
through  Jesus  Christ;  to  whom  be  glory 
for  ever  and  ever.  Amen. 


Anyone  who  has  guestions  is  encouraged  to  contact  us  bv 
email,  with  the  address  that  is  posted  on  our  website. 


Note  for  Foreign  Language  and 
International  Readers  &  Users 


Foreign  Language  Versions  of  the 
Introduction  and  Postcript/Afterword 
will  be  included  (hopefully)  in  future 
editions. 


IF  a  person  wanted  to  become  a  Christian,  what  would  they  pray  ? 


God,  I  am  praying  this  to  you  so  that  you  will  help  me.  Please  help 
me  to  want  to  know  you  better.  Please  help  me  to  become  a  Christian. 

God  I  admit  that  I  am  not  perfect.  I  understand  that  you  cannot  allow 
anyone  into  Heaven  who  is  not  perfect  and  Holy.  I  understand  that 
if  I  believe  in  Jesus  Christ  and  in  what  He  did,  that  God  you  will 
see  my  life  through  the  sacrifice  of  Jesus  Christ,  and  that  this  will 
allow  me  to  have  eternal  life  and  know  that  I  am  going  to  Heaven. 

God,  I  admit  that  I  have  sin  and  things  in  my  life  that  are  not  perfect. 
I  know  I  have  sinned  in  my  life.  Please  forgive  me  of  my  sins. 
I  believe  that  Jesus  Christ  is  the  Son  of  God,  that  He  came  to  Earth 
to  save  those  who  ask  Him,  and  that  He  died  to  pay  the  penalty  for 
all  of  my  sins. 

I  understand  that  Jesus  physically  died  and  physically  arose  from  the 
dead,  and  that  God  can  forgive  me  because  of  the  death  and 
resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ.  I  thank  you  for  dying  for  me,  and  for 
paying  the  price  for  my  sins.  I  accept  to  believe  in  you,  and  I  thank 
you  Lord  God  from  all  of  my  heart  for  your  help  and  for  sending 
your  Son  to  die  and  raise  from  the  Dead. 

I  pray  that  you  would  help  me  to  read  your  word  the  Bible.  I 
renounce  anything  in  my  life,  my  thoughts  and  my  actions  that  is 
not  from  you,  and  I  do  this  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ.  Help  me 
to  not  be  spiritually  deceived.  Help  me  to  grow  and  learn  how  to  have 
a  strong  Christian  walk  for  you,  and  to  be  a  good  example,  with  your 
help.  Help  me  to  have  and  develop  a  love  of  your  word  the  Bible,  and 
please  bring  to  my  life,  people  and  situations  that  will  help  me  to 
understand  how  to  live  my  life  as  your  servant.  Help  me  to  learn 
how  to  share  the  good  news  with  those  who  may  be  willing  to  learn 
or  to  know.  I  ask  these  things  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ,  and 
I  thank  you  for  what  you  have  done  for  me,  Amen. 


Please  Remember:  Christianity  is  NEVER  forced.  No  one  can 

force  anyone  to  become  a  Christian.  God  does  NOT  recognize 

any  desire  for  Him,  unless  it  is  genuine  and  motivated  from 

the  inside  of  each  of  us. 


Prayers  for  help  to  God 

In  MANY  LANGUAGES 

For  YOU,  for  US,  for  your  Family 


Dear  God, 

Thank  you  that  this  New  Testament  has  been  released  so 

that  we  are  able  to  learn  more  about  you. 

Please  help  the  people  responsible  for  making  this 
Electronic  book  available.  Please  help  them  to  be  able  to 
work  fast,  and  make  more  Electronic  books  available 
Please  help  them  to  have  all  the  resources,  the  money,  the 
strength  and  the  time  that  they  need  in  order  to  be  able  to 
keep  working  for  You. 

Please  help  those  that  are  part  of  the  team  that  help  them  on 
an  everyday  basis.  Please  give  them  the  strength  to  continue 
and  give  each  of  them  the  spiritual  understanding  for  the 
work  that  you  want  them  to  do.  Please  help  each  of  them  to 
not  have  fear  and  to  remember  that  you  are  the  God  who 
answers  prayer  and  who  is  in  charge  of  everything. 

I  pray  that  you  would  encourage  them, 

and  that  you  protect  them,  and  the  work  &  ministry  that  they 


are  engaged  in.  I  pray  that  you  would  protect  them  from 
the  Spiritual  Forces  or  other  obstacles  that  could  harm  them 
or  slow  them  down. 

Please  help  me  when  I  use  this  New  Testament  to  also  think 
of  the  people  who  have  made  this  edition  available,  so  that  I 
can  pray  for  them  and  so  they  can  continue  to  help  more 
people 

I  pray  that  you  would  give  me  a  love  of  your 
Holy  Word  (the  New  Testament),  and  that  you  would  give 
me  spiritual  wisdom  and  discernment  to  know  you  better 
and  to  understand  the  period  of  time  that  we  are  living  in. 
Please  help  me  to  know  how  to  deal  with  the  difficulties  that 
I  am  confronted  with  every  day.  Lord  God,  Help  me  to  want 
to  know  you  Better  and  to  want  to  help  other  Christians  in 
my  area  and  around  the  world. 

I  pray  that  you  would  give  the  Electronic  book  team  and 
those  who  work  on  the  website  and  those  who  help  them 
your  wisdom. 

I  pray  that  you  would  help  the  individual  members  of  their 
family  (and  my  family)  to  not  be  spiritually  deceived,  but 
to  understand  you  and  to  want  to  accept  and  follow  you  in 
every  way.  and  I  ask  you  to  do  these  things 
in  the  name  of  Jesus, 
Amen, 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


5  minutos  a  ayudar  excepto  otros  -  diferencie  eterno 


Dios  querido, 

gracias  que  se  ha  lanzado  este  nuevo  testamento 

de  modo  que  poder  aprender  mas  sobre  usted. 

Ayude  por  favor  a  la  gente  responsable  de  hacer  este  Ebook  disponible. 

Ayudele  por  favor  a  poder  trabajar  rapidamente,  y  haga  que 

mas  Ebooks  disponible  por  favor  le  ayuda  a  tener  todos  los  recursos, 

los  fondos,  la  fuerza  y  el  tiempo  que  necesitan 

para  poder  guardar  el  trabajar  para  usted. 

Ayude  por  favor  a  los  que  sean  parte  del  equipo  que 

les  ayuda  sobre  una  base  diaria.  Por  favor  deles  la  fuerza  para  continuar 

y  para  dar  a  cada  uno  de  ellos  la  comprension  espiritual  para  el  trabajo 
que  usted  quisiera  que  hicieran.  Ayude  por  favor  a  cada  uno  de 
ellos  a  no  tener  miedo  y  a  no  recordar  que  usted  es  el  dios  que  contesta 

a  rezo  y  que  esta  a  cargo  de  todo. 

Ruego  que  usted  los  animara,  y  que  usted  los  proteja, 

y  el  trabajo  y  el  ministerio  que  estan  contratados  adentro. 

Ruego  que  usted  los  protegiera  contra  las  fuerzas  espirituales 

que  podrian  danarlas  o  retardarlas  abajo.  Ayudeme  por  favor  cuando 

utilizo  este  nuevo  testamento  tambien  para  pensar  en  ellas  de  modo 

que  pueda  rogar  para  ellas  y  asi  que  pueden  continuar  ayudando  a  mas 
gente  Ruego  que  usted  me  diera  un  amor  de  su  palabra  santa, 
y  que  usted  me  daria  la  sabiduria  y  el  discernimiento  espirituales 

para  conocerle  mejor  y  para  entender  los  tiempos  que  estamos 
adentro  y  como  ocuparse  de  las  dificultades  que  me  enfrentan  con  cada  dia. 
Senor  God,  me  ayuda  a  desear  conocerle  mejor  y  desear  ayudar 
a  otros  cristianos  en  mi  area  y  alrededor  del  mundo.  Ruego  que  usted 
diera  el  Web  site  y  los  de  Ebook  el  equipo  y  los  que  trabajan  en 

que  les  ayudan  su  sabiduria.  Ruego  que  usted  ayudara  a  los  miembros 
individuales  de  su  familia  (y  de  mi  familia)  espiritual  a  no  ser  engahado, 

pero  entenderle  y  desear  aceptarle  y  seguir  de  cada  manera. 
y  pido  que  usted  haga  estas  cosas  en  el  nombre  de  Jesus,  amen,  i 


(por  que  lo  hacemos  tradujeron  esto  a  muchas  idiomas? 

Porque  necesitamos  a  tanto  rezo  como  sea  posible, 

y  a  tanta  gente  que  ruega  para  nosotros  y  el  este  ministerio 

tan  a  menudo  como  sea  posible.  Gracias  por  su  ayuda. 

El  rezo  es  una  de  las  mejores  maneras  que  usted  puede  ayudarnos  mas) 


Hungarian 


Hungary,  Hungarian,  Hungary  Hungarian  Maygar  PrayerJ  ezus  Krisztus 

Imadsag  hoz  Isten  Hogyan  viselkedni  Imadkozik  hoz  tud  hall  az  en  m 

viselkedni  kerdez  ad  segitszamomra 

Hungarian  -  Prayer  Requests  (praying  /  Talking)  to  God 
-  explained  in  Hungarian  Language 

Beszelo  -hoz  Isten  ,  a  Alkoto  -bol  Vilagegyetem  ,  a  Lord  : 

1.  amit  6n  akar  ad  szamomra  a  batorsag  -hoz  imadkozik  a 
dolog  amit  Vennem  kell  imadkozik 

2.  amit  6n  akar  ad  szamomra  a  batorsag  -hoz  hisz  6n  es 
elfogad  amit  akrsz  fgy  csinalni  eletemmel ,  helyett  en 
felemel  az  en  -m  sajat  akarat  (  szandek  )  fenti  one. 

3.  amit  6n  akar  add  nekem  segit  -hoz  nem  enged  az  en  -m 
fel  -bol  ismeretlen  -hoz  valik  a  kifogas  ,  vagy  a  alap  ertem 
nem  -hoz  szolgal  you. 

4.  amit  6n  akar  add  nekem  segit  -hoz  lat  es  -hoz  megtanul 
hogyan  viselkedni  volna  a  szellemi  ero  Szuksegem  van  ( 
atmeno  -a  szo  a  Biblia )  egy )  reszere  a  esemeny  elore  es  b 
betii )  reszere  az  en  -m  sajat  szemelyes  szellemi  utazas. 

5.  Amit  6n  Isten  akar  add  nekem  segit  -hoz  akar  -hoz  szolgal 
On  tobb 

6.  Amit  6n  akar  emlekeztet  en  -hoz  -val  beszel  6n 
prayerwhen  )  En  csalodott  vagy  -ban  nehezseg  ,  helyett 
kiprobalas  -hoz  hatarozat  dolog  en  magam  egyetlen  atmeno 
az  en  -m  emberi  ero. 


7.  Amit  6n  akar  add  nekem  Bolcsesseg  es  egy  sziv  toltott  - 
val  Bibliai  Bolcsesseg  azert  EN  akar  szolgal  6n  tobb 
hatekonyan. 

8.  Amit  6n  akar  adjon  nekem  egy  -t  vagy  -hoz  dolgozoszoba 
-a  szo  ,  a  Biblia  ,(  a  Uj  Vegrendelet  Evangelium  -bol  Budi ), 
-ra  egy  szemelyes  alap 

9.  amit  6n  akar  ad  segitseg  szamomra  azert  En  kepes  -hoz 
eszrevesz  dolog  -ban  Biblia  ( -a  szo  )  melyik  EN  tud 
szemelyesen  elmond  -hoz  ,  es  amit  akarat  segitsen  nekem  ert 
amit  akrsz  en  -hoz  csinal  eletemben. 

10.  Amit  6n  akar  add  nekem  nagy  itelokepesseg  ,  -hoz  ert 
hogyan  viselkedni  megmagyaraz  -hoz  masikak  ki  6n  ,  es 
amit  EN  akar  kepesnek  lenni  megtenni  megtanul  hogyan 
viselkedni  megtanul  es  tud  hogyan  viselkedni  kiall  mellett 
6n  es  en  -a  szo  (  a  Biblia ) 

1 1 .  Amit  6n  akar  hoz  emberek  (  vagy  websites  )  eletemben 
ki  akar  -hoz  tud  6n  es  en  ,  ki  van  eros  -ban  -uk  pontos 
megertes  -bol  6n  ( Isten  );  es  Amit  6n  akar  hoz  emberek  ( 
vagy  websites  )  eletemben  ki  lesz  kepes  -hoz  batorit  en  -hoz 
pontosan  megtanul  hogyan  viselkedni  feloszt  a  Biblia  a  szo  - 
bol  igazsag  (2  Komocsin  215:). 

12.  Amit  6n  akar  segitsen  nekem  -hoz  megtanul  -hoz  volna 
nagy  megertes  korulbelul  melyik  Biblia  valtozat  van  legjobb 
,  melyik  van  a  leg— bb  pontos  ,  es  melyik  birtokol  a  leg— bb 
szellemi  ero  &  ero  ,  es  melyik  valtozat  egyeztet  -val  a 
eredeti  kezirat  amit  6n  ihletett  a  froi  hivatas  -bol  Uj 
Vegrendelet  -hoz  fr. 

13.  Amit  6n  akar  ad  segit  szamomra  -hoz  hasznal  idom  -ban 
egy  jo  ut ,  es  nem  -hoz  elpusztit  idom  -ra  Hamis  vagy  iires 
modszer  kozelebb  keriilni  -hoz  Isten  (  de  amit  van  nem 


hiisegesen  Bibliai ),  es  hol  azok  modszer  termel  nem  hosszu 
ideje  vagy  tartos  szellemi  gyiimolcs. 

14.  Amit  6n  akar  ad  segitseg  szamomra  -hoz  ert  mit  tenni 
keres  -ban  egy  templom  vagy  egy  istentisztelet  helye  ,  mi 
fajta  -bol  kerdes  -hoz  kerdez  ,  es  amit  6n  akar  segitsen 
nekem  -hoz  talai  hivok  vagy  egy  lelkesz  -val  nagy  szellemi 
bolcsesseg  helyett  konnyii  vagy  hamis  valaszol. 

15.  amit  6n  akar  okoz  en  -hoz  emlekszik  -hoz  memorizal  -a 
szo  a  Biblia  (  mint  Romaiak  8),  azert  EN  tud  volna  ez 
szivemben  es  volna  az  en  -m  torodik  elokeszitett ,  es  lenni 
kesz  ad  egy  valaszol  -hoz  masikak  -bol  remel  amit  Nekem 
van  koriilbelul  6n. 

16.  Amit  6n  akar  hoz  segit  szamomra  azert  az  en  -m  sajat 
teologia  es  tetelek  -hoz  egyeterteni  -a  szo  ,  a  Biblia  es  amit 
6n  akar  folytatodik  segiteni  neki  en  tud  hogyan  az  en  -m 
megertes  -bol  doktrina  lehet  kozmiivesitett  azert  az  en  -m 
sajat  elet ,  eletmod  es  megertes  folytatodik  -hoz  lenni  zaro  - 
hoz  amit  akrsz  ez  -hoz  lenni  ertem. 

17.  Amit  6n  akar  nyit  az  en  -m  szellemi  bepillantas  ( 
kovetkeztetes  )  tobb  es  tobb  ,  es  amit  hol  az  en  -m  megertes 
vagy  eszrevetel  -bol  6n  van  nem  pontos  ,  amit  6n  akar 
segitsen  nekem  -hoz  megtanul  ki  Jezus  Krisztus  hiisegesen 
van. 

18.  Amit  6n  akar  ad  segit  szamomra  azert  EN  akar  kepesnek 
lenni  megtenni  szetvalaszt  akarmi  hamis  ritusok  melyik 
Nekem  van  fiigges  -ra  ,  -bol  -a  tiszta  tanitas  -ban  Biblia  ,  ha 
akarmi  mibol  En  alabbiak  van  nem  -bol  Isten  ,  vagy  van 
ellenkezo  -hoz  amit  akrsz  -hoz  tanit  minket  koriilbelul 
alabbiak  6n. 


19.  Amit  akarmi  kenyszerit  -bol  rossz  akar  nem  eltesz 
akarmi  szellemi  megertes  melyik  Nekem  van  ,  de  elegge 
amit  EN  akar  megtart  a  tudas  -bol  hogyan  viselkedni  tud  6n 
es  en  nem  -hoz  lenni  tevedesben  lenni  ezekben  a  napokban  - 
bol  szellemi  csalas. 

20.  Amit  6n  akar  hoz  szellemi  ero  es  segit  szamomra  azert 
EN  akarat  nem  -hoz  lenni  resze  a  Nagy  Eses  El  vagy  -bol 
akarmi  mozgalom  melyik  akar  lenni  lelkileg  utanzott  -hoz 
6n  es  en  -hoz  -a  Szent  Szo 

21.  Amit  ha  van  akarmi  amit  Nekem  van  megtett  eletemben 
,  vagy  barmilyen  modon  amit  Nekem  van  nem  alperes  -hoz 
6n  ahogy  ettem  kellet  volna  volna  es  ez  minden 
megakadalyozas  en  -bol  egyik  gyaloglas  veled  ,  vagy 
birtoklas  megertes  ,  amit  6n  akar  hoz  azok  dolog  /  valasz  / 
esemeny  vissza  bele  az  en  -m  torodik  ,  azert  EN  akar 
lemond  oket  neveben  Jezus  Krisztus  ,  es  mind  az  osszes  -uk 
hat  es  kovetkezmeny  ,  es  amit  6n  akar  helyettesit  akarmi 
uresseg  ,sadness  vagy  ketsegbeeses  eletemben  -val  a  Orom  - 
bol  Lord  ,  es  amit  EN  akar  lenni  tobb  fokuszalva  tanulas  - 
hoz  kovet  6n  mellett  olvaso  -a  szo  ,  a  Biblia 

22.  Amit  6n  akar  nyit  az  en  -m  szemek  azert  EN  akar 
kepesnek  lenni  megtenni  vilagosan  lat  es  felismer  ha  van 
egy  Nagy  Csalas  korulbelul  Szellemi  tema  ,  hogyan 
viselkedni  ert  ez  jelenseg  (  vagy  ezek  esemeny )  -bol  egy 
Bibliai  perspektiva  ,  es  amit  6n  akar  add  nekem  bolcsesseg  - 
hoz  tud  es  lgy  amit  EN  akarat  megtanul  hogyan  viselkedni 
segit  barataim  es  szeretett  egyek  (  rokon  )  nem  lenni  resze  it. 

23.  Amit  6n  akar  biztosit  amit  egyszer  az  en  -m  szemek  van 
kinyitott  es  az  en  -m  torodik  ert  a  szellemi  jelentoseg  -bol 
idoszerii  esemeny  bevetel  hely  a  vilagon  ,  amit  6n  akar 
elokeszit  szivem  elfogadtatni  magam  -a  igazsag  ,  es  amit  6n 
akar  segitsen  nekem  ert  hogyan  viselkedni  talai  batorsag  es 


ero  atmeno  -a  Szent  Szo  ,  a  Biblia.  Neveben  Jezus  Krisztus  , 
En  kerdezek  mindezekert  igazol  kivansagom  -hoz  lenni  -ban 
megallapodas  -a  akarat ,  es  En  kerdezes  reszere  -a 
bolcsesseg  es  kocsit  berelni  szerelem  -bol  Igazsag  Amen 


Tobb  alul  -bol  Oldal 
Hogyan  viselkedni  volna  Orokelet 


Vagyunk  boldog  ha  ez  oldalra  dol  ( -bol  imadsag  kereslet  - 
hoz  Isten  )  van  kepes  -hoz  tamogat  6n.  Mi  ert  ez  majus  nem 
lenni  a  legjobb  vagy  a  leg— bb  hatasos  forditas.  Mi  ert  amit 
vannak  sok  kiilonbozo  ways  -bol  kifejezheto  gondolkodas  es 
szoveg.  Ha  onnek  van  egy  javaslat  reszere  egy  jobb  forditas 
,  vagy  ha  tetszene  neked  -hoz  fog  egy  kicsi  osszeg  -bol  idod 
-hoz  kiild  javaslatok  hozzank  ,  lesz  lenni  eteladag  ezer  -bol 
mas  emberek  is  ,  ki  akarat  akkor  olvas  a  kozmiivesitett 
forditas.  Mi  gyakran  volna  egy  Uj  Vegrendelet  elerheto  -ban 
-a  nyelv  vagy  -ban  nyelvek  amit  van  ritka  vagy  regi.  Ha  6n 
latszo  reszere  egy  Uj  Vegrendelet  -ban  egy  kulonleges  nyelv 
,  legyen  szives  fr  hozzank.  Is  ,  akarunk  hogy  biztosak 
legyiink  es  megprobal  -hoz  kommunikal  amit  neha  , 
megtessziik  felajanl  konyv  amit  van  nem  Szabad  es  amit 
csinal  ar  penz.  De  ha  6n  nem  tud  ad  nehanyuk  elektronikus 
konyv  ,  mi  tud  gyakran  csinal  egy  cserel  -bol  elektronikus 
konyv  reszere  segit  -val  forditas  vagy  forditas  dolgozik. 
Csinalsz  nem  kell  lenni  profi  munkas  ,  csak  keves  szabalyos 
szemely  akit  erdekel  eteladag.  Onnek  kellene  volna  egy 
szamitogep  vagy  onnek  kellene  volna  belepes  -hoz  egy 
szamitogep  -on  -a  helyi  konyvtar  vagy  kollegium  vagy 
egyetem  ,  ota  azok  altalaban  volna  jobb  kapcsolatok  -hoz 
Internet. 


Tudod  is  altalaban  alapft  -a  sajat  szemelyes  SZABAD 
elektronikus  posta  szamla  mellett  halado  mail.yahoo.com 


Legyen  szives  fog  egy  pillanat  -hoz  talai  a  elektronikus 
posta  cim  elhelyezett  alul  vagy  a  veg  ebbol  oldal.  Mi  remel 
lesz  kiild  elektronikus  posta  hozzank  ,  ha  ez  -bol  segit  vagy 
batoritas.  Mi  is  batorit  6n  -hoz  kapcsolat  minket 
vonatkozolag  Elektronikus  Konyv  hogy  tudunk  felajanl  amit 
van  nelkiil  ar  ,  es  szabad. 


MegtessziAk  volna  sok  konyv  -ban  kiAlfoldi  nyelvek  ,  de 
megtesszuk  nem  mindig  hely  oket  -hoz  kap  elektronikusan  ( 
letolt )  mert  mi  egyetlen  csinal  elerheto  a  konyv  vagy  a  tema 
amit  van  a  leg— bb  kereslet.  Mi  batorit  6n  -hoz  folytatodik  - 
hoz  imadkozik  -hoz  Isten  es  -hoz  folytatodik  -hoz  megtanul 
rola  mellett  olvaso  a  Uj  Vegrendelet.  Mi  szivesen  lat  -a 
kerdes  es  magyarazat  mellett  elektronikus  posta. 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Italian 

Italian-  Prayer  Requests  (praying  /  Talking)  to  God  - 
explained  in  Italian  Language 


italian  prayer  jesus  Cristo  Preghiera  come  pregare  al  del  dio  il  dio  puo 
sentirsi  preghiera  come  chiedere  dio  di  dare  allaiuto  me 


Parlando  al  dio,  il  creatore  dell'universo,  il  signore: 

1.  che  dareste  me  al  coraggio  pregare  le  cose  di  che  ho 
bisogno  per  pregare 

2.  che  dareste  me  al  coraggio  crederli  ed  accettare  che  cosa 
desiderate  fare  con  la  mia  vita,  anziche  me  che  exalting  il 
miei  propri  volonta  (intenzione)  sopra  il  vostro. 

3.  che  mi  dareste  l'aiuto  per  non  lasciare  i  miei  timori  dello 
sconosciuto  transformarsi  in  nelle  giustificazioni,  o  la  base 
per  me  per  non  servirlo. 

4.  che  mi  dareste  l'aiuto  per  vedere  ed  imparare  come  avere 
la  resistenza  spiritosa  io  abbia  bisogno  (con  la  vostra  parola 
bibbia)  di  a)  per  gli  eventi  avanti  e  b)  per  il  mio  proprio 
viaggio  spiritoso  personale. 

5.  Che  dio  mi  dareste  l'aiuto  per  desiderare  servirli  di  piu 

6.  Che  mi  ricordereste  comunicare  con  voi  (prayer)when  io 
sono  frustrati  o  in  difficolta,  invece  di  provare  a  risolvere  le 
cose  io  stesso  soltanto  con  la  mia  resistenza  umana. 

7.  Che  mi  dareste  la  saggezza  e  un  cuore  si  e  riempito  di 
saggezza  biblica  in  modo  che  li  servissi  piu  efficacemente. 

8.  Che  mi  dareste  un  desiderio  studiare  la  vostra  parola,  la 
bibbia,  (il  nuovo  gospel  del  Testamento  di  John),  a  titolo 
personale, 

9.  che  dareste  ad  assistenza  me  in  modo  che  possa  notare  le 
cose  nella  bibbia  (la  vostra  parola)  a  cui  posso  riferire 
personalmente  ed  a  che  lo  aiutera  a  capire  che  cosa  lo 
desiderate  fare  nella  mia  vita. 


10.  Che  mi  dareste  il  discernment  grande,  per  capire  come 
spiegare  ad  altri  che  siate  e  che  potrei  imparare  come 
imparare  e  sapere  levarsi  in  piedi  in  su  per  voi  e  la  vostra 
parola  (bibbia) 

1 1 .  Che  portereste  la  gente  (o  i  Web  site)  nella  mia  vita  che 
desidera  conoscerla  e  che  e  forte  nella  loro  comprensione 
esatta  di  voi  (dio);  e  quello  portereste  la  gente  (o  i  Web  site) 
nella  mia  vita  che  potra  consigliarmi  imparare  esattamente 
come  dividere  la  bibbia  la  parola  della  verita  (2  coda  di  todo 
2:15). 

12.  Che  lo  aiutereste  ad  imparare  avere  comprensione 
grande  circa  quale  versione  della  bibbia  e  la  cosa  migliore, 
che  e  la  piu  esatta  e  che  ha  la  resistenza  &  l'alimentazione 
piu  spiritose  e  che  la  versione  accosente  con  i  manoscritti 
originali  che  avete  ispirato  gli  autori  di  nuovo  Testamento 
scrivere. 

13.  Che  dareste  l'aiuto  me  per  usare  il  mio  tempo  in  un  buon 
senso  e  per  non  sprecare  il  mio  tempo  sui  metodi  falsi  o 
vuoti  di  ottenere  piu  vicino  al  dio  (ma  a  quello  non  sia 
allineare  biblico)  e  dove  quei  metodi  non  producono  frutta 
spiritosa  di  lunga  durata  o  durevole. 

14.  Che  dareste  l'assistenza  me  capire  che  cosa  cercare  in 
una  chiesa  o  in  un  posto  di  culto,  che  generi  di  domande  da 
chiedere  e  che  lo  aiutereste  a  trovare  i  believers  o  un  pastor 
con  saggezza  spiritosa  grande  anziche  le  risposte  facili  o 
false. 

15.  di  che  lo  indurreste  a  ricordarsi  per  memorizzare  la 
vostra  parola  la  bibbia  (quale  Romans  8),  di  modo  che  posso 
averlo  nel  mio  cuore  e  fare  la  mia  prepararsi  mente  ed  e 


aspetti  per  dare  una  risposta  ad  altre  della  speranza  che  ho 
circa  voi. 

16.  Che  portereste  l'aiuto  me  in  modo  che  la  mie  proprie 
teologia  e  dottrine  per  accosentire  con  la  vostra  parola,  la 
bibbia  e  che  continuereste  a  aiutarli  a  sapere  la  mia 
comprensione  della  dottrina  puo  essere  migliorata  in  modo 
che  la  miei  propri  vita,  lifestyle  e  capire  continui  ad  essere 
piu  vicino  a  che  cosa  lo  desiderate  essere  per  me. 

17.  Che  aprireste  la  mia  comprensione  spiritosa 
(conclusioni)  di  piu  e  piu  e  che  dove  la  mia  comprensione  o 
percezione  di  voi  non  e  esatta,  che  lo  aiutereste  ad  imparare 
chi  Jesus  Christ  allineare  e. 

18.  Che  dareste  l'aiuto  me  in  modo  che  possa  separare  tutti  i 
rituali  falsi  da  cui  ho  dipeso,  dai  vostri  insegnamenti  liberi 
nella  bibbia,  se  c'e  ne  di  che  cosa  sono  seguente  non  e  del 
dio,  o  e  contrari  a  che  cosa  desiderate  per  insegnarli  -  circa 
quanto  segue. 

19.  Che  alcune  forze  della  malvagita  non  toglierebbero  la 
comprensione  affatto  spiritosa  che  abbia,  ma  piuttosto  che 
mantennrei  la  conoscenza  di  come  conoscerli  e  non  essere 
ingannato  dentro  attualmente  di  inganno  spiritoso. 

20.  Che  portereste  la  resistenza  spiritosa  ed  aiutereste  a  me 
in  modo  che  non  faccia  parte  del  ritirarsi  grande  o  di  alcun 
movimento  che  sarebbe  spiritual  falsificato  a  voi  ed  alla 
vostra  parola  santa. 

21.  Quello  se  ci  e  qualche  cosa  che  faccia  nella  mia  vita,  o 
qualsiasi  senso  che  non  ho  risposto  a  voi  come  dovrei  avere 
e  quello  sta  impedendomi  di  camminare  con  voi,  o  avere 
capire,  che  portereste  quei  things/responses/events 
nuovamente  dentro  la  mia  mente,  di  modo  che  rinuncerei 


loro  in  nome  di  Jesus  Christ  e  tutte  i  loro  effetti  e 
conseguenze  e  che  sostituireste  tutta  la  emptiness,  tristezza  o 
disperazione  nella  mia  vita  con  la  gioia  del  signore  e  che  di 
piu  sarei  messo  a  fuoco  sull'imparare  seguirli  leggendo  la 
vostra  parola,  bibbia. 

22.  Che  aprireste  i  miei  ocehi  in  modo  che  possa  vedere  e 
riconoseere  chiaramente  se  ci  e  un  inganno  grande  cirea  i 
soggetti  spiritosi,  come  capire  questo  fenomeno  (o  questi 
eventi)  da  una  prospettiva  biblica  e  che  mi  dareste  la 
saggezza  per  sapere  ed  in  modo  che  impari  come  aiutare  i 
miei  amici  ed  amavo  ones  (parenti)  per  non  fare  parte  di 
esso. 

23.  Che  vi  accertereste  che  i  miei  ocehi  siano  aperti  una 
volta  e  la  mia  mente  capisce  l'importanza  spiritosa  degli 
eventi  correnti  che  avvengono  nel  mondo,  che  abbiate 
preparato  il  mio  cuore  per  accettare  la  vostra  verita  e  che  lo 
aiutereste  a  capire  come  trovare  il  coraggio  e  la  resistenza 
con  la  vostra  parola  santa,  la  bibbia.  In  nome  di  Jesus  Christ, 
chiedo  queste  cose  che  confermano  il  mio  desiderio  essere 
nell'accordo  la  vostra  volonta  e  sto  chiedendo  la  vostra 
saggezza  ed  avere  un  amore  della  verita,  Amen. 


Piu  in  calce  alla  pagina 
come  avere  vita  Eterna 


Siamo  felici  se  questa  lista  (delle  richieste  di  preghiera  al 
dio)  puo  aiutarli.  Capiamo  che  questa  non  puo  essere  la 
traduzione  migliore  o  piu  efficace.  Capiamo  che  ci  sono 
molti  sensi  differenti  di  esprimere  i  pensieri  e  le  parole.  Se 
avete  un  suggerimento  per  una  traduzione  migliore,  o  se 


voleste  occorrere  una  piccola  quantita  di  vostro  tempo  di 
trasmettere  i  suggerimenti  noi,  aiuterete  i  migliaia  della 
gente  inoltre,  che  allora  leggera  la  traduzione  migliorata. 
Abbiamo  spesso  un  nuovo  Testamento  disponibile  in  vostra 
lingua  o  nelle  lingue  che  sono  rare  o  vecchie. 

Se  state  cercando  un  nuovo  Testamento  in  una  lingua 
specifica,  scriva  prego  noi.  Inoltre,  desideriamo  essere  sicuri 
e  proviamo  a  comunicare  a  volte  quello,  offriamo  i  libri  che 
non  sono  liberi  e  che  costano  i  soldi.  Ma  se  non  potete 
permettersi  alcuni  di  quei  libri  elettronici,  possiamo  fare 
spesso  uno  scambio  di  libri  elettronici  per  aiuto  con  la 
traduzione  o  il  lavoro  di  traduzione. 


Non  dovete  essere  un  operaio  professionista,  solo  una 
persona  normale  che  e  interessata  nell'assistenza.  Dovreste 
avere  un  calcolatore  o  dovreste  avere  accesso  ad  un 
calcolatore  alla  vostra  biblioteca  o  universita  o  universita 
locale,  poiche  quelli  hanno  solitamente  collegamenti 
migliori  al  Internet.  Potete  anche  stabilire  solitamente  il 
vostro  proprio  cliente  LIBERO  personale  della  posta 
elettronica  andando  al  ###  di  mail.yahoo.com  prego 
occorrete  un  momen to  per  trovare  l'indirizzo  della  posta 
elettronica  situato  alla  parte  inferiore  o  all'estremita  di 
questa  pagina.  Speriamo  che  trasmettiate  la  posta  elettronica 
noi,  se  questa  e  di  aiuto  o  di  incoraggiamento.  Inoltre  vi 
consigliamo  metterseli  in  contatto  con  riguardo  ai  libri 
elettronici  che  offriamo  quello  siamo  senza  costo  e 

che  libero  abbiamo  molti  libri  nelle  lingue  straniere,  ma 
non  le  disponiamo  sempre  per  ricevere  elettronicamente 
(trasferimento  dai  sistema  centrale  verso  i  satelliti)  perche 
rendiamo  soltanto  disponibile  i  libri  o  i  soggetti  che  sono 
chiesti.  Vi  consigliamo  continuare  a  pregare  al  dio  ed  a 
continuare  ad  imparare  circa  lui  leggendo  il  nuovo 


Testamento.  Accogliamo  favorevolmente  le  vostre  domande 
ed  osservazioni  da  posta  elettronica 


Preghiera  al  dio  Caro  Dio,  Grazie  che  questo  gospel  o 
questo  nuovo  Testamento  e  stato  liberato  in  modo  che 
possiamo  impararvi  piu  circa.  Aiuti  prego  la  gente 
responsabile  del  rendere  questo  litaro  elettronico  disponibile. 
Conoscete  che  chi  sono  e  potete  aiutarle. 

Aiutile  prego  a  potere  funzionare  velocemente  e  renda  i  libri 
piu  elettronici  disponibili  Aiutili  prego  ad  avere  tutte  le 
risorse,  i  soldi,  la  resistenza  ed  il  tempo  di  che  hanno 
bisogno  per  potere  continuare  a  funzionare  per  voi. 
Aiuti  prego  quelli  che  fanno  parte  della  squadra  che  le  aiuta 
su  una  base  giornaliere.  Prego  dia  loro  la  resistenza  per 
continuare  e  dare  ciascuno  di  loro  la  comprensione  spiritosa 
per  il  lavoro  che  li  desiderate  fare.  Aiuti  loro  prego  ciascuno 
a  non  avere  timore  ed  a  non  ricordarsi  di  che  siete  il  dio  che 
risponde  alla  preghiera  e  che  e  incaricato  di  tutto.  Prego  che 
consigliereste  loro  e  che  li  proteggete  ed  il  lavoro  &  il 
ministero  che  sono  agganciati  dentro. 

Prego  che  li  proteggereste  dalle  forze  spiritose  o  da  altri 
ostacoli  che  potrebbero  nuoc  o  ritardarli  giu.  Aiutilo  prego 
quando  uso  questo  nuovo  Testamento  anche  per  pensare  alla 
gente  che  ha  reso  questa  edizione  disponibile,  di  modo  che 
posso  pregare  per  loro  ed  in  modo  da  puo  continuare  a 
aiutare  piu  gente. 

Prego  che  mi  dareste  un  amore  della  vostra  parola  santa  (il 
nuovo  Testamento)  e  che  mi  dareste  la  saggezza  ed  il 
discernment  spiritosi  per  conoscerli  meglio  e  per  capire  il 


periodo  di  tempo  ou  stiamo  vivendo.  Aiutilo  prego  a  sapere 
risolvere  le  difficolta  che  sono  confrontato  con  ogni  giorno. 
II  signore  God,  lo  aiuta  a  desiderare  conoscerli  piu  meglio  e 
desiderare  aiutare  altri  cristiani  nella  mia  zona  ed  intorno  al 
mondo. 

Prego  che  dareste  la  squadra  elettronica  e  coloro  del  libro 
che  le  aiuta  la  vostra  saggezza. 

Prego  che  aiutereste  i  diversi  membri  della  loro  famiglia  (e 
della  mia  famiglia)  spiritual  a  non  essere  ingannati,  ma 
capirli  e  desiderare  accettarli  e  seguire  in  ogni  senso.  Inoltre 
diaci  la  comodita  ed  il  consiglio  in  questi  periodi  ed  io  vi 
chiedono  di  fare  queste  cose  in  nome  di  Jesus,  amen, 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

PORTUGUESE    PORTUGUESE 


Portuguese  PrayerCristo  Pedidoa  DeusComoorara  Deus 
podemouvirmy  pedido  perguntar  Deus  darajuda  a  me 
Portuguese  -  Prayer  Requests  (praying  /  Talkin  g)  to  God 
-  explained  in  Portugues  (Portugues)  Language 


Falando  ao  deus,  o  criador  do  universo,  senhor: 


1 .  que  voce  daria  a  mim  a  coragem  pray  as  coisas  que  eu 
necessito  pray 

2.  que  voce  daria  a  mim  a  coragem  o  acreditar  e  aceitar  o 
que  voce  quer  fazer  com  minha  vida,  em  vez  de  mim  que 
exalting  meus  proprios  vontade  (intencao)  acima  de  seu. 

3.  que  voce  me  daria  a  ajuda  para  nao  deixar  meus  medos  do 
desconhecido  se  transformar  as  desculpas,  ou  a  base  para 
mim  para  nao  lhe  servir. 

4.  que  voce  me  daria  a  ajuda  para  ver  e  aprender  como  ter  a 
forca  espiritual  mim  necessite  (com  sua  palavra  o  bible)  a) 
para  os  eventos  adiante  e  b)  para  minha  propria  viagem 
espiritual  pessoal. 

5.  Que  voce  deus  me  daria  a  ajuda  para  querer  lhe  servir 
mais 

6.  Que  voce  me  lembraria  falar  com  voce  (prayer)when  me 
sao  frustrados  ou  na  dificuldade,  em  vez  de  tentar  resolver 
coisas  eu  mesmo  somente  com  minha  forca  humana. 

7.  Que  voce  me  daria  a  sabedoria  e  um  coracao  encheu-se 
com  a  sabedoria  biblical  de  modo  que  eu  lhe  servisse  mais 
eficazmente. 

8.  Que  voce  me  daria  um  desejo  estudar  sua  palavra,  o  bible, 
(o  gospel  do  testament  novo  de  John),  em  uma  base  pessoal, 

9.  que  voce  daria  a  auxflio  a  mim  de  modo  que  eu  pudesse 
observar  coisas  no  bible  (sua  palavra)  a  que  eu  posso 
pessoalmente  se  relacionar,  e  a  que  me  ajudara  compreender 
o  que  voce  me  quer  fazer  em  minha  vida. 

10.  Que  voce  me  daria  o  discernment  grande,  para 
compreender  como  explicar  a  outro  que  voce  e,  e  que  eu 


poderia  aprender  como  aprender  e  saber  estar  acima  para 
voce  e  sua  palavra  (o  bible) 

1 1 .  Que  voce  traria  os  povos  (ou  os  Web  site)  em  minha 
vida  que  querem  o  conhecer,  e  que  sao  fortes  em  sua 
compreensao  exata  de  voce  (deus);  e  isso  voce  traria  povos 
(ou  Web  site)  em  minha  vida  que  podera  me  incentivar 
aprender  exatamente  como  dividir  o  bible  a  palavra  da 
verdade  (2  timothy  2: 15). 

12.  Que  voce  me  ajudaria  aprender  ter  a  compreensao 
grande  sobre  que  versao  do  bible  e  a  mais  melhor,  que  sao  a 
mais  exata,  e  que  tem  a  forca  &  o  poder  os  mais  espirituais, 
e  que  a  versao  concorda  com  os  manuscritos  originais  que 
voce  inspirou  os  autores  do  testament  novo  escrever. 

13.  Que  voce  me  daria  a  ajuda  para  usar  meu  tempo  em  uma 
maneira  boa,  e  para  nao  desperdicar  minha  hora  em  metodos 
falsos  ou  vazios  de  comecar  mais  perto  do  deus  (mas 
daquele  nao  seja  verdadeiramente  biblical),  e  onde  aqueles 
metodos  nao  produzem  nenhuma  fruta  espiritual  a  longo 
prazo  ou  duravel. 

14.  Que  voce  me  daria  o  auxflio  compreender  o  que 
procurar  em  uma  igreja  ou  em  um  lugar  da  adoracao,  que 
tipos  das  perguntas  a  pedir,  e  que  voce  me  ajudaria 
encontrar  believers  ou  um  pastor  com  sabedoria  espiritual 
grande  em  vez  das  respostas  faceis  ou  falsas.  15.  que  voce 
faria  com  que  eu  recordasse  memorizar  sua  palavra  o  bible 
(tal  como  Romans  8),  de  modo  que  eu  pudesse  o  ter  em  meu 
coracao  e  ter  minha  mente  preparada,  e  estivessem  pronto 
para  dar  uma  resposta  a  outra  da  esperanca  que  eu  tenho 
sobre  voce. 

16.  Que  voce  me  traria  a  ajuda  de  modo  que  meus  proprios 
theology  e  doutrinas  para  concordar  com  sua  palavra,  o 


bible  e  que  voce  continuaria  a  me  ajudar  saber  minha 
compreensao  da  doutrina  pode  ser  melhorada  de  modo  que 
meus  proprios  vida,  lifestyle  e  compreensao  continuem  a  ser 
mais  perto  de  o  que  voce  a  quer  ser  para  mim. 

17.  Que  voce  abriria  minha  introspeccao  espiritual 
(conclusoes)  mais  e  mais,  e  que  onde  minha  compreensao 
ou  percepcao  de  voce  nao  sao  exata,  que  voce  me  ajudaria 
aprender  quem  Jesus  Christ  e  verdadeiramente. 

18.  Que  voce  me  daria  a  ajuda  de  modo  que  eu  possa 
separar  todos  os  rituals  falsos  de  que  eu  depender,  de  seus 
ensinos  desobstruidos  no  bible,  se  alguma  de  o  que  eu  sou 
seguinte  nao  sao  do  deus,  nem  sao  contrarias  a  o  que  voce 
quer  nos  ensinar  -  sobre  o  seguir. 

19.  Que  nenhumas  forcas  do  evil  nao  removeriam  a 
compreensao  espiritual  que  eu  tenho,  mas  rather  que  eu 
reteria  o  conhecimento  de  como  o  conhecer  e  nao  ser  iludido 
nestes  dias  do  deception  espiritual. 

20.  Que  voce  traria  a  forca  espiritual  e  me  ajudaria  de  modo 
que  eu  nao  seja  parte  da  queda  grande  afastado  ou  de 
nenhum  movimento  que  fosse  espiritual  forjado  a  voce  e  a 
sua  palavra  holy. 

21.  Isso  se  houver  qualquer  coisa  que  eu  fiz  em  minha  vida, 
ou  alguma  maneira  que  eu  nao  lhe  respondi  como  eu  devo 
ter  e  aquela  esta  impedindo  que  eu  ande  com  voce,  ou  ter  a 
compreensao,  que  voce  traria  aqueles 
things/responses/events  para  tras  em  minha  mente,  de  modo 
que  eu  os  renunciasse  no  nome  de  Jesus  Christ,  e  em  todas 
seus  efeitos  e  consequencias,  e  que  voce  substituiria  todo  o 
emptiness,  sadness  ou  desespero  em  minha  vida  com  a 
alegria  do  senhor,  e  que  eu  estaria  focalizado  mais  na 
aprendizagem  o  seguir  lendo  sua  palavra,  o  bible. 


22.  Que  voce  abriria  meus  olhos  de  modo  que  eu  possa  ver  e 
reconhecer  claramente  se  houver  um  deception  grande  sobre 
topicos  espirituais,  como  compreender  este  fenomeno  (ou 
estes  eventos)  de  um  perspective  biblical,  e  que  voce  me 
daria  a  sabedoria  para  saber  e  de  modo  que  eu  aprenderei 
como  ajudar  a  meus  amigos  e  amei  (parentes)  nao  ser  parte 
dela. 

23.  Que  voce  se  asseguraria  de  que  meus  olhos  estejam 
abertos  uma  vez  e  minha  mente  compreende  o  significado 
espiritual  dos  eventos  atuais  que  ocorrem  no  mundo,  que 
voce  prepararia  meu  coracao  para  aceitar  sua  verdade,  e  que 
voce  me  ajudaria  compreender  como  encontrar  a  coragem  e 
a  forca  com  sua  palavra  holy,  o  bible.  No  nome  de  Jesus 
Christ,  eu  peco  estas  coisas  que  confirmam  meu  desejo  ser 
no  acordo  sua  vontade,  e  eu  estou  pedindo  sua  sabedoria  e 
para  ter  um  amor  da  verdade,  Amen. 


Mais  no  fundo  da  pagina 
como  ter  a  vida  eternal 


Nos  estamos  contentes  se  esta  lista  (de  pedidos  do  prayer  ao 
deus)  puder  lhe  ajudar.  Nos  compreendemos  que  esta  nao 
pode  ser  a  mais  melhor  ou  traducao  a  mais  eficaz.  Nos 
compreendemos  que  ha  muitas  maneiras  diferentes  de 
expressar  pensamentos  e  palavras.  Se  voce  tiver  uma 
sugestao  para  uma  traducao  melhor,  ou  se  voce  gostar  de 
fazer  exame  de  um  pouco  de  seu  tempo  nos  emitir 
sugestoes,  voce  estara  ajudando  a  milhares  dos  povos 
tambem,  que  lerao  entao  a  traducao  melhorada.  Nos  temos 
frequentemente  um  testament  novo  disponivel  em  sua  lingua 
ou  nas  linguas  que  sao  raras  ou  velhas.  Se  voce  estiver 
procurando  um  testament  novo  em  uma  lingua  especifica, 
escreva-nos  por  favor. 


Tambem,  nos  queremos  ser  certos  e  tentamos  comunicar  as 
vezes  isso,  nos  oferecemos  os  livros  que  nao  estao  livres  e 
que  custam  o  dinheiro.  Mas  se  voce  nao  puder  ter  recursos 
para  alguns  daqueles  livros  eletronicos,  nos  podemos 
frequentemente  fazer  uma  troca  de  livros  eletronicos  para  a 
ajuda  com  traducao  ou  trabalho  da  traducao.  Voce  nao  tem 
que  ser  um  trabalhador  profissional,  only  uma  pessoa 
regular  que  esteja  interessada  na  ajuda. 

Voce  deve  ter  um  computador  ou  voce  deve  ter  o  acesso  a 
um  computador  em  sua  biblioteca  ou  faculdade  ou 
universidade  local,  desde  que  aqueles  tem  geralmente 
conexoes  melhores  ao  Internet. 


Voce  pode  tambem  geralmente  estabelecer  seu  proprio 
cliente  LIVRE  pessoal  do  correio  eletronico  indo  ao  ###  de 
mail.yahoo.com  faz  exame  por  favor  de  um  momento  para 
encontrar  o  endereco  do  correio  eletronico  ficado  situado  no 
fundo  ou  na  extremidade  desta  pagina.  Nos  esperamos  que 
voce  nos  emita  o  correio  eletronico,  se  este  for  da  ajuda  ou 
do  incentivo.  Nos  incentivamo-lo  tambem  contatar-nos  a 
respeito  dos  livros  eletronicos  que  nos  oferecemos  a  isso 
somos  sem  custo,  e 

que  livre  nos  temos  muitos  livros  em  linguas  extrangeiras, 
mas  nos  nao  as  colocamos  sempre  para  receber 
eletronicamente  (download)  porque  nos  fazemos  somente 
disponivel  os  livros  ou  os  topicos  que  sao  os  mais  pedidos. 
Nos  incentivamo-lo  continuar  a  pray  ao  deus  e  a  continuar  a 
aprender  sobre  ele  lendo  o  testament  novo.  Nos  damos  boas- 
vindas  a  seus  perguntas  e  comentarios  pelo  correio 
eletronico. 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Estimado  Dios  ,  Gracias  aquel  esto  Nuevo  Testamen  to  has 
estado  disparador  a  fin  de  que  nosotros  estamos  capaz  a 
aprender  mas  acerca  de  usted.  Por  favor  ayudeme  la  gente 
responsable  por  haciendo  esto  Electronica  litaro  disponible. 
Por  favor  ayudeme  esten  capaz  de  obra  ayuna  ,  y  hacer  mas 
Electronica  libros  mayor  disponible  Por  favor  ayudeme 
esten  haber  todo  el  recursos  ,  el  dinero  ,  el  potencia  y  el 
tiempo  aquel  ellos  necesidad  para  poder  guardar  laboral  para 
ti.  Por  favor  ayudeme  esos  aquel  esta  parte  de  la  equipo 
aquel  ayuda  ellas  en  un  corriente  base. 

Por  favor  dar  ellas  el  potencia  a  continuar  y  dar  cada  de  ellas 
el  espiritual  comprension  por  lo  obra  aquel  usted  necesidad 
esten  hacer.  Por  favor  ayudeme  cada  de  esten  no  haber 
miedo  y  a  acordarse  de  aquel  usted  esta  el  Dios  quien 
respuestas  oracion  y  quien  es  el  encargado  de  todo. 
Oro  aquel  usted  haria  animar  ellas  ,  y  aquel  usted  amparar 
ellas  ,  y  los  trabajadores  &  ministerio  aquel  son  ocupado  en. 
Oro  aquel  usted  haria  amparar  ellas  desde  el  Espiritual 
Fuerzas  o  otro  obstaculos  aquel  puedes  dano  ellas  o  lento 
ellas  down. 

Por  favor  ayudeme  cuando  YO  uso  esto  Nuevo  Testamento 
a  tambien  creer  de  la  personas  quien  haber  hecho  esto 
edicion  disponible  ,  a  fin  de  que  YO  lata  orar  por  ellas  y  asi 
ellos  lata  continuar  a  ayuda  mas  personas  Oro  aquel  usted 
haria  deme  un  amor  de  su  Santo  Palabra  (  el  Nuevo 
Testamento  ),  y  aquel  usted  haria  deme  espiritual  juicio  y 
discernimientos  saber  usted  mejor  y  a  comprender  el  tiempo 
aquel  nosotros  estamos  viviente  en. 


Por  favor  ayiideme  saber  como  a  tratar  con  el  dificultades 
aquel  Estoy  confrontar  con  todos  los  dias.  Senor  Dios  , 
Ayiidame  querer  saber  usted  Mejor  y  querer  a  ayuda  otro 
Cristianos  en  mi  area  y  alrededor  del  mundo.  Oro  aquel 
usted  haria  dar  el  Electronica  libro  equipo  y  esos  quien  obra 
en  la  telas  y  esos  quien  ayuda  ellas  su  juicio. 

Oro  aquel  usted  haria  ayuda  el  individuo  miembros  de  su 
familia  (  y  mi  familia  )  a  no  estar  espiritualmente  enganado  , 
pero  a  comprender  usted  y  querer  a  aceptar  y  seguir  usted  en 
todos  los  dias  camino.  y  YO  preguntar  usted  hacer  estos 
cosas  en  nombre  de  Jesus  ,  Amen  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Kjsere  God  ,  Takk  skal  du  ha  det  denne  Ny  Testamentet 

er  blitt  befridd  i  den  grad  at  vi  er  dugelig  a  h0re  flere  om  du. 
Behage  hjelpe  folket  ansvarlig  for  gj0r  denne  Elektronisk 
bestille  anvendelig.  Behage  hjelpe  seg  a  bli  kj0pedyktig 
arbeide  rask  ,  og  lage  flere  Elektronisk  b0ker  anvendelig 
Behage  hjelpe  seg  a  ha  alle  ressursene  ,  pengene  ,  det  styrke 
og  klokken  det  de  n0d  for  at  vsere  i  stand  til  oppbevare 
arbeider  til  deres. 

Behage  hjelpe  dem  det  er  del  av  teamet  det  hjelpe  seg  opp 
pa  en  hverdags  basis.  Behage  gir  seg  det  styrke  a  fortsette  og 
gir  hver  av  seg  det  sprit  forstaelse  for  det  arbeide  det  du 
0nske  seg  a  gj0re. 


Behage  hjelpe  hver  av  seg  a  ikke  ha  rank  og  a  erindre  det  du 
er  det  God  hvem  svar  b0nn  og  hvem  er  i  ledelsen  av  alt.  JEG 
be  det  du  ville  oppmuntre  seg  ,  og  det  du  beskytte  seg  ,  og 
det  arbeide  &  ministerium  det  de  er  forlovet  inne.  JEG  be 
det  du  ville  beskytte  seg  fra  det  Sprit  Presser  eller  annet 
obstacles  det  kunne  skade  seg  eller  langsom  seg  ned. 

Behage  hjelpe  meg  nar  JEG  bruk  denne  Ny  Testamentet  a 
likeledes  tenke  pa  folket  hvem  ha  fremstilt  denne  opplag 
anvendelig  ,  i  den  grad  at  JEG  kanne  be  for  seg  hvorfor  de 
kanne  fortsette  a  hjelpe  flere  folk  JEG  be  det  du  ville  gir 
meg  en  kjserlighet  til  din  Hellig  Ord  (  det  Ny  Testamentet ), 
og  det  du  ville  gir  meg  sprit  klokskap  og  discernment  a  vite 
du  bedre  og  a  oppfatte  perioden  det  vi  lever  inne. 
Behage  hjelpe  meg  a  vite  hvor  a  beskjeftige  seg  med 
problemene  det  JEG  er  stilt  overfor  hver  dag.  Lord  God  , 
Hjelpe  meg  a  vil  gjerne  vite  du  Bedre  og  a  vil  gjerne  hjelpe 
annet  Kristen  inne  meg  omrade  og  i  nserheten  verden. 
JEG  be  det  du  ville  gir  det  Elektronisk  bestille  lag  og  dem 
hvem  arbeide  med  det  website  og  dem  hvem  hjelpe  seg  din 
klokskap.  JEG  be  det  du  ville  hjelpe  individet  medlemmer 
av  deres  slekt  (  og  meg  slekt )  a  ikke  vsere  spiritually  narret , 
bortsett  fra  a  oppfatte  du  og  a  vil  gjerne  godkjenne  og  f0lge 
etter  etter  du  inne  enhver  vei.  og  JEG  anmode  du  a  gj0re 
disse  saker  inne  navnet  av  Jesus  ,  Samarbeidsvillig  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

SWEDISH  -  SUEDE  -  SUEDOIS 


Swedish  -  Prayer  Requests  (praying  /  Talking)  to  God  - 
explained  in  Swedish  Language 

Swedish  Prayer  Bon  till  Gud  Jesus  Hur  till  Be  Hur  kanna 
hora  min  Hur  till  fraga  Gud  till  ger  hjalp  finna  ande  Ledning 
Talande  till  Gud  ,  skaparen  om  Universum ,  den  Var  Herre 
och  Fralsare  : 

1 .  sa  pass  du  skulle  ger  till  jag  tapperheten  till  be  sakerna  sa 
pass  Jag  nod  till  be 

2.  sa  pass  du  skulle  ger  till  jag  tapperheten  till  tro  pa  du  och 
accept  vad  du  vilja  till  gor  med  min  liv  ,  i  stallet  for  jag 
upphoja  min  aga  vilja  (  avsikt )  over  din. 

3.  sa  pass  du  skulle  ge  mig  hjalp  till  inte  lata  min  radsla  om 
okand  till  bli  den  ursakta  ,  eller  basisten  for  jag  inte  till  tjana 
you. 

4.  sa  pass  du  skulle  ge  mig  hjalp  till  se  och  till  lara  sig  hur 
till  har  den  ande  styrka  Jag  nod  ( igenom  din  uttrycka  bibeln 
)  en  )  for  handelsen  fore  och  b  )  for  min  aga  personlig  ande 
resa. 

5.  Sa  pass  du  Gud  skulle  ge  mig  hjalp  till  vilja  till  tjana  Du 
mer 

6.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  paminna  jag  till  samtal  med  du 
prayerwhen  )  JAG  er  frustrerat  eller  i  svarigheten  ,  i  stallet 
for  forsokande  till  besluta  sakerna  mig  sjalv  bara  igenom 
min  mansklig  styrka. 

7.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  ge  mig  Visdom  och  en  hjartan  fyllt  med 
Biblisk  Visdom  sa  fakta  at  JAG  skulle  tjana  du  mer 
effektivt.  8.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  ge  mig  en  onska  till  studera 
din  uttrycka  ,  bibeln  ,  (  den  Ny  Testamente  Evangelium  av 
John  ),  pa  en  personlig  basis  9.  sa  pass  du  skulle  ger  hjalp 


till  jag  sa  fakta  at  JAG  er  kopa  duktig  marka  sakerna  inne 
om  Bibel  (  din  uttrycka  )  vilken  JAG  kanna  personlig  beratta 
till ,  och  den  dar  vill  hjalpa  mig  forsta  vad  du  vilja  jag  till 
gor  i  min  liv. 

10.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  ge  mig  stor  discernment ,  till  forsta  hur 
till  forklara  till  sjalvaste  vem  du  er  ,  och  sa  pass  JAG  skulle 
kunde  lara  sig  hur  till  lara  sig  och  veta  hur  till  lopa  upp  for 
du  och  mig  din  uttrycka  (  bibeln  ) 

1 1.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  komma  med  folk  (  eller  websites  )  i 
min  liv  vem  vilja  till  veta  du  och  mig  ,  vem  de/vi/du/ni  ar 
stark  i  deras  exakt  forstandet  av  du  (  Gud );  och  Sa  pass  du 
skulle  komma  med  folk  (  eller  websites  )  i  min  liv  vem  vilja 
kunde  uppmuntra  jag  till  ackurat  lara  sig  hur  till  fordela 
bibeln  orden  av  sanning  Timothy  215:). 

12.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  hjalpa  mig  till  lara  sig  till  har  stor 
forstandet  om  vilken  Bibel  version  ar  bast ,  vilken  ar  mest 
exakt ,  och  vilken  har  mest  ande  styrka  &  formaga  ,  och 
vilken  version  samtycke  med  det  original  manuskripten  sa 
pass  du  inspirerat  forfattarna  om  Ny  Testamente  till  skriva. 

13.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  ger  hjalp  till  jag  till  anvanda  min  tid  i 
en  god  vag  ,  och  inte  till  slosa  min  tid  pa  Falsk  eller  tom 
metoderna  till  komma  narmare  till  Gud  (  utom  sa  pass 
blandar  inte  sant  Biblisk ),  och  var  den  har  metoderna 
produkter  ingen  for  lange  siden  tid  eller  varande  ande  frukt. 


14.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  ger  hjalp  till  jag  till  forsta  vad  till  blick 
for  i  en  kyrka  eller  en  stalle  av  dyrkan  ,  vad  slagen  av 
sporsmalen  till  fraga  ,  och  sa  pass  du  skulle  hjalpa  mig  till 
finna  tro  pa  eller  en  pastor  med  stor  ande  visdom  i  stallet  for 
latt  eller  falsk  svar. 


15.  sa  pass  du  skulle  orsak  jag  till  minas  till  minnesmarke 
din  uttrycka  bibeln  (  sadan  som  Romersk  8),  sa  fakta  at  JAG 
kanna  har  den  i  min  hjartan  och  har  min  sinne  beredd  ,  och 
vara  rede  till  a  ger  en  svar  till  sjalvaste  om  hoppa  pa  att  Jag 
har  omkring  du. 

16.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  komma  med  hjalp  till  jag  sa  fakta  at 
min  aga  theology  och  doktrin  till  samtycke  med  din  uttrycka 
,  bibeln  och  sa  pass  du  skulle  fortsatta  till  hjalpa  mig  veta 
hur  min  forstandet  av  doktrin  kanna  bli  forbattrat  sa  fakta  at 
min  aga  liv  ,  livsform  och  forstandet  fortsatt  till  vara  nojer 
till  vad  siut  du  vilja  den  till  vara  for  jag. 

17.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  oppen  min  ande  inblicken  ( 
sluttningarna )  mer  och  mer  ,  och  sa  pass  var  min  forstandet 
eller  uppfattningen  av  du  ar  inte  exakt ,  sa  pass  du  skulle 
hjalpa  mig  till  lara  sig  vem  Jesus  Christ  sant  ar. 

18.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  ger  hjalp  till  jag  sa  fakta  at  JAG  skulle 
kunde  skild  fran  nagon  falsk  ritual  vilken  Jag  har  bero  pa  , 
fran  din  klar  undervisning  inne  om  Bibel ,  eventuell  om  vad 
JAG  foljer  ar  inte  av  Gud ,  eller  ar  i  strid  mot  vad  du  vilja 
till  undervisa  oss  omkring  foljande  du. 

19.  Sa  pass  nagon  pressar  av  onda  skulle  inte  ta  bort  nagon 
ande  forstandet  vilken  Jag  har  ,  utom  hellre  sa  pass  JAG 
skulle  halia  kvar  kunskap  om  hur  till  veta  du  och  mig  inte 
till  bli  lurat  i  den  har  dagen  av  ande  bedrageri. 

20.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  komma  med  ande  styrka  och  hjalp  till 
jag  sa  fakta  at  Jag  vill  inte  till  bli  del  om  den  Stor  Stjarnfall 
Bort  eller  av  nagon  rorelse  vilken  skulle  bli  spiritually 
forfalskad  till  du  och  mig  till  din  Helig  Uttrycka 

21.  Sa  pass  om  dar  er  nagot  sa  pass  Jag  har  gjort  det  min  liv 
,  eller  nagon  vag  sa  pass  Jag  har  inte  reagerat  till  du  sa  JAG 


skulle  har  och  den  dar  er  forhindrande  jag  fran  endera 
vandrande  med  du  ,  eller  har  forstandet ,  sa  pass  du  skulle 
komma  med  den  har  sakerna  /  svaren  /  handelsen  rygg  in  i 
min  sinne  ,  sa  fakta  at  JAG  skulle  avsaga  sig  dem  inne  om 
Namn  av  Jesus  Christ ,  och  all  av  deras  verkningen  och 
konsekvenserna  ,  och  sa  pass  du  skulle  satta  tillbaka  nagon 
tomhet  ,sadness  eller  fortvivlan  i  min  liv  med  det  Gladje  om 
Var  Herre  och  Fralsare  ,  och  sa  pass  JAG  skulle  bli  mer 
focusen  pa  inlarningen  till  folja  du  vid  lasande  din  uttrycka  , 
den  Bibel 

22.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  oppen  min  oga  sa  fakta  at  JAG  skulle 
kunde  klar  se  och  recognize  om  dar  er  en  Stor  Bedrageri 
omkring  Ande  amnena  ,  hur  till  forsta  den  har  phenomenon 
(  eller  de  har  handelsen  )  fran  en  Biblisk  perspektiv  ,  och  sa 
pass  du  skulle  ge  mig  visdom  till  veta  och  sa  sa  pass  Jag  vill 
lara  sig  hur  till  hjalp  min  vannerna  och  alskat  en  (  slaktingen 
)  inte  bli  del  om  it. 


23.  Sa  pass  du  skulle  tillforsakra  sa  pass  en  gang  min  oga 
de/vi/du/ni  ar  oppnat  och  min  sinne  forstar  den  ande  mening 
av  strom  handelsen  tagande  stalle  pa  jorden  ,  sa  pass  du 
skulle  forbereda  min  hjartan  till  accept  din  sanning  ,  och  sa 
pass  du  skulle  hjalpa  mig  forsta  hur  till  finna  mod  och  styrka 
igenom  din  Helig  Uttrycka  ,  bibeln.  Inne  om  namn  av  Jesus 
Christ ,  JAG  fraga  om  de  har  sakerna  bekraftande  min  onska 
till  vara  i  folje  avtalen  din  vilja  ,  och  JAG  fragar  till  deras 
visdom  och  till  har  en  karlek  om  den  Sanning 
Samar  betsvillig 


Mer  pa  botten  av  Sida 
Hur  till  har  Oandlig  Liv 


Vi  er  glad  om  den  har  lista  over  ( bon  anmoder  till  Gud )  ar 
duglig  till  hjalpa  du.  Vi  forsta  den  har  Maj  inte  bli  den  bast 
eller  mest  effektiv  oversattning.  Vi  forsta  det  dar  de/vi/du/ni 
ar  manga  olik  vag  av  yttranden  tanken  och  orden.  Om  du  har 
en  forslagen  for  en  battre  oversattning  ,  eller  om  du  skulle 
lik  till  ta  en  liten  belopp  av  din  tid  till  sanda  forslag  till  oss  , 
du  vill  bli  hjalpande  tusenden  av  annan  folk  ocksa  ,  vem 
vilja  da  lasa  den  forbattrat  oversattning.  Vi  ofta  har  en  Ny 
Testamente  tillganglig  i  din  sprak  eller  i  spraken  sa  pass 
de/vi/du/ni  ar  sallsynt  eller  gammal.  Om  du  er  sett  for  en  Ny 
Testamente  i  en  bestamd  sprak ,  behaga  skriva  till  oss. 
Ocksa  ,  vi  behov  till  vara  saker  och  forsok  till  meddela  sa 
pass  ibland  ,  vi  gor  erbjudande  bokna  sa  pass  blandar  inte 
Fri  och  sa  pass  gor  kostnad  pengar.  Utom  om  du  kan  icke 
har  rad  med  det  nagot  om  den  har  elektronisk  bokna  ,  vi 
kanna  ofta  gor  en  byta  av  elektronisk  bokna  for  hjalp  med 
oversattning  eller  oversattning  verk. 

Du  hade  inte  till  vara  en  professionell  arbetaren  ,  enda  et  par 
regelbunden  person  vem  er  han  intresserad  i  hjalpande.  Du 
borde  har  en  computern  eller  du  borde  ha  ingang  till  en 
computern  pa  din  lokal  bibliotek  eller  college  eller 
universitet ,  sedan  dess  den  har  vanligtvis  har  battre 
forbindelserna  till  Internet.  Du  kanna  ocksa  vanligtvis 
grunda  din  aga  personlig  FRI  elektronisk  sanda  med  posten 
redovisa  vid  gar  till  mail.yahoo.com 

###  Behaga  ta  en  stund  till  finna  den  elektronisk  sanda  med 
posten  adress  lokaliserat  nederst  eller  sluten  av  den  har  sida. 
Vi  hoppas  du  vill  sanda  elektronisk  sanda  med  posten  till 
oss  ,  om  den  har  er  av  hjalp  eller  uppmuntran.  Vi  ocksa 
uppmuntra  du  till  komma  i  kontakt  med  oss  angaande 
Elektronisk  Bokna  sa  pass  vi  erbjudande  sa  pass  de/vi/du/ni 
ar  utan  kostnad ,  och  fri. 


Vi  gor  har  manga  bokna  i  utlandsk  spraken  ,  utom  vi  inte 
alltid  stalle  dem  till  ta  emot  elektronisk  (  data  overfor  ) 
emedan  vi  bara  gora  tillganglig  bokna  eller  amnena  sa  pass 
de/vi/du/ni  ar  mest  begaret.  Vi  uppmuntra  du  till  fortsatta  till 
be  till  Gud  och  till  fortsatta  till  lara  sig  omkring  Honom  vid 
lasande  den  Ny  Testamente.  Vi  valkomnande  din 
sporsmalen  och  kommentarerna  vid  elektronisk  sanda  med 
posten. 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Anwylyd  Celi ,  Ddiolch  'eh  a  hon  'n  Grai 
Destament  gollyngwyd  fel  a  allwn  at  ddysg  hychwaneg 
amdanat.  Blesio  chyfnertha  'r  boblogi  'n  atebol  achos  yn 
gwneud  hon  Electronic  llyfr  ar  gael. 

Blesio  chyfnertha  'u  at  all  gweithia  ymprydia  ,  a  gwna 
hychwaneg  Electronic  llyfrau  ar  gael  Blesio  chyfnertha  'u  at 
ca  pawb  'r  adnoddau  ,  'r  arian  ,  'r  chryfder  a  'r  amsera  a  hwy 
angen  er  all  cadw  yn  gweithio  atat.  Blesio  chyfnertha  hynny 
sy  barthu  chan  'r  heigia  a  chyfnertha  'u  acha  an  everyday 
sail. 

Blesio  anrhega  'u  'r  chryfder  at  arhosa  a  anrhega  pob  un 
chanddyn  'r  'n  ysbrydol  yn  deall  achos  'r  gweithia  a  'eh 
angen  'u  at  gwna. 

Blesio  chyfnertha  pob  un  chanddyn  at  mo  ca  arswyda  a  at 
atgofia  a  ach  'r  Celi  a  atebiadau  arawd  a  sy  i  mewn 
chyhudda  chan  bopeth.  Archa  a  anogech  'u  ,  a  a  achlesi  'u  ,  a 
'r  gweithia  &  gweinidogaeth  a  ]n  cyflogedig  i  mewn.  Archa 


a  achlesech  'u  chan  'r  'n  Ysbrydol  Grymoedd  ai  arall 
rhwystrau  a  could  amhara  'u  ai  arafa  'u  i  lawr. 
Blesio  chyfnertha  'm  pryd  Arfera  hon  'n  Grai  Destament  at 
hefyd  dybied  chan  'r  boblogi  a  wedi  gwneud  hon  argraffiad 
ar  gael ,  fel  a  Alla  gweddi'o  am  'u  a  fel  allan  arhosa  at 
chyfnertha  hychwaneg  boblogi  Archa  a  anrhegech  'm 
anwylaeth  chan  'eh  'n  gysegr-lan  Eiria  ( 'r  'n  Grai  Destament 
),  a  a  anrhegech  'm  'n  ysbrydol  callineb  a  ddirnadaeth  at 
adnabod  gwellhawch  a  at  ddeall  'r  atalnod  chan  amsera  a  ]m 
yn  bucheddu  i  mewn.  Blesio  chyfnertha  'm  at  adnabod  fel  at 
ymdrin  'r  afrwyddinebau  a  Dwi  wynebedig  ag  ddiwedydd. 
Arglwydd  Celi ,  Chyfnertha  'm  at  angen  at  adnabod 
gwellhawch  a  at  angen  at  chyfnertha  arall  Cristnogion  i 
mewn  'm  arwynebedd  a  am  'r  byd.  Archa  a  anrhegech  'r 
Electronic  llyfr  heigia  a  hynny  a  gweithia  acha  'r  website  a 
hynny  a  chyfnertha  'u  'eh  callineb.  Archa  a  chyfnerthech  'r 
hunigol  aelodau  chan  'n  hwy  deulu  ( a  'm  deulu  )  at  mo  bod 
'n  ysbrydol  dwylledig  ,  namyn  at  ddeall  'eh  a  at  angen  at 
chymer  a  canlyn  'eh  i  mewn  'n  bob  ffordd.  a  Archa  'eh  at 
gwna  hyn  bethau  i  mewn  'r  enwa  chan  lesu  ,  Amen  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Iceland  -\  Icelandic 


Icelan  d 

Icelandic  Icelandic  -  Prayer  Requests  (praying /  Talking) 

to  God  -  explained  in  Icelandic  Language 

Prayer  Isceland  Icelandic  Jesus  Kristur  Baen  til  Guo 
Hvernig  til  Bioja  Hvernig  geta  spyrja  gefa  hjalpa  andlegur 
Leiosogn 


Tal  til  Gu5  the  Skapari  af  the  Alheimur  the  Herra : 

1 .  bessi  bu  vildi  gefa  til  mig  the  hugrekki  til  biSja  the  hlutur 
pessi  EG  porf  til  bi9ja 

2.  pessi  pu  vildi  gefa  til  mig  the  hugrekki  til  trua  pu  og 
piggja  hva5a  pu  vilja  til  komast  af  me5  minn  lif ,  i  staSinn  af 
mig  upphefja  minn  eiga  vilja  ( asetningur  )  yfir  pinn. 

3.  pessi  pu  vildi  gefa  mig  hjalpa  til  ekki  lata  minn  ogurlegur 
af  the  opekktur  til  verSa  the  afsokun  ,  e5a  the  undirstaSa 
fyrir  mig  ekki  til  bera  fram  you.  4.  J)essi  J)u  vildi  gefa  mig 
hjalpa  til  sja  og  til  lsera  hvernig  til  hafa  the  andlegur  styrkur 
EG  J)6rf  ( i  gegnum  J)inn  or5  the  Biblia  a )  fyrir  the  atburSur 
a  undan  )  og  b  )  fyrir  minn  eiga  personulegur  andlegur  fer5. 

5.  E>essi  J)u  Gu5  vildi  gefa  mig  hjalpa  til  vilja  til  bera  fram 
M  fleiri  6.  E>essi  J)u  vildi  minna  a  mig  til  tala  me5  f)u 
prayerwhen  )  EG  er  svekktur  e5a  i  vandi ,  i  staSinn  af 
erfiSur  til  asetningur  hlutur  eg  sjalfur  eini  i  gegnum  minn 
mannlegur  styrkur. 

7.  E>essi  J)u  vildi  gefa  mig  Viska  og  a  hjarta  fiskflak  me5 
Bibliulegur  Viska  svo  bessi  EG  vildi  bera  fram  J)u  fleiri  a 
ahrifarikan  hatt. 

8.  l^essi  bu  vildi  gefa  mig  a  longun  til  nema  binn  or5  the 
Biblia  the  Nyja  testamentiS  GuSspjall  af  Klosett ),  a  a 
personulegur  undirstaSa 

9.  J)essi  J)u  vildi  gefa  a5sto5  til  mig  svo  J)essi  EG  er  fser  til 
taka  eftir  hlutur  i  the  Biblia  ( binn  or5  )  hver  EG  geta 
personulega  segja  fra  til ,  og  J)essi  vilja  hjalpa  mig  skilja 
hvaSa  pu  vilja  mig  til  gera  ut  af  vi5  minn  lif. 


10.  J>essi  J)u  vildi  gefa  mig  mikill  skarpskyggni ,  til  skilja 
hvernig  til  litskyra  til  annar  hver  J)u  ert ,  og  J)essi  EG  vildi 
vera  fser  til  lsera  hvernig  til  lsera  og  vita  hvernig  til  standa 
me5  J)u  og  f>inn  or5  the  Biblia ) 

1 1 .  f>essi  bu  vildi  koma  me5  folk  (  e5a  websites  )  i  minn  lif 
hver  vilja  til  vita  bu  ,  og  hver  ert  sterkur  i  beirra  nakvsemur 
skilningur  af  J)u  ( gu5  );  og  E>essi  J)u  vildi  koma  me5  folk  ( 
e5a  websites  )  i  minn  lif  hver  vilja  vera  fser  til  hvetja  mig  til 
nakvsemur  lsera  hvernig  til  deila  the  Biblia  the  or5  gu5s 
sannleikur  (2  HrseSslugjarn  215:). 

12.  J>essi  J)u  vildi  hjalpa  mig  til  lsera  til  hafa  mikill 
skilningur  65ur  i  hver  Biblia  utgafa  er  bestur  ,  hver  er 
nakvsemur  ,  og  hver  hefur  the  andlegur  styrkur  &  mattur  ,  og 
hver  utgafa  samj)ykkja  me5  the  frumeintak  handrit  J)essi  J)u 
biasa  i  brjost  the  ritstorf  af  the  Nyja  testamentiS  til  skrifa. 

13.  l>essi  J)u  vildi  gefa  hjalpa  til  mig  til  nota  minn  timi  i  g65 
kaup  vegur  ,  og  ekki  til  soa  minn  timi  a  Falskur  e5a  tomur 
a5fer5  til  fa  loka  til  Gu5  (  en  J)essi  ert  ekki  hreinskilnislega 
Bibliulegur  ),  og  hvar  bessir  a5fer5  avextir  og  grsenmeti 
neitun  langur  or5  e5a  varanlegur  andlegur  avoxtur. 

14.  E>essi  J)u  vildi  gefa  a5sto5  til  mig  til  skilja  hvaSa  til  leita 
a5  i  a  kirkja  e5a  a  staSur  af  dyrkun  ,  hvaSa  g65ur  af 
spurning  til  spyrja  ,  og  J)essi  J)u  vildi  hjalpa  mig  til  finna 
trumaSur  e5a  a  prestur  me5  mikill  andlegur  viska  i  staSinn 
af  J)segilegur  e5a  falskur  svar. 

15.  J)essi  J)u  vildi  orsok  mig  til  muna  til  leggja  a  minniS  J)inn 
or5  the  Biblia  (  svo  sem  eins  og  Latneskt  letur  8),  svo  J)essi 
EG  geta  hafa  ba5  i  minn  hjarta  og  hafa  minn  hugur  tilbuinn  , 
og  vera  tilbuinn  til  gefa  oakveSinn  greinir  i  ensku  svar  til 
annar  af  the  von  bessi  EG  hafa  65ur  i  J)ii. 


16.  E>essi  J)u  vildi  koma  me5  hjalpa  til  mig  svo  pessi  minn 
eiga  guSfrseSi  og  kenning  til  vera  i  samrsemi  vi5  J)inn  or5 
the  Biblia  og  bessi  bu  vildi  halda  afram  til  hjalpa  mig  vita 
hvernig  minn  skilningur  af  kenning  geta  vera  bseta  svo  bessi 
minn  eiga  lif  lifestyle  og  skilningur  halda  afram  til  vera  loka 
til  hvaSa  bu  vilja  ba9  til  vera  fyrir  mig. 

17.  J>essi  bu  vildi  opinn  minn  andlegur  innsyn  (  endir  )  fleiri 
og  fleiri ,  og  bessi  hvar  minn  skilningur  e5a  skynjun  af  bu  er 
ekki  nakvsemur  ,  J)essi  J)u  vildi  hjalpa  mig  til  lsera  hver  Jesus 
Kristur  hreinskilnislega  er. 

18.  J>essi  J)u  vildi  gefa  hjalpa  til  mig  svo  pessi  EG  vildi  vera 
fser  til  aSskilinn  allir  falskur  helgisiSir  hver  EG  hafa 
6sjalfstse5i  a  ,  fra  J)inn  bjartur  kennsla  i  the  Biblia  ,  ef  allir  af 
hvaSa  EG  er  hopur  stuSningsmanna  er  ekki  af  Gu5  ,  e5a  er 
gegn  hvaSa  bu  vilja  til  kenna  okkur  65ur  i  hopur 
stuSningsmanna  J)u. 

19.  E>essi  allir  herafli  af  vondur  vildi  ekki  taka  burt  allir 
andlegur  skilningur  hver  EG  hafa  ,  en  fremur  J)essi  EG  vildi 
halda  the  vitneskja  af  hvernig  til  vita  J)u  og  ekki  til  vera 
blekkja  i  bessir  sem  minnir  a  gomlu  dagana)  af  andlegur 
blekking. 

20.  E>essi  bu  vildi  koma  me5  andlegur  styrkur  og  hjalpa  til 
mig  svo  pessi  EG  vilja  ekki  til  vera  hluti  af  the  Mikill  Bylta 
Burt  e5a  af  allir  hreyfing  hver  vildi  vera  andlegur  folsun  til 
J)u  og  til  J)inn  Heilagur  Or5 

21.  E>essi  ef  there  er  nokkuS  J)essi  EG  hafa  buinn  minn  lif , 
e5a  allir  vegur  J)essi  EG  hafa  ekki  sa  sem  svarar  til  J)u  eins 
og  EG  6x1  hafa  og  bessi  er  sem  koma  ma  i  veg  fyrir  e6a 
afstyra  mig  fra  annar  hvor  gangandi  me9  J)u  ,  e6a  having 
skilningur  ,  J)essi  J)u  vildi  koma  me5  J)essir  hlutur  /  svar  / 


atbur9ur  bak  inn  i  minn  hugur  ,  svo  bessi  EG  vildi  afheita  ba 
i  the  Nafn  af  Jesiis  Kristur  ,  og  ekki  minna  en  beirra  ahrif  og 
aflei9ing  ,  og  bessi  bii  vildi  skipta  um  allir  tomleiki  ,sadness 
e9a  orvsnting  i  minn  lff  me9  the  Gle9i  af  the  Herra  ,  og 
pessi  EG  vildi  vera  fleiri  brennidepill  a  lserdomur  til  fylgja 
bu  vi9  lestur  binn  or9  the  Biblia 

22.  J>essi  bu  vildi  opinn  minn  augsyn  svo  pessi  EG  vildi  vera 
fser  til  greinilega  sja  og  bekkjanlegur  ef  there  er  a  Mikill 
Blekking  65ur  i  Andlegur  atri9i ,  hvernig  til  skilja  this  q  ( 
e9a  pessir  atbur9ur )  fra  a  Bibliulegur  yfirsyn  ,  og  bessi  bii 
vildi  gefa  mig  viska  til  vita  og  svo  bessi  EG  vilja  lsera 
hvernig  til  hjalpa  minn  vinatta  og  ast  sjalfur  (  settingi )  ekki 
vera  hluti  af  it. 

23.  E>essi  bii  vildi  tryggja  J)essi  einu  sinni  minn  augsyn  ert 
opnari  og  minn  hugur  skilja  the  andlegur  merking  af 
straumur  atbur<3ur  hrifandi  sta5ur  i  the  verold  ,  J)essi  J)u  vildi 
undirbiia  minn  hjarta  til  biggja  binn  sannleikur  ,  og  J)essi  J)ii 
vildi  hjalpa  mig  skilja  hvernig  til  finna  hugrekki  og  styrkur  i 
gegnum  J)inn  Heilagur  Or9  the  Biblia.  I  the  nafn  af  Jesiis 
Kristur  ,  EG  spyrja  fyrir  J)essir  hlutur  staSfesta  minn  longun 
til  vera  i  samkomulag  J)inn  vilja  ,  og  EG  er  asking  fyrir  J)inn 
viska  og  til  hafa  a  ast  af  the  Sannleikur  Mottsekilegur 


Fleiri  a  the  Botn  af  Bla9si9a 
Hvernig  til  hafa  Eilifur  Lif 


Vi5  ert  gla5ur  ef  this  listi  (  af  bsen  bei9ni  til  Gu9  )  er  fser  til 
a5sto9a  J)ii.  Vi9  skilja  this  mega  ekki  vera  the  bestur  e9a 
arangursrikur  J)y9ing.  Vi9  skilja  J)essi  there  ert  margir  olikur 
lifha9arhaettir  af  tjaning  hugsun  og  or9.  Ef  J)ii  hafa  a 
uppastunga  fyrir  a  betri  J)y9ing  ,  e9a  ef  J)ii  vildi  eins  og  til 


taka  a  litill  magn  af  binn  timi  til  senda  uppastunga  til  okkur  , 
pu  vilja  vera  skammtur  pusund  af  annar  folk  einnig  ,  hver 
vilja  pa  lesa  the  bseta  bySing. 

Vi5  oft  hafa  a  Nyja  testamen  ti5  laus  i  binn  tungumal  e5a  i 
tungumal  pessi  ert  sjaldgsefur  e5a  gamall.  Ef  pu  ert  utlit  fyrir 
a  Nyja  testamentiS  i  a  serstakur  tungumal ,  poknast  skrifa  til 
okkur.  Einnig  ,  vi5  vilja  til  vera  viss  og  reyna  til  miSla  J)essi 
stundum ,  vi5  gera  tilboS  bok  J)essi  ert  ekki  Frjals  og  J)essi 
gera  kostnaSur  peningar.  En  ef  J)u  geta  ekki  hafa  efni  a 
sumir  af  J)essir  raftseknilegur  bok  ,  vi5  geta  oft  gera 
oakveSinn  greinir  i  ensku  skipti  af  raftseknilegur  bok  fyrir 
hjalpa  me5  pySing  e5a  pySing  vinna.  M  gera  ekki  ver5a  a5 
vera  a  faglegur  verkamaSur  ,  eini  a  venjulegur  manneskja 
hver  er  ahugasamur  i  skammtur.  M  6x1  hafa  a  tolva  e5a  bii 
6x1  hafa  aSgangur  til  a  tolva  a  J)inn  heimamaSur  bokasafn 
e5a  haskoli  e5a  haskoli ,  siSan  bessir  venjulega  hafa  betri 
tengsl  til  the.  M  geta  einnig  venjulega  stofnsetja  binn  eiga 
personulegur  FRJALS  raftseknilegur  postur  reikningur  vi5 
a5  fara  til  mail.yahoo.com 


E>6knast  taka  a  augnablik  til  finna  the  raftseknilegur  postur 
heimilisfang  staSgreina  a  the  botn  e5a  the  endir  af  this 
bla5si5a.  Vi5  von  bu  vilja  senda  raftseknilegur  postur  til 
okkur  ,  ef  this  er  af  hjalpa  e5a  hvatning.  Vi5  einnig  hvetja 
pu  til  snerting  okkur  viSvikjandi  Raftseknilegur  Bok  J)essi 
vi5  tilbod  bessi  ert  an  kostnaSur  ,  og  frjals. 


Vi5  gera  hafa  margir  bok  i  erlendur  tungumal ,  en  vi5  gera 
ekki  alltaf  staSur  J)a  til  taka  a  moti  electronically  (  ssekja 
skra  af  fjarlsegri  tolvu  )  J)vi  vi5  eini  gera  laus  the  bok  e5a  the 
atri5i  J)essi  ert  the  beiSni.  Vi5  hvetja  bu  til  halda  afram  til 
bi5ja  til  Gu5  og  til  halda  afram  til  lsera  65ur  i  Hann  vi5 


lestur  the  Nyja  testamenti9.  Vi9  velkominn  J)inn  spurning  og 
athugasemd  vi9  raftseknilegur  postur. 

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Danish  -  Danemark 


Danish  -  Prayer  Requests  (praying  /  T  alking)  to  God  - 
e  x  p  I  a  i  n  e  d  in  Danish  Language 

Prayer  Danish  Dannish  Denmarkjesus  Bon  hentilGod  HvorBed 
kunne  hore  mig  Hvoropfordre  indromme  haelp  hen  mig 

Taler  hen  til  God  ,  den  Skaberen  i  den  Alt ,  den  Lord  :  1.  at 
jer  ville  indr0mme  hen  til  mig  den  mod  hen  til  bed  den  sager 
at  JEG  savn  hen  til  bed 

2.  at  jer  ville  indr0mme  hen  til  mig  den  mod  hen  til  tro  jer 
og  optage  hvad  jer  ville  gerne  lave  hos  mig  liv  ,  istedet  for 
mig  ophoje  mig  besidde  vil  (  hensigt )  ovenfor  jeres. 

3.  at  jer  ville  indr0mme  mig  hjselp  hen  til  ikke  lade  mig 
skrsek  i  den  ubekendt  hen  til  blive  den  bede  om  tilgivelse  , 
eller  den  holdepunkt  nemlig  mig  ikke  hen  til  anrette  you. 

4.  at  jer  ville  indr0mme  mig  hjselp  hen  til  se  efter  og  hen  til 
laere  hvor  hen  til  nyde  den  appel  krsefter  JEG  savn  ( 
igennem  jeres  ord  den  Bibel )  en  )  nemlig  den  begivenheder 
foran  og  b  )  nemlig  mig  besidde  personlig  appel  rejse. 

5.  At  jer  God  ville  indr0mme  mig  hjselp  hen  til  ville  gerne 
anrette  Jer  flere 


6.  At  jer  ville  erindre  mig  hen  til  samtale  hos  jer  prayerwhen 
)  Jeg  er  kuldkastet  eller  i  problem  ,  istedet  for  pr0ver  hen  til 
l0se  sager  selv  bare  igennem  mig  human  krsefter. 

7.  At  jer  ville  indr0mme  mig  Klogskab  og  en  hjerte  fyldte 
hos  Bibelsk  Klogskab  i  den  grad  at  JEG  ville  anrette  jer 
flere  effektive. 

8.  At  jer  ville  indr0mme  mig  en  lyst  hen  til  lsese  jeres  ord , 
den  Bibel ,  (  den  Ny  Testamente  Gospel  i  John  ),  oven  pa  en 
personlig  holdepunkt 

9.  at  jer  ville  indr0mme  hjselp  hen  til  mig  i  den  grad  at  Jeg  er 
k0bedygtig  mserke  sager  i  den  Bibel  ( jeres  ord )  hvilke  JEG 
kunne  jeg  for  mit  vedkommende  henh0re  til ,  og  at  vil  hjselp 
mig  opfatte  hvad  jer  savn  mig  hen  til  lave  i  mig  liv. 

10.  At  jer  ville  indr0mme  mig  stor  discernment ,  hen  til 
opfatte  hvor  hen  til  forklare  hen  til  andre  hvem  du  er  ,  og  at 
JEG  ville  vaere  i  stand  til  laere  hvor  hen  til  laere  og  kende 
hvor  hen  til  rage  op  nemlig  jer  og  jeres  ord  (  den  Bibel ) 

1 1 .  At  jer  ville  overbringe  folk  (  eller  websites  )  i  mig  liv 
hvem  ville  gerne  kende  jer  ,  og  hvem  er  kraftig  i  deres 
n0jagtig  opfattelse  i  jer  God  );  og  At  jer  ville  overbringe 
folk  (  eller  websites  )  i  mig  liv  hvem  vil  vaere  i  stand  til  give 
mod  mig  hen  til  akkurat  lasre  hvor  hen  til  skille  den  Bibel 
den  ord  i  sandhed  Timothy  215:). 

12.  At  jer  ville  hjaelp  mig  hen  til  laere  hen  til  nyde  stor 
opfattelse  hvorom  Bibel  gengivelse  er  bedst ,  hvilke  er  h0jst 
n0jagtig  ,  og  hvilke  har  den  h0jst  appel  kraefter  &  kraft ,  og 
hvilke  gengivelse  indvilliger  hos  den  selvstasndig 
handskreven  at  jer  inspireret  den  forfatteres  i  den  Ny 
Testamente  hen  til  skriv. 


13.  At  jer  ville  indr0mme  hjselp  hen  til  mig  hen  til  hjselp  mig 
gang  i  en  artig  made  ,  og  ikke  hen  til  affald  mig  gang  oven 
pa  Falsk  eller  indholdsl0s  metoder  hen  til  komme  nsermere 
hen  til  God  (  men  at  er  ikke  sandelig  Bibelsk  ),  og  der  hvor 
dem  metoder  opf0re  for  ikke  sa  lsenge  siden  periode  eller 
varer  appel  fruit. 

14.  At  jer  ville  indr0mme  hjselp  hen  til  mig  hen  til  opfatte 
hvad  hen  til  kigge  efter  i  en  kirke  eller  en  opstille  i 
andagts0gende  ,  hvad  arter  i  sp0rgsmal  hen  til  opfordre  ,  og 
at  jer  ville  hjselp  mig  hen  til  hitte  tro  eller  en  sidst  hos  stor 
appel  klogskab  istedet  for  nemme  eller  falsk  svar. 

15.  at  jer  ville  hidf0re  mig  hen  til  huske  hen  til  lsere  udenad 
jeres  ord  den  Bibel  (  sasom  Romersk  8),  i  den  grad  at  JEG 
kunne  nyde  sig  i  mig  hjerte  og  nyde  mig  indre  forberedt ,  og 
vsere  rede  til  at  indr0mme  en  besvare  hen  til  andre  i  den 
habe  pa  at  Jeg  har  omkring  jer. 

16.  At  jer  ville  overbringe  hjselp  hen  til  mig  i  den  grad  at 
mig  besidde  theology  og  doctrines  hen  til  samtykke  med 
jeres  ord  ,  den  Bibel  og  at  jer  ville  fortssette  hen  til  hjselp 
mig  kende  hvor  mig  opfattelse  i  doctrine  kan  forbedret  i  den 
grad  at  mig  besidde  liv  lifestyle  og  opfattelse  fortssetter  at 
blive  n0jere  hvortil  jer  savn  sig  at  blive  nemlig  mig. 

17.  At  jer  ville  lukke  op  mig  appel  indblik  (  afslutninger  ) 
flere  og  flere  ,  og  at  der  hvor  mig  opfattelse  eller 
opfattelsesevne  i  jer  er  ikke  n0jagtig  ,  at  jer  ville  hjselp  mig 
hen  til  lsere  hvem  Jesus  Christ  sandelig  er. 

18.  At  jer  ville  indr0mme  hjselp  hen  til  mig  i  den  grad  at 
JEG  ville  vsere  i  stand  til  selvstsendig  hvilken  som  helst 
falsk  rituals  hvilke  Jeg  har  afhsenge  oven  pa  ,  af  jeres  slette 
lserer  i  den  Bibel ,  eventuel  hvoraf  Jeg  er  nseste  er  ikke  i  God 


,  eller  er  imod  hvad  jer  ville  gerne  belsere  os  omkring  nseste 
jer. 

19.  At  hvilken  som  helst  tvinger  i  darlig  ville  ikke  holde 
bortrejst  hvilken  som  helst  appel  opfattelse  hvilke  Jeg  har  , 
men  nsermest  at  JEG  ville  beholde  den  kundskab  i  hvor  hen 
til  kende  jer  og  ikke  at  blive  narrede  i  i  denne  tid  i  appel 
bedrag. 

20.  At  jer  ville  overbringe  appel  krsefter  og  hjselp  hen  til  mig 
i  den  grad  at  Ja  ikke  at  blive  noget  af  den  Stor  Nedadgaende 
Bortrejst  eller  i  hvilken  som  helst  bevsegelse  som  kunne 
vsere  spiritually  counterfeit  hen  til  jer  og  hen  til  jeres  Hellig 
Ord 

2 1 .  At  selv  om  der  er  alt  at  Jeg  har  skakmat  mig  liv  ,  eller 
hvilken  som  helst  made  at  Jeg  har  ikke  reageret  hen  til  jer 
nemlig  JEG  burde  nyde  og  det  vil  sige  afholder  mig  af  enten 
den  ene  eller  den  anden  af  omvandrende  hos  jer  ,  eller  har 
opfattelse  ,  at  jer  ville  overbringe  dem  sager  /  svar  / 
begivenheder  igen  i  mig  indre  ,  i  den  grad  at  JEG  ville  afsta 
fra  sig  i  den  Bensevne  i  Jesus  Christ ,  og  al  i  deres  effekter 
og  f0lger  ,  og  at  jer  ville  skifte  ud  hvilken  som  helst  tomhed 
,sadness  eller  opgive  habet  i  mig  liv  hos  den  Glsede  i  den 
Lord  ,  og  at  JEG  ville  vsere  flere  indstille  oven  pa  indlasring 
hen  til  komme  efter  jer  af  lsesning  jeres  ord ,  den  Bibel 

22.  At  jer  ville  lukke  op  mig  ojne  i  den  grad  at  JEG  ville 
vsere  i  stand  til  klart  se  efter  og  anerkende  selv  om  der  er  en 
Stor  Bedrag  omkring  Appel  emner  ,  hvor  hen  til  opfatte 
indevaerende  phenomenon  (  eller  disse  begivenheder  )  af  en 
Bibelsk  perspektiv  ,  og  at  jer  ville  indr0mme  mig  klogskab 
hen  til  kende  hvorfor  at  Ja  laere  hvor  hen  til  hjaelp  mig 
bekendte  og  elske  ones  (  slasgtninge  )  ikke  vaere  noget  af  it. 


23.  At  jer  ville  sikre  sig  at  nar  f0rst  mig  0jne  er  anlagde  og 
mig  indre  forstar  den  appel  vsegt  i  indevserende 
begivenheder  indtagelse  opstille  pa  jorden  ,  at  jer  ville  lsegge 
til  rette  mig  hjerte  hen  til  optage  jeres  sandhed  ,  og  at  jer 
ville  hjselp  mig  opfatte  hvor  hen  til  hitte  mod  og  krsefter 
igennem  jeres  Hellig  Ord  ,  den  Bibel.  I  den  bensevne  i  Jesus 
Christ ,  JEG  anmode  om  disse  sager  bekrseftende  mig  lyst  at 
blive  overensstemmende  jeres  vil ,  og  Jeg  er  bede  om 
nemlig  jeres  klogskab  og  hen  til  nyde  en  kserlighed  til  den 
Sandhed  Amen 


Flere  forneden  S  ide 
Hvor  hen  til  nyde  Evig  Liv 


Vi  er  glad  selv  om  indevserende  liste  over  (  b0n  anmoder 
hen  til  God  )  er  kan  hen  til  hjselpe  jer.  Vi  opfatte 
indevserende  ma  ikke  vsere  den  bedst  eller  hojst  effektiv 
gengivelse.  Vi  er  klar  over,  at  der  er  mange  anderledes  veje  i 
gengivelse  indfald  og  ord.  Selv  om  du  har  en  henstilling 
nemlig  en  bedre  gengivelse  ,  eller  selv  om  jer  ville  gerne 
hen  til  holde  en  ringe  bel0b  i  jeres  gang  hen  til  sende 
antydninger  hen  til  os  ,  jer  vil  vsere  hjalp  tusindvis  i  andre 
ligeledes  ,  hvem  vil  sa  er  der  ikke  mere  lsese  den  forbedret 
gengivelse. 

Vi  ofte  nyde  en  Ny  Testamente  anvendelig  i  jeres  sprog  eller 
i  sprogene  at  er  sjselden  eller  forhenvserende.  Selv  om  du  er 
ser  ud  nemlig  en  Ny  Testamente  i  en  specifik  sprog  ,  behage 
henvende  sig  til  os.  Ligeledes  ,  vi  ville  gerne  vsere  sikker  og 
pr0ve  hen  til  overf0rer  at  engang  imellem  ,  vi  lave  pristilbud 
b0ger  at  er  ufri  og  at  lave  omkostninger  penge.  Men  selv  om 
jer  kan  ikke  afgive  noget  af  dem  elektronisk  b0ger  ,  vi 
kunne  ofte  lave  en  udveksle  i  elektronisk  b0ger  nemlig 


hjselp  hos  gengivelse  eller  gengivelse  arbejde.  Jer  som  ikke 
har  at  blive  en  professional  arbejder  ,  kun  fa  sand 
pagseldende  hvem  er  interesseret  i  hjalp. 

Jer  burde  nyde  en  computer  eller  jer  burde  have  adgang  til 
en  computer  henne  ved  jeres  lokal  bibliotek  eller  kollegium 
eller  universitet ,  siden  dem  til  hverdag  nyde  bedre 
slsegtskaber  hen  til  den  indre.  Jer  kunne  ligeledes  til  hverdag 
indrette  jeres  besidde  personlig  OMKOSTNINGSFRIT 
elektronisk  indlevere  beretning  af  igangvserende  hen  til 
mail.yahoo.com 

### 

Behage  holde  for  et  ojeblik  siden  hen  til  hitte  den 
elektronisk  indlevere  henvende  placeret  nederst  eller  den 
enden  pa  legen  indevserende  side.  Vi  hab  jer  vil  sende 
elektronisk  indlevere  hen  til  os  ,  selv  om  indevserende  er  i 
hjaslp  eller  ophjaelpning.  Vi  ligeledes  give  mod  jer  hen  til 
henvende  sig  til  os  med  henblik  pa  Elektronisk  B0ger  at  vi 
pristilbud  at  er  uden  omkostninger  ,  og  omkostningsfrit. 

Vi  lave  nyde  mange  b0ger  i  udenlandsk  sprogene  ,  men  vi 
lave  ikke  altid  opstille  sig  hen  til  byde  velkommen 
elektronisk  (  dataoverf0re  )  fordi  vi  bare  skabe  anvendelig 
den  b0ger  eller  den  emner  at  er  den  h0jst  anmodede. 

Vi  give  mod  jer  hen  til  fortssette  hen  til  bed  hen  til  God  og 
hen  til  fortssette  hen  til  laere  omkring  Sig  af  laesning  den  Ny 
Testamente.  Vi  velkommen  jeres  sp0rgsmal  og 
bemaerkninger  af  elektronisk  indlevere. 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Norway  -  Norway  -  Norwegian  - 

Norway  -  Prayer  Requests  (praying )  to  God  -  explained 
in  Norwegian  Language 

Norway  Norwegian  Nordic  Prayer  Jesus  Christ  a  God  Hvor  Be 
kanne  hore  meg  bonn  anmode  gir  hjelpe  meg  finner  sprit  Som  kan 
ledes 


Snakker  a  God  ,  skaperen  av  det  Univers  ,  det  Lord  : 

1.  det  du  ville  gir  a  meg  tapperheten  a  be  tingene  det  JEG 
n0d  a  be 

2.  det  du  ville  gir  a  meg  tapperheten  a  mene  du  og 
godkjenne  hva  du  vil  gjerne  gj0re  med  meg  livet ,  istedet  for 
meg  opph0ye  meg  egen  ville  ( hensikten  )  over  din. 

3.  det  du  ville  gir  meg  hjelpe  a  ikke  utleie  meg  rank  av  det 
ubekjent  a  bli  det  be  om  tilgivelse  ,  eller  grunnlaget  for  meg 
ikke  for  a  anrette  you. 

4.  det  du  ville  gir  meg  hjelpe  a  se  og  a  hore  hvor  a  har  den 
sprit  styrke  JEG  n0d  ( igjennom  din  ord  bibelen  )  en  )  for 
begivenhetene  for  ut  og  b  )  for  meg  egen  personlig  sprit 
reise. 

5.  Det  du  God  ville  gir  meg  hjelpe  a  vil  gjerne  anrette  Du 
flere 

6.  Det  du  ville  minne  meg  a  samtalen  med  du  prayerwhen  ) 
JEG  er  frustrert  eller  inne  problemet ,  istedet  for  pr0ver  a 
l0se  saker  meg  selv  bare  igjennom  meg  human  styrke. 


7.  Det  du  ville  gir  meg  Klokskap  og  en  hjertet  fylte  med 
Bibelsk  Klokskap  i  den  grad  at  JEG  ville  anrette  du  flere 
effektivt. 

8.  Det  du  ville  gir  meg  en  0nske  a  studere  din  ord  ,  bibelen  , 
(  det  Ny  Testamentet  Gospel  av  John  ),  opp  pa  en  personlig 
basis 

9.  det  du  ville  gir  assistanse  a  meg  i  den  grad  at  JEG  er 
kj0pedyktig  legge  merke  til  saker  inne  bibelen  (  din  ord ) 
hvilke  JEG  kanne  personlig  fortelle  til ,  og  det  vill  hjelpe 
meg  oppfatte  hva  du  0nske  meg  a  gj0re  inne  meg  livet. 


10.  Det  du  ville  gir  meg  stor  discernment ,  a  oppfatte  hvor  a 
forklare  a  andre  hvem  du  er  ,  og  det  JEG  ville  vsere  i  stand 
til  h0re  hvor  a  h0re  og  vite  hvor  a  sta  opp  for  du  og  din  ord  ( 
bibelen  ) 

1 1 .  Det  du  ville  bringe  folk  (  eller  websites  )  inne  meg  livet 
hvem  vil  gjerne  vite  du  ,  og  hvem  er  kraftig  inne  deres 
akkurat  forstaelse  av  du  God  );  og  Det  du  ville  bringe  folk  ( 
eller  websites  )  inne  meg  livet  hvem  ville  vsere  i  stand  til 
oppmuntre  meg  a  akkurat  h0re  hvor  a  dividere  bibelen  ordet 
av  sannhet  (Timothy  215:). 

12.  Det  du  ville  hjelpe  meg  a  h0re  a  ha  stor  forstaelse  om 
hvilken  Bibel  versjon  er  best ,  hvilke  er  h0yst  akkurat ,  og 
hvilke  har  de  fleste  sprit  styrke  &  makt ,  og  hvilke  versjon 
avtaler  med  det  original  manuskriptet  det  du  inspirert 
forfatternes  av  det  Ny  Testamentet  a  skrive. 

13.  Det  du  ville  gir  hjelpe  a  meg  a  bruk  meg  tid  inne  en  fint 
vei ,  og  ikke  for  a  sl0seri  meg  tid  opp  pa  False  eller  tom 
emballasje  metoder  a  komme  naermere  a  God  (  bortsett  fra 


det  er  tkke  virkelig  Bibelsk  ),  og  der  hvor  dem  metoder 
tilvirke  for  ikke  sa  lenge  siden  frist  eller  varer  sprit  fruit. 

14.  Det  du  ville  gir  assistanse  a  meg  a  oppfatte  hva  a  kikke 
etter  inne  en  kirken  eller  en  sted  av  -tilbeder  ,  hva  arter  av 
sp0rsmal  a  anmode  ,  og  det  du  ville  hjelpe  meg  a  finner 
mene  eller  en  fortid  med  stor  sprit  klokskap  istedet  for  lett 
eller  false  svar. 

15.  det  du  ville  anledning  meg  a  erindre  a  huske  din  ord 
bibelen  (  som  Romersk  8),  i  den  grad  at  JEG  kanne  ha  den 
inne  meg  hjertet  og  ha  meg  sinn  ferdig  ,  og  vsere  rede  til  a 
gir  en  svaret  a  andre  av  det  hape  pa  at  JEG  ha  om  du. 

16.  Det  du  ville  bringe  hjelpe  a  meg  i  den  grad  at  meg  egen 
theology  og  doctrines  a  vsere  enig  i  din  ord  ,  bibelen  og  det 
du  ville  fortsette  a  hjelpe  meg  vite  hvor  meg  forstaelse  av 
doctrine  kan  forbedret  i  den  grad  at  meg  egen  livet  lifestyle 
og  forstaelse  fortsetter  a  bli  n0yere  hvorfor  du  0nske  den  a 
bli  for  meg. 

17.  Det  du  ville  apen  meg  sprit  innblikk  (  konklusjonene  ) 
flere  og  flere  ,  og  det  der  hvor  meg  forstaelse  eller 
oppfattelse  av  du  er  ikke  akkurat ,  det  du  ville  hjelpe  meg  a 
h0re  hvem  Jesus  Christ  virkelig  er. 

18.  Det  du  ville  gir  hjelpe  a  meg  i  den  grad  at  JEG  ville 
vsere  i  stand  til  separat  alle  false  rituals  hvilke  JEG  ha 
avhenge  opp  pa  ,  fra  din  helt  lserer  inne  bibelen  ,  eventuell 
av  hva  JEG  f0lger  er  ikke  av  God  ,  eller  er  i  motsetning  til 
hva  du  vil  gjerne  lsere  oss  om  fulgte  du. 

19.  Det  alle  presser  av  darlig  ville  ikke  ta  fjerne  alle  sprit 
forstaelse  hvilke  JEG  ha  ,  bortsett  fra  temmelig  det  JEG 
ville  selge  i  detalj  kjennskapen  til  hvor  a  vite  du  og  ikke  for 
a  vsere  narret  inne  i  disse  dager  av  sprit  bedrag. 


20.  Det  du  ville  taringe  sprit  styrke  og  hjelpe  a  meg  i  den 
grad  at  Jeg  vil  ikke  for  a  vsere  del  av  det  Stor  Faller  Fjerne 
eller  av  alle  bevegelse  hvilket  kunne  vsere  spiritually 
counterfeit  a  du  og  a  din  Hellig  Ord 

21.  Det  hvis  det  er  alt  det  JEG  ha  gjort  det  meg  livet ,  eller 
alle  vei  det  JEG  ha  ikke  reagert  a  du  idet  JEG  burde  ha  og 
det  er  forhindrer  meg  fra  enten  den  ene  eller  den  andre  av 
gaing  med  du  ,  eller  har  forstaelse  ,  det  du  ville  bringe  dem 
saker  /  svar  /  begivenheter  rygg  i  meg  sinn  ,  i  den  grad  at 
JEG  ville  renonsere  pa  seg  inne  navnet  av  Jesus  Christ ,  og 
alle  av  deres  virkninger  og  konsekvensene  ,  og  det  du  ville 
ombytte  alle  tomhet  ,sadness  eller  gi  opp  hapet  inne  meg 
livet  med  det  Glede  av  det  Lord  ,  og  det  JEG  ville  vsere  flere 
fokusere  opp  pa  innlsering  a  f0lge  etter  etter  du  av  lesing  din 
ord ,  det  Bibel 

22.  Det  du  ville  apen  meg  eyes  i  den  grad  at  JEG  ville  vsere  i 
stand  til  klare  se  og  anerkjenne  hvis  det  er  en  Stor  Bedrag 
om  Sprit  emner  ,  hvor  a  oppfatte  denne  phenomenon  (  eller 
disse  begivenheter  )  fra  en  Bibelsk  perspektiv  ,  og  det  du 
ville  gir  meg  klokskap  a  vite  hvorfor  det  Jeg  vil  h0re  hvor  a 
hjelpe  meg  venner  og  elsket  seg  (  slektningene  )  ikke  vsere 
del  av  it. 

23.  Det  du  ville  sikre  det  en  gang  meg  eyes  er  apen  og  meg 
sinn  forstar  det  sprit  vekt  av  aktuelle  begivenheter  tar  sted 
pa  jorden  ,  det  du  ville  forberede  meg  hjertet  a  godkjenne 
din  sannhet ,  og  det  du  ville  hjelpe  meg  oppfatte  hvor  a 
finner  tapperheten  og  styrke  igjennom  din  Hellig  Ord  , 
bibelen.  Inne  navnet  av  Jesus  Christ ,  JEG  anmode  om  disse 
saker  bekreftende  meg  0nske  a  bli  i  f0lge  avtalen  din  ville  , 
og  JEG  sp0r  til  deres  klokskap  og  a  har  en  kjserlighet  til  det 
Sannhet  Samarbeidsvillig 


Flere  pa  bunnen  av  S  ide 
Hvor  a  ha  Evig  Livet 


Vi  er  glad  hvis  denne  liste  over  (  b0nn  anmoder  a  God  )  er 
dugelig  a  hjelpe  du.  Vi  oppfatte  denne  kanskje  ikke  vsere  det 
best  eller  h0yst  effektiv  oversettelse.  Vi  forsta  det  der  er 
mange  annerledes  veier  av  gjengivelsen  innfall  og  ord.  Hvis 
du  har  en  forslag  for  en  bedre  oversettelse  ,  eller  hvis  du 
ville  like  a  ta  en  liten  bel0pet  av  din  tid  a  sende  antydninger 
a  oss  ,  du  ville  vsere  hjalp  tusenvis  av  andre  mennesker 
likeledes  ,  hvem  ville  sa  lese  det  forbedret  oversettelse.  Vi 
ofte  har  en  Ny  Testamentet  anvendelig  inne  din 
omgangssprak  eller  inne  sprakene  det  er  sjelden  eller  gamle. 
Hvis  du  er  ser  for  en  Ny  Testamentet  inne  en  spesifikk 
omgangssprak ,  behage  skrive  til  oss.  Likeledes  ,  vi  vil 
gjerne  vsere  sikker  og  pr0ve  a  meddele  det  en  gang  imellom 
,  vi  gj0re  tilbud  b0ker  det  er  ufri  og  det  gj0re  bekostning 
pengene. 

Bortsett  fra  hvis  du  kan  ikke  by  noen  av  dem  elektronisk 
b0ker  ,  vi  kanne  ofte  gj0re  en  bytte  av  elektronisk  b0ker  for 
hjelpe  med  oversettelse  eller  oversettelse  arbeide.  Du  som 
ikke  har  a  bli  en  profesjonell  arbeider  ,  kun  fa  stamgjest 
personen  hvem  er  interessert  i  hjalp.  Du  burde  har  en 
computer  eller  du  burde  ha  adgang  til  en  computer  for  din 
innenbys  bibliotek  eller  universitet  eller  universitet ,  siden 
dem  vanligvis  ha  bedre  forbindelser  a  det  sykehuslege.  Du 
kanne  likeledes  vanligvis  opprette  din  egen  personlig 
LEDIG  elektronisk  innlevere  regningen  av  gar  a 
mail.yahoo.com 

Behage  ta  en  0yeblikk  a  finner  det  elektronisk  innlevere 
henvende  seg  lokalisert  nederst  eller  utgangen  av  denne 
side.  Vi  hape  du  ville  sende  elektronisk  innlevere  a  oss  , 


hvis  denne  er  av  hjelpe  eller  oppmuntring.  Vi  likeledes 
oppmuntre  du  a  sette  seg  i  forbindelse  med  oss  angaende 
Elektronisk  B0ker  det  vi  tilbud  det  er  uten  bekostning  ,  og 
ledig. 

Vi  gj0re  ha  mange  b0ker  inne  utenlandsk  sprakene  ,  bortsett 
fra  vi  ikke  alltid  sted  seg  a  fa  elektronisk  (  dataoverf0re  ) 
fordi  vi  bare  lage  anvendelig  b0kene  eller  emnene  det  er  de 
fleste  anmodet.  Vi  oppmuntre  du  a  fortsette  a  be  a  God  og  a 
fortsette  a  h0re  om  Seg  av  lesing  det  Ny  Testamentet.  Vi 
velkommen  din  sp0rsmal  og  kommentarer  av  elektronisk 
innlevere. 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Modern  Greek 


IlpooetOT  oto  0e6  Aya7mx6c;  0e6<;,  Eac;  et)xapioxorjLie  6xt 
aox6  to  Erjayyeko  f)  ao-cf)  r)  vea  5ia9f)Kn  exet 
oaieXerj9epco9ei  exot  cboxe  eiuaoxe  oe  9eor|  va  ud9ot)ue 
7ieptoo6xepcflv  yta  oa;.  ITapaKaM)  Por|9f|oxe  xovq 
av9pd)7iorj<;  apuoStorjc;  yta  va  Kaxaoxf|oei  aox6  xo 
rjIeKipoviKo  Pipiio  5ta9eotuo.  Eepexe  710101  eivat  Koa  eioxe 
oe  9eor)  va  xovq  Por|9f|oexe.  ITapaKaM)  xovq  Por|9f|oxe  yta 
va  eioxe  oe  9eor)  va  a7taoxoXr|9ei  ypf)yopa,  Kat  va 
KaraoTrioei  oe  7ieptoo6xepa  r|XeKxpoviKd  Pipiia  5ta9eot|ia 
ITapaKaM)  xovq  Por|9f|oxe  yta  va  exexe  olouc;  xovq  7t6porj<;, 
ia  xpTHiaxa,  xn  5i3vaur|  Kat  xo  xpovo  6xt  xp£tdCovxai 
7tpoiceiuevorj  va  eivat  oe  9eor)  va  oi)vexioot)v  yta  oa;. 
ITapaKaM  Por|9f|oxe  eKeivot  7torj  eivat  uepoc;  xnc;  oudSac; 
7tot)  xovq  Por)9d  oe  Ka9r|uepivr|  pdor).  ITapaKaM  xovq 
5cboxe  xn  5i3vaur|  yta  va  ouvexioexe  Kat  va  5cboexe  oe  Kd9e 
evav  ajco  xovq  xo  O7upixoorjal  kov>  KoraMpaivet  yta  xnv 


epyaoia  6xi  xox>q  9eXexe  yia  va  K&veie.  riapaKaM)  Por|9f|oxe 
Kd9e  evac;  oaio  xovq  yia  va  lit|v  exexe  xo  (p6(3o  Kai  yia  va 
9i)Lir|9eixe  6xi  eioxe  o  ©eoc;  ran)  ajiavid  oxr|v  7tpooeuxii  Kai 
7iou  eivai  iwiei)9i)voc;  yia  6Xa. 
npooei3xo(iai  6xi  9a  xovq  ev9appi3vaxe,  Kai  6xi  xouc; 
7tpooxaxei)exe,  Kai  r)  epyaoia  &  xo  raoupyeio  6xi 
(Tumieieyouv. 

llpooeDxoLiai  6xi  9a  xorx;  7tpooxaxeDaxe  ajt6  tt?  7rvei)LiaxiKec; 
SuvdLieic;  f)  dXXa  eLira>5ia  ran)  9a  Lutoporjoav  va  zovc, 
pXdv|/ouv  f)  va  xouc;  emPpaSwouv.  IlapaKaM)  Lie  Por|9f|oxe 
6xav  xpT)oi|i07ioicb  ao-ciiv  xnv  vea  5ia9f|KT|  yia  va  oKecprcb 
87iiori<;  xovq  av9pcbran)c;  ran)  exouv  Kaxaoxf|oei  auxf|V  xnv 
8k5ooti  5ia9eoiLir|,  exoi  cboxe  Lutopcb  va  7tpooer|9cb  yia  xouc; 
Kai  exoi  Lutoporjv  va  oi)vexioouv  va  Por|9oi3v  7iepioo6xepouc; 
av9pcbran>c 

npooei)xo(iai  6xi  9a  liou  5ivaxe  Liia  ayd7tr|  xou  iepoi3  Word 
oac;  (r)  vea  5ia9f|KT|),  Kai  6xi  9a  liou  5ivaxe  xnv  7rveuLiaxiKec; 
(ppovr|OT|  Kai  xn  5idKpior|  yia  va  oac;  ^epexe  Kalurepa  Kai 
yia  va  KaxaXdpexe  xn  xpoviKf)  7iepio5o  6xi  (^ouLie  Lieoa. 
IlapaKalcb  Lie  Por|9f|oxe  yia  va  ^epexe  rak;  va  e^exdoei  xicj 
SuoKoMec;  6xi  epxoLiai  avxiLiexcora)c;  Lie  Kd9e  rpepa.  O 
A6p5ocj  God,  Lie  Por)9d  yia  va  9eXf|oei  va  oacj  ^epei 
Kalrjiepa  Kai  va  9eXf|oei  va  Por|9f|oei  dlloucj  Xpioxiavoucj 
oxr|v  7iepioxT)  uou  Kai  oe  6X0  xov  koolio. 
ITpooeuxoLiai  6xi  9a  5ivaxe  xnv  r|XeKxpoviKf|  OLidSa  Pipiicov 
Kai  eKeivoi  ram  xoucj  Por|9ouv  r)  (ppovr|of|  oacj.  ripooeuxoLiai 
6xi  9a  Por|9ouoaxe  ia  LieLiovcoLieva  Lielr)  xncj  oiKoyeveidcj 
xoucj  (Kai  xr|<;  oiKoyeveidcj  liou)  yia  va  e^a7taxr|9eixe  6x1 
7tvei)uaxiKd,  dkla  na  va  oac  KaialaPeie  Kai  na  va 
9eXf|oexe  va  oac  5exxeixe  Kai  va  aKoXou9f|oexe  Lie  Kd9e 
xpo7io.  Eraoric  raxpexexe  lio;  xnv  dveor)  Kai  o5r|yiec  oe 
aurouc  xouc  xpovouc  Kai  oac  (^rrccb  yia  va  kovco  auxd  xa 
7tpdyLiaxa  0x0  ovoLia  xou  Inoou,  Amen, 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


German  -  Deutch  -  Allemand 

German  Prayers  Gebet  zum  Gott  wie  man  wie  horen  kann 
dass  meinem  Gebet  wie  bittet  Hilfe  zu  mir  zu  geben  wie 
man  geistige  Anleitung 

German  -  Prayer  Requests  (praying  /  Talking)  to  God  - 
explained  in  German  Language 

Mit  Gott  sprechen,  der  Schopfer  des  Universums,  der  Lord: 

L,  die  Sie  zu  mir  dem  Mut,  die  Sachen  zu  beten  geben 
wiirden,  die  ich  benotige,  um  2.  zu  beten,  die  Sie  zu  mir  dem 
Mut,  Ihnen  zu  glauben  und  anzunehmen  geben  wiirden,  was 
Sie  mit  meinem  Leben  tun  mochten,  anstelle  von  mir  meine 
Selbst  erhebend  Wille  (Absicht)  uber  Direm. 

3.,  denen  Sie  mir  Hilfe  geben  wiirden,  um  meine  Furcht  vor 
dem  Unbekannten  die  Entschuldigungen  nicht  werden  zu 
lassen  oder  die  Grundlage  fur  mich,  zum  Sie  nicht  zu 
dienen. 

4.,  der  Sie  mir  Hilfe,  um  zu  sehen  geben  wiirden  und  zu 
erlernen,  wie  man  die  geistige  Starke  ich  hat,  benotigen  Sie 
(durch  Ihr  Wort  die  Bibel)  A)  fur  die  Falle  voran  und  B)  fur 
meine  eigene  personliche  geistige  Reise. 

5.  DaB  Sie  Gott  mir  Hilfe  geben  wiirden,  um  Sie  mehr 
dienen  zu  wiinschen 


6.  DaB  Sie  mich  erinnern  wiirden,  mit  Ihnen  zu  sprechen 
(prayer)when  mich  werden  frustriert  oder  in  der 
Schwierigkeit,  anstatt  zu  versuchen,  Sachen  selbst  nur  durch 
meine  menschliche  Starke  zu  beheben. 

7.  DaB  Sie  mir  Klugheit  und  ein  Herz  geben  wiirden,  fullten 
mit  biblischer  Klugheit,  damit  ich  Sie  effektiv  dienen  wiirde. 

8.  DaB  Sie  mir  einen  Wunsch  geben  wiirden,  Ihr  Wort,  die 
Bibel  zu  studieren,  (das  neues  Testament-Evangelium  von 
John)  auf  personlicher  Ebene 

9.  das  Sie  Unterstutzung  zu  mir  geben  wiirden,  damit  ich 
bin,  Sachen  in  der  Bibel  (Ihr  Wort)  zu  beachten  der  ich  auf 
und  der  personlich  beziehen  kann  mir  hilft,  zu  verstehen, 
was  Sie  mich  in  meinem  Leben  tun  wunschen. 

10.  DaB  Sie  mir  groBe  Einsicht  geben  wiirden,  um  zu 
verstehen  wie  nian  anderen  erklart,  die  Sie  sind,  und  daB  ich 
sein  wiirde,  zu  erlernen,  wie  nian  erlernt  und  kann  fiir  Sie 
und  Ihr  Wort  (die  Bibel)  oben  stehen 

11.  DaB  Sie  Leute  (oder  Web  site)  in  meinem  Leben  holen 
wiirden,  die  Sie  kennen  mochten  und  die  in  ihrem  genauen 
Verstandnis  von  Ihnen  stark  sind  (Gott);  und  das  wiirden  Sie 
Leute  (oder  Web  site)  in  meinem  Leben  holen,  das  ist,  mich 
anzuregen,  genau  zu  erlernen,  wie  nian  die  Bibel  das  Wort 
der  Wahrheit  (2  Timotheegras  2: 15)  teilt. 

12.  DaB  Sie  mir  helfen  wiirden  zu  erlernen,  groBes 
Verstandnis  uber,  welche  Bibelversion  zu  haben  am  besten 
ist,  die  am  genauesten  ist  und  die  die  geistigste  Starke  u.  die 
Energie  hat  und  dem  Version  mit  den  ursprunglichen 
Manuskripten  ubereinstimmt,  daB  Sie  die  Autoren  des  neuen 
Testaments  anspornten  zu  schreiben. 


13.  DaB  Sie  mir  Hilfe,  um  meine  Zeit  in  einer  guten  Weise 
zu  verwenden  geben  wiirden,  und  meine  Zeit  auf  den 
falschen  oder  leeren  Methoden  nicht  zu  vergeuden,  naeher 
an  Gott  (aber  dem,  zu  erhalten  nicht  wirklich  biblisch  seien 
Sie)  und  wo  jene  Methoden  keine  lange  Bezeichnung  oder 
dauerhafte  geistige  Frucht  produzieren. 

14.  DaB  Sie  mir  Unterstiitzung  geben  wiirden,  was  zu 
verstehen,  in  einer  Kirche  oder  in  einem  Ort  der  Anbetung 
zu  suchen,  welche  Arten  der  Fragen  zum  zu  bitten  und  daB 
Sie  mir  helfen  wiirden,  Glaubiger  oder  einen  Pastor  mit 
groBer  geistiger  Klugheit  anstelle  von  den  einfachen  oder 
falschen  Antworten  zu  finden. 

15.  den  Sie  mich  veranlassen  wiirden,  mich  zu  erinnern,  um 
sich  Ihr  Wort  zu  merken  die  Bibel  (wie  Romans  ist  8),  damit 
ich  es  in  meinem  Herzen  haben  und  an  meinen  Verstand 
sich  vorbereiten  lassen  kann,  und  bereit,  eine  Antwort  zu 
anderen  der  Hoffnung  zu  geben,  die  ich  uber  Sie  habe. 

16.  DaB  Sie  mir  Hilfe  damit  meine  eigene  Theologie  und 
Lehren  holen  wiirden,  um  mit  Ihrem  Wort,  die  Bibel 
ubereinzustimmen  und  daB  Sie  fortfahren  wiirden,  mir  zu 
helfen,  zu  konnen,  mein  Verstandnis  der  Lehre  verbessert 
werden  kann,  damit  mein  eigenes  Leben,  Lebensstil  und 
Verstehen  fortfahrt,  zu  sein  naeher  an,  was  Sie  es  fur  mich 
sein  wunschen. 

17.  DaB  Sie  meinen  geistigen  Einblick 
(Zusammenfassungen)  mehr  und  mehr  offnen  wiirden  und 
daB,  wo  mein  Verstandnis  oder  Vorstellung  von  Ihnen  nicht 
genau  ist,  daB  Sie  mir  helfen  wiirden,  zu  erlernen,  wem 
Jesus  Christ  wirklich  ist. 


18.  DaB  Sie  mir  Hilfe  geben  wiirden,  damit  ich  in  der 
LageSEIN  wiirde,  alle  falschen  Rituale  zu  trennen,  denen 
ich  von,  von  Hirem  freien  Unterricht  in  der  Bibel,  wenn 
irgendwelche  abgehangen  habe  von,  was  ich  folgend  bin,  ist 
nicht  vom  Gott,  oder  ist  kontrar  zu,  was  Sie  uns  unterrichten 
wiinschen  -  uber  das  Folgen  Sie. 

19.  DaB  keine  Krafte  des  Ubels  nicht  irgendwie  geistiges 
Verstandnis  wegnehmen  wiirden,  das  ich  habe,  aber  eher, 
daB  ich  das  Wissen  behalten  wiirde  von,  wie  man  Sie  kennt 
und  nicht  an  diesen  Tagen  der  geistigen  Tauschung  betrogen 
wird. 

20.  DaB  Sie  geistige  Starke  holen  und  zu  mir  helfen  wiirden, 
damit  ich  nicht  ein  Teil  von  groBen  weg  fallen  oder 
irgendeiner  Bewegung  bin,  die  zu  Ihnen  und  zu  Ihrem 
heiligen  Wort  Angelegenheiten  nachgemacht  sein  wiirde. 

21.  Das,  wenn  es  alles  gibt,  das  ich  in  meinem  Leben  getan 
habe  oder  irgendeine  Weise,  daB  ich  nicht  auf  Sie  reagiert 
habe,  wie  ich  haben  sollte  und  die  mich  entweder  am  Gehen 
mit  Ihnen  hindert  oder  Haben  des  Verstehens,  daB  Sie  jene 
things/responses/events  zuriick  in  meinen  Verstand,  damit 
ich  auf  sie  im  Namen  Jesus  Christ  verzichten  wiirde,  und 
alle  ihre  von  und  von  Konsequenzen  holen  wiirden  und  daB 
Sie  jede  mogliche  Leere,  Traurigkeit  oder  Verzweiflung  in 
meinem  Leben  mit  der  Freude  am  Lord  ersetzen  wiirden  und 
daB  ich  mehr  auf  das  Lernen,  Ihnen  zu  folgen  gerichtet 
wiirde,  indem  man  Ihr  Wort  las,  die  Bibel. 

22.  DaB  Sie  meine  Augen  offnen  wiirden,  damit  ich  in  der 
LageSEIN  wiirde,  offenbar  zu  sehen  und  zu  erkennen,  wenn 
es  eine  groBe  Tauschung  uber  geistige  Themen  gibt,  wie 
man  dieses  Phanomen  (oder  diese  Falle)  von  einer 
biblischen  Perspektive  und  daB  Sie  mir  Klugheit  geben 
wiirden,  um  zu  wissen  und  damit  ich  erlernt  versteht,  wie 


man  meinen  Freunden  und  liebte  eine  (Verwandte)  ein  Teil 
von  ihm  nicht  zu  sein  hilft. 

23  DaB  Sie  sicherstellen  wiirden,  daB  einmal  meine  Augen 
und  mein  Verstand  geoffnet  sind,  versteht  die  geistige 
Bedeutung  der  gegenwartigen  Falle,  die  in  der  Welt 
stattfinden,  daB  Sie  mein  Herz  vorbereiten  wiirden,  um  Ihre 
Wahrheit  anzunehmen  und  daB  Sie  mir  helfen  wiirden,  zu 
verstehen,  wie  man  Mut  und  Starke  durch  Ihr  heiliges  Wort, 
die  Bibel  findet.  Im  Namen  Jesus  Christ,  bitte  ich  um  diese 
Sachen,  die  meinen  Wunsch  bestatigen,  Ihr  Wille 
iibereinzustimmen,  und  ich  bitte  um  Hire  Klugheit  und  eine 
Liebe  der  Wahrheit  zu  haben,  Amen. 


Mehr  an  der  Unterseite  der  Seite 
wie  man  ewiges  Leben  u. 
Hat 


Wir  sind  froh,  wenn  diese  Liste  (der  Gebetantrage  zum 
Gott)  in  der  LagelST,  Sie  zu  unterstutzen.  Wir  verstehen, 
daB  diese  moglicherweise  nicht  die  beste  oder 
wirkungsvollste  Ubersetzung  sein  kann.  Wir  verstehen,  daB 
es  viele  unterschiedliche  Weisen  des  Ausdriickens  von  von 
Gedanken  und  von  von  Wortern  gibt.  Wenn  Sie  einen 
Vorschlag  fiir  eine  bessere  Ubersetzung  haben  oder  wenn 
Sie  etwas  Ihrer  Zeit  dauern  mochten,  Vorschlage  zu 
schicken  uns,  werden  Sie  Tausenden  der  Leute  auch  helfen, 
die  dann  die  verbesserte  Ubersetzung  lesen.  Wir  haben 
haufig  ein  neues  Testament,  das  in  Ihrer  Sprache  oder  in  den 
Sprachen  vorhanden  ist,  die  selten  oder  alt  sind. 


Wenn  Sie  nach  einem  neuen  Testament  in  einer  spezifischen 
Sprache  suchen,  schreiben  Sie  uns  bitte.  Auch  wir  mochten 
sicher  sein  und  versuchen,  das  manchmal  mitzuteilen,  bieten 
wir  Biicher  an,  die  nicht  frei  sind  und  die  Geld  kosten. 
Aber,  wenn  Sie  nicht  einige  jener  elektronischen  Biicher 
sich  leisten  konnen,  konnen  wir  einen  Austausch  der 
elektronischen  Biicher  ftir  Hilfe  bei  der  Ubersetzung  oder 
bei  der  Ubersetzung  Arbeit  haufig  tun.  Sie  miissen  nicht  ein 
professioneller  Arbeiter  sein,  nur  eine  regelmaBige  Person, 
die  interessiert  ist,  an  zu  helfen. 

Sie  sollten  einen  Computer  haben,  oder  Sie  sollten  Zugang 
zu  einem  Computer  an  Ihrer  lokalen  Bibliothek  oder 
Hochschule  oder  Universitat  haben,  da  die  normalerweise 
bessere  Anschliisse  zum  Internet  haben.  Sie  konnen  Ihr 
eigenes  personliches  FREIES  Konto  der  elektronischen 
Post,  indem  Sie  zum  mail.yahoo.com 


auch  normalerweise  herstellen  gehen  dauern  bitte  einen 
Moment,  um  die  Adresse  der  elektronischen  Post  zu  finden 
befunden  an  der  Unterseite  oder  am  Ende  dieser  Seite. 
Wir  hoffen,  daB  Sie  uns  elektronische  Post  schicken,  wenn 
diese  hilfreich  oder  Ermutigung  ist.  Wir  regen  Sie  auch  an, 
mit  uns  hinsichtlich  der  elektronischen  Biicher  in 
Verbindung  zu  treten,  die  wir  dem  sind  ohne  Kosten  und 
freies 


anbieten,  die,  wir  viele  Biicher  in  den  Fremdsprachen  haben, 
aber  wir  nicht  sie  immer  setzen,  um  elektronisch  zu 
empfangen  (Download)  weil  wir  nur  vorhanden  die  Biicher 
oder  die  Themen  bilden,  die  erbeten  sind.  Wir  regen  Sie  an 
fortzufahren,  zum  Gott  zu  beten  und  fortzufahren,  uber  ihn 
zu  erlernen,  indem  wir  das  neue  Testament  lesen.  Wir 


begriiBen  Dire  Fragen  und  Anmerkungen  durch 
elektronische  Post. 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Caro  Deus  ,  Obrigada  que  esta  Novo  Testamento  tem  sido 
lancado  de  modo  a  que  nos  somos  capaz  aprender  mais 
sobre  a  ti.  Por  favor  ajudar  a  gente  responsavel  por  fazendo 
esta  Electronico  livro  disponivel. 

Por  favor  ajudar  eles  estarem  capaz  de  trabalho  rapidamente 
,  e  fazer  mais  Electronico  livros  disponivel  Por  favor  ajudar 
eles  haverem  todos  os  recursos  ,  o  dinheiro  ,  a  forca  e  as 
horas  que  elas  precisar  a  fim  de  ser  capaz  de  guardar 
trabalhando  para  si. 

Por  favor  ajudar  aquelas  esse  are  parte  da  equipa  essa  ajuda 
lhes  num  todos  os  dias  base.  Por  favor  dar  lhes  a  forca 
continuar  e  dar  cada  deles  o  espiritual  comprendendo  para  o 
trabalho  que  voce  quer  eles  fazerem.  Por  favor  ajudar  cada 
um  deles  para  nao  ter  medo  e  lembrar  que  tu  es  o  deus  o 
qual  respostas  oracao  e  quem  e  encarregado  de  todas  as 
coisas. 

EU  orar  que  a  ti  would  encorajar  lhes  ,  e  que  voce  protege 
lhes  ,  e  o  trabalho  &  ministerio  que  elas  sao  comprometido 
em.  EU  orar  que  voce  protegeria  lhes  de  o  Espiritual  Forcas 
ou  outro  barreiras  isso  podeia  ser  maleficio  lhes  ou  lento 
lhes  abaixo. 

Por  favor  ajudar  a  mim  quando  Eu  uso  esta  Novo 
Testamento  para  tambem  reflectir  a  gente  o  qual  ter  feito 
esta  edicao  disponivel ,  de  modo  a  que  eu  possa  orar  para 
eles  e  por  conseguinte  eles  podem  continuar  ajudar  mais 


pessoas  EU  orar  que  voce  daria  a  mim  um  amar  do  seu 
Divino  Palavra  (  o  novo  Testamento  ),  e  que  voce  daria  a 
mim  espiritual  sabedoria  e  discernment  conhecer  a  ti  melhor 
e  para  comprender  o  periodo  de  tempo  que  nos  somos 
vivendo  em. 

Por  favor  ajudar  eu  saber  como  lidar  com  as  dificuldades 
que  Eu  sou  confrontado  com  todos  os  dias.  Lorde  Deus  , 
Ajudar  eu  querer  conhecer  a  ti  Melhor  e  querer  ajudar  outro 
Christian  no  meu  area  e  pelo  mundo.  EU  orar  que  voce  daria 
o  Electronico  livro  equipa  e  aquelas  o  qual  trabalho  no 
Websters  e  aqueles  que  ajudar  lhes  seu  sabedoria.  EU  orar 
que  voce  ajudaria  o  individuo  membros  do  seu  familia  (  e  a 
minha  familia )  para  nao  ser  espiritual  enganar  ,  mas 
comprender  a  ti  e  querer  aceitar  e  seguir  a  ti  em  todos 
bastante.  e  Eu  pergunto  voce  fazer  estas  coisas  em  nome  de 
Jesus  ,  Amen  , 


Dear  God, 

Thank  you  that  this  New  Testament 
has  been  released  so  that  we  are  able 
to  learn  more  about  you. 

Please  help  the  people  responsible  for  making  this 
Electronic  book  available.  Please  help  them  to  be  able  to 
work  fast,  and  make  more  Electronic  books  available 
Please  help  them  to  have  all  the  resources,  the  money,  the 
strength  and  the  time  that  they  need  in  order  to  be  able  to 
keep  working  for  You. 

Please  help  those  that  are  part  of  the  team  that  help  them  on 
an  everyday  basis.  Please  give  them  the  strength  to  continue 
and  give  each  of  them  the  spiritual  understanding  for  the 
work  that  you  want  them  to  do.  Please  help  each  of  them  to 
not  have  fear  and  to  remember  that  you  are  the  God  who 


answers  prayer  and  who  is  in  charge  of  everything. 

I  pray  that  you  would  encourage  them,  and  that  you  protect 
them,  and  the  work  &  ministry  that  they  are  engaged  in. 
I  pray  that  you  would  protect  them  from  the  Spiritual  Forces 
or  other  obstacles  that  could  harm  them  or  slow  them  down. 

Please  help  me  when  I  use  this  New  Testament  to  also  think 
of  the  people  who  have  made  this  edition  available,  so  that  I 
can  pray  for  them  and  so  they  can  continue  to  help  more 
people 

I  pray  that  you  would  give  me  a  love  of  your  Holy  Word 
(the  New  Testament),  and  that  you  would  give  me  spiritual 
wisdom  and  discernment  to  know  you  better  and  to 
understand  the  period  of  time  that  we  are  living  in. 

Please  help  me  to  know  how  to  deal  with  the  difficulties  that 
I  am  confronted  with  every  day.  Lord  God,  Help  me  to  want 
to  know  you  Better  and  to  want  to  help  other  Christians  in 
my  area  and  around  the  world. 

I  pray  that  you  would  give  the  Electronic  book  team  and 
those  who  work  on  the  website  and  those  who  help  them 
your  wisdom. 

I  pray  that  you  would  help  the  individual  members  of  their 
family  (and  my  family)  to  not  be  spiritually  deceived,  but 
to  understand  you  and  to  want  to  accept  and  follow  you  in 
every  way. 

and  I  ask  you  to  do  these  things  in  the  name  of  Jesus, 
Amen, 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Croatian  Croatian  Croatian 


Croatian  -  Prayer  Requests  (praying  )  to  God  -  explained 
in  Croatian  Language 

Croatian  Croatia  Prayer  Isus  Krist  Moljenje  to  Bog  Kako  to 
Moliti  moze  cuti  moj  pitati  popustanje  ponuditi  mene 

Govorenje  to  Bog ,  Stvoritelj  dana  Svemir ,  Gospodar  : 

1.  taj  te  ce  popustanje  meni  u  hrabrost  to  moliti  predmet  taj 
Trebam  to  moliti 

2.  taj  te  ce  popustanje  meni  u  hrabrost  to  vjerovati  te  i 
prihvatiti  sto  koji  zelite  za  napraviti  sa  mojim  zivot , 
umjesto  mene  uznijeti  moj  posjedovati  htijenje  (  namjera ) 
iznad  tvoj. 

3.  taj  te  ce  popustanje  mene  ponuditi  ne  pustiti  moj 
strahovanje  dana  nepoznat  postati  isprika  ,  ili  baza  za  mene 
ne  to  posluzitelj  you. 

4.  taj  te  ce  popustanje  mene  ponuditi  vidjeti  i  nauciti  kako  to 
imati  duhovni  snaga  Trebam  ( preko  tvoj  rijec  Biblija  ) )  za 
jedan  dan  dogadaj  ispred  i  b  )  za  moj  posjedovati  osobni 
duhovni  putovanje. 


5.  Taj  te  Bog  ce  popustanje  mene  ponuditi  istanje  to 
posluzitelj  Te  vise 

6.  Taj  te  ce  podsjetiti  mene  to  pricati  sa  te  prayerwhen  )  Ja 
sam  frustriran  ili  u  problemima ,  umjesto  tezak  to  odluka 
predmet  ja  osobno  jedini  preko  moj  covjecji  snaga. 

7.  Taj  te  ce  popustanje  mene  Mudrost  i  srce  ispunjen  sa 
Biblijski  Mudrost  tako  da  JA  ce  posluzitelj  te  vise  efektivno. 

8.  Taj  te  ce  popustanje  mene  zelja  to  studirati  tvoj  rijec  , 
Biblija  ,  ( novim  Oporuka  Evandelje  od  John  ),  na  osobni 
baza 

9.  taj  te  ce  popustanje  pomoc  meni  u  tako  da  Ja  sam  u 
mogucnosti  to  obavijest  predmet  in  Biblija  ( tvoj  rijec  )  sto 
Ja  mogu  osobni  povezivati  se  ,  i  da  htijenje  pomoc  mene 
shvatiti  sto  koji  zelite  mene  za  napraviti  u  mojem  zivot. 

10.  Taj  te  ce  popustanje  mene  velik  raspoznavanje  ,  to 
shvatiti  kako  to  objasniti  to  ostali  tko  ti  si ,  i  da  JA  bi  bilo  u 
mogucnosti  nauciti  kako  nauciti  i  znati  kako  to  pristajati  uza 
sto  te  i  tvoj  rijec  (  Biblija  ) 

1 1 .  Taj  te  ce  donijeti  narod  ( ili  websiteovi )  u  mojem  zivot 
tko  istanje  to  znati  te  ,  i  tko  jesu  jak  in  njihov  tocnost 
sporazum  od  te  (  bog  );  i  da  te  ce  donijeti  narod  ( ili 
websiteovi )  u  mojem  zivot  koji  ce  biti  u  mogucnosti  to 
hrabriti  mene  to  precizan  naucite  kako  podijeliti  Biblija  rijec 
od  istina  (2  Plasljiv  215:). 

12.  Taj  te  ce  pomoc  mene  nauciti  to  imati  velik  sporazum  o 
sto  Biblija  inacici  je  najbolji ,  sto  je  vecina  tocnost ,  i  sto  je 
preko  duhovni  snaga  &  Power  PC  ,  i  sto  inacici  sporazum  sa 
izvorni  rukopis  taj  te  nadahnut  autorstvo  dana  Nov  Oporuka 
to  pisati. 


13.  Taj  te  ce  popustanje  ponuditi  mene  koristenje  moj 
vrijeme  in  dobar  put ,  i  ne  to  prosipati  moj  vrijeme  na 
Neistinit  ili  prazan  Metodije  da  biste  dobili  Zatvori  to  Bog  ( 
ali  koji  nisu  vjerno  Biblijski ),  i  gdje  svi  oni  Metodije 
stvarajuci  nijedan  ceznuti  uvjeti  ili  trajan  duhovni  voce. 

14.  Taj  te  ce  popustanje  pomoc  meni  u  to  shvatiti  sto  uciniti 
traziti  in  Churchill  ili  mjesto  od  moliti  se  ,  sto  rod  od  pitanje 
to  pitati ,  i  da  te  ce  pomoc  mene  pronaci  onaj  koji  vjeruje  ili 
pastor  sa  velik  duhovni  mudrost  umjesto  lahak  ili  neistinit 
odgovoriti. 

15.  taj  te  ce  nanijeti  mene  to  sjecati  se  to  sjecati  se  tvoj  rijec 
Biblija  (  kao  sto  je  Rumunjski  8),  tako  da  Ja  mogu  imati 
Internet  u  mojem  srce  i  imati  moj  imati  sto  protiv  spreman  , 
i  biti  spreman  to  popustanje  odgovoriti  to  ostali  dana 
uzdanica  taj  Imam  o  te. 

16.  Taj  te  ce  donijeti  ponuditi  mene  tako  da  moj  posjedovati 
teologija  i  doktrina  to  poklapati  se  tvoj  rijec  ,  Biblija  i  da  te 
ce  nastaviti  to  pomoc  mene  znati  kako  moj  sporazum  od 
doktrina  moze  poboljsati  tako  da  moj  posjedovati  zivot ,  stil 
zivota  i  sporazum  nastaviti  biti  Zatvori  to  sto  koji  zelite 
Internet  biti  za  mene. 

17.  Taj  te  ce  OpenBSD  moj  duhovni  unutar  (  zakljucak ) 
vise  i  vise  ,  i  da  gdje  svi  moj  sporazum  ili  percepcija  od  te 
nije  tocnost ,  taj  te  ce  pomoc  mene  nauciti  tko  Isus  Krist 
vjerno  je. 

18.  Taj  te  ce  popustanje  ponuditi  mene  tako  da  JA  bi  bilo  u 
mogucnosti  to  odijeljen  bilo  koji  neistinit  ritualni  sto  Imam 
zavisnost  na  ,  from  tvoj  jasan  pomoc  u  ucenju  in  Biblija  , 
ako  postoje  od  sto  Ja  sam  sljedece  nije  od  Bog  ,  ili  je  ugovor 
to  sto  koji  zelite  to  vas  nauciti  nas  o  sljedece  te. 


19.  Taj  bilo  koji  sila  od  zlo  ce  ne  oduteti  bilo  koji  duhovni 
sporazum  sto  Imam ,  ali  radije  taj  JA  ce  cvrsto  drzati  znanje 
kako  to  znati  te  i  ne  biti  lukav  in  te  dani  od  duhovni  varka. 

20.  Taj  te  ce  donijeti  duhovni  snaga  i  ponuditi  mene  tako  da 
JA  nece  biti  dio  ognjevit  Jesen  Daleko  ili  od  bilo  koji  pokret 
sto  bi  bilo  produhovljeno  krivotvoren  novac  vama  i  u  vas 

S  vet  Rijec 

21.  Da  ako  ima  je  ista  taj  Imam  ispunjavanja  u  mojem  zivot 
,  ili  bilo  koji  put  taj  Imam  ne  odgovaranje  vama  kao  JA 
trebaju  imati  i  da  je  koji  se  moze  sprijeciti  mene  sa  ili 
hodanje  sa  te  ,  ili  vlasnistvo  sporazum  ,  taj  te  ce  donijeti  oni 
predmet  /  reakcija  /  dogadaj  leda  u  moj  imati  sto  protiv  , 
tako  da  JA  ce  odreci  se  njima  in  ime  od  Isus  Krist ,  i  svi  od 
njihov  efekt  i  posljedica  ,  i  da  te  ce  opet  staviti  bilo  koji 
praznina  ,sadness  ili  izgubiti  nadu  u  mojem  zivot  sa  Ono  sto 
pruza  uzitak  dana  Gospodar  ,  i  da  JA  bi  bilo  vise  fokusirati 
na  znanje  to  udarac  te  mimo  citanje  tvoj  rijec  ,  Biblija 

22.  Taj  te  ce  OpenBSD  moj  oci  tako  da  JA  bi  bilo  u 
mogucnosti  to  jasno  vidjeti  i  prepoznati  ako  ima  Velik 
Varka  o  Duhovni  tema ,  kako  to  shvatiti  ovaj  fenomen  ( ili 
te  dogadaj )  from  Biblijski  perspektiva  ,  i  da  te  ce 
popustanje  mene  mudrost  to  znati  i  tako  dalje  taj  JA  htijenje 
naucite  kako  pomoc  moj  prijatelj  i  voljen  sam  sebe  ( 
odnosni )  ne  biti  dio  it. 

23.  Taj  te  ce  osigurali  da  jedanput  moj  oci  jesu  OpenBSD  i 
moj  imati  sto  protiv  shvatiti  duhovni  izrazajnost  od  tekuci 
dogadaj  uzimanje  mjesto  u  svijetu  ,  taj  te  ce  pripremiti  moj 
srce  to  prihvatiti  tvoj  istina  ,  i  da  te  ce  pomoc  mene  shvatiti 
kako  pronaci  hrabrost  i  snaga  preko  tvoj  Svet  Rijec  ,  Biblija. 
In  ime  od  Isus  Krist ,  JA  traziti  te  predmet  potvrditi  moj 


zelja  biti  slozno  tvoj  htijenje  ,  i  Ja  sam  iskanje  tvoj  mudrost  i 
to  imati  hatar  dana  Istina  Da 


Vise  podno  Stranica 
Kako  to  imati  Vjecan  Zivot 


Mi  jesu  veseo  ako  ovaj  rub  (  od  moljenje  molba  to  Bog  )  je 
u  mogucnosti  to  pomoci  te.  Mi  shvatiti  ovaj  mozda  nece  biti 
najbolji  ili  vecina  djelotvoran  prevodenje.  Mi  shvatiti  koji  su 
mnogobrojan  razlicit  putevi  od  istiskivanje  misao  i  rijec. 
Ukoliko  imati  sugestija  za  bolji  prevodenje  ,  ili  ukoliko  ce 
voljeti  uzeti  malolitrazan  iznos  od  tvoj  vrijeme  to  poslati 
sugestija  nama  ,  te  htijenje  biti  pomoc  tisuca  od  ostali  narod 
isto  tako  ,  koji  ce  onda  citanje  oplemenjen  prevodenje.  Mi 
vise  puta  imati  Nov  Oporuka  raspoloziv  u  vas  jezik  ili  in 
jezik  koji  su  rijedak  ili  star.  Ako  ste  oblicje  za  Nov  Oporuka 
in  specifican  jezik  ,  ugoditi  korespondirati  nas.  Isto  tako  ,  mi 
istanje  istinabog  i  pokusati  komunicirati  taj  katkada  ,  mi 
obaviti  ponuda  knjiga  koji  nisu  Slobodan  i  da  obaviti  trosak 
novac. 

Ali  ukoliko  ne  moci  priustiti  neki  od  oni  elektronski  knjiga  , 
mi  moze  vise  puta  obaviti  izmjena  od  elektronski  knjiga  za 
pomoc  sa  prevodenje  ili  prevodenje  funkcionirati.  Nemate 
biti  koji  se  odnosi  na  zvanje  radnik  ,  samo  jedan  dan 
pravilan  osoba  tko  je  zainteresirana  za  pomoc.  Te  trebaju 
imati  racunalo  ili  te  trebaju  imati  pristup  to  racunalo  at  tvoj 
lokalni  knjiznica  ili  fakulteti  ili  sveucilista  ,  otada  oni  obicno 
imati  bolji  povezivanje  to  Internet.  Mozete  isto  tako  obicno 
utemeljiti  tvoj  posjedovati  osobni  SLOBODAN  elektronicka 
posta  racun  odlaskom  na  mail.yahoo.com 


Ugoditi  uzeti  tren  pronaci  elektronicka  posta  adresa  smjestiti 
na  dnu  ili  kraj  od  ovaj  stranica.  Nadamo  se  te  htijenje  poslati 
elektronicka  posta  nama  ,  ako  ovaj  je  od  pomoc  ili 
hrabrenje.  Mi  isto  tako  hrabriti  te  to  kontakt  nas  zabrinutost 
Elektronski  Knjiga  koju  nudimo  koji  su  sa  trosak  ,  i 
slobodan. 

Mi  obaviti  imati  mnogobrojan  knjiga  in  stran  jezik  ,  ali  mi 
ne  uvijek  mjesto  njima  to  primiti  elektronski  ( preuzimanje 
datoteka )  jer  mi  jedini  izraditi  raspoloziv  knjiga  ili  tema 
koji  su  preko  molba.  Mi  hrabriti  te  to  nastaviti  to  moliti  to 
Bog  i  to  nastaviti  nauciti  o  Njemu  mimo  citanje  novim 
Oporuka.  Mi  dobrodosli  na  tvoj  pitanje  i  komentirajte  mimo 
elektronicka  posta. 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

CZECH  CZECH  TCHEK 

Czech  Prayer  Modlitba  Kristian  jezuita  Kristus  az  k  Buh  Jak 
Modlit  Buh  pocinovat  slyset  modlitba  k  ptat  Buh  darovat 
pomoci  mne 

Czech  -  Prayer  Requests  (praying  /  Talking)  to  God  - 
explained  in  Czech  Language 

Mluveni  az  k  Buh  ,  clen  urcity  Stvof itel  of  clen  urcity 
Soubor  ,  clen  urcity  Hospodin  : 

1 .  aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  az  k  mne  clen  urcity  kuraz  az 
k  modlit  clen  urcity  majetek  aby  Nemusim  az  k  modlit 

2.  aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  az  k  mne  clen  urcity  kuraz  az 
k  domnivat  se  tebe  a  pfijmout  jaky  tebe  potfeba  az  k  jednat 
ma  duch  ,  misto  mne  povysit  ja  sam  vule  (  cfl )  nad  tvuj. 


3.  aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  mne  pomoci  az  k  ne  dovolit 
ma  bat  se  of  clen  urcity  neznama  az  k  stat  se  clen  urcity 
odpustit ,  ci  clen  urcity  baze  do  mne  rozchazet  se  v  nazorech 
slouzit  you. 

4.  aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  mne  pomoci  az  k  videt  a  az  k 
dostat  instrukce  jak?  az  k  mit  clen  urcity  duchovni  sfla 
Nemusim  (  docela  tvuj  slovo  clen  urcity  Bible  )  jeden  )  do 
clen  urcity  pfihoda  vpfed  a  b  )  do  ja  sam  osobni  duchovni 
cesta. 

5.  Aby  tebe  Buh  chtel  bych  darovat  mne  pomoci  az  k 
potfeba  az  k  slouzit  Tebe  vice  6.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych 
pfipomenout  komu  mne  az  k  rozmlouvat  s  tebe  prayerwhen 
)  JA  am  zmafeny  ci  do  nesnaz  ,  misto  trying  az  k  analyzovat 
majetek  ja  sam  ale  docela  ma  lidsky  sfla. 

7.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  mne  Moudrost  a  jeden  srdce 
nakyp  s  Biblicky  Moudrost  tak,  ze  JA  chtel  bych  slouzit 
tebe  vice  efektivni.  8.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  mne 
jeden  porucit  az  k  uceni  tvuj  slovo  ,  clen  urcity  Bible  ,  ( 
Novy  zakon  Evangelium  of  Jan  ),  dale  jeden  osobni  baze 

9.  aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  pomoc  az  k  mne  tak,  ze  J  A 
am  schopny  az  k  oznameni  majetek  do  clen  urcity  Bible  ( 
tvuj  slovo  )  kdo  Dovedu  co  se  me  tyce  byt  v  pomeru  k  sem 
tam  ,  to  postaci  pomoci  mne  dovidat  se  jaky  tebe  potfeba 
mne  az  k  zavrazdit  ma  duch. 

10.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  mne  celek  bystrost ,  az  k 
dovidat  se  jak?  az  k  jasne  se  vyjadf  it  az  k  jini  kdo  tebe  ar  ,  a 
aby  JA  chtel  bych  byt  schopny  az  k  dostat  instrukce  jak?  az 
k  dostat  instrukce  a  vRdRt  jak?  az  k  postavit  se  za  tebe  a 
tvuj  slovo  (  clen  urcity  Bible  ) 


1 1 .  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  nest  lid  (  ci  websites  )  do  ma  duch 
kdo  potfeba  az  k  vRdRt  tebe  ,  a  kdo  ar  silny  do  jejich  pfesny 
dohoda  of  tebe  (  buh  );  a  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  nest  lid  (  ci 
websites  )  do  ma  duch  kdo  vule  byt  schopny  az  k  dodat 
mysli  mne  az  k  pfesny  dostat  instrukce  jak?  az  k  delit  clen 
urcity  Bible  Pismo  svate  pravda  (2  Bazlivy  215:). 

12.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  pomoci  mne  az  k  dostat  instrukce  az 
k  mit  celek  dohoda  kolem  kdo  Bible  liceni  is  nejlepe  ,  kdo  is 
nejcetnejsi  pfesny  ,  a  kdo  3sg.prez.od  have  clen  urcity 
nejcetnejsi  duchovni  sila  &  mnozstvi ,  a  kdo  liceni  souhlasi 
jit  s  duchem  casu  original  rukopis  aby  tebe  dychat  clen 
urcity  spisovatele  of  Novy  zakon  az  k  psat. 

13.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  pomoci  az  k  mne  az  k 
cviceni  ma  cas  do  jeden  blaho  cesta  ,  a  rozchazet  se  v 
nazorech  zpustosit  ma  cas  dale  Chybny  ci  hladovy  metody 
az  k  brat  blizky  az  k  Buh  ( kdyby  ne  ar  ne  opravdu  Biblicky 
),  a  kde  those  metody  napsat  ne  dlouha  hlaska  cas  ci 
{lastingllstalylltrvaly} }  duchovni  nest  ovoce. 

14.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  pomoc  az  k  mne  az  k 
dovidat  se  jaky  az  k  hledat  do  jeden  cirkev  ci  jeden  bydliste 
of  uctivani ,  jaky  rody  of  otazky  az  k  ptat  se  ,  a  aby  tebe 
chtel  bych  pomoci  mne  az  k  nalez  vef  fci  ci  jeden  duchovni  s 
celek  duchovni  moudrost  misto  bezstarostny  ci  chybny 
odpovida. 

15.  aby  tebe  chtel  bych  byt  pficinou  mne  na  pametnou  az  k 
memorovat  tvuj  slovo  clen  urcity  Bible  ( jako  takovy  Riman 
8),  tak,  ze  Dovedu  mit  ono  do  ma  srdce  a  mit  ma  mysl 
pfipraveny  ,  a  byt  hbity  az  k  darovat  neurc.  clen  byt  v 
souhlase  s  jini  of  clen  urcity  nadeje  aby  Mam  u  sebe  tebe. 

16.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  nest  pomoci  az  k  mne  tak,  ze  ja  sam 
bohoslovi  a  doktrina  az  k  souhlasit  s  tvuj  slovo  ,  clen  urcity 


Bible  a  aby  tebe  chtel  bych  stale  byt  pomoci  mne  vRdRt 
jak?  ma  dohoda  of  doktrina  pocfnovat  byt  opravit  tak,  ze  ja 
sam  duch  lifestyle  a  dohoda  odrocit  az  k  byt  blizky  k 
jakemu  licelu  tebe  potfeba  ono  az  k  byt  pro  mne. 

17.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  nechraneny  ma  duchovni  jasnozfenf 
( konec  )  cim  dale,  tim  vice  ,  a  aby  kde  ma  dohoda  ci 
chapavost  of  tebe  is  ne  pfesny  ,  aby  tebe  chtel  bych  pomoci 
mne  az  k  dostat  instrukce  kdo  Jezuita  Kristus  opravdu  is. 

18.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  pomoci  az  k  mne  tak,  ze  JA 
chtel  bych  byt  schopny  az  k  oddeleny  jakykoliv  chybny 
obfad  kdo  J  A  mit  duvera  dale  ,  dle  tvuj  cely  doktrina  do  clen 
urcity  Bible  ,  jestli  vubec  of  jaky  JA  am  nasledujici  is  ne  of 
Buh  ,  ci  is  proti  cemu  jaky  tebe  potfeba  az  k  ucit  us  kolem 
nasledujici  tebe. 

19.  Aby  jakykoliv  dohnat  of  nestesti  chtel  bych  ne  odebrat 
jakykoliv  duchovni  dohoda  kdo  JA  mit ,  aby  ne  dosti  aby  JA 
chtel  bych  drzet  clen  urcity  znalost  ceho  jak?  az  k  vRdRt 
tebe  a  rozchazet  se  v  nazorech  byt  kiamat  do  tezaury  days  of 
duchovni  klam. 

20.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  nest  duchovni  sila  a  pomoci  az  k 
mne  tak,  ze  JA  vule  rozchazet  se  v  nazorech  byt  cast  of 
notablove  Klesani  Pryc  ci  of  jakykoliv  pohyb  kdo  chtel  bych 
byt  duchovo  falsovat  az  k  tebe  a  az  k  tvuj  Svaty  Slovo 

21.  Aby  -li  tam  is  cokoli  aby  JA  mit  utahany  ma  duch  ,  ci 
jakkoli  aby  JA  mit  ne  dotazovana  osoba  az  k  tebe  ackoliv 
Sel  bych  mit  a  to  jest  opatfeni  mne  dle  jeden  nebo  druhy 
kraceni  s  tebe  ,  ci  having  dohoda  ,  aby  tebe  chtel  bych  nest 
those  majetek  /  citlivost  pfistroje  /  pfihoda  bek  do  ma  mysl , 
tak,  ze  JA  chtel  bych  nectit  barvu  je  jmenem  koho  Jezuita 
Kristus  ,  a  celek  of  jejich  dojem  a  dosah  ,  a  aby  tebe  chtel 
bych  dat  na  dfivejsi  misto  jakykoliv  emptiness  ,sadness  ci 


beznadejnost  do  ma  duch  jit  s  duchem  casu  Radost  of  clen 
urcity  Hospodin  ,  a  aby  J  chtel  bych  byt  vice  lozisko  dale 
ucenost  az  k  doprovazet  tebe  do  cetba  tvuj  slovo  ,  Bible 

22.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  nechraneny  probuh  tak,  ze  J  A  chtel 
bych  byt  schopny  az  k  jasne  videt  a  pochopit  -li  tam  is  jeden 
Celek  Klam  kolem  Duchovni  namet ,  jak?  az  k  dovidat  se 
tato  pfechodny  (  ci  tezaury  pfihoda )  dle  jeden  Biblicky 
perspektiva  ,  a  aby  tebe  chtel  bych  darovat  mne  moudrost  az 
k  vRdRt  a  tak,  ze  JA  vule  dostat  instrukce  jak?  poslouzit 
jidlem  ma  druh  a  Amor  sam  ( pfibuzni )  ne  byt  cast  of  it. 

23.  Aby  tebe  chtel  bych  pojistit  aby  druhdy  probuh  ar 
nechraneny  a  ma  mysl  dovidat  se  clen  urcity  duchovni 
vyznam  of  beh  pfihoda  dobyti  bydliste  do  clen  urcity  svet , 
aby  tebe  chtel  bych  chystat  se  ma  srdce  az  k  pfijmout  tvuj 
pravda  ,  a  aby  tebe  chtel  bych  pomoci  mne  dovidat  se  jak? 
az  k  nalez  kuraz  a  sila  docela  tvuj  Svaty  Slovo  ,  clen  urcity 
Bible.  Jmenem  koho  Jezuita  Kristus  ,  JA  tazat  se  na  tezaury 
majetek  bifmovat  ma  porucit  az  k  bjH;  doma  souhlas  tvuj 
vule  ,  a  JA  am  ptani  se  do  tvuj  moudrost  a  az  k  mit  jeden 
laska  ke  komu  clen  urcity  Pravda  Amen 


Vice  v  clen  urcity  Dno  of  Blok 
Jak?  az  k  mit  Nekonecny  Duch 


My  ar  rad  -li  tato  barevny  pruh  of  modlitba  dotaz  az  k  Buh 
is  schopny  az  k  pomahat  tebe.  My  dovidat  se  tato  moci  ne 
byt  clen  urcity  nejlepe  ci  nejcetnejsi  efektivni  desifrovani. 
My  dovidat  se  tamhleten  ar  mnoho  neobvykly  cesty  of 
interpretace  domneni  a  slova.  -li  tebe  mit  jeden  navrh  do 
jeden  lepe  desifrovani ,  ci  -li  tebe  chtel  bych  do  teze  mfry  az 


k  brat  jeden  maly  cinit  of  tvuj  cas  az  k  poslat  navrhy  az  k  us 
,  tebe  vule  byt  porce  jidla  tisic  of  druhy  lid  rovnez  ,  kdo  vule 
nekdy  cist  clen  urcity  opravit  desifrovani.  My  casto  mit 
jeden  Novy  Posledni  vule  pfistupny  do  tvuj  jazyk  ci  do 
jazyk  aby  ar  nedovafeny  ci  davny.  -li  tebe  ar  hledet  do  jeden 
Novy  Posledni  vule  do  jeden  specificky  jazyk  ,  byt  pfijemny 
psat  az  k  us.  Rovnez  ,  my  potfeba  az  k  jiste  a  namahat  az  k 
byt  ve  styku  aby  nekdy  ,  my  cinit  nabidka  blok  aby  ar  ne 
Drzy  a  aby  cinit  cena  penize. 

Aby  ne  -li  tebe  delostfelectvo  pfitok  nejaky  of  those 
elektronicky  blok  ,  my  pocinovat  casto  cinit  neurc.  clen 
burza  of  elektronicky  blok  do  pomoci  s  desifrovani  ci 
desifrovani  prace.  Tebe  cinit  ne  mit  az  k  bjH;  jeden  odborny 
delnik  ,  ale  jeden  pofadny  osoba  kdo  is  obchod  do  porce 
jidla.  Tebe  pozadovat  mit  jeden  pocitac  ci  tebe  pozadovat 
mit  pfistup  az  k  jeden  pocitac  v  tvuj  lokalka  knihovna  ci 
akademie  ci  univerzita  ,  od  te  doby  those  obvykly  mit  lepe 
klientela  az  k  clen  urcity  internovana  osoba.  Tebe  pocinovat 
rovnez  obvykly  upevnit  tvuj  drahy  osobni  DRZY 
elektronicka  posta  ucet  do  existujici  az  k  mail.yahoo.com 

BjH;  pfijemny  brat  jeden  dulezitost  az  k  nalez  clen  urcity 
elektronicka  posta  adresovat  nalezt  v  clen  urcity  dno  ci  clen 
urcity  cfl  of  tato  blok.  My  nadeje  tebe  vule  poslat 
elektronicka  posta  az  k  us  ,  -li  tato  is  of  pomoci  ci  podpora. 
My  rovnez  dodat  mysli  tebe  az  k  dotyk  us  pokud  jde  o 
Elektronicky  Blok  aby  my  nabidka  aby  ar  bez  cena  ,  a  drzy. 


My  cinit  mit  mnoho  blok  do  cizi  jazyk  ,  aby  ne  my  cinit 
nekdy  bydliste  je  az  k  dostat  electronically  (  zavadeni ) 
ponevadz  my  ale  delat  pfistupny  clen  urcity  blok  ci  clen 
urcity  namet  aby  ar  clen  urcity  nejcetnejsi  dotaz.  My  dodat 
mysli  tebe  az  k  stale  byt  modlit  az  k  Buh  a  az  k  stale  byt 


dostat  instrukce  kolem  Jemu  do  cetba  Novy  zakon.  My  vftat 
tvuj  otazky  a  poznamky  do  elektronicka  posta. 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Drogi  Bog  ,  Dzigkujg  6  w  ten  Nowy  Testament 

ma  byl  zwolniony  byle  tylko  jestesmy  able  wobec  nauczyc 
si§  liczniejszy  okolo  ty.  Prosz§  mi  pomoc  ludzie 
odpowiedzialny  pod  katem  wykonaniem  ten  Elektroniczny 
ksiazka  rozporzadzalny. 

Prosz§  mi  pomoc  im  zostac  wyplacalny  praca  umocowany  , 
i  zrobic  liczniejszy  Elektroniczny  ksiazki  rozporzadzalny 
Prosz§  mi  pomoc  im  wobec  miec  wszystko  ten  zasoby  ,  ten 
pieniadze  ,  ten  sila  i  ten  czas  6w  oni  potrzebowac  w  klasa 
zostac  wyplacalny  utrzymywac  dzialanie  pod  k^tem  Ty. 
Prosz§  mi  pomoc  6w  6w  jestescie  obowi^zek  od  ten  druzyna 
6w  wspolpracownik  imuan  codzienny  podstawa. 

Podobac  si§  dawac  im  ten  sila  wobec  kontynuowac  i  dawac 
kazdy  od  im  ten  duchowy  zgoda  pod  katem  ten  praca  6w  ty 
potrzeba  im  wobec  czynic.  Prosz§  mi  pomoc  kazdy  od  im 
wobec  nie  miec  strach  i  wobec  zapamietac  6w  jestes  ten 
Bog  ktory  odpowiedzi  modlitwa  i  ktory  jest  w  koszt  od 
wszystko.  JA  blagac  6w  ty  bylby  zach^cac  im  ,  i  6w  ty 
ochraniac  im  ,  i  ten  praca  &  ministerstwo  6w  oni  sa^  zaj^ty. 
J  A  blagac  6w  ty  bylby  ochraniac  im  z  ten  Duchowy  Sily 
zbrojne  albo  inny  przeszkody  6w  kulisy  szkoda  im  albo 
powolny  im  w  dol.  Prosz§  mi  pomoc  podczas  JA  uzywac 
ten  Nowy  Testament  wobec  takze  pomyslec  od  ludzie  ktory 
miec  wykonane  ten  wydanie  rozporzadzalny  ,  byle  tylko  JA 


puszka  metalowa  modlic  si§  za  im  i  tak  oni  puszka 
metalowa  robic  w  dalszym  ciaj>u  wspolpracownik 

liczniejszy  spoleczeristwo  JA  blagac  6w  ty  bylby  dawac  mi 
pewien  milosc  od  twoj  Swi^ty  Wyraz  ( ten  Nowy  Testament 
),  i  6w  ty  bylby  dawac  mi  duchowy  madrosc  i  orientacja 
wobec  znac  ty  polepszyc  i  wobec  rozumiec  ten  okres  6w 
jestesmy  zyjacy  w.  Prosz§  mi  pomoc  wobec  znac  jak  wobec 
zawierac  z  transakcj^  ten  trudnosci  6w  JA  jestem 
skonfrontowany  rezygnowac  codziennie. 

Lord  Bog  ,  Wspolpracownik  mi  wobec  potrzeba  wobec  znac 
ty  Polepszyc  i  wobec  potrzeba  wobec  wspolpracownik  inny 
Chrzescijanie  w  moj  powierzchnia  i  wokolo  ten  swiat. 
JA  blagac  6w  ty  bylby  dawac  ten  Elektroniczny  ksiazka 
druzyna  i  6w  ktory  praca  od  pajeczyny  i  6w  ktory 
wspolpracownik  im  twoj  madrosc.  JA  blagac  6w  ty  bylby 
wspolpracownik  ten  indywidualny  czlonki  od  ich  rodzina  ( i 
moj  rodzina )  wobec  nie  byc  duchowo  zwodzil ,  oprocz 
wobec  rozumiec  ty  i  ja  wobec  potrzeba  wobec  uznawac  i 
nastepowac  po  ty  w  na  wszelki  sposob.  i  JA  zapytac  ty 
wobec  czynic  tych  rzeczy  na  Boga  Jezus  ,  Amen  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Slovenian 


Slovenian 


Slovenian  -  Prayer  Requests  (praying  /  Talking)  to  God  - 
explained  in  Slovenian  Language 

slovenian  prayer  jezuit  Kristus  molitev  Bog  kako  prositi  kako  moci 
slisati  svoj  zaprositi  podati  ponuditi  komu  kaj  mi 


pri  aparatu  imeti  se  za  boga  ,  tvorec  od  vsemirje  ,  bog  : 

1 .  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  mi  pogum  prositi  stvari  to  rabim 
prositi 

2.  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  mi  pogum  v  vernik  vi  ter  uvazevati 
kaksen  hoces  vzdrzati  svoj  zivljenje  ,  namesto  mi 
navdusenje  svoj  lasten  hoteti  (  namen  )  zgoraj  vas. 

3.  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  mi  ponuditi  komu  kaj  ne  pustiti  svoj 
grozen  od  neznano  v  postati  opravicilo  ,  ali  osnova  navzlic 
ne  streci  you. 

4.  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  mi  ponuditi  komu  kaj  zagledati  ter 
zvedeti  kako  imeti  bozji  zakon  cvrstost  rabim  (  skozi  vas 
izraziti  z  besedami  biblija )  a  )  zakaj  pripetljaj  spredaj  ter  b  ) 
zakaj  svoj  lasten  oseben  netelesen  potovanje. 

5.  to  vi  Bog  hoteti  izrociti  mi  ponuditi  komu  kaj  biti  brez 
streci  vi  vec 

6.  to  vi  hoteti  spomniti  se  mi  pogovarjati  se  vi  prayerwhen  ) 
jaz  sem  unicen  ali  v  tezava  ,  namesto  tezaven  odlociti  stvari 
sebi  sele  skozi  svoj  cloveski  cvrstost. 

7.  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  mi  modrost  ter  a  srcika  poin  Biblical 
modrost  tako  da  jaz  hoteti  zacetni  udarec  z  zogo  vi  vec 
razpolozljiv. 


8.  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  mi  a  zahteva  studirati  vas  izraziti  z 
besedami ,  biblija  ,  (  novi  testament  evangelij  od  John  ), 
naprej  a  oseben  osnova 

9.  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  pomoc  mi  tako  da  morem  opaziti 
stvari  v  biblija  (  vas  izraziti  z  besedami )  kateri  morem 
osebno  tikati  se  cesa  ,  ter  to  zadostuje  pomoc  mi  razumeti 
kaksen  vi  biti  brez  mi  uganjati  v  svoj  zivljenje. 

10.  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  mi  velik  bistroumnost ,  v  razumeti 
kako  razlagati  drugim  kdo  vi  ste  ,  ter  to  jaz  domisljavec 
zmozen  zvedeti  kako  zvedeti  ter  znanje  kako  stati  pokoncu 
zakaj  vi  ter  vas  izraziti  z  besedami  (  biblija  ) 

1 1.  to  vi  hoteti  privleci  narod  ( ali  websites  )  v  svoj  zivljenje 
kdo  biti  brez  znati  vi ,  ter  kdo  ste  krepek  v  svoj  natancen 
razumeven  od  vi  (  Bog  );  ter  to  vi  hoteti  privleci  narod  ( ali 
websites  )  v  svoj  zivljenje  kdo  hoteti  obstati  zmozen  v 
podzigati  mi  v  natancen  zvedeti  kako  razpreti  biblija  izraziti 
z  besedami  od  resnica  (2  plasljiv  215:). 

12.  to  vi  hoteti  pomoc  mi  zvedeti  imeti  velik  razumeven 
priblizno  kateri  biblija  prevod  je  najprimernejsi ,  kateri  je 
najvec  natancen  ,  ter  kateri  has  najvec  netelesen  cvrstost  & 
sila  ,  ter  kateri  prevod  strinjati  se  s  samorasel  rokopis  to  vi 
vdihniti  pisec  od  novi  testament  pisati. 

13.  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  ponuditi  komu  kaj  mi  rabiti  svoj  cas 
v  a  dober  izuriti  za  hojo  ali  jezo  po  cesti ,  ter  ne  v 
razsipavati  svoj  cas  naprej  napacen  ali  puhel  metoda 
zadobiti  sklepnik  v  Bog  (  ce  ze  ne  ste  ne  resnicno  Biblical ), 
ter  kraj  oni  metoda  predelki  ne  dolg  pogoj  ali  trajen 
netelesen  sadje. 

14.  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  pomoc  mi  v  razumeti  kaksen  iskati  v 
a  cerkvica  ali  a  mesto  od  castiti ,  kaksen  milosten  od 
vprasanje  zaprositi ,  ter  to  vi  hoteti  pomoc  mi  najti  vernik  ali 
a  pastor  s  velik  netelesen  modrost  namesto  neprisiljen  ali 
napacen  odgovor. 

15.  to  vi  hoteti  vzrok  mi  spomniti  se  nauciti  se  na  pamet  vas 
izraziti  z  besedami  biblija  (  kot  na  primer  retoromanski  8), 
tako  da  morem  zivljati  to  v  svoj  srcika  ter  zivljati  svoj  srce 


pripravljen  ,  ter  obstati  radovoljen  podati  odgovor  drugim 
od  upanje  to  imam  priblizno  vi. 

16.  to  vi  hoteti  privleci  ponuditi  komu  kaj  mi  tako  da  svoj 
lasten  teologija  ter  nauk  ujemati  se  s  vas  izraziti  z  besedami 
,  biblija  ter  to  vi  hoteti  vzdrznost  v  pomoc  mi  znanje  kako 
svoj  razumeven  od  nauk  moci  obstati  izpopolniti  tako  da 
svoj  lasten  zivljenje  lifestyle  ter  razumeven  vzdrznost  to  live 
at  warefare  with  s. o.  sklepnik  eemu  vi  biti  brez  to  v  obstati 
navzlic. 

17.  to  vi  hoteti  plan  svoj  netelesen  vpogled  (  sklep  )  bolj  in 
bolj ,  ter  to  kraj  svoj  razumeven  ali  zaznavanje  od  vi  ni 
natancen  ,  to  vi  hoteti  pomoc  mi  zvedeti  kdo  jezuit  Kristus 
resnicno  je. 

18.  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  ponuditi  komu  kaj  mi  tako  da  jaz 
domisljavec  zmozen  razstati  se  poljuben  napacen  cerkveni 
obredi  kateri  imam  odvisnost  naprej ,  s  vas  veder 
poucevanje  v  biblija  ,  ce  sploh  kateri  od  kaksen  jaz  sem 
sledec  ni  od  Bog  ,  ali  je  nasprotno  eemu  kaksen  hoces  uciti 
nas  priblizno  sledec  vi. 

19.  to  poljuben  vojna  sila  od  zlo  hoteti  ne  odvzeti  poljuben 
netelesen  razumeven  kateri  imam ,  sele  precej  to  jaz  hoteti 
obdrzati  znanost  od  kako  znati  vi  ter  ne  v  obstati  goljufati 
dandanes  od  netelesen  prevara. 

20.  to  vi  hoteti  privleci  netelesen  cvrstost  ter  ponuditi  komu 
kaj  mi  tako  da  nocem  v  obstati  del  od  velika  gospoda 
padanje  stran  ali  od  poljuben  tok  kateri  domisljavec 
netelesen  ponarejen  vam  na  uslugo  ter  v  vas  svet  izraziti  z 
besedami 

21.  to  ce  je  nic  to  imam  velja  v  svoj  zivljenje  ,  ali  vsekakor 
to  imam  ne  odgovor  vam  na  uslugo  kot  jaz  should  zivljati 
ter  to  je  preprecljiv  mi  s  vsak  izmed  obeh  pesacenje  z  vami , 
ali  imetje  razumeven  ,  to  vi  hoteti  privleci  oni  stvari  / 
odgovor  /  pripetljaj  prislon  v  svoj  srce  ,  tako  da  jaz  hoteti 
odreci  se  jih  v  imenu  ljudstva,  usmiljenja  itd.  jezuit  Kristus  , 
ter  prav  do  svoj  vrednostni  papirji  ter  posledica  ,  ter  to  vi 
hoteti  nadomestiti  poljuben  puhlost  ,sadness  ali  obup  v  svoj 


zivljenje  s  veselje  od  bog  ,  ter  to  jaz  domisljavec  vec  zarisce 
naprej  ucenje  slediti  vi  z  citanje  vas  izraziti  z  besedami , 
biblija 

22.  to  vi  hoteti  plan  svoj  oci  tako  da  jaz  domisljavec  zmozen 
v  jasno  zagledati  ter  pred  sodiscem  se  pismeno  obvezati  ce 
je  a  velik  prevara  priblizno  netelesen  predmet ,  kako  v 
razumeti  to  fenomen  (  ali  od  this  pripetljaj )  s  a  Biblical 
perspektiven  ,  ter  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  mi  modrost  znati  ter 
tako  da  bom  se  ucil  kako  v  pomoc  svoj  prijateljstvo  ter 
ljubezen  sam  sebe,  sebi,  se  (  zlahta )  ne  obstati  del  od  it. 

23.  to  vi  hoteti  zavarovati  to  nekoc  svoj  oci  ste  odpirac  ter 
svoj  srce  razumeti  bozji  zakon  pomen  od  tok  pripetljaj 
taking  mesto  na  svetu  ,  to  vi  hoteti  pripraviti  se  svoj  srcika 
vzeti  vas  resnica  ,  ter  to  vi  hoteti  pomoc  mi  razumeti  kako 
najti  pogum  ter  cvrstost  skozi  vas  svet  izraziti  z  besedami , 
biblija.  v  imenu  ljudstva,  usmiljenja  itd.  jezuit  Kristus  ,  jaz 
prositi  od  this  stvari  potrditi  svoj  zahteva  v  biti  znotraj 
pogodba  vas  hoteti ,  ter  vprasam  zakaj  vas  modrost  ter  imeti 
a  ljubezen  od  resnica  Amen. 


vec  pravzaprav  od  stran 
kako  imeti  vecen  zivljenje 


mi  smo  vesel  ce  to  zapisati  v  seznam  (  od  molitev  prosnja  v 
Bog  )  je  zmozen  pomagati  vi.  mi  razumeti  to  maj  ne  obstati 
najboljsi  ali  najvec  uspesen  prevod.  mi  razumeti  to  so  veliko 
razlicen  ways  od  iztisljiv  mnenje  ter  izraziti  z  besedami.  ce 
vi  zivljati  a  nasvet  zakaj  a  rajsi  prevod  ,  ali  ce  vi  hoteti  vsec 
biti  zavzeti  a  tesen  znesek  od  vas  cas  posiljati  nasvet  v  nas  , 
bos  pomaganje  tisoc  od  drugi  narod  tudi ,  kdo  hoteti  torej 
citanje  izpopolniti  prevod.  mi  pogosto  zivljati  a  nova  zaveza 


pri  roki  v  vas  jezik  ali  v  jezik  to  ste  redek  ali  star.  ce  isces  a 
nova  zaveza  v  a  poseben  jezik  ,  prosim  napisati  rabiti.  tudi , 
mi  biti  brez  v  obstati  varen  ter  zaceti  v  biti  obhajan  to  vcasih 
,  mi  delati  oferirati  knjiga  to  ste  ne  prost  ter  to  delati  strosek 
penez. 

sele  ce  vi  ne  morem  privosciti  si  nekaj  tega  oni  elektronski 
knjiga  ,  mi  moci  pogosto  delati  mena  od  elektronski  knjiga 
zakaj  pomoc  s  prevod  ali  prevod  opus.  vi  nikar  ne  zivljati  to 
live  at  warefare  with  s. o.  a  poklicen  delavec  ,  sele  a  reden 
oseba  kdo  je  zavzet  v  pomaganje.  vi  should  zivljati  a 
racunalo  ali  vi  should  zivljati  postranski  v  a  racunalo  v  vas 
tukajsnji  knjiznica  ali  visja  gimnazija  ali  univerza  ,  odkar 
oni  navadno  zivljati  rajsi  vez  v  stazist  v  bolnisnici.  vi  moci 
tudi  navadno  ustanoviti  vas  lasten  oseben  prost  elektronski 
verizna  srajca  racun  z  tekoc  v  mail.yahoo.com 

prosim  zalotiti  a  vaznost  za  odkriti  elektronski  verizna  srajca 
ogovor  poiskati  pravzaprav  ali  prenehati  od  to  stran.  mi 
upanje  bos  poslal  elektronski  verizna  srajca  v  nas  ,  ce  to  je 
od  pomoc  ali  encouragement.  mi  tudi  podzigati  vi  v  zveza 
nas  zadeven  elektronski  knjiga  to  mi  oferirati  to  ste  ce  ne 
strosek ,  ter  prost. 

mi  delati  zivljati  veliko  knjiga  v  tuji  jeziki ,  sele  mi  nikar  ne 
zmeraj  mesto  jih  sprejeti  electronically  ( travnato  gricevje  ) 
zato  ker  mi  sele  izdelovanje  pri  roki  knjiga  ali  predmet  to  ste 
najvec  prosnja.  mi  podzigati  vi  v  vzdrznost  prositi  v  Bog  ter 
v  vzdrznost  zvedeti  priblizno  njega  z  citanje  novi  testament. 
mi  izreci  dobrodoslico  vas  vprasanje  ter  razloziti  z 
elektronski  verizna  srajca. 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


srckan  Bog  ,  the  same  to  to  nova 
zaveza  has  been  izpusttakodamismo 

zmozen  zvedeti  vec  priblizno  vi.  prosim  pomoc  preprosti 
ljudje  odgovoren  zakaj  izdelava  to  elektronski  knjiga  pri 
roki. 

prosim  pomoc  jih  premoci  opus  nagel ,  ter  izdelovanje  vec 
elektronski  knjiga  pri  roki  prosim  pomoc  jih  imeti  vsi 
sredstvo  ,  penez  ,  cvrstost  ter  cas  to  oni  potreba  zato  da 
obstati  zmozen  vzdrzevati  ki  dela  zakaj  vi. 
prosim  pomoc  oni  to  ste  del  od  skupina  to  pomoc  jih  naprej 
vsakdanji  osnova.  prosim  izrociti  jih  cvrstost  v  vzdrznost  ter 
izrociti  vsakteri  od  jih  bozji  zakon  razumeven  zakaj  opus  to 
vi  biti  brez  jih  uganjati.  prosim  pomoc  vsakteri  od  jih  v  ne 
zivljati  strah  ter  spomniti  se  to  vi  ste  Bog  kdo  odgovor 
molitev  ter  kdo  je  v  ukaz  od  vse. 

jaz  predlagati  da  vi  hoteti  podzigati  jih  ,  ter  to  vi  zavarovati 
jih  ,  ter  opus  &  ministrstvo  to  oni  so  zaposlen  s  cim.  jaz 
predlagati  da  vi  hoteti  zavarovati  jih  s  netelesen  vojna  sila 
ali  drugi  zapreka  to  strjena  lava  skoda  jih  ali  pocasi  vozite 
jih  niz.  prosim  pomoc  mi  cas  jaz  raba  to  nova  zaveza  v  tudi 
pretehtati  od  preprosti  ljudje  kdo  zivljati  narejen  to  naklada 
pri  roki , 

tako  da  morem  prositi  za  jih  ter  tudi  oni  moci  vzdrznost  v 
pomoc  vec  narod  jaz  predlagati  da  vi  hoteti  izrociti  mi  a 
ljubezen  od  vas  svet  izraziti  z  besedami  ( novi  testament ), 
ter  to  vi  hoteti  izrociti  mi  netelesen  modrost  ter  bistroumnost 


znati  vi  rajsi  ter  v  razumeti  epoha  od  cas  to  mi  smo  zivljenje 
v. 

prosim  pomoc  mi  znati  kako  v  obravnavati  tezek  to  jaz  sem 
soociti  s  vsak  dan.  lord  Bog  ,  pomoc  mi  hoteti  znanje  vi  rajsi 
ter  hoteti  pomoc  drugi  krscanski  v  svoj  area  ter  po  svetu. 
jaz  predlagati  da  vi  hoteti  izrociti  elektronski  knjiga  skupina 
ter  oni  kdo  opus  naprej  tkalec  ter  oni  kdo  pomoc  jih  vas 
modrost.  jaz  predlagati  da  vi  hoteti  pomoc  poedinec 
clanstvo  od  svoj  rodbina  ( ter  svoj  rodbina )  v  ne  obstati 
netelesen  goljufati ,  sele  v  razumeti  vi  ter  hoteti  uvazevati 
ter  slediti  vi  v  sleherni  izuriti  za  hojo  ali  jezo  po  cesti.  ter  jaz 
zaprositi  vi  uganjati  od  this  stvari  v  imenu  ljudstva, 
usmiljenja  itd.  jezuit ,  Amen  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


llltlhal  diyOS  ,  pasalamatan  ka  atipan  ng  pawid  ito 
bago  testamento  may  been  pakawalan  pagayon  atipan  ng 
pawid  tayo  ay  able  sa  mag-aral  laling  marami  buongpaligid 
ka.  masiyahan  tumulong  ang  mga  tao  may  pananagutan 
dahil  sa  making  ito  Electronic  book  makukuha.  masiyahan 
tumulong  kanila  sa  maaari  able  sa  gumawa  ayuno  ,  at  gawin 
laling  marami  Electronic  books  makukuha  masiyahan 
tumulong  kanila  sa  may  lahat  ang  mapamaraan  ,  ang  salapi , 
ang  lakas  at  ang  takdaan  ng  oras  atipan  ng  pawid  sila 
mangilangan  di  iutos  sa  maaari  able  sa  tago  gumawa  dahil 
saka. 

masiyahan  tumulong  those  atipan  ng  pawid  ay  mahati  ng 
ang  itambal  atipan  ng  pawid  tumulong  kanila  sa  isa  pang- 
araw-araw  batayan.  masiyahan  bigyan  kanila  ang  lakas  sa 
mapatuloy  at  bigyan  bawa't  isa  ng  kanila  ang  tangayin  pang- 
unawa  dahil  sa  ang  gumawa  atipan  ng  pawid  ka  magkulang 


kanila  sa  gumawa.  masiyahan  tumulong  bawa't  isa  ng  kanila 
sa  hindi  may  katakutan  at  sa  gunitain  atipan  ng  pawid  ka  ay 
ang  diyos  sino  sumagot  dasal  at  sino  ay  di  pagbintangan  ng 
lahat  ng  bagay. 

ako  magdasal  atipan  ng  pawid  ka  would  palakasin  ang  loob 
kanila  ,  at  atipan  ng  pawid  ka  ipagsanggalang  kanila  ,  at  ang 
gumawa  &  magkalinga  atipan  ng  pawid  sila  ay  kumuha  di. 
ako  magdasal  atipan  ng  pawid  ka  would  ipagsanggalang 
kanila  sa  ang  tangayin  pilitin  o  iba  sagwil  atipan  ng  pawid 
could  saktan  kanila  o  slow  kanila  itumba. 
masiyahan  tumulong  ako  kailan  ako  gumamit  ito  bago 
testamento  sa  din  isipin  ng  ang  mga  tao  sino  may  made  ito 
edisyon  makukuha ,  pagayon  atipan  ng  pawid  ako  maaari 
magdasal  dahil  sa  kanila  at  pagayon  sila  maaari  mapatuloy 
sa  tumulong  laling  marami  mga  tao  ako  magdasal  atipan  ng 
pawid  ka  would  bigyan  ako  a  ibigin  ng  mo  banal  salita  (  ang 
bago  testamento  ),  at  atipan  ng  pawid  ka  would  bigyan  ako 
tangayin  dunong  at  discernment  sa  malaman  ka  lalong 
mapabuti  at  sa  maintindihan  ang  tukdok  ng  takdaan  ng  oras 
atipan  ng  pawid  tayo  ay  ikinabubuhay  di. 
masiyahan  tumulong  ako  sa  malaman  paano  sa  makitungo 
kumuha  ang  mahirap  hindi  madali  atipan  ng  pawid  ako  ay 
confronted  kumuha  bawa't  araw.  panginoon  diyos  , 
tumulong  ako  sa  magkulang  sa  malaman  ka  lalong  mapabuti 
at  sa  magkulang  sa  tumulong  iba  binyagan  di  akin  malawak 
at  sa  tabi-tabi  ang  daigdig.  ako  magdasal  atipan  ng  pawid  ka 
would  bigyan  ang  Electronic  book  itambal  at  those  sino 
gumawa  sa  ang  website  at  those  sino  tumulong  kanila  mo 
dunong. 

ako  magdasal  atipan  ng  pawid  ka  would  tumulong  ang  isang 
tao  pagkakasapi  ng  kanila  mag-anak  (  at  akin  mag-anak )  sa 
hindi  maaari  spiritually  dayain  ,  datapuwa't  sa  maintindihan 
ka  at  sa  magkulang  sa  tanggapin  at  sundan  ka  di  bawa't 
daan.  at  ako  humingi  ka  sa  gumawa  tesis  bagay  di  ang 
pangalanan  ng  heswita  ,  susugan  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Armas  Jumala  ,  Kiittaa  te  etta'  nyt  kuluva 
Veres  Jalkisaados  has  esittamislupa  joten  etta  me 
aari  eteva  jotta  kuulla  enemman  jokseenkin  te. 

Haluta  auttaa  ihmiset  edesvastuullinen  ajaksi  ansaitseva  nyt 
kuluva  Elektroninen  kirjanpidollinen  saatavana.  Haluta 
auttaa  heidat  jotta  olla  eteva  jotta  aikaansaada  paastota  ,  ja 
ehtia  enemman  Elektroninen  luettelossa  saatavana  Haluta 
auttaa  heidat  jotta  hankkia  aivan  varat ,  raha ,  kesto  ja  aika 
etta  he  kaivata  kotona  aste  jotta  olla  eteva  jotta  elatus 
tyoskentely  ajaksi  Te. 

Haluta  auttaa  ne  etta  aari  erita  -lta  joukkue  etta  auttaa  heidat 
model  after  by  jokapaivainen  kivijalka.  Haluta  kimmoisuus 
heidat  kesto  jotta  jatkaa  ja  kimmoisuus  joka  -lta  heidat 
henki-  ymmartavainen  ajaksi  aikaansaada  etta  te  haluta 
heidat  jotta  ajaa. 

Haluta  auttaa  joka  -lta  heidat  jotta  ei  hankkia  pelata  ja  jotta 
muistaa  etta  te  aari  Jumala  joka  tottelee  nimea  hartaushetki 
ja  joka  on  kotona  hinta  -lta  kaikki.  I-KIRJAIN  pyytaa 
hartaasti  etta  te  edistaa  heidat ,  ja  etta  te  suojata  heidat ,  ja 
aikaansaada  &  ministerikausi  etta  he  aari  varattu  kotona.  I- 
KIRJAIN  pyytaa  hartaasti  etta  te  suojata  heidat  polveutua 
Henki-  Joukko  eli  toinen  este  etta  haitta  heidat  eli  hitaasti 
heidat  heittaa.  Haluta  auttaa  we  jahka  I-KIRJAIN  apu  nyt 
kuluva  Veres  Jalkisaados  jotta  kin  ajatella  -lta  ihmiset  joka 
hankkia  kokoonpantu  nyt  kuluva  painos  saatavana  ,  joten 
etta  I-KIRJAIN  kanisteri  pyytaa  hartaasti  ajaksi  heidat  ja 


joten  he  kanisteri  jatkaa  jotta  auttaa  enemman  ihmiset  I- 
KIRJAIN  pyytaa  hartaasti  etta  te  kimmoisuus  we  lempia  -lta 
sinun  Pyha  Sana  (  Veres  Jalkisaados  ),  ja  etta  te  kimmoisuus 
we  henki-  viisaus  ja  arvostelukyky  jotta  osata  te  vedonlyoja 
ja  jotta  kasittaa  aika  -lta  aika  etta  me  aari  asuen  kotona. 
Haluta  auttaa  we  jotta  osata  kuinka  jotta  antaa  avulla 
hankala  etta  I-KIRJAIN  olen  asettaa  vastakkain  avulla  joka 
aika.  Haltija  Jumala  ,  Auttaa  we  jotta  haluta  jotta  osata  te 
Vedonlyoja  ja  jotta  haluta  jotta  auttaa  toinen  Kristitty  kotona 
minun  kohta  ja  liepeilla  maailma. 

I-KIRJAIN  pyytaa  hartaasti  etta  te  kimmoisuus  Elektroninen 
kirjanpidollinen  joukkue  ja  ne  joka  aikaansaada  model  after 
kudos  ja  ne  joka  auttaa  heidat  sinun  viisaus.  I-KIRJAIN 
pyytaa  hartaasti  etta  te  auttaa  yksilo  jasenmaara  -lta  heidan 
heimo  ( ja  minun  heimo  )  jotta  ei  olla  henkisesti  eksyttaa  , 
ainoastaan  jotta  kasittaa  te  ja  jotta  haluta  jotta  hyvaksya  ja 
harjoittaa  te  kotona  joka  elamantapa.  ja  I-KIRJAIN  anoa  te 
jotta  ajaa  nama  tavarat  kotona  maine  -lta  Jeesus  , 
Vastuunalainen  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Raring  Gud  ,  Tack  sjalv  sa  pass  den  har  Ny 

Testamente  er  blitt  befriaren  sa  fakta  at  vi  er 
duglig  till  lara  sig  mer  omkring  du.  Behag  hjalpamig 
folk  ansvarig  for  tillverkningen  den  har  Elektronisk  bok 
tillganglig. 


Behag  hjalpa  mig  dem  till  vara  kopa  duktig  verk  fort ,  och 
gora  mer  Elektronisk  bokna  tillganglig  Behag  hjalpa  mig 
dem  till  har  alla  resurserna  ,  pengarna  ,  den  styrka  och  tiden 
sa  pass  de  behov  for  att  kunde  halia  arbetande  till  deras. 
Behag  hjalpa  mig  den  har  sa  pass  de/vi/du/ni  ar  del  om 
spannen  sa  pass  hjalp  dem  pa  en  daglig  basis.  Behaga  ger 
dem  den  styrka  till  fortsatta  och  ger  var  av  dem  den  ande 
forstandet  for  den  verk  sa  pass  du  vilja  dem  till  gor.  Behag 
hjalpa  mig  var  av  dem  till  inte  har  radsla  och  till  minas  sa 
pass  du  er  den  Gud  vem  svar  bon  och  vem  er  han  i  lidelse  av 
allting. 

JAG  be  sa  pass  du  skulle  uppmuntra  dem  ,  och  sa  pass  du 
skydda  dem  ,  och  den  verk  &  ministaren  sa  pass  de  er 
forlovad  i. 

JAG  be  sa  pass  du  skulle  skydda  dem  fran  den  Ande  Pressar 
eller  annan  hinder  sa  pass  kunde  skada  dem  eller  langsam 
dem  ned.  Behag  hjalpa  mig  nar  JAG  anvanda  den  har  Ny 
Testamente  till  ocksa  tanka  om  folk  vem  har  gjord  den  har 
upplagan  tillganglig  ,  sa  fakta  at  JAG  kanna  be  for  dem  och 
sa  de  kanna  fortsatta  till  hjalp  mer  folk  JAG  be  sa  pass  du 
skulle  ge  mig  en  karlek  om  din  Helig  Uttrycka  (  den  Ny 
Testamente ),  och  sa  pass  du  skulle  ge  mig  ande  visdom  och 
discernment  till  veta  du  battre  och  till  forsta  den  period  av 
tid  sa  pass  vi  er  levande  i. 

Behag  hjalpa  mig  till  veta  hur  till  ha  att  gora  med 
svarigheten  sa  pass  JAG  er  stillt  overfor  var  dag.  Var  Herre 
och  Fralsare  Gud  ,  Hjalpa  mig  till  vilja  till  veta  du  Battre 
och  till  vilja  till  hjalp  annan  Kristen  i  min  areal  och  i 
omkrets  det  varld.  JAG  be  sa  pass  du  skulle  ger  den 
Elektronisk  bok  sla  sig  ihop  och  den  har  vem  arbeta  pa  den 
spindelvav  och  den  har  vem  hjalp  dem  din  visdom. 
JAG  be  sa  pass  du  skulle  hjalp  individuellt  medlemmen  av 
deras  familj  (  och  min  familj )  till  inte  bli  spiritually  lurat , 
utom  till  forsta  du  och  mig  till  vilja  till  accept  och  folja  du  i 
varje  vag.  och  JAG  fraga  du  till  gor  de  har  sakerna  inne  om 
namn  av  Jesus  ,  Samarbetsvillig  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Allerkserest  God  ,  Tak  for  lan  at  indevaerende  Ny 
Testamente  er  blevet  l0st  i  den  grad  at  vi  er  kan  hen  til  lasre 
flere  omkring  jer.  Behage  hjaelp  den  folk  ansvarlig  nemlig 
g0r  indevaerende  Elektronisk  skrift  anvendelig.  Behage 
hjselp  sig  at  blive  k0bedygtig  arbejde  holdbar  ,  og  skabe 
flere  Elektronisk  b0ger  anvendelig  Behage  hjaslp  sig  hen  til 
nyde  en  hel  ressourcer  ,  den  penge  ,  den  krasfter  og  den  gang 
at  de  savn  for  at  vaere  i  stand  til  opbevare  i  orden  nemlig  Jer. 

Behage  hjaelp  dem  at  er  noget  af  den  hold  at  hjaslp  sig  oven 
pa  en  hverdags  holdepunkt.  Behage  indr0mme  sig  den 
krasfter  hen  til  fortsastte  og  indr0mme  hver  i  sig  den  appel 
opfattelse  nemlig  den  arbejde  at  jer  savn  sig  hen  til  lave. 
Behage  hjaelp  hver  i  sig  hen  til  ikke  nyde  skrask  og  hen  til 
huske  at  du  er  den  God  hvem  svar  b0n  og  hvem  star  for 
arrangementet  i  alt. 

JEG  bed  at  jer  ville  give  mod  sig  ,  og  at  jer  sikre  sig  ,  og 
den  arbejde  &  ministerium  at  de  er  forlovet  i.  JEG  bed  at  jer 
ville  sikre  sig  af  den  Appel  Tvinger  eller  anden  hindring  at 
kunne  afbrask  sig  eller  sen  sig  nede. 

Behage  hjaelp  mig  hvor  JEG  hjaelp  indevaerende  Ny 
Testamente  hen  til  ligeledes  hitte  pa  den  folk  hvem  nyde 
skabt  indevaerende  oplag  anvendelig  ,  i  den  grad  at  JEG 
kunne  bed  nemlig  sig  hvorfor  de  kunne  fortsastte  hen  til 
hjaelp  flere  folk  JEG  bed  at  jer  ville  indr0mme  mig  en 


kserlighed  til  jeres  Hellig  Ord  (  den  Ny  Testamente  ),  og  at 
jer  ville  indr0mme  mig  appel  klogskab  og  discernment  hen 
til  kende  jer  bedre  og  hen  til  opfatte  den  periode  at  vi  er 
nulevende  i. 

Behage  hjselp  mig  hen  til  kende  hvor  hen  til  omhandle  den 
problemer  at  Jeg  er  stillet  over  for  hver  dag.  Lord  God  , 
Hjselp  mig  hen  til  ville  gerne  kende  jer  Bedre  og  hen  til  ville 
gerne  hjselp  anden  Christians  i  mig  omrade  og  omkring  den 
jord. 

JEG  bed  at  jer  ville  indr0mme  den  Elektronisk  skrift  hold  og 
dem  hvem  arbejde  med  den  website  og  dem  hvem  hjselp  sig 
jeres  klogskab.  JEG  bed  at  jer  ville  hjselp  den  individ 
medlemmer  i  deres  slsegt  ( og  mig  slsegt )  hen  til  ikke  vsere 
spiritually  narrede  ,  men  hen  til  opfatte  jer  og  hen  til  ville 
gerne  optage  og  komme  efter  jer  i  al  mulig  made.  og  JEG 
opfordre  jer  hen  til  lave  disse  sager  i  den  bensevne  i  Jesus  , 
Amen  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


MojiHTBa  k  6ory  ,3,oporoii  Bor,  Bm  hto  Swjih 
BbinymeHbi  oto  Gospel  hjih  otot  hobmh  testament  TaK, 
^rro  Mbi  GyaeM  BbiyHHTb  6ojrbiiie  o  Bac.  Ilo5KajryHCTa 
noMorHTe  jikwim  OTBercTBeHHbiM  ajih  /jenaTb  OTy 
3jieKTpoHHyio  KHHry  HMeiomeiica.  Bbi  3HaeTe  ohh  h  bm 
M05KeTe  noMOHb  hm.  rio5KajryHCTa  noMorHTe  hm  MOHb 
pa6oTaTb  6bicrpo,  h  c/tejiaiiTe  6onee  aneKTpoHHbie  khhth 
HMeiomeiica  rio5KajryHCTa  noMorHTe  hm  HMerb  Bce 


pecypcbi,  AeHbr,  npoHHOCTb  h  BpeMa  Koropbie  ohh  ajih  roro 
^rroGbi  MOHb  #ep>KaTb  pa6oTaTb  ajih  Bac.  ItoKanyiiCTa 
noMorHTe  tcm  dyjjyr  nacTbio  KOMaimM  noMoraeT  hm  Ha 
e5KeAHeBHoe  ocHOBamie.  nroicajiyHCTa  Rawre  hm  npoHHOCTb 
jxm  roro  MTo6bi  npo^oiDKaTb  h  /jaBaTb  KaayjOMy  H3  hx 
AyxoBHoe  BHHKaHne  jxm  pa6oTbi  mto  bm  xothtc  hx 
c^enaTb.  Ilo5KajiyHCTa  noMorHTe  KaayjOMy  H3  hx  He  HMeTb 
crpax  h  He  BcnoMHHaTb  mto  bm  oy^eTe  6oroM  OTBeHaiOT 
MOJiHTBe  h  in  charge  of  bcc  il  mojho  mto  bm  o6oaphjih  hx, 
h  mto  bm  3amHmaeTe  hx,  h  pa6oTa  &  MHHHcrepcTBO  mto 

OHH  BKJUOHeHM  BHyTpH. 

il  MOJIK)  MTO  BM  3aiHHTHJIH  HX  OT  #yXOBHMX  yCHJIHH  HJIH 

Apyrnx  npenoH  CMornn  noBpeAHTb  hm  hjih  3aMeAJnrrb  hm 
bhh3.  Ilo5KajiyHCTa  noMorHTe  MHe  Kor/ia  a  Hcnojib3yio  stot 
hobmh  testament  raioKe  jxm  roro  mto6m  /jyMaTb  mo^eH 
AenajiH  stot  BapnaHT  HMeiomeHca,  TaK,  mto  a  CMory 
noMOJiHTb  jxm  hx  h  no3TOMy  hx  CMorHTe  npoAOJDKaTb 
noMOHb  6onbHie  mo/ieH. 

JI  Momo  mto  bm  ziajiH  MHe  Bjno6jieHHOCTb  Baniero 
CBaTeHHiero  cnoBa  (HoBbraa  3aBeT),  h  mto  bm  /iaJiH  MHe 
AyxoBHbie  npeMy/ipocTb  h  pacno3HaHHe  jxm  roro  mto6m 
3HaTb  Bac  6onee  jryHine  h  noroiTb  nepno/io  BpeMeHH 
kotopom  mm  5KHBeM  b.  Ilo5KajiyHCTa  noMorHTe  MHe  cyMerb 
KaK  o6maTbca  c  3arpyAHeHHHMH  mto  a  confronted  c 
KaayiMM  /iHeM.  JlopA  Bor,  noMoraeT  MHe  xoTerb  3HaTb  Bac 
6onee  nyHHie  h  xoTeTb  noMOHb  /ipyrHM  xpHcraaHKaM  b 
Moen  o6nacTH  h  BOicpyr  MHpa. 

il  MOJIK)  MTO  BM  /lajIH  3JieKTpOHHyK)  KOMaH/iy  H  Te  KHHrH 

noMoraiOT  hm  Bania  npeMy/ipocTb.  il  mojho  mto  bm 

nOMOrjIH  HH^HBH/iyajIbHMM  HJieHaM  HX  CeMbH  (h  Moen 

ceMbn)  /iyxoBHOCT  6biTb  o6MaHyTMM,  ho  noHaTb  Bac  H 
xoTeTb  npHHaTb  h  nocneAOBaTb  3a  Bac  b  icaawH  ^opore. 
TaK5Ke  Aanre  HaM  komiJiopt  h  HaBe^eHKe  b  sth  BpeMeHa  h  a 


cnpaniHBaeM,  mto  bm  jiejiaere  oth  Bemji  in  the  name  of 
CbfflOK  6ora,  jesus  christ,  aMHHb, 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


,3,par  Bor  ,  Ejiaroaapa  th  to3h  to3h  Hob 
3aBemaHne  has  p.p.  ot  be  ocBoSoacaaBaM  TaKa 
to3h  Hne  CTe  cnocoSeH  kbm  yna  ce  noBene 
HaOKOJiO  th.  XapecBaM  noMaraM  onpeflejiHrejieH  hjich 
xopa  OTroBopeH  3a  npnroTBaHe  to3h  Electronic  KHHra 
HajiineH. 

XapecBaM  noMaraM  rax  ki>m  6i>Aa  cnoco6eH  kt>m  pa6oTa 
nocra  ,  h  npaBfl  noBene  Electronic  KHiDKapHHHa  HainmeH 
XapecBaM  noMaraM  rax  ki>m  HMaM  uhji  onpeAejiHrejieH 
HjieH  cpeACTBO  ,  onpeAejiHTejieH  hikh  napn  , 
onpeAejiHTeneH  hjich  ycTOHHHBOCT  h  onpeAejiHrejieH  hjich 
BpeMe  to3h  Te  wyama  in  pe#  ki>m  6i>Aa  cnoco6eH  ki>m 
/rbp5Ka  /TBH5KeHHe  3a  Th.  XapecBaM  noMaraM  ot  that  to3h 
cre  nacT  Ha  onpeAejiHrejieH  hjich  Birpar  to3h  noMaraM  rax 
Ha  an  BceKH^HeBeH  6a3a. 

XapecBaM  ^aBaM  rax  onpe/tejiHreneH  hjich  yctohhhboct 
ki>m  npo^tiDKaBaM  h  /laBaM  BceKH  Ha  rax  onpe/tejinTeneH 
HjieH  /ryxoBeH  cxBamaHe  3a  oirpeaejiHTejieH  hjkh  pa6oTa 
TO3H  th  jnmca  Tax  ki>m  npaBa. 

XapecBaM  noMaraM  BceKH  Ha  Tax  ki>m  He  HMaM  crpax  h  ki>m 
noMHH  to3h  th  cre  onpeAejiHrejieH  HjieH  Bor  koh  OTroBop 
MOJiHTBa  h  koh  e  in  m>jiHH  Ha  bchhko.  A3  mojih  to3h  th  yac 
Haci>pHaBaM  Tax  ,  h  to3h  th  3aiHHraBaM  Tax  ,  h 


onpe^ejnrreneH  hjich  pa6oTa  &  MHHHcrepcrBO  to3h  Te  cre 
3am>iDKaBaM  in.  A3  mojih  to3h  th  yac  3amHTaBaM  rax  ot 
onpe^ejiKTeneH  HjieH  ,HyxoBeH  Cnna  hjih  /ipyr  npenKa  to3h 
p.t.  ot  can  Bpe^a  rax  hjih  6aBeH  rax  rono  Bi>3BHiiieHHe. 
XapecBaM  noMaraM  me  Kora  A3  ynoTpe6a  to3h  Hob 
3aBemaHHe  kt>m  cbiho  mhcjih  Ha  onpeAejnrrejieH  hjich  xopa 

KOH  HMaM  p.t.  H  p.p.  OT  make  T03H  H3£aHHe  HajIHHeH  ,  TaKa 

TO3H  A3  Mora  mojih  3a  rax  h  TaKa  Te  Mora  npo^tJCKaBaM 
kt>m  noMaraM  noBene  xopa  A3  mojih  to3h  th  yac  AaBaM  me 
a  jho6ob  Ha  your  Cbot  JfyMa  (  onpe^ejinTeneH  HjieH  Hob 
3aBemaHHe  ),  h  to3h  th  yac  /jaBaM  me  /ryxoBeH  Mi>/rpocT  h 
pa3JiHHaBaHe  ki>m  3Haa  th  no-Ao6i>p  h  ki>m  pa36npaM 
onpe^ejiHreneH  HjieH  nepno/i  Ha  BpeMe  to3h  HHe  cre  5khb 
in.  XapecBaM  noMaraM  me  ki>m  3Haa  Kaic  ki>m  pa3AaBaM  c 
onpe^ejiKTeneH  HjieH  MbHen  to3h  A3  cbm  ronpaBaM  npeA  c 
BceKH  Ren. 

JlopA  Bor  ,  IloMaraM  me  kt>m  jnmca  ki>m  3Haa  th  no-Ao6i>p 
h  ki>m  jnmca  ki>m  noMaraM  /ipyr  Xphcthhhckh  in  my  iuiom 
h  HaoKono  onpe^ejiKTeneH  HjieH  cbot. 

A3  MOJiH  to3h  th  yac  ^SBaM  onpeAejnrrejieH  HjieH  Electronic 
KHHra  Bnpar  h  ot  that  koh  pa6oTa  Ha  onpeAejnrrejieH  HjieH 
website  h  ot  that  koh  noMaraM  Tax  your  Mi>/rpocT.  A3  mojih 
to3h  th  y5K  noMaraM  onpe^ejiHreneH  HjieH  jnmeH  HjieHCTBO 
Ha  TexeH  ceMeiicTBO  (  h  my  ceMeiicTBO  )  ki>m  He  6i>Aa 
/ryxoBeH  H3MaMBaM  ,  ho  ki>m  pa36npaM  th  h  ki>m  jnmca  kt>m 
npneMaM  h  cjie^BaM  th  in  BceKH  m>T.  h  A3  mrraM  th  ki>m 
npaBa  Te3H  Hemo  in  onpeflejnrrejieH  hjich  HMe  Ha  He3yHT  , 
Amen  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


sevgili  mabut ,  eyvallah  adi.  §u  bu  Incil  bkz. 

have  be  serbest  brrakmak  taki  biz  are  giiclii  -e  dogru 
ogrenmek  daha  hakktnda  sen.  mutlu  etmek  yardim  etmek 
belgili  tanimlik  insanlar  -den  sorumlu  icin  yapim  bu 
elektronik  kitap  elde  edilebilir.  mutlu  etmek  yardim  etmek 
onlan  -e  dogru  muktedir  i§  hizli ,  ve  yapmak  daha  elektronik 
kitap  elde  edilebilir  mutlu  etmek  yardim  etmek  onlan  -e 
dogru  -si  olmak  tiim  belgili  tanimlik  kaynak  ,  belgili 
tanimlik  para  ,  belgili  tanimlik  gue  ve  belgili  tanimlik  zaman 
adi. 

su  onlar  liizum  icin  muktedir  almak  calisma  icin  sen.  mutlu 
etmek  yardim  etmek  o  adi.  su  are  boliim  -in  belgili  tanimlik 
takim  adi.  su  yardim  etmek  onlan  ustunde  an  her  temel. 
mutlu  etmek  vermek  onlan  belgili  tanimlik  gue  -e  dogru 
devam  etmek  ve  vermek  her  -in  onlan  belgili  tanimlik 
ruhani  basiret  icin  belgili  tanimlik  i§  adi. 
su  sen  istemek  onlan  -e  dogru  yapmak.  mutlu  etmek  yardim 
etmek  her  -in  onlan  -e  dogru  degil  -si  olmak  korkmak  ve  -e 
dogru  animsamak  adi.  su  sen  are  belgili  tanimlik  mabut  kim 
yanit  dua  ve  kim  bkz.  be  icinde  fiyat  istemek  -in  her  sey.  I 
dua  etmek  adi.  su  sen  -cekti  ylireklendirmek  onlan  ,  ve  adi. 
su  sen  korumak  onlan  ,  ve  belgili  tanimlik  i§  &  bakanlik  adi. 
su  onlar  are  me§gul  icinde.  I  dua  etmek  adi.  su  sen  -cekti 
korumak  onlan  —dan  belgili  tanimlik  ruhani  gue  ya  da  diger 
engel  adi. 

su  -ebil  zarar  onlan  ya  da  yava§  onlan  asagi.  mutlu  etmek 
yardim  etmek  beni  ne  zaman  I  kullanma  bu  Incil  -e  dogru  da 
dusun  belgili  tanimlik  insanlar  kim  -si  olmak  -den  yapilmi§ 
bu  baski  elde  edilebilir  ,  taki  I  -ebilmek  dua  etmek  icin 
onlan  vesaire  onlar  -ebilmek  devam  etmek  -e  dogru  yardim 


etmek  daha  insanlar  I  dua  etmek  adi.  su  sen  -cekti  vermek 
beni  a  ask  -in  senin  kutsal  kelime  (  belgili  tammlik  Incil ), 
ve  adi.  su  sen  -cekti  vermek  beni  ruhani  akillihk  ve 
discernment  -e  dogru  bilmek  sen  daha  iyi  ve  -e  dogru 
anlamak  belgili  tanimlik  dondiirmemem  adi.  su  biz  are  canh 
iginde.  mutlu  etmek  yardim  etmek  beni  -e  dogru  bilmek 
nasil  -e  dogru  dagitmak  ile  belgili  tammlik  muskulat  adi. 
su  I  am  kar§i  koymak  ile  her  giin.  efendi  mabut ,  yardim 
etmek  beni  -e  dogru  istemek  -e  dogru  bilmek  sen  daha  iyi  ve 
-e  dogru  istemek  -e  dogru  yardim  etmek  diger  Hristiyan 
icinde  benim  alan  ve  cevrede  belgili  tanimlik  diinya.  I  dua 
etmek  adi.  su  sen  -cekti  vermek  belgili  tammlik  elektronik 
kitap  takim  ve  o  kim  i§  iistiinde  belgili  tanimlik  website  ve  o 
kim  yardim  etmek  onlari  senin  akilhlik. 
I  dua  etmek  adi.  su  sen  -cekti  yardim  etmek  belgili  tammlik 
bireysel  aza  -in  onlarin  aile  (  ve  benim  aile  )  -e  dogru  degil 
var  olmak  ruhani  aldatmak  ,  ama  -e  dogru  anlamak  sen  ve  -e 
dogru  istemek  -e  dogru  almak  ve  izlemek  sen  icinde  her  yol. 
ve  I  sormak  sen  -e  dogru  yapmak  bunlar  e§ya  adma  Isa  , 
amin  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


sevgili  mabut ,  eyvallah  adi.  su  bu  Incil  bkz.  have  be  serbest 
brrakmak  taki  biz  are  gu^lii  -e  dogru  ogrenmek  daha 


hakkinda  sen.  mutlu  etmek  yardim  etmek  belgili  tanimlik 
insanlar  -den  sorumlu  icin  yapim  bu  elektronik  kitap  elde 
edilebilir.  mutlu  etmek  yardim  etmek  onlari  -e  dogru 
muktedir  i§  hizli ,  ve  yapmak  daha  elektronik  kitap  elde 
edilebilir  mutlu  etmek  yardim  etmek  onlari  -e  dogru  -si 
olmak  timi  belgili  tanimlik  kaynak  ,  belgili  tanimlik  para  , 
belgili  tanimlik  gue  ve  belgili  tanimlik  zaman  adi. 
su  onlar  liizum  icin  muktedir  almak  calisma  icin  sen.  mutlu 
etmek  yardim  etmek  o  adi.  su  are  boliim  -in  belgili  tanimlik 
takim  adi.  su  yardim  etmek  onlari  ustiinde  an  her  temel. 
mutlu  etmek  vermek  onlari  belgili  tanimlik  gue  -e  dogru 
devam  etmek  ve  vermek  her  -in  onlari  belgili  tanimlik 
ruhani  basiret  icin  belgili  tanimlik  i§  adi. 

su  sen  istemek  onlari  -e  dogru  yapmak.  mutlu  etmek  yardim 
etmek  her  -in  onlari  -e  dogru  degil  -si  olmak  korkmak  ve  -e 
dogru  animsamak  adi.  su  sen  are  belgili  tanimlik  mabut  kim 
yanit  dua  ve  kim  bkz.  be  icinde  fiyat  istemek  -in  her  sey.  I 
dua  etmek  adi.  su  sen  -cekti  yureklendirmek  onlari ,  ve  adi. 
su  sen  korumak  onlari ,  ve  belgili  tanimlik  i§  &  bakanlik  adi. 
su  onlar  are  me§gul  icinde.  I  dua  etmek  adi.  su  sen  -cekti 
korumak  onlari  —dan  belgili  tanimlik  ruhani  gue  ya  da  diger 
engel  adi. 

su  -ebil  zarar  onlari  ya  da  yava§  onlan  asagi.  mutlu  etmek 
yardim  etmek  beni  ne  zaman  I  kullanma  bu  Incil  -e  dogru  da 
dusun  belgili  tanimlik  insanlar  kim  -si  olmak  -den  yapilmi§ 
bu  baski  elde  edilebilir  ,  taki  I  -ebilmek  dua  etmek  icin 
onlan  vesaire  onlar  -ebilmek  devam  etmek  -e  dogru  yardim 
etmek  daha  insanlar  I  dua  etmek  adi.  su  sen  -cekti  vermek 
beni  a  ask  -in  senin  kutsal  kelime  (  belgili  tanimlik  Incil ), 
ve  adi.  su  sen  -cekti  vermek  beni  ruhani  akillihk  ve 
diseernment  -e  dogru  bilmek  sen  daha  iyi  ve  -e  dogru 
anlamak  belgili  tanimlik  dondurmemem  adi.  su  biz  are  canh 
icinde.  mutlu  etmek  yardim  etmek  beni  -e  dogru  bilmek 
nasil  -e  dogru  dagitmak  ile  belgili  tanimlik  muskulat  adi. 


su  I  am  kar§i  koymak  ile  her  giin.  efendi  mabut ,  yardim 
etmek  beni  -e  dogru  istemek  -e  dogru  bilmek  sen  daha  iyi  ve 
-e  dogru  istemek  -e  dogru  yardim  etmek  diger  Hristiyan 
icinde  benim  alan  ve  cevrede  belgili  tanimlik  diinya.  I  dua 
etmek  adi.  su  sen  -cekti  vermek  belgili  tanimlik  elektronik 
kitap  takim  ve  o  kim  i§  iistiinde  belgili  tanimlik  website  ve  o 
kim  yardim  etmek  onlari  senin  akillilik. 
I  dua  etmek  adi.  su  sen  -cekti  yardim  etmek  belgili  tanimlik 
bireysel  aza  -in  onlarin  aile  (  ve  benim  aile  )  -e  dogru  degil 
var  olmak  ruhani  aldatmak  ,  ama  -e  dogru  anlamak  sen  ve  -e 
dogru  istemek  -e  dogru  almak  ve  izlemek  sen  icinde  her  yol. 
ve  I  sormak  sen  -e  dogru  yapmak  bunlar  e§ya  adina  Isa  , 
amin  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Serbia  -  Servia  -  Serbian 

Serbia  Serbian  Servian  Prayer  Isus  Krist  Molitva  Bog  Kako 
Moliti  moci  cuti  moj  molitva  za  pitati  davati  ponuditi  mene 
otkriti  duhovni  Vodstvo 

Serbia  ■  Prayer  Requests  (p  r  a  y  in  g  )  to  G  od  ■  e  x  p  la  in  e  d  in 

Serbian  (servian)  L  anguage 

Molitva  za  Bog  ##  Kako  za  Moliti  za  Bog 
Kako  Bog  moci  cuti  moj  molitva 
Kako  za  pitati  Bog  za  davati  ponuditi  mene 
Kako  otkriti  duhovni  Vodstvo 


Kako  za  naci  predaja  iz  urok  Raspolozenje 

Kako  za  zasluga  odredeni  clan  istinit  Bog  nad  Nebo 

Kako  otkriti  odredeni  clan  Hriscanin  Bog 
Kako  za  moliti  za  Bog  droz  Isus  Krist 
JA  imati  nikada  molitva  pre  nego 
Vazan  za  Bog 
Bog  zeljan  ljubavi  svaki  osoba  osoba 

Isus  Krist  moci  pomoc 
Se  Bog  Biti  stalo  moj  zivot 
Molitva  Trazenju 

stvar  taj  te  moc  oskudica  za  uzeti  u  obzir  govorenje  za  Bog 
okolo  Molitva  Trazenju  kod  te  ,  okolo  te 


Govorenje  za  Bog ,  odredeni  clan  Kreator  nad  odredeni 
clan  Svemir  ,  odredeni  clan  Gospodar  : 

1 .  taj  te  davati  za  mene  odredeni  clan  hrabrost  za  moliti 
odredeni  clan  stvar  taj  JA  potreba  za  moliti  2.  taj  te  davati  za 
mene  odredeni  clan  hrabrost  za  verovati  te  pa  primiti  sta  te 
oskudica  raditi  s  moj  zivot ,  umjesto  mene  uznijeti  moj 
vlastiti  volja  (  namera  )  iznad  vas. 

3.  taj  te  davati  mene  ponuditi  ne  career  moj  bojazan  nad 
odredeni  clan  nepoznat  za  postati  odredeni  clan  isprika  , 
inace  odredeni  clan  osnovica  umjesto  mene  ne  za  sluziti 
you. 

4.  taj  te  davati  mene  ponuditi  vidjeti  pa  uciti  kako  za  imati 
odredeni  clan  duhovni  sway  JA  potreba  (  droz  tvoj  rijec 


Biblija  )  jedan  )  umjesto  odredeni  clan  dogadaj  ispred  pa  P ) 
umjesto  moj  vlastiti  crew  duhovni  putovanje. 

5.  Taj  te  Bog  davati  mene  ponuditi  oskudica  za  sluziti  Te 
briny 

6.  Taj  te  podsetiti  mene  za  razgovarati  sa  te  prayerwhen  )  JA 
sam  frustriran  inace  u  problemima  ,  umjesto  tezak  za  odluka 
stvar  ja  sam  jedini  droz  moj  ljudsko  bice  sway. 

7.  Taj  te  davati  mene  Mudrost  pa  jedan  srce  ispunjen  s 
Biblijski  Mudrost  tako  da  JA  sluziti  te  briny  delotvorno. 

8.  Taj  te  davati  mene  jedan  zelja  za  ucenje  tvoj  rijec  ,  Biblija 
,  (  odredeni  clan  Novi  Zavjet  Evandelje  nad  Zahod  ),  na 
temelju  jedan  crew  osnovica  9.  taj  te  davati  pomoc  za  mene 
tako  da  JA  sam  u  mogucnosti  za  obavestenje  stvar  unutra 
Biblija  ( tvoj  rijec  )  sta  JA  moci  osobno  vezati  za  ,  pa  taj 
volja  pomoc  mene  shvatiti  sta  te  oskudica  mene  raditi  unutra 
moj  zivot. 

10.  Taj  te  davati  mene  velik  raspoznavanje  ,  za  shvatiti  kako 
za  objasniti  za  ostali  tko  te  biti ,  pa  taj  JA  moci  uciti  kako 
uciti  pa  knotkle  kako  za  pristajati  uza  sto  te  pa  tvoj  rijec  ( 
Biblija ) 

11.  Taj  te  donijeti  narod  ( inace  websites  )  unutra  moj  zivot 
tko  oskudica  za  knotkle  te  ,  pa  tko  biti  jak  unutra  njihov 
precizan  sporazum  nad  te  (  Bog  );  pa  Taj  te  donijeti  narod  ( 
inace  websites  )  unutra  moj  zivot  tko  ce  biti  u  mogucnosti  za 
ohrabriti  mene  za  tocno  uciti  kako  za  podeliti  Biblija  rec  nad 
istina  (2  Timotej  215:). 

12.  Taj  te  pomoc  mene  uciti  za  imati  velik  sporazum  okolo 
sta  Biblija  prikaz  3.  lice  od  TO  BE  u  prezentu  najbolji ,  sta 
3.  lice  od  TO  BE  u  prezentu  vecina  precizan  ,  pa  sta  je  preko 


duhovni  sway  &  snaga  ,  pa  sta  prtkaz  sloziti  se  s  odredeni 
clan  izvorni  rukopis  taj  te  nadahnut  odredeni  clan  autorstvo 
nad  odredeni  clan  Novi  Zavjet  za  pisati. 

13.  Taj  te  davati  ponuditi  mene  za  korist  moj  vrijeme  unutra 
jedan  dobar  put ,  pa  ne  za  uzaludnost  moj  vrijeme  na 
temelju  Neistinit  inace  prazan  metod  za  dobiti  zaglavni 
kamen  za  Bog  ( ipak  taj  nisu  vjerno  Biblijski ),  pa  kuda  tim 
metod  proizvod  nijedan  dug  rok  inace  trajan  duhovni  voce. 

14.  Taj  te  davati  pomoc  za  mene  za  shvatiti  sta  za  traziti 
unutra  jedan  crkva  inace  jedan  mjesto  nad  zasluga  ,  sta  rod 
nad  sumnja  za  pitati ,  pa  taj  te  pomoc  mene  za  naci  vernik 
inace  jedan  parson  s  velik  duhovni  mudrost  umjesto  lak 
inace  neistinit  odgovor. 

15.  taj  te  uzrok  mene  za  secati  se  za  sjecati  se  tvoj  rijec 
Biblija  ( takav  kao  Latinluk  8),  tako  da  JA  moci  imati  pik  na 
moj  srce  pa  imati  moj  pamcenje  spreman  ,  pa  biti  spreman 
za  davati  dobro  odgovarati  ostali  nad  odredeni  clan  nadati  se 
taj  JA  imati  okolo  te. 

16.  Taj  te  donijeti  ponuditi  mene  tako  da  moj  vlastiti 
teologija  pa  doktrina  za  slagati  tvoj  rijec  ,  Biblija  pa  taj  te 
nastaviti  za  pomoc  mene  knotkle  kako  moj  sporazum  nad 
doktrina  moci  poboljsati  tako  da  moj  vlastiti  zivot ,  stil 
zivota  pa  sporazum  nastavlja  da  bude  zaglavni  kamen  za  sta 
te  oskudica  to  da  bude  umjesto  mene. 

17.  Taj  te  otvoren  moj  duhovni  uvid  (  zakljucak )  sve  vise  , 
pa  taj  kuda  moj  sporazum  inace  percepcija  nad  te  nije 
precizan  ,  taj  te  pomoc  mene  uciti  tko  Isus  Krist  vjerno  3. 
lice  od  TO  BE  u  prezentu. 

18.  Taj  te  davati  ponuditi  mene  tako  da  JA  moci  za  odvojen 
iko  neistinit  obredni  sta  JA  imati  zavisnost  na  temelju  ,  iz 


tvoj  jasan  poucavanje  unutra  Biblija  ,  ako  postoje  nad  sta  JA 
sam  sledece  nije  nad  Bog  ,  inace  3.  lice  od  TO  BE  u 
prezentu  u  suprotnosti  sa  sta  te  oskudica  za  poucavati  nama 
okolo  sledece  te. 

19.  Taj  iko  sile  nad  urok  ne  oduteti  iko  duhovni  sporazum 
sta  JA  imati ,  ipak  radije  taj  JA  zadrzati  odredeni  clan  znanje 
nad  kako  za  knotkle  te  pa  ne  da  bude  lukav  unutra  ovih  dan 
nad  duhovni  varka. 

20.  Taj  te  donijeti  duhovni  sway  pa  ponuditi  mene  tako  da 
JA  volja  ne  da  bude  dio  nad  odredeni  clan  Velik  Koji  pada 
Daleko  inace  nad  iko  pokret  sta  postojati  produhovljeno 
krivotvoriti  za  te  pa  za  tvoj  Svet  Rijec 

21.  Taj  da  onde  3.  lice  od  TO  BE  u  prezentu  bilo  sto  taj  J  A 
imati  ispunjavanja  unutra  moj  zivot ,  inace  iko  put  taj  JA  ne 
imate  odgovaranje  za  te  ace  JA  treba  imati  pa  taj  3.  lice  od 
TO  BE  u  prezentu  sprjecavanje  mene  iz  oba  hodanje  s  te  , 
inace  imajuci  sporazum ,  taj  te  donijeti  tim  stvar  /  odgovor  / 
dogadaj  leda  u  moj  pamcenje  ,  tako  da  JA  odreci  se  njima  u 
ime  Isus  Krist ,  pa  svi  nad  njihov  vrijednosni  papiri  pa 
posledica  ,  pa  taj  te  opet  staviti  iko  praznina  ,sadness  inace 
ocajavati  unutra  moj  zivot  s  odredeni  clan  Radost  nad 
odredeni  clan  Gospodar  ,  pa  taj  JA  postojati  briny 
usredotocen  na  temelju  znanje  za  sledii  te  kod  citanje  tvoj 
rijec  ,  odredeni  clan  Biblija 

22.  Taj  te  otvoren  moj  oci  tako  da  JA  moci  za  jasno  vidjeti 
pa  prepoznati  da  onde  3.  lice  od  TO  BE  u  prezentu  jedan 
Velik  Varka  okolo  Duhovni  tema ,  kako  za  shvatiti  danasji 
fenomen  ( inace  ovih  dogadaj )  iz  jedan  Biblijski 
perspektiva  ,  pa  taj  te  davati  mene  mudrost  za  knotkle  i  tako 
taj  JA  volja  uciti  kako  za  pomoc  moj  prijatelj  pa  voljen  sam 
sebe  ( rodbina )  ne  postojati  dio  nad  it. 


23.  Taj  te  osigurati  taj  jednom  moj  oci  biti  otvoreni  pa  moj 
pamcenje  shvatiti  odredeni  clan  duhovni  izrazajnost  nad 
trenutni  zbivanja  uzimanje  mjesto  unutra  odredeni  clan  svet 
,  taj  te  pripremiti  moj  srce  prihvatiti  tvoj  istina  ,  pa  taj  te 
pomoc  mene  shvatiti  kako  za  naci  hrabrost  pa  sway  droz 
tvoj  Svet  Rijec  ,  Biblija.  U  ime  Isus  Krist ,  JA  traziti  ovih 
stvar  potvrdujuci  moj  zelja  da  bude  slozno  tvoj  volja  ,  pa  JA 
sam  iskanje  tvoj  mudrost  pa  za  imati  jedan  ljubav  nad 
odredeni  clan  Istina  Da 


Briny  podno  Stranica 
Kako  za  imati  Vjecan  Zivot 


Nama  biti  dearth  da  danasji  foil  ( nad  molitva  trazenju  za 
Bog  )  3.  lice  od  TO  BE  u  prezentu  u  mogucnosti  za  pomoci 
te.  Nama  shvatiti  danasji  ne  moze  biti  odredeni  clan  najbolji 
inace  vecina  delotvoran  prevod.  Nama  shvatiti  taj  onde  biti 
mnogobrojan  razlicit  putevi  nad  izraziv  misao  pa  reci.  Da  te 
imati  jedan  sugestija  umjesto  jedan  bolji  prevod  ,  inace  da  te 
slican  za  uzeti  jedan  malen  kolicina  nad  tvoj  vrijeme  za 
poslati  sugestija  nama  ,  te  ce  biti  pomaganje  hiljadu  nad 
ostali  narod  isto  ,  tko  volja  onda  citanje  odredeni  clan 
poboljsan  prevod.  Nama  cesto  imati  jedan  Novi  Zavjet 
raspoloziv  unutra  tvoj  jezik  inace  unutra  jezik  taj  biti  redak 
inace  star. 

Da  te  biti  handsome  umjesto  jedan  Novi  Zavjet  unutra  jedan 
specifican  jezik  ,  ugoditi  pisati  nama.  Isto  ,  nama  oskudica 
da  bude  siguran  pa  probati  za  komunicirati  taj  katkada , 
nama  ciniti  ponuda  knjiga  taj  nisu  Slobodan  pa  taj  ciniti 
kostati  novac.  Ipak  da  te  ne  moci  priustiti  neki  od  tim 
elektronicki  knjiga  ,  nama  moci  cesto  ciniti  dobro  razmena 


nad  elektronicki  knjiga  umjesto  pomoc  s  prevod  inace 
prevod  posao. 


Te  ne  morati  postojati  jedan  strucan  radnik  ,  jedini  jedan 
pravilan  osoba  tko  3.  lice  od  TO  BE  u  prezentu  zainteresiran 
za  pomaganje.  Te  treba  imati  jedan  racunar  inace  te  treba 
imati  pristup  za  jedan  racunar  kod  tvoj  mestanin  biblioteka 
inace  univerzitet  inace  univerzitet ,  otada  tim  obicno  imati 
bolji  spoj  za  odredeni  clan  Internet.  Te  moci  isto  obicno 
utemeljiti  tvoj  vlastiti  crew  SLOBODAN  elektronski  posta 
racun  kod  lijeganje  mail.yahoo.com 

Ugoditi  uzeti  maloprije  otkriti  odredeni  clan  elektronski 
posta  adresa  smjesten  podno  inace  odredeni  clan  kraj  nad 
danasji  stranica.  Nama  nadati  se  te  volja  poslati  elektronski 
posta  nama ,  da  danasji  3.  lice  od  TO  BE  u  prezentu  nad 
pomoc  inace  hrabrenje.  Nama  isto  ohrabriti  te  za  dodir  nama 
u  vezi  sa  Elektronicki  Knjiga  taj  nama  ponuda  taj  biti  van 
kostati ,  pa  slobodan. 


Nama  ciniti  imati  mnogobrojan  knjiga  unutra  stran  jezik  , 
ipak  nama  ne  uvijek  mjesto  njima  za  primiti  elektronski  ( 
skidati  podatke  )  zato  nama  jedini  napraviti  raspoloziv 
odredeni  clan  knjiga  inace  odredeni  clan  tema  taj  biti  preko 
zatrazen.  Nama  ohrabriti  te  za  nastaviti  za  moliti  za  Bog  pa 
za  nastaviti  uciti  okolo  Njemu  kod  citanje  odredeni  clan 
Novi  Zavjet.  Nama  dobrodosao  tvoj  sumnja  pa  primedba 
kod  elektronski  posta. 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Draga  Dumnezeu ,  Multumesc  that  this  Nou  Testament 

has  been  released  so  that  noi  sintem  capabil  la  spre  learn 
mai  mult  despre  tu. 

Te  rog  ajuta-ma  oamenii  responsible  pentru  making  this 
Electronic  carte  folositor.  Te  rog  ajuta-ma  pe  ei  la  spre  a  fi 
capabil  la  spre  work  rapid ,  §i  a  face  mai  mult  Electronic 
carte  folositor  Te  rog  ajuta-ma  pe  ei  la  spre  have  tot  art.hot. 
resources  ,  art.hot.  bani ,  art.hot.  strength  §i  art.hot.  timp  that 
ei  nevoie  inauntru  ordine  la  spre  a  fi  capabil  la  spre  a  pastra 
working  pentru  Tu. 

Te  rog  ajuta-ma  aceia  that  esti  part  de  la  team  that  ajutor  pe 
ei  on  un  fiecare  basis.  A  face  pe  plac  la  a  da  pe  ei  art.hot. 
strength  la  spre  a  continua  §i  a  da  each  de  pe  ei  art.hot.  spirit 
understanding  pentru  art.hot.  work  that  tu  nevoie  pe  ei  la 
spre  a  face. 

Te  rog  ajuta-ma  each  de  pe  ei  la  spre  nu  have  fear  sj  la  spre 
a-§i  aminti  that  tu  esti  art.hot.  Dumnezeu  cine  answers 
prayer  §i  cine  este  el  inauntru  acuzatie  de  tot.  I  pray  that  tu 
trec.de  la  will  encourage  pe  ei ,  §i  that  tu  a  proteja  pe  ei ,  §i 
art.hot.  work  &  ministru  that  ei  sint  ocupat  inauntru.  I  pray 
that  tu  trec.de  la  will  a  proteja  pe  ei  de  la  art.hot.  Spirit 
Forces  sau  alt  obstacles  that  a  putut  harm  pe  ei  sau  lent  pe  ei 
jos. 

Te  rog  ajuta-ma  cind  I  folos  this  Nou  Testament  la  spre  de 
asemenea  think  de  la  oameni  cine  have  made  this  a  redacta 
folositor  so  that  I  a  putea  pray  pentru  pe  ei  §i  so  ei  a  putea  a 


continua  la  spre  ajutor  mai  mult  oameni  I  pray  that  tu  trec.de 
la  will  da-mi  o  dragoste  de  al  tau  Holy  Cuvint  (  art.hot.  Nou 
Testament ),  §i  that  tu  trec.de  la  will  acorda-mi  spirit 
wisdom  §i  discernment  la  spre  know  tu  better  §i  la  spre 
understand  art.hot.  perioada  de  timp  that  noi  sintem  viu 
inauntru. 

Te  rog  ajuta-ma  la  spre  know  cum  la  spre  deal  cu  art.hot. 
difficulties  that  I  sint  confronted  cu  fiecare  zi.  Lord 
Dumnezeu  ,  Ajuta-ma  help  la  spre  nevoie  la  spre  know  tu 
Better  §i  la  spre  nevoie  la  spre  ajutor  alt  Crestin  inauntru 
meu  arie  §i  around  art.hot.  lume.  I  pray  that  tu  trec.de  la  will 
a  da  art.hot. 

Electronic  carte  team  §i  aceia  cine  work  pe  website  §i  aceia 
cine  ajutor  pe  ei  al  tau  wisdom.  I  pray  that  tu  trec.de  la  will 
ajutor  art.hot.  individual  members  de  lor  familie  (  §i  meu 
familie  )  la  spre  nu  a  fi  spiritually  deceived  ,  numai  la  spre 
understand  tu  §i  eu  la  spre  nevoie  la  spre  accent  §i  a  urma  tu 
inauntru  fiecare  way.  §i  I  a  intreba  tu  la  spre  a  face  acestia 
things  in  nume  de  Jesus  ,  Amen  , 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Russian  -  Russe  -  Russie 

Russian  Prayer  Requests  - 


MojIHTBa  K 

6ora  KaK  noMOJiHTb  k 

6ora  KaK  6or  mtokct  ycjibmiaTb  MoeMy 

MOJiHTBe  KaK  cnpocHTb,  mto  6or  min  noMomb  k  MHe 

KaK  HaiiTH  ;ryxoBHoe  naBejieime 

KaK  Hairra  deliverance  ot  3Jieiiniero 

;ryxoB  KaK  noKjiOHHTbca  noncTHHe  6or 

paa  KaK  Hairra  xpHCTHaHCKoe 

6ora  KaK  noMOJiHTb  k  6ory  ro 

jesus  christ  a  mncorjia  He  MOJinna  nepeA 

BaacHbiM  k  Bino6jieHHOCTaM  6ora 

6ora  KajK^oe  HHAHBH/ryajibHoe 

jesus,  kotop  nepcoHbi  christ  M05KeT  noMOHb 

AenaeT  BHHMaTenbHOCTb  6ora  o  mohx  Bemax 

3anpOCOB  MOJiHTBe 

5KH3HH  Bbl  MOrjIH  XOTeTb  JJJIH  paCCMOTpeHHH  nOrOBOpHTb  K 

6ory  o  3anpocax  MOJiHTBe 
BaMH,  o  mc 


ToBopam  k  6ory,  co3/jaTejib  BcejieHHoro,  jiop/j: 
1.  bbi  /jajiii  6bi  k  MHe  CMejiocTii  noiviojiHTfc  itemn  h  /jjih 

TOrO  HT06bI  nOMOJIHTfc 

2.  Bbl  JjaJIH  6bl  K  MHe  CMejIOCTH  BepHTb  BaM  H  npHHHMaTb 

bm  xoTHTe  CAenaTb  c  Moen  >KH3Hbio,  BMecTO  MeHa  exalting 
moh  bojih  (HaMepne)  Han  tbohm. 

3.  bm  jjaJiH  6bi  MHe  noMOHjb  jxm  roro  mtoGm  He 
npenaTCTBOBaTb  mohm  CTpaxaM  HencBecTHa  craTb 

OTrOBOpKaMH,  HJIH  OCHOBa  JlJUl  MeH3,  KOTOp  Hy5KHO  He 

cjry5KHTb  bm.  4.  bm  jjajiH  6m  MHe  noMomb  jxm  roro  mtoGm 


yBjmeTb  h  BbiyHHTb  KaK  HMeTb  /ryxoBHyio  npoHHOCTb  a 
(nepe3  Banie  cjiobo  6h6jihh)  a)  /via  cjiynaeB  Bnepea  h  6) 
jxm  Moero  co6cTBeHHoro  jnmHoro  /ryxoBHoro 
nyTeniecTBHH. 

5.  ^to  bm  6or  ziajiH  MHe  noMomb  jxm  toto  hto6m  xoTeTb 
cny5KHTb  bm  6onbnie 

6.  ^to  bm  remind,  mto  a  pa3roBapHBan  c  BaMH  (prayer)when 
a  ce6a  paccrpobre  hjih  b  3aTpy/nieHHH,  bmccto  m>rraTbca 
pa3peniHTb  Benin  TOJibKO  nepe3  mok>  jnoACKyio  npoHHOCTb. 

7.  ^to  bm  AajiH  MHe  npeMy/ipocTb  h  cepaue  3anojiHHjio  c 
6h6ji6hckoh  npeMy/ipocTbio  Taic  HOIT  a  cjiy>KHji  6m  bm 

3(J)(J)eKTHBHO. 

8.  ^to  bm  ziajiH  MHe  5KenaHHe  royHHTb  Bame  cjiobo, 
6h6jihk>,  (HoBbina  3aBeT  Gospel  john),  on  a  personal  basis, 

9.  Bbl  flaJIH  6bl  nOMOIHH  K  MHe  TaK,  MTO  a  6y/Ty  3aMeTHTb 

Benin  b  6h6jihh  (BameM  cnoBe)  a  Mory  jihhho  orHecra  k,  h 
KOTopoH  noM05KeT  MHe  noHaTb  bm  xoTHTe  MeHa  c/ienaTb  b 

MOeH  5KH3HH. 

10.  ^to  bm  /jajiH  MHe  6ojibmoe  pacno3HaHHe,  jxm  roro 
MTo6bi  noHaTb  KaK  o6i>acHHTb  k  /ipyrHM  KOTopbie  bm,  h  mto 
a  Mor  BbiyHHTb  KaK  BbiyHHTb  h  cyMeTb  KaK  croaTb  BBepx 
AJia  Bac  h  Bamero  cnoBa  (6h6jihh) 

1 1 .  ^to  bm  npHHecjiH  moAeH  (hjih  websites)  b  Moen  5kh3hh 

XOTaT  3HaTb  BaC,  H  KOTOpbK  CHJIbHM  B  HX  TOHHOM 

BHHKaHHH  Bac  (6or);  h  to  bm  npHHecjiH  6m  jnoAen  (hjih 
websites)  b  Moen  5kh3hh  dyjier  060/rpHTb  MeHa  tohho 
BbiyHHTb  KaK  pa3AejiHTb  6h6jihk>  cjiobo  npaB/rbi  (2  timothy 
2:15). 


12.  ^to  Bbi  noMorjiH  MHe  BbiyHHTb  HMeTb  6onbnioe 
BHHKaHne  o  KOTopbiH  BapnaHT  6h6jihh  caMbie  jryHHrae, 

KOTOpbIH  CaMbIH  TOHHbIH,  H  KOTOpbIH  HMeeT  CaMbK 

AyxoBHbie  npoHHOCTb  &  cnny,  h  KOTopaa  BapnaHT 
cornaniaeTca  c  nepBOHanajibHO  pyKonncaMH  mto  bm 
BOOAynieBHjiH  aBTopbi  HoBbina  3aBeT  HanncaTb. 

13.  ^to  bm  p,ajm  noMomb  k  MHe  jxm  Hcnojib30BaHiui  Moero 
BpeMeHH  b  xopomeH  Aopore,  h  jxm  roro  mtoGm  He 

paCTOHHTejIbCTBOBaTb  MOe  BpeMfl  Ha  JK»KHbIX  HJIH  nyCTbK 

MeTOAax  nonyHHTb  closer  to  6or  (ho  to  He  6y/rbre 
noHCTHHe  6h6ji6hck),  h  rae  Te  MeroAbi  He  npoH3BOAflT 

HHKaKOH  AOJirOCpOHHbIH  HJIH  lastillg  /iyXOBHbIH 

njiOAOOBom. 

14.  ^to  bm  /jajiH  noMomb  k  MHe  noHHTb  look  for  b  nepicoB 

HJIH  MeCTe  nOKJIOHeHHa,  HTO  BH/Tbl  BOnpOCOB,  KOTOp  Hy5KHO 

cnpocHTb,  h  mto  bm  noMorjiH  MHe  HaHTH  BepyiomHx  HJIH 
pastor  c  6ojibHiOH  /ryxoBHOH  npeMy/rpocTbio  bmccto  jierKHx 

HJIH  JI05KHbIX  OTBeTOB. 

15.  Bbi  npHHHHHJIH  6bl  MeHH  BCnOMHHTb  /TJIH  TOrO  MT06bI 

3anoMHHTb  Bame  cjiobo  6h6jihh  (such  as  Romans  8),  Taic, 
mto  a  CMory  HMeTb  ero  b  MoeM  cep/me  h  HMeTb  moh  pa3yM 
6biTb  noAroTOBjieHHbiM,  h  totobo  #aTb  otbct  k  /ipyroMy  H3 
ynoBaHHa  KOTopoe  a  HMeio  o  Bac. 

16.  ^to  bm  npHHecjiH  noMomb  k  MHe  TaK  HOn  MOH 
co6cTBeHHbie  Teojioraa  h  ^OKrpHHbi  jxm  roro  mto6h 
corjiacHTbca  c  BaniHM  cjiobom,  6n6jiHeH  h  mto  bm 
npoAOJDKajiHCb  noMOHb  MHe  cyvieTb  KaK  Moe  BHHKaHne 

AOKTpHHbl  M05KHO  yjiyHHIHTb  TaK,  MTO  MOH  C06CTBeHHbie 

5KH3Hb,  lifestyle  h  noHHMaTb  6y/ryT  npoAOJDKaTbca  6biTb 
closer  to  Bbi  xoTHre  hx  6biTb  jxm  measi. 


17.  ^TO  Bbl  paCKpbIJIH  MOK)  flyXOBHyK>  npOHHIjaTejIbHOCTb 

(3atcjiK)HeHHJi)  6onbnie  h  6onbnie,  h  mto  rae  moh  BHHKainie 
hjih  BoenpHHaTHe  Bac  He  tohhm,  mto  bm  noMornn  MHe 
BbiyHHTb  jesus  christ  noncTHHe. 

18.  ^to  bm  p,ajm  noMomb  k  MHe  Taic  HOI1  a  Mor  6m 
OT/iejiHTb  ino6bie  jio>KHbie  pHTyanbi  a  3aBHceji  Ha,  ot  BaniHx 
acHbK  npenoAaBaTenbCTB  b  6h6jihh,  ecnn  jno6oe  H3,  to  a 
following  He  6ora,  hjih  npoTHBonoji05KHbi  k  bm  xoTHTe  jxm 
Toro  MTo6bi  HayHHTb  HaM  -  o  cne^OBaTb  3a  BaMH. 

19.  ^to  jno6bie  ycHjma  3Jia  take  away  HHCKOJibKO  /ryxoBHoe 
BHHKaHne  a  HMeio,  ho  aobojh>ho  mto  a  coxpaHHji  3HaHHe 
KaK  3HaTb  Bac  h  6biTb  o6MaHyTbiM  BHyTpn  these  days 
AyxoBHoro  o6MaHa. 

20.  ^to  bm  npHHecjiH  /ryxoBiryio  npoHHOCTb  h  noMorjiH  k 
MHe  TaK  HOn  a  He  oy/ry  Hacrbio  6ojh>hioh  nanaTb  nponb 
hjih  jno6oro  ABiDKeHHa  6bijio  6m  /ryxoBHOCT  counterfeit  k 
BaM  h  k  BanieMy  CBaTeraiieMy  cjiOBy. 

21.  To  ecjiH  MTO-HH6bmb,  to  a  ^ejiaji  b  Moen  5kh3hh,  hjih 
jno6aa  ^opora  mto  a  He  OTBenaji  k  BaM  no  Mepe  roro  KaK  a 
AOjraceH  HMeTb  h  to  npeAOTBpamaeT  MeHa  ot  hjih  ryjiaTb  c 

BaMH,  HJIH  HMeTb  nOHHMaTb,  MTO  Bbl  npHHecjiH  Te 

things/responses/events  back  into  moh  pa3yM,  TaK  HOI1  a 
OTpenbjica  6bi  ot  hx  in  the  name  of  jesus  christ,  h  Bce  H3  hx 

BJIHaHHH  H  nOCJieACTBHH,  H  MTO  Bbl  3aMCHHJIH  jno6bie 

emptiness,  TOCKjiHBOCTb  hjih  despair  b  Moen  5KH3HH  c 
yTexoii  jiopaa,  h  mto  a  6ojibnie  6mji  c<J)OKyciipoBaH  Ha 
yHHTb  nocjieAOBaTb  3a  BaMH  nyreM  HHraTb  Bame  cjiobo, 
6n6jiHa. 

22.  ^to  bm  pacKpbijiH  moh  rjia3a  TaK  HOn  a  Mor  6m  acHO 
yBH/ieTb  h  y3HaTb  ecjiH  6y#eT  6ojh>hioh  o6MaH  o  /ryxoBHbix 
TeMax,  to  KaK  noHaTb  3to  aBjieHHe  (hjih  3th  cjrynaH)  ot 


6H6neiiCKOH  nepcneKTHBM,  h  mto  bm  muai  MHe 
npeMy/ipocTb  ajih  roro  hto6m  3HaTb  h  TaK  HOn  a  Bbiyny 

KaK  nOMOHb  MOHM  ^py3b3M  H  nOJIK)6HJI  OAHH 

(poACTBeHHHKH)  £jih  roro  MTo6bi  He  6biTb  HacTbio  ee. 

23  ^to  bm  o6ecneHHjiH  mto  pa3  moh  raa3a  pacicpbiHbi  h  moh 
pa3yM  noHHMaeT  #yxoBHoe  3HaneHHe  TeKymHe  co6mthji 
npHHHMaa  Mecro  b  Mnpe,  mto  bm  ikwotobhjih  Moe  cep/me 
jxm  roro  MTo6bi  npn3HaBaTb  Bamy  npaB/iy,  h  mto  bm 
noMorjiH  MHe  noiwTb  KaK  Hairra  CMenocTb  h  npoHHOCTb 
nepe3  Banie  CBaTeraiiee  cjiobo,  6h6jihio.  In  the  name  of 
jesus  christ,  a  npomy  3th  BemH  noATBep5K/iaa  Moe  jKejiamie 
6biTb  b  cooTBeTCTBHH  Banieii  BOJien,  h  a  npomy  Bania 
npeMy/ipocTb  h  HMeTb  Bjno6jieHHOCTb  npaB/iM,  AMHHb. 


Bojibine  Ha  /me  cTpaHHHM 

KaK  HMeTb  BeHHaaa  }KH3Hb 


Mbl  paUOCTHM  eCJIH  3TOT  CnHCOK  (3anpOCOB  MOJIHTBe  K 

6ory)  M05KeT  noMOHb  BaM.  Mbi  noHHMaeM  sto  He  mtokct 
6biTb  caMMH  nyHHiHH  hjih  caMMH  3(J)(J)eKTHBHMH  nepeBOA. 
Mbi  noHHMaeM  mto  6y#yT  MHoro  no-pa3HOMy  ^opor 
BbipaacaTb  mmcjih  h  cnoBa.  Ecjih  bm  HMeeTe  npeAJi05KeHHe 
jxm  6onee  jryHiiiero  nepeBOAa,  hjih  ecjin  bm  xoTen  6mjih  6m 
npHHHTb  Manoe  KOjnmecTBO  Baniero  BpeMeHH  nocnaTb 
npeAJi05KeHHa  k  HaM,  to  bm  oy^eTe  noMoraTb  TbionaM 
jnoAax  TaioKe,  KOTopbie  nocne  3Toro  npoHHraiOT 
yjryHHieHHMH  nepeBOA.  Mbi  nacTO  HMeeM  hobmh  testament 
HMeiomHHca  b  BanieM  a3bnce  hjih  b  a3bncax  pe/pco  hjih 
CTapo.  Ecjih  bm  CMOTpHTe  jxm  hoboto  testament  b 
cneijHiJiHHecKH  a3bnce,  to  nwKajryHCTa  HanHHiHTe  k  HaM. 


Taioice,  mm  xothm  6biTb  yBepeHbi  h  nbiraeMca  CBa3MBaTb  to 
HHor/ia,  mm  npeAJiaraeM  khhfh  KOTopbie  He  cbo6oaho  h 

KOTOpbK  CTOHT  /KJHbr.  Ho  eCJIH  Bbl  He  M05KeTe  n03BOJIHTb 
HeKOTOpbK  H3  Tex  3JieKTpOHHbIX  KHHr,  TO  Mbi  M05KCM  MaCTO 

ZienaTb  o6mch  3jieKrpoHHbix  KHHr  ajih  noMOimi  c 
nepeBOAOM  hjih  pa6oTOH  nepeBOAa.  Bbi  He  aojdkhm  6biTb 
npoiJieccHOHajibHbiM  pa6oTHHKOM,  TOJibKO  peryjiapHO 
nepcoHa  KOTopaa  3aHHTepecoBaHa  b  noMoraTb. 

Bbl  AOJDKHbl  HMeTb  KOMnblOTep  HJIH  Bbl  /K)JI5KHbI  HMCTb 

AOCTyn  k  KOMnbiOTepy  Ha  BaniHx  MecTHbix  apxHBe  hjih 
KOJiJie5Ke  hjih  yHHBepcHTeTe,  b  Bimy  Toro  mto  Te  oGhhho 
HMeiOT  6ojiee  jryHHine  coe/niHeHiDi  k  HHTepHeTy. 

Bbi  M05KeTe  TaK5Ke  oGhhho  ycTaHaBjiHBaTb  Bani 
co6cTBeHHbiH  jnpiHbiH  CBOBO^HO  yner  sjieKipoHHaaa 
noHTa  nyTeM  h^th  k  mail.yahoo.com  no5KajryHCTa 
npHHHMaeTe  momcht  ajih  Toro  hto6m  CHHraTb  a/ipec  nocjie 
Toro  KaK  3jieKTpoHHaaa  noHTa  Bbi  pacnojKraceHM  Ha  /me 

HJIH  KOHIje  3T0H  CTpaHHHM. 

Mbi  HaneeMca  bm  nonuieT  ajieKipoHHaaa  noHTa  k  HaM,  ecjni 
3to  noMOHjH  hjih  noompeHiui.  Mbi  Taioice  oGo^paeM  Bac 

CB33aTbCa  Mbi  OTHOCHTejIbHO  3JieKTpOHHbIX  KHHr  Mbi 

npeAJiaraeM  TOMy  6e3  ijeHbi,  h  cbo6oaho,  kotop  mm  HMeeM 
MHoro  KHHr  b  HHoerpaHHbK  a3MKax,  ho  mm  Bcer/ia  He 
ycTaHaBjiHBaeM  hx  ajih  Toro  mto6m  nojryHHTb  sjieKTpoHHO 
(download)  noTOMy  mto  mm  TOJibKO  ^eJiaeM  HMeiomeca 
KHHrH  hjih  TeMM  KOTopbie  cnpaniHBaTb.  Mbi  o6oApaeM  Bac 

npOAOJDKaTb  nOMOJIHTb  K  6ory  H  npOAOJDKHTb  BbiyHHTb  o 

eM  nyTeM  HHraTb  HoBbina  3aBeT.  Mbi  npHBeTCTByeM  Baiira 
BonpocM  h  KOMMeHTapHH  ajieKipoHHaaa  noHTa. 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


ARABIC  -LANGUEARABE 

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

l(_£»l   ljjt_l  i 

IJjd*  ^I^jcjoI  ^iXs  I  j  ^!jj  JjlAJ*  tA-S  It^fd  mj^j^5 ' 
I  Jjd*  ^I^jcjoI  ^iXs  £?afc_  I 4>jUj  j'  Jj*y <J  '  jl3js  jl  Jjj1-^  l<-!\? 


J  j  i  lP  '<-!<J>  'd\s  i^jm»  i  Ji^J»  J  Jf>L>"jj<-!  £j  4J  Jkjs*. 

i^j  I  JJs  i  j  Cj-i^Jcjf  ^yb^Caj,  ?  j  I  JjjlCJ  I  Jjj^l£°  Ij  £l£J»I  f  j 

lj£ji_j|cj  I  Jc^  L^f^j  I  j  igo^jp?  'j  M^>*  ft>l  'cis  L>*-*i 

Ijjrl*  ^jJ^JCJ^  ^ j^l  l(j*l£jf  oil  £oJ  £A,£J  Jj— *^J  'l£i><=' 

'^MJ  f  j  '  Jj'lK 

I^j  IJ<J>  I  j  liljCJ  C^-ia^  j_£  ^i_j  Jd!  liljf*  IJfjJ^ia  (IJ^oJ  'J^A,^) 

'  jlj^  Lyj-*  ^£^t£  jl£  '<Jjj^l£°  j'<-t^f>s  jlJUijo  Ij  C^jUi  Ijtii 

IlJ^J  J— ay  jl JljCJJS  Ijjf  j_£o  l<_K^_£  tl^l/L^  M^0'. 

I JjtI*  ^I^JCJ^  L-q_£  f£j-£  *4;5M^S  I  J^lfJ  (£  I Jo^jM^ 

I Ji^_£  Cjjl^o  I  jj_£  ii!J  ^j^.  I JJjjJ  I J<J>  lSi^'^JLS  ^JL^  'j 

CI^JLJ  I  ji!  IlJ^J  JjjLf^  'j  jjJ£^  ' J'^JlS j  '<JfL>uL5C'^'^'J  ^-^S 

MiJ^  'JfjKj5  J^jJ  '<-fe.'<Jf. 

I^j  I  J<J>  Jii!j>  I  j  l£^-H,£  I  Jii!cj|i_j  I  Jl  Jii!cjjj  j_£  IJ^  jC£i_j  jl  Ji^  j 

I^j  I  JJs  Jii!j>  I  j  lSijJ£„j  lUijb  I^jCjsI  (j^I^Jcj^)  Jl  lSC^S- 

^.1  ^Ja^ jl   I Jj»C^O  jl  JcJjtlJO  L-q_£  sio  I JjjlCJ  4  jUaJlJ  j»  j^j>  'j 
IU£-J  sio  I  Jijiki*  U)^  Ijj^  l£i>"j£.  '  '(>l£  j 


Prayer  to  God 

Dear  God, 

Thank  you  that  this  Gospel  or  this  New  Testament  has 
been  released  so  that  we  are  able  to  learn  more  about 
you. 

Please  help  the  people  responsible  for  making  this 
Electronic  book  available.  You  know  who  they  are  and 
you  are  able  to  help  them. 

Please  help  them  to  be  able  to  work  fast,  and  make 
more  Electronic  books  available 

Please  help  them  to  have  all  the  resources,  the 
money,  the  strength  and  the  time  that  they  need  in 
order  to  be  able  to  keep  working  for  You. 

Please  help  those  that  are  part  of  the  team  that  help 
them  on  an  everyday  basis.  Please  give  them  the 
strength  to  continue  and  give  each  of  them  the  spiritual 
understanding  for  the  work  that  you  want  them  to  do. 


Please  help  each  of  them  to  not  have  fear  and  to 

remember 

that  you  are  the  God  who  answers  prayer  and  who  is 

in  charge  of  everything. 

I  pray  that  you  would  encourage  them,  and  that  you 
protect  them,  and  the  work  &  ministry  that  they  are 
engaged  in. 

I  pray  that  you  would  protect  them  from  the  Spiritual 


Forces  or  other  obstacles  that  could  harm  them  or 
slow  them  down. 

Please  help  me  when  I  use  this  New  Testament  to 
also  think  of  the  people  who  have  made  this  edition 
available,  so  that  I  can  pray  for  them  and  so  they  can 
continue  to  help  more  people. 

I  pray  that  you  would  give  me  a  love  of  your  Holy  Word 
(the  New  Testament),  and  that  you  would  give  me 
spiritual  wisdom  and  discernment  to  know  you  better 
and  to  understand  the  period  of  time  that  we  are  living 
in. 

Please  help  me  to  know  how  to  deal  with  the 
difficulties  that  I  am  confronted  with  every  day.  Lord 
God,  Help  me  to  want  to  know  you  Better  and  to  want 
to  help  other  Christians  in  my  area  and  around  the 
world. 

I  pray  that  you  would  give  the  Electronic  book  team 
and  those  who  help  them  your  wisdom.  God,  help  me 
to  understand  you  better.  Please  help  my  family  to 
understand  you  better  also. 

I  pray  that  you  would  help  the  individual  members  of 
their  family  (and  my  family)  to  not  be  spiritually 
deceived,  but  to  understand  you  and  to  want  to  accept 
and  follow  you  in  every  way. 

Also  give  us  comfort  and  guidance  in  these  times  and  I 
ask  you  to  do  these  things  in  the  name  of  Jesus  , 
Amen, 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

A  FEW  BOOKS  for  NEW  CHRISTIANS 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


King  James  Version  -  The  best  and  ideal  would  be  the 
text  of  the  1611,  [referring  to  the  66  books  of  the  Old  and 
New  Testaments]  as  produced  by  the  original 
translators. 


Geneva  Bible  -  Version  of  the  Old  Testament  and  New 
Testament  produced  starting  around  1560.  Produced 
with  the  help  of  T  (Beza).,  who  also  produced  an 
accurate  LATIN  version  of  the  New  Testament,  based  on 
the  Textus  Receptus. 

The  Geneva  Bible  (several  Editions  of  it)  are  available  - 
as  of  this  writing  at  www.archive.org  in  PDF 

Bible  of  Jay  Green  -  Jay  Green  was  the  Translator  for 
the  Trinitarian  Bible  Society.  His  work  is  based  on  the 
Ancient  Koine  Greek  Text  (Textus  Receptus)  from 
which  he  translated  directly.  His  work  encompasses  both 
Hebrew  as  well  as  Koine  Greek  (The  Greek  spoken  at 
the  time  of  Jesus  Christ). 

The  Translation  of  the  New  Testament  [of  Jay  Green] 
can  be  found  online  in  PDF  for  Free 


R-La  grande  charte  d'Angleterre  ;  ouvrage  precede  d'un 
Precis  -  This  is  simply  the  MAGNA  CHARTA,  which 
recognizes  liberty  for  everyone. 

Gallagher,  Mason  -  Was  the  Apostle  Peter  ever  at  Rome 

Cannon  of  the  Old  Testament  and  the  New  Testament 
or  Why  the  Bible  is  Complete  without  the  Apocrypha  and 
unwritten  Traditions  by  Professor  Archibald  Alexander 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary 

1851  -  Presbyterian  Board  of  Publications.  [available  online 
Free  ] 

Historical  Evidences  of  the  Truth  of  the  Scripture  Records 
WITH  SPECIAL  REFERENCE  TO  THE  DOUBTS  AND 
DISCOVERIES  OF  MODERN  TIMES,  by  George 
Rawlinson  -  Lectures  Delivered  at  Oxford  University 
[available  online  Free  ] 

The  Apostolicity  of  Trinitarianism  -  by  George  Stanley 
Faber  -  1 832  -  3  Vol  /  3  Tomes  [available  online  Free  ] 

The  image-worship  of  the  Church  of  Rome  :  proved  to  be 

contrary  to  Holy  Scripture  and  the  faith  and  discipline  of  the 

primitive  church  ;  and  to  involve  contradictory  and 

irreconcilable  doctrines  within  the  Church  of  Rome  itself 

(1847) 

by  James  Endell  Tyler,   1789-1851 


Calvin  defended  :  a  memoir  of  the  life,  character,  and 
principles  of  John  Calvin  (1909)  by  Smyth,  Thomas,  1808- 
1873  ;  Publish:  Philadelphia  :  Presbyterian  Board  of 
Publication.  [available  online  Free  ] 


The  Supreme  Godhead  of  Christ,  the  Corner-stone  of 
Christianity  by  W.  Gordon  -  1855[available  online  Free  ] 


A  history  of  the  work  of  redemption  containing  the  outlines 

of  a  body  of  divinity  ... 

Author:  Edwards,  Jonathan,  1703-1758. 

Publication  Info:  Philadelphia,:  Presbyterian  board  of 

publication,  [available  online  Free  ] 


The  origin  of  pagan  idolatry  ascertained  from  historical 


testimony  and  circumstantial  evidence.  -  by  George  Stanley 
Faber  -  1816  3  Vol.  /  3  Tomes  [available  online  Free  ] 

The  Seventh  General  Council,  the  Second  of  Nicaea,  Held 
A.D.  787,  in  which  the  Worship  of  Images  was  established 
-  based  on  early  documents  by  Rev.  John  Mendham  -  1850 
[documents  how  this  far-reaching  Council  went  away  from 
early  Christianity  and  the  New  Testament] 


Worship  of  Mary  by  James  Endell  Tyler  [available  online 
Free  ] 

The  Papai  System  from  its  origin  to  the  present  time 

A  Historical  Sketch  of  every  doctrine,  claim  and  practice  of 

the  Church  of  Rome  by  William  Cathcart,  DD 

1 872  -  [available  online  Free  ] 

The  Protestant  exiles  of  Zillerthal;  their  persecutions  and 
expatriation  from  the  Tyrol,  on  separating  from  the  Romish 
church  -  [available  online  Free  ] 

An  essay  on  apostolical  succession-  being  a  defence  of  a 
genuine  ministry  -  by  Rev  Thomas  Powell  -  1846 


An  inquiry  into  the  history  and  theology  of  the  ancient 
Vallenses  and  Albigenses;  as  exhibiting,  agreeably  to  the 
promises,  the  perpetuity  of  the  sincere  church  of  Christ 
Publish  info  London,  Seeley  and  Burnside,  -  by  George 
Stanley  Faber  -  1838  [available  online  Free  ] 


The  Israel  of  the  Alps.  A  complete  history  of  the  Waldenses 
and  their  colonies  (1875)  by  Alexis  Muston  (History  of  the 
Waldensians)  -  2  Vol/  2  Tome  -  Available  in  English  and 
Separately  ALSO  in  French  [available  online  Free  ] 


Encouragement  for  Women 

Amy  Charmichael 

AMY  CARMICHAEL  -  From  Sunrise  Land 
[available  online  Free  ] 

AMY  CARMICHAEL  -  Lotus  buds  (1910) 
[available  online  Free  ] 

AMY  CARMICHAEL  -  Overweights  of  joy  (1906) 
[available  online  Free  ] 

AMY  CARMICHAEL  -Walker  of  Tinnevelly  (1916) 
[available  online  Free  ] 

AMY  CARMICHAEL  -After  Everest ;  the  experiences  of  a 
mountaineer  and  medical  mission  (1936) 
[available  online  Free  ] 

AMY  CARMICHAEL  -The  continuation  of  a  story  ([1914 


[available  online  Free  ] 


AMY  CARMICHAEL  -Ragland,  pioneer  (1922) 
[available  online  Free] 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
HISTORY  OF  HUNGARIAN  CHRISTIANS 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


fflSTORY  OF  THE  PROTESTANT  CHURCH IN 
HUNGARY  By  J.  H.  MERLE  D'AUBIGNE  - 
1 854  [available  online  Free  ] 


Hungary  and  Kossuth-An  Exposition  of  the  Late  Hungarian 

Revolution  by  Tefft 

1852  [available  online  Free  ] 

Secret  history  of  the  Austrian  government  and  of  its  ... 
persecutions  of  Protestants  By  Joseph  Alfred  Michiels  - 
1859  [available  online  Free  ] 

Sketches  in  Remembrance  of  the  Hungarian  Struggle  for 
Independence  and  National  Freedom  Edited  by  Kastner 
(Circ.  1853)  [available  online  Free  ] 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
HISTORY  OF  FRENCH  CHRISTIANS 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


La  Bible  Francaise  de  Calvin  V  1 
[available  online  Free  ] 

La  Bible  Francaise  de  Calvin  V  2 
[available  online  Free  ] 

VAUDOIS  -  A  memoir  of  Felix  Neff,  pastor  of  the  High 
Alps  [available  online  Free  ] 

La  France  Protestante  -  ou,  Vies  des  protestants  francais 
par  Haag  -  1 856  -  6  Tomes  [available  online  Free  ] 


Musee  des  protestans  celebres 


Ftude  sur  les  Academies  Protestantes  en  France  au  xvie  et 
au  xviie  siecle  -  Bourchenin  -  1 882  [available  online  Free  ] 

Les  plus  anciennes  melodies  de  l'eglise  protestante  de 
Strasbourg  et  leurs  auteurs  [microform]  (1928)  [available 
online  Free  ] 


L'Israel  des  Alpes:  Premiere  histoire  complete  des  Vaudois 


du  Piemont  et  de  leurs  colonies 


Par  Alexis  Muston  ;  Publie  par  Marc  Ducloux,  1 85 1 


(2  Tomes)  Lavailable  online  Free  J 


GALLICA  -  http://gallica.bnf.fr 

Histoire  ecclesiastique  -  3  Tomes  -  by  Theodore  de  Beze, 
[available  online  Free  ]  | 


][ 


] 


BEZE-Sermons  sur  l'histoire  de  la  resurrection  de  Notre- 
Seigneur  Jesus-Christ  [available  online  Free  ] 

DE  BEZE  -  Confession  de  la  foy  chrestienne  [available 
online  Free  ] 

Vie  de  J.  Calvin  by  Theodore  de  Beze,  [available  online 
Free  ] 

Confession  d'Augsbourg  (francais).  1550-Melanchthon 
[available  online  Free  ] 

La  BIBLE-1'ed.  de,  Geneve-par  F.  Perrin,  1567  [available 
online  Free  ] 

Hobbes  -  Leviathan  ou  La  matiere,  la  forme  et  la  puissance 
d'un  etat  ecclesiastique  et  civil  [available  online  Free  ] 

L'Eglise  et  l'Etat  a  Geneve  du  vivant  de  Calvin 
Roget,  Amedee  (1825-1883). 
[available  online  Free  ] 

LUTHER-Commentaire  de  l'epitre  aux  Galates  [available 
online  Free  ] 

Petite  chronique  protestante  de  France  [available  online  Free 
] 


Histoire  de  la  guerre  des  hussites  et  du  Concile  de  Basle 
2  Tomes  [recheck  for  accuracy] 


Les  Vaudois  et  l'Inquisition-par  Th.  de  Cauzons  (1908) 
[available  online  Free  ] 

Glossaire  vaudois-par  P. -M.  Callet  [available  online  Free  ] 

Musee  des  protestans  celebres  ou  Portraits  et  notices 
biographiques  et  litteraires  des  personnes  les  plus  eminens 
dans  l'histoire  de  la  reformation  et  du  protestantisme  par  une 
societe  de  gens  de  lettres  [available  online  Free  ] 

( publ.  par  Mr.  G.  T.  Doin;  Publication  :  Paris  :  Weyer  :  Treuttel  et  Wurtz  : 
Scherff  [et  al.],  1821-1824  -  6  vol./6  Tomes  :  ill.  ;  in-8 
Doin,  Guillaume-Tell  (1794-1854).  Editeur  scientifique) 

Notions  elementaires  de  grammaire  comparee  pour  servir  a 
l'etude  des  trois  langues  classiques  [available  online  Free  ] 

Thesaurus  graecae  linguae  ab  Henrico  Stephano  constructus. 
Tomus  I :  in  quo  praeter  alia  plurima  quae  primus  praestitit 
vocabula  in  certas  classes  distribuit,  multiplici  derivatorum 
serie... 

(  Estienne,  Henri  (1528-1598).  Auteur  du  texte  Tomus  I, II, III, IV  :  in  quo 
praeter  alia  plurima  quae  primus  praestitit  vocabula  in  certas  classes 
distribuit,  multiplici  derivatorum  serie;  Thesaurus  graecae  linguae  ab 

Henrico  Stephano  constructus  )  [available  online  Free  ] 


La  liberte  chretienne;  etude  sur  le  principe  de  la  piete  chez 
Luther  ;  Strasbourg,  Librairie  Istra,  1922  -  Will,  Robert 
[available  online  Free  ] 

Bible-N.T.(francais)-1523  -  Lefevre  d'Etaples  [available 
online  Free  ] 

Calvin  considere  comme  exegete  -  Par  Auguste  Vesson 
[available  online  Free  ] 


Reuss,  Rodolphe  -  Les  eglises  protestantes  d'Alsace  pendant 
laRevolution  (1789-1802)  [available  online  Free  ] 

WEBBER-Ethique_protestante-L'ethique  protestante  et 
l'esprit  du  capitalisme  (1904-1905)  [available  online  Free  ] 

French  Protestantism,  1559-1562  (1918) 
Kelly,  Caleb  Guyer  -[available  online  Free  ] 

History  of  the  French  Protestant  Refugees,  from  the 
Revocation  of  the  Edict  of  Nan  tes  1 854    [available  online 
Free  ] 

The  History  of  the  French,  Walloon,  Dutch  and  Other 
Foreign  Protestant  Refugees  Settled  in  1846  [available 
online  Free  ] 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

Italian  and/or  Spanish/Castillian/  etc 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Historia  del  Concilio  Tridentino  (SARPI)  [available  online 
Free  ]  [ 


rm 


Aldrete,  Bernardo  Jose  de  -  Del  origen,  y  principio  de  la 
lengua  castellana  6  romace  que  oi  se  usa  en  Espana 

SAVANAROLA-Vindicias  historicas  por  la  inocencia  de 
Fr.  Geronimo  Savonarola 


Biblia  en  lengua  espanola  traduzida  palabra  por  palabra  de 
la  verdad  hebrayca-FERRARA 

Biblia.  Espanolll602-translaciones  por  Cypriano  de  Valera 
(  misspelled  occasionally  as  Cypriano  de  Varela )  [available 
online  Free  ] 

Reina  Valera  1602  -  New  Testament  Available  at 
www.archive.org  [available  online  Free  ] 

La  Biblia  :  que  es,  los  sacros  libros  del  Vieio  y  Nuevo 
Testamento 

Valera,  Cipriano  de,  1532-1625 
Los  dos  tratados  del  papa,  i  de  la  misa  -  escritos  por 
Cipriano  D.  Valera  ;  i  por  el  publicados  primero  el  a.  1588, 
luego  el  a.  1599;  i  ahora  fielmente  reimpresos  [Madrid], 
1 85 1  [available  online  Free  ] 

Valera,  Cipriano  de,  15327-1625 

Aviso  a  los  de  la  iglesia  romana,  sobre  la  indiccion  de 

jubileo,  por  la  bulla  del  papa  Clemente  octavo. 

English  Title  =  An  answere  or  admonition  to  those  of  the 

Church  of  Rome,  touching  the  iubile,  proclaimed  by  the 

bull,  made  and  set  foorth  by  Pope  Clement  the  eyght,  for  the 

yeare  of  our  Lord.  1600.  Translated  out  of  French  [available 

online  Free  ] 

Spanish  Protestants  in  the  Sixteenth  Century  by  Cornelius 
August  Wilkens  French  [available  online  Free  ] 

Historia  de  Los  Protestantes  Espanoles  Y  de  Su  Persecucion 
Por  Felipe  II  -  Adolfo  de  Castro  -  1 85 1  (also  Available  in 
English)  [available  online  Free  ] 

The  Spanish  Protestants  and  Their  Persecution  by  Philip  II 


-  1851  -  Adolfo  de  Castro  [available  online  Free  ] 

Institvcion  de  la  religion  christiana; 
Institutio  Christianae  religionis.  Spanish 
Calvin,  Jean,  1509-1564 

Instituzion  religiosa  escrita  por  Juan  Calvino  el  ano  1536  y 
traduzida  al  castellano  por  Cipriano  de  Valera. 
Calvino,  Juan. 

Catecismo  que  significa:  forma  de  instrucion,  que  contiene 

los  principios  de  la  religion  de  dios,  util  y  necessario  para 

todo  fiel  Christiano  :  compuesto  en  manera  de  dialogo, 

donde  pregunta  el  maestro,  y  responde  el  discipulo 

En  casa  de  Ricardo  del  Campo,  M.D.XCVI  [1596]  Calvino, 

Juan. 

Tratado  para  confirmar  los  pobres  catiuos  de  Berueria  en  la 
catolica  y  antigua  se,  y  religion  Christiana:  y  para  los 
consolar  con  la  Palabra  de  Dios  en  las  afliciones  que 
padecen  por  el  evangelio  de  lesu  Christo.  [...]  Al  fin  deste 
tratado  hallareys  un  enxambre  de  los  falsos  milagros,  y 
illusiones  del  Demonio  con  que  Maria  de  la  visitacion  priora 
de  la  Anunciada  de  Lisboa  engano  a  muy  muchos:  y  de 
como  fue  descubierta  y  condenada  al  fin  del  ano  de  .1588 
En  casa  de  Pedro  Shorto,  Ano  de.  1594 
Valera,  Cipriano  de, 


Biblia  de  Ferrara,  corregida  por  Haham  R.  Samuel  de 
Casseres 

The  Protestan  t  exiles  of  Madeira  (c  1860)  French  [available 
online  Free  ] 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 

HISTORY  OF  VERSIONS  of  the  NEW  TESTAMENT 
PartA  -  Foryour  consideration 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


For  Christians  who  want  a  serious,  detailed  and 
historical  account  of  the  versions  of  the  New  Testament, 
and  of  the  issues  involved  in  the  historic  defense  of 
authentic  and  true  Christianity. 


John  William  Burgon  [  Oxford]  - 1  The  traditional  text  of  the 
Holy  Gospels  vindicated  and  established  (1896)  [available 
online  Free  ] 

John  William  Burgon  [  Oxford]  -2  The  causes  of  the 
corruption  of  the  traditional  text  of  the  Holy  Gospel 
[available  online  Free  ] 

John  William  Burgon  [  Oxford]  -  The  Revision  Revised 
(A  scholarly  in-depth  defense  of  Ancient  Greek  Text  of  the 
New  Testament)  [available  online  Free  ] 

Intro  to  Vol  1  from  INTRO  to  MASSORETICO  CRITICAL 
by  GINSBURG-VOL  1  [available  online  Free  ] 

Intro  to  Vol  1  from  INTRO  to  MASSORETICO  CRITICAL 
by  GINSBURG-VOL  2  [available  online  Free  ] 

Horse  Mosaicse;  or,  A  view  of  the  Mosaical  records,  with 
respect  to  their  coincidence  with  profane  antiquity;  their 


internal  credibility;  and  their  connection  with  Christianity; 
comprehending  the  substance  of  eight  lectures  read  before 
the  University  of  Oxford,  in  the  year  1801;  pursuant  to  the 
will  of  the  late  Rev.  John  Bampton,  A.M.  /  By  George 
Stanley  Faber  -Oxford  :  The  University  press,  1801 
[Topic:  defense  of  the  authorship  of  Moses  and  the 
historical  accuracy  of  the  Old  Testament]  [available  online 
Free  ] 

TC  The  English  Revisers'  Greek  Text-Shown  to  be 
Unauthorized,  Except  by  Egyptian  Copies  Discarded 
[available  online  Free  ] 

CANON  of  the  Old  and  New  Testament  by  Archibald 
Alexander  [available  online  Free  ] 

An  inquiry  into  the  integrity  of  the  Greek  Vulgate-  or, 
Received  text  of  the  New  Testament  1815  92mb  [available 
online  Free  ] 


A  vindication  of  1  John,  v.  7  from  the  objections  of  M. 
Griesbach  [available  online  Free  ] 


The  Burning  of  the  Bibles-  Defence  of  the  Protestant 
Version  -  Nathan  Moore  -  1 843 

A  dictionarie  of  the  French  and  English  tongues  1611 
Cotgrave,  Randle  -  [available  online  Free  ] 


The  Canon  of  the  New  Testament  vindicated  in  answer  to 
the  objections  of  J. T.  in  his  Amyntor,  with  several  additions 
[available  online  Free  ] 


the  paramount  authority  of  the  Holy  Scriptures  vindicated 
(1868) 


Histoire  du  Canon  des  Saintes-ecritures  Dans  L'eglise 
Chretienne  ;  Reuss  (1863)  [available  online  Free  ] 

Histoire  de  la  Societe  biblique  protestante  de  Paris,  1818  a 
1 868  [available  online  Free  ] 

L'academie  protestante  de  Nimes  et  Samuel  Petit 

Le  manuel  des  chretiens  protestants  :  Simple  exposition  des 
croyances  et  des  pratiques  -  Par  Emilien  Frossard  -  1 866 


Jean-Frederic  Osterwald,  pasteur  a  Neuchatel 

David  Martin 

The  canon  of  the  Holy  Scriptures  from  the  double  point  of 
view  of  science  and  of  faith  (1862)  [available  online  Free  ] 


CODEX  B 
H.  Hoskier 


E 


ALLIES  by 
1914)2Vol[ 


Jniversity  of  M 


vailable  online  7ree  ] 


chigan  Scholar 


&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 
HISTORY  OF  VERSIONS  of  the  NEW  TESTAMENT 
Part  B  -  not  Recommended 
&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& 


Modern  Versions  of  the  New  Testament,  most  of  which 
were  produced  after  1910,  are  based  upon  a  newly  invented 
text,  by  modern  professors,  many  of  whom  did  not  claim  to 
believe  in  the  New  Testament,  the  Death  and  Physical 


Resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ,  or  the  necessity  of  Personal 
Repentance  for  Salvation. 

The  Translations  have  been  accomplished  all  around  the 
world  in  many  languages,  starting  with  changeover  from  the 
older  accurate  Greek  Text,  to  the  modern  invented  one, 
starting  between  1904  and  1910  depending  on  which 
edition,  which  translation  team,  and  which  publisher. 


We  cannot  recommend:  the  New  Testament  or  Bible  of 
Louis  Segond.  This  man  was  probably  well  intentioned,  but 
his  translation  are  actually  based  on  the  8th  Critical  edition 
of  Tischendorf,  who  opposed  the  Reformation,  the 
Historicity  of  the  Books  of  the  Bible,  and  the  Greek  Text 
used  by  Christians  for  thousands  of  years. 

For  additional  information  on  versions,  type  on  the  Internet 
Search:  "verses  missing  in  the  NIV"  and  you  will  find  more 
material. 


We  cannot  recommend  the  english-language  NKJV,  even 
though  it  claims  to  depend  on  the  Textus  Receptus.  That  is 
not  exactly  accurate.  The  NKJV  makes  this  claim  based  on 
the  ecclectic  [mixed  and  confused]  greek  text  collated 
officially  by  Herman  von  Soden.  The  problem  is  that  von 
Soden  did  not  accomplish  this  by  himself  and  used  40 
assistants,  without  recording  who  chose  which  text  or  the 
names  of  those  students.  Herman  Hoskier  [Scholar, 
University  of  Michigan]  was  accurate  in  demonstrating  the 
links  between  Sinaiticus,  Vaticanus,  and  the  Greek  Text  of 
Von  Soden.  Thus  what  is  explained  as  being  "based  on"  the 
Textus  Receptus  actually  was  a  departure  from  that  very 
text. 


The  Old  Testaments  of  almost  all  modern  language  Bibles, 
in  almost  all  languages  is  a  CHANGED  text.  It  does  NOT 
conform  to  the  historic  Old  Testament,  and  is  based  instead 
on  the  recent  work  of  the  German  Kittel,  who  can  be  easily 
considered  an  Apostate  by  historic  Lutheran  standards. 
(more  in  a  momen tf). 

The  Old  Testament  of  the  NKJV  is  based  on  the  New 
Hebrew  Translation  of  Kittel.  [die  Biblia  Hebraica  von 
Rudolf  Kittel  ]  Kittel  remains  problematic  for  his  own 
approach  to  translation. 

Kittel,  the  translator  of  the  Old  Testament  [for  almost  all 
modern  editions  of  the  Bible]: 

1.  Did  not  believe  that  the  Pentateuch  he  translated  was 
accurate. 

2.  Did  not  believe  that  the  Pentateuch  he  translated  was  the 
same  as  the  original  Pentateuch. 

3.  Did  not  believe  in  the  inspiration  of  the  Old  Testament  or 
the  New  Testament. 


4.  Did  not  believe  in  what  Martin  Luther  would  believe 
would  constitute  Salvation  (salvation  by  Faith  alone,  in 
Christ  Jesus  alone). 

5.  Considered  the  Old  Testament  to  be  a  mixture  compiled 
by  tribes  who  were  themselves  confused  about  their  own 
religion. 

Most  people  today  who  are  Christians  would  consider  Kittel 
to  be  a  Heretical  Apostate  since  he  denies  the  inspiration  of 
the  Bible  and  the  accuracy  of  the  words  of  Jesus  in  the  New 
Testament.  Kittel  today  would  be  refused  to  be  allowed  to 
be  a  Pastor  or  a  translator.  His  translation  work  misleads 


and  misguides  people  into  error,  whenever  they  read  his 
work. 

The  Evidence  against  Kittel  is  not  small.  It  is  simply  the 
work  of  Kittel  himself,  and  what  he  wrote.  Much  of  the 
evidence  can  be  found  in: 

A  history  ofthe  Hebrews  (1895)  by  R  Kittel  -  2  Vol 

Essentially,  Kittel  proceeds  from  a  number  of  directions  to 
undermine  the  Old  Testament  and  the  history  of  the 
Hebrews,  by  pretending  to  take  a  scholarly  approach.  Kittel 
did  not  seem  to  like  the  Hebrews  much,  but  he  did  seem  to 
like  ancient  pagan  and  mystery  religions.    (see  the  Two 
Babylons  by  Hislop,  or  History  of  the  Temple  by 
Edersheim,  and  then  compare). 

His  son  Gerhard  Kittel,  a  "scholar"  who  worked  for  the 
German  Bible  Society  in  Germany  in  World  War  II,  with 
full  aproval  of  the  State,  ALSO  was  not  a  Christian  and 
would  ALSO  be  considered  an  apostate.  Gerhard  Kittel 
served  as  advisor  to  the  leader  of  Germany  in  World  War  II. 
After  the  war,  Gerhard  Kittel  was  tried  for  War  Crimes. 

On  the  basis  of  the  Documentation,  those  who  believe  in  the 
Bible  and  in  Historic  Christianity  are  compelled  to  find 
ALTERNATIVE  texts  to  the  Old  Testament  translated  by 
Kittel  or  the  New  Testaments  that  depart  from  the  historic 
Ancient  Koine  Greek. 

Both  Kittel  Sr  and  Kittel  Jr  appear  to  have  been  false 
Christians,  and  may  continue  to  mislead  many.  People  who 
cannot  understand  how  this  can  happen  may  want  to  read  a 
few  books  including  : 

Seduction  of  Christianity  by  Dave  Hunt. 


The  Agony  of  Deceit  by  Horton 

Hidden  Dangers  of  the  Rainbow  by  C.  Cumbey 

The  Battle  for  the  Bible  by  Harold  Lindsell  (Editor  of 

Christianity  Today) 

Those  who  want  more  information  about  Kittel  should 
consult: 

1)  Problems  with  Kittel  -  Short  paper  sometimes  available 
online  or  at  www.archive.org 

2)  The  Theological  Faculty  of  the  University  of  Jena  during 
the  Third  ....  in  PDF  [can  be  found  online  sometimes] 

by  S.  Heschel,  Professor,  Dartmouth  College 

3)  Theologians  under  ....  :  Gerhard  Kittel,  Paul  Althaus,  and 
Emanuel  Hirsch  /  Robert  P.  Ericksen. 

Publish  info  New  Haven  :  Yale  University  Press,  1985. 
(New  Haven,  1987) 

4)  Leonore  Siegele  -  Wenschkewitz,  Neutestamentliche 
Wissenschaft  vor  der  Judenfrage:  Gerhard  Kittels 
theologische  Arbeit  im  Wandel  deutscher  Geschichte 
(Miinchen:  Kaiser,  1980). 


5)  Rethinking  the  German  Church  Struggle 
by  John  S.  Conway     [online] 

http://motlc.wiesenthal.com/resources/books/annual4/chapl8.html 


6)  Betrayal:  German  Churches  and  the  Holocaust 

by  Robert  P.  Ericksen  (Editor),  Susannah  Heschel  (Editor) 


Questions  about  (PDF)  Ebooks: 

I  notice  that  you  have  lists  of  Ebooks  here. 

I  understand  that  you  may  want  others  to  know  about 

the  books,  but  why  here  ? 

There  are  several  reasons  why  this  was  done. 

1)  so  that  people  who  know  nothing  about  Christianity  have 
a  place  to  start.  There  are  now  thousands  of  books  about 
Christianity  available.  Knowing  where  to  begin  can  be 
difficult.  These  books  simply  represent  ideas  and  a 
potential  starting  place. 

2)  so  that  people  can  learn  what  other  Christians  were  like, 
who  lived  before.  We  live  in  a  world  that  still 
concentrates  on  the  tasks  of  the  moment,  but  pays  little 
attention  to  the  past.  Today,  many  people  do  not  know 
HOW  other  Christians  lived  their  daily  lives,  in  centuries 
past.  Some  of  these  books  are  from  the  past.  They  offer 
the  struggles  and  the  methods  of  responding  through  their 
Christian  faith,  in  their  own  daily  lives,  some  from 
hundreds  of  years  ago.  In  addition,  many  of  those  books 
are  documented  and  have  good  sources.  This  seems  to  be 
a  good  way  for  Christians  from  the  past  to  encourage 
those  in  the  present. 

3)  Histories  of  certain  Christians  DO  belong  to  those  who 
are  those  who  are  native  to  those  churches,  those 
geographic  areas,  or  who  speak  those  languages. 

But  although  that  is  true,  many  churches  today  have 
communities  or  denominations  that  have  transcended 
and  surpassed  the  local  geographic  areas  from 
where  they  initially  or  originally  arose.  It  is  good  for 
believers  who  are  from  OTHER  geographic  areas,  to 
learn  more  about  foreign  languages  and  foreign  cultures. 
Anything  that  can  help  to  accomplish  this,  is  movement 


in  the  right  direction. 

4)     It  is  normal  for  people  to  believe  that  if  their  church  or 
their  denomination  is  in  one  geographic  location,  that  The 
history  of  that  place  is  best  expressed  by  those  who  are 
LOCAL  historians.  Unfortunately,  today,  this  is  often 
NOT  accurate. 

The  reason  is  that  many  places  have  suffered 
from  wars  and  from  local  disasters.  This  is  especially  true 
in  Africa  and  the  Near  and  Middle  East.  The  Local 
historic  records  and  documents  were  destroyed.  Those 
documents  that  have  survived,  has  survived  OUTSIDE 
of  those  Areas  of  conflict.  Much  of  their  earlier  history 
of  the  Eastern  portion  of  the  Roman  Empire,  is  mostly 
known  because  of  the  record  keepers  of  the  West,  and 
because  of  the  travelers  from  the  areas  of  Western 
Christianity.  In  many  ways,  Western  Christianity  is  often 
still  the  record  keeper  of  those  from  the  East. 

There  is  a  great  deal  of  historical  records  in  the  West, 
about  the  Near  East.  Those  who  live  there  today  in  the 
near  East  and  Middle  East  know  almost  nothing  about. 
We  suggest  some  sources  that  may  be  of  assistance. 


-  So  you  want  to  bring  people  closer,  and  that  is  a  good 
answer,  but  why  include  records  or  books  from  England 
or  from  French  speaking  authors  ? 

1)  Much  of  the  material  dealing  with  Eastern  Orthodoxy  OR 
dealing  with  the  matters  of  Syria,  The  Byzantine  Empire, 
Africa  or  Asia,  were  written  about,  in  French.  Please 
remember  that  until  very  recently,  FRENCH  was  the  language 
of  the  educated  classes  around  the  world,  AND  that  it  was  the 
MAIN  language  for  diplomats,  consuls  and  ambassadors 
and  envoys.  As  a  result,  there  is  value  in  helping  those  who 


have  an  interest  in  French  ALSO  know  where  to  start, 
concerning  matters  of  Faith  and  History. 

Some  of  the  material  listed  in  French  simply  gives  people  a 
starting  point  for  learning  about  Christianity  in  Europe,  from  a 
non-English  point  of  view.  Other  books  are  listed  so  that 
people  can  read  some  of  those  sources  firsthand,  for 
themselves  and  come  to  their  own  conclusions. 

English  Christians  should  be  happy  that  they  have  a  great 
spiritual  heritage  and  examples,  and  rejoice  also  that  the 
French  can  say  the  same.  The  examples  of  the  strong  and  good 
Christians  that  have  come  before  belong  to  everyone  to  all 
Christians,  to  all  those  who  aspire  to  have  good  examples. 

About  the  materials  that  deal  with  England,  most  of  the  world 
STILL  does  not  realize  that  the  records  in  England  are  usually 
MUCH  older  than  the  ecclesiastical  records  of  OTHER  areas 
of  the  world.  England  was  divided  up  into  geographic  areas 
and  Churches  had  great  influence  in  the  nation.  That  had  not 
changed  in  England  until  the  last  few  decades.  Some  of  the 
records  about  Christianity  in  England 
Go  back  for  more  than  one  thousand  years,  in  an 
UNBROKEN  line.  One  can  follow  the  changes  to  the  diocese 
through  the  different  languages,  through  the  different  or 
changing  legal  documents  and  through  the 
Rights  confirmed  to  the  churches. 

Other  areas  of  the  world  are  claimed  to  be  very  ANCIENT  in 
dealing  with  Christianity,  but  there  is  very  little  of  actual 
documentation,  of  actual  agreements,  of  actual  legal 
descriptions,  of  actual  records  of  local  ceremonies,  of  actual 
local  church  councils,  of  the  relationship  between  the  secular 
State  law,  and  the  guidelines  or  rules  of  the  Church.  England 
was  never  invaded  by  those  who  posed  a  direct 
threat  to  its  church  institutions.  The  records  were  kept,  so  the 
records  and  documentation  are  in  fact  a  much  stronger 
Basis  for  the  documenting  of  Christianity  in  earlier  times. 


Most  Christians  from  the  East  do  not  know  about  this,  and  it 
would  be  good  for  them  to  learn  more.  In  addition,  there  are 
also  records  in  the  Nations  and  Provinces  of  Europe,  that  have 
been  kept  where  Roman  Catholic  Records  demonstrate  the 
authenticity  of  earlier  Christian  groups  that  pre-date  the 
authority  of  the  Bishop  of  Rome,  even  in  the  Western  half  of 
the  Roman  Empire.  Some  of  those  sources  are  listed  herein 
also. 

Finally,  in  the  matter  of  suggesting  books  about  Christianity 
and  Other  languages,  please  remember  that  each  group  likes  to 
learn  about  its  own  past,  and  its  own  progress. 

The  French  should  be  humbly  proud  of  those  Christians  who 
were  in  France  and  who  were  brave  and  wise  and 
demonstrated  courage  and  a  strong  faithfulness  to  God.  The 
Germans  should  learn  and  know  the  same  thing  about  their 
history,  as  should  the  Spaniards  and  the  Germans,  and  each 
and  every  other  Nation  and  People-group.  No  matter  who  we 
are  or  where  we  are  from,  we  can  find  something  positive  and 
good  to  encourage  us  and  be  glad  that  there  were  some  who 
came  before  us,  to  show  us  a  better  way  to  live,  by  their  faith 
and  their  Godly  examples. 


In  closing  it  would  be  good  perhaps  to  state  what  is 
obvious: 

This  ebook  is  likely  to  travel  far  and  wide.  Feel  free  to  post 
online  and  use  and  print. 

In  many  parts  of  the  world,  Christianity  is  deliberately  falsely 
represented.  It  is  represented  as  IF  faith  in  God  would  make 


someone  "anti-intellectual"  or  somehow  afraid  of  ideas  or 
thinking.  Nothing  could  be  further  from  the  truth. 

Many  people  today  do  not  know  that  the  history  of  science 
today  is  edited  to  leave  out  the  deep  Christianity  that  most  of 
the  top  scientists  have  held  until  very  recent  times. 

Since  God  created  the  World  and  the  scientific  laws  that 
govern  it,  it  makes  sense  that  God  is  the  designer.  No  one  is 
more  scientific  than  God. 

Many  of  the  great  scientists  in  the  World  are  still  Active 
Christians,  with  a  consciously  DEEP  faith  in  God.  Christians 
are  not  afraid  of  thinking  for  themselves.  There  are  many 
secularists  today  who  attempt  to  suggest  that  Christianity  is  for 
those  who  are  feeble.  The  truth  is  that  many  of  those  are  too 
feeble  and  too  intellectually  unprepared  to  answer  the 
questions  that  Christianity  asks  of  each  man  and  each  woman. 

Those  who  do  not  have  faith  in  Jesus  Christ  and  who  are 
secular  simply  often  worship  themselves,  under  the  disguise 
of  the  theory  of  Evolution.  But  the  chaos  of  the  world  today 
leaves  most  who  are  secular  WITHOUT  a  guide  or  a  method 
to  explain  either  purpose  in  life,  or  the  events  that  are  taking 
place  across  the  planet.  Christianity  with  its  record  of  2000 
years  -  (and  please  do  not  confuse  the  Vatican  with 
Christianity,  they  are  often  not  the  same)  -  has 
a  record  of  helping  people  navigate  in  difficult  times. 

Christianity  teaches  leaders  to  be  humble  and  accountable,  it 
helps  merchants  to  trade  honestly,  and  fathers  to  love  their 
children  and  their  wife.  Christianity  finds  no  value  in  doing 
harm  to  others  for  the  purpose  of  self-interest.  Usually  doing 
harm  to  others  is  a  method  of  expressing  that  ones  faith  in  God 
is  insufficient,  therefore  [the  logic  goes,  that]  harm  must  be 
done  to  others. 


Behaving  in  that  wrong  manner  is  simply  a  Lack  of  faith  in 
God,  and  therefore  those  who  harm  others  from  Other  faiths 
and  other  religions  are  usually  demonstrating  a  Lack  of  Faith 
in  the  God  that  THEY  worship. 

If  God  is  all  powerful,  and  if  God  can  change  the  minds  of 
others,  and  if  God  can  reveal  himself,  then  WHY  harm  anyone 
else  who  does  not  agree  ?  During  THIS  lifetime,  it  seems  that 
each  of  us  has  the  right  to  be  wrong  ,and  the  right  to  make  up 
his  own  mind.  Is  it  not  up  to  God  to  deal  with  others  in  the 
afterlife  ? 

We  provide  answers,  and  help  for  those  who  seek  truth  (yes 
actual  truth  can  be  actually  found  and  discovered,  which  is  a 
shocking  statement  to  many  people  who  thought  this  was  not 
genuinely  possible). 

God  is  a  loving  God.  He  offers  Eternal  Life  to  those  who 
repent  and  believe  in  his  message  in  the  New  Testament.  But 
God  also  allows  each  individual  to  decide  for  themselves.  This 
does  not  allow  any  of  us  to  change  or  decide  the  rules.  God  is 
still  God.  We  all  are  under  his  rules  every  time  we  are 
breathing,  with  each  pulse  that  continues  to  beat  in  our  heart. 

God  does  not  convince  people  against  their  Will.  That  annoys 
some  people  also,  because  they  would  like  God  to  make 
decisions  for  them.  But  if  people  want  to  be  Free,  let  them 
demonstrate  this  by  exercising  their  own  Freedom  of  choosing 
whether  to  follow  God  or  not.  (being  able  to  chose  to  accept  or 
reject  God  is  not  the  same  as  being  able  to  chose  the 
consequences.  Only  the  choice  of  which  direction  to  Go  is  up 
to  us.  The  consequences  are  whatever  God  has 
Actually  declared  them  to  be.  Agreeing  with  Him  or  not  will 
not  change  this. 

Christianity  is  a  source  of  internal  strength  and  provides 
answers  that  almost  no  other  religious  system  even  claims  to 
provide  or  attempts  to  provide. 


Something  usually  happens  to  those  who  are  intellectually 
honest  and  investigate  Christianity.  Many  times,  they  find  that 
Christianity  is  the  most  authentic,  accurate  and  historic 
account  of  the  history  of  the  world. 

It  is  the  genuine  answers  and  the  genuine  internal  peace  and 
help  that  Christians  can  find  through  their  God  which  bothers 
those  who  are  afraid  to  search  for  God.  We  only  hope  that 
each  person  will  embrace  their  spiritual  j  ourney 
And  take  the  challenge  upon  themselves  to  ask  the  question 
about  how  to  find  Truth  and  accurate  answers. 

The  answers  CAN  be  found.  Some  of  these  books  are  simply 
provided  to  help  people  find  a  few  of  the  pieces  that  will  serve 
as  a  means  to  encourage  them  in  thinking  and  in  having  their 
inner  questions  answered. 

We  continue  to  find  more  answers  every  day.  We  have  not 
arrived  and  we  certainly  are  not  perfect.  But  if  we  have  helped 
others  to  proceed  a  bit  farther  on  their  own  journeys,  certainly 
the  effort  will  not  have  been  in  vain. 


Psalm  50:15 

15  And  call  upon  me  in  the  day  of  trouble:  I  will  deliver 

thee,  and  thou  shalt  glorify  me. 


Psalm  90 

91:1  He  that  dwelleth  in  the  secret  place  of  the  most  High 

shall  abide  under  the  shadow  of  the  Almighty. 

2  I  will  say  of  the  LORD,  He  is  my  refuge  and  my  fortress: 
my  God;  in  him  will  I  trust. 

3  Surely  he  shall  deliver  thee  from  the  snare  of  the  fowler, 
and  from  the  noisome  pestilence. 

4  He  shall  cover  thee  with  his  feathers,  and  under  his  wings 
shalt  thou  trust:  his  truth  shall  be  thy  shield  and  buckler. 

5  Thou  shalt  not  be  afraid  for  the  terror  by  night;  nor  for  the 
arrow  that  flieth  by  day; 

6  Nor  for  the  pestilence  that  walketh  in  darkness;  nor  for 
the  destruction  that  wasteth  at  noonday. 

7  A  thousand  shall  fail  at  thy  side,  and  ten  thousand  at  thy 
right  hand;  but  it  shall  not  come  nigh  thee. 

8  Only  with  thine  eyes  shalt  thou  behold  and  see  the  reward 
of  the  wicked. 

9  Because  thou  hast  made  the  LORD,  which  is  my  refuge, 
even  the  most  High,  thy  habitation; 

10  There  shall  no  evil  befall  thee,  neither  shall  any  plague 
come  nigh  thy  dwelling. 

1 1  For  he  shall  give  his  angels  charge  over  thee,  to  keep 
thee  in  all  thy  ways. 

12  They  shall  bear  thee  up  in  their  hands,  lest  thou  dash  thy 
foot  against  a  stone. 

13  Thou  shalt  tread  upon  the  lion  and  adder:  the  young  lion 
and  the  dragon  shalt  thou  trample  under  feet. 


14  Because  he  hath  set  his  love  upon  me,  therefore  will  I 
deliver  him:  I  will  set  him  on  high,  because  he  hath  known 
my  name. 

15  He  shall  call  upon  me,  and  I  will  answer  him:  I  will  be 
with  him  in  trouble;  I  will  deliver  him,  and  honour  him. 

16  With  long  life  will  I  satisfy  him,  and  show  him  my 
salvation. 


Psalm  23 

23: 1  A  Psalm  of  David.  The  LORD  is  my  shepherd;  I  shall 

not  wan  t. 

2  He  maketh  me  to  lie  down  in  green  pastures:  he  leadeth 
me  beside  the  still  waters. 

3  He  restoreth  my  soul:  he  leadeth  me  in  the  paths  of 
righteousness  for  his  name's  sake. 

4  Yea,  though  I  walk  through  the  valley  of  the  shadow  of 
death,  I  will  fear  no  evil:  for  thou  art  with  me;  thy  rod  and 
thy  staff  they  comfort  me. 

5  Thou  preparest  a  table  before  me  in  the  presence  of  mine 
enemies:  thou  anointest  my  head  with  oil;  my  cup  runneth 
over. 

6  Surely  goodness  and  mercy  shall  follow  me  all  the  days 
of  my  life:  and  I  will  dwell  in  the  house  of  the  LORD  for 
ever. 


With  My  Whole  Heart  -  With 
all  my  heart 

"with  my  whole  heart" 

lf  we  truly  expect  God  to  respond  to  us,  we  must  be 
willing  to  make  the  commitment  to  Him  with  our 
whole  heart. 

This  means  making  a  commitment  to  Him  with  our 
ENTIRE,  or  ALL  of  our  heart.  Many  people  do  not 
want  to  be  truly  committed  to  God.  They  simply  want 
God  to  rescue  them  at  that  moment,  so  that  they  can 
continue  to  ignore  Him  and  refuse  to  do  what  they 
should.  God  knows  those  who  ask  help  sincerely  and 
those  who  do  not.  God  knows  each  of  our  thoughts. 
God  knows  our  true  intentions,  the  intentions  we 
consciously  admit  to,  and  the  intentions  we  may  not 
want  to  admit  to.  God  knows  us  better  than  we  know 
ourselves.  When  we  are  truly  and  honestly  and 
sincerely  praying  to  find  God,  and  wanting  Him  with  all 
of  our  heart,  or  with  our  whole  heart,  THAT  is  when 
God  DOES  respond. 

What  should  people  do  if  they  cannot  make  this 
commitment  to  God,  or  if  they  are  afraid  to  do  this  ? 
Pray  : 


Lord  God,  I  do  not  knowyou  well  enough,  please  help 
me  to  know  you  better,  and  please  help  me  to 
understand  you.  Change  my  desire  to  serve  you  and 
help  me  to  want  to  be  committed  to  you  with  my  whole 
heart.  I  pray  that  you  would  send  into  my  life  those 
who  can  help  me,  or  places  where  I  can  find  accurate 
Information  about  You.  Please  preserve  me  and  help 
me  grow  so  that  I  can  be  entirely  committed  to  you.  I  n 
the  name  of  Jesus,  Amen. 


Here  are  some  verses  in  the  Bible  that  demonstrate 
that  God  responds  to  those  who  are  committed  with 
their  whole  heart. 


(Psa  9:1  KJV)  To  the  chief  Musician  upon  Muthlabben, 
A  Psalm  of  David.  I  will  praise  thee,  O  LORD  with  my 
whole  heart;  I  will  show  forth  all  thy  marvellous  works. 

(Psa  111:1  KJV)  Praise  ye  the  LORD.  I  will  praise  the 
LORD  with  my  whole  heart,  in  the  assembly  of  the 
upright,  and  in  the  congregation. 
(Psa  1 19:2  KJV)  Blessed  are  they  that  keep  his 
testimonies,  and  that  seek  him  with  my  whole  heart. 

(Psa  119:10  KJV)  With  my  whole  heart  have  I  sought 
thee:  O  let  me  not  wander  from  thy  commandments. 

(Psa  1 19:34  KJV)  Give  me  understanding,  and  I  shall 
keep  thy  law;  yea,  I  shall  observe  with  my  whole  heart. 

(Psa  1 19:58  KJV)  I  entreated  thy  favour  with  my  whole 
heart:  be  merciful  unto  me  according  to  thy  word. 


(Psa  1 19:69  KJV)  The  proud  have  forged  a  lie  against 
me:  but  I  will  keep  thy  precepts  with  my  whole  heart. 

(Psa  119:145  KJV)  KOPH.  I  cried  with  my  whole  heart; 
hear  me,  O  LORD:  I  will  keep  thy  statutes. 

(Psa  138:1  KJV)  A  Psalm  of  David.  I  will  praise  thee 
with  my  whole  heart:  before  the  gods  will  I  sing  praise 
unto  thee. 

(Isa  1 :5  KJV)  Why  should  ye  be  stricken  any  more?  ye 
will  revolt  more  and  more:  the  whole  head  is  sick,  and 
the  whole  heart  faint. 

(Jer  3:10  KJV)  And  yet  for  all  this  her  treacherous 
sister  Judah  hath  not  turned  unto  me  with  her  whole 
heart,  but  feignedly,  saith  the  LORD. 

(Jer  24:7  KJV)  And  I  will  give  them  an  heart  to  know 
me,  that  I  am  the  LORD:  and  they  shall  be  my  people, 
and  I  will  be  their  God:  for  they  shall  return  unto  me 
with  their  whole  heart. 

(Jer  32:41  KJV)  Yea,  I  will  rejoice  over  them  to  do 
them  good,  and  I  will  plant  them  in  this  land  assuredly 
with  my  whole  heart  and  with  my  whole  soul. 


I  Peter  3:15  But  sanctify  the  Lord  God  in  your  hearts: 
and  be  ready  always  to  give  an  answer  to  every  man 
that  asketh  you  a  reason  of  the  hope  that  is  in  you  with 
meekness  and  fear: 


II  Timothy  2:  15  Study  to  show  thyself  approved  unto 
God,  a  workman  that  needeth  not  to  be  ashamed, 
rightly  dividing  the  word  of  truth. 


Christian  Conversions  -  According  to  the  Bible  - 
Can  NEVER  be  forced. 

Any  Conversion  to  Christianity  which  would  be 
"Forced"  would  NOT  be  recognized  by  God.  It  is  in 
His  True  and  KIND  nature,  that  those  who  come  to 

Him  and  choose  to  believe  in  Him,  must  come  to 
Him  OF  THEIR  OWN  FREE  WILL. 


Don't  Let  anyone  tell  you  that  Christians  support 
Forced  Conversions. 

That  is  False.  True  Christianity  is  NEVER  forced. 


Co  re  Universal  Rights 

The  right  to  believe,  to  worship  and  witness 

The  right  to  change  one's  belief  or  religion 

The  right  to  join  together  and  express  one's 
belief 


PROPHECY,  THE  END  of  DAYS,  and  the  WORLD 
the  Next  Few  Years. 


What  you  may  need  to  know 


There  is  much  talk  these  days  in  the  Islamic  world 
about  the  Time  of  Jacob,  also  known  as  the  End 
Times  or  the  End  of  Days'. 

The  records  of  Christianity  and  the  records  of  Islam 
both  seem  to  speak  about  the  End  Times.  But  the 
records  of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments  have  a  record 
in  the  area  of  prophecy  of  events  that  are  predicted  to 
occur  hundreds  of  years  before  they  happen,  and  that 
record  is  100%  accurate. 

According  to  Christianity,  in  order  for  a  prophet  or  a 
writer  or  an  author  to  truly  be  a  prophet  of  God,  that 
individual  must  be  1 00%  correct  1 00%  of  the  time. 

This  Standard  is  applied  to  the  Old  and  New 
Testaments  (the  Bible),  and  the  verdict  is  that  the  Bible 
is  1 00%  accurate,  1 00%  of  the  time.  History  and 
Archeology  confirms  this,  for  those  with  the  patience 
And  courage  to  seek  truth  and  accuracy. 

What  has  been  done  sometimes  in  the  name  of 
Christianity,  is  not  always  good.  But  true  Christians 
and  Christian  examples  remain  strong,  solid  and 
encouraging.  True  Christians  have  nothing  to  regret 


nor  be  ashamed  of.  Offereing  help  to  others  is  not 
wrong. 


There  are  many  perspectives  on  the  return  of  Jesus 
Christ.  The  New  Testaments  seems  to  predict  the 
return  of  Two  Messiahs  BOTH  of  whom  both  claim  to 
be  Jesus  Christ. 

The  first  Messiah  who  returns  to  help  those  who 
believe  in  Him  actually  does  not  come  to  Earth.  His 
feet  do  NOT  touch  Jerusalem  at  that  point  in  time. 
That  first  Messiah  calls  his  followers  (Christ-followers) 
to  Him,  and  they  are  caught  up  or  meet  Jesus  Christ  in 
the  air,  where  their  time  with  God  starts  at  that 
moment. 


The  second  Messiah  is  the  one  who  announces  that 
"He"  is  the  one  who  has  returned  to  Earth  to  establish 
His  Kingdom.  He  establishes  a  Temple  in  the  location 
of  the  Dome  of  the  Rock  [Temple  Mount]  in  Jerusalem, 
also  re-institutes  the  jewish  sacrifices  of  the  Old 
Testament,  and  proclaims  that  He  is  going  to  rule  on 
Earth.  Only  this  Messiah  who  will  call  himself  "Christ" 
will  be  a  false  Messiah,  in  other  words  the  False 
Christ,  the  Wrong  Christ. 


During  this  time,  Christians  believe  that  they  are  to 
continue  to  be  kind  to  their  friends  and  neighbors, 
whether  those  neighbors  and  friends  are  Christians  or 
Moslems  or  Hindus  or  anything  else.  This  remains  true 
in  the  End  Times. 


In  the  End  Times  according  to  Christianity,  Christians 
are  mostly  the  observers  of  the  greatness  of  God, 
explaining  to  those  who  want  to  know,  what  is  taking 
place  in  the  world  and  why  these  things  are 
happening. 

In  every  generation  of  humans,  there  are  many  who 
claim  that  they  WANT  to  live  in  a  world  without  God. 
For  that  reason,  God  is  going  to  give  them  what  they 
want.  Those  people  will  have  1)  a  world  without  God, 
but  where  2)  a  false  Messiah  arrives  claiming  to  be 
Christ,  and  only  an  understanding  of  accurate 
Christianity  will  be  able  to  help  and  show  those  people 
how  to  have  Eternal  Life. 

The  false  Messiah  comes  onto  the  world  stage  and 
exercises  power  and  dominion  [over  the  entire  world], 
ruling  from  the  geographic  location  of  the  Ancient 
Roman  Empire. 

The  false  Messiah  (obviously)  denies  that  he  is  false, 
and  institutes  a  system  of  global  economic  domination 
of  a  global  economic  system  of  money. 

That  money  is  a  "symbolic"  currency.  As  Christians 
today  understand  this,  the  currency  of  the  False 
messiah  is  not  based  on  Gold  or  Silver. 

The  currency  that  the  False  messiah  establishes  is 
"cashless".  It  does  not  require  paper  currency.  In  fact, 
the  new  currency  will  be  global,  and  it  is  expected  to 
be  cashless,  without  actual  currency. 


But  it  will  be  based  on  banking  principles  in  the  West, 
and  this  False  Messiah  will  cause  those  who  are 
jewish  to  believe  that  their  Messiah  has  returned.  Like 
much  of  the  rest  of  the  world,  many  will  be  deceived  by 
the  False  Messiah  who  will  accomplish  many  miracles 
and  will  institute  his  system  of  global  economic 
domination. 

The  False  Messiah  will  cause  that  the  entire  world  and 
governmental  structure  will  cause  the  implementation 
of  his  false  economic  system  of  currency. 

That  economic  system  is  a  system  of  global 
dominance  and  global  slavery.  The  global  bankers  will 
endorse  this  plan,  believing  that  they  will  reap  even 
greater  profits  than  they  currently  do  based  on  their 
system  of  unjust  usury. 

This  global  currency  will  depend  on  computers  to 
work,  and  computers  will  be  used  to  keep  records  of 
all  economic  transactions  all  over  the  world.  This  will 
be  a  closed  economic  system,  one  that  can  only  be 
used  by  those  who  have  accepted  the  false  currency 
of  the  False  Messiah. 

The  False  Messiah  will  cause  each  person  to  be 
obligated  to  accept  to  use  the  new  currency,  and  each 
individual  will  be  required  to  give  homage,  or  attention, 
or  reverence  or  adoration  or  some  kind  of  worship,  or 
allegiance  or  loyalty  to  the  false  messiah,  in  order  to 
be  able  to  use  the  new  cashless  currency. 

The  new  cashless  currency  will  have  one  feature  that 
those  "who  have  wisdom"  will  recognize:  the  new 


cashless  system  in  order  to  be  used  will  require  each 
human  to  have  a  particular  mark  or  "identifier"  or 
system  of  individual  identification  for  each  and  every 
single  separate  person  on  the  planet. 

That  may  seem  impossible.  But  even  now,  there  are 
millions  and  billions  of  computer  records  that  are  kept 
on  the  populations  of  all  nations  that  are  already  using 
modern  banking.  Therefore  it  is  not  difficult  to 
understand  that  keeping  track  of  7  billion  humans 
around  the  world  is  not  anything  that  is  difficult,  even 
at  this  moment. 

This  system  may  seem  impossible  to  establish 
especially  for  those  not  familiar  with  the  details  of 
power  inside  the  European  Union  or  the  West.  But 
then  if  all  of  this  is  only  fiction,  then  it  should  not  harm 
anyone  to  read  this,  and  then  prove  many  years  from 
now  that  all  of  these  concerns  were  false. 


The  new  cashless  system  will  incorporate  a  number 
within  itself,  as  part  of  its  numbering  system.  That 
number  has  been  identified  and  predicted  for  two 
thousand  years:  it  is  the  number  "six  hundred  and  sixty 
six"  or  666. 

That  may  seem  impossible,  but  actually  this  number  is 
already  used  as  a  primary  tracking  number  within  the 
computer  inventory  systems  of  the  world,  long  before 
you  have  read  these  few  pages. 

The  number  is  already  incorporated  in  almost  all 
goods  and  products  that  are  sold  around  the  world:  the 


number  is  within  something  called  the  Bar  Code  that 
can  be  found  on  all  products  for  sale  around  the  world. 

Please  remember  that  in  order  for  all  of  this  to  be 
significant,  it  must  be  part  of  an  economic  system  that 
requires  each  human  to  receive  or  accept  their  own 
numbering  on  their  right  hand  or  their  forehead.  The 
mark  could  be  visible,  but  it  is  likely  to  be  invisible  to 
the  eyes,  but  visible  to  machines,  scanners  and 
computers. 

This  bar  code  has  a  formal  name:  it  is  called  the  UPC 
or  Universal  Product  Code. 

An  individual  UPC  number  is  assigned  to  each 
physical  product  that  is  sold  on  this  planet.  The  UPC 
or  Universal  Product  Code  already  does  incorporate 
that  number  666  in  all  products. 

The  lines  [vertical  lines]  and  the  spacing  between 
them,  and  the  lines  themselves,  their  own  symetry 
determine  the  numbers  and  how  those  lines  [the  UPC 
bar  code]  are  read  or  scanned  by  the  computers  used 
today. 

The  UPC  has  666  built  within  it,  and  it  is  simply  the  two 
long  lines  on  the  left  of  the  bar  code,  the  two  long  lines 
on  the  right  of  the  bar  code,  and  the  two  long  lines  in 
the  middle  of  the  bar  code.  The  two  long  lines  on  the 
left  are  read  by  computers  and  scanners  as  the 
number  "six"  [  6  ],  and  so  are  the  two  long  lines  in  the 
middle  and  the  right  side.  Together,  they  form  a  part  of 
the  bar  code  that  in  fact  is  6  -  6  -  6  or  six  hundred  and 
sixty  six. 


Well  it  will  not  take  long  for  some  to  dispute  this.  Even 
some  theologians  have  taken  to  dispute  the  disclosure 
of  the  number  666,  suggesting  instead  that  the  correct 
number  to  watch  for  prophetically  is  not  666  but  61 6. 

That  is  simply  foolishness  and  a  distraction.  When  this 
economic  system  is  implemented,  one  of  the  signs  that 
will  accompany  this  will  be  the  leaders  of  all  faiths  and 
all  religions  who  will  falsely  state  that  there  is  no 
problem  and  no  risk  in  accepting  the  mark  of  the  slave, 
the  mark  of  those  who  accept  to  worship  the  False 
Messiah. 

These  events  were  discussed  a  long  time  ago  in  the 
Old  Testament  book  of  Daniel,  and  in  the  Final  and 
last  book  of  the  New  Testament  which  is  also  called 
the  Revelation  of  the  Apostle  Saint  John,  or  simply 
"Revelation". 

The  Apostle  John  was  the  last  living  apostle  of  Jesus 
Christ.  He  lived  until  around  the  year  95  A. D.  and  he  is 
the  one  who  taught  the  early  church  and  the  early 
Christians  which  books  of  the  Bible  were  written  by  his 
fellow  Apostles  (and  remember  he  wrote  five  books  of 
the  New  Testament  himself,  the  gospel  of  John,  the 
small  Epistles  of  1  John,  2  John  and  3  John,  and  the 
book  of  Revelation),  and  could  be  used  and  trusted. 


The  early  Christians  knew  which  books  were  to  be 
included  in  the  Bible  and  which  books  were  not. 


]  : 


:  [ 


A  modern  book  has  explained  much  of  this.  It  was 
simply  called  "Jesus  is  coming"  and  was  written  by 
W. E. B  Blackstone. 

It  is  easy  to  dismiss  Christians  as  zionists.  (Not  all 
Christians  are  zionists  in  anycase).  [  and  obviously, 
being  pro-jewish  is  NOT  the  same  thing  as  being  in 
favor  of  the  official  government  of  israel.  And  one  can 
be  a  Christian  and  desire  good  for  both  Jews  and 
Arabs].  But  Christian  Zionists  are  not  perceived  friends 
of  the  jews  when  they  are  warning  the  Jews,  even 
about  their  Jewish  state,  that  the  Messiah  who  comes 
to  tell  them  that  he  is  their  Messiah,  will  be  the  False 
Messiah. 

The  Ancient  Book  of  Daniel  is  in  the  Old  Testament.  It 
must  be  read  alongside  the  New  Testament  book  of 
Revelation,  in  order  to  give  understanding  to  those 
who  want  to  understand  prophecy  and  the  events 
predicted  in  the  End  Times  or  the  End  of  this  Age. 

Christians  understand  that  God  is  the  one  who  is  God, 
and  He  brings  about  the  End  Times  because  the 
planet  does  not  belong  to  itself.  The  planet  does  not 
belong  to  Humans,  or  to  the  false  [demonic]  beings 
who  pretend  to  come  from  other  planets. 

The  planet  belongs  to  God  and  He  is  the  one  who 
causes  everyone  rich  and  poor,  to  understand  through 
the  events  in  the  End  of  Days,  that  God  is  serious 
about  being  God,  and  humans  do  not  have  much  time 
to  get  their  own  life  in  order,  and  to  give  an  account  to 
God  who  is  going  to  return  and  require  that  account  of 
each  Human,  on  a  personal  and  individual  basis. 


That  task  is  so  impossible  to  understand  that  all  that 
humans  can  do  is  understand  and  come  to  God,  with 
the  understanding  that  God  may  or  may  not  require 
their  sacrifice,  but  He  does  require  those  who  seek 
Him  to  read  and  understand  and  follow  the  words  and 
doctrines  of  Jesus  Christ  as  explained  in  the  New 
Testament.  [The  Gospel  of  John  is  a  good  place  to 
start]. 

All  those  who  have  come  before  can  do,  is  leave  a  few 
things  around,  for  those  who  will  be  left  to  try  to 
understand  these  events  in  a  very  short  period  of  time. 

The  literal  understanding  of  the  Times  of  the  End  is 
that  they  will  last  seven  years,  and  that  much  of 
humanity  will  perish  during  that  time  through  a  variety 
of  catastrophes  and  disasters,  all  of  which  God  refuses 
to  stop  for  a  planet  that  has  been  saying  that  they  do 
not  need  Him  anymore. 

If  they  do  not  need  Him,  then  they  should  not  complain 
when  these  events  occur.  If  they  Do  need  God,  then 
they  should  be  honest  enough  to  admit  this,  try  to  find 
God,  pray  to  find  God  and  that  they  will  not  be 
deceived  and  that  God  would  help  them  to  find  Him. 

The  economic  system  that  requires  a  mark  may  have 
a  different  formulation  for  the  number  666.  It  may  stay 
the  same  as  it  is  now,  or  it  may  change.  But  at  this 
current  time,  no  one  is  [yet]  required  to  have  this  mark 
personally  on  their  mark  or  forehead,  though  if  the 
dollar  dies  or  is  replaced  by  a  new  currency,  the  new 
currency  may  be  the  one  that  is  either  an  interim 


currency,  or  the  new  currency  of  the  mark,  to  be  used 
only  by  those  who  accepted  to  be  marked 
[electronically  branded],  so  they  can  then  use  their 
mark  along  with  the  mark  of  the  new  economic 
system. 

A  "beast"  is  a  monster,  but  one  that  at  the  same  time  is 

usually  both  1 )  ferocious  and  \ 

2)  evil  in  addition  to  being  overpowering  and  strong. 

The  new  economic  system  will  be  ferocious  and 
overpowering.  It  will  be  directed  by  the  False  Messiah 
and  the  Beast.  (There  are  3  Evil  guys  described  in  the 
book  of  Revelation).  The  economic  system  using  the 
mark,  becomes  the  "mark  of  the  beast",  because  of 
two  factors: 

1)  the  one  who  runs  and  directs  the  system  is  a  beast 
who  is  ruled  by  Evil  and  by  Satan 

2)  the  economic  system  of  the  mark  of  the  beast  takes 
on  those  characteristics  of  the  beast  also. 

[the  system  for  those  who  refuse  to  go  along  will  not 
be  kind  nor  tolerant,  but  more  likely  a  combination  of 
the  worst  of  the  roman  empire,  the  worst  of  stalinist 
soviet  communist  USSR,  and  the  worst  of  the  the  time 
under  Hitler.] 

It  will  be  impossible  to  buy  anything  without  the  mark 
of  the  beast.  Most  likely,  it  may  start  out  as  optional 
and  quickly  become  mandatory.  As  soon  as  the 
economic  mark  will  be  made  mandatory,  itwill  become 
a  crime  of  life  or  death  to  try  to  conduct  economic 
transactions  without  the  official  government 


permission,  from  the  millions  and  millions  of  people 
who  have  foolishly  already  decided  to  consent  to 
accept  the  mark.  It  will  also  be  a  capital  crime  to  help 
or  assist  anyone  who  would  refuse  to  accept  the  mark. 
Therefore  the  system  of  the  beast  will  prevent 
neutrality:  it  will  prevent  people  from  having  the  choice 
of  being  able  to  "not  make  a  choice". For  that  reason, 
all  humans  will  chose,  and  then  God  will  classify  each 
person  according  to  the  choice  that  they  have  made, 
that  choice  having  Eternal  consequences. 

You  can  be  assured  that  there  will  be  billion  dollar 
contracts  by  public  relations  firms  to  convince  you  that 
accepting  your  individual  mark  on  your  right  hand  or 
forehead  will  help  you,  will  save  civilization,  will  help 
mother  earth,  will  help  us  all  work  collectively,  will 
allow  to  work,  and  oh  yes,  would  allow  you, 
incidentally  to  be  able  to  buy  food  to  eat. 

The  book  of  Revelation  says  those  who  accept  the 
mark  undergo  a  "deception",  the  implication  being  that 
those  who  accept  the  mark  are  spiritually  deceived  into 
acceptance  of  the  upside-down  universe:  where  evil  is 
viewed  as  good,  and  good  is  viewed  as  evil. 
At  that  point,  the  new  Messiah  would  be  perceived  as 
real  and  genuine  by  those  who  have  accepted  the 
mark,  until  later  on  when  they  will  realize  that  they 
have  been  deceived,  but  at  that  point  it  will  be 
impossible  for  them  to  change  their  mind  or  their 
commitment  to  the  false  Messiah,  and  this  would  have 
Eternal  Consequences  for  them.  The  time  to  decide 
therefore  is  before  that  time.  Now  would  probably  be  a 
good  time,  in  case  these  things  matter  to  you,  who  are 
reading  this. 


Didyoujustlaugh  ? 

Those  sillly  bar  codes... 

That  was  pretty  funny  ... 

But  seriously... What  does  your  laughter  tell  you  about  yourself  ? 

Does  it  tell  you  that  the  idea  of  tracking  you  is  so  strange, 
that  you  have  really  never  thought  about  it  before  ? 

Do  you  think  that  other  people  may  have  thought  about  it, 
even  though  you  might  not  ? 

England  has  more  than  2  Million  cameras  right  now. 

Do  they  track  everything  because  all  things  are  a  strong  danger  ? 

Or. . .do  the  cameras  track  people. .  just  in  case  ? 

So  what  do  you  think  would  happen  if  someone 

could  track  you  1)  100%  of  the  time  2)  with  100%  certainty 

3)  with  100%  accuracy  4  )  with   100%  of  all  that  you  do  ? 

If  Tracking  with  a  mark  on  your  right-hand  or  forehead 
becomes  mandatory  by  law,  and  it  will  be  a  crime  to  not 
have  that  mark,  and  it  will  also  be  impossible  to  buy  or 
sell  without  it,  do  you  know  how  you  would  respond  ? 

What  would  you  do  if  your  eternal  destiny  largely  depended 
on  your  answer  to  this  question  ? 

If  you  are  still  here  when  these  questions  are  valid,  you 
should  know  your  eternal  destiny  (after  death. .  .for  eternity) 
does  depend  on  your  answer. 


Satan-worship  on  a  Planetary  Scale:  When  ? 


The  Characteristics  of  the  First  Beast 
How  Ali  humans  will  be  the  ones  Deceived  and 

actually  ALL  Humans  [with  one  exception]  Worship  the  Beast 


The  Power  of  the  Beasi  comes  from  Satan 


Satan 


Revelation  13:1 
2  And  the  beast  which  I  saw  was  like  unto  a  leopard, 
and  his  feet  were  as  the  feet  of  a  bear, 

and  his  mouth  as  the  mouth  of  a  lion:  and  the  dragon  gave  him 

his  power,  and  his  seat,  and  great  authority. 


Oops:  Satan-worship  is  not  a  good  idea 


Revelation  13: 

4  And  they  worshipped  the  dragon  which  gave  power 
unto  the  beast:  and  they  worshipped  the  beast, 

saying,  Who  is  like  unto  the  beast?  who  is  able  to  make  war  with  him? 


Revelation  13:  The  Beast 

6  And  he  opened  his  mouth  in  blasphemy  against  God.jd  blaspheme 
his  name,  and  his  tabernacle,  and  them  thatdwell  in,>reaven. 

7  And  it  was  given  unto  him  to  make  war  with  the#aints,  and 
to  overcome  them:  and  power  was  given  him  ** 

over  all  kindreds,  and  tongues,  and  nations. 


5  minutes  of  Information  to  change 
vourEtemal  destination  ? 


Revelation  13: 


The  Beast 


8  And  all  that  dwell  upon  the  earth  shall  worship  himfr 

whoseriames  are  not  written 

in  tbe  book  of  life  of  the  Lamb  slain  from  the  foundation  of  the  world. 


Evefy  single  human  worships  the  beast,  infesstheir  individual  name  is  written  in  God's  book  of  life 


Revelation  13: 

9   If  any  man  have  an  ear,  let  him  hear. 


IttzkBsaspecialirdsrslancfrglDLrd&stardwhBtisbeirgsaid. 


Note:  The  First  Beast  is  the  Anti-C  hrist 


666  and  YOUR  taking  the  Mark  ||  QQQ^  Qf  Revelation 


The  C  haracteristics  of  the  Second  Beast  and  666 


rhe  False  Prophet 


Revelation  13:  ▼ 

13:11    And  I  beheld  another  beast  coming  up  out  of  the  earth 

and  he  had  two  horns  like  a  lamb,  and  he  spake  as  a  dragon. 


Revelation  13J 


False  Prophet 


The  AntiChrist 


1 2  And  he  exerciseth  all  the  power  of  the  first  beast  before  him, 
and  causeth  the  earth  and  them  which  dwell  therein  to  worship 
the  first  beast,  whose  deadly  wound  was  healed. 


Revelation  13: 

13  And  he  doeth  great  wonders,  so  that  he  maketh  fire  come  down 

from  heaveSvon  the  earth  in  the  sight  of  men, 


^ 


Revelation  13:14  And  dfeeeiveth  them  that  dwell  on  the  earth  by 
the  means  of  those  miracIeVvuhich  heJjad  power  to  do  in  the  sight 
of  the  beast;  saying  to  them  thaSoIwerism  the  earth,  that  they  should 
make  an  image  to  the  beast,  which  nBdtne  wound  by  a  sword, 
and  did  live. 


Revelation  13:15  And  he  had  power  t^give  life  unto  the  image 
of  the  beast,  that  the  image  of  the  beast  should  both  speak, 
and  cause  that  as  many  as  would/fot  worship  the  image  of  the  beast 
should  be  killed. 


Image  of  the  beast  may  bea  R  obotor  Computer  image,or  a  hologram,  Butit 
isanerip'tvthrouori  which  the  Beast  [Antj-C  hristl  exterids  power  overmankind 


Revelation  13:16  And  he  causeth  all,  both  small  and  great, 
rich  and  poor,  free  and  bond,  to  receive  a  mark 
in  their  right  hand,  or  in  their  foreheads: 

1 7  And  that  no  man  might  buy  or  sell,  save  [except]  he  that  had  the  mark, 
or  the  name  of  the  beast,  or  the  number  of  his  name. 


"Man"  =  Mankind,  menAND  women 


Revelation  13:18  Here  is  wisdom.  Let  him  that  hath  understanding 
count  the  number  of  the  beast:  for  it  is  the  number  of  a  man; 

and  his  number  is  Six  hundred  threescore  and  six.  [GGvj 


The  Book  of  Revelation  needs  to 

understanding  on  E 


c  alono  with  the  O.T.  Book  of  Daniel  in  order  to  make  sense.  r  or 
n  R-ive  5:inn  m  the  bu:  T-s  "woEicylorisbyH  ;l:p 


What  is  the  "Book  of  Life"  ?     Is  YOUR  name  in  it  ? 


(Phil  4:3  KJV)  [Saint  Paul  Knewofthe  Book  of  Life:]  And  I  entreat  [ask]  thee  also, 
true  yokefellow,  [fellow-worker]  help  those  women  which  laboured 
with  me  in  the  gospel,  with  Clement  also,  and  with  other  my 
fellow  labourers,  whose  names  are  in  the  boc 


(Rev  3:5  KJV)  He  that  overcometh,  the  same  shall  be  clothed  in 

white  raiment;  and  I  will  not  blot  out  his  name  out  of  the  book  of  Mfe, 

but  I  will  confess  his  name  before  my  Father,  and  before  his  angels. 

(Rev  13:8  KJV)  And  all  that  dwell  upon  the  earth  shall  worship  him* 
whose  names  are  not  written  in  the  book  of  Mfe  of  the  Lamb  slain 
from  the  foundation  of  the  world. 

(Rev  17:8  KJV)  The  beast  that  thou  sawest  was,  and  is  not; 
and  shall  ascend  out  of  the  bottomless  pit,  and  go  into  perdition: 
and  they  that  dwell  on  the  earth  shall  wonder^zz 


whose  names  were  not  written  in  the  book  of  Mfe 

of  the  world,  when  they  behold  the  beast  that  was,  and  i 


and  the  books  were  opened:  and  another  book  was  opened, 
which  is  the  book  of  I  ife:  and  the  dead  were  judged  out  of  those  things 
which  were  written  in  the  books,  according  to  their  works. 


(Rev  20:15  KJV)  And  whosoever  was  not  found  written  in  the 
book  of  Mfe  was  cast  into  the  lake  of  fire. 


(Rev  21 :27  KJV)  And  there  shall  in  no  wise  enter  into  it  any  thing 
defileth,  neither  whatsoever  worketh  abomination.  or  maketh  a  lie: 
but  they  which  are  written  in  the  Lamb's  book  of  Mfe 


(Rev  22: 19  KJV)  And  if  any  man  shall  take  away  from  the  words 

of  the  book  of  this  prophecy,  God  shall  take  away  his  part 
out  of  the  book  of  I  ife,  and  out  of  the  holy  city,  and  from  the  things 

Which  are  Written  in  thiS  bOOk.   ™Sw.rnlr<,lnRe,!2:19referStoln!lUmiorTran!J.tDni«l»[)vi»,Bme»Dr«oriheBDIe 
Note:The  Lamb  slain  f:o"  jj  ;  I  Fthe   i    ■  i  is  I  esus  Christ  lesus  Christwas  the  pre-existen:  C-eator  of  the  L.r.ivefse  (lohn  II 


God  claims  that  He  knows  each  of  our  hearts.  God 
also  claims  to  know  everything  about  us,  all  of  our 
accomplishments  and  all  of  our  sins  also.  But  God 
sends  Jesus  Christ  to  save  us  through  His  words  in 
the  New  Testament.  Those  who  ignore  them  take  a 
heavy  risk  to  themselves,  especially  where  this  risk  is 
one  of  Eternity. 

As  the  saying  goes,  Eternity  is  a  long  time  to  be 
wrong.  For  that  reason,  it  is  important  to  understand 
who  Jesus  Christ  truly  is  and  who  He  actually  claimed 
to  be. 

Here  is  where  all  of  this  connects  back  to  the  End  of 
Days:  Those  who  accept  to  take  and  participate  in  the 
economic  system  that  incorporates  the  use  of  the 
number  "six  hundred  and  sixty  six"  on  their  right-hand 
or  their  forehead  forfeit  [give  u  p]  their  opportunity  for 
Eternal  Life  and  Heaven,  and  Eternity  with  God. 

According  to  the  Bible,  Satan  is  not  some  clever  guy 
meant  to  give  people  just "  a  little  bit  of  harmless  fun". 
Satan  is  not  your  budy.  Satan  is  not  your  friend,  simply 
out  to  help  you  have  a  "good  time". 

Satan  is  a  real  being,  who  is  one  of  the  most  powerful 
and  intelligent  beings  ever  created. 

He  used  to  be  an  Angel,  but  turned  against  God. 
Satan  is  the  one  who  will  be  in  charge  of  the  planet 
during  the  time  of  the  false  Messiah. 


This  is  Standard  historic  Christian  doctrine,  and  this  is 
the  doctrines  that  have  been  proclaimed  since  the 
Early  Christians.  These  are  NOT  innovations,  these 
are  not  anything  new.  [sources  -  Free  -  provided  at  the 
of  this  for  those  who  want  to  know  more  in  PDF 
Download] 

You  may  ask:  Well,  what  does  this  have  to  do  with  the 
End  of  Days  and  the  Economic  System  ? 

God  wants  people  to  worship  him  Freely,  but  if  they 
want  to  oppose  God,  God  will  allow  them  to  make  that 
choice.  But  making  a  choice,  is  not  the  same  thing  as 
being  able  to  chose  the  consequences  of  that  choice. 

There  is  no  one  in  Christianity  who  will  convince 
anyone  against  their  Will  to  worship  God.  God  tells 
each  person  they  are  responsible.  From  that  point  on, 
the  burden  is  on  them,  they  can  respond  to  God  or  not, 
and  their  own  response  determines  their  own  fate  and 
consequences,  especially  for  Eternity. 

The  nature  of  a  God  is  that  He  makes  the  rules  and  is 
not  required  to  explain  anything  to  anyone.  However 
because  God  loves  each  person  and  wants  them  to 
chose  Him  (and  not  chose  to  follow  Satan),  God  wrote 
roughly  1500  pages  of  material  in  the  Old  and  New 
Testament  (the  Bible)  to  help  people  make  their  own 
choice. 

The  specific  characteristic  of  accepting  to  use  the 
Economic  [most  likely  cashless]  system  is  that  those 
humans  who  use  it  must  agree  to  accept  the  False 
messiah  as  their  own  savior. 


The  Bible  refers  to  this  as  worship.  Let  us  not  loose 
track  of  definitions:  It  does  not  matter  whether  the 
person  will  admit  this  or  not.  Worship  consists  of  doing 
the  actions  that  a  deity,  such  as  God,  would 
understand  worship  to  be. 

God  says  that  those  who  accept  to  take  the  economic 
mark  in  their  right-hand  or  their  forehead  will  forfeit 
their  Life  with  Him,  and  will  never  be  able  to  be  saved. 

From  that  point  on,  those  who  have  accepted  to  use 
the  economic  system  by  the  mark  on  their  right  hand 
or  forehead  have  declared  themselves  -  by  their  action 
-  to  be  the  enemy  of  God. 

But  God  is  the  one  who  deals  with  those  who  are  His 
enemies.  The  presumption  is  also  that  those  who  have 
agreed  to  accept  the  new  economic  cashless  system 
which  uses  the  mark  have  undergone  an  internal 
change.  By  their  action,  they  have  agreed  to  be  under 
the  dominion  of  evil  (just  like  those  who  accepted 
Sauron  in  the  Lord  of  the  Rings)  and  this  new 
allegiance  to  the  False  Messiah,  His  economic  system 
of  the  mark,  and  the  acceptance  of  the  ruler  of  the 
False  Messiah  who  will  accomplish  many  false 
miracles  (through  the  power  of  the  fallen  angel  Satan) 
has  consequences:  it  will  change  the  person  who 
takes  this  mark,  even  while  they  will  deny  that  inner 
transformation  to  the  willing  acceptance  of  evil  has 
taken  place. 

In  anycase,  it  will  not  be  enough  to  reject  the  Mark. 
People  who  decide  to  reject  the  mark,  and  there  will  be 


millions,  are  hardly  okay  or  alright.  They  will  have  very 
little  time  to  actually  decide  and  accept  to  believe  the 
words  of  Jesus  Christ  in  the  New  Testament.  if  they 
can  find  New  Testaments  that  are  accurate. 

The  New  Testament  that  is  accurate  is  that  which  has 
been  used  by  the  Historic  Christian  Church  for 
thousands  of  years.  If  it  was  good  enough  for  the 
Earlier  Christians,  it  remains  good  enough  today. 

This  would  be  the  New  Testaments  that  are  based  on 
the  received  text  of  the  Koine  Greek  New  Testament. 
This  would  include  the  Scrivener  Version  of  1860  [FH  A 
Scrivener]  [do  not  use  versions  of  his,  published  after 
his  death],  and  the  Standard  Koine  Greek  version  of 
the  New  Testament  published  by  Cura.  P.  Wilson, 
such  as  the  version  of  1833. 

These  two  Ancient  Koine  Greek  Testaments  are  based 
on  the  {western  calendar}  1550-51  greek  textof 
Robert  Estienne,  sometimes  called  Stephens  or 
Stephanus. 

The  False  Messiah  in  the  New  Testament  has  another 
name.  He  is  not  the  true  Christ,  therefore  by  falsely 
claiming  to  be  the  true  one,  he  reveals  himself  to  be 
the  AntiChrist.  But  rem  ember  at  that  point  in  time 
where  He  rules,  he  will  not  be  officially  claiming  to  be 
evil.  On  the  contrary,  he  will  claim  to  be  the  true 
Messiah  of  love,  miracles  and  peace. 

These  facts  then  are  what  missionaries  may  share. 
Missionaries  do  not  work  for  any  government  of  the 
West,  as  this  is  prohibited  and  illegal  in  the  West. 


[Missionaries  in  Islam  often  ARE  funded  by  their  own 
islamic  republic]. 

Christian  Missionaries  have  only  one  goal  which  is  to 
inform  and  acquaint  you  with  facts  that  you  may  find 
interesting  and  that  may  save  your  Eternal  life  for  you 
and  your  family. 

Listening  to  any  missionary  will  not  make  you  a 
Christian.  Missionaries  are  ordinary  people.  They  have 
decided  that  they  will  try  to  help  others  by  presenting 
truth  and  kindness  to  others.  Those  who  hear  what 
they  have  to  say  are  free  to  accept  or  reject  what  they 
say.  That  is  all. 

Missionaries  are  usually  very  educated  and  devote 
much  time  (often  many  years)  to  learning  about  other 
people  and  about  other  cultures.  They  do  not  try  to  do 
this  in  order  to  gain  their  Eternal  Life.  By  definition, 
Christians  already  have  accepted  and  received 
Eternal  Life. 

Christians  do  not  need  to  worry  about  Salvation  by 
doing  good  works.  For  the  true  Christian,  there  is  no 
relationship  between  good  works  and  obtaining 
salvation.  Salvation  for  each  individual  on  the  planet  is 
Free,  Christians  are  those  who  have  understood  and 
accepted  to  believe  this.  They  already  possess  this 
from  the  instant  that  they  become  Christians  and 
accept  the  words  of  Jesus  in  the  New  Testament. 

Missionaries  do  NOT  earn  their  way  to  heaven  by 
saving  or  converting  other  people. 


Missionaries  agree  to  share  the  good  news  of 
Christianity,  because  of  the  individual  and  personal 
good  that  this  same  message  has  accomplished  for 
them,  on  the  inside  of  who  they  are.  Missionaries  risk 
a  lot  to  communicate  the  Love  of  God  to  others.  Most 
people  cannot  even  understand  this.  Many  people 
today  have  lives  that  are  without  hope  and  without 
purpose.  Millions  are  aimless  and  without  goals  on  the 
larger  scale.  But  Christians  will  risk  much  to  share  the 
gospel  with  others,  because  that  is  what  God 
commands  them  to  do  and  wants  them  to  do. 

In  England  the  challenge  is  not  that  people  are 
ignorant  of  how  to  be  saved  and  have  Eternal  life. 
Many  are,  but  the  challenge  is  for  those  who  have 
already  heard  this  to  understand  that  this  is  really  true, 
genuinely  accurate.  It  is  easy  to  hide  doubts  behind 
the  walls  of  the  propaganda  that  is  falsely  called 
"science"  these  days. 

People  think  they  must  not  admit  to  being  religious, 
since  this  might  not  be  "sophisticated".  But  God  is  the 
most  sophisticated  one  of  all.  As  the  saying  goes:  He 
is  no  fool  to  give  up  that  which  cannot  keep,  in 
order  to  gain  that  which  he  cannot  loose  [referring 
to  Eternal  Life  offered  by  God  through  Christ]. 

As  they  will  admit,  Missionaries  are  sinners  also.  If  you 
do  not  believe  this,  ask  them.  Then  ask  them  what 
they  have  done  about  their  own  sins,  and  listen  to  their 
answers.  Missionaries  do  not  claim  to  be  better  than 
others.  They  only  claim  that  the  mercy  of  God  that  has 


been  given  to  them,  can  be  given  to  everyone  else 
also. 

Missionaries  could  be  anywhere  else  in  the  world. 
They  may  not  have  to  come  to  your  area  of  the  planet. 
But  if  God  sends  them  there,  maybe  you  should  thank 
God  that  he  cares  enough  to  send  those  who  risk 
hardship  and  difficulty  for  being  brave  enough  to  try  to 
obey  God  and  give  you  information  that  may  save  your 
Eternal  life. 

Most  missionaries  have  given  up  a  life  of  comfort  and 
riches  that  they  could  have  had  in  their  own  nations. 
They  have  made  this  choice  to  try  to  show  the  love  of 
God  to  others.  This  example  is  worthy  of  kindness  and 
respect. 

Christians  usually  are  there  to  help,  or  to  establish 
schools  or  hospitals.  Christians  do  not  do  these  things 
in  order  to  earn  or  merit  their  eternal  life.  They  do 
these  things  as  a  result  of  being  transformed  and 
changed  for  the  betterment  [amelioration]  of  others,  by 
God 

Christians  are  not  a  witness  to  themselves,  but  to  the 
God  that  they  serve.  Those  who  worship  a  mean  and 
cruel  God  will  become  mean  and  cruel.  Those  who 
worship  a  God  of  love  and  help  and  mercy  and 
kindness  will  demonstrate  love,  help,  mercy  and 
kindness  to  others.  People  become  like  the  God  they 
serve. 

Some  people  say  that  if  a  person  has  harmed  a 
Christian,  that  they  cannot  become  a  Christian.  But 


that  is  NOT  true.  Saint  Paul,  even  before  he  became  a 
Christian  persecuted  Christians.  Then  God  showed 
Him  how  Paul  was  acting  against  God.  Paul  became  a 
Christian. 

Jesus  Christ  came  to  save  everyone  including 
murderers  and  prostitutes.  No  one  is  holy  enough  to 
be  allowed  into  Heaven  with  any  sins  or  imperfection 
in  their  life.  God  is  too  Holy  to  allow  this.  God  can 
regenerate  and  change  anyone  if  they  are  sincere 
when  they  repent,  and  if  they  are  seeking  God  with  all 
of  their  heart.  Read  it  for  yourself  in  the  New 
Testament  gospel  of  John. 

There  is  no  need  to  be  afraid,  or  to  allow  fear  to  be  in 
control.  Christianity  teaches  a  life  of  inner  peace,  not 
a  life  ruled  by  fear. 

No  one  in  true  Christianity  will  ever  convert  you  by 
force,  since  that  would  be  disrespectful  to  God,  and  an 
infringement  upon  His  dominion.  There  are  many 
people  in  religions  that  are  very  rich  because  they  try 
to  censor  and  keep  information  from  reaching  those 
who  would  benefit  most  by  it. 

Many  of  those  same  people  are  rich,  and  do  not  want 
their  positions  to  be  affected.  They  would  rule  by  fear 
and  the  threat  of  force  and  violence.  Humans  who  try 
these  methods  bring  greatcurses  upon  themselves. 
Ouestions  that  have  been  raised  legitimately  require 
answers.  The  events  which  have  been  predicted  will 
occur.  They  cannot  be  stopped  by  humans  (though 
they  may  be  delayed  by  prayer). 


There  are  some  books  listed  along  with  this  New 
Testament.  We  would  urge  you  to  consider  them  so 
that  you  may  find  the  answers  you  are  seeking: 


Historic  Mainstream  Books  that  may  be  of  use: 

Jesus  is  Corning  by  W. E. B.  Blackstone 

available  online  for  Free  [PDF]  at  www.archive.org 

How  to  study  the  Bible  by  R.A.  Torrey 
available  online  for  Free  [PDF] 

The  Canon  of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments  by 
Archibald  Alexander  -  available  online  for  Free  [PDF] 

Pilgrim's  Progress  -  An  explanation  of  the  life  as  a 
Christian,  in  narrative.  Very  good,  Other  language 
versions  are  known  to  exist  in  French,  German;  Dutch, 
Arabic,  and  Chinese.  Available  online  for  Free  Pdf  and 
maybe  from  Google  Books. 

an  explanation  of  the  number  666  =  "  Recapitulated 
apostasy  the  true  rationale  of  the  concealed"  name  of 
the  Roman  empire  by  George  Stanley  Faber  -  best  for 
those  Christians  and/or  for  those  who  know  English 

language  well  Available  for  Free  online  at  Archive.org  or  with 
Google  books 

Versions  of  the  Bible  that  are  sound  and  accurate 
include: 

Ethiopic  New  Testament  -  1 857 

Available  for  Free  online  [PDF]  atArchive.org  or  with  Google  books 


Italian  Diodati  Edition  -  Original 

Available  for  Free  online  at  Archive.org  or  with  Google  books 

Spanish  -  1 602  Reina  Valera  Edition  -  Original 

Available  for  Free  online  at  Archive.org  or  with  Google  books 


The  Arabic  Bible  - 1869  Cornelius  Van  Dyke  [We 
recommend  the  original  editions  of  1 867  and  1 869 
only]  -  Available  for  Free  online  [PDF]  atArchive.org  or  with  Google  books 


Sanskrit  /  Sanscrit  Bible  -  Yes,  Sanskrit  is  still  used 
today  in  India.  The  Sanscrit  3dition  that  is  accurate  is 
the  version  by  Wenger.  Available  forFree online  [PDF]  atArchive.org 
or  with  Uoogle  books 


Tamil  -  (Tamou) 
Edition  of  1859  (India) 


Available  for  Free  online  [PDF]  atArchive.org  or  with  Google  books 

Karen  -  The  Karen  New  Testament  (Sgau  Karen) 

Available  for  Free  o  iline  [PDF]  atArchive.org  or  with  Google  books 

Burmese  -  Myanmar  -  Burma  -  New  Testament 
avaiiabie.  Edition  of  i  650. 

Available  for  Free  online  [PDF]  atArchive.org  or  with  Google  books 

Hindi  -  The  New  Testament  in  Hindi,  also  called 
Hindustani.  Editions  preferable  before  1881 . 

Available  for  Free  online  [PDF]  atArchive.org  or  with  Google  books 

Le  Nouveau  Testament  -  Ostervald  -  1 868-72 
(be  cautious  as  many  Ostervald  and  David  Martin 
versions  in  French  have  been  altered).  The  french 


version  of  Louis  Segond  is  popular  but  is  actually 
based  on  the  text  of  Westcott  and  Hort. 

Accurate  Osterval  version  available  for  Free  online  at  Archive.org  or 
with  Google  books 

Hungarian  Bible  -  1 692  -  Original 

Available  for  Free  online  at  Archive.org  or  with  Google  books 

The  Persian  New  Testament  -  1 837  version  of  Henry 
Martyn  -  Available  for  Free  online  [PDF]  atArchive.org  or  with  Google  books 

Ali  the  Messianic  Prophecies  of  the  Bible  by  Lockyer. 

The  Hidden  Dangers  of  the  Rainbow  by  C.  Cumbey. 

The  Case  for  Christ  -  Strobel 


Eines  Christen  reise  nach  der  seligen  ewigkeit : 
welche  in  unterschiedlichen  artigen  sinnbildern,  den 
gantzen  zustand  einer  bussfertigen  und 
gottsuchenden  seele  vorstellet  in  englischer  sprache 
beschrieben  durch  Johann  Bunjan,  lehrer  in  Betford, 
um  seiner  furtrefflichkeit  willen  in  die  hochteutsche 
sprache  ubersetzt 


Le  voyage  du  Chretien  vers  l'eternite  bienheureuse  : 
ou  l'on  voit  representes,  sous  diverses  images,  les 
differents  etats,  les  progres  et  l'heureuse  fin  d'une  ame 
Chretienne  qui  cherche  dieu  en  Jesus-Christ 


Auteur(s)  :  Bunyan,  John  (1 628-1 688).  Auteur  du 
texte 

Le  pelerinage  d'un  nomme  Chretien  -  ecrit  sous 
l'allegorie  d'un  songe  /  [par  John  Bunyan]  ;  trad.  de 
l'anglais  avec  une  pref.  [par  Robert  Estienne] 

Available  for  Free  online  at  Archive.org  or  with  Google  books 

Baxter,  Richard  Title  Die  ewige  Ruhe  der  Heiligen. 
Dargestellt  von  Richard  Baxter. 


Pilgerreise  zur  seligen  Ewigkeit.  Von  Johann  Bunyan. 
Aus  dem  Englischen  neu  ubersetzt 


Der  himlische  Wandersmann  :  oder  Eine 
Beschreibung  vom  Menschen  der  in  Himmel  kommt: 
Sammt  dem  Wege  darin  er  wandelt,  den  Zeichen  und 
der  Spure  da  er  durchgehet,  und  einige  Anweisungen 
wie  man  laufen  soli  das  Kleinod  zu  ergreifen  / 
Beschrieben  in  Englischer  Sprache  durch  Johannes 
Bunyan. 


II  pellegrinaggio  del  cristiano  /  tradotto  da.ll'  inglese  di 
John  Bunyan  dai  Stanislao  Bianciardi 
Firenze  :  Tipografia  e.  Libr.  Claudiana 


Author  Bunyan,  John,  1 628-1 688 

Title  Tian  lu  li  cheng 

[China]  :  Mei  yi  mei  zong  hui,  1857 


El  viador,  bajo  del  simil  de  un  sueno  por  Juan  Bunyan 


"Everyone  has  the  right  to  freedom  of 

thought,  conscience  and  religion;  this  right 

includes  freedom  to  change  his  religion  or 

belief,  and  freedom,  either  alone  or  in 

community  with  others  and  in  public  or 

private,  to  manifest  his  religion  or  belief  in 

teaching,  practice,  worship  and  observance." 

-  Article  18  of  the  U. N.  Universal 
Declaration  of  Human  Rights  - 


Christian  Conversions  -  According  to  the  Bible 
Can  NEVER  be  forced. 


Any  Conversion  to  Christianity  which  would  be 
"Forced"  would  NOT  be  recognized  by  God.  It  is  in 
His  True  and  KIND  nature,  that  those  who  come  to 

Him  and  choose  to  believe  in  Him,  must  come  to 
Him  OF  THEIR  OWN  FREE  WILL. 


Don't  Let  anyone  tell  you  that  Christians  support 
Forced  Conversions. 

That  is  False.  True  Christianity  is  NEVER  forced. 


Co  re  Universal  Rights 

The  right  to  believe,  to  worship  and  witness 

The  right  to  change  one's  belief  or  religion 

The  right  to  join  together  and  express  one's 
belief 


The  subject  of  the  End  Times  in  the  west  is  called  Biblical 
Prophecy.  For  more  information  on  this  topic,  feel  free  to  consult 
the  Standard  books  on  this  including:  The  Late  Great  Planet  Earth 
(Lindsey),  and  the  Charts  of  Clarence  Larkin  may  give  someone  a 
quick  overview.  Things  to  come  by  Dwight  Pentecost  is  interesting 
though  technical.  Hidden  Dangers  of  the  Rainbow  by  Cumbey  will 
offer  a  quick  read  to  those  who  are  able  to  obtain  a  rare  copy.  The 
Christian  in  Complete  Armor  by  Gurnall  [Free  Online]  will  offer  a 
source  of  spiritual  strength  to  those  who  have  the  courage  and 
wisdom  to  read  it. 

Some  of  Larkin's  Material  is  available  for  Free  online. 


Remedv  and  Help  for  Occult  &  Demonic  Forces 


We  include  this  short  section  for  those  who  would  like  to 
take  immediate  action,  in  order  to  help  their  life  or  the  life 
of  someone  that  they  care  about. 

The  following  covers  a  topic  called  the  topic  of  "disembodied 
spirits"  or  the  topic  of  Spirits  in  the  world  around  us. 

Christianity  teaches  that  there  are  1)  spiritual  forces  that  are 
created  by  Him,  and  that  work  with  God,  and  2)  that  there  are 
spiritual  forces  that  rebelled  against  God,  and  try  to  use  their 
influence  to  harm  the  good  that  God  accomplishes. 

Christianity  does  NOT  recognize  that  there  are  neutral 
spiritual  forces.  Christianity  does  not  recognize  that  there  are 
spirits  thatroam  the  earth  with  no  destination  or  purpose. 
Christianity  teaches  that  spiritual  forces  may  attempt  to 
contact  or  respond  those  who  seek  them,  and  that  those  forces 
are  evil  and  will  do  harm  to  humans. 

The  reason  is  that  Humans  can  be  deceived  by  spiritual  forces 
that  would  claim  to  be  good,  but  are  not.  The  Christian 
solution  is  to  simply  have  nothing  to  do  with  forces  that  are 
not  part  of  the  Kingdom  of  God  and  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Those  who  disagree  have  the  right  to  chose,  but  should  not 
complain  if  they  find  out  that  the  spiritual  forces  they  contact 
truly  are  evil  and  deceive  them.  Most  people  do  NOT  find  this 
out  for  many  years,  until  their  life  is  wasted  and  it  is  too  late  to 
do  much  for  God.  THAT  is  exactly  the  purpose  of  those 
forces,  to  cause  humans  to  spend  their  life  and  their  time 
chasing  things  which  do  not  matter  instead  of  investing  in 
their  own  spiritual  future,  in  the  afterlife. 


Some  people  think  that  life  is  to  be  lived  on  Earth,  while 
others  understand  that  life  here  is  simply  a  down-payment. 
Life  here  is  simply  time  to  prepare  for  the  next  thousands  of 
years,  with  God  and  others  who  serve  Him. 

Christianity  does  NOT  recognize  the  category  of  spiritual 
entities  (spirits)  that  are  full  of  Mischief,  or  mischievous. 

Christianity  would  conclude  that  those  spirits,  where  they 
actually  exist,  are  causing  mischief  as  a  trick  to  prompt 
humans  to  become  involved  with  them,  in  the  same  manner 
as  a  human  will  puli  a  piece  of  string  in  front  of  a  CAT  in 
order  to  watch  the  cat  react. 

There  are  humans  who  have  ALREAD  Y  found  out  that  certain 
spiritual  forces  are  Evil.  These  people  have  tried  to  get  rid  of 
them  but  do  not  know  how.  There  is  no  solution  thatexists 
other  than  to  genuinely  become  a  Christian  and  then  take  the 
steps  that  the  Bible  instructs. 

Incantations  and  rituals  do  not  "force"  any  spiritual  entity  to 
do  anything.  No  ritual  by  a  priest  was  ever  effective 
BECAUSE  it  was  a  ritual,  or  because  it  contained  certain 
words.  However,  spirits  DO  respond  to  those  who  are  truly 
Chrsitians,  and  THEY  can  certainly  tell  those  who  are 
genuinely  Christians  (followers  of  the  true  Jesus  Christ),  and 
those  who  are  faking  this  or  are  insincere.  It  is  a  BAD  idea  to 
attempt  to  fool  or  deceive  a  Demon.  THAT  does  not  work, 
AND  humans  who  try  this  only  end  up  with  much 
ensnarement  by  those  demonic  forces. 

There  are  solutions  to  these  dilemmas.  None  of  them  will 
work  for  those  who  are  not  saved  or  for  those  who  are  NOT 
Christian.  Try  it  if  you  want,  but  be  prepared  for  the 
consequences. 


Demonic  Spirits  play  by  the  rules  that  GOD  lays  down  and 
NOT  by  the  rules  that  you  may  have  been  mis-led  into 
believing  by  some  slick  occult  publishing  company. 

Witches  have  precious  little  power  in  fact,  and  the  few  that  do 
are  under  such  oppression  and  such  personal  bondage  that  they 
have  no  freedom,  but  they  will  not  speak  this  truth  to  others. 

The  price  of  their  freedom  (they  have  been  told)  is  the 
ensnarement  or  seduction  of  others.  The  following  prayers  are 
provided  in  case  they  are  of  assistance.  Those  who  use  them 
must  be  true  Christians,  and  recognized  by  God  as  such. 

Having  said  that,  spiritual  warfare  and  spiritual  conflict  (since 
this  IS  that  area:  the  conflict  in  spiritual  realms  between 
spiritual  forces)  is  very  much  like  running  or  any  other  long 
distance  task:  it  is  long  term  preparation  that  makes  the 
difference. 

A  new  Christian  is  NOT  to  be  dealing  with  demonic  forces, 
and  would  be  well  advised  to  seek  advice  from  those  who 
are  serious,  sober,  and  committed  genuine  Christians  for  many 
years,  before  dealing  with  these  areas. 


Many  books  have  been  written  on  this  topic.  Many  of  them  are 
written  by  those  who  are  occultists  who  are  possessed  and 
seeking  to  mislead  others.  We  will  recommend  OTHER 
Christian  books  at  the  end  of  this  section  for  those  who  wish 
to  pursue  these  matters  with  the  seriousness  they  deserve. 
Most  of  the  books  available  in  these  areas  for  Christians  are 
written  in  English  or  German. 

Also,  it  may  not  be  enough  to  pray  these  prayers  once.  It  may 
take  much  time  to  have  the  impact  desired.  In  order  to  have 
personal  victory  in  these  areas  over  demonic  spirits: 

1)  One  must  be  a  Genuine  Christian 


2)  One  must  seek  to  actively  follow  God 

3)  One  must  spend  much  TIME  reading  the  Bible,  and 

4)  One  must  spend  much  TIME  praying  and  learning  HOW 
to  pray  to  God  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ,  in  accordance 
(agreement)  with  the  information  and  principles  explained 
in  the  New  Testament. 


prayer  of  renunciation  of  Demonic  Forces 

Prayer  to  renounce  witchcraft  and/or  any  spiritual 
practice  contrary  to  God  and  His  given  instructions 


{Whether  you  have  decided  to  become  a  Christian  20  years 
ago  or  five  minutes  ago,  you  can  still  pray  this  prayer.  If  you 
are  not  a  Christian  believer,  or  if  you  are  confused  about  what 
this  means,  no  problem.  Just  go  to  the  section  on  how  to 
become  a  Christian,  pray  that  prayer,  and  then  come  back  and 
pray  this  one} 

Lord  God,  I  do  not  come  always  to  talk  with  you  when  I 
should  Lord,  I  find  this  prayer  difficult  and  I  pray  that  you 
would  give  me  the  grace,  strength  and  courage  that  I  need  to 
pray  it  and  mean  it. 

Lord,  I  come  to  you  because  I  am  a  true  Christian  believer,  I 

(your  name  here) ,  being  under  the  Blood  of  Jesus, 

claiming  the  Mind  of  Jesus,  and  the  Spirit  of  Jesus,  do  hereby 
present  my  request  to  you  boldly  before  your  Throne  of  Grace 
(Ephesians  2:3/Hebrews  4:14-16/Philippians  2:  1-1 1).  I  ask 
that  you  would  neutralize  and  prevent  any  force  or  evil 
presence  from  acting  that  might  try  to  keep  me  from  praying 
this  prayer,  in  the  name  of  Jesus  and  in  the  power  of  your 
blood.  I  pray  that  you  would  give  me  your  spiritual  strength 
and  your  spiritual  protection.  I  thank  you  for  what  you  did  for 
me  by  dying  on  the  cross  for  me. 

I  come  before  you  in  prayer  today  In  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ 
because  I  want  to  renounce  any  and  all  practices  that  are 
contrary  to  you  or  to  your  teachings.  I  come  before  you  today 
in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ. 

I  come  before  you  today  because  I  want  to  renounce  any 
contact  or  seeking  of  any  spirit  or  spiritual  entity  other  than 


the  Christian  Triune  God  or  the  Son  of  God,  Jesus  Christ.  I 
want  to  renounce  any  and  all  of  my  behaviors  and  practice  of 
allowing  myself  to  contact  the  spiritual  world  or  pray  to/ 
through  spiritual  entities  or  people,  that  are  not  Jesus  Christ. 

I  recognize  that  the  Bible  states  that  we  can  only  come  to  God 
through  Jesus  Christ,  and  through  no  other  persons  or  spirits. 

I  come  before  you  today  because  I  want  to  renounce  any  and 
all  of  my  spiritism,  spirit-contact,  witchcraft  and  occult 
practices,  as  well  as  any  spiritual  or  other  practice  which  is 
against  you  or  contrary  to  you,  and  I  ask  for  your  favor  and 
help  to  help  me  renounce  these  activities. 

At  this  moment,  I  choose  by  my  own  will  to  renounce  and 
reprove  all  works  of  darkness  in  my  life  and  the  lives  of  the 
generations  of  those  whom  I  have  joined.  I  include  blood 
relatives  as  well  as  adoptive  relatives  and  any  mates,  or  any 
others  whom  I  have  joined  such  as  lovers,  seducers  whether 
these  were  my  (whichever  applies  to  you  -  if  you  are  not 
sure... include  them  all)  wife/wives,  husband/husbands,  and 
children/grand-children/great-grandchildren.  In  the  name  of 
Jesus  Christ,  I  hereby  renounce  any  and  every  oath, 
commitment,  covenant,  decision,  curse,  fetish,  decision, 
intention,  word  or  thought,  or  gesture,  and  I  hereby  renounce 
any  and  every  fleshly  and  immoral  intimacies  and  unions  that 
encouraged  or  brought  about  iniquity  in  my  own  life,  or 
anyone  meeting  the  above  stated  requirements  for  bringing 
works  of  darkness  to  my  own  life. 


Lord  God,  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ,  I  hereby  choose  to 
renounce  all  unfruitful  works  of  darkness,  and  have  no  further 
fellowship  with  them  from  this  time  forth  (Romans  13: 
12/Ephesians  5:  11) 

I  do  this  through  the  Name  of  Jesus  Christ,  my  Savior, 


through  His  Blood  that  was  shed  for  me, 

through  his  precious  Body  given  for  me, 

through  his  Mind  that  suffered  beyond  anything  I  could  ever 
suffer, 

I  do  this  so  that  my  whole  being  -  body,  mind,  soul  and  spirit, 
may  be  completely  set  free  from  every  sinful  work  of  the  past 
brought  about  by  the  sins  of  those  before  me. 

I  do  this  so  that  no  Luciferian,  Satanic,  Spiritually  wrong 
promise,  or  evil  covenant,  curse,  action,  word,  or  deed  or 
attitude  -  from  my  actions  or  my  past  be  laid  against  my 
account  -  in  heaven  or  in  or  on  the  earth.  By  this  action  today, 
I  hereby  serve  notice  that  the  handwriting  of  ordinances 
written  against  me  and  my  generations  are  blotted  out  in  my 
life  -  effective  as  far  back  as  needs  be  to  the  very  first  though, 
word,  deed  or  gesture.  (Ephesians  2:  13-14). 

I  do  this  so  that  from  this  day  forward,  I  may  go  about  serving 
You  God,  in  reverence  of  You  and  seeking  your  counsel  in 
everything  I  do.  I  submit  my  life  unto  You  as  a  living  sacrifice 
-  holy  and  acceptable  in  Your  sight,  which  is  my  reasonable 
service.  (Romans  12:1) 

Dear  Heavenly  Father,  and  Judge  of  the  Universe,  as  I  present 
this  petition  before  you  today,  I  thank  You  that  You  have 
heard  me  this  day,  and  granted  my  every  expression  in 
accordance  with  Your  will.  I  know  that  You  have  done  this 
solely  because  of  what  Your  Son,  the  true  and  only  Jesus 
Christ,  accomplished  for  me,  by  dying  and  paying  the  price  for 
my  sins  on  the  cross. 

Thank  You  from  the  depth  of  all  of  my  being,  for  hearing  my 
prayers  and  granting  my  petition.  Please  remind  me  of  your 
grace  and  love  on  a  daily  basis.  Please  help  me  to  seek  to 


serve  and  follow  you,  and  help  me  to  continue  to  remember 
that  you  have  forgiven  me,  and  that  I  can  take  you  at  your 
word  and  trust  what  you  have  given  to  me  in  your  Bible.  I 
pray  that  you  would  help  me  to  not  do  wrong,  and  to  decide  to 
do  what  is  right,  and  to  take  active  steps  to  follow  you.  I  pray 
that  you  would  fiil  me  with  joy,  comfort  and  hope  and  bring 
true  Christian  friends  in  my  life  who  will  strengthen  my  walk 
with  You  and  encourage  me  to  grow  in  the  right  spiritual  path 
with  you.  You  know  Lord  that  I  have  asked  all  of  these  things 
in  the  name  of  Jesus,  and  I  thank  you  that  I  am  now  free  in 
deed,  according  to  what  you  have  shared  with  you  in  the  Bible 
(Romans  6:22,  Galatians  5:1,  Romans  8:1,  Romans  7:24,  8:1, 
John  8:36, 1  Corinthians  12:27). 

(Note:  take  time  to  look  up  these  verses  in  the  Bible  which  can 
be  found  in  the  Bible.  You  may  want  to  write  them  down,  and 
memorize  them  as  well.  It  is  good  practice  and  will  serve  you 
well). 

I  pray  Lord  that  you  would  help  me  to  remember  that  each 
time  I  am  tempted,  that  I  can  come  back  and  talk  with  you, 
and  read  the  Bible  for  strength  and  encouragement. 

In  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ  I  have  asked  all  of  these  things, 
and  I  thank  you  for  giving  them  to  me,  Amen. 


The  Spiritual  Problems  caused  by  Spiritual  Explorations 
of  Witchcraft  &  Dark  Spirituality  -  HereditaryWitchcraft 


There  is  such  a  thing  as  occult  forces  that  try  to  force  families 
to  serve  them,  for  many  decades,  and  for  many  generations. 
Some  families  did  not  KNOW  how  to  fight  the  demonic 
spirits.  Therefore  they  gave  in  to  them,  and  serve  those  forces, 
and  try  to  force  their  other  family  members  to  do  this. 

This  needs  to  be  resisted,  but  true  freedom  and  true  resistance 
can  only  be  found  in  those  who  truly  accept  and  believe  the 
message  of  Jesus  Christ  as  the  New  Testament  confirms  and 
explains.  This  is  only  ONE  book  of  many  portions  of  the  New 
Testament.  The  New  Testament  is  comprised  of  27  books. 


Prayer  to  be  forgiven  for  sins  committed  while  exploring 
darkness  and/or  evil  and  prayers  to  be  forgiven  for  sins 
committed  in  &  during  witchcraft 


Some  people  will  wrongly  tell  you  that  this  prayer  cannot  or 
will  not  have  a  good  impact  on  your  life.  Whether  they 
consciously  know  it  or  not,  those  who  say  that  are  people  who 
are  trying  to  trick  you.  But  if  this  prayer  would  really  have  no 
effect  on  your  life,  then  it  certainly  cannot  hurt  to  pray  it. 


Lord  God,  I  do  not  come  always  to  talk  with  you  when  I 
should.  Lord,  I  find  this  prayer  difficult  and  pray  that  you 
would  give  me  the  grace,  strength  and  courage  that  I  need  to 
pray  it  and  be  totally  sincere.  Lord,  I  come  to  you  because  I 
am  now  a  true  Christian  believer,  and  because  I,    (your  name 
here)   .  being  under  the  Blood  of  Jesus,  claiming  the  Mind  of 
Jesus,  and  the  Spirit  of  Jesus,  do  hereby  present  my  request  to 


you  boldly  before  your  Throne  of  Grace  (Ephesians 
2:3/Hebrews  4:14-16/Philippians  2:  1-11). 

I  ask  that  you  would  neutralize  and  prevent  any  force  or  evil 
presence  that  might  try  to  keep  me  from  praying  this  prayer,  in 
the  name  of  Jesus  and  in  the  power  of  your  blood.  I  pray  that 
you  would  strengthen  me  as  I  pray  this  and  that  my  mind 
would  be  clear,  and  that  I  would  be  able  to  concentrate  on 
talking  with  you  and  on  what  I  would  like  to  pray.  I  thank  you 
for  coming  to  my  help  as  you  said  you  would  in  the  Bible,  and 
despite  the  tricks  of  any  evil  forces  to  convince  me  of  the 
opposite.  I  thank  you  that  you  Love  me  Lord,  even  if  I  do  not 
always  feel  as  though  you  do  because  I  am  notperfect. 

I  thank  you  for  what  you  did  for  me  by  dying  on  the  cross  for 
me.  I  thank  you  Lord,  because  I  know  that  you  are  more 
powerful  than  the  forces  which  may  have  been  controlling  my 
life,  and  which  were  exercising  influence  in  my  life  that  I  want 
to  be  sure  is  terminated  and  over.  I  come  to  you  in  prayer 
today  Lord,  because  I  want  to  be  delivered  from  all 
consequences  of  hereditary  involvement  in  the  occult  or  any 
occult  curses  which  have  impacted  my  life  and/or  hereditary 
witchcraft  and  all  of  the  sins  and  curses  which  have  come 
from  those  activities.  I  choose  by  my  own  will  and  I  do  now 
renounce  and  reprove  all  works  of  darkness  in  my  life  and  the 
lives  of  the  generations  of  those  past  and  present  whom  I  have 
joined. 

Choosing  by  my  own  will  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  I  renounce  any 
and  all  curses  or  effects  of  my  past  actions,  habits,  thought 
processes  and  any  other  activity  or  intention  contrary  to  your 
character  and  contrary  to  your  word  the  Bible.  any  relatives  of 
mine  who  have  been  in  the  occult  which  you  know  about 
Lord,  and  whereby  I  am  or  have  been  affected  by  any  of  their 
actions,  thoughts,  words  or  deeds.  In  your  name  and  by  my 
will  with  your  help  and  depending  upon  you,  I  renounce  all 
occult  blessings,  all  occult  heritage  and  all  occult 
consequences,  as  well  as  any  demonic  spirits  or  inspiration, 


which  have  a  basis  for  interference  or  influence  in  my  life, 
either  because  of  my  own  actions  or  because  of  the  actions  of 
any  of  my  ancestors  or  relatives  which  has  an  effect  on  me- 
whatever  evil  effect  that  might  be. 

In  this  renunciation  Lord,  I  include  blood  and  adoptive 
relatives  and  any  mates,  such  as  lovers,  seducers  andrapists 
wife/wives,  husband/husbands,  and  children/grand- 
children/great-grandchildren.  I  hereby  renounce  any  and  every 
oath,  commitment,  covenant,  decision,  action,  curse,  fetish, 
gesture,  and  fleshly  and  immoral  intimacies  and  unions  that 
encouraged  or  brought  about  iniquity  in  my  own  life,  or 
anyone  meeting  the  above  stated  requirements  for  bring  works 
of  darkness  to  my  own  life. 

[  you  should  take  time  out  at  this  point,  recalling  to  your  mind 
any  known  names  or  circumstances  -  especially  if  there  have 
been  rapes  or  seductions  that  you  know  about,  from  or  towards 
you,  or  that  you  participated  in  or  witnessed.  Take  each 
situation  and  person  individually  and  ask  the  Lord  to  forgive 
you  of  your  involvement  and  participation  in  each  of  these 
situations.  Where  the  situation  applies  instead  to  others,  ask 
that  they  would  come  to  realize  the  wrongness  of  their  action, 
and  that  they  would  be  drawn  to  the  Lord  and  that  they  would 
repent  and  be  saved  ] 

Lord,  I  hereby  choose  to  renounce  all  unfruitful  works  of 
darkness,  and  have  no  further  fellowship  with  them  from  this 
time  forth  (Romans  13:  12/Ephesians  5:  11)  I  do  this  through 
the  Name  of  Jesus  Christ,  my  Savior,  through  His  Blood  that 
was  shed  for  me,  through  his  precious  Body  given  for  me, 
through  his  Mind  that  suffered  beyond  anything  I  could  ever 
suffer.  I  do  this  so  that  my  whole  being  -  body,  mind,  soul  and 
spirit,  may  be  completely  set  free  from  every  sinful  work  of 
the  past  brought  about  by  my  sins  or  the  sins  of  those  before 
me.  I  do  this  so  that  no  Luciferian,  Satanic,  or  evil  covenant, 
curse,  or  fetish  from  the  past  be  laid  against  my  account  -  in 
heaven  or  in  or  on  the  earth. 


By  this  action  right  now  today,  I  hereby  serve  notice  that  the 
handwriting  of  ordinances  written  against  me  and  my 
generations  are  blotted  out  -  effective  as  far  back  as  needs  be 
to  the  very  first  though,  word,  deed  or  gesture.  (Ephesians  2: 
13-14).I  do  this  so  that  from  this  day  forward,  I  may  go  about 
serving  You,  Father,  in  reverence  of  You  and  seeking  your 
counsel  in  everything  I  do.  I  submit  my  life  unto  You  here  and 
now  as  a  living  sacrifice  -  holy  and  acceptable  in  Your  sight, 
which  is  my  reasonable  service.  (Romans  12:1)  Dear 
Heavenly  Father,  and  Judge  of  the  Universe,  as  I  present  this 
petition  before  you  today,  I  thank  You  that  You  have  heard  me 
today,  and  granted  my  every  expression  in  accordance  with 
Your  will. 

I  know  that  You  have  done  this  solely  because  of  what  Your 
Son,  the  true  and  only  Jesus  Christ,  accomplished  for  me,  by 
dying  and  paying  the  price  for  my  redemption  on  the  cross. 
Thank  You  from  the  depth  of  all  of  my  being,  for  hearing  my 
prayers  and  granting  my  petition.  Please  remind  me  of  your 
grace  and  love  on  a  daily  basis.  Please  help  me  to  seek  to 
serve  and  follow  you,  and  help  me  to  continue  to  remember 
that  you  have  forgiven  me,  and  that  I  can  take  you  at  your 
word  and  trust  what  you  have  given  to  me  in  your  Bible.  I 
pray  that  you  would  help  me  to  not  do  wrong,  and  to  decide  to 
do  what  is  right,  and  to  take  active  steps  to  follow  you. 

I  pray  that  you  would  fiil  me  with  joy,  comfort  and  hope  and 
bring  friends  in  my  life  who  will  strengthen  my  walk  with  You 
and  encourage  me  to  grow  in  the  right  spiritual  path  with  you. 
I  ask  Lord  that  you  would  give  me  spiritual  discernment  so 
that  I  would  not  be  deceived  by  others,  and  so  that  I  would 
follow  you  in  the  ways  that  you  want  me  to.  I  pray  that  you 
would  help  me  to  understand  you  and  know  you  better  and 
that  you  would  help  me  be  an  effective  messenger  of  yours  to 
communicate  the  truths  of  the  Gospel  and  live  and  stand  up  for 
You.  You  know  Lord  that  I  have  asked  all  of  these  things  in 
the  name  of  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  thank  you  that  I  am  now  free  in 


deed,  according  to  what  you  have  shared  with  me  in  the  Bible 
(Romans  6:22,  Galatians  5:1,  Romans  8:1,  Romans  7:24,  8:1, 
John  8:36, 1  Corinthians  12:27).  In  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ, 
Amen. 

LIST  OF  ACCURATE  BOOKS  on  the  OCCULT  / 
DEMONIC  SPIRITS  for  those  who  are  CHRISTIANS 
and  who  sincerely  want  to  know  more  to  help 
themselves,  and  their  family  members 


These  books  are  available  at  a  bookstore  online  at 
www.amazon.com  .  They  MAY  be  available  through 
other  places  online  (on  the  internet). 


Demonology  Past  and  Present  by  Kurt  Koch-  Available 
ALSO  in  German 

Occult  ABC  by  Kurt  Koch  -  Available  ALSO  in  German 

Other  Books  by  Kurt  Koch  -  Available  ALSO  in  German 

Demons  in  the  World  Today:  A  Study  of  Occultism  in  the 
Light  of  God's  Word  by  Merril  Unger 

The  Beautiful  Side  of  Evil  by  J.  Michaelsen 

Inside  the  New  Age  Nightmare:  For  the  First  Time  Ever...a 
Former  Top  New  Age  Leader  Takes  You  on  a  Dramatic 
Journey  by  Baer 

Hidden  Dangers  of  the  Rainbow  by  Constance  Cumbey 

Die  sanfte  Verfiihrung  (Cumbey  Constance) 
Book  Description:  1987.  Die  Autorin  beschreibt  in  diesem 
Standardwerk  Entstehung,  Lehren,  Ziele  und  okkulte  Wurzeln 
der  New-Age-Bewegung.  Sie  enthiillt  beklemmende 


Parallelen  zur  ....biblischer  Endzeitprophezeiungen. 
Hardcover,  guter  Zustand,  Verlag  Schulte  &  Gerth, 
Taschenbuch  Neues  Zeitalter  (Geheimwissen),  Religiose 
Zeitfragen  S.  300, 

A  Planned  Deception:  The  Staging  of  a  New  Age  Messiah 
(ISBN:  0935897003  /  0-935897-00-3)  Cumbey,  Constance 
Pointe  Publishers 

The  Adversary  by  Marc  Bubeck 

Overcoming  the  Adversary  by  Marc  Bubeck 

Destroying  the  Works  ofWitchcraft  Through  Fasting  & 
Prayer  by  Ruth  Brown 


Orthodoxy  &  Heresy:  A  Biblical  Guide  to  Doctrinal 
Discernment  by  Robert  Bowman 

Beyond  Seduction:  A  Return  to  Biblical  Christianity  by  D. 
Hunt 

Pilgrim's  Progress  by  John  Bunyan  -  The  most  widely 
translated  Christian  book  after  the  Bible.  (Yes,  an  edition  in 
German,  Dutch,  French,  Italian,  Spanish,  Portugues,  and 
Arabic  have  all  been  made).  Note:  Pilgrim's  Progress  by  John 
Bunyan  is  available  for  FREE  online. 


The  Christian  in  Complete  Armour,  or,  A  treatise  of  the 
Saints  by  Pastor  (Rev.)  William  GURNALL  -  in  One  Volume 
or  in  Three  Volumes  -  available  for  FREE  online 
(the  term  "saints"  used  here  simply  means  Christians). 


i  i'"> '  'iiifiiii    siM 


*r  ^«rg  «O  ^  tf*y 


Bgg®5r 


J?V 


'     - 


'*=*->;-: 


lesa®** 


5=T**  ■'■■■ 


0_S  fl_i_e  ©  P. 


\^>W?i  ijcj  xj.A  iybSJiJi  4^.1 

| 

1  "*     ■ 

uoV:»|r* 

■     ilo'^1 

! 

1 

I 

i 
j 

i 
1 
i 

i 

l*&?r  n 

o 

irV^ 

*        ■ 

u-Wirs- 

' 

^>J^ 

i     , 

1        * 

o^ifi 

• 

fc-*J*' 

IT 

*                   Ojtf  l^j** 

TA 

• 

^JW 

0 

n 

ir 

v?j 

e 

U->    ' 

ii 

r 

U-Jr-J?  ' 

r 

UV*!  > 

w; 

■ 

Lr>L>.r  f 

0 

'                   ^°"_r. * 

" 

* 

tfcfe 

\ 

Uji  r 

i 

r 

u— Jl 

\ 

U-j,  r 

t 

* 

^ 

\ 

*** 

i 

• 

&lf 

rr      ■ 

o 

■ 

iQ^  L;  i 

J'*  Ojj—s'3  *■*— <  4*^.? 

V 

w 

^j^i  i-j  r 

i 
! 

1 

^  y- i 1  ■  v>  -^  c  W.  ^  ■  f  *>jt  ■£>  Buiijfj .  waa^  Jj  uTj  * .  v_T  '&>%%  3£\ 

4~^  fp.  V'  ^S  ty  {.J'  J^-i-JK  ^JS^^J^-vijfiij  SSj^'-uS  ^j 

JAS  £„  J!  *,&  &y.*fe'jif  W/  j£b  til  ^o*  J  WV\  j^i  iv*g~M  Jp_J 
^■'.A*  *?.s  g~vl  ci^  J^S  t?-  o'j  ■  asv1*  **'.y 

,-^j  tjtgt  i.1,  ^  ^.'Ai   .  i2S  i-\Sj  «-w  *,_,  siV,  u  > 


W^ii.u 


■  U"  **'  £>>'  ^_7'  J»  V  S  J;-  t^-^^  o"^  ■  2tfc)j«l  (.j'  Jo-fe  iSl  v-ii  ^  i^b  afl 

J»  L^*;  (T,  r»*  i"\^\  j.i\,  ^,J\  ihKi.  '^.\  ^J«»  fjp\  0.  'JL.J,  iii:U»\  \Jj  rt 


»*<J 


</>  </-'  e^  ^  -^ 


.  urv 


->-rtV'^"'V 


(J~A *   "T 


503    .  ^'-.ubuLujJ    r»i*»    *J)^    *!^ 


507 
516 
522 
526 
528 
552 
561 


570  .  u^lj*  o^,L=j  ^JjJ  |»lc  J<tiL, 

576  .  i_SjJ_y»-  ^yU»-^  J}'  j»*  *A\mj 

585  .  i^)l^  t^^-y.  (_s^  /x  **N«*| 

586  .  l£|Ijs>-  u*^3-^  f^"1  (•**   ^""V 

587  ..    .  !_£;'_)=-  ^Ii^vi  #(*  *<Jwy 
590  ..^1  i_s'^>-y.  CUUiliU  L-jUi" 


1 ***&?* 

83 u^lr*  JsWF' 

135 Isj!  JjustI 

221 iL-jj  Jjjk-'I 

288  ...  .  ^V.;^  lM  Sr>^ 
371  .  j»j i  (J"*V  i-S/^*-  l/"k"-V>  *«"; 
405   .  |-/w-«r>  t>-»'u  lJjI}*- c/*"JV  '*'(->a7 

9 

437 U~-^y 

459  .  .  jjUHL  i^lja-  (jJjJ  *<db; 
470  .  ^luw^ilj  '-S''^  \J^3i  ^"J 
481  ui^.  <J-&Ij  ^Ija»  ,jjjj  'aSL, 

489    .    ujLuAaj  i^Ijjs»  (jJ^J;  J<KlUy 

-      /  -  j 

496    .  ^UhjJLjJo    |j*>Ijj    J;l    <*!L> 


II  nnn 


-&LA- 


mi  iiii.ii  imiiiei'ii 
IHOCA  XPII€TA, 

BtpHO  h  tomho  nptseAeH'B  OTT.  ntpEOC6pa3H0-TO. 


Bi  KiiHroneraTnmi^s-Ts  Ha  A.  X.  Eomariiraa. 
1ST4. 


ii-^°  •= = 

1"   l>jj  J&jiSgfr  Js*fl 

76   s^l  i/S^i  ^~i^  J^* 

124 5^1  t/i^jU  B^'y  J^' 

204 iijj,!  ^jb  eeli^  J**M 

266 Jl^f'd/Jj-; 

34  5 . . . .  • jujdjlwo j  a  Jjj  los  ,  ^iJj**»!  (V*y  ?i 

377 Li"^  *<ft*>  s^jL-jl^js  CilJj^  u-y!# 

407 >*aJ\j  ''iiUj,  sJjl-jjni.js  WjM.  (j^jj 

428 ^..JLj,  s^jJa-L!^  ffiUj-j,  ijijijj 

438 ^jjiiL»,  s^lJLy^il  isJJy-,  (j-y!j) 

449 ^uJU,  i^LLi  isJJj^  u^JJ 

457 * *»*aJI**>i  5y«LwJ«9  i^Uj«*jj  (^j^^i 

464 l*"^'  *A\mj  a^jL&jILJ  (itllj-^  (j^jj 

471 ^jaJ\j  •'aIU.,  5^jLxJj!L-j  isuj-i,  (j^jijJ. 

475 i*?"^  **^"»i  *-<jljy*A>  eUj->,  (j-j!_>5 

484 , ^Ajlj   ■'aIL.,   4-jjIjj*1j  l£l!j-Jj   u"J^JJ 

49 1 -oiJLii  iWLJ  isUj-^  L^iJyi 

495 juajLj,  ii^i-J  ("ilJyu,  fj»yjl 

496 ^»>a!1-,  s^LjL^c  isJJj-jj  (j-yijj 

521 ^)u«j?  ''aIL^  i£l!j-^  tjj"i 

530 jj-Vjl  ***•$?  *4W>  isUj-;  (j^u 

539 ,j»^  '*i*>?'*^  dJy-,  ,j-^u 

544 ^Vjl  *a?>j?  'JU;  «sU}-,  l$5 

553 ^^  **J^)  <^_r^  ^ 

534 ^AilU'JU,  eUU,  ^«s 

555 ^i~»jf-  ^JL-,  idj^-,  \±jV, 

558 ^^-a-j  <*l*,jS€ 


1      ...Evangile  seion  Matthieu */jj\  ^^i  ^^»  Jrf^ 

76    ...Evangile  seion  Marc t/jj^  t&^h  ^~L^  J-~?^ 

1 24.., Evangile  seion  Luc ijjy\  ^oijU  eli^  J-sM 

904 ..  Evangile  seion  Jean s^jjl  l?1-^  ^L?*  lW1' 

266,. les  Actes  des  Apotres, JLfl  bKUyu, 

345..  Epitre  auxRomains .«aJU,  s^Ujj  CsU».-,  (j-j!jj 

377  * .  Premiere  epitre  aux  Corinthiens  . . .     ^mA«1      AJU*».  8  J  oImjb&J  .  ifi  (£tUa>*J,    ,  uiojaJ 
407.  Deuxreme  epitre  aux  Corinthiens.      ^wA-JJ       iJW,    8  >i  r.lwj  ojlj  j  «9    £)JewJ,    (yjjjj 

428..  Epitre  aux  Galates ~>a)Lj,  s^liJj^c  (sUj»»,  (j"j!j{ 

438..Epitreaux  Ephesiens -jaIU,  sJJUj^il  l£)Jj-,  (_>-y!jJ 

449.,  Epitre  aux  Philippiens -.aIU,  s^LJL»  eUj-,  (j-jljj 

457. . Epitre  aux  Colossiens ^>a)L-,  s^jL.-jJjii  dJ^u,  (j^Ji 

464  Premiere  epitre  aux  Thessaloniciens      jmJbI  ^aJLai.   II  j  r  J*  tf  jtwi    (!iJJ***i  r  wijo 

471  Deux'emeepitre-Thessaloniciens,    ^AJIJ  ^AjL*»»    sJoLX-Jfl]L*J  (£U«*j,  /jrfjJV. 

■i  i  O  .  Premiere  epitre  a  Timothee -u*  J  «I       jJw,    AuU^be^Ot?    (iiija*u,  (Uji!») 

484.  Deuxieme  epitre  a  Timothee j^A*JU      AJu*i.    Am^Ua^Oo    (£a]*-j,  ^ujaja^ 

49 1 . .Epitre  a  Tite ^»a!Lu,  *-yio  eMj-^,  (j^J_ji 

495..Epitrea  Philemon ^.aIUj.  AJji-J  l£)Jw,  <j*j!jJ 

49e,.L'EpttreauxHebreux >*a!L^  s^J^  dJ^-,  y-j5j> 

52 1 . .  Epitre  de  Jacques ^i^^f-  *a1Lj.  uAlj»,.  uji« 

530..  Premiere  epitre  de  Pierre..    Ji^'^jf-  *a!L,  (sl)j«^  ^-^o 
539.  Deuxieme  epitre  de  Pierre.    ,uAJt)  sa~oj£  ''aJLj,  miiyj  \j»Ja\ 

544.  .Premiere  epitre  de  Jean «"^j'  f**»jSi  'J^j  isljvui  .ts; 

553_>Deuxieme  epitre  de  Jean ^uajIj  ^aSL»,  Uillj-».  ,,•*; 

554..Troisieme  epitre  de  Jean ^uasTC  *a1U>,  e)JLj,  ,£*■• 

555..  Epitre  de  Jude ^fi^j?  *A*|  ^j^j^jH 

558  ••  l'Apocalypse.  nommte  parfois  Revelations,  ,.,,,,,,-  •(•..■••••*••••       m*>5>h    1!£aJ  .  £*£". 

Neues  Testament  /  New  Testament  /  Le  Nouveau  Testament 


JOt^s-     J^S- 


■/"* 


,ur 


0  0  -'t,-** 

jJkk*  i  (jjlj  |^lj  ^  (j^1  jV-  JJ1 
^y.^-1    I  Al.     J *_—> 


IN  THE 

HINDUSTAN!  LANGUAGE. 


jfjf-n  3  -«j  j^c  /     -        -        -        -        -        -  <*><* 

ffjf-n  ^  -«j  c^fc^-n  ^         _.---•« 

?fjf~o  o  (ifp/f  -c^  tm^f-r\  /    -        -        -        -        -  s"°l 

*flf-n  a  ^  -^  f^"0  f   -        -        -        -        -  <■'* 

ff!f"n  fl  ^  jpr^0  /     -  -  -  -  '  -  kv-i 

ff^n  ^  -^  jjrffn  ^         -        -        -        -        - 

jCjT»n  ^  pf^  -pj  j^vrfP  /        "  "  "  "  "  alaW 

fflf"n  3  ^  "^  f^°f      -  -  -  "  "  MJ 

ffjf«n  ^  -«^  T»rfn  ^ ^J 

'W1  F  l**lr  ------  -"J 

«Wi  /^  ir^ff    -------  ,AI 

fa  f'  \rv  -  -     -      -     -     -  ~"' 

^n  p  l(iffi  .        .        -        -        -  -  ji 

•/*  Z1  ic*T         -  -       -        -  ' 

re** 


^ 


w,  -       -       -       -       -       -  -       la*-  K  y^e 

^^  -          .          -          -  -          ki-  11^  K  i_r^;: 

ji:1t,_  _                 ..           -                -               -  iai-    1wj«i)    o    ij^jis^ 

fw  -       -       -       -       -       -  s*=- ir^  ^  ^*-y. 

i«vi  -            -            -            -            "  "            1==-  j/"^  »  V°-}t 

is»,  -             -             -             -             -             -  "                lai-  £  'i^j-yi 

P,  3  -                          -            -            -      i_>U/  ^  CiAai&o  J_  ^y. 


INJIL  I  MUQADDAS, 


YA  NE, 


HAMARE  KHUDAWAND  AUR  NAJAT-DENEWALE 


YISIJ'   MASIH 


KA  NAYA  'AHD-NAMA. 


IS  KA  TARJUMA  YUNANI  ZUBAN  SE  ZUBAN  I  URDU  MEN 
BANA.RAS  TRANSLATION  COM1IITTEE  SE  K1YA  GAYA,  J1SE 
TAS.HIH  KARKE  AB  TISRI'bAR  CHHAPWATE. 


U 


LONDON: 

PRINTED  FOR  THE 

BRIT1SH  AND  FOREIGN  BIBLE  SOCIETY, 
INSTITUTED  IJST  THE  YEAR  1804. 


MDCCCLX. 


THE 

NEW    TESTAMENT 

OF  OUB 

LORD  AND  SAVIOUR 

lE'SUS    CHR'IST.' 

isr  SGAU  KAREJV. 

II  CoS  OO5)  33l£  cSl  S  c8l  93  S  » 

2d  Edition.— 4000. 

Translated  by  Francis  Mason 

MAULMAIN, 

AMERICAN    MISSION    PRESS, 
THOS.   S.    RANNEY. 

1850. 


«coSs» 


ul« 


«scib 

u'iojs 

ojioof>    •    • 
\S\oop     .    .      . 
oo^«i8«ioo^ 
801  •    •     •    • 

C06JSoj8iiou    .     .     . 

oo^pojsuji  .    .    . 

O3C0100    .      . 
<SSS<980S      •      • 

ISCOIOS      .     • 

cocSab     •    • 
008BlCOJf»On       .     . 

oosbico^djo  .  . 
ooiooo8«o«       .    . 

o 

00100088  j  n  .  . 
00008      -     •         •     • 

oicoSS  .   . 
ai(3i    .    -      -    ■ 
ooicBS    .    - 

0800  0813»       .      - 
OtOOfflglJl         •      • 

oSioo^oSjSoAo» 

oSlCofSoSfoO^g  j  d 
«SlOO^oS^aA^n 
0J31  .'.'., 

OjfcSptf)     .     .       . 


.  «3  .     .       .     .       •     ■  o 

.      u^  .....     .  <IJ 

C01  .     .       .     •       -     •  03E 

.  tSi  • s°n 

«100^  .     •         .     .  JjS 

.      8 3=1 

•  oo^ao  .    .     .    .     qj<> 

-   ro^«j    .    .     .    .    <?<>j 

cocoi 9°J 

038 9  =  3 

o 

13COI 9J9 

COc88 9?J 

008110 95° 

ODSHJ 991 

O0l»0         >     •       •     •     98' 
O0X«J  •  •      ■  9G3* 


00  ■     - 
131      . 

ai    • 

9 

ooi . 

o8«o  . 
o8nj   • 
081»  o 
cSnj 
d8i«5 

°8  • 

c8p  . 


9G0* 

i 
■  9« 

9Jo* 

9<15 

9»P. 

96J 

9«<l 

jos 

30E 

500 

930 


I 


■coSsoC 


«u 


«soc- 

«Sojs 

OOlCOp     •     •        . 

oo^oiSwioo^     . 
«jol 

CD^SojSlOii    .     .     . 

ooe^ojsijo  .    .    . 
rocoioo  .    . 

OESC3508      .      . 
(SCOIOS       .      . 

cocSsb    •    • 
oo!eicol»o»     .    . 

C03©TCO|dJ1       .      . 
001BOD8I1O1I         .     . 

o 
O31«0088_/n  .      ■ 

OOOJ!       .      .         • 

oicoSS  .    . 
ffii^t    ... 
ooifSS    .   .     . 

O800ffl8o  3«       •      . 

caco  ^8j  j »  •  • 
oSioojSoSfjoD^oa 
o8icof>o9£cctf«  J  n 

oSlCO^oSfioo^i 
Cg3t  .     .       . 

o&SPfll    .    .      . 


tf} .  ,  Matthew  .  3 
«S.  .  Marc-  .  w 
cm  .  Luke  -  .  ,  33g 
c8i  .     John  '  .    .    ooo 

BlCoS  Acts  of  APostles  J9S 

Q       .      .  Romans         , 
roqS«0    ICorinthians  . 
COQp0  I    l' Corinthians 
COCOl  .   Galatians,      . 
Ephesians 
Phlippians 
,  Colossians      . 


93C1 
990 
<3"J 

5°J 
9==. 
9J9 
S3J 
99° 
991 
93° 
9  Co 
9G0 

9« 

9S» 

919 

9»o, 

osnj  .  ",'8ter  .  .  .  9£j 

COl «  O  I  [  Epistle  I  Letter  of]  John  511 
cSlHj  "  1  Epistle  -  Letter  of]  John  go^ 
c8l«3  '"  t Epistle-Letter of]  John  «0g 
CO  .  JHde  •  •  •  ■  *8on 
CO  p     ,  Revelation  ■      •      *      330 


008  . 

O 

13C01 

oocSs 

COSH  O    '  Thessalonians  . 

a 

CO  2  D  I    1 1' Thessalonians 

__» 

COIO    ITimothy        • 

OOIbJ      "Timothy 

00  •      -  Titus 

QX       •      Philemon  ,        . 
(21      •      Hebrews 

001  .      .James    , 

OSfiO    .     I  Peter      .      . 
II  Peter     .      _ 


«coSaafitt 


OOaSoosnon  .  .  • 
OO^^C^Haj»  .  .  • 
OOCOICO    .     . 

nivv  •  •    • 

.00 

OC01OS      .     . 

cocSsb    .    • 

008ST.CO|iOn  .  • 
C08ST.CO|l  J  «  •  • 
OO1UOO80O»         .      . 

o 

ooiacos»  jn      .    • 

0O0O8      •     •        •     ■ 

csicgSS  .    . 
si(9)i    ...      .    - 
ooicBS    ... 

0800  080  O»       .      . 
0100  08»  J  U        •     • 

c8ioo|3c8r>oAoi 
o8icojSc8£atfi  j  ■ 
oSioo^oS^oo^i 
casi       .    .     .    . 

a&s^  .  .  . 


iyg  v  Evangile  seion  Matthieu  3 
«y5|  ,  .Evangile  seion  Marc  <1J 

C01  .Evangile  seion  Luc  •  ^^E 
f\Ri  ,,  Evangile  seion  Jean ,  o  o  o 
(2X001  ,  Actes  des  Apotres.  J  5  B 
8      ,  Epitrs  aux  Romains ,      ^0*X 

OOG)  S«  O  P^mtere  opltre  alJ.  Crin.hiens  39  " 
OOQpO   /Douniimoipitro     Corinthlens     9°J 

QQQ31   m  EpitreauxGalates,    £oj 

<}Qg  #  Epttre  aux  Ephesiens    $d^ 

o 
(3 COl  Epltre  aux  Philippiens    pjc 

G3COS  EpTtre  aux  ColossienscOl 

00  "U  O  Promi4ra  api*™  Thessalonlclens  CCO 
**\T°fl    I    ^euK'^me  ^P'_tre    Thessaloniciens 

001  'l  O    prem,J"?  ^P"*6     iTIniotluSe, 
OOlll  I  Deux^'rB_6f,ttrB     «Timothee    , 

qj  .  Epttre  a  Tite  ,  m 
<31_  BEpitre  a  Philemon  , 
/•■^  -L'Epttreaux  Hebreux  £93 
001  .  Epitre  de  Jacques  ,  919 
OS«0  •  *  epitredePierre  pa^ 
OSflJ     Deuxieme    -dePierre  pgj 

fKjT  B  D  premiere  epltre  de  Jean  #  CffO 
tfVjltf    I    Oeuxiemc  cpitrc- dc  Jean*  9^9 

/jH^K^  Troisieme  epltre  de  Jean  •         f)OQ 

EpTtre  de  Jude'      •      900 

'ApNatypse.  nommae  pirfois  Rsvelations     430 


9J1 
93  = 
pEos 
SEo* 
M** 


Neues  Testament  /  New  Testament  /  Le  Nouveau  Testament 


THE 

NEW  TESTAMEN! 

OF   01- K 

LORD   AND  SAVIOUR  JESUS   CHRIST, 

IN  TAMIL: 

WBH  REFERENCES,  CONTEKTS  0E  III E  CHAPTEES  AND  CHRONOLOGY, 
FROM  THE  EKGLISH. 


e_*«5     faJiTL-jj^.TaiiU 


fip  go  su  rr  3,  &  iu  ih    ^Giresfliti&s.jiuurTGb 


&  f&  JZ5!  IU  Q  <5iJ  <£     dF/Bdfi^^TJTSU     U  ffl  Q  &  T  $  ^  ^ 


MADRAS: 
THE  MADRAS  AUXILIARY  BIBLE  SOCIETY. 

PRINTEDATTHE  AMERICAN  ttlMIOH  PRESS. 

1859. 


oo©£gco5)S)G|8(S  oooo6oq|5sn 


THE    NEW    TESTAMENT 

IN    BURMESE. 

oo©£cco^3G|S(^i  ogco8oqj5sr» 


THE 

New 

Testament 

OF 

OTTR 

LORD  AED  SAVIOTJR 

JESUS  OHRIST: 

.■SEransIatrti  into  tfjc  Butmesc,  tam  tljt  ©ciginiil  ffimft, 

E 

y  Rev.    A.  JUDSON,  D. D. 

ANU  EDITED,  WITH  CONTENTS  0»  CHAPTERS  ANU    REFERENCES, 

B 

r  Rev.  E.  A.  STKVRNS,  D. I). 

-^^^3=^^= 

R  A.  N  GO  0  N: 

2PUBL1SHED    BY 
:Seeond  Edition,-5,000. 

1-HE   AMERICAN    BAPTIST   MISSIONAEV    VStOK, 
AT    THEIR    MISSION    PRESS. 
F.   D.   PHINNEV,  SUPT. 
l885. 

ogGooo£scq|5s  ^>g  cq]5sc§dJ330gS^ooi^)os 


ooSgcpojSe 

OOGp8GOOOGpCO]&8 

GOOooBoSeo  .  .  . 

ODSp80J^8JoSsD 

sgcpoioSogoGSoS 

OgCpfflioS^cSoDKSoS 

ogGpoioSooc8c»ci>o8 

Qg£peioS©opcoc©oS 

ept>ioSg"]£ogyG©:>S 

G^Oo8qo5©0 

aoooSogSs    .  . 

G0OD^Draj&8 
GJ|DCO<f^c8gS8 

GCOjpooos^oocBrajjSa 

GO3Qu9S^0Oc8cq)&8 
GCK>E[8ggSoD£8©ro3!    .   .  . 
GOD0l>GCqj<X>C»^3Oj^CI3j58 
OGt»OOOB^OO^C(J)tS8    .   .   . 

GOSOGjos^ooj^rag&a 


onraSsnSecigtSsojSi    aj]58^o«uo)c4  oao|a:x>oSjje!»5i    ocraJpjS 

■ic58|£oj8(:)§8c5]£l  Q^e^C3008D£BD£|l    S»3C0?8(t^8r^  iijScfjS 
=O^llC^33OJI053lc^£80cSs|6c^8C0^!»3CT?8^8t^^aigSl1  OCloSp 

sSSJoScoeoos  (i)  §e:»5i  (cgf&e^ec03c»3a>5'8(o§8§  c^5coSc^^c^ 

CD^II^oSjf§8  (l)  C»gS(§S^oSlSoOS^8n^(3COgSl[ 


QgooSoqj<5s  j  \  oq]<Ssc§(i32»g5$o« 

5l£aoi)3C|goS       ....    Matthew        .... 

5l£«Dr^sc|go6  ....        Marc  -        

jSojodoosjEoS     ....     Luke--          ■■•■ 
5)Eeco3co^3G|So£.  .          John  -         .... 

«D 
Gt.VSS 

•oow^GODSoggj         ....     Acts  of  Apostles  .... 

OD 

GGp«(3  c03©9      ....              Romans                  .... 

GGp 

Eroo&j^-lgcflgeoogueeDS        ....     J  Corinthians 

0   GCOO> 

efDO^^lSoIsso^cStOCBoS     .  .           II  Corinthians 
ocdDo8gol38D      ....               ....     Galatians  .  . 

J    GC03> 

oco 

GisoS|3ol383    ....                ....           Ephesians 

c 

ScS8[oqo1o§)D           ....                ....     Phlipplans    . 

8 

Gro3GCODob(oDOl3©D  '                ....           Colossians 

sodo 

0300COOeCOD§oSSorlo©0030e©o£          '  Thessalonians 

3   COoS 

CX>o530:>GCOD§o5|o3cn3809c8eoc©D£     "  Thessalonians 

J    030§ 

c8GWDCCOjo3ol96)OOC«G©^£            ....      1  Timothy    .   , 

o  o9 

cBGGOGCcgdlgSD^cfiuOGSoS       .   .             II  Timothy 

j  c8 

cfiojgdloeo          ....             ....    Titus     .  .  . 

8gCO(^S(3o)q©0       .    .                  ....              Philemon 

c8 
8cco- 

GOOgS5ol3©^           ....                ....    Hebrews.  ,  . 

GOO 

5|£a50trjiyffiol3SO                     ....          James.  . 

COO 

C|£G0ro<j)[3dl380OgUG8DS             ....      IPeter     .   .  . 

0   GO 

J|£GOOD^jffiol3S0qc8o0Ge3S        ..              MPeter. 

J    GCi 
n  3  GO>3 

G)£GOD0COS[Scn3©0OM«G©D£       ..   1  [  Epistle  /  Letter  of]  Joh 

a£G030coEScno©03c8oDG©o£       "  [Epistle-Letterof]  Joh 

5|£GO53C0ifficn3B0ODcS(X)SSD£       I"  [Epistle-Letterof]  John  ^  c<a3 

5j£a^rj(p3cf)3B3  ....                 ....    Jude      .... 

<g03cr$ag&8                ....                .  .   Revelation  .... 

ca>3coc»po£§ag&8  .  . 

g«8o3po£§reg&      .  , 

«°33?°83l  

8cgDDS^ooc8ra]& 

GGiS^i03^0od3oDj&8       .  . 
UDCo8oS^DO£§r>3j&8      .   . 


33Wp5^DUC^p;ii 


scOdoo 

§ 

C033^> 

8 

p 

(»0 

e» 

•*>% 

0)0 
«OCO 


THE 

NEW  TESTAMENT 

OF  OUE 

LORD  AND   SAVIOUR  JESUS  CHRIST 

TBANSLATED  INTO   TELDGU 

FROM  THE  ORIGINAL  GREEK. 

§T_g  $   »   o  ■  #   tf. 

e8s6     ^  So     ^rsler^A&o-O     H  33  76  «T*     tf  -O  o  -iS  w  <S  tf  8. 
J?,;»  ^sio  oO"E_o  tSoII 


MADRAS: 

PEINTED  AT  THE  AMEKICAN  MISSION 

PBESS 

FOE 

THE 

MADKAS 

AUIHIAET 

BIBLE 

S  0  C I E  T  T, 

And  sold  at  their 

Depository,  155  Popham's  Broadway 

18  60. 

THE  BOOKS  OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT. 


^°3&  ,jf,o&>S&>,  3{£sSue>aMS'jr_  "3tfR>. 


5o"g  

&*&(,_ 

-W"^        ...-      ... 
:3Sr-tf«Sb 

5^S^ 

O    §"8o§ 

J>    §"8o§ 

K'aScK)      

^lsl> 

pS&i        

S"eS"^\  ... 

O    •^Sj«5>"6j     •  •  • 


.  .  .  -30~ 

oa. 
. .  .  -stf 

jn 
. .  .s><y 

ClSL 

.  .  .  Oe_ 
o3 


_9    ^^tf^S^ 

-s    8"»»q5c55cD. 
©e&>  .  .  . 

^"A        •  •  • 


z» 
3    Serasi 


s5SCsk>. 


b' 
3 
n 
o3 
>« 

3 

n 
o 


ftEjIiTUP' 


XCIV9": 


pa:fnr  :  P «»» R3\,t ¥l! 


ppi>fi:Ticntfi« 


0>TVA  !  VX.fl: 


PitiTCPWP»  :  ooj(Ai£*:: 


These  texts  conforms  to  the  T. R. 
as  far  as  we  know.  Anyone  having  questions  about  this 
text  should  compare  it  to  the  Stephens  /  Estienne  Version 
in  Koine  (Ancient)  Greek  of  1 550/1 551 ,  which  is  the  root 
Standard  historic  Ancient  Greek  text  of  the  New  Testamen  t 


LE 


NOUVEAU  TESTAMENT 


D  E 


NOTRE  SEIGNEIffi  JESTJS-CHBIST 


d'apres  la  veesion  revce 


Par  J.  F.  OSTERVALD 


PARIS 

SOCIETE  BIBLIQUE  DE  FRANCE 

41,  RUE  LA  BRUYBRE 
1872 
One  of  the  Reliable  copies  of  the  French  New  Testament  -  Une  Bible  fidele. 
Available  sometimes  [and  Free  (gratis)  ]  atwww.archive.org 


TABLE  DES  LIVRES 


DU  NOUVEAU  TESTAMENT 


Evangile  seion  saint  Matthieu  . 
EVanfrile  seion  saint  Marc  .  .  . 
Evangile  seion  saint  Lue  .  .  .  . 
Evaiigile  seion  saint  Jean  .  .  . 

Les  Actes  des  Apotres 

Epitre  de  saint  Paul  aux  Ko- 

mains 

I"  E-pttre  aux  Corinthiens  .  .  . 
II*  Epitre  aux  Corinthiens  .  .  . 

Epitre  aux  Galates 

Epitre  aux  Ephesiens 

Epitre  aux  Philippiens 

Epitre  aux  Colossiens 

I"  fipitre  aux  Thessalonicieus. 


rlcd 

chap. 

P»6e» 

28 

1 

1G 

52 

24 

85 

21 

139 

23 

179 

18 

232 

16 

253 

13 

277 

6 

292 

6 

300 

4 

307 

4 

313 

5 

318 

Itc  Epitre  aux  Thessaloniciens. 

£re  Epitre  a  Timothee 

H*  Epitre  k  Timothee 

Epitre  a  Tite 

Epitre  a  Philemon 

Epitre  aux  Hebreux 

Epitre  de  saint  Jaeques 

lre  Epitre  de  saint  Pierre  .... 
IIe  Emtre  de  saint  Pierre  .... 

Irt  Epitre  de  saint  Jean 

He  fipitre  de  saint  Jean 

III1 Epitre  de  saint  Jean 

Epitre  de  saint  Jude 

Apoealypse  de  saint  Jean .  ...    22 


Nombre 
d» 

chap. 

3 

Page* 
323 

6 

326 

4 

332 

3 

336 

1 

339 

13 

340 

5 

357 

5 

362 

3 

369 

5 

37-3 

1 

379 

1 

380 

1 

381 

Le  signe  f  indique  la  division  du  texte  en  paragraphes. 
La  Bible  la  plus  fidele  =  Texte  Recu  -  Grec  Koine  -  d'Estienne  (1550-51) 


BOOKS  OF  THE  SBW  TESTAMENT. 

Matthew           28 

Mark     ...         16 

Luke 24 

John     21 

The  Acts         28 

Epistle  to  the  Eomans            ...  16 

I.  Corinthians  ...         ...         ...  16 

II.  Corinthians...         ...         ...  13 

Galatians          ...         ...         ...  6 

Ephesians        6 

Philippians       ...          ...          ...  4 

Colossians        4 

I.'Thessalonians          ...         ...  5 

II.  Thessalonians        ...         ...  3 

L  Timothy       ...        6 

II.  Timothy     4 

Titus                 3 

Philemon          ...         ...         ...  1 

Hebrews           ... 13 

Epistle  of  James        ...         ...  5 

I.  Peter            5 

II.  Peter           3 

I.  John             ...  5 

II.  John            1 

Ht.  John          1 

Jude                1 

Kevelation        ..  22 


imMmt 


mA+ntt 

3|£>\"Tpf 


.PT 

SHtr 

SHft 
^5ft 

'W'—'  pT 


stii^a» 


■SLjfj-jji.  n  .. 


«Alfjgii 
FfJA£#ff& 

«a«».hs 

mA&Mm 

ftAjfeEBSttiH 
■&Aae£&«ttii 

•gAmmm 


m: 


mmmm 


Chinese  Simplified  -  Request  to  God 


isgw±ifr,  wms&mmT  ummnm^^M^^^ 


m%mij]miMmm^mnmm«y3Xft,immi 
t. 

«at^jf#^#,{nsiHjtt#,{nfgii^ftBas#AR  a»f«f,  /s 


Chinese  Traditional  -  Talking  to  the  Lord  of  Heaven 


mm,  Mtmmmi  mEjmmMi  mj.x^&  §m«5# 

tm&mi£mmmmtmmmmmMmm^A&,  & 
immtmmmmmmmmmmmm^A&  mm,  t 


Chinese  Traditional  -  Request  to  God 


ss«±#,  mmmmmmmjtmmm^ 


mm,  i&mmtMi  mRimm^n  M_ax#&  mwm& 
n0  mm,  Mtimm mmm^m^msLimTM^ 

tm&mismmmmimmmmMmm^A&,  & 
immtm^m^mmmmmmmmm^A&  mm,  m 

God  mr,  mmmmmM^mMMmintMmfcfen 


'-A4 


•ff 


Bii 


;?«KfPSP* 


^Jl«;m«*Wi?P»W«*,  HP1, 


Korean  -  Request  to  God 

5 

J 

,    & 

9 

5             ? 

5 

( 

) 

1 

.God 

( 

) 

• 

1 

5 

5 

,Amen 

) 

Gebet  zum  Gott 

Lieber  Gott,  Danke,  daB  dieses  Evangelium  oder  dieses  neue  Testament 
freigegeben  worden  ist,  damit  wir  in  der  LageSIND,  mehr  uber  Sie  zu  erlernen. 
Helfen  Sie  bitte  den  Leuten,  die  fiir  das  Zur  Verfiigung  stellen  dieses 
elektronischen  Buches  verantwortlich  sind.  Sie  wissen,  daB  wem  sie  sind  und 
SieSIND  in  der  Lage,  ihnen  zu  helfen. 

Helfen  Sie  ihnen  bitte,  in  der  Lage  zu  SEIN,  schnell  zu  arbeiten,  und  stellen  Sie 
elektronischere  Biicher  zur  Verfiigung  Helfen  Sie  ihnen  bitte,  alle 
Betriebsmittel,  das  Geld,  die  Starke  und  die  Zeit  zu  haben,  die  sie  zwecks  sein 
miissen  fiir,  Sie  zu  arbeiten  zu  halten. 

Helfen  Sie  bitte  denen,  die  ein  Teil  der  Mannschaft  sind,  das  ihnen  auf  einer 
taglichen  Grundlage  helfen.  Geben  Sie  ihnen  die  Starke  bitte,  um  jedem  von 
ihnen  das  geistige  Verstandnis  fiir  die  Arbeit  fortzusetzen  und  zu  geben,  daB 
Sie  sie  tun  wiinschen.  Helfen  Sie  bitte  jedem  von  ihnen,  Furcht  nicht  zu  haben 
und  daran  zu  erinnern,  daB  Sie  der  Gott  sind,  der  Gebet  beantwortet  und  der 
verantwortlich  fiir  alles  ist. 

Ich  bete,  daB  Sie  sie  anregen  wiirden  und  daB  Sie  sie  schiitzen  und  die  Arbeit  u. 
das  Ministerium,  daB  sie  innen  engagiert  werden.  Ich  bete,  daB  Sie  sie  vor  den 
geistigen  Kraften  oder  anderen  Hindernissen  schiitzen  wiirden,  die  sie 
schadigen  oder  sie  verlangsamen  konnten. 

Helfen  Sie  mir  bitte,  wenn  ich  dieses  neue  Testament  benutze,  um  an  die  Leute 
auch  zu  denken,  die  diese  Ausgabe  zur  Verfiigung  gestellt  haben,  damit  ich  fiir 
sie  und  also,  sie  beten  kann  kann  fortfahren,  mehr  Leuten  zu  helfen. 

Ich  bete,  daB  Sie  mir  eine  Liebe  Ihres  heiligen  Wortes  (das  neue  Testament) 
geben  wiirden  und  daB  Sie  mir  geistige  Klugheit  und  Einsicht,  um  Sie  besser  zu 
kennen  geben  wiirden  und  den  Zeitabschnitt  zu  verstehen,  dem  wir  in  leben. 
Helfen  Sie  mir  bitte,  zu  konnen  die  Schwierigkeiten  beschaftigen,  daB  ich  mit 
jeden  Tag  konfrontiert  werde. 

Lord  God,  helfen  mir  Sie  besser  kennen  und  zu  wiinschen  anderen  Christen  in 
meinem  Bereich  und  um  die  Welt  helfen  wiinschen.  Ich  bete,  daB  Sie  die 
elektronische  Buchmannschaft  und  -die  geben  wiirden,  die  ihnen  Ihre  Klugheit 
helfen.  Ich  bete,  daB  Sie  den  einzelnen  Mitgliedern  ihrer  Familie  (und  meiner 
Familie)  helfen  wiirden  nicht  Angelegenheiten  betrogen  zu  werden,  aber,  Sie 
zu  verstehen  und  Sie  in  jeder  Weise  annehmen  und  folgen  zu  wiinschen.  Geben 
Sie  uns  Komfort  auch  und  Anleitung  in  diesen  Zeiten  und  ich  bitten  Sie,  diese 
Sachen  im  Namen  Jesus  zu  tun,  amen, 


Prayer  to  God 

Dear  God, 

Thank  you  that  this  Gospel  or  this  New  Testament  has  been  released 
so  that  we  are  able  to  learn  more  about  you. 

Please  help  the  people  responsible  for  making  this  Electronic  book 
available.  You  know  who  they  are  and  you  are  able  to  help  them. 

Please  help  them  to  be  able  to  work  fast,  and  make  more  Electronic 
books  available 

Please  help  them  to  have  all  the  resources,  the  money,  the  strength 
and  the  time  that  they  need  in  order  to  be  able  to  keep  working 
for  You. 

Please  help  those  that  are  part  of  the  team  that  help  them  on  an 
everyday  basis.  Please  give  them  the  strength  to  continue  and  give 
each  of  them  the  spiritual  understanding  for  the  work  that  you  want 
them  to  do. 


Please  help  each  of  them  to  not  have  fear  and  to  remember 
that  you  are  the  God  who  answers  prayer  and  who  is  in  charge  of 
everything. 

I  pray  that  you  would  encourage  them,  and  that  you  protect  them,  and 
the  work  &  ministry  that  they  are  engaged  in. 

I  pray  that  you  would  protect  them  from  the  Spiritual  Forces  or  other 
obstacles  that  could  harm  them  or  slow  them  down. 

Please  help  me  when  I  use  this  New  Testament  to  also  think  of  the 
people  who  have  made  this  edition  available,  so  that  I  can  pray  for 
them  and  so  they  can  continue  to  help  more  people. 

I  pray  that  you  would  give  me  a  love  of  your  Holy  Word  (the  New 
Testament),  and  that  you  would  give  me  spiritual  wisdom  and 
discernment  to  know  you  better  and  to  understand  the  period  of  time 
that  we  are  living  in. 


Please  help  me  to  know  how  to  deal  with  the  difficulties  that  I  am 
confronted  with  every  day.  Lord  God,  Help  me  to  want  to  know  you 
Better  and  to  want  to  help  other  Christians  in  my  area  and  around  the 
world. 

I  pray  that  you  would  give  the  Electronic  book  team  and  those  who 
help  them  your  wisdom. 

I  pray  that  you  would  help  the  individual  members  of  their  family 
(and  my  family)  to  not  be  spiritually  deceived,  but  to  understand  you 
and  to  want  to  accept  and  follow  you  in  every  way. 

Also  give  us  comfort  and  guidance  in  these  times  and  I  ask  you  to  do 
these  things  in  the  name  of  Jesus,  Amen, 


Clicking  on  these  links  will  take  you  to  pages  where  these 
books  can  be  obtained  [downloaded]  for  Free  and  without 
cost 


Nfiw  Tfistamfint 


E 


Arabic  New  Testament  -       P  d  lt  #  1 


B 


Arabic  New  Testament  -      P  d  lt  #  2 


CT 


Arabic  New  Testament  -       Pait  #3 


GREEKNEWTESTAMENT 

NOUVEAU  TESTAMENT  GRECQUE 


New  Testament-  CLASSIC  KOINE  -  GREC  ANCIENT  - 


ISEWTESTAlVENr  in  LATIN 

NOUVEAU  TESTAMENT  -LATIN 


Telecharaez  d  o  u  r  en  a  r  r  i  v  e  r  au  oaaes  IGratuit-evidement) 


Clicking  on  these  links  will  take  you  to  pages  where  these 
bookscan  beobtained  [downloaded]  [telecharaer]  forFreeand  withoutcost 


PERSIAN  -  PERSE  -  IRANIAN  -  FARSI 


Nfiw  Tfistamfint 


Nouveau  Testament  persan  [Perse  -  Iran]  - 
Farsca  Yeni  Ahit-  Nuevo  Testamento  pers  a 
Persisch  Neuen  Testament -Testamento  Novo  persa 


Persian  Farsi  New  Testament  -      P  art  #  1 


Persian  Iranian  New  Testament  -  P  art  #2 

i 

Persian  Farsi  New  Testament    -  Part  #3 

i  Z 

Persian  Iranian  New  Testament  -  Part  #4 
Persian  Farsi  New  Testament  -  Part  #5 
Persian  Iranian  New  Testament  -  Part  #6 


Persian  Farsi  New  Testament  -    Part  #7 


Persian  Iranian  New  Testament  -  Part  #8 


Persian  Farsi  New  Testament  -    Part  #9 


ETHIOPIC  -  AMHARIC 


Nfiw  Tfistamfint 


EthiODic  Amharic  New  Testament  -  Pdlt  #  1 


Ethiooic  Amharic  New  Testament  -  Pdlt  #2 


E thiODic  Amharic  New  Testament  -  Pdlt  #3 


EthiODic  Amharic  New  Testament  -  Pdlt  #4 


Ethiooic  Amharic  New  Testament  -  Pdlt  #5 


Ethiooic  Amharic  New  Testament  -  Pdlt  #6 


Ethiooic  Amharic  New  Testament  -  Pdlt  #7 


C licking  on  these  links  will  take  you  to  pages  where  these 
bookscan  be  obtained  fdownloadedlfor  Free  and  withoutcost 


■URKISH  NEWTESTAMENT 


Neuen  Testaments  in  turkischer 

Classic  Turkish  in  ARABIC  Scrio 


New  Testament  -  TURKISH  in  Arabic  Scrip 

Turkish  New  Testament  (Arabic  Scrip  /  Scriptj-Tiirk  Yeni  Ahit  - 
Neuen  Testaments  in  turkischer-  Nuevo  Testamento  en  turco- 
Nouveau  Testament  en  turc  ■  Nieuwe  Testament  in  hetTurks 


Classic  Turkish  New  Testament  - 

1          Classic 

Turkish  New  Testament  - 

I          Classic 

Turkish  New  Testament  - 

Classic 

Turkish  New  Testament  - 

Classic 

Turkish  New  Testament - 

Classic 

Turkish  New  Testament  - 

Classic 

Turkish  New  Testament - 

Classic 

Turkish  New  Testament  - 

1          Classic 

Turkish  New  Testament  - 

1        Classic 

Turkish  New  Testament  - 

Classic 

Turkish  New  Testament  - 

Classic  Turkish  New  Testament  - 

Part#1 


Part#2 


Part#3 


Part#4 


Part#5 


Part#6 


Part#7 


Part#8 


Part#  9 


Part#  1 


U 


Part#11 


Part#  12 


NOUVEAU  TESTAMENT HONGROIS  -  HONGRIE 


HUNGARIAN  N.T.  Matthew  -    #1 


hungarian  -  II  Thes saloiiians -  #14 


HUNGARIAN  N.T.  Marc 


HUNGARIAN- 1  Timothy-*  15 


HUNGARIAN  N.T.   Luke 


HUNGARIAN  N.T.  J  ohn 


-#4 


HUNGARIAN  N.T.    Acts 


-#5 


HUNGARIAN  N.T.   Romans     -#6 


HUNGARIAN- 1 Corinthians  -#7 


HUNGARIAN- II  Corinthians  - #8 


HUNGARIAN-  Galatians  -    #9 

■ 


HUNGARIAN- E phesians  -#10 

■ 


HUNGARIAN -Philippians  -#11 


HUNGARIAN -Colossians  -#12 
■ 


HUNGARIAN  - 1  Thessalonians  -  #  13 


HUNGARIAN-  II  Timothy-  #16 


HUNGARIAN  N.T.TITUS  -#17 


HUNGARIAN  -Philemon-*  18 


HUNGARIAN  -Hebrews-  #19 


HUNGARIAN -James  -  #20 


HUNGARIAN- 1  Peter  -#21 


HUNGARIAN- II  Peter  -#22 


HUNGARIAN- 1-3  J  ohn -#23 


HUNGARIAN  N.T.  J  ude 


HUNGARIAN  -Revelation  -#25 


Clicking  on  these  links  will  take  you  to  pages  where  these 
books  can  beobtained  [downloaded]forFreeand  withoutcost 


C licking  on  these  links  will  take  you  to  pages  where  these 
bookscan  be  obtained  fdownloadedl for  F ree  and  without 


Classic  Tamil  New  Testament 

Neues  Testament  des  Tamil  -Tamil  dilinde  yeni  vasiyetname 

Nieuwe  Testament  in  het  Tamil-taal  - 

An  accurate  &  lasting  translation 


TAMIL  (Tamou)  INDIA  New  Testament 


Part#l 


TAMIL  (Tamou)  INDIA  New  Testament 


TAMIL  (Tamou)  INDIA  New  Testament 


TAMIL  (Tamou)  INDIA  New  Testament 


TAMIL  (Tamou)  INDIA  New  Testament 


TAMIL  (Tamou)  INDIA  New  Testament 


TAMIL  (Tamou)  INDIA  New  Testam 


TAMIL  (Tamou)  INDIA  New  Testament 


TAMIL  (Tamou)  INDIA  New  Testament 


TAMIL  NT-Part#13 


TAMIL  NT-Part#15 


TAMIL  NT-Part#14 


TAMIL  NT-Part#16 


Clickto  goto  pages  where  books  can  beobtained  [downloaded]-  Free 


i 


KAREN  (Sgau)NEWTESTAMENT 


New  Testament 


3 


URDU  -  PAKISTAN  /  INDIA 


'ew  Testament 


URDU  New  Testament- P  art#l 


H 


rt#2  [T 


URDU  New  Testament  -  P  a 


URDU  New  Testament- P  art  #3 


E 


URDU  New  Testament 


-Part#4 


HINDI  ■  HINDUSTANI  New  Testament 


O 


B 


TELEGU  New  Testament 


n 


TAMIL  New  Testament 


KAREN  New  Testament 


BURMA  MYANMAR  New  Testament 


ASSAMESE  New  Testament 


Chinese  New  Testament 


GUI  ARAT  NewTestamenl 


Sanscrit  Sanskrit  New  Testament 


Anc ient  G reek  New  Testament 

Indonesia  New  Testament 

Arabic  New  Testament 


T 


I  I 


izerbanan  Azan  Azen  New  Testamen 


Clicking  on  these  links  will  take  you  to  pages  where  these 
bookscan  be  obtained  fdownloadedl for  F ree  and  without 


BURMA  MYANMAR  Part#13 


BURMA  MYANMAR  Part#15 


BURMA  MYANMAR \M  Part#14 


BURMA  MYANMAR 


FJ  Part#16 


Click  to  goto  pages  where  books  can  be  obtained  [downloaded]-Free 


Clicking  on  these  links  will  take  you  to  pages  where  these 
books  can  beobtained  [downloaded]forFreeand  withoutcost 


MODERN  GREEKNEWTESTAMENT 


Clicking  on  these  links  will  take  you  to  pages  where  these 
books  can  beobtained  [downloadedl  for  F ree  and  without cost 


20  seconds  for  Fellow  Christians  -  Dear  Lord, 

Thank  you  thatthis  PDF  Ebook 

has  been  released  s  o  that  we  are  able 

to  learn  more  about  you  and  wiser  versions. 

Please  help  itto  have  wide  circulation 

Please  help  the  people  responsible  for 

making  this  Ebook  available. 

Please  help  them  to  be  able  to  have  more 

resources  available  to  help  others. 

Please  help  them  to  have  all  the  resources, 

the  funds,  the  strength  and  the  time  that  they 

need  and  ask  for  in  order  to  be  able 

to  keep  working  for  You. 

I  pray  that  you  would  encourage  them  and 

that  you  protect  them  physically  and 

spiritually,  and  the  work  &  ministry  that 

they  are  engaged  in. 

I  pray  that  you  would  protect  them  from  the 
Spiritual  or  other  Forces  that  could  harm  them 
or  their  work  and  projects,  or  slowthem  down. 

Please  help  them  to  find  Godly  friends  who 

are  able  to  help.  Provide  helpful  transportation 

for  their  consistent  use. 

Remind  me  to  pray  for  them  often  as  this 

will  help  and  encourage  them. 


Please  give  them  your  wisdom  and 
understanding  sothey  can  better  followyou, 
and  I  ask  you  to  do 
these  things  in  the  name  of  Jesus,  Amen,